From 35bdd3e84968c352bf52e74e5ec26f4df2814243 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 01/32] chore: update docs/dyn/index.md --- docs/dyn/index.md | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) diff --git a/docs/dyn/index.md b/docs/dyn/index.md index 53dc59ee5f..b411124e9c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/index.md +++ b/docs/dyn/index.md @@ -1090,6 +1090,10 @@ * [v1beta1](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/runtimeconfig_v1beta1.html) +## saasservicemgmt +* [v1beta1](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.html) + + ## safebrowsing * [v4](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/safebrowsing_v4.html) * [v5](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/safebrowsing_v5.html) From 1a82f1d99f1e8f6c682d52b82a144fe1e0afff7d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 02/32] feat(aiplatform): update the api #### aiplatform:v1 The following keys were added: - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1CustomJobSpec.properties.pscInterfaceConfig.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1FunctionDeclaration.properties.parametersJsonSchema.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1FunctionDeclaration.properties.responseJsonSchema.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1GenerationConfig.properties.responseJsonSchema.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PersistentResource.properties.pscInterfaceConfig.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PipelineJob.properties.pscInterfaceConfig.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PscInterfaceConfig (Total Keys: 3) #### aiplatform:v1beta1 The following keys were added: - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.memories.resources.operations.methods.cancel (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.memories.resources.operations.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.memories.resources.operations.methods.get (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.memories.resources.operations.methods.list (Total Keys: 18) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.memories.resources.operations.methods.wait (Total Keys: 14) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.sessions.resources.operations.methods.cancel (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.sessions.resources.operations.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.sessions.resources.operations.methods.get (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.sessions.resources.operations.methods.list (Total Keys: 18) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.reasoningEngines.resources.sessions.resources.operations.methods.wait (Total Keys: 14) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1FunctionDeclaration.properties.parametersJsonSchema.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1FunctionDeclaration.properties.responseJsonSchema.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GenerationConfig.properties.responseJsonSchema.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpus.properties.corpusTypeConfig.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfig (Total Keys: 9) - schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1VertexRagStore.properties.storeContext.type (Total Keys: 1) --- docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.endpoints.html | 9 + ..._v1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html | 12 + ...form_v1.projects.locations.customJobs.html | 12 + ...tform_v1.projects.locations.endpoints.html | 9 + ...ts.locations.hyperparameterTuningJobs.html | 12 + ...latform_v1.projects.locations.nasJobs.html | 24 ++ ...rojects.locations.persistentResources.html | 12 + ...rm_v1.projects.locations.pipelineJobs.html | 12 + ....projects.locations.publishers.models.html | 9 + ...tform_v1.projects.locations.schedules.html | 18 + docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.publishers.models.html | 9 + docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.endpoints.html | 12 + ...ta1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html | 18 + ...m_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html | 16 + ..._v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html | 12 + ...v1beta1.projects.locations.extensions.html | 10 + ...aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html | 1 + ....projects.locations.publishers.models.html | 12 + ...v1beta1.projects.locations.ragCorpora.html | 48 +++ ...1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html | 5 + ...s.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html | 91 +++++ ....reasoningEngines.memories.operations.html | 268 +++++++++++++ ...s.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.html | 5 + ....reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.html | 268 +++++++++++++ .../aiplatform_v1beta1.publishers.models.html | 12 + .../documents/aiplatform.v1.json | 37 +- .../documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json | 360 +++++++++++++++++- 27 files changed, 1311 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.html diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.endpoints.html index 060fa9b34f..560f30b1d7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.endpoints.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.endpoints.html @@ -257,6 +257,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -425,6 +426,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -464,6 +466,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -688,6 +691,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -877,6 +881,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -916,6 +921,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1367,6 +1373,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1556,6 +1563,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1595,6 +1603,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html index 17b37b646b..64ee3c1928 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html @@ -271,6 +271,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -310,6 +311,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -585,6 +587,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -624,6 +627,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -924,6 +928,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -963,6 +968,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1249,6 +1255,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1288,6 +1295,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1582,6 +1590,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1621,6 +1630,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1897,6 +1907,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1936,6 +1947,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.customJobs.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.customJobs.html index a0326dcc67..34be1872e7 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.customJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.customJobs.html @@ -169,6 +169,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -294,6 +297,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -461,6 +467,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -599,6 +608,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.endpoints.html index a4e7218313..405b58a505 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.endpoints.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.endpoints.html @@ -310,6 +310,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -478,6 +479,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -517,6 +519,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1620,6 +1623,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1809,6 +1813,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1848,6 +1853,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -3718,6 +3724,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -3907,6 +3914,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -3946,6 +3954,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.hyperparameterTuningJobs.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.hyperparameterTuningJobs.html index 915c39d98a..10d457e989 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.hyperparameterTuningJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.hyperparameterTuningJobs.html @@ -272,6 +272,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -532,6 +535,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -834,6 +840,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1107,6 +1116,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.nasJobs.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.nasJobs.html index e99142d599..a521dbc1fe 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.nasJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.nasJobs.html @@ -225,6 +225,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -316,6 +319,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -495,6 +501,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -586,6 +595,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -807,6 +819,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -898,6 +913,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1090,6 +1108,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1181,6 +1202,9 @@

Method Details

"network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the Job should be peered. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the job is not peered with any network. "persistentResourceId": "A String", # Optional. The ID of the PersistentResource in the same Project and Location which to run If this is specified, the job will be run on existing machines held by the PersistentResource instead of on-demand short-live machines. The network and CMEK configs on the job should be consistent with those on the PersistentResource, otherwise, the job will be rejected. "protectedArtifactLocationId": "A String", # The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.persistentResources.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.persistentResources.html index 2b54cbea41..c2fea9beaf 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.persistentResources.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.persistentResources.html @@ -138,6 +138,9 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Resource name of a PersistentResource. "network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to peered with Vertex AI to host the persistent resources. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the resources aren't peered with any network. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PersistentResource. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved IP ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this persistent resource. If set, we will deploy the persistent resource within the provided IP ranges. Otherwise, the persistent resource is deployed to any IP ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -299,6 +302,9 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Resource name of a PersistentResource. "network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to peered with Vertex AI to host the persistent resources. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the resources aren't peered with any network. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PersistentResource. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved IP ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this persistent resource. If set, we will deploy the persistent resource within the provided IP ranges. Otherwise, the persistent resource is deployed to any IP ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -401,6 +407,9 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Resource name of a PersistentResource. "network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to peered with Vertex AI to host the persistent resources. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the resources aren't peered with any network. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PersistentResource. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved IP ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this persistent resource. If set, we will deploy the persistent resource within the provided IP ranges. Otherwise, the persistent resource is deployed to any IP ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -509,6 +518,9 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # Immutable. Resource name of a PersistentResource. "network": "A String", # Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to peered with Vertex AI to host the persistent resources. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the resources aren't peered with any network. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PersistentResource. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # Optional. A list of names for the reserved IP ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this persistent resource. If set, we will deploy the persistent resource within the provided IP ranges. Otherwise, the persistent resource is deployed to any IP ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.pipelineJobs.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.pipelineJobs.html index ce27202be9..95a122891d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.pipelineJobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.pipelineJobs.html @@ -416,6 +416,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -641,6 +644,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -907,6 +913,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1146,6 +1155,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html index 3be667cda0..d0773660fc 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html @@ -261,6 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -429,6 +430,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -468,6 +470,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -692,6 +695,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -881,6 +885,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -920,6 +925,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1599,6 +1605,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1788,6 +1795,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1827,6 +1835,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.schedules.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.schedules.html index 92048c37b5..c538330dd2 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.schedules.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.projects.locations.schedules.html @@ -379,6 +379,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -699,6 +702,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1061,6 +1067,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1395,6 +1404,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -1733,6 +1745,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], @@ -2054,6 +2069,9 @@

Method Details

"a_key": "", # Properties of the object. }, "preflightValidations": True or False, # Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation. + "pscInterfaceConfig": { # Configuration for PSC-I. # Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob. + "networkAttachment": "A String", # Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I. + }, "reservedIpRanges": [ # A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range']. "A String", ], diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.publishers.models.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.publishers.models.html index d4e718b637..bade9af886 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.publishers.models.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1.publishers.models.html @@ -255,6 +255,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -423,6 +424,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -462,6 +464,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -686,6 +689,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -875,6 +879,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -914,6 +919,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1916,6 +1922,7 @@

Method Details

"maxOutputTokens": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of output tokens to generate per message. "mediaResolution": "A String", # Optional. If specified, the media resolution specified will be used. "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -2105,6 +2112,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -2144,6 +2152,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.endpoints.html index 0c1be0b8e7..737c0bf640 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.endpoints.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.endpoints.html @@ -264,6 +264,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -434,6 +435,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -473,6 +475,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -569,6 +572,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -708,6 +712,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -899,6 +904,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -938,6 +944,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1034,6 +1041,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1405,6 +1413,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1596,6 +1605,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1635,6 +1645,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1731,6 +1742,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html index c0177219db..b07f1415ef 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.cachedContents.html @@ -275,6 +275,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -314,6 +315,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -410,6 +412,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -599,6 +602,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -638,6 +642,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -734,6 +739,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -948,6 +954,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -987,6 +994,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1083,6 +1091,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1283,6 +1292,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1322,6 +1332,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1418,6 +1429,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1626,6 +1638,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1665,6 +1678,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1761,6 +1775,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1951,6 +1966,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1990,6 +2006,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -2086,6 +2103,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html index 02e564f9f8..bfd18f8d94 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html @@ -216,6 +216,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -408,6 +409,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -447,6 +449,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -543,6 +546,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -616,6 +620,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -808,6 +813,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -847,6 +853,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -943,6 +950,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1065,6 +1073,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1257,6 +1266,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1296,6 +1306,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1392,6 +1403,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1465,6 +1477,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1657,6 +1670,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1696,6 +1710,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1792,6 +1807,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html index df2f65b66f..0b1659e66e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.endpoints.html @@ -326,6 +326,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -496,6 +497,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -535,6 +537,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -631,6 +634,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1808,6 +1812,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1999,6 +2004,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -2038,6 +2044,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -2134,6 +2141,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -4098,6 +4106,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -4289,6 +4298,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -4328,6 +4338,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -4424,6 +4435,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.extensions.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.extensions.html index fc782d302d..5d7a88e828 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.extensions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.extensions.html @@ -262,6 +262,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -301,6 +302,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, "operationId": "A String", # Operation ID that uniquely identifies the operations among the extension. See: "Operation Object" in https://swagger.io/specification/. This field is parsed from the OpenAPI spec. For HTTP extensions, if it does not exist in the spec, we will generate one from the HTTP method and path. }, @@ -435,6 +437,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -474,6 +477,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, "operationId": "A String", # Operation ID that uniquely identifies the operations among the extension. See: "Operation Object" in https://swagger.io/specification/. This field is parsed from the OpenAPI spec. For HTTP extensions, if it does not exist in the spec, we will generate one from the HTTP method and path. }, @@ -647,6 +651,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -686,6 +691,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, "operationId": "A String", # Operation ID that uniquely identifies the operations among the extension. See: "Operation Object" in https://swagger.io/specification/. This field is parsed from the OpenAPI spec. For HTTP extensions, if it does not exist in the spec, we will generate one from the HTTP method and path. }, @@ -837,6 +843,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -876,6 +883,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, "operationId": "A String", # Operation ID that uniquely identifies the operations among the extension. See: "Operation Object" in https://swagger.io/specification/. This field is parsed from the OpenAPI spec. For HTTP extensions, if it does not exist in the spec, we will generate one from the HTTP method and path. }, @@ -1009,6 +1017,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1048,6 +1057,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, "operationId": "A String", # Operation ID that uniquely identifies the operations among the extension. See: "Operation Object" in https://swagger.io/specification/. This field is parsed from the OpenAPI spec. For HTTP extensions, if it does not exist in the spec, we will generate one from the HTTP method and path. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html index 8667feb248..711718edbd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.html @@ -422,6 +422,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, } diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html index 6265695604..9990bac54f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.publishers.models.html @@ -280,6 +280,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -450,6 +451,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -489,6 +491,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -585,6 +588,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -796,6 +800,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -987,6 +992,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -1026,6 +1032,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1122,6 +1129,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -1808,6 +1816,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -1999,6 +2008,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -2038,6 +2048,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -2134,6 +2145,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.ragCorpora.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.ragCorpora.html index f0b03d99e3..6241a2ae25 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.ragCorpora.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.ragCorpora.html @@ -125,6 +125,18 @@

Method Details

"errorStatus": "A String", # Output only. Only when the `state` field is ERROR. "state": "A String", # Output only. RagCorpus life state. }, + "corpusTypeConfig": { # The config for the corpus type of the RagCorpus. # Optional. The corpus type config of the RagCorpus. + "documentCorpus": { # Config for the document corpus. # Optional. Config for the document corpus. + }, + "memoryCorpus": { # Config for the memory corpus. # Optional. Config for the memory corpus. + "llmParser": { # Specifies the LLM parsing for RagFiles. # The LLM parser to use for the memory corpus. + "customParsingPrompt": "A String", # The prompt to use for parsing. If not specified, a default prompt will be used. + "globalMaxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute in this project. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If this value is not specified, max_parsing_requests_per_min will be used by indexing pipeline job as the global limit. + "maxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If unspecified, a default value of 5000 QPM would be used. + "modelName": "A String", # The name of a LLM model used for parsing. Format: * `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/publishers/{publisher}/models/{model}` + }, + }, + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this RagCorpus was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the RagCorpus. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the RagCorpus. The name can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters. @@ -346,6 +358,18 @@

Method Details

"errorStatus": "A String", # Output only. Only when the `state` field is ERROR. "state": "A String", # Output only. RagCorpus life state. }, + "corpusTypeConfig": { # The config for the corpus type of the RagCorpus. # Optional. The corpus type config of the RagCorpus. + "documentCorpus": { # Config for the document corpus. # Optional. Config for the document corpus. + }, + "memoryCorpus": { # Config for the memory corpus. # Optional. Config for the memory corpus. + "llmParser": { # Specifies the LLM parsing for RagFiles. # The LLM parser to use for the memory corpus. + "customParsingPrompt": "A String", # The prompt to use for parsing. If not specified, a default prompt will be used. + "globalMaxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute in this project. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If this value is not specified, max_parsing_requests_per_min will be used by indexing pipeline job as the global limit. + "maxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If unspecified, a default value of 5000 QPM would be used. + "modelName": "A String", # The name of a LLM model used for parsing. Format: * `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/publishers/{publisher}/models/{model}` + }, + }, + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this RagCorpus was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the RagCorpus. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the RagCorpus. The name can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters. @@ -508,6 +532,18 @@

Method Details

"errorStatus": "A String", # Output only. Only when the `state` field is ERROR. "state": "A String", # Output only. RagCorpus life state. }, + "corpusTypeConfig": { # The config for the corpus type of the RagCorpus. # Optional. The corpus type config of the RagCorpus. + "documentCorpus": { # Config for the document corpus. # Optional. Config for the document corpus. + }, + "memoryCorpus": { # Config for the memory corpus. # Optional. Config for the memory corpus. + "llmParser": { # Specifies the LLM parsing for RagFiles. # The LLM parser to use for the memory corpus. + "customParsingPrompt": "A String", # The prompt to use for parsing. If not specified, a default prompt will be used. + "globalMaxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute in this project. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If this value is not specified, max_parsing_requests_per_min will be used by indexing pipeline job as the global limit. + "maxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If unspecified, a default value of 5000 QPM would be used. + "modelName": "A String", # The name of a LLM model used for parsing. Format: * `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/publishers/{publisher}/models/{model}` + }, + }, + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this RagCorpus was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the RagCorpus. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the RagCorpus. The name can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters. @@ -676,6 +712,18 @@

Method Details

"errorStatus": "A String", # Output only. Only when the `state` field is ERROR. "state": "A String", # Output only. RagCorpus life state. }, + "corpusTypeConfig": { # The config for the corpus type of the RagCorpus. # Optional. The corpus type config of the RagCorpus. + "documentCorpus": { # Config for the document corpus. # Optional. Config for the document corpus. + }, + "memoryCorpus": { # Config for the memory corpus. # Optional. Config for the memory corpus. + "llmParser": { # Specifies the LLM parsing for RagFiles. # The LLM parser to use for the memory corpus. + "customParsingPrompt": "A String", # The prompt to use for parsing. If not specified, a default prompt will be used. + "globalMaxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute in this project. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If this value is not specified, max_parsing_requests_per_min will be used by indexing pipeline job as the global limit. + "maxParsingRequestsPerMin": 42, # The maximum number of requests the job is allowed to make to the LLM model per minute. Consult https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/generative-ai/docs/quotas and your document size to set an appropriate value here. If unspecified, a default value of 5000 QPM would be used. + "modelName": "A String", # The name of a LLM model used for parsing. Format: * `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/publishers/{publisher}/models/{model}` + }, + }, + }, "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when this RagCorpus was created. "description": "A String", # Optional. The description of the RagCorpus. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the RagCorpus. The name can be up to 128 characters long and can consist of any UTF-8 characters. diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html index 211895e8bc..5c6d15ea05 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.html @@ -74,6 +74,11 @@

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . reasoningEngines

Instance Methods

+

+ memories() +

+

Returns the memories Resource.

+

operations()

diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..77df652d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.html @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + +

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . reasoningEngines . memories

+

Instance Methods

+

+ operations() +

+

Returns the operations Resource.

+ +

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() + 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..927bd4ab08 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.html @@ -0,0 +1,268 @@ + + + +

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . reasoningEngines . memories . operations

+

Instance Methods

+

+ cancel(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.

+

+ list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ wait(name, timeout=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.

+

Method Details

+
+ cancel(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to be cancelled. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ close() + 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to be deleted. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation's parent resource. (required)
+  filter: string, The standard list filter.
+  pageSize: integer, The standard list page size.
+  pageToken: string, The standard list page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Operations.ListOperations.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # The standard List next-page token.
+  "operations": [ # A list of operations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+      "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+      "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+        "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+        "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+          {
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+      },
+      "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+      "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ wait(name, timeout=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to wait on. (required)
+  timeout: string, The maximum duration to wait before timing out. If left blank, the wait will be at most the time permitted by the underlying HTTP/RPC protocol. If RPC context deadline is also specified, the shorter one will be used.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.html index baec0ddb2a..4f460e6ffd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.html @@ -79,6 +79,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the events Resource.

+

+ operations() +

+

Returns the operations Resource.

+

appendEvent(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

Appends an event to a given session.

diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3bdc84d168 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.html @@ -0,0 +1,268 @@ + + + +

Vertex AI API . projects . locations . reasoningEngines . sessions . operations

+

Instance Methods

+

+ cancel(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.

+

+ list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ wait(name, timeout=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.

+

Method Details

+
+ cancel(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to be cancelled. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ close() + 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ delete(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to be deleted. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ list(name, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation's parent resource. (required)
+  filter: string, The standard list filter.
+  pageSize: integer, The standard list page size.
+  pageToken: string, The standard list page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Operations.ListOperations.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # The standard List next-page token.
+  "operations": [ # A list of operations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+      "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+      "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+        "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+        "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+          {
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+      },
+      "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+      "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ wait(name, timeout=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The name of the operation resource to wait on. (required)
+  timeout: string, The maximum duration to wait before timing out. If left blank, the wait will be at most the time permitted by the underlying HTTP/RPC protocol. If RPC context deadline is also specified, the shorter one will be used.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.publishers.models.html b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.publishers.models.html index 89e2032935..1c8e3edf18 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.publishers.models.html +++ b/docs/dyn/aiplatform_v1beta1.publishers.models.html @@ -268,6 +268,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -438,6 +439,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -477,6 +479,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -573,6 +576,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -712,6 +716,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -903,6 +908,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -942,6 +948,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -1038,6 +1045,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, @@ -2556,6 +2564,7 @@

Method Details

"featureSelectionPreference": "A String", # Required. Feature selection preference. }, "presencePenalty": 3.14, # Optional. Positive penalties. + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set. "responseLogprobs": True or False, # Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response. "responseMimeType": "A String", # Optional. Output response mimetype of the generated candidate text. Supported mimetype: - `text/plain`: (default) Text output. - `application/json`: JSON response in the candidates. The model needs to be prompted to output the appropriate response type, otherwise the behavior is undefined. This is a preview feature. "responseModalities": [ # Optional. The modalities of the response. @@ -2747,6 +2756,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "parametersJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { "type": "object", "properties": { "name": { "type": "string" }, "age": { "type": "integer" } }, "additionalProperties": false, "required": ["name", "age"], "propertyOrdering": ["name", "age"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`. "response": { # Schema is used to define the format of input/output data. Represents a select subset of an [OpenAPI 3.0 schema object](https://spec.openapis.org/oas/v3.0.3#schema-object). More fields may be added in the future as needed. # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function. "additionalProperties": "", # Optional. Can either be a boolean or an object; controls the presence of additional properties. "anyOf": [ # Optional. The value should be validated against any (one or more) of the subschemas in the list. @@ -2786,6 +2796,7 @@

Method Details

"title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the Schema. "type": "A String", # Optional. The type of the data. }, + "responseJsonSchema": "", # Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`. }, ], "googleSearch": { # GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. # Optional. GoogleSearch tool type. Tool to support Google Search in Model. Powered by Google. @@ -2882,6 +2893,7 @@

Method Details

"topK": 42, # Optional. The number of contexts to retrieve. }, "similarityTopK": 42, # Optional. Number of top k results to return from the selected corpora. + "storeContext": True or False, # Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions. "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold. }, }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json index d1ecace824..4abd0be028 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1.json @@ -20167,7 +20167,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250527", +"revision": "20250529", "rootUrl": "https://aiplatform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudAiLargeModelsVisionGenerateVideoResponse": { @@ -23544,6 +23544,10 @@ "description": "The ID of the location to store protected artifacts. e.g. us-central1. Populate only when the location is different than CustomJob location. List of supported locations: https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/locations", "type": "string" }, +"pscInterfaceConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PscInterfaceConfig", +"description": "Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for CustomJob." +}, "reservedIpRanges": { "description": "Optional. A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this job. If set, we will deploy the job within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range'].", "items": { @@ -28044,9 +28048,17 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema", "description": "Optional. Describes the parameters to this function in JSON Schema Object format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Parameter Object. string Key: the name of the parameter. Parameter names are case sensitive. Schema Value: the Schema defining the type used for the parameter. For function with no parameters, this can be left unset. Parameter names must start with a letter or an underscore and must only contain chars a-z, A-Z, 0-9, or underscores with a maximum length of 64. Example with 1 required and 1 optional parameter: type: OBJECT properties: param1: type: STRING param2: type: INTEGER required: - param1" }, +"parametersJsonSchema": { +"description": "Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { \"type\": \"object\", \"properties\": { \"name\": { \"type\": \"string\" }, \"age\": { \"type\": \"integer\" } }, \"additionalProperties\": false, \"required\": [\"name\", \"age\"], \"propertyOrdering\": [\"name\", \"age\"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`.", +"type": "any" +}, "response": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1Schema", "description": "Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function." +}, +"responseJsonSchema": { +"description": "Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`.", +"type": "any" } }, "type": "object" @@ -28440,6 +28452,10 @@ "format": "float", "type": "number" }, +"responseJsonSchema": { +"description": "Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.", +"type": "any" +}, "responseLogprobs": { "description": "Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.", "type": "boolean" @@ -34503,6 +34519,10 @@ false "description": "Optional. The full name of the Compute Engine [network](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to peered with Vertex AI to host the persistent resources. For example, `projects/12345/global/networks/myVPC`. [Format](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/networks/insert) is of the form `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. Where {project} is a project number, as in `12345`, and {network} is a network name. To specify this field, you must have already [configured VPC Network Peering for Vertex AI](https://cloud.google.com/vertex-ai/docs/general/vpc-peering). If this field is left unspecified, the resources aren't peered with any network.", "type": "string" }, +"pscInterfaceConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PscInterfaceConfig", +"description": "Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PersistentResource." +}, "reservedIpRanges": { "description": "Optional. A list of names for the reserved IP ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this persistent resource. If set, we will deploy the persistent resource within the provided IP ranges. Otherwise, the persistent resource is deployed to any IP ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range'].", "items": { @@ -34636,6 +34656,10 @@ false "description": "Optional. Whether to do component level validations before job creation.", "type": "boolean" }, +"pscInterfaceConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PscInterfaceConfig", +"description": "Optional. Configuration for PSC-I for PipelineJob." +}, "reservedIpRanges": { "description": "A list of names for the reserved ip ranges under the VPC network that can be used for this Pipeline Job's workload. If set, we will deploy the Pipeline Job's workload within the provided ip ranges. Otherwise, the job will be deployed to any ip ranges under the provided VPC network. Example: ['vertex-ai-ip-range'].", "items": { @@ -35537,6 +35561,17 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PscInterfaceConfig": { +"description": "Configuration for PSC-I.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PscInterfaceConfig", +"properties": { +"networkAttachment": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the Compute Engine [network attachment](https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/about-network-attachments) to attach to the resource within the region and user project. To specify this field, you must have already [created a network attachment] (https://cloud.google.com/vpc/docs/create-manage-network-attachments#create-network-attachments). This field is only used for resources using PSC-I.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PublisherModel": { "description": "A Model Garden Publisher Model.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1PublisherModel", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json index 977630c639..1bc5890f0a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/aiplatform.v1beta1.json @@ -19013,6 +19013,161 @@ } }, "resources": { +"memories": { +"resources": { +"operations": { +"methods": { +"cancel": { +"description": "Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/memories/{memoriesId}/operations/{operationsId}:cancel", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.cancel", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource to be cancelled.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/memories/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:cancel", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/memories/{memoriesId}/operations/{operationsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource to be deleted.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/memories/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/memories/{memoriesId}/operations/{operationsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/memories/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/memories/{memoriesId}/operations", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "The standard list filter.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation's parent resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/memories/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "The standard list page size.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "The standard list page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}/operations", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningListOperationsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"wait": { +"description": "Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/memories/{memoriesId}/operations/{operationsId}:wait", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.memories.operations.wait", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource to wait on.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/memories/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"timeout": { +"description": "The maximum duration to wait before timing out. If left blank, the wait will be at most the time permitted by the underlying HTTP/RPC protocol. If RPC context deadline is also specified, the shorter one will be used.", +"format": "google-duration", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:wait", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +} +} +}, "operations": { "methods": { "cancel": { @@ -19548,6 +19703,157 @@ ] } } +}, +"operations": { +"methods": { +"cancel": { +"description": "Starts asynchronous cancellation on a long-running operation. The server makes a best effort to cancel the operation, but success is not guaranteed. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Clients can use Operations.GetOperation or other methods to check whether the cancellation succeeded or whether the operation completed despite cancellation. On successful cancellation, the operation is not deleted; instead, it becomes an operation with an Operation.error value with a google.rpc.Status.code of `1`, corresponding to `Code.CANCELLED`.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/sessions/{sessionsId}/operations/{operationsId}:cancel", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.cancel", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource to be cancelled.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/sessions/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:cancel", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes a long-running operation. This method indicates that the client is no longer interested in the operation result. It does not cancel the operation. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/sessions/{sessionsId}/operations/{operationsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource to be deleted.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/sessions/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets the latest state of a long-running operation. Clients can use this method to poll the operation result at intervals as recommended by the API service.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/sessions/{sessionsId}/operations/{operationsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/sessions/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists operations that match the specified filter in the request. If the server doesn't support this method, it returns `UNIMPLEMENTED`.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/sessions/{sessionsId}/operations", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "The standard list filter.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation's parent resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/sessions/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "The standard list page size.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "The standard list page token.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}/operations", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningListOperationsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"wait": { +"description": "Waits until the specified long-running operation is done or reaches at most a specified timeout, returning the latest state. If the operation is already done, the latest state is immediately returned. If the timeout specified is greater than the default HTTP/RPC timeout, the HTTP/RPC timeout is used. If the server does not support this method, it returns `google.rpc.Code.UNIMPLEMENTED`. Note that this method is on a best-effort basis. It may return the latest state before the specified timeout (including immediately), meaning even an immediate response is no guarantee that the operation is done.", +"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/reasoningEngines/{reasoningEnginesId}/sessions/{sessionsId}/operations/{operationsId}:wait", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "aiplatform.projects.locations.reasoningEngines.sessions.operations.wait", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "The name of the operation resource to wait on.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/reasoningEngines/[^/]+/sessions/[^/]+/operations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"timeout": { +"description": "The maximum duration to wait before timing out. If left blank, the wait will be at most the time permitted by the underlying HTTP/RPC protocol. If RPC context deadline is also specified, the shorter one will be used.", +"format": "google-duration", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:wait", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} } } } @@ -24013,7 +24319,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250527", +"revision": "20250529", "rootUrl": "https://aiplatform.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CloudAiLargeModelsVisionGenerateVideoResponse": { @@ -33415,9 +33721,17 @@ "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1Schema", "description": "Optional. Describes the parameters to this function in JSON Schema Object format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Parameter Object. string Key: the name of the parameter. Parameter names are case sensitive. Schema Value: the Schema defining the type used for the parameter. For function with no parameters, this can be left unset. Parameter names must start with a letter or an underscore and must only contain chars a-z, A-Z, 0-9, or underscores with a maximum length of 64. Example with 1 required and 1 optional parameter: type: OBJECT properties: param1: type: STRING param2: type: INTEGER required: - param1" }, +"parametersJsonSchema": { +"description": "Optional. Describes the parameters to the function in JSON Schema format. The schema must describe an object where the properties are the parameters to the function. For example: ``` { \"type\": \"object\", \"properties\": { \"name\": { \"type\": \"string\" }, \"age\": { \"type\": \"integer\" } }, \"additionalProperties\": false, \"required\": [\"name\", \"age\"], \"propertyOrdering\": [\"name\", \"age\"] } ``` This field is mutually exclusive with `parameters`.", +"type": "any" +}, "response": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1Schema", "description": "Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. Reflects the Open API 3.03 Response Object. The Schema defines the type used for the response value of the function." +}, +"responseJsonSchema": { +"description": "Optional. Describes the output from this function in JSON Schema format. The value specified by the schema is the response value of the function. This field is mutually exclusive with `response`.", +"type": "any" } }, "type": "object" @@ -33942,6 +34256,10 @@ "format": "float", "type": "number" }, +"responseJsonSchema": { +"description": "Optional. Output schema of the generated response. This is an alternative to `response_schema` that accepts [JSON Schema](https://json-schema.org/). If set, `response_schema` must be omitted, but `response_mime_type` is required. While the full JSON Schema may be sent, not all features are supported. Specifically, only the following properties are supported: - `$id` - `$defs` - `$ref` - `$anchor` - `type` - `format` - `title` - `description` - `enum` (for strings and numbers) - `items` - `prefixItems` - `minItems` - `maxItems` - `minimum` - `maximum` - `anyOf` - `oneOf` (interpreted the same as `anyOf`) - `properties` - `additionalProperties` - `required` The non-standard `propertyOrdering` property may also be set. Cyclic references are unrolled to a limited degree and, as such, may only be used within non-required properties. (Nullable properties are not sufficient.) If `$ref` is set on a sub-schema, no other properties, except for than those starting as a `$`, may be set.", +"type": "any" +}, "responseLogprobs": { "description": "Optional. If true, export the logprobs results in response.", "type": "boolean" @@ -43506,6 +43824,10 @@ false "description": "Output only. RagCorpus state.", "readOnly": true }, +"corpusTypeConfig": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfig", +"description": "Optional. The corpus type config of the RagCorpus." +}, "createTime": { "description": "Output only. Timestamp when this RagCorpus was created.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -43562,6 +43884,38 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfig": { +"description": "The config for the corpus type of the RagCorpus.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfig", +"properties": { +"documentCorpus": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfigDocumentCorpus", +"description": "Optional. Config for the document corpus." +}, +"memoryCorpus": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfigMemoryCorpus", +"description": "Optional. Config for the memory corpus." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfigDocumentCorpus": { +"description": "Config for the document corpus.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfigDocumentCorpus", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfigMemoryCorpus": { +"description": "Config for the memory corpus.", +"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagCorpusCorpusTypeConfigMemoryCorpus", +"properties": { +"llmParser": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagFileParsingConfigLlmParser", +"description": "The LLM parser to use for the memory corpus." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagEmbeddingModelConfig": { "description": "Config for the embedding model to use for RAG.", "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1RagEmbeddingModelConfig", @@ -54842,6 +55196,10 @@ false "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, +"storeContext": { +"description": "Optional. Currently only supported for Gemini Multimodal Live API. In Gemini Multimodal Live API, if `store_context` bool is specified, Gemini will leverage it to automatically memorize the interactions between the client and Gemini, and retrieve context when needed to augment the response generation for users' ongoing and future interactions.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "vectorDistanceThreshold": { "deprecated": true, "description": "Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold.", From 55b8c990375c56ed28d3797f8deb152594becb8e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 03/32] feat(alloydb): update the api #### alloydb:v1alpha The following keys were added: - schemas.ConnectionPoolConfig.properties.poolerCount (Total Keys: 3) - schemas.ObservabilityInstanceConfig.properties.trackClientAddress.type (Total Keys: 1) #### alloydb:v1beta The following keys were added: - schemas.ConnectionPoolConfig.properties.poolerCount (Total Keys: 3) - schemas.ObservabilityInstanceConfig.properties.trackClientAddress.type (Total Keys: 1) --- ....projects.locations.clusters.instances.html | 10 ++++++++++ ....projects.locations.clusters.instances.html | 10 ++++++++++ .../discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json | 8 ++++---- .../documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json | 18 ++++++++++++++---- .../documents/alloydb.v1beta.json | 18 ++++++++++++++---- 5 files changed, 52 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html index 25ad882f79..7210e3c106 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1alpha.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -209,6 +210,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -331,6 +333,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -388,6 +391,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -601,6 +605,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -658,6 +663,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -831,6 +837,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -888,6 +895,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -999,6 +1007,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -1056,6 +1065,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html index 6a317c0baa..94d3754f04 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/alloydb_v1beta.projects.locations.clusters.instances.html @@ -152,6 +152,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -209,6 +210,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -330,6 +332,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -387,6 +390,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -599,6 +603,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -656,6 +661,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -828,6 +834,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -885,6 +892,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, @@ -995,6 +1003,7 @@

Method Details

"maxPreparedStatements": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of prepared statements allowed. MCP makes sure that any statement prepared by a client, up to this limit, is available on the backing server connection in transaction and statement pooling mode. Even if the statement was originally prepared on another server connection. Defaults to 0. "minPoolSize": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The minimum pool size. Defaults to 0. "poolMode": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The pool mode. Defaults to `POOL_MODE_TRANSACTION`. + "poolerCount": 42, # Output only. The number of running poolers per instance. "queryWaitTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables. "serverIdleTimeout": "A String", # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds a server is allowed to be idle before it is disconnected. 0 disables. "statsUsers": [ # Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The list of users that are allowed to connect to the MCP stats console. The users must exist in the database. @@ -1052,6 +1061,7 @@

Method Details

"queryPlansPerMinute": 42, # Number of query execution plans captured by Insights per minute for all queries combined. The default value is 200. Any integer between 0 to 200 is considered valid. "recordApplicationTags": True or False, # Record application tags for an instance. This flag is turned "off" by default. "trackActiveQueries": True or False, # Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is "off" by default. + "trackClientAddress": True or False, # Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is "off". "trackWaitEventTypes": True or False, # Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API. "trackWaitEvents": True or False, # Track wait events during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned "on" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json index 5ccd98f1aa..be73c6983a 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1.json @@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250522", +"revision": "20250529", "rootUrl": "https://alloydb.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedNetwork": { @@ -4384,7 +4384,7 @@ false, false, true, true, -false, +true, false, false, false, @@ -4625,7 +4625,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "resourceType": { -"description": "Required. The type of resource this ID is identifying. Ex redis.googleapis.com/Instance, redis.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Database, firestore.googleapis.com/Database, sqladmin.googleapis.com/Instance, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Cluster, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Instance REQUIRED Please refer go/condor-common-datamodel", +"description": "Required. The type of resource this ID is identifying. Ex redis.googleapis.com/Instance, redis.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Database, firestore.googleapis.com/Database, sqladmin.googleapis.com/Instance, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Cluster, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Instance oracledatabase.googleapis.com/cloudExadataInfrastructures oracledatabase.googleapis.com/cloudVmClusters oracledatabase.googleapis.com/autonomousDatabases REQUIRED Please refer go/condor-common-datamodel", "type": "string" }, "uniqueId": { @@ -4997,7 +4997,7 @@ false, false, true, true, -false, +true, false, false, false, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json index 2547c8fb33..84ac9eeb62 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1alpha.json @@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250522", +"revision": "20250529", "rootUrl": "https://alloydb.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedNetwork": { @@ -2389,6 +2389,12 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"poolerCount": { +"description": "Output only. The number of running poolers per instance.", +"format": "int32", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "integer" +}, "queryWaitTimeout": { "description": "Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables.", "type": "string" @@ -3521,6 +3527,10 @@ false "description": "Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is \"off\" by default.", "type": "boolean" }, +"trackClientAddress": { +"description": "Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is \"off\".", +"type": "boolean" +}, "trackWaitEventTypes": { "description": "Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned \"on\" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API.", "readOnly": true, @@ -4542,7 +4552,7 @@ false, false, true, true, -false, +true, false, false, false, @@ -4783,7 +4793,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "resourceType": { -"description": "Required. The type of resource this ID is identifying. Ex redis.googleapis.com/Instance, redis.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Database, firestore.googleapis.com/Database, sqladmin.googleapis.com/Instance, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Cluster, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Instance REQUIRED Please refer go/condor-common-datamodel", +"description": "Required. The type of resource this ID is identifying. Ex redis.googleapis.com/Instance, redis.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Database, firestore.googleapis.com/Database, sqladmin.googleapis.com/Instance, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Cluster, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Instance oracledatabase.googleapis.com/cloudExadataInfrastructures oracledatabase.googleapis.com/cloudVmClusters oracledatabase.googleapis.com/autonomousDatabases REQUIRED Please refer go/condor-common-datamodel", "type": "string" }, "uniqueId": { @@ -5155,7 +5165,7 @@ false, false, true, true, -false, +true, false, false, false, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json index d1d9dc0188..1203b835d7 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/alloydb.v1beta.json @@ -1619,7 +1619,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250522", +"revision": "20250529", "rootUrl": "https://alloydb.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuthorizedNetwork": { @@ -2370,6 +2370,12 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"poolerCount": { +"description": "Output only. The number of running poolers per instance.", +"format": "int32", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "integer" +}, "queryWaitTimeout": { "description": "Optional. Deprecated. Use 'flags' instead. The maximum number of seconds queries are allowed to spend waiting for execution. If the query is not assigned to a server during that time, the client is disconnected. 0 disables.", "type": "string" @@ -3497,6 +3503,10 @@ false "description": "Track actively running queries on the instance. If not set, this flag is \"off\" by default.", "type": "boolean" }, +"trackClientAddress": { +"description": "Track client address for an instance. If not set, default value is \"off\".", +"type": "boolean" +}, "trackWaitEventTypes": { "description": "Output only. Track wait event types during query execution for an instance. This flag is turned \"on\" by default but tracking is enabled only after observability enabled flag is also turned on. This is read-only flag and only modifiable by internal API.", "readOnly": true, @@ -4518,7 +4528,7 @@ false, false, true, true, -false, +true, false, false, false, @@ -4759,7 +4769,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "resourceType": { -"description": "Required. The type of resource this ID is identifying. Ex redis.googleapis.com/Instance, redis.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Database, firestore.googleapis.com/Database, sqladmin.googleapis.com/Instance, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Cluster, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Instance REQUIRED Please refer go/condor-common-datamodel", +"description": "Required. The type of resource this ID is identifying. Ex redis.googleapis.com/Instance, redis.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Cluster, alloydb.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Instance, spanner.googleapis.com/Database, firestore.googleapis.com/Database, sqladmin.googleapis.com/Instance, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Cluster, bigtableadmin.googleapis.com/Instance oracledatabase.googleapis.com/cloudExadataInfrastructures oracledatabase.googleapis.com/cloudVmClusters oracledatabase.googleapis.com/autonomousDatabases REQUIRED Please refer go/condor-common-datamodel", "type": "string" }, "uniqueId": { @@ -5131,7 +5141,7 @@ false, false, true, true, -false, +true, false, false, false, From 59cc4da630b174bdec15bd77271a534546a1fc34 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 04/32] feat(cloudscheduler): update the api #### cloudscheduler:v1 The following keys were added: - schemas.Job.properties.satisfiesPzs (Total Keys: 2) #### cloudscheduler:v1beta1 The following keys were added: - schemas.Job.properties.satisfiesPzs (Total Keys: 2) --- ...dscheduler_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html | 81 ++++++++++--------- ...duler_v1beta1.projects.locations.jobs.html | 81 ++++++++++--------- .../documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json | 15 ++-- .../documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json | 15 ++-- 4 files changed, 110 insertions(+), 82 deletions(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html index 44af6d43e7..11b44c171e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1.projects.locations.jobs.html @@ -161,13 +161,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -234,13 +235,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -332,13 +334,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -416,13 +419,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -508,13 +512,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -582,13 +587,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -668,13 +674,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -754,13 +761,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -840,13 +848,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1beta1.projects.locations.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1beta1.projects.locations.jobs.html index 23966be274..0ec3c9efe0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1beta1.projects.locations.jobs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/cloudscheduler_v1beta1.projects.locations.jobs.html @@ -162,13 +162,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -236,13 +237,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -336,13 +338,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -423,13 +426,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -516,13 +520,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -591,13 +596,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -678,13 +684,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -765,13 +772,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. @@ -853,13 +861,14 @@

Method Details

"data": "A String", # The message payload for PubsubMessage. Pubsub message must contain either non-empty data, or at least one attribute. "topicName": "A String", # Required. The name of the Cloud Pub/Sub topic to which messages will be published when a job is delivered. The topic name must be in the same format as required by Pub/Sub's [PublishRequest.name](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/reference/rpc/google.pubsub.v1#publishrequest), for example `projects/PROJECT_ID/topics/TOPIC_ID`. The topic must be in the same project as the Cloud Scheduler job. }, - "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. + "retryConfig": { # Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig. # Settings that determine the retry behavior. "maxBackoffDuration": "A String", # The maximum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 1 hour. - "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5. - "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. + "maxDoublings": 42, # The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5. + "maxRetryDuration": "A String", # The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. "minBackoffDuration": "A String", # The minimum amount of time to wait before retrying a job after it fails. The default value of this field is 5 seconds. - "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. + "retryCount": 42, # The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed. }, + "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation "schedule": "A String", # Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. "scheduleTime": "A String", # Output only. The next time the job is scheduled. Note that this may be a retry of a previously failed attempt or the next execution time according to the schedule. "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the job. diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json index 78a7ee4407..f83ffc5e94 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1.json @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250411", +"revision": "20250530", "rootUrl": "https://cloudscheduler.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppEngineHttpTarget": { @@ -718,6 +718,11 @@ "$ref": "RetryConfig", "description": "Settings that determine the retry behavior." }, +"satisfiesPzs": { +"description": "Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, "schedule": { "description": "Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure.", "type": "string" @@ -1030,7 +1035,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "RetryConfig": { -"description": "Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig.", +"description": "Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig.", "id": "RetryConfig", "properties": { "maxBackoffDuration": { @@ -1039,12 +1044,12 @@ "type": "string" }, "maxDoublings": { -"description": "The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5.", +"description": "The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, "maxRetryDuration": { -"description": "The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited.", +"description": "The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails.", "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, @@ -1054,7 +1059,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "retryCount": { -"description": "The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed.", +"description": "The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" } diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json index 31d7f895ec..db932eb486 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudscheduler.v1beta1.json @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250411", +"revision": "20250530", "rootUrl": "https://cloudscheduler.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AppEngineHttpTarget": { @@ -620,6 +620,11 @@ "$ref": "RetryConfig", "description": "Settings that determine the retry behavior." }, +"satisfiesPzs": { +"description": "Output only. Whether or not this Job satisfies the requirements of physical zone separation", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, "schedule": { "description": "Required, except when used with UpdateJob. Describes the schedule on which the job will be executed. The schedule can be either of the following types: * [Crontab](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cron#Overview) * English-like [schedule](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/cron-job-schedules) As a general rule, execution `n + 1` of a job will not begin until execution `n` has finished. Cloud Scheduler will never allow two simultaneously outstanding executions. For example, this implies that if the `n+1`th execution is scheduled to run at 16:00 but the `n`th execution takes until 16:15, the `n+1`th execution will not start until `16:15`. A scheduled start time will be delayed if the previous execution has not ended when its scheduled time occurs. If retry_count > 0 and a job attempt fails, the job will be tried a total of retry_count times, with exponential backoff, until the next scheduled start time. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure.", "type": "string" @@ -879,7 +884,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "RetryConfig": { -"description": "Settings that determine the retry behavior. By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig.", +"description": "Settings that determine the retry behavior. For more information, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs). By default, if a job does not complete successfully (meaning that an acknowledgement is not received from the handler, then it will be retried with exponential backoff according to the settings in RetryConfig.", "id": "RetryConfig", "properties": { "maxBackoffDuration": { @@ -888,12 +893,12 @@ "type": "string" }, "maxDoublings": { -"description": "The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For example, if min_backoff_duration is 10s, max_backoff_duration is 300s, and `max_doublings` is 3, then the job will first be retried in 10s. The retry interval will double three times, and then increase linearly by 2^3 * 10s. Finally, the job will retry at intervals of max_backoff_duration until the job has been attempted retry_count times. Thus, the requests will retry at 10s, 20s, 40s, 80s, 160s, 240s, 300s, 300s, .... The default value of this field is 5.", +"description": "The time between retries will double `max_doublings` times. A job's retry interval starts at min_backoff_duration, then doubles `max_doublings` times, then increases linearly, and finally retries at intervals of max_backoff_duration up to retry_count times. For examples, see [Retry jobs](https://cloud.google.com/scheduler/docs/configuring/retry-jobs#max-doublings). The default value of this field is 5.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" }, "maxRetryDuration": { -"description": "The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited.", +"description": "The time limit for retrying a failed job, measured from the time when an execution was first attempted. If specified with retry_count, the job will be retried until both limits are reached. The default value for max_retry_duration is zero, which means retry duration is unlimited. However, if retry_count is also 0, a job attempt won't be retried if it fails.", "format": "google-duration", "type": "string" }, @@ -903,7 +908,7 @@ "type": "string" }, "retryCount": { -"description": "The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0, a job attempt will not be retried if it fails. Instead the Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 does not prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number then Cloud Scheduler will retry failed attempts, using exponential backoff, retry_count times, or until the next scheduled execution time, whichever comes first. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed.", +"description": "The number of attempts that the system will make to run a job using the exponential backoff procedure described by max_doublings. The default value of retry_count is zero. If retry_count is 0 (and if max_retry_duration is also 0), a job attempt won't be retried if it fails. Instead, Cloud Scheduler system will wait for the next scheduled execution time. Setting retry_count to 0 doesn't prevent failed jobs from running according to schedule after the failure. If retry_count is set to a non-zero number, Cloud Scheduler will retry the failed job, using exponential backoff, for retry_count times until the job succeeds or the number of retries is exhausted. Note that the next scheduled execution time might be skipped if the retries continue through that time. Values greater than 5 and negative values are not allowed.", "format": "int32", "type": "integer" } From 8e1f3b3455e2250540d2dd76c4ade6a3d1bdaa3a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 05/32] feat(compute): update the api #### compute:alpha The following keys were added: - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.aggregatedList (Total Keys: 29) - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.delete (Total Keys: 17) - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.get (Total Keys: 33) - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.list (Total Keys: 24) - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.recover (Total Keys: 19) - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.setIamPolicy (Total Keys: 16) - resources.recoverableSnapshots.methods.testIamPermissions (Total Keys: 16) - schemas.BackendBucket.properties.region.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.BulkInsertInstanceResource.properties.instanceFlexibilityPolicy.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.Disk.properties.sourceMachineImage (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.Image.properties.params.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.ImageParams (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.InstanceFlexibilityPolicy (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.InstanceParams.properties.requestValidForDuration.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.NetworkProfile.properties.profileType.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.NetworkProfileProfileType (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.PublicAdvertisedPrefix.properties.ipv6AccessType.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.PublicDelegatedPrefix.properties.ipv6AccessType.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.PublicDelegatedPrefixPublicDelegatedSubPrefix.properties.ipv6AccessType.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.RecoverableSnapshot (Total Keys: 123) - schemas.ResourceStatus.properties.consumedReservation (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.Router.properties.params.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.RouterParams (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.Scheduling.properties.skipGuestOsShutdown.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.Snapshot.properties.params.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.SnapshotParams (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.WireGroup.properties.reconciling.type (Total Keys: 1) The following keys were changed: - resources.regionBackendBuckets.methods.insert (Total Keys: 2) #### compute:beta The following keys were added: - resources.reservationSubBlocks.methods.get (Total Keys: 19) - resources.reservationSubBlocks.methods.list (Total Keys: 29) - schemas.FirewallPolicy.properties.policyType.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.ForwardingRule.properties.selfLinkWithId.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.InstanceGroupManagerInstanceLifecyclePolicy.properties.onRepair.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.InstanceGroupManagerInstanceLifecyclePolicyOnRepair (Total Keys: 3) - schemas.ReservationBlock.properties.reservationSubBlockCount (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.ReservationBlock.properties.reservationSubBlockInUseCount (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.ReservationSubBlock (Total Keys: 41) - schemas.Router.properties.params.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.RouterParams (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.Scheduling.properties.skipGuestOsShutdown.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.VpnTunnel.properties.cipherSuite.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.VpnTunnelCipherSuite (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms (Total Keys: 8) - schemas.WireGroup.properties.reconciling.type (Total Keys: 1) #### compute:v1 The following keys were added: - resources.disks.methods.bulkSetLabels (Total Keys: 21) - resources.reservationSubBlocks.methods.get (Total Keys: 19) - resources.reservationSubBlocks.methods.list (Total Keys: 29) - schemas.BulkSetLabelsRequest (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.BulkZoneSetLabelsRequest (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.FirewallPolicyRuleMatcher.properties.destNetworkType.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.FirewallPolicyRuleMatcher.properties.srcNetworkType.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.FirewallPolicyRuleMatcher.properties.srcNetworks (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.ForwardingRule.properties.selfLinkWithId.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.Network.properties.params.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.NetworkParams (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.Reservation.properties.enableEmergentMaintenance.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.ReservationBlock.properties.reservationSubBlockCount (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.ReservationBlock.properties.reservationSubBlockInUseCount (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.ReservationSubBlock (Total Keys: 41) - schemas.ResourcePolicy.properties.workloadPolicy.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.ResourcePolicyGroupPlacementPolicy.properties.gpuTopology.type (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.ResourcePolicyWorkloadPolicy (Total Keys: 5) - schemas.Subnetwork.properties.params.$ref (Total Keys: 1) - schemas.SubnetworkParams (Total Keys: 4) --- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html | 6 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html | 14 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html | 55 + ...e_alpha.globalPublicDelegatedPrefixes.html | 8 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html | 5 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html | 5 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html | 25 + .../compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html | 12 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html | 57 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html | 6 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkProfiles.html | 12 + ...te_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html | 4 +- ...ompute_alpha.publicAdvertisedPrefixes.html | 4 + ...compute_alpha.publicDelegatedPrefixes.html | 10 + .../compute_alpha.recoverableSnapshots.html | 961 ++++++++ .../compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html | 5 + .../compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html | 12 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionCommitments.html | 12 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html | 45 + ...ute_alpha.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html | 10 +- ...compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html | 3 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html | 11 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html | 15 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionUrlMaps.html | 168 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.reservations.html | 10 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html | 40 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html | 20 + docs/dyn/compute_alpha.urlMaps.html | 196 +- docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html | 4 + .../compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html | 44 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html | 14 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.forwardingRules.html | 5 + .../compute_beta.globalForwardingRules.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.html | 5 + .../compute_beta.instanceGroupManagers.html | 18 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html | 17 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html | 6 + .../compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html | 5 + ...ute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html | 4 +- .../compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html | 12 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html | 12 +- ...pute_beta.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html | 15 + .../compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html | 3 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html | 1 + ...te_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html | 168 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html | 4 + .../compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html | 205 ++ docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html | 10 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html | 40 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html | 196 +- docs/dyn/compute_beta.vpnTunnels.html | 108 + docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html | 14 +- docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html | 142 ++ docs/dyn/compute_v1.firewallPolicies.html | 55 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.forwardingRules.html | 5 + .../dyn/compute_v1.globalForwardingRules.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.html | 5 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html | 20 +- .../compute_v1.networkFirewallPolicies.html | 80 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.networks.html | 30 + .../dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html | 12 +- docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionCommitments.html | 5 + ...pute_v1.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html | 65 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionUrlMaps.html | 168 +- docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationBlocks.html | 4 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationSubBlocks.html | 205 ++ docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservations.html | 5 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.resourcePolicies.html | 30 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.subnetworks.html | 25 + docs/dyn/compute_v1.urlMaps.html | 196 +- .../documents/compute.alpha.json | 2101 ++++++++++++++--- .../documents/compute.beta.json | 525 +++- .../discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json | 592 ++++- 78 files changed, 5925 insertions(+), 1014 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/dyn/compute_alpha.recoverableSnapshots.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html create mode 100644 docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationSubBlocks.html diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html index e7320dfb7c..39b19f82a0 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendBuckets.html @@ -573,6 +573,7 @@

Method Details

"kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource. "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket. @@ -687,6 +688,7 @@

Method Details

"kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource. "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket. @@ -882,6 +884,7 @@

Method Details

"kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource. "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket. @@ -975,6 +978,7 @@

Method Details

"kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource. "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket. @@ -1084,6 +1088,7 @@

Method Details

"kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource. "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket. @@ -1530,6 +1535,7 @@

Method Details

"kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource. "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body. "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html index b21bbfebbd..b11be84853 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.backendServices.html @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. @@ -1224,7 +1224,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. @@ -2101,7 +2101,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. @@ -2722,7 +2722,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. @@ -3241,7 +3241,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. @@ -3776,7 +3776,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. @@ -4780,7 +4780,7 @@

Method Details

}, "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService. "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers. - "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. + "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED. "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally. "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted. "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html index 57c66e70f4..1cd3ab9411 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html @@ -409,6 +409,16 @@

Method Details

"sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used. "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used. + "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage + "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified. + "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/ + "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0=" + "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem + "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource. + }, + "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used. "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 @@ -806,6 +816,11 @@

Method Details

"locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API. "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically. "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots. "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time. @@ -1218,6 +1233,16 @@

Method Details

"sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used. "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used. + "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage + "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified. + "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/ + "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0=" + "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem + "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource. + }, + "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used. "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 @@ -1437,6 +1462,16 @@

Method Details

"sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used. "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used. + "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage + "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified. + "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/ + "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0=" + "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem + "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource. + }, + "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used. "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 @@ -1703,6 +1738,16 @@

Method Details

"sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used. "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used. + "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage + "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified. + "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/ + "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0=" + "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem + "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource. + }, + "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used. "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 @@ -2796,6 +2841,16 @@

Method Details

"sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used. "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used. + "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage + "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified. + "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. + "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 + "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/ + "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0=" + "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem + "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource. + }, + "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used. "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key. "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1 diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalPublicDelegatedPrefixes.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalPublicDelegatedPrefixes.html index 0053a9acc1..f25cefc19f 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalPublicDelegatedPrefixes.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.globalPublicDelegatedPrefixes.html @@ -249,6 +249,7 @@

Method Details

"fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix. "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated. "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes. "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only. @@ -260,6 +261,7 @@

Method Details

"delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project. "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only. "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix. @@ -291,6 +293,7 @@

Method Details

"fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix. "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated. "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes. "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only. @@ -302,6 +305,7 @@

Method Details

"delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project. "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only. "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix. @@ -463,6 +467,7 @@

Method Details

"fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix. "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated. "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes. "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only. @@ -474,6 +479,7 @@

Method Details

"delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project. "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only. "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix. @@ -535,6 +541,7 @@

Method Details

"fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix. "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated. "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes. "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only. @@ -546,6 +553,7 @@

Method Details

"delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix. "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource. "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix. + "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix. "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project. "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only. "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html index 12117303be..8d07fcd006 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html @@ -369,6 +369,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the publicDelegatedPrefixes Resource.

+

+ recoverableSnapshots() +

+

Returns the recoverableSnapshots Resource.

+

regionAutoscalers()

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html index a66f29ec18..ad92a1fe49 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.imageFamilyViews.html @@ -150,6 +150,11 @@

Method Details

], "locked": True or False, # A flag for marketplace VM disk created from the image, which is designed for marketplace VM disk to prevent the proprietary data on the disk from being accessed unwantedly. The flag will be inherited by the disk created from the image. The disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - R/W or R/O disk attach - Disk detach, if disk is created via create-on-create - Create images - Create snapshots - Create disk clone (create disk from the current disk) The image with the locked field set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Create images from the current image - Update the locked field for the current image The instance with at least one disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Secondary disk attach - Create instant snapshot - Create machine images - Create instance template - Delete the instance with --keep-disk parameter set to true "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional image params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "rawDisk": { # The parameters of the raw disk image. "containerType": "A String", # The format used to encode and transmit the block device, which should be TAR. This is just a container and transmission format and not a runtime format. Provided by the client when the disk image is created. "sha1Checksum": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated. An optional SHA1 checksum of the disk image before unpackaging provided by the client when the disk image is created. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html index 33011449f6..e9f198337d 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.images.html @@ -448,6 +448,11 @@

Method Details

], "locked": True or False, # A flag for marketplace VM disk created from the image, which is designed for marketplace VM disk to prevent the proprietary data on the disk from being accessed unwantedly. The flag will be inherited by the disk created from the image. The disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - R/W or R/O disk attach - Disk detach, if disk is created via create-on-create - Create images - Create snapshots - Create disk clone (create disk from the current disk) The image with the locked field set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Create images from the current image - Update the locked field for the current image The instance with at least one disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Secondary disk attach - Create instant snapshot - Create machine images - Create instance template - Delete the instance with --keep-disk parameter set to true "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional image params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "rawDisk": { # The parameters of the raw disk image. "containerType": "A String", # The format used to encode and transmit the block device, which should be TAR. This is just a container and transmission format and not a runtime format. Provided by the client when the disk image is created. "sha1Checksum": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated. An optional SHA1 checksum of the disk image before unpackaging provided by the client when the disk image is created. @@ -587,6 +592,11 @@

Method Details

], "locked": True or False, # A flag for marketplace VM disk created from the image, which is designed for marketplace VM disk to prevent the proprietary data on the disk from being accessed unwantedly. The flag will be inherited by the disk created from the image. The disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - R/W or R/O disk attach - Disk detach, if disk is created via create-on-create - Create images - Create snapshots - Create disk clone (create disk from the current disk) The image with the locked field set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Create images from the current image - Update the locked field for the current image The instance with at least one disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Secondary disk attach - Create instant snapshot - Create machine images - Create instance template - Delete the instance with --keep-disk parameter set to true "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional image params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "rawDisk": { # The parameters of the raw disk image. "containerType": "A String", # The format used to encode and transmit the block device, which should be TAR. This is just a container and transmission format and not a runtime format. Provided by the client when the disk image is created. "sha1Checksum": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated. An optional SHA1 checksum of the disk image before unpackaging provided by the client when the disk image is created. @@ -769,6 +779,11 @@

Method Details

], "locked": True or False, # A flag for marketplace VM disk created from the image, which is designed for marketplace VM disk to prevent the proprietary data on the disk from being accessed unwantedly. The flag will be inherited by the disk created from the image. The disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - R/W or R/O disk attach - Disk detach, if disk is created via create-on-create - Create images - Create snapshots - Create disk clone (create disk from the current disk) The image with the locked field set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Create images from the current image - Update the locked field for the current image The instance with at least one disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Secondary disk attach - Create instant snapshot - Create machine images - Create instance template - Delete the instance with --keep-disk parameter set to true "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional image params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "rawDisk": { # The parameters of the raw disk image. "containerType": "A String", # The format used to encode and transmit the block device, which should be TAR. This is just a container and transmission format and not a runtime format. Provided by the client when the disk image is created. "sha1Checksum": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated. An optional SHA1 checksum of the disk image before unpackaging provided by the client when the disk image is created. @@ -1034,6 +1049,11 @@

Method Details

], "locked": True or False, # A flag for marketplace VM disk created from the image, which is designed for marketplace VM disk to prevent the proprietary data on the disk from being accessed unwantedly. The flag will be inherited by the disk created from the image. The disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - R/W or R/O disk attach - Disk detach, if disk is created via create-on-create - Create images - Create snapshots - Create disk clone (create disk from the current disk) The image with the locked field set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Create images from the current image - Update the locked field for the current image The instance with at least one disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Secondary disk attach - Create instant snapshot - Create machine images - Create instance template - Delete the instance with --keep-disk parameter set to true "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional image params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "rawDisk": { # The parameters of the raw disk image. "containerType": "A String", # The format used to encode and transmit the block device, which should be TAR. This is just a container and transmission format and not a runtime format. Provided by the client when the disk image is created. "sha1Checksum": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated. An optional SHA1 checksum of the disk image before unpackaging provided by the client when the disk image is created. @@ -1197,6 +1217,11 @@

Method Details

], "locked": True or False, # A flag for marketplace VM disk created from the image, which is designed for marketplace VM disk to prevent the proprietary data on the disk from being accessed unwantedly. The flag will be inherited by the disk created from the image. The disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - R/W or R/O disk attach - Disk detach, if disk is created via create-on-create - Create images - Create snapshots - Create disk clone (create disk from the current disk) The image with the locked field set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Create images from the current image - Update the locked field for the current image The instance with at least one disk with locked flag set to true will be prohibited from performing the operations below: - Secondary disk attach - Create instant snapshot - Create machine images - Create instance template - Delete the instance with --keep-disk parameter set to true "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. + "params": { # Additional image params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "rawDisk": { # The parameters of the raw disk image. "containerType": "A String", # The format used to encode and transmit the block device, which should be TAR. This is just a container and transmission format and not a runtime format. Provided by the client when the disk image is created. "sha1Checksum": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated. An optional SHA1 checksum of the disk image before unpackaging provided by the client when the disk image is created. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html index 9f6decc7b0..45cbe35e29 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceGroupManagers.html @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@

Method Details

}, "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. - "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair. + "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair. }, }, "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE. @@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@

Method Details

}, "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. - "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair. + "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair. }, }, "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE. @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@

Method Details

}, "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. - "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair. + "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair. }, }, "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE. @@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@

Method Details

}, "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. - "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair. + "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair. }, }, "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE. @@ -2708,7 +2708,7 @@

Method Details

}, "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. - "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair. + "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair. }, }, "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE. @@ -4638,7 +4638,7 @@

Method Details

}, "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. - "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair. + "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair. }, }, "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE. diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html index e740b89d33..d2d92e82cb 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instanceTemplates.html @@ -438,6 +438,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -988,6 +989,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -1405,6 +1407,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -1908,6 +1911,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html index ba8c8fedf5..16235e575b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instances.html @@ -923,7 +923,7 @@

Method Details

"lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types. - "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys. + "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance. "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource. "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB. { # Metadata @@ -1006,6 +1006,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -1055,6 +1059,8 @@

Method Details

"uuid": "A String", # The UUID of the accelerator. }, ], + "consumedReservation": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. "effectiveInstanceMetadata": { # Effective values of predefined metadata keys for an instance. # [Output Only] Effective metadata is a field that consolidates project, zonal instance settings, and instance-level predefined metadata keys to provide the overridden value for those metadata keys at the instance level. "blockProjectSshKeysMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective block-project-ssh-keys value at Instance level. "enableGuestAttributesMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective enable-guest-attributes value at Instance level. @@ -1163,6 +1169,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -1540,6 +1547,16 @@

Method Details

{ # A transient resource used in compute.instances.bulkInsert and compute.regionInstances.bulkInsert . This resource is not persisted anywhere, it is used only for processing the requests. "count": "A String", # The maximum number of instances to create. + "instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { # A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create. # A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create. + "instanceSelections": { # Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection. + "a_key": { # Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used. + "machineTypes": [ # Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs. + "A String", + ], + "rank": "A String", # Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0. + }, + }, + }, "instanceProperties": { # The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided. "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet. "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false). @@ -1838,6 +1855,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -2722,7 +2740,7 @@

Method Details

"lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types. - "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys. + "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance. "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource. "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB. { # Metadata @@ -2805,6 +2823,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -2854,6 +2876,8 @@

Method Details

"uuid": "A String", # The UUID of the accelerator. }, ], + "consumedReservation": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. "effectiveInstanceMetadata": { # Effective values of predefined metadata keys for an instance. # [Output Only] Effective metadata is a field that consolidates project, zonal instance settings, and instance-level predefined metadata keys to provide the overridden value for those metadata keys at the instance level. "blockProjectSshKeysMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective block-project-ssh-keys value at Instance level. "enableGuestAttributesMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective enable-guest-attributes value at Instance level. @@ -2962,6 +2986,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -3880,7 +3905,7 @@

Method Details

"lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types. - "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys. + "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance. "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource. "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB. { # Metadata @@ -3963,6 +3988,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -4012,6 +4041,8 @@

Method Details

"uuid": "A String", # The UUID of the accelerator. }, ], + "consumedReservation": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. "effectiveInstanceMetadata": { # Effective values of predefined metadata keys for an instance. # [Output Only] Effective metadata is a field that consolidates project, zonal instance settings, and instance-level predefined metadata keys to provide the overridden value for those metadata keys at the instance level. "blockProjectSshKeysMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective block-project-ssh-keys value at Instance level. "enableGuestAttributesMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective enable-guest-attributes value at Instance level. @@ -4120,6 +4151,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -4513,7 +4545,7 @@

Method Details

"lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types. - "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys. + "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance. "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource. "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB. { # Metadata @@ -4596,6 +4628,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -4645,6 +4681,8 @@

Method Details

"uuid": "A String", # The UUID of the accelerator. }, ], + "consumedReservation": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. "effectiveInstanceMetadata": { # Effective values of predefined metadata keys for an instance. # [Output Only] Effective metadata is a field that consolidates project, zonal instance settings, and instance-level predefined metadata keys to provide the overridden value for those metadata keys at the instance level. "blockProjectSshKeysMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective block-project-ssh-keys value at Instance level. "enableGuestAttributesMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective enable-guest-attributes value at Instance level. @@ -4753,6 +4791,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -6981,6 +7020,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. } @@ -8647,7 +8687,7 @@

Method Details

"lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format. "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types. - "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys. + "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance. "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource. "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB. { # Metadata @@ -8730,6 +8770,10 @@

Method Details

"totalEgressBandwidthTier": "A String", }, "params": { # Additional instance params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "requestValidForDuration": { # A Duration represents a fixed-length span of time represented as a count of seconds and fractions of seconds at nanosecond resolution. It is independent of any calendar and concepts like "day" or "month". Range is approximately 10,000 years. # Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API. + "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. + "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years + }, "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the instance. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty. "a_key": "A String", }, @@ -8779,6 +8823,8 @@

Method Details

"uuid": "A String", # The UUID of the accelerator. }, ], + "consumedReservation": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from. + "consumedReservationBlock": "A String", # [Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from. "effectiveInstanceMetadata": { # Effective values of predefined metadata keys for an instance. # [Output Only] Effective metadata is a field that consolidates project, zonal instance settings, and instance-level predefined metadata keys to provide the overridden value for those metadata keys at the instance level. "blockProjectSshKeysMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective block-project-ssh-keys value at Instance level. "enableGuestAttributesMetadataValue": True or False, # Effective enable-guest-attributes value at Instance level. @@ -8887,6 +8933,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html index 7a96e075a7..5546a61b49 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.machineImages.html @@ -553,6 +553,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -809,6 +810,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -1196,6 +1198,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -1452,6 +1455,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -1921,6 +1925,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, @@ -2177,6 +2182,7 @@

Method Details

"nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive. "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years }, + "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs. "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time. "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkProfiles.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkProfiles.html index a9d711fad6..1026278651 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkProfiles.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.networkProfiles.html @@ -159,6 +159,12 @@

Method Details

"scope": "A String", }, "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. + "profileType": { # [Output Only] Type of the network profile. + "networkType": "A String", + "rdmaSubtype": "A String", + "ullSubtype": "A String", + "vpcSubtype": "A String", + }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. } @@ -239,6 +245,12 @@

Method Details

"scope": "A String", }, "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the resource. + "profileType": { # [Output Only] Type of the network profile. + "networkType": "A String", + "rdmaSubtype": "A String", + "ullSubtype": "A String", + "vpcSubtype": "A String", + }, "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource. "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id. }, diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html index b8bb1df624..b432726450 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.organizationSecurityPolicies.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@

Compute Engine API . addAssociation(securityPolicy, body=None, replaceExistingAssociation=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-

Inserts an association for the specified security policy. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.

+

Inserts an association for the specified security policy. This has billing implications. Projects in the hierarchy with effective hierarchical security policies will be automatically enrolled into Cloud Armor Enterprise if not already enrolled. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.

addRule(securityPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

Inserts a rule into a security policy.

@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@

Instance Methods

Method Details

addAssociation(securityPolicy, body=None, replaceExistingAssociation=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None) - 
Inserts an association for the specified security policy. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.
+  
Inserts an association for the specified security policy. This has billing implications. Projects in the hierarchy with effective hierarchical security policies will be automatically enrolled into Cloud Armor Enterprise if not already enrolled. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.
 
 Args:
   securityPolicy: string, Name of the security policy to update. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicAdvertisedPrefixes.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicAdvertisedPrefixes.html
index cb59b11ced..0204e348a6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicAdvertisedPrefixes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicAdvertisedPrefixes.html
@@ -380,6 +380,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicAdvertisedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicAdvertisedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicAdvertisedPrefix.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public advertised prefix.
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # The internet access type for IPv6 Public Advertised Prefixes.
   "kind": "compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix for public advertised prefixes.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pdpScope": "A String", # Specifies how child public delegated prefix will be scoped. It could be one of following values: - `REGIONAL`: The public delegated prefix is regional only. The provisioning will take a few minutes. - `GLOBAL`: The public delegated prefix is global only. The provisioning will take ~4 weeks. - `GLOBAL_AND_REGIONAL` [output only]: The public delegated prefixes is BYOIP V1 legacy prefix. This is output only value and no longer supported in BYOIP V2.
@@ -416,6 +417,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicAdvertisedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicAdvertisedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicAdvertisedPrefix.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public advertised prefix.
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # The internet access type for IPv6 Public Advertised Prefixes.
   "kind": "compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix for public advertised prefixes.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pdpScope": "A String", # Specifies how child public delegated prefix will be scoped. It could be one of following values: - `REGIONAL`: The public delegated prefix is regional only. The provisioning will take a few minutes. - `GLOBAL`: The public delegated prefix is global only. The provisioning will take ~4 weeks. - `GLOBAL_AND_REGIONAL` [output only]: The public delegated prefixes is BYOIP V1 legacy prefix. This is output only value and no longer supported in BYOIP V2.
@@ -582,6 +584,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicAdvertisedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicAdvertisedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicAdvertisedPrefix.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
       "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public advertised prefix.
+      "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # The internet access type for IPv6 Public Advertised Prefixes.
       "kind": "compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix for public advertised prefixes.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
       "pdpScope": "A String", # Specifies how child public delegated prefix will be scoped. It could be one of following values: - `REGIONAL`: The public delegated prefix is regional only. The provisioning will take a few minutes. - `GLOBAL`: The public delegated prefix is global only. The provisioning will take ~4 weeks. - `GLOBAL_AND_REGIONAL` [output only]: The public delegated prefixes is BYOIP V1 legacy prefix. This is output only value and no longer supported in BYOIP V2.
@@ -648,6 +651,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicAdvertisedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicAdvertisedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicAdvertisedPrefix.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public advertised prefix.
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # The internet access type for IPv6 Public Advertised Prefixes.
   "kind": "compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix for public advertised prefixes.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
   "pdpScope": "A String", # Specifies how child public delegated prefix will be scoped. It could be one of following values: - `REGIONAL`: The public delegated prefix is regional only. The provisioning will take a few minutes. - `GLOBAL`: The public delegated prefix is global only. The provisioning will take ~4 weeks. - `GLOBAL_AND_REGIONAL` [output only]: The public delegated prefixes is BYOIP V1 legacy prefix. This is output only value and no longer supported in BYOIP V2.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicDelegatedPrefixes.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicDelegatedPrefixes.html
index d817056fbd..f8fe7bc2fe 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicDelegatedPrefixes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.publicDelegatedPrefixes.html
@@ -142,6 +142,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
           "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix.
+          "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
           "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated.
           "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes.
           "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only.
@@ -153,6 +154,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix.
               "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
               "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix.
+              "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
               "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project.
               "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only.
               "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix.
@@ -492,6 +494,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix.
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
   "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated.
   "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes.
   "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only.
@@ -503,6 +506,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix.
+      "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
       "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project.
       "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only.
       "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix.
@@ -535,6 +539,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix.
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
   "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated.
   "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes.
   "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only.
@@ -546,6 +551,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix.
+      "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
       "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project.
       "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only.
       "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix.
@@ -708,6 +714,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
       "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix.
+      "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
       "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated.
       "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes.
       "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only.
@@ -719,6 +726,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
           "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix.
+          "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
           "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project.
           "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only.
           "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix.
@@ -781,6 +789,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a new PublicDelegatedPrefix. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the PublicDelegatedPrefix, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a PublicDelegatedPrefix.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix.
+  "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
   "isLiveMigration": True or False, # If true, the prefix will be live migrated.
   "kind": "compute#publicDelegatedPrefix", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicDelegatedPrefix for public delegated prefixes.
   "mode": "A String", # The public delegated prefix mode for IPv6 only.
@@ -792,6 +801,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "delegateeProject": "A String", # Name of the project scoping this PublicDelegatedSubPrefix.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "ipCidrRange": "A String", # The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix.
+      "ipv6AccessType": "A String", # [Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.
       "isAddress": True or False, # Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project.
       "mode": "A String", # The PublicDelegatedSubPrefix mode for IPv6 only.
       "name": "A String", # The name of the sub public delegated prefix.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.recoverableSnapshots.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.recoverableSnapshots.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bb2435582a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.recoverableSnapshots.html
@@ -0,0 +1,961 @@
+
+
+
+
Compute Engine API . recoverableSnapshots

+
Instance Methods

+

+  aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves an aggregated list of all of the RecoverableSnapshots in your project across all regions and global scope.

+

+  aggregatedList_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  delete(project, recoverableSnapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Deletes the specified RecoverableSnapshot. Deleting a recoverable snapshot will delete the underlying PD snapshot and is irreversible.

+

+  get(project, recoverableSnapshot, x__xgafv=None)

+
Returns the specified RecoverableSnapshot resource.

+

+  getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.

+

+  list(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves a list of all of the RecoverableSnapshots in your project.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  recover(project, recoverableSnapshot, requestId=None, snapshotName=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Recovers the specified RecoverableSnapshot.

+

+  setIamPolicy(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.

+

+  testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.

+
Method Details

+

+    aggregatedList(project, filter=None, includeAllScopes=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, serviceProjectNumber=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves an aggregated list of all of the RecoverableSnapshots in your project across all regions and global scope.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  includeAllScopes: boolean, Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  serviceProjectNumber: string, The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "etag": "A String",
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": { # A list of RecoverableSnapshotsScopedList resources.
+    "a_key": { # [Output Only] Name of the scope containing this set of recoverablesnapshots.
+      "recoverablesnapshots": [ # [Output Only] A list of recoverablesnapshots contained in this scope.
+        { # Represents a RecoverableSnapshot resource. A RecoverableSnapshot represents a snapshot in recycle bin.
+          "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. An optional description of this resource.
+          "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+          "kind": "compute#recoverableSnapshot", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshot for RecoverableSnapshot resources.
+          "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the recoverable snapshot generated on the deletion of the snapshot. The name will be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name will be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character will be a lowercase letter, and all following characters can be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+          "originalResource": { # Output Only] The original snapshot resource.
+            "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the snapshot. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+            "autoCreated": True or False, # [Output Only] Set to true if snapshots are automatically created by applying resource policy on the target disk.
+            "autoCreatedBy": "A String", # ResourceKey of the resource policy or flow which created this auto snapshot
+            "chainName": "A String", # Creates the new snapshot in the snapshot chain labeled with the specified name. The chain name must be 1-63 characters long and comply with RFC1035. This is an uncommon option only for advanced service owners who needs to create separate snapshot chains, for example, for chargeback tracking. When you describe your snapshot resource, this field is visible only if it has a non-empty value.
+            "creationSizeBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] Size in bytes of the snapshot at creation time.
+            "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+            "deletionTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.
+            "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource.
+            "diskSizeGb": "A String", # [Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.
+            "downloadBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] Number of bytes downloaded to restore a snapshot to a disk.
+            "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Whether this snapshot is created from a confidential compute mode disk. [Output Only]: This field is not set by user, but from source disk.
+            "full": True or False, # Indicates the created snapshot is a full snapshot.
+            "guestOsFeatures": [ # [Output Only] A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+              { # Guest OS features.
+                "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_LIVE_MIGRATABLE_V2 - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE - TDX_CAPABLE - IDPF - SNP_SVSM_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+              },
+            ],
+            "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the original snapshot. This identifier is defined by the server.
+            "labelFingerprint": "A String", # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this snapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a snapshot.
+            "labels": { # Labels to apply to this snapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+            "licenseCodes": [ # [Output Only] Integer license codes indicating which licenses are attached to this snapshot.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "licenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of public visible licenses that apply to this snapshot.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
+            "name": "A String", # Name of the original snapshot provided by the client. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+            "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
+            "satisfiesPzi": True or False, # Output only. Reserved for future use.
+            "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+            "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+            "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+            "snapshotEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts the snapshot using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a snapshot using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the snapshot later. For example, you must provide the encryption key when you create a disk from the encrypted snapshot in a future request. Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the snapshot. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the snapshot, then the snapshot will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the snapshot later.
+              "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+              "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+              "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+              "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+              "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+            },
+            "snapshotGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.
+            "snapshotGroupName": "A String", # [Output only] The snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.
+            "snapshotType": "A String", # Indicates the type of the snapshot.
+            "sourceDisk": "A String", # The source disk used to create this snapshot.
+            "sourceDiskEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source disk. Required if the source disk is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+              "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+              "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+              "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+              "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+              "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+            },
+            "sourceDiskForRecoveryCheckpoint": "A String", # The source disk whose recovery checkpoint will be used to create this snapshot.
+            "sourceDiskId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this snapshot
+            "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this snapshot.
+            "sourceInstantSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # Customer provided encryption key when creating Snapshot from Instant Snapshot.
+              "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+              "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+              "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+              "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+              "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+            },
+            "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this snapshot. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact instant snapshot that was used.
+            "sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicy": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.
+            "sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicyId": "A String", # [Output Only] ID of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.
+            "storageBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] A size of the storage used by the snapshot.
+            "storageBytesStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] An indicator whether storageBytes is in a stable state or it is being adjusted as a result of shared storage reallocation. This status can either be UPDATING, meaning the size of the snapshot is being updated, or UP_TO_DATE, meaning the size of the snapshot is up-to-date.
+            "storageLocations": [ # Cloud Storage bucket storage location of the snapshot (regional or multi-regional).
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses represented by a list of URLs to the license resource.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "purgeTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.
+          "satisfiesPzi": True or False, # Output only. [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+          "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+          "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+          "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+          "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the recoverable snapshot.
+        },
+      ],
+      "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning which replaces the list of recoverablesnapshots when the list is empty.
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+        "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+          {
+            "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+            "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+          },
+        ],
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#recoverableSnapshotAggregatedList", # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshotAggregatedList for aggregated lists of recoverablesnapshots.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "unreachables": [ # [Output Only] Unreachable resources. end_interface: MixerListResponseWithEtagBuilder
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    aggregatedList_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    delete(project, recoverableSnapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Deletes the specified RecoverableSnapshot. Deleting a recoverable snapshot will delete the underlying PD snapshot and is irreversible.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  recoverableSnapshot: string, Name of the recoverable Snapshot resource to delete. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
+

+    get(project, recoverableSnapshot, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Returns the specified RecoverableSnapshot resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  recoverableSnapshot: string, Name of the Snapshot resource to return. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a RecoverableSnapshot resource. A RecoverableSnapshot represents a snapshot in recycle bin.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  "description": "A String", # Optional. An optional description of this resource.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "kind": "compute#recoverableSnapshot", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshot for RecoverableSnapshot resources.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the recoverable snapshot generated on the deletion of the snapshot. The name will be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name will be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character will be a lowercase letter, and all following characters can be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "originalResource": { # Output Only] The original snapshot resource.
+    "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the snapshot. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+    "autoCreated": True or False, # [Output Only] Set to true if snapshots are automatically created by applying resource policy on the target disk.
+    "autoCreatedBy": "A String", # ResourceKey of the resource policy or flow which created this auto snapshot
+    "chainName": "A String", # Creates the new snapshot in the snapshot chain labeled with the specified name. The chain name must be 1-63 characters long and comply with RFC1035. This is an uncommon option only for advanced service owners who needs to create separate snapshot chains, for example, for chargeback tracking. When you describe your snapshot resource, this field is visible only if it has a non-empty value.
+    "creationSizeBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] Size in bytes of the snapshot at creation time.
+    "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+    "deletionTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.
+    "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource.
+    "diskSizeGb": "A String", # [Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.
+    "downloadBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] Number of bytes downloaded to restore a snapshot to a disk.
+    "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Whether this snapshot is created from a confidential compute mode disk. [Output Only]: This field is not set by user, but from source disk.
+    "full": True or False, # Indicates the created snapshot is a full snapshot.
+    "guestOsFeatures": [ # [Output Only] A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+      { # Guest OS features.
+        "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_LIVE_MIGRATABLE_V2 - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE - TDX_CAPABLE - IDPF - SNP_SVSM_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+      },
+    ],
+    "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the original snapshot. This identifier is defined by the server.
+    "labelFingerprint": "A String", # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this snapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a snapshot.
+    "labels": { # Labels to apply to this snapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+    "licenseCodes": [ # [Output Only] Integer license codes indicating which licenses are attached to this snapshot.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "licenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of public visible licenses that apply to this snapshot.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
+    "name": "A String", # Name of the original snapshot provided by the client. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+    "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
+    "satisfiesPzi": True or False, # Output only. Reserved for future use.
+    "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+    "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+    "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+    "snapshotEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts the snapshot using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a snapshot using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the snapshot later. For example, you must provide the encryption key when you create a disk from the encrypted snapshot in a future request. Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the snapshot. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the snapshot, then the snapshot will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the snapshot later.
+      "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+      "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+      "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+      "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+      "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+    },
+    "snapshotGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.
+    "snapshotGroupName": "A String", # [Output only] The snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.
+    "snapshotType": "A String", # Indicates the type of the snapshot.
+    "sourceDisk": "A String", # The source disk used to create this snapshot.
+    "sourceDiskEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source disk. Required if the source disk is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+      "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+      "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+      "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+      "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+      "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+    },
+    "sourceDiskForRecoveryCheckpoint": "A String", # The source disk whose recovery checkpoint will be used to create this snapshot.
+    "sourceDiskId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this snapshot
+    "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this snapshot.
+    "sourceInstantSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # Customer provided encryption key when creating Snapshot from Instant Snapshot.
+      "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+      "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+      "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+      "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+      "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+    },
+    "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this snapshot. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact instant snapshot that was used.
+    "sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicy": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.
+    "sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicyId": "A String", # [Output Only] ID of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.
+    "storageBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] A size of the storage used by the snapshot.
+    "storageBytesStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] An indicator whether storageBytes is in a stable state or it is being adjusted as a result of shared storage reallocation. This status can either be UPDATING, meaning the size of the snapshot is being updated, or UP_TO_DATE, meaning the size of the snapshot is up-to-date.
+    "storageLocations": [ # Cloud Storage bucket storage location of the snapshot (regional or multi-regional).
+      "A String",
+    ],
+    "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses represented by a list of URLs to the license resource.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "purgeTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.
+  "satisfiesPzi": True or False, # Output only. [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+  "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the recoverable snapshot.
+}

+

+
+

+    getIamPolicy(project, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  optionsRequestedPolicyVersion: integer, Requested IAM Policy version.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** ``` { "bindings": [ { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin", "members": [ "user:mike@example.com", "group:admins@example.com", "domain:google.com", "serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com" ] }, { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer", "members": [ "user:eve@example.com" ], "condition": { "title": "expirable access", "description": "Does not grant access after Sep 2020", "expression": "request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')", } } ], "etag": "BwWWja0YfJA=", "version": 3 } ``` **YAML example:** ``` bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 ``` For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  "auditConfigs": [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
+    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { "audit_configs": [ { "service": "allServices", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" }, { "log_type": "ADMIN_READ" } ] }, { "service": "sampleservice.googleapis.com", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ" }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE", "exempted_members": [ "user:aliya@example.com" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
+      "auditLogConfigs": [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
+        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
+          "exemptedMembers": [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "logType": "A String", # The log type that this config enables.
+        },
+      ],
+      "service": "A String", # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
+    },
+  ],
+  "bindings": [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
+    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
+      "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}

+

+
+

+    list(project, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves a list of all of the RecoverableSnapshots in your project.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "etag": "A String",
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of RecoverableSnapshots resources.
+    { # Represents a RecoverableSnapshot resource. A RecoverableSnapshot represents a snapshot in recycle bin.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "description": "A String", # Optional. An optional description of this resource.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      "kind": "compute#recoverableSnapshot", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshot for RecoverableSnapshot resources.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Name of the recoverable snapshot generated on the deletion of the snapshot. The name will be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name will be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character will be a lowercase letter, and all following characters can be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "originalResource": { # Output Only] The original snapshot resource.
+        "architecture": "A String", # [Output Only] The architecture of the snapshot. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.
+        "autoCreated": True or False, # [Output Only] Set to true if snapshots are automatically created by applying resource policy on the target disk.
+        "autoCreatedBy": "A String", # ResourceKey of the resource policy or flow which created this auto snapshot
+        "chainName": "A String", # Creates the new snapshot in the snapshot chain labeled with the specified name. The chain name must be 1-63 characters long and comply with RFC1035. This is an uncommon option only for advanced service owners who needs to create separate snapshot chains, for example, for chargeback tracking. When you describe your snapshot resource, this field is visible only if it has a non-empty value.
+        "creationSizeBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] Size in bytes of the snapshot at creation time.
+        "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+        "deletionTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.
+        "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource.
+        "diskSizeGb": "A String", # [Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.
+        "downloadBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] Number of bytes downloaded to restore a snapshot to a disk.
+        "enableConfidentialCompute": True or False, # Whether this snapshot is created from a confidential compute mode disk. [Output Only]: This field is not set by user, but from source disk.
+        "full": True or False, # Indicates the created snapshot is a full snapshot.
+        "guestOsFeatures": [ # [Output Only] A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.
+          { # Guest OS features.
+            "type": "A String", # The ID of a supported feature. To add multiple values, use commas to separate values. Set to one or more of the following values: - VIRTIO_SCSI_MULTIQUEUE - WINDOWS - MULTI_IP_SUBNET - UEFI_COMPATIBLE - GVNIC - SEV_CAPABLE - SUSPEND_RESUME_COMPATIBLE - SEV_LIVE_MIGRATABLE_V2 - SEV_SNP_CAPABLE - TDX_CAPABLE - IDPF - SNP_SVSM_CAPABLE For more information, see Enabling guest operating system features.
+          },
+        ],
+        "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the original snapshot. This identifier is defined by the server.
+        "labelFingerprint": "A String", # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this snapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a snapshot.
+        "labels": { # Labels to apply to this snapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+        "licenseCodes": [ # [Output Only] Integer license codes indicating which licenses are attached to this snapshot.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "licenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of public visible licenses that apply to this snapshot.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
+        "name": "A String", # Name of the original snapshot provided by the client. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+        "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
+        "satisfiesPzi": True or False, # Output only. Reserved for future use.
+        "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+        "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+        "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+        "snapshotEncryptionKey": { # Encrypts the snapshot using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a snapshot using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the snapshot later. For example, you must provide the encryption key when you create a disk from the encrypted snapshot in a future request. Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the snapshot. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the snapshot, then the snapshot will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the snapshot later.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "snapshotGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.
+        "snapshotGroupName": "A String", # [Output only] The snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.
+        "snapshotType": "A String", # Indicates the type of the snapshot.
+        "sourceDisk": "A String", # The source disk used to create this snapshot.
+        "sourceDiskEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source disk. Required if the source disk is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "sourceDiskForRecoveryCheckpoint": "A String", # The source disk whose recovery checkpoint will be used to create this snapshot.
+        "sourceDiskId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this snapshot
+        "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this snapshot.
+        "sourceInstantSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # Customer provided encryption key when creating Snapshot from Instant Snapshot.
+          "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+          "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+          "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+          "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+          "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+        },
+        "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this snapshot. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact instant snapshot that was used.
+        "sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicy": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.
+        "sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicyId": "A String", # [Output Only] ID of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.
+        "storageBytes": "A String", # [Output Only] A size of the storage used by the snapshot.
+        "storageBytesStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] An indicator whether storageBytes is in a stable state or it is being adjusted as a result of shared storage reallocation. This status can either be UPDATING, meaning the size of the snapshot is being updated, or UP_TO_DATE, meaning the size of the snapshot is up-to-date.
+        "storageLocations": [ # Cloud Storage bucket storage location of the snapshot (regional or multi-regional).
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "userLicenses": [ # [Output Only] A list of user provided licenses represented by a list of URLs to the license resource.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+      "purgeTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.
+      "satisfiesPzi": True or False, # Output only. [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+      "satisfiesPzs": True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.
+      "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the recoverable snapshot.
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#recoverableSnapshotList", # [Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshotList for lists of recoverablesnapshots.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "unreachables": [ # [Output Only] Unreachable resources. end_interface: MixerListResponseWithEtagBuilder
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "warning": { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    recover(project, recoverableSnapshot, requestId=None, snapshotName=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Recovers the specified RecoverableSnapshot.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project Id of the request (required)
+  recoverableSnapshot: string, Name of the recoverable resource to recover (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  snapshotName: string, Name of the snapshot after the recovery The name will be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name will be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character will be a lowercase letter, and all following characters can be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
+

+    setIamPolicy(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "bindings": [ # Flatten Policy to create a backward compatible wire-format. Deprecated. Use 'policy' to specify bindings.
+    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
+      "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Flatten Policy to create a backward compatible wire-format. Deprecated. Use 'policy' to specify the etag.
+  "policy": { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** ``` { "bindings": [ { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin", "members": [ "user:mike@example.com", "group:admins@example.com", "domain:google.com", "serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com" ] }, { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer", "members": [ "user:eve@example.com" ], "condition": { "title": "expirable access", "description": "Does not grant access after Sep 2020", "expression": "request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')", } } ], "etag": "BwWWja0YfJA=", "version": 3 } ``` **YAML example:** ``` bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 ``` For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/). # REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the 'resource'. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is in general a valid policy but certain services (like Projects) might reject them.
+    "auditConfigs": [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
+      { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { "audit_configs": [ { "service": "allServices", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" }, { "log_type": "ADMIN_READ" } ] }, { "service": "sampleservice.googleapis.com", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ" }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE", "exempted_members": [ "user:aliya@example.com" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
+        "auditLogConfigs": [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
+          { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
+            "exemptedMembers": [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+            "logType": "A String", # The log type that this config enables.
+          },
+        ],
+        "service": "A String", # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
+      },
+    ],
+    "bindings": [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
+      { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
+        "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+          "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+          "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+          "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+          "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+        },
+        "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
+      },
+    ],
+    "etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+    "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members`, or principals, to a single `role`. Principals can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** ``` { "bindings": [ { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin", "members": [ "user:mike@example.com", "group:admins@example.com", "domain:google.com", "serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com" ] }, { "role": "roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer", "members": [ "user:eve@example.com" ], "condition": { "title": "expirable access", "description": "Does not grant access after Sep 2020", "expression": "request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z')", } } ], "etag": "BwWWja0YfJA=", "version": 3 } ``` **YAML example:** ``` bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time < timestamp('2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z') etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 ``` For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  "auditConfigs": [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
+    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { "audit_configs": [ { "service": "allServices", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" }, { "log_type": "ADMIN_READ" } ] }, { "service": "sampleservice.googleapis.com", "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ" }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE", "exempted_members": [ "user:aliya@example.com" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.
+      "auditLogConfigs": [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
+        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { "audit_log_configs": [ { "log_type": "DATA_READ", "exempted_members": [ "user:jose@example.com" ] }, { "log_type": "DATA_WRITE" } ] } This enables 'DATA_READ' and 'DATA_WRITE' logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
+          "exemptedMembers": [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "logType": "A String", # The log type that this config enables.
+        },
+      ],
+      "service": "A String", # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
+    },
+  ],
+  "bindings": [ # Associates a list of `members`, or principals, with a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one principal. The `bindings` in a `Policy` can refer to up to 1,500 principals; up to 250 of these principals can be Google groups. Each occurrence of a principal counts towards these limits. For example, if the `bindings` grant 50 different roles to `user:alice@example.com`, and not to any other principal, then you can add another 1,450 principals to the `bindings` in the `Policy`.
+    { # Associates `members`, or principals, with a `role`.
+      "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the principals in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      "members": [ # Specifies the principals requesting access for a Google Cloud resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. Does not include identities that come from external identity providers (IdPs) through identity federation. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `serviceAccount:{projectid}.svc.id.goog[{namespace}/{kubernetes-sa}]`: An identifier for a [Kubernetes service account](https://cloud.google.com/kubernetes-engine/docs/how-to/kubernetes-service-accounts). For example, `my-project.svc.id.goog[my-namespace/my-kubernetes-sa]`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workforce identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: All workforce identities in a group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All workforce identities with a specific attribute value. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workforce identity pool. * `principal://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: A single identity in a workload identity pool. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/group/{group_id}`: A workload identity pool group. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/attribute.{attribute_name}/{attribute_value}`: All identities in a workload identity pool with a certain attribute. * `principalSet://iam.googleapis.com/projects/{project_number}/locations/global/workloadIdentityPools/{pool_id}/*`: All identities in a workload identity pool. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/{pool_id}/subject/{subject_attribute_value}`: Deleted single identity in a workforce identity pool. For example, `deleted:principal://iam.googleapis.com/locations/global/workforcePools/my-pool-id/subject/my-subject-attribute-value`.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "role": "A String", # Role that is assigned to the list of `members`, or principals. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`. For an overview of the IAM roles and permissions, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/roles-overview). For a list of the available pre-defined roles, see [here](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/understanding-roles).
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  "version": 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}

+

+
+

+    testIamPermissions(project, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "permissions": [ # The set of permissions to check for the 'resource'. Permissions with wildcards (such as '*' or 'storage.*') are not allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "permissions": [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html
index a88f2029b4..c294464803 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendBuckets.html
@@ -305,6 +305,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource.
   "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket.
@@ -421,6 +422,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource.
   "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket.
@@ -617,6 +619,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource.
       "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket.
@@ -711,6 +714,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource.
       "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket.
@@ -821,6 +825,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kind": "compute#backendBucket", # Type of the resource.
   "loadBalancingScheme": "A String", # The value can only be INTERNAL_MANAGED for cross-region internal layer 7 load balancer. If loadBalancingScheme is not specified, the backend bucket can be used by classic global external load balancers, or global application external load balancers, or both.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "usedBy": [ # [Output Only] List of resources referencing that backend bucket.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html
index 4159117b8e..397ae69557 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionBackendServices.html
@@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1609,7 +1609,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2129,7 +2129,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2665,7 +2665,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -3541,7 +3541,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionCommitments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionCommitments.html
index aec7913326..b42e336069 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionCommitments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionCommitments.html
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
               "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
               "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-              "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+              "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
               "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
               "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
               "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
           "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
           "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
           "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html
index 3dab17577b..1dd9bb724d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html
@@ -462,6 +462,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
   "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
   "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
     "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
@@ -874,6 +879,16 @@ 
Method Details

   "sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used.
   "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot
   "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used.
+  "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage
+  "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified.
+  "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+  },
+  "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used.
   "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot
   "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
@@ -1093,6 +1108,16 @@ 
Method Details

   "sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used.
   "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot
   "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used.
+  "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage
+  "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified.
+  "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+  },
+  "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used.
   "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot
   "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
@@ -1359,6 +1384,16 @@ 
Method Details

       "sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used.
       "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot
       "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used.
+      "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage
+      "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified.
+      "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+        "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+        "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+        "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+        "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+        "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+      },
+      "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used.
       "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot
       "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
         "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
@@ -2452,6 +2487,16 @@ 
Method Details

   "sourceImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The ID value of the image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source image ID would identify the exact version of the image that was used.
   "sourceInstantSnapshot": "A String", # The source instant snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - projects/project/zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot - zones/zone/instantSnapshots/instantSnapshot
   "sourceInstantSnapshotId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used.
+  "sourceMachineImage": "A String", # The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage
+  "sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": "A String", # Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified.
+  "sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
+    "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
+    "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "A String", # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used. For example: "kmsKeyServiceAccount": "name@project_id.iam.gserviceaccount.com/
+    "rawKey": "A String", # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rawKey": "SGVsbG8gZnJvbSBHb29nbGUgQ2xvdWQgUGxhdGZvcm0="
+    "rsaEncryptedKey": "A String", # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. You can provide either the rawKey or the rsaEncryptedKey. For example: "rsaEncryptedKey": "ieCx/NcW06PcT7Ep1X6LUTc/hLvUDYyzSZPPVCVPTVEohpeHASqC8uw5TzyO9U+Fka9JFH z0mBibXUInrC/jEk014kCK/NPjYgEMOyssZ4ZINPKxlUh2zn1bV+MCaTICrdmuSBTWlUUiFoD D6PYznLwh8ZNdaheCeZ8ewEXgFQ8V+sDroLaN3Xs3MDTXQEMMoNUXMCZEIpg9Vtp9x2oe==" The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+    "sha256": "A String", # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+  },
+  "sourceMachineImageId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used.
   "sourceSnapshot": "A String", # The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot
   "sourceSnapshotEncryptionKey": { # The customer-supplied encryption key of the source snapshot. Required if the source snapshot is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key The fully-qualifed key name may be returned for resource GET requests. For example: "kmsKeyName": "projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeyVersions/1
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html
index 251158ec37..20599cddda 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html
@@ -1117,7 +1117,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
     "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
-      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
     },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
@@ -1375,7 +1375,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
     "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
-      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
     },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
@@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
         "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
-          "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair.
+          "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
         },
       },
       "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
@@ -2381,7 +2381,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
     "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
-      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
     },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
@@ -4311,7 +4311,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
     "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
-      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
     },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html
index 46aac07dbd..63647681a9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstanceTemplates.html
@@ -549,6 +549,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
         "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
       },
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
       "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
     },
@@ -918,6 +919,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
         "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
       },
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
       "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
     },
@@ -1422,6 +1424,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
             "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
           },
+          "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
           "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
           "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
         },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html
index a709284fde..90f44b1c4e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionInstances.html
@@ -93,6 +93,16 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # A transient resource used in compute.instances.bulkInsert and compute.regionInstances.bulkInsert . This resource is not persisted anywhere, it is used only for processing the requests.
   "count": "A String", # The maximum number of instances to create.
+  "instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { # A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create. # A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create.
+    "instanceSelections": { # Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection.
+      "a_key": { # Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used.
+        "machineTypes": [ # Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+        "rank": "A String", # Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0.
+      },
+    },
+  },
   "instanceProperties": { # The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided.
     "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
       "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
@@ -391,6 +401,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
         "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
       },
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
       "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html
index de1f24d826..ddb1c0fd43 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionSnapshots.html
@@ -283,6 +283,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
   "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
   "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
     "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
@@ -425,6 +430,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
   "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
   "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
     "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
@@ -647,6 +657,11 @@ 
Method Details

       "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
       "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
         "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionUrlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionUrlMaps.html
index 53f78d07b9..56d8b3918e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionUrlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionUrlMaps.html
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1262,7 +1262,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1272,7 +1272,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1458,7 +1458,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1885,7 +1885,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1912,7 +1912,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1922,7 +1922,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2024,7 +2024,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2034,7 +2034,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2060,7 +2060,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2070,7 +2070,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2164,7 +2164,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2174,7 +2174,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2216,7 +2216,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2226,7 +2226,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2360,7 +2360,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2370,7 +2370,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2540,7 +2540,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2550,7 +2550,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2577,7 +2577,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2587,7 +2587,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2689,7 +2689,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2699,7 +2699,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2725,7 +2725,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2735,7 +2735,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2829,7 +2829,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2839,7 +2839,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2881,7 +2881,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2891,7 +2891,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3035,7 +3035,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3325,7 +3325,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3335,7 +3335,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3362,7 +3362,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3372,7 +3372,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3474,7 +3474,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3484,7 +3484,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3510,7 +3510,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3520,7 +3520,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3614,7 +3614,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3624,7 +3624,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3666,7 +3666,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3676,7 +3676,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3810,7 +3810,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3820,7 +3820,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4079,7 +4079,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4089,7 +4089,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4116,7 +4116,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4126,7 +4126,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4228,7 +4228,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4238,7 +4238,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4264,7 +4264,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4274,7 +4274,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4368,7 +4368,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4378,7 +4378,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4420,7 +4420,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4564,7 +4564,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4574,7 +4574,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.reservations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.reservations.html
index 170258b8cd..f02c1b31c8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.reservations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.reservations.html
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
           "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
           "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
           "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html
index 57b01b11db..91aba27d2d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.routers.html
@@ -354,6 +354,11 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
           "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
           "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+          "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+            "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+          },
           "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
           "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
           "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -968,6 +973,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -1682,6 +1692,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -1991,6 +2006,11 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
       "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+      "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -2447,6 +2467,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -3042,6 +3067,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -3219,6 +3249,11 @@ 
Method Details

     ],
     "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
     "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+    "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+      "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+    },
     "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
     "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
     "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
@@ -3432,6 +3467,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html
index ccaf6ba7e0..8407ef9c7e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.snapshots.html
@@ -169,6 +169,11 @@ 
Method Details

           "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
           "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
           "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+          "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+            "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+          },
           "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
           "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
             "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
@@ -440,6 +445,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
   "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
   "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
     "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
@@ -580,6 +590,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
   "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
   "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
     "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
@@ -801,6 +816,11 @@ 
Method Details

       "locationHint": "A String", # An opaque location hint used to place the snapshot close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       "maxRetentionDays": 42, # Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "params": { # Additional snapshot params. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.
       "resourceStatus": { # [Output only] ResourceStatus of the Snapshot resource
         "scheduledDeletionTime": "A String", # [Output only] Scheduled deletion time of the snapshot. The snapshot will be deleted by the at any point within one hour after the deletion time.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.urlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.urlMaps.html
index 4c897f5457..9982e85cd8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.urlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.urlMaps.html
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1084,7 +1084,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1186,7 +1186,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1222,7 +1222,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1232,7 +1232,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1336,7 +1336,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1388,7 +1388,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1532,7 +1532,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1708,7 +1708,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1820,7 +1820,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1830,7 +1830,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1856,7 +1856,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1960,7 +1960,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1970,7 +1970,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2012,7 +2012,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2022,7 +2022,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2156,7 +2156,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2571,7 +2571,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2581,7 +2581,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2608,7 +2608,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2618,7 +2618,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2720,7 +2720,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2730,7 +2730,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2756,7 +2756,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2766,7 +2766,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2860,7 +2860,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2870,7 +2870,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2912,7 +2912,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2922,7 +2922,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3056,7 +3056,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3066,7 +3066,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3235,7 +3235,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3245,7 +3245,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3272,7 +3272,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3282,7 +3282,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3384,7 +3384,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3394,7 +3394,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3420,7 +3420,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3430,7 +3430,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3524,7 +3524,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3534,7 +3534,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3576,7 +3576,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3586,7 +3586,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3720,7 +3720,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3730,7 +3730,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4018,7 +4018,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4028,7 +4028,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4055,7 +4055,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4065,7 +4065,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4167,7 +4167,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4177,7 +4177,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4203,7 +4203,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4213,7 +4213,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4307,7 +4307,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4317,7 +4317,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4359,7 +4359,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4369,7 +4369,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4503,7 +4503,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4513,7 +4513,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4774,7 +4774,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4784,7 +4784,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4811,7 +4811,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4821,7 +4821,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4923,7 +4923,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4933,7 +4933,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4959,7 +4959,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4969,7 +4969,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -5063,7 +5063,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -5073,7 +5073,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -5115,7 +5115,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -5125,7 +5125,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -5259,7 +5259,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -5269,7 +5269,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html
index e306c205d1..16a8ed6e58 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.wireGroups.html
@@ -262,6 +262,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String",
   "serviceLevel": { # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration. # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration.
@@ -348,6 +349,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String",
   "serviceLevel": { # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration. # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration.
@@ -566,6 +568,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
       "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       "selfLinkWithId": "A String",
       "serviceLevel": { # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration. # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration.
@@ -685,6 +688,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "selfLinkWithId": "A String",
   "serviceLevel": { # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration. # Service level details determined for the wire group configuration.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html
index 5790efad0e..1296693f10 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.zoneQueuedResources.html
@@ -131,6 +131,16 @@ 
Method Details

         { # QueuedResource represents a request for future capacity. The capacity is delivered in the form of other GCE resources, either Instances or Reservations.
           "bulkInsertInstanceResource": { # A transient resource used in compute.instances.bulkInsert and compute.regionInstances.bulkInsert . This resource is not persisted anywhere, it is used only for processing the requests. # Specification of VM instances to create.
             "count": "A String", # The maximum number of instances to create.
+            "instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { # A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create. # A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create.
+              "instanceSelections": { # Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection.
+                "a_key": { # Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used.
+                  "machineTypes": [ # Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "rank": "A String", # Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0.
+                },
+              },
+            },
             "instanceProperties": { # The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided.
               "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
                 "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
@@ -429,6 +439,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
                   "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
                 },
+                "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
                 "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
                 "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
               },
@@ -886,6 +897,16 @@ 
Method Details

     { # QueuedResource represents a request for future capacity. The capacity is delivered in the form of other GCE resources, either Instances or Reservations.
   "bulkInsertInstanceResource": { # A transient resource used in compute.instances.bulkInsert and compute.regionInstances.bulkInsert . This resource is not persisted anywhere, it is used only for processing the requests. # Specification of VM instances to create.
     "count": "A String", # The maximum number of instances to create.
+    "instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { # A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create. # A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create.
+      "instanceSelections": { # Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection.
+        "a_key": { # Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used.
+          "machineTypes": [ # Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "rank": "A String", # Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0.
+        },
+      },
+    },
     "instanceProperties": { # The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided.
       "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
         "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
@@ -1184,6 +1205,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
           "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
         },
+        "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
         "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
         "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
       },
@@ -1334,6 +1356,16 @@ 
Method Details

 { # QueuedResource represents a request for future capacity. The capacity is delivered in the form of other GCE resources, either Instances or Reservations.
   "bulkInsertInstanceResource": { # A transient resource used in compute.instances.bulkInsert and compute.regionInstances.bulkInsert . This resource is not persisted anywhere, it is used only for processing the requests. # Specification of VM instances to create.
     "count": "A String", # The maximum number of instances to create.
+    "instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { # A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create. # A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create.
+      "instanceSelections": { # Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection.
+        "a_key": { # Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used.
+          "machineTypes": [ # Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "rank": "A String", # Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0.
+        },
+      },
+    },
     "instanceProperties": { # The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided.
       "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
         "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
@@ -1632,6 +1664,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
           "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
         },
+        "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
         "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
         "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
       },
@@ -1912,6 +1945,16 @@ 
Method Details

     { # QueuedResource represents a request for future capacity. The capacity is delivered in the form of other GCE resources, either Instances or Reservations.
       "bulkInsertInstanceResource": { # A transient resource used in compute.instances.bulkInsert and compute.regionInstances.bulkInsert . This resource is not persisted anywhere, it is used only for processing the requests. # Specification of VM instances to create.
         "count": "A String", # The maximum number of instances to create.
+        "instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { # A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create. # A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create.
+          "instanceSelections": { # Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection.
+            "a_key": { # Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used.
+              "machineTypes": [ # Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "rank": "A String", # Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0.
+            },
+          },
+        },
         "instanceProperties": { # The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided.
           "advancedMachineFeatures": { # Specifies options for controlling advanced machine features. Options that would traditionally be configured in a BIOS belong here. Features that require operating system support may have corresponding entries in the GuestOsFeatures of an Image (e.g., whether or not the OS in the Image supports nested virtualization being enabled or disabled). # Controls for advanced machine-related behavior features. Note that for MachineImage, this is not supported yet.
             "enableNestedVirtualization": True or False, # Whether to enable nested virtualization or not (default is false).
@@ -2210,6 +2253,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "nanos": 42, # Span of time that's a fraction of a second at nanosecond resolution. Durations less than one second are represented with a 0 `seconds` field and a positive `nanos` field. Must be from 0 to 999,999,999 inclusive.
               "seconds": "A String", # Span of time at a resolution of a second. Must be from 0 to 315,576,000,000 inclusive. Note: these bounds are computed from: 60 sec/min * 60 min/hr * 24 hr/day * 365.25 days/year * 10000 years
             },
+            "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
             "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
             "windowsLicenseOptimizationMode": "A String", # Represents the Windows Server License Optimization Mode of the VM. If unspecified, the default mode is `OFF`.
           },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html
index f86865aea2..372acc3adf 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.backendServices.html
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
           "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-            "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+            "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
             "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
               "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
               "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1635,7 +1635,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2033,7 +2033,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2330,7 +2330,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2643,7 +2643,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -3422,7 +3422,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html
index bc2e50507e..3fc6d9c145 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.firewallPolicies.html
@@ -1058,6 +1058,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -1516,6 +1517,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -1842,6 +1844,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+      "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
       "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -2219,6 +2222,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.forwardingRules.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.forwardingRules.html
index 008fb6184a..2536b97586 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.forwardingRules.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.forwardingRules.html
@@ -184,6 +184,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
           "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
           "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+          "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
           "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
             { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
               "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -438,6 +439,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -512,6 +514,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -715,6 +718,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
         { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
           "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -819,6 +823,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.globalForwardingRules.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.globalForwardingRules.html
index ba0ebdbfd7..85ac57654b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.globalForwardingRules.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.globalForwardingRules.html
@@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -369,6 +370,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -571,6 +573,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
         { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
           "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -674,6 +677,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html
index 2179ee19af..60d96b79ea 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.html
@@ -519,6 +519,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the reservationBlocks Resource.

 
+

+  reservationSubBlocks()
+

+
Returns the reservationSubBlocks Resource.

+
 

   reservations()
 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceGroupManagers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceGroupManagers.html
index 1984a08466..c13c1528dd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceGroupManagers.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceGroupManagers.html
@@ -402,6 +402,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
             "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
             "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+            "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+              "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+            },
           },
           "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
           "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -1385,6 +1388,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -1616,6 +1622,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -1976,6 +1985,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
         "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
         "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+        "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+          "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+        },
       },
       "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
       "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -2552,6 +2564,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -4435,6 +4450,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
index 3b62e25e38..688ca8e6ea 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
@@ -408,6 +408,7 @@ 
Method Details

               },
               "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
               "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+              "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
               "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
             },
             "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -915,6 +916,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1290,6 +1292,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1750,6 +1753,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
           "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+          "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
           "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
         },
         "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html
index 4280dfb78a..22f2491eb8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html
@@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-          "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+          "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
             "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
             "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
               { # Metadata
@@ -1061,6 +1061,7 @@ 
Method Details

             },
             "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
             "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+            "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
             "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
           },
           "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
@@ -1671,6 +1672,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -2526,7 +2528,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
     "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
     "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
       { # Metadata
@@ -2691,6 +2693,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
     "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+    "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
     "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
   },
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
@@ -3538,7 +3541,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
     "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
     "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
       { # Metadata
@@ -3703,6 +3706,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
     "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+    "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
     "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
   },
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
@@ -4055,7 +4059,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-      "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+      "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
         "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
         "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
           { # Metadata
@@ -4220,6 +4224,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
         "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+        "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
         "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
       },
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
@@ -6396,6 +6401,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
   "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+  "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
   "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
 }
 
@@ -8033,7 +8039,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
     "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
     "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
       { # Metadata
@@ -8198,6 +8204,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
     "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+    "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
     "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
   },
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html
index a66ea1ec26..357cde7963 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html
@@ -522,6 +522,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -739,6 +740,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1095,6 +1097,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1312,6 +1315,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1749,6 +1753,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
           "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+          "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
           "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
         },
         "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1966,6 +1971,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
           "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+          "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
           "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
         },
         "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html
index ae9e5908fa..18bdc56de5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.networkFirewallPolicies.html
@@ -825,6 +825,7 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
           "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+          "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
           "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
           "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
           "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -1325,6 +1326,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -1788,6 +1790,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -2113,6 +2116,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+      "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
       "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -2338,6 +2342,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html
index 57ddf42aa7..02c2bdbe74 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.organizationSecurityPolicies.html
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ 
Compute Engine API . 
   addAssociation(securityPolicy, body=None, replaceExistingAssociation=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Inserts an association for the specified security policy. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.

+
Inserts an association for the specified security policy. This has billing implications. Projects in the hierarchy with effective hierarchical security policies will be automatically enrolled into Cloud Armor Enterprise if not already enrolled. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.

 

   addRule(securityPolicy, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Inserts a rule into a security policy.

@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Method Details

 

     addAssociation(securityPolicy, body=None, replaceExistingAssociation=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Inserts an association for the specified security policy. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.
+  
Inserts an association for the specified security policy. This has billing implications. Projects in the hierarchy with effective hierarchical security policies will be automatically enrolled into Cloud Armor Enterprise if not already enrolled. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.
 
 Args:
   securityPolicy: string, Name of the security policy to update. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html
index 105e202350..c42d4601df 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionBackendServices.html
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1461,7 +1461,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1775,7 +1775,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2427,7 +2427,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html
index eec22d2b2c..a4c48666e3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionCommitments.html
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
               "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
               "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-              "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+              "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
               "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
               "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
               "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
           "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
           "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
           "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1343,7 +1343,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html
index 6097e209b5..f82ba0dc26 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceGroupManagers.html
@@ -1088,6 +1088,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -1319,6 +1322,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -1679,6 +1685,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
         "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
         "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+        "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+          "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+        },
       },
       "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
       "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -2255,6 +2264,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
@@ -4138,6 +4150,9 @@ 
Method Details

     "defaultActionOnFailure": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on a failed VM. If the value of the onFailedHealthCheck field is `DEFAULT_ACTION`, then the same action also applies to the VMs on which your application fails a health check. Valid values are - REPAIR (default): MIG automatically repairs a failed VM by recreating it. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG. - DO_NOTHING: MIG does not repair a failed VM.
     "forceUpdateOnRepair": "A String", # A bit indicating whether to forcefully apply the group's latest configuration when repairing a VM. Valid options are: - NO (default): If configuration updates are available, they are not forcefully applied during repair. Instead, configuration updates are applied according to the group's update policy. - YES: If configuration updates are available, they are applied during repair.
     "onFailedHealthCheck": "A String", # The action that a MIG performs on an unhealthy VM. A VM is marked as unhealthy when the application running on that VM fails a health check. Valid values are: - DEFAULT_ACTION (default): MIG uses the same action configured for instanceLifecyclePolicy.defaultActionOnFailure field. - REPAIR: MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it. - DO_NOTHING: MIG doesn't repair an unhealthy VM. For more information, see About repairing VMs in a MIG.
+    "onRepair": { # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG. # Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.
+      "allowChangingZone": "A String", # Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.
+    },
   },
   "instanceTemplate": "A String", # The URL of the instance template that is specified for this managed instance group. The group uses this template to create all new instances in the managed instance group. The templates for existing instances in the group do not change unless you run recreateInstances, run applyUpdatesToInstances, or set the group's updatePolicy.type to PROACTIVE.
   "kind": "compute#instanceGroupManager", # [Output Only] The resource type, which is always compute#instanceGroupManager for managed instance groups.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html
index b4693d6f33..c542534bf7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstanceTemplates.html
@@ -518,6 +518,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -845,6 +846,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
@@ -1306,6 +1308,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
           "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+          "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
           "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
         },
         "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html
index da13a4bb64..c5a3768487 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html
@@ -361,6 +361,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "preemptible": True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
       "provisioningModel": "A String", # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
+      "skipGuestOsShutdown": True or False, # Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.
       "terminationTime": "A String", # Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.
     },
     "serviceAccounts": [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html
index 33eef6bedb..eaebb0b4a4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html
@@ -854,6 +854,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -1471,6 +1472,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -1797,6 +1799,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+      "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
       "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
@@ -2023,6 +2026,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "parent": "A String", # [Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.
+  "policyType": "A String", # The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "ruleTupleCount": 42, # [Output Only] Total count of all firewall policy rule tuples. A firewall policy can not exceed a set number of tuples.
   "rules": [ # A list of rules that belong to this policy. There must always be a default rule (rule with priority 2147483647 and match "*"). If no rules are provided when creating a firewall policy, a default rule with action "allow" will be added.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html
index 14178939c1..fb5bbee301 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionUrlMaps.html
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -832,7 +832,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1017,7 +1017,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1119,7 +1119,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1129,7 +1129,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1155,7 +1155,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1165,7 +1165,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1311,7 +1311,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1455,7 +1455,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1868,7 +1868,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1878,7 +1878,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1905,7 +1905,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1915,7 +1915,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2017,7 +2017,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2027,7 +2027,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2053,7 +2053,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2063,7 +2063,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2157,7 +2157,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2209,7 +2209,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2219,7 +2219,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2353,7 +2353,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2363,7 +2363,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2531,7 +2531,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2541,7 +2541,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2568,7 +2568,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2578,7 +2578,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2680,7 +2680,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2690,7 +2690,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2716,7 +2716,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2726,7 +2726,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2830,7 +2830,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2872,7 +2872,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2882,7 +2882,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3016,7 +3016,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3026,7 +3026,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3313,7 +3313,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3323,7 +3323,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3350,7 +3350,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3360,7 +3360,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3462,7 +3462,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3472,7 +3472,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3498,7 +3498,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3508,7 +3508,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3602,7 +3602,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3612,7 +3612,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3654,7 +3654,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3664,7 +3664,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3798,7 +3798,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3808,7 +3808,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4064,7 +4064,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4074,7 +4074,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4101,7 +4101,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4111,7 +4111,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4213,7 +4213,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4223,7 +4223,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4249,7 +4249,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4259,7 +4259,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4353,7 +4353,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4363,7 +4363,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4405,7 +4405,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4415,7 +4415,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4549,7 +4549,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4559,7 +4559,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html
index 122b0e504d..db11cbc6f7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationBlocks.html
@@ -138,6 +138,8 @@ 
Method Details

         "windowStartTime": "A String", # The current start time of the maintenance window. This timestamp value is in RFC3339 text format.
       },
     },
+    "reservationSubBlockCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block.
+    "reservationSubBlockInUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of in-use reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block. If at least one VM is running on a subBlock, it is considered in-use.
     "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
     "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
     "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation block.
@@ -195,6 +197,8 @@ 
Method Details

           "windowStartTime": "A String", # The current start time of the maintenance window. This timestamp value is in RFC3339 text format.
         },
       },
+      "reservationSubBlockCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block.
+      "reservationSubBlockInUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of in-use reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block. If at least one VM is running on a subBlock, it is considered in-use.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
       "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation block.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..32e75c2d2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservationSubBlocks.html
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+
+
+
+
Compute Engine API . reservationSubBlocks

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  get(project, zone, parentName, reservationSubBlock, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves information about the specified reservation subBlock.

+

+  list(project, zone, parentName, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves a list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    get(project, zone, parentName, reservationSubBlock, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves information about the specified reservation subBlock.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  parentName: string, The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name} (required)
+  reservationSubBlock: string, The name of the reservation subBlock. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be a resource ID. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "resource": { # Represents a reservation subBlock resource.
+    "count": 42, # [Output Only] The number of hosts that are allocated in this reservation subBlock.
+    "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+    "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+    "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock.
+    "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.
+    "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?
+    "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock.
+      "block": "A String", # The hash of the capacity block within the cluster.
+      "cluster": "A String", # The cluster name of the reservation subBlock.
+      "subBlock": "A String", # The hash of the capacity sub-block within the capacity block.
+    },
+    "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+    "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+    "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation subBlock.
+    "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] Zone in which the reservation subBlock resides.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list(project, zone, parentName, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves a list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  parentName: string, The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name} (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.
+  "id": "A String", # Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of reservation subBlock resources.
+    { # Represents a reservation subBlock resource.
+      "count": 42, # [Output Only] The number of hosts that are allocated in this reservation subBlock.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock.
+      "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.
+      "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?
+      "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock.
+        "block": "A String", # The hash of the capacity block within the cluster.
+        "cluster": "A String", # The cluster name of the reservation subBlock.
+        "subBlock": "A String", # The hash of the capacity sub-block within the capacity block.
+      },
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+      "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation subBlock.
+      "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] Zone in which the reservation subBlock resides.
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for a list of reservation subBlocks.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html
index 755f93c186..fcdf321c1d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.reservations.html
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
           "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
           "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
           "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -895,7 +895,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html
index 08367d33ec..3e8ddd6ca0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.routers.html
@@ -333,6 +333,11 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
           "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
           "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+          "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+            "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+              "a_key": "A String",
+            },
+          },
           "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
           "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
         },
@@ -814,6 +819,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
 }

@@ -1461,6 +1471,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
 }
@@ -1765,6 +1780,11 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
       "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
       "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+      "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
     },
@@ -2145,6 +2165,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
 }
@@ -2591,6 +2616,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
 }
@@ -2764,6 +2794,11 @@ 
Method Details

     ],
     "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
     "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+    "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+      "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+    },
     "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
     "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   },
@@ -2973,6 +3008,11 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "nccGateway": "A String", # URI of the ncc_gateway to which this router associated.
   "network": "A String", # URI of the network to which this router belongs.
+  "params": { # Additional router parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "123/env" : "prod"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
 }
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html
index ebd3386d88..e80594907d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.urlMaps.html
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ 
Method Details

                             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                             },
                           ],
                           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1183,7 +1183,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1323,7 +1323,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1333,7 +1333,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1375,7 +1375,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1676,7 +1676,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1713,7 +1713,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1815,7 +1815,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1825,7 +1825,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1851,7 +1851,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1861,7 +1861,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1955,7 +1955,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1965,7 +1965,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2007,7 +2007,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2017,7 +2017,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2151,7 +2151,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2562,7 +2562,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2572,7 +2572,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2599,7 +2599,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2609,7 +2609,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2711,7 +2711,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2721,7 +2721,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2747,7 +2747,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2757,7 +2757,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2851,7 +2851,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2861,7 +2861,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2903,7 +2903,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2913,7 +2913,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3047,7 +3047,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3057,7 +3057,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3224,7 +3224,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3234,7 +3234,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3261,7 +3261,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3271,7 +3271,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3373,7 +3373,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3383,7 +3383,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3409,7 +3409,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3419,7 +3419,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3513,7 +3513,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3523,7 +3523,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3565,7 +3565,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3575,7 +3575,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3709,7 +3709,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3719,7 +3719,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4004,7 +4004,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4014,7 +4014,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4041,7 +4041,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4051,7 +4051,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4153,7 +4153,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4163,7 +4163,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4189,7 +4189,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4199,7 +4199,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4293,7 +4293,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4303,7 +4303,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4345,7 +4345,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4355,7 +4355,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4489,7 +4489,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4499,7 +4499,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4757,7 +4757,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4767,7 +4767,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4794,7 +4794,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4804,7 +4804,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4906,7 +4906,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4916,7 +4916,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4942,7 +4942,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4952,7 +4952,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -5046,7 +5046,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -5056,7 +5056,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -5098,7 +5098,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -5108,7 +5108,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -5242,7 +5242,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -5252,7 +5252,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.vpnTunnels.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.vpnTunnels.html
index c33d9a38bf..627ceaeb3e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.vpnTunnels.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.vpnTunnels.html
@@ -132,6 +132,33 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": { # Name of the scope containing this set of VPN tunnels.
       "vpnTunnels": [ # A list of VPN tunnels contained in this scope.
         { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview.
+          "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol.
+            "phase1": {
+              "dh": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "encryption": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "integrity": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "prf": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+            "phase2": {
+              "encryption": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "integrity": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "pfs": [
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
+          },
           "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
           "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel.
@@ -356,6 +383,33 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview.
+  "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol.
+    "phase1": {
+      "dh": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "encryption": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "integrity": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "prf": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+    "phase2": {
+      "encryption": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "integrity": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "pfs": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  },
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel.
@@ -400,6 +454,33 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview.
+  "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol.
+    "phase1": {
+      "dh": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "encryption": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "integrity": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "prf": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+    "phase2": {
+      "encryption": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "integrity": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "pfs": [
+        "A String",
+      ],
+    },
+  },
   "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
   "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel.
@@ -573,6 +654,33 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
   "items": [ # A list of VpnTunnel resources.
     { # Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview.
+      "cipherSuite": { # User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol.
+        "phase1": {
+          "dh": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "encryption": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "integrity": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "prf": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+        "phase2": {
+          "encryption": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "integrity": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "pfs": [
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
+      },
       "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
       "detailedStatus": "A String", # [Output Only] Detailed status message for the VPN tunnel.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html
index d2d5020818..3e0adc0eca 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.wireGroups.html
@@ -261,6 +261,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "topology": { # Topology details for the wire group. # Topology details for the wire group configuration.
     "endpoints": [ # Topology details for all endpoints in the wire group.
@@ -325,6 +326,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "topology": { # Topology details for the wire group. # Topology details for the wire group configuration.
     "endpoints": [ # Topology details for all endpoints in the wire group.
@@ -520,6 +522,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
       "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
       "topology": { # Topology details for the wire group. # Topology details for the wire group configuration.
         "endpoints": [ # Topology details for all endpoints in the wire group.
@@ -617,6 +620,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource type. The server generates this identifier.
   "kind": "compute#wireGroup", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#wireGroups for wire groups.
   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  "reconciling": True or False, # [Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
   "topology": { # Topology details for the wire group. # Topology details for the wire group configuration.
     "endpoints": [ # Topology details for all endpoints in the wire group.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html
index 27b9abc9a3..9c12c9722e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.backendServices.html
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
           "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-            "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+            "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
             "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
               "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
               "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1298,7 +1298,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1939,7 +1939,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2977,7 +2977,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html
index 7d072a9006..58562ca095 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html
@@ -86,6 +86,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   bulkInsert(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Bulk create a set of disks.

+

+  bulkSetLabels(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, resource=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Sets the labels on many disks at once. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -588,6 +591,145 @@ 
Method Details

 }

 

 
+

+    bulkSetLabels(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, resource=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Sets the labels on many disks at once. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  "requests": [
+    {
+      "labelFingerprint": "A String", # The fingerprint of the previous set of labels for this resource, used to detect conflicts. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You may optionally provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels. Make a get() request to the resource to get the latest fingerprint.
+      "labels": { # The labels to set for this resource.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zoneOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources. Note that completed Operation resources have a limited retention period.
+  "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  "description": "A String", # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "error": { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    "errors": [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        "code": "A String", # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        "errorDetails": [ # [Output Only] An optional list of messages that contain the error details. There is a set of defined message types to use for providing details.The syntax depends on the error code. For example, QuotaExceededInfo will have details when the error code is QUOTA_EXCEEDED.
+          {
+            "errorInfo": { # Describes the cause of the error with structured details. Example of an error when contacting the "pubsub.googleapis.com" API when it is not enabled: { "reason": "API_DISABLED" "domain": "googleapis.com" "metadata": { "resource": "projects/123", "service": "pubsub.googleapis.com" } } This response indicates that the pubsub.googleapis.com API is not enabled. Example of an error that is returned when attempting to create a Spanner instance in a region that is out of stock: { "reason": "STOCKOUT" "domain": "spanner.googleapis.com", "metadata": { "availableRegions": "us-central1,us-east2" } }
+              "domain": "A String", # The logical grouping to which the "reason" belongs. The error domain is typically the registered service name of the tool or product that generates the error. Example: "pubsub.googleapis.com". If the error is generated by some common infrastructure, the error domain must be a globally unique value that identifies the infrastructure. For Google API infrastructure, the error domain is "googleapis.com".
+              "metadatas": { # Additional structured details about this error. Keys must match a regular expression of `a-z+` but should ideally be lowerCamelCase. Also, they must be limited to 64 characters in length. When identifying the current value of an exceeded limit, the units should be contained in the key, not the value. For example, rather than `{"instanceLimit": "100/request"}`, should be returned as, `{"instanceLimitPerRequest": "100"}`, if the client exceeds the number of instances that can be created in a single (batch) request.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "reason": "A String", # The reason of the error. This is a constant value that identifies the proximate cause of the error. Error reasons are unique within a particular domain of errors. This should be at most 63 characters and match a regular expression of `A-Z+[A-Z0-9]`, which represents UPPER_SNAKE_CASE.
+            },
+            "help": { # Provides links to documentation or for performing an out of band action. For example, if a quota check failed with an error indicating the calling project hasn't enabled the accessed service, this can contain a URL pointing directly to the right place in the developer console to flip the bit.
+              "links": [ # URL(s) pointing to additional information on handling the current error.
+                { # Describes a URL link.
+                  "description": "A String", # Describes what the link offers.
+                  "url": "A String", # The URL of the link.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            "localizedMessage": { # Provides a localized error message that is safe to return to the user which can be attached to an RPC error.
+              "locale": "A String", # The locale used following the specification defined at https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/bcp/bcp47.txt. Examples are: "en-US", "fr-CH", "es-MX"
+              "message": "A String", # The localized error message in the above locale.
+            },
+            "quotaInfo": { # Additional details for quota exceeded error for resource quota.
+              "dimensions": { # The map holding related quota dimensions.
+                "a_key": "A String",
+              },
+              "futureLimit": 3.14, # Future quota limit being rolled out. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limit": 3.14, # Current effective quota limit. The limit's unit depends on the quota type or metric.
+              "limitName": "A String", # The name of the quota limit.
+              "metricName": "A String", # The Compute Engine quota metric name.
+              "rolloutStatus": "A String", # Rollout status of the future quota limit.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "location": "A String", # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        "message": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "httpErrorMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  "httpErrorStatusCode": 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  "insertTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "instancesBulkInsertOperationMetadata": {
+    "perLocationStatus": { # Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "createdVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs successfully created so far.
+        "deletedVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that got deleted during rollback.
+        "failedToCreateVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs that started creating but encountered an error.
+        "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation status of BulkInsert operation - information if the flow is rolling forward or rolling back.
+        "targetVmCount": 42, # [Output Only] Count of VMs originally planned to be created.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "kind": "compute#operation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  "name": "A String", # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  "operationGroupId": "A String", # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  "operationType": "A String", # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  "progress": 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  "region": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "setCommonInstanceMetadataOperationMetadata": { # [Output Only] If the operation is for projects.setCommonInstanceMetadata, this field will contain information on all underlying zonal actions and their state.
+    "clientOperationId": "A String", # [Output Only] The client operation id.
+    "perLocationOperations": { # [Output Only] Status information per location (location name is key). Example key: zones/us-central1-a
+      "a_key": {
+        "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # [Output Only] If state is `ABANDONED` or `FAILED`, this field is populated.
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+        "state": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the action, which can be one of the following: `PROPAGATING`, `PROPAGATED`, `ABANDONED`, `FAILED`, or `DONE`.
+      },
+    },
+  },
+  "startTime": "A String", # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  "statusMessage": "A String", # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  "targetId": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  "targetLink": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  "user": "A String", # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com` or `alice_smith_identifier (global/workforcePools/example-com-us-employees)`.
+  "warnings": [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+        {
+          "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}

+

+
 

     close()
   
Close httplib2 connections.

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.firewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.firewallPolicies.html
index 3ae745525f..156b70bce5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.firewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.firewallPolicies.html
@@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -319,6 +320,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -769,6 +774,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -792,6 +798,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -845,6 +855,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -868,6 +879,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1010,6 +1025,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1033,6 +1049,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1109,6 +1129,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1132,6 +1153,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1185,6 +1210,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1208,6 +1234,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1420,6 +1450,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1443,6 +1474,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1496,6 +1531,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1519,6 +1555,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1781,6 +1821,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1804,6 +1845,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1857,6 +1902,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1880,6 +1926,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -2060,6 +2110,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -2083,6 +2134,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.forwardingRules.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.forwardingRules.html
index 7c56d6100d..f05a213184 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.forwardingRules.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.forwardingRules.html
@@ -180,6 +180,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
           "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
           "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+          "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
           "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
             { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
               "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -433,6 +434,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -506,6 +508,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -708,6 +711,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
         { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
           "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -811,6 +815,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalForwardingRules.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalForwardingRules.html
index 94e30d0c3e..cc9f2ae3e5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalForwardingRules.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.globalForwardingRules.html
@@ -292,6 +292,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -364,6 +365,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -565,6 +567,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
       "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
         { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
           "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
@@ -667,6 +670,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "pscConnectionStatus": "A String",
   "region": "A String", # [Output Only] URL of the region where the regional forwarding rule resides. This field is not applicable to global forwarding rules. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
   "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
   "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": [ # Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.
     { # Describes the auto-registration of the forwarding rule to Service Directory. The region and project of the Service Directory resource generated from this registration will be the same as this forwarding rule.
       "namespace": "A String", # Service Directory namespace to register the forwarding rule under.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html
index d799d5edfc..2b18da8615 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.html
@@ -464,6 +464,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the reservationBlocks Resource.

 
+

+  reservationSubBlocks()
+

+
Returns the reservationSubBlocks Resource.

+
 

   reservations()
 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html
index ef453e1f40..730d6d8e82 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.instances.html
@@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-          "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+          "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
             "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
             "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
               { # Metadata
@@ -2079,7 +2079,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
     "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
     "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
       { # Metadata
@@ -2293,6 +2293,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2316,6 +2317,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2367,6 +2372,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2390,6 +2396,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2806,7 +2816,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
     "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
     "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
       { # Metadata
@@ -3267,7 +3277,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-      "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+      "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
         "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
         "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
           { # Metadata
@@ -6888,7 +6898,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "lastStopTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last stop timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "lastSuspendedTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Last suspended timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   "machineType": "A String", # Full or partial URL of the machine type resource to use for this instance, in the format: zones/zone/machineTypes/machine-type. This is provided by the client when the instance is created. For example, the following is a valid partial url to a predefined machine type: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/n1-standard-1 To create a custom machine type, provide a URL to a machine type in the following format, where CPUS is 1 or an even number up to 32 (2, 4, 6, ... 24, etc), and MEMORY is the total memory for this instance. Memory must be a multiple of 256 MB and must be supplied in MB (e.g. 5 GB of memory is 5120 MB): zones/zone/machineTypes/custom-CPUS-MEMORY For example: zones/us-central1-f/machineTypes/custom-4-5120 For a full list of restrictions, read the Specifications for custom machine types.
-  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys.
+  "metadata": { # A metadata key/value entry. # The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance.
     "fingerprint": "A String", # Specifies a fingerprint for this request, which is essentially a hash of the metadata's contents and used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update metadata. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change metadata, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve the resource.
     "items": [ # Array of key/value pairs. The total size of all keys and values must be less than 512 KB.
       { # Metadata
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkFirewallPolicies.html
index d84c3a5a44..5506ce5524 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkFirewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networkFirewallPolicies.html
@@ -310,6 +310,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -333,6 +334,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -511,6 +516,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -534,6 +540,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -746,6 +756,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
+                "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
                 "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
@@ -769,6 +780,10 @@ 
Method Details

                 "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
+                "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+                "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
                 "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
@@ -822,6 +837,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
+                "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
                 "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
@@ -845,6 +861,10 @@ 
Method Details

                 "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
+                "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+                "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
                 "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
                   "A String",
                 ],
@@ -1231,6 +1251,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1254,6 +1275,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1307,6 +1332,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1330,6 +1356,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1475,6 +1505,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1498,6 +1529,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1564,6 +1599,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1587,6 +1623,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1664,6 +1704,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1687,6 +1728,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1740,6 +1785,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1763,6 +1809,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1974,6 +2024,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1997,6 +2048,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2050,6 +2105,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2073,6 +2129,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -2184,6 +2244,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -2207,6 +2268,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -2260,6 +2325,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -2283,6 +2349,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -2464,6 +2534,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -2487,6 +2558,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -2664,6 +2739,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -2687,6 +2763,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networks.html
index 9b8f68be9a..1c4596871f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.networks.html
@@ -423,6 +423,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?`. The first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters (except for the last character) must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit. The last character must be a lowercase letter or digit.
   "networkFirewallPolicyEnforcementOrder": "A String", # The network firewall policy enforcement order. Can be either AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL or BEFORE_CLASSIC_FIREWALL. Defaults to AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL if the field is not specified.
   "networkProfile": "A String", # A full or partial URL of the network profile to apply to this network. This field can be set only at resource creation time. For example, the following are valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/{api_version}/projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name} - projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name}
+  "params": { # Additional network parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "peerings": [ # [Output Only] A list of network peerings for the resource.
     { # A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.
       "autoCreateRoutes": True or False, # This field will be deprecated soon. Use the exchange_subnet_routes field instead. Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.
@@ -493,6 +498,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -516,6 +522,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -567,6 +577,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -590,6 +601,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -710,6 +725,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?`. The first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters (except for the last character) must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit. The last character must be a lowercase letter or digit.
   "networkFirewallPolicyEnforcementOrder": "A String", # The network firewall policy enforcement order. Can be either AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL or BEFORE_CLASSIC_FIREWALL. Defaults to AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL if the field is not specified.
   "networkProfile": "A String", # A full or partial URL of the network profile to apply to this network. This field can be set only at resource creation time. For example, the following are valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/{api_version}/projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name} - projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name}
+  "params": { # Additional network parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "peerings": [ # [Output Only] A list of network peerings for the resource.
     { # A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.
       "autoCreateRoutes": True or False, # This field will be deprecated soon. Use the exchange_subnet_routes field instead. Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.
@@ -895,6 +915,11 @@ 
Method Details

       "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?`. The first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters (except for the last character) must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit. The last character must be a lowercase letter or digit.
       "networkFirewallPolicyEnforcementOrder": "A String", # The network firewall policy enforcement order. Can be either AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL or BEFORE_CLASSIC_FIREWALL. Defaults to AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL if the field is not specified.
       "networkProfile": "A String", # A full or partial URL of the network profile to apply to this network. This field can be set only at resource creation time. For example, the following are valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/{api_version}/projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name} - projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name}
+      "params": { # Additional network parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+        "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid.
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
+      },
       "peerings": [ # [Output Only] A list of network peerings for the resource.
         { # A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.
           "autoCreateRoutes": True or False, # This field will be deprecated soon. Use the exchange_subnet_routes field instead. Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.
@@ -1048,6 +1073,11 @@ 
Method Details

   "name": "A String", # Name of the resource. Provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?`. The first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters (except for the last character) must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit. The last character must be a lowercase letter or digit.
   "networkFirewallPolicyEnforcementOrder": "A String", # The network firewall policy enforcement order. Can be either AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL or BEFORE_CLASSIC_FIREWALL. Defaults to AFTER_CLASSIC_FIREWALL if the field is not specified.
   "networkProfile": "A String", # A full or partial URL of the network profile to apply to this network. This field can be set only at resource creation time. For example, the following are valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/{api_version}/projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name} - projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name}
+  "params": { # Additional network parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload.
+    "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid.
+      "a_key": "A String",
+    },
+  },
   "peerings": [ # [Output Only] A list of network peerings for the resource.
     { # A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.
       "autoCreateRoutes": True or False, # This field will be deprecated soon. Use the exchange_subnet_routes field instead. Indicates whether full mesh connectivity is created and managed automatically between peered networks. Currently this field should always be true since Google Compute Engine will automatically create and manage subnetwork routes between two networks when peering state is ACTIVE.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html
index cdf5753f67..2c8ff0d70a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionBackendServices.html
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1100,7 +1100,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1371,7 +1371,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
       "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+        "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
         "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
           "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
           "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -1658,7 +1658,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
@@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "fingerprint": "A String", # Fingerprint of this resource. A hash of the contents stored in this object. This field is used in optimistic locking. This field will be ignored when inserting a BackendService. An up-to-date fingerprint must be provided in order to update the BackendService, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a BackendService.
   "haPolicy": { # Configures self-managed High Availability (HA) for External and Internal Protocol Forwarding. The backends of this regional backend service must only specify zonal network endpoint groups (NEGs) of type GCE_VM_IP. When haPolicy is set for an Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancer, the regional backend service must set the network field. All zonal NEGs must belong to the same network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. When haPolicy is specified, the set of attached network endpoints across all backends comprise an High Availability domain from which one endpoint is selected as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. haPolicy can be added only at backend service creation time. Once set up, it cannot be deleted. Note that haPolicy is not for load balancing, and therefore cannot be specified with sessionAffinity, connectionTrackingPolicy, and failoverPolicy. haPolicy requires customers to be responsible for tracking backend endpoint health and electing a leader among the healthy endpoints. Therefore, haPolicy cannot be specified with healthChecks. haPolicy can only be specified for External Passthrough Network Load Balancers and Internal Passthrough Network Load Balancers.
-    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
+    "fastIPMove": "A String", # Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.
     "leader": { # Selects one of the network endpoints attached to the backend NEGs of this service as the active endpoint (the leader) that receives all traffic. When the leader changes, there is no connection draining to persist existing connections on the old leader. You are responsible for selecting a suitable endpoint as the leader. For example, preferring a healthy endpoint over unhealthy ones. Note that this service does not track backend endpoint health, and selects the configured leader unconditionally.
       "backendGroup": "A String", # A fully-qualified URL (starting with https://www.googleapis.com/) of the zonal Network Endpoint Group (NEG) with `GCE_VM_IP` endpoints that the leader is attached to. The leader's backendGroup must already be specified as a backend of this backend service. Removing a backend that is designated as the leader's backendGroup is not permitted.
       "networkEndpoint": { # The network endpoint within the leader.backendGroup that is designated as the leader. This network endpoint cannot be detached from the NEG specified in the haPolicy.leader.backendGroup until the leader is updated with another network endpoint, or the leader is removed from the haPolicy.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionCommitments.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionCommitments.html
index a74e6dcdbb..c1067c59c3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionCommitments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionCommitments.html
@@ -179,6 +179,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
               "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
               "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+              "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
               "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
               "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
               "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -389,6 +390,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -544,6 +546,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -828,6 +831,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
           "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
           "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
           "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1013,6 +1017,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html
index 94a8deed4d..43e861de4e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionNetworkFirewallPolicies.html
@@ -297,6 +297,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -320,6 +321,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -778,6 +783,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -801,6 +807,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -854,6 +864,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -877,6 +888,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -980,6 +995,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1003,6 +1019,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1054,6 +1074,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1077,6 +1098,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1256,6 +1281,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1279,6 +1305,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -1357,6 +1387,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1380,6 +1411,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1433,6 +1468,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1456,6 +1492,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1668,6 +1708,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1691,6 +1732,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1744,6 +1789,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
             "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1767,6 +1813,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
+            "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+            "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+              "A String",
+            ],
             "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -1879,6 +1929,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1902,6 +1953,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1955,6 +2010,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
         "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -1978,6 +2034,10 @@ 
Method Details

         "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
+        "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+        "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+          "A String",
+        ],
         "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
           "A String",
         ],
@@ -2160,6 +2220,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "destIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of destination CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "destNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET
     "destRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
@@ -2183,6 +2244,10 @@ 
Method Details

     "srcIpRanges": [ # CIDR IP address range. Maximum number of source CIDR IP ranges allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
+    "srcNetworkType": "A String", # Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS
+    "srcNetworks": [ # Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.
+      "A String",
+    ],
     "srcRegionCodes": [ # Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex."US" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.
       "A String",
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionUrlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionUrlMaps.html
index 8844681ecb..06b68a8bc8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionUrlMaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionUrlMaps.html
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -798,7 +798,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1093,7 +1093,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1129,7 +1129,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1232,7 +1232,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1242,7 +1242,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1423,7 +1423,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1699,7 +1699,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1726,7 +1726,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1837,7 +1837,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1847,7 +1847,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1873,7 +1873,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1883,7 +1883,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -1976,7 +1976,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -1986,7 +1986,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2028,7 +2028,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2038,7 +2038,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2157,7 +2157,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ 
Method Details

                         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                         },
                       ],
                       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2334,7 +2334,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2344,7 +2344,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2371,7 +2371,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2381,7 +2381,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2482,7 +2482,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2492,7 +2492,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2518,7 +2518,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2528,7 +2528,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2621,7 +2621,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2631,7 +2631,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2673,7 +2673,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2683,7 +2683,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -2802,7 +2802,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -2812,7 +2812,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3066,7 +3066,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3076,7 +3076,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3103,7 +3103,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3113,7 +3113,7 @@ 
Method Details

       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
       },
     ],
     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3214,7 +3214,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3224,7 +3224,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3250,7 +3250,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3260,7 +3260,7 @@ 
Method Details

           { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
             "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
             "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+            "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
           },
         ],
         "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3353,7 +3353,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3363,7 +3363,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3405,7 +3405,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3415,7 +3415,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3534,7 +3534,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3544,7 +3544,7 @@ 
Method Details

                     { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                       "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                       "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                      "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                     },
                   ],
                   "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3799,7 +3799,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3809,7 +3809,7 @@ 
Method Details

               { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                 "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                 "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
               },
             ],
             "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3836,7 +3836,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3846,7 +3846,7 @@ 
Method Details

         { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
           "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
           "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+          "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
         },
       ],
       "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3947,7 +3947,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3957,7 +3957,7 @@ 
Method Details

                   { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                     "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                     "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                    "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                   },
                 ],
                 "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -3983,7 +3983,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -3993,7 +3993,7 @@ 
Method Details

             { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
               "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
               "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+              "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
             },
           ],
           "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4086,7 +4086,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4096,7 +4096,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4138,7 +4138,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4148,7 +4148,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                   "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                   "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                  "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                 },
               ],
               "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
@@ -4267,7 +4267,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService.
@@ -4277,7 +4277,7 @@ 
Method Details

                       { # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses.
                         "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header.
                         "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add.
-                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false.
+                        "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .
                       },
                     ],
                     "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationBlocks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationBlocks.html
index 5ab20c2a5e..2b7543152c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationBlocks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationBlocks.html
@@ -137,6 +137,8 @@ 
Method Details

         "windowStartTime": "A String", # The current start time of the maintenance window. This timestamp value is in RFC3339 text format.
       },
     },
+    "reservationSubBlockCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block.
+    "reservationSubBlockInUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of in-use reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block. If at least one VM is running on a subBlock, it is considered in-use.
     "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
     "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
     "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation block.
@@ -193,6 +195,8 @@ 
Method Details

           "windowStartTime": "A String", # The current start time of the maintenance window. This timestamp value is in RFC3339 text format.
         },
       },
+      "reservationSubBlockCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block.
+      "reservationSubBlockInUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of in-use reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block. If at least one VM is running on a subBlock, it is considered in-use.
       "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
       "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
       "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation block.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationSubBlocks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationSubBlocks.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..396a8ca39e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservationSubBlocks.html
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+
+
+
+
Compute Engine API . reservationSubBlocks

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  get(project, zone, parentName, reservationSubBlock, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves information about the specified reservation subBlock.

+

+  list(project, zone, parentName, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves a list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    get(project, zone, parentName, reservationSubBlock, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves information about the specified reservation subBlock.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  parentName: string, The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name} (required)
+  reservationSubBlock: string, The name of the reservation subBlock. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be a resource ID. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  "resource": { # Represents a reservation subBlock resource.
+    "count": 42, # [Output Only] The number of hosts that are allocated in this reservation subBlock.
+    "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+    "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+    "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock.
+    "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.
+    "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?
+    "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock.
+      "block": "A String", # The hash of the capacity block within the cluster.
+      "cluster": "A String", # The cluster name of the reservation subBlock.
+      "subBlock": "A String", # The hash of the capacity sub-block within the capacity block.
+    },
+    "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+    "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+    "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation subBlock.
+    "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] Zone in which the reservation subBlock resides.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list(project, zone, parentName, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves a list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035. (required)
+  parentName: string, The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name} (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = "Intel Skylake") OR (cpuPlatform = "Intel Broadwell") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq "double quoted literal"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne "literal")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name "instance", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy="creationTimestamp desc"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.
+  "id": "A String", # Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  "items": [ # A list of reservation subBlock resources.
+    { # Represents a reservation subBlock resource.
+      "count": 42, # [Output Only] The number of hosts that are allocated in this reservation subBlock.
+      "creationTimestamp": "A String", # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      "inUseCount": 42, # [Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock.
+      "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.
+      "name": "A String", # [Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?
+      "physicalTopology": { # [Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock.
+        "block": "A String", # The hash of the capacity block within the cluster.
+        "cluster": "A String", # The cluster name of the reservation subBlock.
+        "subBlock": "A String", # The hash of the capacity sub-block within the capacity block.
+      },
+      "selfLink": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.
+      "selfLinkWithId": "A String", # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+      "status": "A String", # [Output Only] Status of the reservation subBlock.
+      "zone": "A String", # [Output Only] Zone in which the reservation subBlock resides.
+    },
+  ],
+  "kind": "compute#reservationSubBlock", # Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for a list of reservation subBlocks.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  "selfLink": "A String", # Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  "warning": { # Informational warning message.
+    "code": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    "data": [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: "data": [ { "key": "scope", "value": "zones/us-east1-d" }
+      {
+        "key": "A String", # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        "value": "A String", # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservations.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservations.html
index 6c8268562d..f5ba6a706d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.reservations.html
@@ -173,6 +173,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
           "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
           "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+          "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
           "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
           "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -466,6 +467,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -629,6 +631,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -871,6 +874,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
       "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
       "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
       "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
       "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
       "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
@@ -1411,6 +1415,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "deleteAtTime": "A String", # Absolute time in future when the reservation will be auto-deleted by Compute Engine. Timestamp is represented in RFC3339 text format.
   "deploymentType": "A String", # Specifies the deployment strategy for this reservation.
   "description": "A String", # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  "enableEmergentMaintenance": True or False, # Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
   "kind": "compute#reservation", # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservations for reservations.
   "linkedCommitments": [ # [Output Only] Full or partial URL to parent commitments. This field displays for reservations that are tied to multiple commitments.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.resourcePolicies.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.resourcePolicies.html
index 4203a7e7ff..476eaa1b21 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.resourcePolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.resourcePolicies.html
@@ -146,6 +146,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "groupPlacementPolicy": { # A GroupPlacementPolicy specifies resource placement configuration. It specifies the failure bucket separation # Resource policy for instances for placement configuration.
             "availabilityDomainCount": 42, # The number of availability domains to spread instances across. If two instances are in different availability domain, they are not in the same low latency network.
             "collocation": "A String", # Specifies network collocation
+            "gpuTopology": "A String", # Specifies the shape of the GPU slice, in slice based GPU families eg. A4X.
             "vmCount": 42, # Number of VMs in this placement group. Google does not recommend that you use this field unless you use a compact policy and you want your policy to work only if it contains this exact number of VMs.
           },
           "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
@@ -208,6 +209,11 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           },
           "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of resource policy creation.
+          "workloadPolicy": { # Represents the workload policy.
+            "acceleratorTopology": "A String",
+            "maxTopologyDistance": "A String",
+            "type": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "warning": { # Informational warning which replaces the list of resourcePolicies when the list is empty.
@@ -409,6 +415,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "groupPlacementPolicy": { # A GroupPlacementPolicy specifies resource placement configuration. It specifies the failure bucket separation # Resource policy for instances for placement configuration.
     "availabilityDomainCount": 42, # The number of availability domains to spread instances across. If two instances are in different availability domain, they are not in the same low latency network.
     "collocation": "A String", # Specifies network collocation
+    "gpuTopology": "A String", # Specifies the shape of the GPU slice, in slice based GPU families eg. A4X.
     "vmCount": 42, # Number of VMs in this placement group. Google does not recommend that you use this field unless you use a compact policy and you want your policy to work only if it contains this exact number of VMs.
   },
   "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
@@ -471,6 +478,11 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   },
   "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of resource policy creation.
+  "workloadPolicy": { # Represents the workload policy.
+    "acceleratorTopology": "A String",
+    "maxTopologyDistance": "A String",
+    "type": "A String",
+  },
 }
@@ -542,6 +554,7 @@

Method Details

"groupPlacementPolicy": { # A GroupPlacementPolicy specifies resource placement configuration. It specifies the failure bucket separation # Resource policy for instances for placement configuration. "availabilityDomainCount": 42, # The number of availability domains to spread instances across. If two instances are in different availability domain, they are not in the same low latency network. "collocation": "A String", # Specifies network collocation + "gpuTopology": "A String", # Specifies the shape of the GPU slice, in slice based GPU families eg. A4X. "vmCount": 42, # Number of VMs in this placement group. Google does not recommend that you use this field unless you use a compact policy and you want your policy to work only if it contains this exact number of VMs. }, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. @@ -604,6 +617,11 @@

Method Details

}, }, "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of resource policy creation. + "workloadPolicy": { # Represents the workload policy. + "acceleratorTopology": "A String", + "maxTopologyDistance": "A String", + "type": "A String", + }, } requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). @@ -755,6 +773,7 @@

Method Details

"groupPlacementPolicy": { # A GroupPlacementPolicy specifies resource placement configuration. It specifies the failure bucket separation # Resource policy for instances for placement configuration. "availabilityDomainCount": 42, # The number of availability domains to spread instances across. If two instances are in different availability domain, they are not in the same low latency network. "collocation": "A String", # Specifies network collocation + "gpuTopology": "A String", # Specifies the shape of the GPU slice, in slice based GPU families eg. A4X. "vmCount": 42, # Number of VMs in this placement group. Google does not recommend that you use this field unless you use a compact policy and you want your policy to work only if it contains this exact number of VMs. }, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. @@ -817,6 +836,11 @@

Method Details

}, }, "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of resource policy creation. + "workloadPolicy": { # Represents the workload policy. + "acceleratorTopology": "A String", + "maxTopologyDistance": "A String", + "type": "A String", + }, }, ], "kind": "compute#resourcePolicyList", # [Output Only] Type of resource.Always compute#resourcePoliciesList for listsof resourcePolicies @@ -868,6 +892,7 @@

Method Details

"groupPlacementPolicy": { # A GroupPlacementPolicy specifies resource placement configuration. It specifies the failure bucket separation # Resource policy for instances for placement configuration. "availabilityDomainCount": 42, # The number of availability domains to spread instances across. If two instances are in different availability domain, they are not in the same low latency network. "collocation": "A String", # Specifies network collocation + "gpuTopology": "A String", # Specifies the shape of the GPU slice, in slice based GPU families eg. A4X. "vmCount": 42, # Number of VMs in this placement group. Google does not recommend that you use this field unless you use a compact policy and you want your policy to work only if it contains this exact number of VMs. }, "id": "A String", # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server. @@ -930,6 +955,11 @@

Method Details

}, }, "status": "A String", # [Output Only] The status of resource policy creation. + "workloadPolicy": { # Represents the workload policy. + "acceleratorTopology": "A String", + "maxTopologyDistance": "A String", + "type": "A String", + }, } requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000). diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.subnetworks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.subnetworks.html index e3e1aaa0c8..61bf10b300 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.subnetworks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.subnetworks.html @@ -176,6 +176,11 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "network": "A String", # The URL of the network to which this subnetwork belongs, provided by the client when initially creating the subnetwork. This field can be set only at resource creation time. + "params": { # Additional subnetwork parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "privateIpGoogleAccess": True or False, # Whether the VMs in this subnet can access Google services without assigned external IP addresses. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using setPrivateIpGoogleAccess. "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # This field is for internal use. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using patch. "purpose": "A String", @@ -550,6 +555,11 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "network": "A String", # The URL of the network to which this subnetwork belongs, provided by the client when initially creating the subnetwork. This field can be set only at resource creation time. + "params": { # Additional subnetwork parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "privateIpGoogleAccess": True or False, # Whether the VMs in this subnet can access Google services without assigned external IP addresses. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using setPrivateIpGoogleAccess. "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # This field is for internal use. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using patch. "purpose": "A String", @@ -662,6 +672,11 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "network": "A String", # The URL of the network to which this subnetwork belongs, provided by the client when initially creating the subnetwork. This field can be set only at resource creation time. + "params": { # Additional subnetwork parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "privateIpGoogleAccess": True or False, # Whether the VMs in this subnet can access Google services without assigned external IP addresses. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using setPrivateIpGoogleAccess. "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # This field is for internal use. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using patch. "purpose": "A String", @@ -853,6 +868,11 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "network": "A String", # The URL of the network to which this subnetwork belongs, provided by the client when initially creating the subnetwork. This field can be set only at resource creation time. + "params": { # Additional subnetwork parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "privateIpGoogleAccess": True or False, # Whether the VMs in this subnet can access Google services without assigned external IP addresses. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using setPrivateIpGoogleAccess. "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # This field is for internal use. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using patch. "purpose": "A String", @@ -1033,6 +1053,11 @@

Method Details

}, "name": "A String", # The name of the resource, provided by the client when initially creating the resource. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash. "network": "A String", # The URL of the network to which this subnetwork belongs, provided by the client when initially creating the subnetwork. This field can be set only at resource creation time. + "params": { # Additional subnetwork parameters. # Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload. + "resourceManagerTags": { # Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {"tagKeys/333" : "tagValues/444", "tagKeys/123" : "tagValues/456"} * {"123/environment" : "production", "345/abc" : "xyz"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {"123/environment" : "tagValues/444"} is invalid. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + }, "privateIpGoogleAccess": True or False, # Whether the VMs in this subnet can access Google services without assigned external IP addresses. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using setPrivateIpGoogleAccess. "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # This field is for internal use. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using patch. "purpose": "A String", diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.urlMaps.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.urlMaps.html index 0081f3b493..82d5204005 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.urlMaps.html +++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.urlMaps.html @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1160,7 +1160,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1206,7 +1206,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1309,7 +1309,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1480,7 +1480,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1636,7 +1636,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1663,7 +1663,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1673,7 +1673,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1784,7 +1784,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1810,7 +1810,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1820,7 +1820,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1913,7 +1913,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -1965,7 +1965,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -1975,7 +1975,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2094,7 +2094,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2104,7 +2104,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2504,7 +2504,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2514,7 +2514,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2541,7 +2541,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2551,7 +2551,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2652,7 +2652,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2662,7 +2662,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2688,7 +2688,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2698,7 +2698,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2791,7 +2791,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2801,7 +2801,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2843,7 +2843,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2853,7 +2853,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -2972,7 +2972,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -2982,7 +2982,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3148,7 +3148,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3158,7 +3158,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3185,7 +3185,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3195,7 +3195,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3296,7 +3296,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3306,7 +3306,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3332,7 +3332,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3342,7 +3342,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3435,7 +3435,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3445,7 +3445,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3487,7 +3487,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3497,7 +3497,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3616,7 +3616,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3626,7 +3626,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3879,7 +3879,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3889,7 +3889,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -3916,7 +3916,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -3926,7 +3926,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4027,7 +4027,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4037,7 +4037,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4063,7 +4063,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4073,7 +4073,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4166,7 +4166,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4176,7 +4176,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4218,7 +4218,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4228,7 +4228,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4347,7 +4347,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4357,7 +4357,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4614,7 +4614,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4624,7 +4624,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4651,7 +4651,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4661,7 +4661,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4762,7 +4762,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4772,7 +4772,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4798,7 +4798,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4808,7 +4808,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4901,7 +4901,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4911,7 +4911,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -4953,7 +4953,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -4963,7 +4963,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. @@ -5082,7 +5082,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "requestHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the request before forwarding the request to the backendService. @@ -5092,7 +5092,7 @@

Method Details

{ # Specification determining how headers are added to requests or responses. "headerName": "A String", # The name of the header. "headerValue": "A String", # The value of the header to add. - "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. + "replace": True or False, # If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. . }, ], "responseHeadersToRemove": [ # A list of header names for headers that need to be removed from the response before sending the response back to the client. diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json index cc2d6e80b9..9b3ca2bc51 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.alpha.json @@ -22780,7 +22780,7 @@ "organizationSecurityPolicies": { "methods": { "addAssociation": { -"description": "Inserts an association for the specified security policy. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.", +"description": "Inserts an association for the specified security policy. This has billing implications. Projects in the hierarchy with effective hierarchical security policies will be automatically enrolled into Cloud Armor Enterprise if not already enrolled. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.", "flatPath": "locations/global/securityPolicies/{securityPolicy}/addAssociation", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "compute.organizationSecurityPolicies.addAssociation", @@ -25108,6 +25108,365 @@ } } }, +"recoverableSnapshots": { +"methods": { +"aggregatedList": { +"description": "Retrieves an aggregated list of all of the RecoverableSnapshots in your project across all regions and global scope.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/aggregated/recoverableSnapshots", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.aggregatedList", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"includeAllScopes": { +"description": "Indicates whether every visible scope for each scope type (zone, region, global) should be included in the response. For new resource types added after this field, the flag has no effect as new resource types will always include every visible scope for each scope type in response. For resource types which predate this field, if this flag is omitted or false, only scopes of the scope types where the resource type is expected to be found will be included.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"serviceProjectNumber": { +"description": "The Shared VPC service project id or service project number for which aggregated list request is invoked for subnetworks list-usable api.", +"format": "int64", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/aggregated/recoverableSnapshots", +"response": { +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshotAggregatedList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes the specified RecoverableSnapshot. Deleting a recoverable snapshot will delete the underlying PD snapshot and is irreversible.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{recoverableSnapshot}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"recoverableSnapshot" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"recoverableSnapshot": { +"description": "Name of the recoverable Snapshot resource to delete.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{recoverableSnapshot}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Returns the specified RecoverableSnapshot resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{recoverableSnapshot}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"recoverableSnapshot" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"recoverableSnapshot": { +"description": "Name of the Snapshot resource to return.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{recoverableSnapshot}", +"response": { +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshot" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"getIamPolicy": { +"description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{resource}/getIamPolicy", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.getIamPolicy", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"optionsRequestedPolicyVersion": { +"description": "Requested IAM Policy version.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9_]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{resource}/getIamPolicy", +"response": { +"$ref": "Policy" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Retrieves a list of all of the RecoverableSnapshots in your project.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots", +"response": { +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshotList" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"recover": { +"description": "Recovers the specified RecoverableSnapshot.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{recoverableSnapshot}/recover", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.recover", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"recoverableSnapshot" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project Id of the request", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"recoverableSnapshot": { +"description": "Name of the recoverable resource to recover", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"snapshotName": { +"description": "Name of the snapshot after the recovery The name will be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name will be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character will be a lowercase letter, and all following characters can be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", +"location": "query", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{recoverableSnapshot}/recover", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"setIamPolicy": { +"description": "Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{resource}/setIamPolicy", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.setIamPolicy", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9_]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{resource}/setIamPolicy", +"request": { +"$ref": "GlobalSetPolicyRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Policy" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, +"testIamPermissions": { +"description": "Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.recoverableSnapshots.testIamPermissions", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"resource" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9_]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/global/recoverableSnapshots/{resource}/testIamPermissions", +"request": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "TestPermissionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +} +} +}, "regionAutoscalers": { "methods": { "delete": { @@ -25597,7 +25956,7 @@ }, "insert": { "description": "Creates a RegionBackendBucket in the specified project in the given scope using the parameters that are included in the request.", -"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/regionBackendBuckets", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/backendBuckets", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "compute.regionBackendBuckets.insert", "parameterOrder": [ @@ -25625,7 +25984,7 @@ "type": "string" } }, -"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/regionBackendBuckets", +"path": "projects/{project}/regions/{region}/backendBuckets", "request": { "$ref": "BackendBucket" }, @@ -50070,7 +50429,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250511", +"revision": "20250601", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -53070,6 +53429,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"region": { +"description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the regional backend bucket resides. This field is not applicable to global backend buckets. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", +"type": "string" +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" @@ -54335,7 +54698,7 @@ false "id": "BackendServiceHAPolicy", "properties": { "fastIPMove": { -"description": "Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.", +"description": "Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.", "enum": [ "DISABLED", "GARP_RA" @@ -55506,6 +55869,10 @@ false "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, +"instanceFlexibilityPolicy": { +"$ref": "InstanceFlexibilityPolicy", +"description": "A flexible specification of machine type of instances to create." +}, "instanceProperties": { "$ref": "InstanceProperties", "description": "The instance properties defining the VM instances to be created. Required if sourceInstanceTemplate is not provided." @@ -58090,6 +58457,22 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact version of the instant snapshot that was used.", "type": "string" }, +"sourceMachineImage": { +"description": "The machine image to create the disk from. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/machineImages/machineImage - projects/project/global/machineImages/machineImage - global/machineImages/machineImage ", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceMachineImageDiskDeviceName": { +"description": "Input only. The device name of a disk within a given machine image. The source_machine_image must be specified.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceMachineImageEncryptionKey": { +"$ref": "CustomerEncryptionKey", +"description": "The customer-supplied encryption key of the source machine image. Required if the source machine image is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key." +}, +"sourceMachineImageId": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique ID of the machine image used to create this disk. This value identifies the exact machine image that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from a machine image that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source machine image ID would identify the exact version of the machine image that was used.", +"type": "string" +}, "sourceSnapshot": { "description": "The source snapshot used to create this disk. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshots/snapshot - projects/project/global/snapshots/snapshot - global/snapshots/snapshot ", "type": "string" @@ -65917,7 +66300,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "replace": { -"description": "If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. ", +"description": "If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .", "type": "boolean" } }, @@ -66722,6 +67105,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "ImageParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "rawDisk": { "description": "The parameters of the raw disk image.", "properties": { @@ -67018,6 +67405,20 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ImageParams": { +"description": "Additional image params.", +"id": "ImageParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Resource manager tags to be bound to the image. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "InitialStateConfig": { "description": "Initial State for shielded instance, these are public keys which are safe to store in public", "id": "InitialStateConfig", @@ -67170,7 +67571,7 @@ false }, "metadata": { "$ref": "Metadata", -"description": "The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys." +"description": "The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance." }, "minCpuPlatform": { "description": "Specifies a minimum CPU platform for the VM instance. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: \"Intel Haswell\" or minCpuPlatform: \"Intel Sandy Bridge\".", @@ -67573,6 +67974,39 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"InstanceFlexibilityPolicy": { +"description": "A flexible specification of machine types for instances to create.", +"id": "InstanceFlexibilityPolicy", +"properties": { +"instanceSelections": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "InstanceFlexibilityPolicyInstanceSelection" +}, +"description": "Specification of alternative, flexible instance subsets. One of them will be selected to create the instances based on various criteria, like: - ranks, - location policy, - current capacity, - available reservations (you can specify affinity in InstanceProperties), - SWAN/GOOSE limitations. Key is an arbitrary, unique RFC1035 string that identifies the instance selection.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"InstanceFlexibilityPolicyInstanceSelection": { +"description": "Specification of machine type to use. Every position inside this message is an alternative. The count specified in the shape flexibility must not exceed the number of entries in per_instance_properties or the capacity of the name_pattern, if used.", +"id": "InstanceFlexibilityPolicyInstanceSelection", +"properties": { +"machineTypes": { +"description": "Alternative machine types to use for instances that are created from these properties. This field only accepts a machine type names, for example `n2-standard-4` and not URLs or partial URLs.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"rank": { +"description": "Rank when prioritizing the shape flexibilities. The instance selections with rank are considered first, in the ascending order of the rank. If not set, defaults to 0.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "InstanceGroup": { "description": "Represents an Instance Group resource. Instance Groups can be used to configure a target for load balancing. Instance groups can either be managed or unmanaged. To create managed instance groups, use the instanceGroupManager or regionInstanceGroupManager resource instead. Use zonal unmanaged instance groups if you need to apply load balancing to groups of heterogeneous instances or if you need to manage the instances yourself. You cannot create regional unmanaged instance groups. For more information, read Instance groups.", "id": "InstanceGroup", @@ -68608,14 +69042,14 @@ false "id": "InstanceGroupManagerInstanceLifecyclePolicyOnRepair", "properties": { "allowChangingZone": { -"description": "Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during repair.", +"description": "Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.", "enum": [ "NO", "YES" ], "enumDescriptions": [ -"[Default] MIG cannot change a VM's zone during repair.", -"MIG can select a different zone for the VM during repair." +"[Default] MIG cannot change a VM's zone during a repair.", +"MIG can select a different zone for the VM during a repair." ], "type": "string" } @@ -70862,6 +71296,10 @@ false "description": "Additional instance params.", "id": "InstanceParams", "properties": { +"requestValidForDuration": { +"$ref": "Duration", +"description": "Relative deadline for waiting for capacity. Relevant only for Instances.Insert API." +}, "resourceManagerTags": { "additionalProperties": { "type": "string" @@ -82861,6 +83299,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"profileType": { +"$ref": "NetworkProfileProfileType", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the network profile." +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" @@ -83296,6 +83738,56 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"NetworkProfileProfileType": { +"id": "NetworkProfileProfileType", +"properties": { +"networkType": { +"enum": [ +"RDMA", +"ULL", +"VPC" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"RDMA network.", +"ULL network.", +"VPC network." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"rdmaSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"FALCON", +"ROCE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"RDMA over Falcon.", +"RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE)." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"ullSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"OPERATOR", +"PARTICIPANT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Exchange operator.", +"Exchange participant." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"vpcSubtype": { +"enum": [ +"REGIONAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Regionally bound VPC network." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "NetworkProfilesListResponse": { "description": "Contains a list of network profiles.", "id": "NetworkProfilesListResponse", @@ -88904,6 +89396,18 @@ false "description": "The address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public advertised prefix.", "type": "string" }, +"ipv6AccessType": { +"description": "The internet access type for IPv6 Public Advertised Prefixes.", +"enum": [ +"EXTERNAL", +"INTERNAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default IPv6 access type. The prefix will be announced to the internet. All children Public Delegated Prefixes will have IPv6 access type as EXTERNAL.", +"The prefix will not be announced to the internet. Prefix will be used privately within Google Cloud. All children Public Delegated Prefixes will have IPv6 access type as INTERNAL." +], +"type": "string" +}, "kind": { "default": "compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix", "description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#publicAdvertisedPrefix for public advertised prefixes.", @@ -89205,6 +89709,18 @@ false "description": "The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this public delegated prefix.", "type": "string" }, +"ipv6AccessType": { +"description": "[Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.", +"enum": [ +"EXTERNAL", +"INTERNAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The parent public advertised prefix will be announced to the internet. All children public delegated prefixes will have IPv6 access type as EXTERNAL.", +"The parent public advertised prefix will not be announced to the internet. Prefix will be used privately within Google Cloud. All children public delegated prefixes will have IPv6 access type as INTERNAL." +], +"type": "string" +}, "isLiveMigration": { "description": "If true, the prefix will be live migrated.", "type": "boolean" @@ -89219,12 +89735,14 @@ false "enum": [ "DELEGATION", "EXTERNAL_IPV6_FORWARDING_RULE_CREATION", -"EXTERNAL_IPV6_SUBNETWORK_CREATION" +"EXTERNAL_IPV6_SUBNETWORK_CREATION", +"INTERNAL_IPV6_SUBNETWORK_CREATION" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The public delegated prefix is used for further sub-delegation only. Such prefixes cannot set allocatablePrefixLength.", "The public delegated prefix is used for creating forwarding rules only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes.", -"The public delegated prefix is used for creating dual-mode subnetworks only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes." +"The public delegated prefix is used for creating dual-mode subnetworks only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes.", +"The public delegated prefix is used for creating dual stack or IPv6-only subnetwork with internal access only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes and allocatablePrefixLength. Parent public delegated prefix/public advertised prefix must have IPv6 access type as INTERNAL." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -89264,6 +89782,7 @@ false "status": { "description": "[Output Only] The status of the public delegated prefix, which can be one of following values: - `INITIALIZING` The public delegated prefix is being initialized and addresses cannot be created yet. - `READY_TO_ANNOUNCE` The public delegated prefix is a live migration prefix and is active. - `ANNOUNCED` The public delegated prefix is announced and ready to use. - `DELETING` The public delegated prefix is being deprovsioned. ", "enum": [ +"ACTIVE", "ANNOUNCED", "ANNOUNCED_TO_GOOGLE", "ANNOUNCED_TO_INTERNET", @@ -89272,6 +89791,7 @@ false "READY_TO_ANNOUNCE" ], "enumDescriptions": [ +"The public delegated prefix is ready to use.", "The public delegated prefix is announced and ready to use.", "The prefix is announced within Google network.", "The prefix is announced to Internet and within Google.", @@ -89621,6 +90141,18 @@ false "description": "The IP address range, in CIDR format, represented by this sub public delegated prefix.", "type": "string" }, +"ipv6AccessType": { +"description": "[Output Only] The internet access type for IPv6 Public Delegated Sub Prefixes. Inherited from parent prefix.", +"enum": [ +"EXTERNAL", +"INTERNAL" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"The parent public advertised prefix will be announced to the internet. All children public delegated prefixes will have IPv6 access type as EXTERNAL.", +"The parent public advertised prefix will not be announced to the internet. Prefix will be used privately within Google Cloud. All children public delegated prefixes will have IPv6 access type as INTERNAL." +], +"type": "string" +}, "isAddress": { "description": "Whether the sub prefix is delegated to create Address resources in the delegatee project.", "type": "boolean" @@ -89630,12 +90162,14 @@ false "enum": [ "DELEGATION", "EXTERNAL_IPV6_FORWARDING_RULE_CREATION", -"EXTERNAL_IPV6_SUBNETWORK_CREATION" +"EXTERNAL_IPV6_SUBNETWORK_CREATION", +"INTERNAL_IPV6_SUBNETWORK_CREATION" ], "enumDescriptions": [ "The public delegated prefix is used for further sub-delegation only. Such prefixes cannot set allocatablePrefixLength.", "The public delegated prefix is used for creating forwarding rules only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes.", -"The public delegated prefix is used for creating dual-mode subnetworks only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes." +"The public delegated prefix is used for creating dual-mode subnetworks only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes.", +"The public delegated prefix is used for creating dual stack or IPv6-only subnetwork with internal access only. Such prefixes cannot set publicDelegatedSubPrefixes and allocatablePrefixLength. Parent public delegated prefix/public advertised prefix must have IPv6 access type as INTERNAL." ], "type": "string" }, @@ -90860,62 +91394,121 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, -"Reference": { -"description": "Represents a reference to a resource.", -"id": "Reference", +"RecoverableSnapshot": { +"description": "Represents a RecoverableSnapshot resource. A RecoverableSnapshot represents a snapshot in recycle bin.", +"id": "RecoverableSnapshot", "properties": { +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"description": { +"description": "Optional. An optional description of this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, "kind": { -"default": "compute#reference", -"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reference for references.", +"default": "compute#recoverableSnapshot", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshot for RecoverableSnapshot resources.", "type": "string" }, -"referenceType": { -"description": "A description of the reference type with no implied semantics. Possible values include: 1. MEMBER_OF ", +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. Name of the recoverable snapshot generated on the deletion of the snapshot. The name will be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name will be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character will be a lowercase letter, and all following characters can be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, -"referrer": { -"description": "URL of the resource which refers to the target.", +"originalResource": { +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshotOriginalSnapshot", +"description": "Output Only] The original snapshot resource." +}, +"purgeTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.", "type": "string" }, -"target": { -"description": "URL of the resource to which this reference points.", +"satisfiesPzi": { +"description": "Output only. [Output Only] Reserved for future use.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, +"satisfiesPzs": { +"description": "[Output Only] Reserved for future use.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"status": { +"description": "[Output Only] Status of the recoverable snapshot.", +"enum": [ +"CREATING", +"DELETING", +"FAILED", +"READY", +"RECOVERING", +"UNKNOWN" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Recoverable Snapshot creation is in progress.", +"Recovered Snapshot is currently being deleted.", +"Recoverable Snapshot creation failed.", +"Recoverable Snapshot has been created successfully.", +"Recoverable Snapshot is currently being recovered.", +"" +], "type": "string" } }, "type": "object" }, -"Region": { -"description": "Represents a Region resource. A region is a geographical area where a resource is located. For more information, read Regions and Zones.", -"id": "Region", +"RecoverableSnapshotAggregatedList": { +"id": "RecoverableSnapshotAggregatedList", "properties": { -"creationTimestamp": { -"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"etag": { "type": "string" }, -"deprecated": { -"$ref": "DeprecationStatus", -"description": "[Output Only] The deprecation status associated with this region." +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" }, -"description": { -"description": "[Output Only] Textual description of the resource.", +"items": { +"additionalProperties": { +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshotsScopedList", +"description": "[Output Only] Name of the scope containing this set of recoverablesnapshots." +}, +"description": "A list of RecoverableSnapshotsScopedList resources.", +"type": "object" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#recoverableSnapshotAggregatedList", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshotAggregatedList for aggregated lists of recoverablesnapshots.", "type": "string" }, -"id": { -"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", -"format": "uint64", +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", "type": "string" }, -"kind": { -"default": "compute#region", -"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#region for regions.", +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", "type": "string" }, -"name": { -"description": "[Output Only] Name of the resource.", +"unreachables": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unreachable resources. end_interface: MixerListResponseWithEtagBuilder", +"items": { "type": "string" }, -"quotaStatusWarning": { -"description": "[Output Only] Warning of fetching the `quotas` field for this region. This field is populated only if fetching of the `quotas` field fails.", +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", "properties": { "code": { "description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", @@ -91037,80 +91630,790 @@ false } }, "type": "object" -}, -"quotas": { -"description": "[Output Only] Quotas assigned to this region.", -"items": { -"$ref": "Quota" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"selfLink": { -"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", -"type": "string" -}, -"selfLinkWithId": { -"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", -"type": "string" -}, -"status": { -"description": "[Output Only] Status of the region, either UP or DOWN.", -"enum": [ -"DOWN", -"UP" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"", -"" -], -"type": "string" -}, -"supportsPzs": { -"description": "[Output Only] Reserved for future use.", -"type": "boolean" -}, -"zones": { -"description": "[Output Only] A list of zones available in this region, in the form of resource URLs.", -"items": { -"type": "string" -}, -"type": "array" } }, "type": "object" }, -"RegionAddressesMoveRequest": { -"id": "RegionAddressesMoveRequest", +"RecoverableSnapshotList": { +"id": "RecoverableSnapshotList", "properties": { -"description": { -"description": "An optional destination address description if intended to be different from the source.", -"type": "string" -}, -"destinationAddress": { -"description": "The URL of the destination address to move to. This can be a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs to a address: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /addresses/address - projects/project/regions/region/addresses/address Note that destination project must be different from the source project. So /regions/region/addresses/address is not valid partial url.", +"etag": { "type": "string" -} }, -"type": "object" -}, -"RegionAutoscalerList": { -"description": "Contains a list of autoscalers.", -"id": "RegionAutoscalerList", -"properties": { "id": { "description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", "type": "string" }, "items": { -"description": "A list of Autoscaler resources.", +"description": "A list of RecoverableSnapshots resources.", "items": { -"$ref": "Autoscaler" +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshot" }, "type": "array" }, "kind": { -"default": "compute#regionAutoscalerList", -"description": "Type of resource.", +"default": "compute#recoverableSnapshotList", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of resource. Always compute#recoverableSnapshotList for lists of recoverablesnapshots.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachables": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unreachable resources. end_interface: MixerListResponseWithEtagBuilder", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RecoverableSnapshotOriginalSnapshot": { +"id": "RecoverableSnapshotOriginalSnapshot", +"properties": { +"architecture": { +"description": "[Output Only] The architecture of the snapshot. Valid values are ARM64 or X86_64.", +"enum": [ +"ARCHITECTURE_UNSPECIFIED", +"ARM64", +"X86_64" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Default value indicating Architecture is not set.", +"Machines with architecture ARM64", +"Machines with architecture X86_64" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"autoCreated": { +"description": "[Output Only] Set to true if snapshots are automatically created by applying resource policy on the target disk.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"autoCreatedBy": { +"description": "ResourceKey of the resource policy or flow which created this auto snapshot", +"type": "string" +}, +"chainName": { +"description": "Creates the new snapshot in the snapshot chain labeled with the specified name. The chain name must be 1-63 characters long and comply with RFC1035. This is an uncommon option only for advanced service owners who needs to create separate snapshot chains, for example, for chargeback tracking. When you describe your snapshot resource, this field is visible only if it has a non-empty value.", +"type": "string" +}, +"creationSizeBytes": { +"description": "[Output Only] Size in bytes of the snapshot at creation time.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"deletionTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Purge timestamp of recoverable snapshot in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"description": { +"description": "An optional description of this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"diskSizeGb": { +"description": "[Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"downloadBytes": { +"description": "[Output Only] Number of bytes downloaded to restore a snapshot to a disk.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"enableConfidentialCompute": { +"description": "Whether this snapshot is created from a confidential compute mode disk. [Output Only]: This field is not set by user, but from source disk.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"full": { +"description": "Indicates the created snapshot is a full snapshot.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"guestOsFeatures": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of features to enable on the guest operating system. Applicable only for bootable images. Read Enabling guest operating system features to see a list of available options.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GuestOsFeature" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the original snapshot. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"labelFingerprint": { +"description": "A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this snapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a snapshot.", +"format": "byte", +"type": "string" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Labels to apply to this snapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.", +"type": "object" +}, +"licenseCodes": { +"description": "[Output Only] Integer license codes indicating which licenses are attached to this snapshot.", +"items": { +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"licenses": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of public visible licenses that apply to this snapshot.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"maxRetentionDays": { +"description": "Number of days the snapshot should be retained before being deleted automatically.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Name of the original snapshot provided by the client. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"type": "string" +}, +"region": { +"description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.", +"type": "string" +}, +"satisfiesPzi": { +"description": "Output only. Reserved for future use.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, +"satisfiesPzs": { +"description": "[Output Only] Reserved for future use.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"snapshotEncryptionKey": { +"$ref": "CustomerEncryptionKey", +"description": "Encrypts the snapshot using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a snapshot using a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the snapshot later. For example, you must provide the encryption key when you create a disk from the encrypted snapshot in a future request. Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the snapshot. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the snapshot, then the snapshot will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the snapshot later." +}, +"snapshotGroupId": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique ID of the snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.", +"type": "string" +}, +"snapshotGroupName": { +"description": "[Output only] The snapshot group that this snapshot belongs to.", +"type": "string" +}, +"snapshotType": { +"description": "Indicates the type of the snapshot.", +"enum": [ +"ARCHIVE", +"STANDARD" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceDisk": { +"description": "The source disk used to create this snapshot.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceDiskEncryptionKey": { +"$ref": "CustomerEncryptionKey", +"description": "The customer-supplied encryption key of the source disk. Required if the source disk is protected by a customer-supplied encryption key." +}, +"sourceDiskForRecoveryCheckpoint": { +"description": "The source disk whose recovery checkpoint will be used to create this snapshot.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceDiskId": { +"description": "[Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this snapshot", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceInstantSnapshot": { +"description": "The source instant snapshot used to create this snapshot.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceInstantSnapshotEncryptionKey": { +"$ref": "CustomerEncryptionKey", +"description": "Customer provided encryption key when creating Snapshot from Instant Snapshot." +}, +"sourceInstantSnapshotId": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique ID of the instant snapshot used to create this snapshot. This value identifies the exact instant snapshot that was used to create this persistent disk. For example, if you created the persistent disk from an instant snapshot that was later deleted and recreated under the same name, the source instant snapshot ID would identify the exact instant snapshot that was used.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicy": { +"description": "[Output Only] URL of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceSnapshotSchedulePolicyId": { +"description": "[Output Only] ID of the resource policy which created this scheduled snapshot.", +"type": "string" +}, +"storageBytes": { +"description": "[Output Only] A size of the storage used by the snapshot.", +"format": "int64", +"type": "string" +}, +"storageBytesStatus": { +"description": "[Output Only] An indicator whether storageBytes is in a stable state or it is being adjusted as a result of shared storage reallocation. This status can either be UPDATING, meaning the size of the snapshot is being updated, or UP_TO_DATE, meaning the size of the snapshot is up-to-date.", +"enum": [ +"UPDATING", +"UP_TO_DATE" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"storageLocations": { +"description": "Cloud Storage bucket storage location of the snapshot (regional or multi-regional).", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"userLicenses": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of user provided licenses represented by a list of URLs to the license resource.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RecoverableSnapshotsScopedList": { +"id": "RecoverableSnapshotsScopedList", +"properties": { +"recoverablesnapshots": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of recoverablesnapshots contained in this scope.", +"items": { +"$ref": "RecoverableSnapshot" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning which replaces the list of recoverablesnapshots when the list is empty.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Reference": { +"description": "Represents a reference to a resource.", +"id": "Reference", +"properties": { +"kind": { +"default": "compute#reference", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reference for references.", +"type": "string" +}, +"referenceType": { +"description": "A description of the reference type with no implied semantics. Possible values include: 1. MEMBER_OF ", +"type": "string" +}, +"referrer": { +"description": "URL of the resource which refers to the target.", +"type": "string" +}, +"target": { +"description": "URL of the resource to which this reference points.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"Region": { +"description": "Represents a Region resource. A region is a geographical area where a resource is located. For more information, read Regions and Zones.", +"id": "Region", +"properties": { +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"deprecated": { +"$ref": "DeprecationStatus", +"description": "[Output Only] The deprecation status associated with this region." +}, +"description": { +"description": "[Output Only] Textual description of the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#region", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#region for regions.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "[Output Only] Name of the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"quotaStatusWarning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Warning of fetching the `quotas` field for this region. This field is populated only if fetching of the `quotas` field fails.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"quotas": { +"description": "[Output Only] Quotas assigned to this region.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Quota" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"status": { +"description": "[Output Only] Status of the region, either UP or DOWN.", +"enum": [ +"DOWN", +"UP" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"supportsPzs": { +"description": "[Output Only] Reserved for future use.", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"zones": { +"description": "[Output Only] A list of zones available in this region, in the form of resource URLs.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RegionAddressesMoveRequest": { +"id": "RegionAddressesMoveRequest", +"properties": { +"description": { +"description": "An optional destination address description if intended to be different from the source.", +"type": "string" +}, +"destinationAddress": { +"description": "The URL of the destination address to move to. This can be a full or partial URL. For example, the following are all valid URLs to a address: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /addresses/address - projects/project/regions/region/addresses/address Note that destination project must be different from the source project. So /regions/region/addresses/address is not valid partial url.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"RegionAutoscalerList": { +"description": "Contains a list of autoscalers.", +"id": "RegionAutoscalerList", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of Autoscaler resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Autoscaler" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#regionAutoscalerList", +"description": "Type of resource.", "type": "string" }, "nextPageToken": { @@ -93207,7 +94510,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "enableEmergentMaintenance": { -"description": "Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.", +"description": "Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.", "type": "boolean" }, "id": { @@ -95412,6 +96715,14 @@ false }, "type": "array" }, +"consumedReservation": { +"description": "[Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation that this instance is consuming from.", +"type": "string" +}, +"consumedReservationBlock": { +"description": "[Output Only] The full resource name of the reservation block that this instance is consuming from.", +"type": "string" +}, "effectiveInstanceMetadata": { "$ref": "ResourceStatusEffectiveInstanceMetadata", "description": "[Output Only] Effective metadata is a field that consolidates project, zonal instance settings, and instance-level predefined metadata keys to provide the overridden value for those metadata keys at the instance level." @@ -96488,6 +97799,10 @@ false "description": "URI of the network to which this router belongs.", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "RouterParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "region": { "description": "[Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", "type": "string" @@ -97529,6 +98844,20 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"RouterParams": { +"description": "Additional router parameters.", +"id": "RouterParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "RouterStatus": { "id": "RouterStatus", "properties": { @@ -98831,6 +100160,10 @@ false "deprecated": true, "description": "DEPRECATED: please use skipGuestOsShutdown. Timeout between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off during shutdown operation of VM. For Standard VMs values between 0s and 120s are allowed. For Spot and Preemptible VMs supported values are between 0s and 30s. If no value is specified for shutdownDuration, default values are 90s for Standard VMs and 30s for Spot/Preemptible VMs." }, +"skipGuestOsShutdown": { +"description": "Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "terminationTime": { "description": "Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.", "type": "string" @@ -101792,6 +103125,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "SnapshotParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "region": { "description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the snapshot resides. Only applicable for regional snapshots.", "type": "string" @@ -102094,273 +103431,287 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, -"SnapshotGroup": { -"description": "Represents a SnapshotGroup resource. A snapshot group is a set of snapshots that represents a point in time state of a consistency group.", -"id": "SnapshotGroup", -"properties": { -"creationTimestamp": { -"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", -"type": "string" -}, -"description": { -"description": "Optional. An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.", -"type": "string" -}, -"id": { -"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", -"format": "uint64", -"type": "string" -}, -"kind": { -"default": "compute#snapshotGroup", -"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#snapshotGroup for SnapshotGroup resources.", -"type": "string" -}, -"name": { -"description": "Identifier. Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", -"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", -"type": "string" -}, -"selfLink": { -"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", -"type": "string" -}, -"selfLinkWithId": { -"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.", -"type": "string" -}, -"sourceInfo": { -"$ref": "SnapshotGroupSourceInfo", -"description": "[Output Only]" -}, -"sourceInstantSnapshotGroup": { -"description": "Input field for the source instant snapshot group.", -"type": "string" -}, -"sourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo": { -"$ref": "SnapshotGroupSourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo", -"description": "[Output Only]" -}, -"status": { -"description": "[Output Only]", -"enum": [ -"CREATING", -"DELETING", -"FAILED", -"INVALID", -"READY", -"UNKNOWN", -"UPLOADING" -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"", -"", -"", -"", -"", -"", -"" -], -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"SnapshotGroupParameters": { -"id": "SnapshotGroupParameters", -"properties": { -"replicaZones": { -"description": "URLs of the zones where disks should be replicated to. Only applicable for regional resources.", -"items": { -"type": "string" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"sourceSnapshotGroup": { -"description": "The source snapshot group used to create disks. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshotGroups/snapshotGroup - projects/project/global/snapshotGroups/snapshotGroup - global/snapshotGroups/snapshotGroup ", -"type": "string" -}, -"type": { -"description": "URL of the disk type resource describing which disk type to use to create disks. Provide this when creating the disk. For example: projects/project /zones/zone/diskTypes/pd-ssd . See Persistent disk types.", -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"SnapshotGroupSourceInfo": { -"id": "SnapshotGroupSourceInfo", -"properties": { -"consistencyGroup": { -"type": "string" -}, -"consistencyGroupId": { -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"SnapshotGroupSourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo": { -"id": "SnapshotGroupSourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo", -"properties": { -"instantSnapshotGroup": { -"type": "string" -}, -"instantSnapshotGroupId": { -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"SnapshotList": { -"description": "Contains a list of Snapshot resources.", -"id": "SnapshotList", -"properties": { -"id": { -"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", -"type": "string" -}, -"items": { -"description": "A list of Snapshot resources.", -"items": { -"$ref": "Snapshot" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"kind": { -"default": "compute#snapshotList", -"description": "Type of resource.", -"type": "string" -}, -"nextPageToken": { -"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", -"type": "string" -}, -"selfLink": { -"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", -"type": "string" -}, -"warning": { -"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", -"properties": { -"code": { -"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", -"enum": [ -"CLEANUP_FAILED", -"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", -"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", -"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", -"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", -"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", -"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", -"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", -"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", -"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", -"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", -"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", -"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", -"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", -"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", -"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", -"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", -"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", -"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", -"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", -"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", -"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", -"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", -"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", -"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", -"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", -"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", -"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", -"UNREACHABLE" -], -"enumDeprecated": [ -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -true, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false, -false -], -"enumDescriptions": [ -"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", -"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", -"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", -"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", -"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", -"Warning that is present in an external api call", -"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", -"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", -"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", -"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", -"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", -"A resource depends on a missing type", -"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", -"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", -"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", -"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", -"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", -"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", -"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", -"No results are present on a particular list page.", -"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", -"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", -"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", -"Warning that a resource is in use.", -"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", -"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", -"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", -"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", -"A given scope cannot be reached." -], -"type": "string" -}, -"data": { -"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", -"items": { +"SnapshotGroup": { +"description": "Represents a SnapshotGroup resource. A snapshot group is a set of snapshots that represents a point in time state of a consistency group.", +"id": "SnapshotGroup", +"properties": { +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"description": { +"description": "Optional. An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#snapshotGroup", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#snapshotGroup for SnapshotGroup resources.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource's resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceInfo": { +"$ref": "SnapshotGroupSourceInfo", +"description": "[Output Only]" +}, +"sourceInstantSnapshotGroup": { +"description": "Input field for the source instant snapshot group.", +"type": "string" +}, +"sourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo": { +"$ref": "SnapshotGroupSourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo", +"description": "[Output Only]" +}, +"status": { +"description": "[Output Only]", +"enum": [ +"CREATING", +"DELETING", +"FAILED", +"INVALID", +"READY", +"UNKNOWN", +"UPLOADING" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SnapshotGroupParameters": { +"id": "SnapshotGroupParameters", +"properties": { +"replicaZones": { +"description": "URLs of the zones where disks should be replicated to. Only applicable for regional resources.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"sourceSnapshotGroup": { +"description": "The source snapshot group used to create disks. You can provide this as a partial or full URL to the resource. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project /global/snapshotGroups/snapshotGroup - projects/project/global/snapshotGroups/snapshotGroup - global/snapshotGroups/snapshotGroup ", +"type": "string" +}, +"type": { +"description": "URL of the disk type resource describing which disk type to use to create disks. Provide this when creating the disk. For example: projects/project /zones/zone/diskTypes/pd-ssd . See Persistent disk types.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SnapshotGroupSourceInfo": { +"id": "SnapshotGroupSourceInfo", +"properties": { +"consistencyGroup": { +"type": "string" +}, +"consistencyGroupId": { +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SnapshotGroupSourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo": { +"id": "SnapshotGroupSourceInstantSnapshotGroupInfo", +"properties": { +"instantSnapshotGroup": { +"type": "string" +}, +"instantSnapshotGroupId": { +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SnapshotList": { +"description": "Contains a list of Snapshot resources.", +"id": "SnapshotList", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of Snapshot resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Snapshot" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#snapshotList", +"description": "Type of resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "[Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "[Output Only] Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"SnapshotParams": { +"description": "Additional snapshot params.", +"id": "SnapshotParams", "properties": { -"key": { -"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", -"type": "string" -}, -"value": { -"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", -"type": "string" -} -}, -"type": "object" -}, -"type": "array" -}, -"message": { -"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { "type": "string" -} }, +"description": "Resource manager tags to be bound to the snapshot. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. Keys must be in the format `tagKeys/{tag_key_id}`, and values are in the format `tagValues/456`. The field is ignored (both PUT & PATCH) when empty.", "type": "object" } }, @@ -110865,15 +112216,27 @@ false "description": "The reasons for the maintenance. Only valid for vms.", "items": { "enum": [ +"FAILURE_DISK", +"FAILURE_GPU", "FAILURE_GPU_TEMPERATURE", "FAILURE_GPU_XID", +"FAILURE_INFRA", +"FAILURE_INTERFACE", +"FAILURE_MEMORY", +"FAILURE_NETWORK", "FAILURE_NVLINK", "INFRASTRUCTURE_RELOCATION", "MAINTENANCE_REASON_UNKNOWN" ], "enumDescriptions": [ +"Maintenance due to disk errors.", +"Maintenance due to GPU errors.", "Maintenance due to high GPU temperature.", "Maintenance due to GPU xid failure.", +"Maintenance due to infrastructure errors.", +"Maintenance due to interface errors.", +"Maintenance due to memory errors.", +"Maintenance due to network errors.", "Maintenance due to NVLink failure.", "Maintenance due to infrastructure relocation.", "Unknown maintenance reason. Do not use this value." @@ -113684,6 +115047,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"reconciling": { +"description": "[Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json index 38765b59c0..9bfbd85df2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.beta.json @@ -21765,7 +21765,7 @@ "organizationSecurityPolicies": { "methods": { "addAssociation": { -"description": "Inserts an association for the specified security policy. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.", +"description": "Inserts an association for the specified security policy. This has billing implications. Projects in the hierarchy with effective hierarchical security policies will be automatically enrolled into Cloud Armor Enterprise if not already enrolled. Use of this API to modify firewall policies is deprecated. Use firewallPolicies.addAssociation instead if possible.", "flatPath": "locations/global/securityPolicies/{securityPolicy}/addAssociation", "httpMethod": "POST", "id": "compute.organizationSecurityPolicies.addAssociation", @@ -34815,6 +34815,125 @@ } } }, +"reservationSubBlocks": { +"methods": { +"get": { +"description": "Retrieves information about the specified reservation subBlock.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks/{reservationSubBlock}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.reservationSubBlocks.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"parentName", +"reservationSubBlock" +], +"parameters": { +"parentName": { +"description": "The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name}", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"reservationSubBlock": { +"description": "The name of the reservation subBlock. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be a resource ID.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks/{reservationSubBlock}", +"response": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlocksGetResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Retrieves a list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.reservationSubBlocks.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"parentName" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parentName": { +"description": "The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name}", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks", +"response": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlocksListResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +} +} +}, "reservations": { "methods": { "aggregatedList": { @@ -45535,7 +45654,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250511", +"revision": "20250601", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -49626,7 +49745,7 @@ false "id": "BackendServiceHAPolicy", "properties": { "fastIPMove": { -"description": "Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.", +"description": "Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.", "enum": [ "DISABLED", "GARP_RA" @@ -54840,6 +54959,18 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] The parent of the firewall policy. This field is not applicable to network firewall policies.", "type": "string" }, +"policyType": { +"description": "The type of the firewall policy. This field can be either VPC_POLICY or RDMA_ROCE_POLICY. Note: if not specified then VPC_POLICY will be used.", +"enum": [ +"RDMA_ROCE_POLICY", +"VPC_POLICY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, "region": { "description": "[Output Only] URL of the region where the regional firewall policy resides. This field is not applicable to global firewall policies. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", "type": "string" @@ -55633,6 +55764,10 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" }, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": { "description": "Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.", "items": { @@ -58922,7 +59057,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "replace": { -"description": "If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. ", +"description": "If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .", "type": "boolean" } }, @@ -60163,7 +60298,7 @@ false }, "metadata": { "$ref": "Metadata", -"description": "The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys." +"description": "The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance." }, "minCpuPlatform": { "description": "Specifies a minimum CPU platform for the VM instance. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: \"Intel Haswell\" or minCpuPlatform: \"Intel Sandy Bridge\".", @@ -61481,6 +61616,29 @@ false "MIG automatically repairs an unhealthy VM by recreating it." ], "type": "string" +}, +"onRepair": { +"$ref": "InstanceGroupManagerInstanceLifecyclePolicyOnRepair", +"description": "Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"InstanceGroupManagerInstanceLifecyclePolicyOnRepair": { +"description": "Configuration for VM repairs in the MIG.", +"id": "InstanceGroupManagerInstanceLifecyclePolicyOnRepair", +"properties": { +"allowChangingZone": { +"description": "Specifies whether the MIG can change a VM's zone during a repair.", +"enum": [ +"NO", +"YES" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"[Default] MIG cannot change a VM's zone during a repair.", +"MIG can select a different zone for the VM during a repair." +], +"type": "string" } }, "type": "object" @@ -82656,7 +82814,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "enableEmergentMaintenance": { -"description": "Indicates if this group of VMs have emergent maintenance enabled.", +"description": "Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.", "type": "boolean" }, "id": { @@ -83001,6 +83159,16 @@ false "$ref": "GroupMaintenanceInfo", "description": "[Output Only] Maintenance information for this reservation block." }, +"reservationSubBlockCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"reservationSubBlockInUseCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of in-use reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block. If at least one VM is running on a subBlock, it is considered in-use.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.", "type": "string" @@ -83364,6 +83532,255 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ReservationSubBlock": { +"description": "Represents a reservation subBlock resource.", +"id": "ReservationSubBlock", +"properties": { +"count": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of hosts that are allocated in this reservation subBlock.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"inUseCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#reservationSubBlock", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "[Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"type": "string" +}, +"physicalTopology": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlockPhysicalTopology", +"description": "[Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock." +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"status": { +"description": "[Output Only] Status of the reservation subBlock.", +"enum": [ +"CREATING", +"DELETING", +"INVALID", +"READY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Resources are being allocated for the reservation subBlock.", +"Reservation subBlock is currently being deleted.", +"", +"Reservation subBlock has allocated all its resources." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "[Output Only] Zone in which the reservation subBlock resides.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ReservationSubBlockPhysicalTopology": { +"id": "ReservationSubBlockPhysicalTopology", +"properties": { +"block": { +"description": "The hash of the capacity block within the cluster.", +"type": "string" +}, +"cluster": { +"description": "The cluster name of the reservation subBlock.", +"type": "string" +}, +"subBlock": { +"description": "The hash of the capacity sub-block within the capacity block.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ReservationSubBlocksGetResponse": { +"id": "ReservationSubBlocksGetResponse", +"properties": { +"resource": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlock" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ReservationSubBlocksListResponse": { +"description": "A list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.", +"id": "ReservationSubBlocksListResponse", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of reservation subBlock resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlock" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#reservationSubBlock", +"description": "Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for a list of reservation subBlocks.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ReservationsBlocksPerformMaintenanceRequest": { "id": "ReservationsBlocksPerformMaintenanceRequest", "properties": { @@ -85242,6 +85659,10 @@ false "description": "URI of the network to which this router belongs.", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "RouterParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "region": { "description": "[Output Only] URI of the region where the router resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.", "type": "string" @@ -86238,6 +86659,20 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"RouterParams": { +"description": "Additional router parameters.", +"id": "RouterParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid. * Inconsistent format is not supported. For instance: {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"123/env\" : \"prod\"} is invalid.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "RouterStatus": { "id": "RouterStatus", "properties": { @@ -87338,6 +87773,10 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"skipGuestOsShutdown": { +"description": "Default is false and there will be 120 seconds between GCE ACPI G2 Soft Off and ACPI G3 Mechanical Off for Standard VMs and 30 seconds for Spot VMs.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "terminationTime": { "description": "Specifies the timestamp, when the instance will be terminated, in RFC3339 text format. If specified, the instance termination action will be performed at the termination time.", "type": "string" @@ -100601,6 +101040,10 @@ false "description": "Represents a Cloud VPN Tunnel resource. For more information about VPN, read the the Cloud VPN Overview.", "id": "VpnTunnel", "properties": { +"cipherSuite": { +"$ref": "VpnTunnelCipherSuite", +"description": "User specified list of ciphers to use for the phase 1 and phase 2 of the IKE protocol." +}, "creationTimestamp": { "description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", "type": "string" @@ -100913,6 +101356,18 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"VpnTunnelCipherSuite": { +"id": "VpnTunnelCipherSuite", +"properties": { +"phase1": { +"$ref": "VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms" +}, +"phase2": { +"$ref": "VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VpnTunnelList": { "description": "Contains a list of VpnTunnel resources.", "id": "VpnTunnelList", @@ -101068,6 +101523,60 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms": { +"id": "VpnTunnelPhase1Algorithms", +"properties": { +"dh": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"encryption": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"integrity": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"prf": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms": { +"id": "VpnTunnelPhase2Algorithms", +"properties": { +"encryption": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"integrity": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"pfs": { +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "VpnTunnelsScopedList": { "id": "VpnTunnelsScopedList", "properties": { @@ -101342,6 +101851,10 @@ false "pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", "type": "string" }, +"reconciling": { +"description": "[Output Only] Indicates whether there are wire changes yet to be processed.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json index 7b4d4ed99b..9219077946 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/compute.v1.json @@ -2548,6 +2548,54 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" ] }, +"bulkSetLabels": { +"description": "Sets the labels on many disks at once. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/disks/bulkSetLabels", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "compute.disks.bulkSetLabels", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone" +], +"parameters": { +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "(?:(?:[-a-z0-9]{1,63}\\.)*(?:[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?):)?(?:[0-9]{1,19}|(?:[a-z0-9](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?))", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"resource": { +"description": "Name or id of the resource for this request.", +"location": "query", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?|[1-9][0-9]{0,19}", +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "The name of the zone for this request.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "[a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/disks/bulkSetLabels", +"request": { +"$ref": "BulkZoneSetLabelsRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute" +] +}, "createSnapshot": { "description": "Creates a snapshot of a specified persistent disk. For regular snapshot creation, consider using snapshots.insert instead, as that method supports more features, such as creating snapshots in a project different from the source disk project.", "flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/disks/{disk}/createSnapshot", @@ -29930,6 +29978,125 @@ } } }, +"reservationSubBlocks": { +"methods": { +"get": { +"description": "Retrieves information about the specified reservation subBlock.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks/{reservationSubBlock}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.reservationSubBlocks.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"parentName", +"reservationSubBlock" +], +"parameters": { +"parentName": { +"description": "The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name}", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"reservationSubBlock": { +"description": "The name of the reservation subBlock. Name should conform to RFC1035 or be a resource ID.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks/{reservationSubBlock}", +"response": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlocksGetResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Retrieves a list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.", +"flatPath": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "compute.reservationSubBlocks.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"project", +"zone", +"parentName" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. Most Compute resources support two types of filter expressions: expressions that support regular expressions and expressions that follow API improvement proposal AIP-160. These two types of filter expressions cannot be mixed in one request. If you want to use AIP-160, your expression must specify the field name, an operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `>`, `<`, `<=`, `>=` or `:`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. The `:*` comparison can be used to test whether a key has been defined. For example, to find all objects with `owner` label use: ``` labels.owner:* ``` You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Skylake\") OR (cpuPlatform = \"Intel Broadwell\") AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ``` If you want to use a regular expression, use the `eq` (equal) or `ne` (not equal) operator against a single un-parenthesized expression with or without quotes or against multiple parenthesized expressions. Examples: `fieldname eq unquoted literal` `fieldname eq 'single quoted literal'` `fieldname eq \"double quoted literal\"` `(fieldname1 eq literal) (fieldname2 ne \"literal\")` The literal value is interpreted as a regular expression using Google RE2 library syntax. The literal value must match the entire field. For example, to filter for instances that do not end with name \"instance\", you would use `name ne .*instance`. You cannot combine constraints on multiple fields using regular expressions.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"maxResults": { +"default": "500", +"description": "The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)", +"format": "uint32", +"location": "query", +"minimum": "0", +"type": "integer" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=\"creationTimestamp desc\"`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parentName": { +"description": "The name of the parent reservation and parent block. In the format of reservations/{reservation_name}/reservationBlocks/{reservation_block_name}", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"project": { +"description": "Project ID for this request.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"returnPartialSuccess": { +"description": "Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false. For example, when partial success behavior is enabled, aggregatedList for a single zone scope either returns all resources in the zone or no resources, with an error code.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "Name of the zone for this request. Zone name should conform to RFC1035.", +"location": "path", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "projects/{project}/zones/{zone}/{parentName}/reservationSubBlocks", +"response": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlocksListResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/compute.readonly" +] +} +} +}, "reservations": { "methods": { "aggregatedList": { @@ -39717,7 +39884,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250511", +"revision": "20250601", "rootUrl": "https://compute.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AWSV4Signature": { @@ -43554,7 +43721,7 @@ false "id": "BackendServiceHAPolicy", "properties": { "fastIPMove": { -"description": "Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.", +"description": "Specifies whether fast IP move is enabled, and if so, the mechanism to achieve it. Supported values are: - DISABLED: Fast IP Move is disabled. You can only use the haPolicy.leader API to update the leader. - >GARP_RA: Provides a method to very quickly define a new network endpoint as the leader. This method is faster than updating the leader using the haPolicy.leader API. Fast IP move works as follows: The VM hosting the network endpoint that should become the new leader sends either a Gratuitous ARP (GARP) packet (IPv4) or an ICMPv6 Router Advertisement(RA) packet (IPv6). Google Cloud immediately but temporarily associates the forwarding rule IP address with that VM, and both new and in-flight packets are quickly delivered to that VM. Note the important properties of the Fast IP Move functionality: - The GARP/RA-initiated re-routing stays active for approximately 20 minutes. After triggering fast failover, you must also appropriately set the haPolicy.leader. - The new leader instance should continue to send GARP/RA packets periodically every 10 seconds until at least 10 minutes after updating the haPolicy.leader (but stop immediately if it is no longer the leader). - After triggering a fast failover, we recommend that you wait at least 3 seconds before sending another GARP/RA packet from a different VM instance to avoid race conditions. - Don't send GARP/RA packets from different VM instances at the same time. If multiple instances continue to send GARP/RA packets, traffic might be routed to different destinations in an alternating order. This condition ceases when a single instance issues a GARP/RA packet. - The GARP/RA request always takes priority over the leader API. Using the haPolicy.leader API to change the leader to a different instance will have no effect until the GARP/RA request becomes inactive. - The GARP/RA packets should follow the GARP/RA Packet Specifications.. - When multiple forwarding rules refer to a regional backend service, you need only send a GARP or RA packet for a single forwarding rule virtual IP. The virtual IPs for all forwarding rules targeting the same backend service will also be moved to the sender of the GARP or RA packet. The following are the Fast IP Move limitations (that is, when fastIPMove is not DISABLED): - Multiple forwarding rules cannot use the same IP address if one of them refers to a regional backend service with fastIPMove. - The regional backend service must set the network field, and all NEGs must belong to that network. However, individual NEGs can belong to different subnetworks of that network. - The maximum number of network endpoints across all backends of a backend service with fastIPMove is 32. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove that can have the same network endpoint attached to one of its backends is 64. - The maximum number of backend services with fastIPMove in a VPC in a region is 64. - The network endpoints that are attached to a backend of a backend service with fastIPMove cannot resolve to Gen3+ machines for IPv6. - Traffic directed to the leader by a static route next hop will not be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. Such traffic will only be redirected once an haPolicy.leader update has taken effect. Only traffic to the forwarding rule's virtual IP will be redirected to a new leader by fast failover. haPolicy.fastIPMove can be set only at backend service creation time. Once set, it cannot be updated. By default, fastIpMove is set to DISABLED.", "enum": [ "DISABLED", "GARP_RA" @@ -44660,6 +44827,36 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"BulkSetLabelsRequest": { +"id": "BulkSetLabelsRequest", +"properties": { +"labelFingerprint": { +"description": "The fingerprint of the previous set of labels for this resource, used to detect conflicts. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You may optionally provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels. Make a get() request to the resource to get the latest fingerprint.", +"format": "byte", +"type": "string" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "The labels to set for this resource.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"BulkZoneSetLabelsRequest": { +"id": "BulkZoneSetLabelsRequest", +"properties": { +"requests": { +"items": { +"$ref": "BulkSetLabelsRequest" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "CacheInvalidationRule": { "id": "CacheInvalidationRule", "properties": { @@ -48593,6 +48790,24 @@ false }, "type": "array" }, +"destNetworkType": { +"description": "Network type of the traffic destination. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - NON_INTERNET ", +"enum": [ +"INTERNET", +"INTRA_VPC", +"NON_INTERNET", +"UNSPECIFIED", +"VPC_NETWORKS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"", +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, "destRegionCodes": { "description": "Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for destination of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex.\"US\" Maximum number of dest region codes allowed is 5000.", "items": { @@ -48635,6 +48850,31 @@ false }, "type": "array" }, +"srcNetworkType": { +"description": "Network type of the traffic source. Allowed values are: - UNSPECIFIED - INTERNET - INTRA_VPC - NON_INTERNET - VPC_NETWORKS ", +"enum": [ +"INTERNET", +"INTRA_VPC", +"NON_INTERNET", +"UNSPECIFIED", +"VPC_NETWORKS" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"", +"", +"", +"", +"" +], +"type": "string" +}, +"srcNetworks": { +"description": "Networks of the traffic source. It can be either a full or partial url.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "srcRegionCodes": { "description": "Region codes whose IP addresses will be used to match for source of traffic. Should be specified as 2 letter country code defined as per ISO 3166 alpha-2 country codes. ex.\"US\" Maximum number of source region codes allowed is 5000.", "items": { @@ -48946,6 +49186,10 @@ false "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.", "type": "string" }, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, "serviceDirectoryRegistrations": { "description": "Service Directory resources to register this forwarding rule with. Currently, only supports a single Service Directory resource.", "items": { @@ -51043,7 +51287,7 @@ false "type": "string" }, "replace": { -"description": "If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is false. ", +"description": "If false, headerValue is appended to any values that already exist for the header. If true, headerValue is set for the header, discarding any values that were set for that header. The default value is true, unless a variable is present in headerValue, in which case the default value is false. .", "type": "boolean" } }, @@ -52251,7 +52495,7 @@ false }, "metadata": { "$ref": "Metadata", -"description": "The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes custom metadata and predefined keys." +"description": "The metadata key/value pairs assigned to this instance. This includes metadata keys that were explicitly defined for the instance." }, "minCpuPlatform": { "description": "Specifies a minimum CPU platform for the VM instance. Applicable values are the friendly names of CPU platforms, such as minCpuPlatform: \"Intel Haswell\" or minCpuPlatform: \"Intel Sandy Bridge\".", @@ -62451,6 +62695,10 @@ false "description": "A full or partial URL of the network profile to apply to this network. This field can be set only at resource creation time. For example, the following are valid URLs: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/{api_version}/projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name} - projects/{project_id}/global/networkProfiles/{network_profile_name} ", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "NetworkParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "peerings": { "description": "[Output Only] A list of network peerings for the resource.", "items": { @@ -64772,6 +65020,20 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"NetworkParams": { +"description": "Additional network parameters.", +"id": "NetworkParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "NetworkPeering": { "description": "A network peering attached to a network resource. The message includes the peering name, peer network, peering state, and a flag indicating whether Google Compute Engine should automatically create routes for the peering.", "id": "NetworkPeering", @@ -73106,6 +73368,10 @@ false "description": "An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.", "type": "string" }, +"enableEmergentMaintenance": { +"description": "Indicates whether Compute Engine allows unplanned maintenance for your VMs; for example, to fix hardware errors.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "id": { "description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", "format": "uint64", @@ -73430,6 +73696,16 @@ false "$ref": "GroupMaintenanceInfo", "description": "[Output Only] Maintenance information for this reservation block." }, +"reservationSubBlockCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"reservationSubBlockInUseCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of in-use reservation subBlocks associated with this reservation block. If at least one VM is running on a subBlock, it is considered in-use.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, "selfLink": { "description": "[Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.", "type": "string" @@ -73793,6 +74069,255 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ReservationSubBlock": { +"description": "Represents a reservation subBlock resource.", +"id": "ReservationSubBlock", +"properties": { +"count": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of hosts that are allocated in this reservation subBlock.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"creationTimestamp": { +"description": "[Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.", +"type": "string" +}, +"id": { +"description": "[Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.", +"format": "uint64", +"type": "string" +}, +"inUseCount": { +"description": "[Output Only] The number of instances that are currently in use on this reservation subBlock.", +"format": "int32", +"type": "integer" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#reservationSubBlock", +"description": "[Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for reservation subBlocks.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "[Output Only] The name of this reservation subBlock generated by Google Compute Engine. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035 @pattern [a-z](?:[-a-z0-9]{0,61}[a-z0-9])?", +"type": "string" +}, +"physicalTopology": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlockPhysicalTopology", +"description": "[Output Only] The physical topology of the reservation subBlock." +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined fully-qualified URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLinkWithId": { +"description": "[Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.", +"type": "string" +}, +"status": { +"description": "[Output Only] Status of the reservation subBlock.", +"enum": [ +"CREATING", +"DELETING", +"INVALID", +"READY" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Resources are being allocated for the reservation subBlock.", +"Reservation subBlock is currently being deleted.", +"", +"Reservation subBlock has allocated all its resources." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"zone": { +"description": "[Output Only] Zone in which the reservation subBlock resides.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ReservationSubBlockPhysicalTopology": { +"id": "ReservationSubBlockPhysicalTopology", +"properties": { +"block": { +"description": "The hash of the capacity block within the cluster.", +"type": "string" +}, +"cluster": { +"description": "The cluster name of the reservation subBlock.", +"type": "string" +}, +"subBlock": { +"description": "The hash of the capacity sub-block within the capacity block.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ReservationSubBlocksGetResponse": { +"id": "ReservationSubBlocksGetResponse", +"properties": { +"resource": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlock" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ReservationSubBlocksListResponse": { +"description": "A list of reservation subBlocks under a single reservation.", +"id": "ReservationSubBlocksListResponse", +"properties": { +"id": { +"description": "Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.", +"type": "string" +}, +"items": { +"description": "A list of reservation subBlock resources.", +"items": { +"$ref": "ReservationSubBlock" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"kind": { +"default": "compute#reservationSubBlock", +"description": "Type of the resource. Always compute#reservationSubBlock for a list of reservation subBlocks.", +"type": "string" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.", +"type": "string" +}, +"selfLink": { +"description": "Server-defined URL for this resource.", +"type": "string" +}, +"warning": { +"description": "Informational warning message.", +"properties": { +"code": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.", +"enum": [ +"CLEANUP_FAILED", +"DEPRECATED_RESOURCE_USED", +"DEPRECATED_TYPE_USED", +"DISK_SIZE_LARGER_THAN_IMAGE_SIZE", +"EXPERIMENTAL_TYPE_USED", +"EXTERNAL_API_WARNING", +"FIELD_VALUE_OVERRIDEN", +"INJECTED_KERNELS_DEPRECATED", +"INVALID_HEALTH_CHECK_FOR_DYNAMIC_WIEGHTED_LB", +"LARGE_DEPLOYMENT_WARNING", +"LIST_OVERHEAD_QUOTA_EXCEED", +"MISSING_TYPE_DEPENDENCY", +"NEXT_HOP_ADDRESS_NOT_ASSIGNED", +"NEXT_HOP_CANNOT_IP_FORWARD", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_HAS_NO_IPV6_INTERFACE", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_FOUND", +"NEXT_HOP_INSTANCE_NOT_ON_NETWORK", +"NEXT_HOP_NOT_RUNNING", +"NOT_CRITICAL_ERROR", +"NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE", +"PARTIAL_SUCCESS", +"QUOTA_INFO_UNAVAILABLE", +"REQUIRED_TOS_AGREEMENT", +"RESOURCE_IN_USE_BY_OTHER_RESOURCE_WARNING", +"RESOURCE_NOT_DELETED", +"SCHEMA_VALIDATION_IGNORED", +"SINGLE_INSTANCE_PROPERTY_TEMPLATE", +"UNDECLARED_PROPERTIES", +"UNREACHABLE" +], +"enumDeprecated": [ +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +true, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false, +false +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"Warning about failed cleanup of transient changes made by a failed operation.", +"A link to a deprecated resource was created.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as deprecated", +"The user created a boot disk that is larger than image size.", +"When deploying and at least one of the resources has a type marked as experimental", +"Warning that is present in an external api call", +"Warning that value of a field has been overridden. Deprecated unused field.", +"The operation involved use of an injected kernel, which is deprecated.", +"A WEIGHTED_MAGLEV backend service is associated with a health check that is not of type HTTP/HTTPS/HTTP2.", +"When deploying a deployment with a exceedingly large number of resources", +"Resource can't be retrieved due to list overhead quota exceed which captures the amount of resources filtered out by user-defined list filter.", +"A resource depends on a missing type", +"The route's nextHopIp address is not assigned to an instance on the network.", +"The route's next hop instance cannot ip forward.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not have an ipv6 interface on the same network as the route.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that does not exist.", +"The route's nextHopInstance URL refers to an instance that is not on the same network as the route.", +"The route's next hop instance does not have a status of RUNNING.", +"Error which is not critical. We decided to continue the process despite the mentioned error.", +"No results are present on a particular list page.", +"Success is reported, but some results may be missing due to errors", +"Quota information is not available to client requests (e.g: regions.list).", +"The user attempted to use a resource that requires a TOS they have not accepted.", +"Warning that a resource is in use.", +"One or more of the resources set to auto-delete could not be deleted because they were in use.", +"When a resource schema validation is ignored.", +"Instance template used in instance group manager is valid as such, but its application does not make a lot of sense, because it allows only single instance in instance group.", +"When undeclared properties in the schema are present", +"A given scope cannot be reached." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"data": { +"description": "[Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: \"data\": [ { \"key\": \"scope\", \"value\": \"zones/us-east1-d\" } ", +"items": { +"properties": { +"key": { +"description": "[Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).", +"type": "string" +}, +"value": { +"description": "[Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"message": { +"description": "[Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ReservationsBlocksPerformMaintenanceRequest": { "id": "ReservationsBlocksPerformMaintenanceRequest", "properties": { @@ -74241,6 +74766,9 @@ false "Resource policy is ready to be used." ], "type": "string" +}, +"workloadPolicy": { +"$ref": "ResourcePolicyWorkloadPolicy" } }, "type": "object" @@ -74458,6 +74986,10 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"gpuTopology": { +"description": "Specifies the shape of the GPU slice, in slice based GPU families eg. A4X.", +"type": "string" +}, "vmCount": { "description": "Number of VMs in this placement group. Google does not recommend that you use this field unless you use a compact policy and you want your policy to work only if it contains this exact number of VMs.", "format": "int32", @@ -74848,6 +75380,40 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"ResourcePolicyWorkloadPolicy": { +"description": "Represents the workload policy.", +"id": "ResourcePolicyWorkloadPolicy", +"properties": { +"acceleratorTopology": { +"type": "string" +}, +"maxTopologyDistance": { +"enum": [ +"BLOCK", +"CLUSTER", +"SUBBLOCK" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"VMs must be provisioned in the same block.", +"VMs must be provisioned in the same cluster.", +"VMs must be provisioned in the same subblock." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"type": { +"enum": [ +"HIGH_AVAILABILITY", +"HIGH_THROUGHPUT" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"VMs will be provisioned in such a way which provides high availability.", +"VMs will be provisioned in such a way which provides high throughput." +], +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ResourceStatus": { "description": "Contains output only fields. Use this sub-message for actual values set on Instance attributes as compared to the value requested by the user (intent) in their instance CRUD calls.", "id": "ResourceStatus", @@ -83330,6 +83896,10 @@ false "description": "The URL of the network to which this subnetwork belongs, provided by the client when initially creating the subnetwork. This field can be set only at resource creation time.", "type": "string" }, +"params": { +"$ref": "SubnetworkParams", +"description": "Input only. [Input Only] Additional params passed with the request, but not persisted as part of resource payload." +}, "privateIpGoogleAccess": { "description": "Whether the VMs in this subnet can access Google services without assigned external IP addresses. This field can be both set at resource creation time and updated using setPrivateIpGoogleAccess.", "type": "boolean" @@ -83825,6 +84395,20 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"SubnetworkParams": { +"description": "Additional subnetwork parameters.", +"id": "SubnetworkParams", +"properties": { +"resourceManagerTags": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Tag keys/values directly bound to this resource. Tag keys and values have the same definition as resource manager tags. The field is allowed for INSERT only. The keys/values to set on the resource should be specified in either ID { : } or Namespaced format { : }. For example the following are valid inputs: * {\"tagKeys/333\" : \"tagValues/444\", \"tagKeys/123\" : \"tagValues/456\"} * {\"123/environment\" : \"production\", \"345/abc\" : \"xyz\"} Note: * Invalid combinations of ID & namespaced format is not supported. For instance: {\"123/environment\" : \"tagValues/444\"} is invalid.", +"type": "object" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "SubnetworkSecondaryRange": { "description": "Represents a secondary IP range of a subnetwork.", "id": "SubnetworkSecondaryRange", From 9802d78127263010f84dd10c3c77b6384df14d0b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 06/32] feat(connectors): update the api #### connectors:v1 The following keys were added: - schemas.EventingConfig.properties.privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects (Total Keys: 2) --- ...ors_v1.projects.locations.connections.html | 25 +++++++++++++++---- .../documents/connectors.v1.json | 11 ++++++-- 2 files changed, 29 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.connections.html b/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.connections.html index 1435e5d6e8..98b984525b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.connections.html +++ b/docs/dyn/connectors_v1.projects.locations.connections.html @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, - "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 18 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection + "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 19 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection "additionalVariables": [ # Optional. Additional eventing related field values { # ConfigVariable represents a configuration variable present in a Connection. or AuthConfig. "boolValue": True or False, # Value is a bool. @@ -533,6 +533,9 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, + "privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects": [ # Optional. List of projects to be allowlisted for the service attachment created in the tenant project for eventing ingress. + "A String", + ], "privateConnectivityEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Private Connectivity Enabled. "proxyDestinationConfig": { # Define the Connectors target endpoint. # Optional. Proxy for Eventing auto-registration. "destinations": [ # The destinations for the key. @@ -1008,7 +1011,7 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, - "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 18 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection + "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 19 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection "additionalVariables": [ # Optional. Additional eventing related field values { # ConfigVariable represents a configuration variable present in a Connection. or AuthConfig. "boolValue": True or False, # Value is a bool. @@ -1177,6 +1180,9 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, + "privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects": [ # Optional. List of projects to be allowlisted for the service attachment created in the tenant project for eventing ingress. + "A String", + ], "privateConnectivityEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Private Connectivity Enabled. "proxyDestinationConfig": { # Define the Connectors target endpoint. # Optional. Proxy for Eventing auto-registration. "destinations": [ # The destinations for the key. @@ -1671,7 +1677,7 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, - "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 18 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection + "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 19 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection "additionalVariables": [ # Optional. Additional eventing related field values { # ConfigVariable represents a configuration variable present in a Connection. or AuthConfig. "boolValue": True or False, # Value is a bool. @@ -1840,6 +1846,9 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, + "privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects": [ # Optional. List of projects to be allowlisted for the service attachment created in the tenant project for eventing ingress. + "A String", + ], "privateConnectivityEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Private Connectivity Enabled. "proxyDestinationConfig": { # Define the Connectors target endpoint. # Optional. Proxy for Eventing auto-registration. "destinations": [ # The destinations for the key. @@ -2288,7 +2297,7 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, - "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 18 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection + "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 19 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection "additionalVariables": [ # Optional. Additional eventing related field values { # ConfigVariable represents a configuration variable present in a Connection. or AuthConfig. "boolValue": True or False, # Value is a bool. @@ -2457,6 +2466,9 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, + "privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects": [ # Optional. List of projects to be allowlisted for the service attachment created in the tenant project for eventing ingress. + "A String", + ], "privateConnectivityEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Private Connectivity Enabled. "proxyDestinationConfig": { # Define the Connectors target endpoint. # Optional. Proxy for Eventing auto-registration. "destinations": [ # The destinations for the key. @@ -3052,7 +3064,7 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, - "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 18 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection + "eventingConfig": { # Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 19 # Optional. Eventing config of a connection "additionalVariables": [ # Optional. Additional eventing related field values { # ConfigVariable represents a configuration variable present in a Connection. or AuthConfig. "boolValue": True or False, # Value is a bool. @@ -3221,6 +3233,9 @@

Method Details

"username": "A String", # Optional. Username. }, }, + "privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects": [ # Optional. List of projects to be allowlisted for the service attachment created in the tenant project for eventing ingress. + "A String", + ], "privateConnectivityEnabled": True or False, # Optional. Private Connectivity Enabled. "proxyDestinationConfig": { # Define the Connectors target endpoint. # Optional. Proxy for Eventing auto-registration. "destinations": [ # The destinations for the key. diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json index 63ff24f418..a967eecfed 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/connectors.v1.json @@ -2752,7 +2752,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250521", +"revision": "20250604", "rootUrl": "https://connectors.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AuditConfig": { @@ -5303,7 +5303,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "EventingConfig": { -"description": "Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 18", +"description": "Eventing Configuration of a connection next: 19", "id": "EventingConfig", "properties": { "additionalVariables": { @@ -5337,6 +5337,13 @@ "$ref": "AuthConfig", "description": "Optional. Auth details for the event listener." }, +"privateConnectivityAllowlistedProjects": { +"description": "Optional. List of projects to be allowlisted for the service attachment created in the tenant project for eventing ingress.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "privateConnectivityEnabled": { "description": "Optional. Private Connectivity Enabled.", "type": "boolean" From 316eee5c9ac7f38ba69c6b6fb5f3f77a55428d7c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 07/32] feat(containeranalysis): update the api #### containeranalysis:v1 The following keys were added: - schemas.DiscoveryOccurrence.properties.files (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.File (Total Keys: 5) #### containeranalysis:v1alpha1 The following keys were added: - schemas.Discovered.properties.files (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.File (Total Keys: 5) #### containeranalysis:v1beta1 The following keys were added: - schemas.Discovered.properties.files (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.File (Total Keys: 5) --- ....projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html | 8 +++ ...sis_v1.projects.locations.occurrences.html | 64 +++++++++++++++++++ ...nalysis_v1.projects.notes.occurrences.html | 8 +++ ...aineranalysis_v1.projects.occurrences.html | 64 +++++++++++++++++++ ...s_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html | 8 +++ ...nalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html | 48 ++++++++++++++ ..._v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html | 8 +++ ....projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html | 8 +++ ...1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html | 64 +++++++++++++++++++ ...is_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html | 8 +++ ...analysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html | 64 +++++++++++++++++++ .../documents/containeranalysis.v1.json | 26 +++++++- .../documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json | 29 ++++++++- .../documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json | 26 +++++++- 14 files changed, 427 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html index 86c01a7e4c..a420942034 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html @@ -541,6 +541,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.occurrences.html index 353781a6f1..18c60cb29e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.locations.occurrences.html @@ -557,6 +557,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -1426,6 +1434,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -2300,6 +2316,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -3165,6 +3189,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -4055,6 +4087,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -5308,6 +5348,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -6191,6 +6239,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -7057,6 +7113,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.notes.occurrences.html index 58f3d70e82..a205ae8280 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.notes.occurrences.html @@ -541,6 +541,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.occurrences.html index ce60d8b5fd..404b07c1fd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1.projects.occurrences.html @@ -557,6 +557,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -1426,6 +1434,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -2300,6 +2316,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -3165,6 +3189,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -4055,6 +4087,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -5308,6 +5348,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -6191,6 +6239,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. @@ -7057,6 +7113,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # Output only. The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. "error": "A String", # If there was an error generating an SBOM, this will indicate what that error was. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html index ec4a6b89c5..17783610a5 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html @@ -568,6 +568,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html index 450da52116..e7c586464e 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html @@ -584,6 +584,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. @@ -1533,6 +1541,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. @@ -2506,6 +2522,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. @@ -3881,6 +3905,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. @@ -4847,6 +4879,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. @@ -5796,6 +5836,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html index 104a83077e..a0bb87f0f3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html @@ -568,6 +568,14 @@

Method Details

"archiveTime": "A String", # The time occurrences related to this discovery occurrence were archived. "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. "cpe": "A String", # The CPE of the resource being scanned. + "files": [ # Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { # A file as part of a resource. + "digest": { # Optional. The digest(s) of the file. + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", # Optional. The name of the file. + }, + ], "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "operation": { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call. # Output only. An operation that indicates the status of the current scan. This field is deprecated, do not use. "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html index 17ace6c43c..a019f524a1 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.notes.occurrences.html @@ -393,6 +393,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html index 07d9d23126..d2b1ca9b77 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.locations.occurrences.html @@ -409,6 +409,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -995,6 +1003,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -1586,6 +1602,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -2168,6 +2192,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -2775,6 +2807,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -3766,6 +3806,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -4366,6 +4414,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -4949,6 +5005,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html index 3a6c75a999..ce9b039243 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.notes.occurrences.html @@ -393,6 +393,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html index f69ce22b13..a6d75aa67b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html +++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1beta1.projects.occurrences.html @@ -409,6 +409,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -995,6 +1003,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -1586,6 +1602,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -2168,6 +2192,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -2775,6 +2807,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -3766,6 +3806,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -4366,6 +4414,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. @@ -4949,6 +5005,14 @@

Method Details

"message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client. }, "continuousAnalysis": "A String", # Whether the resource is continuously analyzed. + "files": [ # Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence. + { + "digest": { + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "name": "A String", + }, + ], "lastAnalysisTime": "A String", # The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use. "lastScanTime": "A String", # The last time this resource was scanned. "sbomStatus": { # The status of an SBOM generation. # The status of an SBOM generation. diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json index 9ae6f696cb..456e21fb9c 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1.json @@ -1685,7 +1685,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250509", +"revision": "20250528", "rootUrl": "https://containeranalysis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { @@ -3679,7 +3679,7 @@ false "id": "ContaineranalysisGoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1DependencyGitSourceRepository", "properties": { "developerConnect": { -"description": "The Developer Connect Git repository link or the url that matches a repository link in the current project, formatted as `projects/*/locations/*/connections/*/gitRepositoryLink/*`", +"description": "The Developer Connect Git repository link formatted as `projects/*/locations/*/connections/*/gitRepositoryLink/*`", "type": "string" }, "url": { @@ -4501,6 +4501,13 @@ false "description": "The CPE of the resource being scanned.", "type": "string" }, +"files": { +"description": "Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence.", +"items": { +"$ref": "File" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "lastScanTime": { "description": "The last time this resource was scanned.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4638,6 +4645,21 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"File": { +"id": "File", +"properties": { +"digest": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "FileHashes": { "description": "Container message for hashes of byte content of files, used in source messages to verify integrity of source input to the build.", "id": "FileHashes", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json index fabafe215a..dbd878b0bf 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1alpha1.json @@ -1452,7 +1452,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250509", +"revision": "20250528", "rootUrl": "https://containeranalysis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AnalysisCompleted": { @@ -3252,7 +3252,7 @@ false "id": "ContaineranalysisGoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1DependencyGitSourceRepository", "properties": { "developerConnect": { -"description": "The Developer Connect Git repository link or the url that matches a repository link in the current project, formatted as `projects/*/locations/*/connections/*/gitRepositoryLink/*`", +"description": "The Developer Connect Git repository link formatted as `projects/*/locations/*/connections/*/gitRepositoryLink/*`", "type": "string" }, "url": { @@ -4061,6 +4061,13 @@ false "description": "The CPE of the resource being scanned.", "type": "string" }, +"files": { +"description": "Optional. Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence.", +"items": { +"$ref": "File" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "lastScanTime": { "description": "The last time this resource was scanned.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4345,6 +4352,24 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"File": { +"description": "A file as part of a resource.", +"id": "File", +"properties": { +"digest": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. The digest(s) of the file.", +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the file.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "FileHashes": { "description": "Container message for hashes of byte content of files, used in Source messages to verify integrity of source input to the build.", "id": "FileHashes", diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json index 43bac28923..934627d4cd 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/containeranalysis.v1beta1.json @@ -1741,7 +1741,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250425", +"revision": "20250528", "rootUrl": "https://containeranalysis.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AliasContext": { @@ -3615,7 +3615,7 @@ false "id": "ContaineranalysisGoogleDevtoolsCloudbuildV1DependencyGitSourceRepository", "properties": { "developerConnect": { -"description": "The Developer Connect Git repository link or the url that matches a repository link in the current project, formatted as `projects/*/locations/*/connections/*/gitRepositoryLink/*`", +"description": "The Developer Connect Git repository link formatted as `projects/*/locations/*/connections/*/gitRepositoryLink/*`", "type": "string" }, "url": { @@ -4379,6 +4379,13 @@ false ], "type": "string" }, +"files": { +"description": "Files that make up the resource described by the occurrence.", +"items": { +"$ref": "File" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "lastAnalysisTime": { "description": "The last time continuous analysis was done for this resource. Deprecated, do not use.", "format": "google-datetime", @@ -4676,6 +4683,21 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"File": { +"id": "File", +"properties": { +"digest": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "FileHashes": { "description": "Container message for hashes of byte content of files, used in source messages to verify integrity of source input to the build.", "id": "FileHashes", From 5c60efd02c7b90ecb6120b9a8cbcde50dcabaa34 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 08/32] feat(content): update the api #### content:v2.1 The following keys were added: - schemas.AccountUser.properties.readOnly.type (Total Keys: 1) --- docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html | 8 ++++++++ .../discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json | 6 +++++- 2 files changed, 13 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html index e2f7631815..7c08bec4bd 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html +++ b/docs/dyn/content_v2_1.accounts.html @@ -292,6 +292,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -429,6 +430,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -586,6 +588,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -701,6 +704,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -814,6 +818,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -985,6 +990,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -1195,6 +1201,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], @@ -1308,6 +1315,7 @@

Method Details

"orderManager": True or False, # Whether user is an order manager. "paymentsAnalyst": True or False, # Whether user can access payment statements. "paymentsManager": True or False, # Whether user can manage payment settings. + "readOnly": True or False, # Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access. "reportingManager": True or False, # Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center. }, ], diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json index 7e06874ed8..082dbfaca2 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/content.v2.1.json @@ -4570,7 +4570,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250427", +"revision": "20250603", "rootUrl": "https://shoppingcontent.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { @@ -5369,6 +5369,10 @@ false "description": "Whether user can manage payment settings.", "type": "boolean" }, +"readOnly": { +"description": "Optional. Whether user has standard read-only access.", +"type": "boolean" +}, "reportingManager": { "description": "Whether user is a reporting manager. This role is equivalent to the Performance and insights role in Merchant Center.", "type": "boolean" From 2b825e3b146aa93ee4d62d7a9383e37686149e91 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 09/32] fix(dataportability): update the api #### dataportability:v1 The following keys were changed: - resources.accessType.methods.check.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.archiveJobs.methods.cancel.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.archiveJobs.methods.getPortabilityArchiveState.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.archiveJobs.methods.retry.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.authorization.methods.reset.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.portabilityArchive.methods.initiate.scopes (Total Keys: 1) #### dataportability:v1beta The following keys were changed: - resources.accessType.methods.check.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.archiveJobs.methods.cancel.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.archiveJobs.methods.getPortabilityArchiveState.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.archiveJobs.methods.retry.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.authorization.methods.reset.scopes (Total Keys: 1) - resources.portabilityArchive.methods.initiate.scopes (Total Keys: 1) --- .../discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1.json | 11 ++++++++++- .../documents/dataportability.v1beta.json | 11 ++++++++++- 2 files changed, 20 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1.json index 8436897a7c..09606c63e5 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1.json @@ -68,6 +68,9 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places": { "description": "Move a copy of your Starred places list on Maps" }, +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile": { +"description": "Move a copy of your vehicle profile on Maps" +}, "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps": { "description": "Move a copy of your Maps activity" }, @@ -339,6 +342,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -436,6 +440,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -526,6 +531,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -619,6 +625,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -706,6 +713,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -793,6 +801,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -842,7 +851,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250305", +"revision": "20250605", "rootUrl": "https://dataportability.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelPortabilityArchiveRequest": { diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1beta.json index 93de39bd17..ec45f42b0b 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1beta.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataportability.v1beta.json @@ -68,6 +68,9 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places": { "description": "Move a copy of your Starred places list on Maps" }, +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile": { +"description": "Move a copy of your vehicle profile on Maps" +}, "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps": { "description": "Move a copy of your Maps activity" }, @@ -339,6 +342,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -436,6 +440,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -526,6 +531,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -619,6 +625,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -706,6 +713,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -793,6 +801,7 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.questions_answers", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.reviews", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.starred_places", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.maps.vehicle_profile", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.maps", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.myadcenter", "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dataportability.myactivity.play", @@ -842,7 +851,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250305", +"revision": "20250605", "rootUrl": "https://dataportability.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "CancelPortabilityArchiveRequest": { From 1d5215c427507304304ebfacbad49dd6a110e579 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 10/32] feat(developerconnect): update the api #### developerconnect:v1 The following keys were added: - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.insightsConfigs.methods.create (Total Keys: 16) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.insightsConfigs.methods.delete (Total Keys: 15) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.insightsConfigs.methods.get (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.insightsConfigs.methods.list (Total Keys: 20) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.insightsConfigs.methods.patch (Total Keys: 18) - schemas.AppHubWorkload (Total Keys: 8) - schemas.ArtifactConfig (Total Keys: 5) - schemas.GKEWorkload (Total Keys: 5) - schemas.GoogleArtifactAnalysis (Total Keys: 3) - schemas.GoogleArtifactRegistry (Total Keys: 4) - schemas.InsightsConfig (Total Keys: 25) - schemas.ListInsightsConfigsResponse (Total Keys: 7) - schemas.RuntimeConfig (Total Keys: 9) --- ...eveloperconnect_v1.projects.locations.html | 5 + ...v1.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.html | 491 ++++++++++++++++++ .../documents/developerconnect.v1.json | 427 ++++++++++++++- 3 files changed, 922 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) create mode 100644 docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.html diff --git a/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html index f86c7400ec..47c0110637 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.html @@ -84,6 +84,11 @@

Instance Methods

Returns the connections Resource.

+

+ insightsConfigs() +

+

Returns the insightsConfigs Resource.

+

operations()

diff --git a/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..82bdcfe714 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/developerconnect_v1.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.html @@ -0,0 +1,491 @@ + + + +

Developer Connect API . projects . locations . insightsConfigs

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, insightsConfigId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a new InsightsConfig in a given project and location.

+

+ delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Delete a single Insight.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Gets details of a single Insight.

+

+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Lists InsightsConfigs in a given project and location.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ patch(name, allowMissing=None, body=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Updates the parameters of a single InsightsConfig.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() + 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, insightsConfigId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a new InsightsConfig in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Value for parent. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The InsightsConfig resource is the core configuration object to capture events from your Software Development Lifecycle. It acts as the central hub for managing how Developer connect understands your application, its runtime environments, and the artifacts deployed within them.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. User specified annotations. See https://google.aip.dev/148#annotations for more details such as format and size limitations.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "appHubApplication": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App Hub Application. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}
+  "artifactConfigs": [ # Optional. The artifact configurations of the artifacts that are deployed.
+    { # The artifact config of the artifact that is deployed.
+      "googleArtifactAnalysis": { # Google Artifact Analysis configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact metadata is stored in Artifact analysis.
+        "projectId": "A String", # Required. The project id of the project where the provenance is stored.
+      },
+      "googleArtifactRegistry": { # Google Artifact Registry configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact is stored in Artifact regsitry.
+        "artifactRegistryPackage": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the artifact registry package.
+        "projectId": "A String", # Required. The host project of Artifact Registry.
+      },
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the artifact that is deployed. e.g. `us-docker.pkg.dev/my-project/my-repo/image`. The URI does not include the tag / digest because it captures a lineage of artifacts.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Create timestamp
+  "errors": [ # Output only. Any errors that occurred while setting up the InsightsConfig. Each error will be in the format: `field_name: error_message`, e.g. GetAppHubApplication: Permission denied while getting App Hub application. Please grant permissions to the P4SA.
+    { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).
+      "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+      "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+        {
+          "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of labels associated with an InsightsConfig.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig}
+  "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Reconciling (https://google.aip.dev/128#reconciliation). Set to true if the current state of InsightsConfig does not match the user's intended state, and the service is actively updating the resource to reconcile them. This can happen due to user-triggered updates or system actions like failover or maintenance.
+  "runtimeConfigs": [ # Output only. The runtime configurations where the application is deployed.
+    { # RuntimeConfig represents the runtimes where the application is deployed.
+      "appHubWorkload": { # AppHubWorkload represents the App Hub Workload. # Output only. App Hub Workload.
+        "criticality": "A String", # Output only. The criticality of the App Hub Workload.
+        "environment": "A String", # Output only. The environment of the App Hub Workload.
+        "workload": "A String", # Required. Output only. Immutable. The name of the App Hub Workload. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}/workloads/{workload}`.
+      },
+      "gkeWorkload": { # GKEWorkload represents the Google Kubernetes Engine runtime. # Output only. Google Kubernetes Engine runtime.
+        "cluster": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the GKE cluster. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}`.
+        "deployment": "A String", # Output only. The name of the GKE deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}/namespaces/{namespace}/deployments/{deployment}`.
+      },
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the Runtime.
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the runtime configuration. For GKE, this is the cluster name. For Cloud Run, this is the service name.
+    },
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The state of the InsightsConfig.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update timestamp
+}
+
+  insightsConfigId: string, Required. ID of the requesting InsightsConfig.
+  validateOnly: boolean, Optional. If set, validate the request, but do not actually post it.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Delete a single Insight.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Value for parent. (required)
+  etag: string, Optional. This checksum is computed by the server based on the value of other fields, and may be sent on update and delete requests to ensure the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, Optional. If set, validate the request, but do not actually post it.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Gets details of a single Insight.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Name of the resource. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The InsightsConfig resource is the core configuration object to capture events from your Software Development Lifecycle. It acts as the central hub for managing how Developer connect understands your application, its runtime environments, and the artifacts deployed within them.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. User specified annotations. See https://google.aip.dev/148#annotations for more details such as format and size limitations.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "appHubApplication": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App Hub Application. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}
+  "artifactConfigs": [ # Optional. The artifact configurations of the artifacts that are deployed.
+    { # The artifact config of the artifact that is deployed.
+      "googleArtifactAnalysis": { # Google Artifact Analysis configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact metadata is stored in Artifact analysis.
+        "projectId": "A String", # Required. The project id of the project where the provenance is stored.
+      },
+      "googleArtifactRegistry": { # Google Artifact Registry configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact is stored in Artifact regsitry.
+        "artifactRegistryPackage": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the artifact registry package.
+        "projectId": "A String", # Required. The host project of Artifact Registry.
+      },
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the artifact that is deployed. e.g. `us-docker.pkg.dev/my-project/my-repo/image`. The URI does not include the tag / digest because it captures a lineage of artifacts.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Create timestamp
+  "errors": [ # Output only. Any errors that occurred while setting up the InsightsConfig. Each error will be in the format: `field_name: error_message`, e.g. GetAppHubApplication: Permission denied while getting App Hub application. Please grant permissions to the P4SA.
+    { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).
+      "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+      "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+        {
+          "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of labels associated with an InsightsConfig.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig}
+  "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Reconciling (https://google.aip.dev/128#reconciliation). Set to true if the current state of InsightsConfig does not match the user's intended state, and the service is actively updating the resource to reconcile them. This can happen due to user-triggered updates or system actions like failover or maintenance.
+  "runtimeConfigs": [ # Output only. The runtime configurations where the application is deployed.
+    { # RuntimeConfig represents the runtimes where the application is deployed.
+      "appHubWorkload": { # AppHubWorkload represents the App Hub Workload. # Output only. App Hub Workload.
+        "criticality": "A String", # Output only. The criticality of the App Hub Workload.
+        "environment": "A String", # Output only. The environment of the App Hub Workload.
+        "workload": "A String", # Required. Output only. Immutable. The name of the App Hub Workload. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}/workloads/{workload}`.
+      },
+      "gkeWorkload": { # GKEWorkload represents the Google Kubernetes Engine runtime. # Output only. Google Kubernetes Engine runtime.
+        "cluster": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the GKE cluster. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}`.
+        "deployment": "A String", # Output only. The name of the GKE deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}/namespaces/{namespace}/deployments/{deployment}`.
+      },
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the Runtime.
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the runtime configuration. For GKE, this is the cluster name. For Cloud Run, this is the service name.
+    },
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The state of the InsightsConfig.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update timestamp
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Lists InsightsConfigs in a given project and location.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Parent value for ListInsightsConfigsRequest. (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Filtering results. See https://google.aip.dev/160 for more details. Filter string, adhering to the rules in https://google.aip.dev/160. List only InsightsConfigs matching the filter. If filter is empty, all InsightsConfigs are listed.
+  orderBy: string, Optional. Hint for how to order the results.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. Requested page size. Server may return fewer items than requested. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Request for response to listing InsightsConfigs.
+  "insightsConfigs": [ # The list of InsightsConfigs.
+    { # The InsightsConfig resource is the core configuration object to capture events from your Software Development Lifecycle. It acts as the central hub for managing how Developer connect understands your application, its runtime environments, and the artifacts deployed within them.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. User specified annotations. See https://google.aip.dev/148#annotations for more details such as format and size limitations.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "appHubApplication": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App Hub Application. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}
+      "artifactConfigs": [ # Optional. The artifact configurations of the artifacts that are deployed.
+        { # The artifact config of the artifact that is deployed.
+          "googleArtifactAnalysis": { # Google Artifact Analysis configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact metadata is stored in Artifact analysis.
+            "projectId": "A String", # Required. The project id of the project where the provenance is stored.
+          },
+          "googleArtifactRegistry": { # Google Artifact Registry configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact is stored in Artifact regsitry.
+            "artifactRegistryPackage": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the artifact registry package.
+            "projectId": "A String", # Required. The host project of Artifact Registry.
+          },
+          "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the artifact that is deployed. e.g. `us-docker.pkg.dev/my-project/my-repo/image`. The URI does not include the tag / digest because it captures a lineage of artifacts.
+        },
+      ],
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Create timestamp
+      "errors": [ # Output only. Any errors that occurred while setting up the InsightsConfig. Each error will be in the format: `field_name: error_message`, e.g. GetAppHubApplication: Permission denied while getting App Hub application. Please grant permissions to the P4SA.
+        { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).
+          "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+          "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+            {
+              "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
+          "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+        },
+      ],
+      "labels": { # Optional. Set of labels associated with an InsightsConfig.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig}
+      "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Reconciling (https://google.aip.dev/128#reconciliation). Set to true if the current state of InsightsConfig does not match the user's intended state, and the service is actively updating the resource to reconcile them. This can happen due to user-triggered updates or system actions like failover or maintenance.
+      "runtimeConfigs": [ # Output only. The runtime configurations where the application is deployed.
+        { # RuntimeConfig represents the runtimes where the application is deployed.
+          "appHubWorkload": { # AppHubWorkload represents the App Hub Workload. # Output only. App Hub Workload.
+            "criticality": "A String", # Output only. The criticality of the App Hub Workload.
+            "environment": "A String", # Output only. The environment of the App Hub Workload.
+            "workload": "A String", # Required. Output only. Immutable. The name of the App Hub Workload. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}/workloads/{workload}`.
+          },
+          "gkeWorkload": { # GKEWorkload represents the Google Kubernetes Engine runtime. # Output only. Google Kubernetes Engine runtime.
+            "cluster": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the GKE cluster. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}`.
+            "deployment": "A String", # Output only. The name of the GKE deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}/namespaces/{namespace}/deployments/{deployment}`.
+          },
+          "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the Runtime.
+          "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the runtime configuration. For GKE, this is the cluster name. For Cloud Run, this is the service name.
+        },
+      ],
+      "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The state of the InsightsConfig.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update timestamp
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token identifying a page of results the server should return.
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ patch(name, allowMissing=None, body=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Updates the parameters of a single InsightsConfig.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig} (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The InsightsConfig resource is the core configuration object to capture events from your Software Development Lifecycle. It acts as the central hub for managing how Developer connect understands your application, its runtime environments, and the artifacts deployed within them.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. User specified annotations. See https://google.aip.dev/148#annotations for more details such as format and size limitations.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "appHubApplication": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App Hub Application. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}
+  "artifactConfigs": [ # Optional. The artifact configurations of the artifacts that are deployed.
+    { # The artifact config of the artifact that is deployed.
+      "googleArtifactAnalysis": { # Google Artifact Analysis configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact metadata is stored in Artifact analysis.
+        "projectId": "A String", # Required. The project id of the project where the provenance is stored.
+      },
+      "googleArtifactRegistry": { # Google Artifact Registry configurations. # Optional. Set if the artifact is stored in Artifact regsitry.
+        "artifactRegistryPackage": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the artifact registry package.
+        "projectId": "A String", # Required. The host project of Artifact Registry.
+      },
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the artifact that is deployed. e.g. `us-docker.pkg.dev/my-project/my-repo/image`. The URI does not include the tag / digest because it captures a lineage of artifacts.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Create timestamp
+  "errors": [ # Output only. Any errors that occurred while setting up the InsightsConfig. Each error will be in the format: `field_name: error_message`, e.g. GetAppHubApplication: Permission denied while getting App Hub application. Please grant permissions to the P4SA.
+    { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors).
+      "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+      "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+        {
+          "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+        },
+      ],
+      "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. Set of labels associated with an InsightsConfig.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig}
+  "reconciling": True or False, # Output only. Reconciling (https://google.aip.dev/128#reconciliation). Set to true if the current state of InsightsConfig does not match the user's intended state, and the service is actively updating the resource to reconcile them. This can happen due to user-triggered updates or system actions like failover or maintenance.
+  "runtimeConfigs": [ # Output only. The runtime configurations where the application is deployed.
+    { # RuntimeConfig represents the runtimes where the application is deployed.
+      "appHubWorkload": { # AppHubWorkload represents the App Hub Workload. # Output only. App Hub Workload.
+        "criticality": "A String", # Output only. The criticality of the App Hub Workload.
+        "environment": "A String", # Output only. The environment of the App Hub Workload.
+        "workload": "A String", # Required. Output only. Immutable. The name of the App Hub Workload. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}/workloads/{workload}`.
+      },
+      "gkeWorkload": { # GKEWorkload represents the Google Kubernetes Engine runtime. # Output only. Google Kubernetes Engine runtime.
+        "cluster": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The name of the GKE cluster. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}`.
+        "deployment": "A String", # Output only. The name of the GKE deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}/namespaces/{namespace}/deployments/{deployment}`.
+      },
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the Runtime.
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The URI of the runtime configuration. For GKE, this is the cluster name. For Cloud Run, this is the service name.
+    },
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The state of the InsightsConfig.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update timestamp
+}
+
+  allowMissing: boolean, Optional. If set to true, and the insightsConfig is not found a new insightsConfig will be created. In this situation `update_mask` is ignored. The creation will succeed only if the input insightsConfig has all the necessary information (e.g a github_config with both user_oauth_token and installation_id properties).
+  requestId: string, Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, Optional. If set, validate the request, but do not actually post it.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json index 108a2989ac..579dbd6522 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/developerconnect.v1.json @@ -1277,6 +1277,202 @@ } } }, +"insightsConfigs": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates a new InsightsConfig in a given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/insightsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "developerconnect.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"insightsConfigId": { +"description": "Required. ID of the requesting InsightsConfig.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. Value for parent.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"validateOnly": { +"description": "Optional. If set, validate the request, but do not actually post it.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/insightsConfigs", +"request": { +"$ref": "InsightsConfig" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Delete a single Insight.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfigsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "developerconnect.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"etag": { +"description": "Optional. This checksum is computed by the server based on the value of other fields, and may be sent on update and delete requests to ensure the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Required. Value for parent.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/insightsConfigs/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"validateOnly": { +"description": "Optional. If set, validate the request, but do not actually post it.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Gets details of a single Insight.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfigsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "developerconnect.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. Name of the resource.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/insightsConfigs/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "InsightsConfig" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "Lists InsightsConfigs in a given project and location.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/insightsConfigs", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "developerconnect.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"filter": { +"description": "Optional. Filtering results. See https://google.aip.dev/160 for more details. Filter string, adhering to the rules in https://google.aip.dev/160. List only InsightsConfigs matching the filter. If filter is empty, all InsightsConfigs are listed.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"orderBy": { +"description": "Optional. Hint for how to order the results.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. Requested page size. Server may return fewer items than requested. If unspecified, server will pick an appropriate default.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. Parent value for ListInsightsConfigsRequest.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+parent}/insightsConfigs", +"response": { +"$ref": "ListInsightsConfigsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +}, +"patch": { +"description": "Updates the parameters of a single InsightsConfig.", +"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfigsId}", +"httpMethod": "PATCH", +"id": "developerconnect.projects.locations.insightsConfigs.patch", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"allowMissing": { +"description": "Optional. If set to true, and the insightsConfig is not found a new insightsConfig will be created. In this situation `update_mask` is ignored. The creation will succeed only if the input insightsConfig has all the necessary information (e.g a github_config with both user_oauth_token and installation_id properties).", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig}", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/insightsConfigs/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"requestId": { +"description": "Optional. An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes after the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"validateOnly": { +"description": "Optional. If set, validate the request, but do not actually post it.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +} +}, +"path": "v1/{+name}", +"request": { +"$ref": "InsightsConfig" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "Operation" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform" +] +} +} +}, "operations": { "methods": { "cancel": { @@ -1405,7 +1601,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250502", +"revision": "20250530", "rootUrl": "https://developerconnect.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "AccountConnector": { @@ -1458,6 +1654,47 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"AppHubWorkload": { +"description": "AppHubWorkload represents the App Hub Workload.", +"id": "AppHubWorkload", +"properties": { +"criticality": { +"description": "Output only. The criticality of the App Hub Workload.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"environment": { +"description": "Output only. The environment of the App Hub Workload.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"workload": { +"description": "Required. Output only. Immutable. The name of the App Hub Workload. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}/workloads/{workload}`.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"ArtifactConfig": { +"description": "The artifact config of the artifact that is deployed.", +"id": "ArtifactConfig", +"properties": { +"googleArtifactAnalysis": { +"$ref": "GoogleArtifactAnalysis", +"description": "Optional. Set if the artifact metadata is stored in Artifact analysis." +}, +"googleArtifactRegistry": { +"$ref": "GoogleArtifactRegistry", +"description": "Optional. Set if the artifact is stored in Artifact regsitry." +}, +"uri": { +"description": "Required. Immutable. The URI of the artifact that is deployed. e.g. `us-docker.pkg.dev/my-project/my-repo/image`. The URI does not include the tag / digest because it captures a lineage of artifacts.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "BitbucketCloudConfig": { "description": "Configuration for connections to an instance of Bitbucket Cloud.", "id": "BitbucketCloudConfig", @@ -1788,6 +2025,22 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GKEWorkload": { +"description": "GKEWorkload represents the Google Kubernetes Engine runtime.", +"id": "GKEWorkload", +"properties": { +"cluster": { +"description": "Required. Immutable. The name of the GKE cluster. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}`.", +"type": "string" +}, +"deployment": { +"description": "Output only. The name of the GKE deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/clusters/{cluster}/namespaces/{namespace}/deployments/{deployment}`.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GitHubConfig": { "description": "Configuration for connections to github.com.", "id": "GitHubConfig", @@ -2012,6 +2265,32 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleArtifactAnalysis": { +"description": "Google Artifact Analysis configurations.", +"id": "GoogleArtifactAnalysis", +"properties": { +"projectId": { +"description": "Required. The project id of the project where the provenance is stored.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleArtifactRegistry": { +"description": "Google Artifact Registry configurations.", +"id": "GoogleArtifactRegistry", +"properties": { +"artifactRegistryPackage": { +"description": "Required. Immutable. The name of the artifact registry package.", +"type": "string" +}, +"projectId": { +"description": "Required. The host project of Artifact Registry.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "HttpBody": { "description": "Message that represents an arbitrary HTTP body. It should only be used for payload formats that can't be represented as JSON, such as raw binary or an HTML page. This message can be used both in streaming and non-streaming API methods in the request as well as the response. It can be used as a top-level request field, which is convenient if one wants to extract parameters from either the URL or HTTP template into the request fields and also want access to the raw HTTP body. Example: message GetResourceRequest { // A unique request id. string request_id = 1; // The raw HTTP body is bound to this field. google.api.HttpBody http_body = 2; } service ResourceService { rpc GetResource(GetResourceRequest) returns (google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateResource(google.api.HttpBody) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } Example with streaming methods: service CaldavService { rpc GetCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); rpc UpdateCalendar(stream google.api.HttpBody) returns (stream google.api.HttpBody); } Use of this type only changes how the request and response bodies are handled, all other features will continue to work unchanged.", "id": "HttpBody", @@ -2039,6 +2318,91 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"InsightsConfig": { +"description": "The InsightsConfig resource is the core configuration object to capture events from your Software Development Lifecycle. It acts as the central hub for managing how Developer connect understands your application, its runtime environments, and the artifacts deployed within them.", +"id": "InsightsConfig", +"properties": { +"annotations": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. User specified annotations. See https://google.aip.dev/148#annotations for more details such as format and size limitations.", +"type": "object" +}, +"appHubApplication": { +"description": "Optional. The name of the App Hub Application. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/applications/{application}", +"type": "string" +}, +"artifactConfigs": { +"description": "Optional. The artifact configurations of the artifacts that are deployed.", +"items": { +"$ref": "ArtifactConfig" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. [Output only] Create timestamp", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"errors": { +"description": "Output only. Any errors that occurred while setting up the InsightsConfig. Each error will be in the format: `field_name: error_message`, e.g. GetAppHubApplication: Permission denied while getting App Hub application. Please grant permissions to the P4SA.", +"items": { +"$ref": "Status" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"labels": { +"additionalProperties": { +"type": "string" +}, +"description": "Optional. Set of labels associated with an InsightsConfig.", +"type": "object" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The name of the InsightsConfig. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/insightsConfigs/{insightsConfig}", +"type": "string" +}, +"reconciling": { +"description": "Output only. Reconciling (https://google.aip.dev/128#reconciliation). Set to true if the current state of InsightsConfig does not match the user's intended state, and the service is actively updating the resource to reconcile them. This can happen due to user-triggered updates or system actions like failover or maintenance.", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "boolean" +}, +"runtimeConfigs": { +"description": "Output only. The runtime configurations where the application is deployed.", +"items": { +"$ref": "RuntimeConfig" +}, +"readOnly": true, +"type": "array" +}, +"state": { +"description": "Optional. Output only. The state of the InsightsConfig.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"PENDING", +"COMPLETE", +"ERROR" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"No state specified.", +"The InsightsConfig is pending application discovery/runtime discovery.", +"The initial discovery process is complete.", +"The InsightsConfig is in an error state." +], +"type": "string" +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Output only. [Output only] Update timestamp", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "Installation": { "description": "Represents an installation of the GitHub App.", "id": "Installation", @@ -2181,6 +2545,31 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"ListInsightsConfigsResponse": { +"description": "Request for response to listing InsightsConfigs.", +"id": "ListInsightsConfigsResponse", +"properties": { +"insightsConfigs": { +"description": "The list of InsightsConfigs.", +"items": { +"$ref": "InsightsConfig" +}, +"type": "array" +}, +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "A token identifying a page of results the server should return.", +"type": "string" +}, +"unreachable": { +"description": "Locations that could not be reached.", +"items": { +"type": "string" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ListLocationsResponse": { "description": "The response message for Locations.ListLocations.", "id": "ListLocationsResponse", @@ -2466,6 +2855,42 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"RuntimeConfig": { +"description": "RuntimeConfig represents the runtimes where the application is deployed.", +"id": "RuntimeConfig", +"properties": { +"appHubWorkload": { +"$ref": "AppHubWorkload", +"description": "Output only. App Hub Workload.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"gkeWorkload": { +"$ref": "GKEWorkload", +"description": "Output only. Google Kubernetes Engine runtime.", +"readOnly": true +}, +"state": { +"description": "Output only. The state of the Runtime.", +"enum": [ +"STATE_UNSPECIFIED", +"LINKED", +"UNLINKED" +], +"enumDescriptions": [ +"No state specified.", +"The runtime configuration has been linked to the InsightsConfig.", +"The runtime configuration has been unlinked to the InsightsConfig." +], +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"uri": { +"description": "Required. Immutable. The URI of the runtime configuration. For GKE, this is the cluster name. For Cloud Run, this is the service name.", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "ServiceDirectoryConfig": { "description": "ServiceDirectoryConfig represents Service Directory configuration for a connection.", "id": "ServiceDirectoryConfig", From 71a5f198bdeb34e0f16690e9fe03581f0291a748 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 11/32] feat(dfareporting): update the api #### dfareporting:v4 The following keys were added: - schemas.Conversion.properties.sessionAttributesEncoded (Total Keys: 2) --- docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.conversions.html | 20 +++++++++++-------- .../documents/dfareporting.v4.json | 11 +++++++--- 2 files changed, 20 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.conversions.html b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.conversions.html index 0adbdc4d50..3a18b404e3 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.conversions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dfareporting_v4.conversions.html @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@

Method Details

"conversions": [ # The set of conversions to insert. { # A Conversion represents when a user successfully performs a desired action after seeing an ad. "adUserDataConsent": "A String", # This represents consent for ad user data. - "cartData": { # Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. # The cart data associated with this conversion. + "cartData": { # *Beta:* This feature is currently in beta. Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. Cart data reporting is only supported in SA360. [Learn more](https://support.google.com/sa360/topic/13425788) # The cart data associated with this conversion. "items": [ # Data of the items purchased. { # Contains data of the items purchased. "itemId": "A String", # The shopping id of the item. Must be equal to the Merchant Center product identifier. This is a required field. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@

Method Details

}, "childDirectedTreatment": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 13, under COPPA compliance. "customVariables": [ # Custom floodlight variables. - { # A custom floodlight variable. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. + { # A custom floodlight variable. Can be used in both batchinsert and batchupdate. Adding this in batchupdate will update or append the variable to the existing list. "kind": "A String", # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string "dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable". "type": "A String", # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the "u[1-100]=" in the tags. "value": "A String", # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters. @@ -133,6 +133,7 @@

Method Details

"nonPersonalizedAd": True or False, # Whether the conversion was for a non personalized ad. "ordinal": "A String", # The ordinal of the conversion. Use this field to control how conversions of the same user and day are de-duplicated. This is a required field. "quantity": "A String", # The quantity of the conversion. This is a required field. + "sessionAttributesEncoded": "A String", # Session attributes for the conversion, encoded as based64 bytes. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. "timestampMicros": "A String", # The timestamp of conversion, in Unix epoch micros. This is a required field. "treatmentForUnderage": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 16 (may differ by country), under compliance with the European Union's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). "userIdentifiers": [ # The user identifiers to enhance the conversion. The maximum number of user identifiers for each conversion is 5. @@ -177,7 +178,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The original conversion that was inserted or updated and whether there were any errors. "conversion": { # A Conversion represents when a user successfully performs a desired action after seeing an ad. # The original conversion that was inserted or updated. "adUserDataConsent": "A String", # This represents consent for ad user data. - "cartData": { # Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. # The cart data associated with this conversion. + "cartData": { # *Beta:* This feature is currently in beta. Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. Cart data reporting is only supported in SA360. [Learn more](https://support.google.com/sa360/topic/13425788) # The cart data associated with this conversion. "items": [ # Data of the items purchased. { # Contains data of the items purchased. "itemId": "A String", # The shopping id of the item. Must be equal to the Merchant Center product identifier. This is a required field. @@ -191,7 +192,7 @@

Method Details

}, "childDirectedTreatment": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 13, under COPPA compliance. "customVariables": [ # Custom floodlight variables. - { # A custom floodlight variable. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. + { # A custom floodlight variable. Can be used in both batchinsert and batchupdate. Adding this in batchupdate will update or append the variable to the existing list. "kind": "A String", # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string "dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable". "type": "A String", # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the "u[1-100]=" in the tags. "value": "A String", # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters. @@ -213,6 +214,7 @@

Method Details

"nonPersonalizedAd": True or False, # Whether the conversion was for a non personalized ad. "ordinal": "A String", # The ordinal of the conversion. Use this field to control how conversions of the same user and day are de-duplicated. This is a required field. "quantity": "A String", # The quantity of the conversion. This is a required field. + "sessionAttributesEncoded": "A String", # Session attributes for the conversion, encoded as based64 bytes. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. "timestampMicros": "A String", # The timestamp of conversion, in Unix epoch micros. This is a required field. "treatmentForUnderage": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 16 (may differ by country), under compliance with the European Union's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). "userIdentifiers": [ # The user identifiers to enhance the conversion. The maximum number of user identifiers for each conversion is 5. @@ -258,7 +260,7 @@

Method Details

"conversions": [ # The set of conversions to update. { # A Conversion represents when a user successfully performs a desired action after seeing an ad. "adUserDataConsent": "A String", # This represents consent for ad user data. - "cartData": { # Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. # The cart data associated with this conversion. + "cartData": { # *Beta:* This feature is currently in beta. Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. Cart data reporting is only supported in SA360. [Learn more](https://support.google.com/sa360/topic/13425788) # The cart data associated with this conversion. "items": [ # Data of the items purchased. { # Contains data of the items purchased. "itemId": "A String", # The shopping id of the item. Must be equal to the Merchant Center product identifier. This is a required field. @@ -272,7 +274,7 @@

Method Details

}, "childDirectedTreatment": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 13, under COPPA compliance. "customVariables": [ # Custom floodlight variables. - { # A custom floodlight variable. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. + { # A custom floodlight variable. Can be used in both batchinsert and batchupdate. Adding this in batchupdate will update or append the variable to the existing list. "kind": "A String", # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string "dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable". "type": "A String", # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the "u[1-100]=" in the tags. "value": "A String", # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters. @@ -294,6 +296,7 @@

Method Details

"nonPersonalizedAd": True or False, # Whether the conversion was for a non personalized ad. "ordinal": "A String", # The ordinal of the conversion. Use this field to control how conversions of the same user and day are de-duplicated. This is a required field. "quantity": "A String", # The quantity of the conversion. This is a required field. + "sessionAttributesEncoded": "A String", # Session attributes for the conversion, encoded as based64 bytes. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. "timestampMicros": "A String", # The timestamp of conversion, in Unix epoch micros. This is a required field. "treatmentForUnderage": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 16 (may differ by country), under compliance with the European Union's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). "userIdentifiers": [ # The user identifiers to enhance the conversion. The maximum number of user identifiers for each conversion is 5. @@ -338,7 +341,7 @@

Method Details

{ # The original conversion that was inserted or updated and whether there were any errors. "conversion": { # A Conversion represents when a user successfully performs a desired action after seeing an ad. # The original conversion that was inserted or updated. "adUserDataConsent": "A String", # This represents consent for ad user data. - "cartData": { # Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. # The cart data associated with this conversion. + "cartData": { # *Beta:* This feature is currently in beta. Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. Cart data reporting is only supported in SA360. [Learn more](https://support.google.com/sa360/topic/13425788) # The cart data associated with this conversion. "items": [ # Data of the items purchased. { # Contains data of the items purchased. "itemId": "A String", # The shopping id of the item. Must be equal to the Merchant Center product identifier. This is a required field. @@ -352,7 +355,7 @@

Method Details

}, "childDirectedTreatment": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 13, under COPPA compliance. "customVariables": [ # Custom floodlight variables. - { # A custom floodlight variable. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. + { # A custom floodlight variable. Can be used in both batchinsert and batchupdate. Adding this in batchupdate will update or append the variable to the existing list. "kind": "A String", # Identifies what kind of resource this is. Value: the fixed string "dfareporting#customFloodlightVariable". "type": "A String", # The type of custom floodlight variable to supply a value for. These map to the "u[1-100]=" in the tags. "value": "A String", # The value of the custom floodlight variable. The length of string must not exceed 100 characters. @@ -374,6 +377,7 @@

Method Details

"nonPersonalizedAd": True or False, # Whether the conversion was for a non personalized ad. "ordinal": "A String", # The ordinal of the conversion. Use this field to control how conversions of the same user and day are de-duplicated. This is a required field. "quantity": "A String", # The quantity of the conversion. This is a required field. + "sessionAttributesEncoded": "A String", # Session attributes for the conversion, encoded as based64 bytes. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. "timestampMicros": "A String", # The timestamp of conversion, in Unix epoch micros. This is a required field. "treatmentForUnderage": True or False, # Whether this particular request may come from a user under the age of 16 (may differ by country), under compliance with the European Union's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). "userIdentifiers": [ # The user identifiers to enhance the conversion. The maximum number of user identifiers for each conversion is 5. diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json index 001ca6d9c5..f9a226d4e0 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dfareporting.v4.json @@ -10152,7 +10152,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250218", +"revision": "20250602", "rootUrl": "https://dfareporting.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "Account": { @@ -11749,7 +11749,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "CartData": { -"description": "Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate.", +"description": " *Beta:* This feature is currently in beta. Contains additional information about cart data. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate. Cart data reporting is only supported in SA360. [Learn more](https://support.google.com/sa360/topic/13425788)", "id": "CartData", "properties": { "items": { @@ -12264,6 +12264,11 @@ "format": "int64", "type": "string" }, +"sessionAttributesEncoded": { +"description": "Session attributes for the conversion, encoded as based64 bytes. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate.", +"format": "byte", +"type": "string" +}, "timestampMicros": { "description": "The timestamp of conversion, in Unix epoch micros. This is a required field.", "format": "int64", @@ -14422,7 +14427,7 @@ "type": "object" }, "CustomFloodlightVariable": { -"description": "A custom floodlight variable. This field may only be used when calling batchinsert; it is not supported by batchupdate.", +"description": "A custom floodlight variable. Can be used in both batchinsert and batchupdate. Adding this in batchupdate will update or append the variable to the existing list.", "id": "CustomFloodlightVariable", "properties": { "kind": { From 2c744c67247d4bb1d381d41aaa70957edaf82393 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 12/32] feat(dialogflow): update the api #### dialogflow:v3 The following keys were added: - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.agents.resources.tools.resources.versions.methods.create (Total Keys: 12) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.agents.resources.tools.resources.versions.methods.delete (Total Keys: 13) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.agents.resources.tools.resources.versions.methods.get (Total Keys: 11) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.agents.resources.tools.resources.versions.methods.list (Total Keys: 16) - resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.agents.resources.tools.resources.versions.methods.restore (Total Keys: 12) - schemas.GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Handler (Total Keys: 14) - schemas.GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ListToolVersionsResponse (Total Keys: 5) - schemas.GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Playbook.properties.handlers (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionRequest (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionResponse (Total Keys: 3) - schemas.GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion (Total Keys: 11) --- ...rojects.locations.agents.environments.html | 10 +- ...3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.html | 2028 +++++++++++++++++ ...s.locations.agents.playbooks.versions.html | 1690 ++++++++++++++ ...ow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.html | 5 + ...jects.locations.agents.tools.versions.html | 564 +++++ ...ojects.locations.agents.conversations.html | 4 +- ...rojects.locations.agents.environments.html | 10 +- .../documents/dialogflow.v2.json | 6 +- .../documents/dialogflow.v2beta1.json | 6 +- .../documents/dialogflow.v3.json | 290 ++- .../documents/dialogflow.v3beta1.json | 6 +- 11 files changed, 4595 insertions(+), 24 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.html diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html index eceb5bd077..f904cdc03b 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.html index eeefe47cca..7ba150e92c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.html @@ -130,6 +130,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -171,6 +509,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -280,6 +956,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -381,6 +1395,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -440,6 +1792,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -482,6 +2172,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.versions.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.versions.html index e32372a58c..c2eef59b44 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.versions.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.playbooks.versions.html @@ -172,6 +172,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -273,6 +611,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -399,6 +1075,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -512,6 +1526,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. @@ -585,6 +1937,344 @@

Method Details

"createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of initial playbook creation. "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the playbook, unique within an agent. "goal": "A String", # Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook. + "handlers": [ # Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers. + { # Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers. + "eventHandler": { # A handler that is triggered by the specified event. # A handler triggered by event. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "event": "A String", # Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + }, + "lifecycleHandler": { # A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution. # A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution. + "condition": "A String", # Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler. + "fulfillment": { # A fulfillment can do one or more of the following actions at the same time: * Generate rich message responses. * Set parameter values. * Call the webhook. Fulfillments can be called at various stages in the Page or Form lifecycle. For example, when a DetectIntentRequest drives a session to enter a new page, the page's entry fulfillment can add a static response to the QueryResult in the returning DetectIntentResponse, call the webhook (for example, to load user data from a database), or both. # Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered. + "advancedSettings": { # Hierarchical advanced settings for agent/flow/page/fulfillment/parameter. Settings exposed at lower level overrides the settings exposed at higher level. Overriding occurs at the sub-setting level. For example, the playback_interruption_settings at fulfillment level only overrides the playback_interruption_settings at the agent level, leaving other settings at the agent level unchanged. DTMF settings does not override each other. DTMF settings set at different levels define DTMF detections running in parallel. Hierarchy: Agent->Flow->Page->Fulfillment/Parameter. # Hierarchical advanced settings for this fulfillment. The settings exposed at the lower level overrides the settings exposed at the higher level. + "audioExportGcsDestination": { # Google Cloud Storage location for a Dialogflow operation that writes or exports objects (e.g. exported agent or transcripts) outside of Dialogflow. # If present, incoming audio is exported by Dialogflow to the configured Google Cloud Storage destination. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level + "uri": "A String", # Required. The Google Cloud Storage URI for the exported objects. A URI is of the form: `gs://bucket/object-name-or-prefix` Whether a full object name, or just a prefix, its usage depends on the Dialogflow operation. + }, + "dtmfSettings": { # Define behaviors for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency). # Settings for DTMF. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level. + "enabled": True or False, # If true, incoming audio is processed for DTMF (dual tone multi frequency) events. For example, if the caller presses a button on their telephone keypad and DTMF processing is enabled, Dialogflow will detect the event (e.g. a "3" was pressed) in the incoming audio and pass the event to the bot to drive business logic (e.g. when 3 is pressed, return the account balance). + "endpointingTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Endpoint timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "finishDigit": "A String", # The digit that terminates a DTMF digit sequence. + "interdigitTimeoutDuration": "A String", # Interdigit timeout setting for matching dtmf input to regex. + "maxDigits": 42, # Max length of DTMF digits. + }, + "loggingSettings": { # Define behaviors on logging. # Settings for logging. Settings for Dialogflow History, Contact Center messages, StackDriver logs, and speech logging. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level. + "enableConsentBasedRedaction": True or False, # Enables consent-based end-user input redaction, if true, a pre-defined session parameter `$session.params.conversation-redaction` will be used to determine if the utterance should be redacted. + "enableInteractionLogging": True or False, # Enables DF Interaction logging. + "enableStackdriverLogging": True or False, # Enables Google Cloud Logging. + }, + "speechSettings": { # Define behaviors of speech to text detection. # Settings for speech to text detection. Exposed at the following levels: - Agent level - Flow level - Page level - Parameter level + "endpointerSensitivity": 42, # Sensitivity of the speech model that detects the end of speech. Scale from 0 to 100. + "models": { # Mapping from language to Speech-to-Text model. The mapped Speech-to-Text model will be selected for requests from its corresponding language. For more information, see [Speech models](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/speech-models). + "a_key": "A String", + }, + "noSpeechTimeout": "A String", # Timeout before detecting no speech. + "useTimeoutBasedEndpointing": True or False, # Use timeout based endpointing, interpreting endpointer sensitivity as seconds of timeout value. + }, + }, + "conditionalCases": [ # Conditional cases for this fulfillment. + { # A list of cascading if-else conditions. Cases are mutually exclusive. The first one with a matching condition is selected, all the rest ignored. + "cases": [ # A list of cascading if-else conditions. + { # Each case has a Boolean condition. When it is evaluated to be True, the corresponding messages will be selected and evaluated recursively. + "caseContent": [ # A list of case content. + { # The list of messages or conditional cases to activate for this case. + "additionalCases": # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3FulfillmentConditionalCases # Additional cases to be evaluated. + "message": { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. # Returned message. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + }, + ], + "condition": "A String", # The condition to activate and select this case. Empty means the condition is always true. The condition is evaluated against form parameters or session parameters. See the [conditions reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/reference/condition). + }, + ], + }, + ], + "enableGenerativeFallback": True or False, # If the flag is true, the agent will utilize LLM to generate a text response. If LLM generation fails, the defined responses in the fulfillment will be respected. This flag is only useful for fulfillments associated with no-match event handlers. + "messages": [ # The list of rich message responses to present to the user. + { # Represents a response message that can be returned by a conversational agent. Response messages are also used for output audio synthesis. The approach is as follows: * If at least one OutputAudioText response is present, then all OutputAudioText responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. * If the OutputAudioText responses are a mixture of text and SSML, then the concatenated result is treated as SSML; otherwise, the result is treated as either text or SSML as appropriate. The agent designer should ideally use either text or SSML consistently throughout the bot design. * Otherwise, all Text responses are linearly concatenated, and the result is used for output audio synthesis. This approach allows for more sophisticated user experience scenarios, where the text displayed to the user may differ from what is heard. + "channel": "A String", # The channel which the response is associated with. Clients can specify the channel via QueryParameters.channel, and only associated channel response will be returned. + "conversationSuccess": { # Indicates that the conversation succeeded, i.e., the bot handled the issue that the customer talked to it about. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations should be counted as successful and doesn't process the metadata in this message in any way. Note that Dialogflow also considers conversations that get to the conversation end page as successful even if they don't return ConversationSuccess. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates that the conversation succeeded. * In a webhook response when you determine that you handled the customer issue. # Indicates that the conversation succeeded. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "endInteraction": { # Indicates that interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. A signal that indicates the interaction with the Dialogflow agent has ended. This message is generated by Dialogflow only when the conversation reaches `END_SESSION` page. It is not supposed to be defined by the user. It's guaranteed that there is at most one such message in each response. + }, + "knowledgeInfoCard": { # Represents info card response. If the response contains generative knowledge prediction, Dialogflow will return a payload with Infobot Messenger compatible info card. Otherwise, the info card response is skipped. # Represents info card for knowledge answers, to be better rendered in Dialogflow Messenger. + }, + "liveAgentHandoff": { # Indicates that the conversation should be handed off to a live agent. Dialogflow only uses this to determine which conversations were handed off to a human agent for measurement purposes. What else to do with this signal is up to you and your handoff procedures. You may set this, for example: * In the entry_fulfillment of a Page if entering the page indicates something went extremely wrong in the conversation. * In a webhook response when you determine that the customer issue can only be handled by a human. # Hands off conversation to a human agent. + "metadata": { # Custom metadata for your handoff procedure. Dialogflow doesn't impose any structure on this. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + }, + "mixedAudio": { # Represents an audio message that is composed of both segments synthesized from the Dialogflow agent prompts and ones hosted externally at the specified URIs. The external URIs are specified via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. # Output only. An audio response message composed of both the synthesized Dialogflow agent responses and responses defined via play_audio. This message is generated by Dialogflow only and not supposed to be defined by the user. + "segments": [ # Segments this audio response is composed of. + { # Represents one segment of audio. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this segment can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client should then start the next Dialogflow request. + "audio": "A String", # Raw audio synthesized from the Dialogflow agent's response using the output config specified in the request. + "uri": "A String", # Client-specific URI that points to an audio clip accessible to the client. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on it. + }, + ], + }, + "outputAudioText": { # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. # A text or ssml response that is preferentially used for TTS output audio synthesis, as described in the comment on the ResponseMessage message. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "ssml": "A String", # The SSML text to be synthesized. For more information, see [SSML](/speech/text-to-speech/docs/ssml). + "text": "A String", # The raw text to be synthesized. + }, + "payload": { # Returns a response containing a custom, platform-specific payload. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "playAudio": { # Specifies an audio clip to be played by the client as part of the response. # Signal that the client should play an audio clip hosted at a client-specific URI. Dialogflow uses this to construct mixed_audio. However, Dialogflow itself does not try to read or process the URI in any way. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "audioUri": "A String", # Required. URI of the audio clip. Dialogflow does not impose any validation on this value. It is specific to the client that reads it. + }, + "responseType": "A String", # Response type. + "telephonyTransferCall": { # Represents the signal that telles the client to transfer the phone call connected to the agent to a third-party endpoint. # A signal that the client should transfer the phone call connected to this agent to a third-party endpoint. + "phoneNumber": "A String", # Transfer the call to a phone number in [E.164 format](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E.164). + }, + "text": { # The text response message. # Returns a text response. + "allowPlaybackInterruption": True or False, # Output only. Whether the playback of this message can be interrupted by the end user's speech and the client can then starts the next Dialogflow request. + "text": [ # Required. A collection of text response variants. If multiple variants are defined, only one text response variant is returned at runtime. + "A String", + ], + }, + "toolCall": { # Represents a call of a specific tool's action with the specified inputs. # Returns the definition of a tool call that should be executed by the client. + "action": "A String", # Required. The name of the tool's action associated with this call. + "inputParameters": { # Optional. The action's input parameters. + "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. + }, + "tool": "A String", # Required. The tool associated with this call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. + }, + }, + ], + "returnPartialResponses": True or False, # Whether Dialogflow should return currently queued fulfillment response messages in streaming APIs. If a webhook is specified, it happens before Dialogflow invokes webhook. Warning: 1) This flag only affects streaming API. Responses are still queued and returned once in non-streaming API. 2) The flag can be enabled in any fulfillment but only the first 3 partial responses will be returned. You may only want to apply it to fulfillments that have slow webhooks. + "setParameterActions": [ # Set parameter values before executing the webhook. + { # Setting a parameter value. + "parameter": "A String", # Display name of the parameter. + "value": "", # The new value of the parameter. A null value clears the parameter. + }, + ], + "tag": "A String", # The value of this field will be populated in the WebhookRequest `fulfillmentInfo.tag` field by Dialogflow when the associated webhook is called. The tag is typically used by the webhook service to identify which fulfillment is being called, but it could be used for other purposes. This field is required if `webhook` is specified. + "webhook": "A String", # The webhook to call. Format: `projects//locations//agents//webhooks/`. + }, + "lifecycleStage": "A String", # Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution` + }, + }, + ], "instruction": { # Message of the Instruction of the playbook. # Instruction to accomplish target goal. "guidelines": "A String", # General guidelines for the playbook. These are unstructured instructions that are not directly part of the goal, e.g. "Always be polite". It's valid for this text to be long and used instead of steps altogether. "steps": [ # Ordered list of step by step execution instructions to accomplish target goal. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.html index 75ade2a7e4..251852d6b4 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.html @@ -74,6 +74,11 @@

Dialogflow API . projects . locations . agents . tools

Instance Methods

+

+ versions() +

+

Returns the versions Resource.

+

close()

Close httplib2 connections.

diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bca3c33950 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.html @@ -0,0 +1,564 @@ + + + +

Dialogflow API . projects . locations . agents . tools . versions

+

Instance Methods

+

+ close()

+

Close httplib2 connections.

+

+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Creates a version for the specified Tool.

+

+ delete(name, force=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Deletes the specified version of the Tool.

+

+ get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the specified version of the Tool.

+

+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

List versions of the specified Tool.

+

+ list_next()

+

Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+ restore(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+

Retrieves the specified version of the Tool and stores it as the current tool draft, returning the tool with resources updated.

+

Method Details

+
+ close() + 
Close httplib2 connections.
+
+ +
+ create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Creates a version for the specified Tool.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The tool to create a version for. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Tool version is a snapshot of the tool at certain timestamp.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the tool version.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique identifier of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.
+  "tool": { # A tool provides a list of actions which are available to the Playbook to attain its goal. A Tool consists of a description of the tool's usage and a specification of the tool which contains the schema and authentication information. # Required. Snapshot of the tool to be associated with this version.
+    "dataStoreSpec": { # A DataStoreTool is a way to provide specifications needed to search a list of data stores. # Data store search tool specification.
+      "dataStoreConnections": [ # Required. List of data stores to search.
+        { # A data store connection. It represents a data store in Discovery Engine and the type of the contents it contains.
+          "dataStore": "A String", # The full name of the referenced data store. Formats: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/dataStores/{data_store}` `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data_store}`
+          "dataStoreType": "A String", # The type of the connected data store.
+          "documentProcessingMode": "A String", # The document processing mode for the data store connection. Should only be set for PUBLIC_WEB and UNSTRUCTURED data stores. If not set it is considered as DOCUMENTS, as this is the legacy mode.
+        },
+      ],
+      "fallbackPrompt": { # A FallbackPrompt is a way to provide specifications for the Data Store fallback prompt when generating responses. # Required. Fallback prompt configurations to use.
+      },
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # Required. High level description of the Tool and its usage.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the Tool, unique within an agent.
+    "functionSpec": { # A Function tool describes the functions to be invoked on the client side. # Client side executed function specification.
+      "inputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the input of the function. This input is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "outputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the output of the function. This output is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+    },
+    "name": "A String", # The unique identifier of the Tool. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.
+    "openApiSpec": { # An OpenAPI tool is a way to provide the Tool specifications in the Open API schema format. # OpenAPI specification of the Tool.
+      "authentication": { # Authentication information required for API calls # Optional. Authentication information required by the API.
+        "apiKeyConfig": { # Config for authentication with API key. # Config for API key auth.
+          "apiKey": "A String", # Optional. The API key. If the `secret_version_for_api_key` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "keyName": "A String", # Required. The parameter name or the header name of the API key. E.g., If the API request is "https://example.com/act?X-Api-Key=", "X-Api-Key" would be the parameter name.
+          "requestLocation": "A String", # Required. Key location in the request.
+          "secretVersionForApiKey": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the API key. If this field is set, the `api_key` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+        },
+        "bearerTokenConfig": { # Config for authentication using bearer token. # Config for bearer token auth.
+          "secretVersionForToken": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the Bearer token. If this field is set, the `token` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "token": "A String", # Optional. The text token appended to the text `Bearer` to the request Authorization header. [Session parameters reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/parameter#session-ref) can be used to pass the token dynamically, e.g. `$session.params.parameter-id`.
+        },
+        "oauthConfig": { # Config for authentication with OAuth. # Config for OAuth.
+          "clientId": "A String", # Required. The client ID from the OAuth provider.
+          "clientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The client secret from the OAuth provider. If the `secret_version_for_client_secret` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "oauthGrantType": "A String", # Required. OAuth grant types.
+          "scopes": [ # Optional. The OAuth scopes to grant.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "secretVersionForClientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the client secret. If this field is set, the `client_secret` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "tokenEndpoint": "A String", # Required. The token endpoint in the OAuth provider to exchange for an access token.
+        },
+        "serviceAgentAuthConfig": { # Config for auth using [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). # Config for [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent) auth.
+          "serviceAgentAuth": "A String", # Optional. Indicate the auth token type generated from the [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). The generated token is sent in the Authorization header.
+        },
+      },
+      "serviceDirectoryConfig": { # Configuration for tools using Service Directory. # Optional. Service Directory configuration.
+        "service": "A String", # Required. The name of [Service Directory](https://cloud.google.com/service-directory) service. Format: `projects//locations//namespaces//services/`. `LocationID` of the service directory must be the same as the location of the agent.
+      },
+      "textSchema": "A String", # Required. The OpenAPI schema specified as a text.
+      "tlsConfig": { # The TLS configuration. # Optional. TLS configuration for the HTTPS verification.
+        "caCerts": [ # Required. Specifies a list of allowed custom CA certificates for HTTPS verification.
+          { # The CA certificate.
+            "cert": "A String", # Required. The allowed custom CA certificates (in DER format) for HTTPS verification. This overrides the default SSL trust store. If this is empty or unspecified, Dialogflow will use Google's default trust store to verify certificates. N.B. Make sure the HTTPS server certificates are signed with "subject alt name". For instance a certificate can be self-signed using the following command: ``` openssl x509 -req -days 200 -in example.com.csr \ -signkey example.com.key \ -out example.com.crt \ -extfile <(printf "\nsubjectAltName='DNS:www.example.com'") ```
+            "displayName": "A String", # Required. The name of the allowed custom CA certificates. This can be used to disambiguate the custom CA certificates.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+    "toolType": "A String", # Output only. The tool type.
+  },
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Tool version is a snapshot of the tool at certain timestamp.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the tool version.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique identifier of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.
+  "tool": { # A tool provides a list of actions which are available to the Playbook to attain its goal. A Tool consists of a description of the tool's usage and a specification of the tool which contains the schema and authentication information. # Required. Snapshot of the tool to be associated with this version.
+    "dataStoreSpec": { # A DataStoreTool is a way to provide specifications needed to search a list of data stores. # Data store search tool specification.
+      "dataStoreConnections": [ # Required. List of data stores to search.
+        { # A data store connection. It represents a data store in Discovery Engine and the type of the contents it contains.
+          "dataStore": "A String", # The full name of the referenced data store. Formats: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/dataStores/{data_store}` `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data_store}`
+          "dataStoreType": "A String", # The type of the connected data store.
+          "documentProcessingMode": "A String", # The document processing mode for the data store connection. Should only be set for PUBLIC_WEB and UNSTRUCTURED data stores. If not set it is considered as DOCUMENTS, as this is the legacy mode.
+        },
+      ],
+      "fallbackPrompt": { # A FallbackPrompt is a way to provide specifications for the Data Store fallback prompt when generating responses. # Required. Fallback prompt configurations to use.
+      },
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # Required. High level description of the Tool and its usage.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the Tool, unique within an agent.
+    "functionSpec": { # A Function tool describes the functions to be invoked on the client side. # Client side executed function specification.
+      "inputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the input of the function. This input is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "outputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the output of the function. This output is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+    },
+    "name": "A String", # The unique identifier of the Tool. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.
+    "openApiSpec": { # An OpenAPI tool is a way to provide the Tool specifications in the Open API schema format. # OpenAPI specification of the Tool.
+      "authentication": { # Authentication information required for API calls # Optional. Authentication information required by the API.
+        "apiKeyConfig": { # Config for authentication with API key. # Config for API key auth.
+          "apiKey": "A String", # Optional. The API key. If the `secret_version_for_api_key` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "keyName": "A String", # Required. The parameter name or the header name of the API key. E.g., If the API request is "https://example.com/act?X-Api-Key=", "X-Api-Key" would be the parameter name.
+          "requestLocation": "A String", # Required. Key location in the request.
+          "secretVersionForApiKey": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the API key. If this field is set, the `api_key` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+        },
+        "bearerTokenConfig": { # Config for authentication using bearer token. # Config for bearer token auth.
+          "secretVersionForToken": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the Bearer token. If this field is set, the `token` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "token": "A String", # Optional. The text token appended to the text `Bearer` to the request Authorization header. [Session parameters reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/parameter#session-ref) can be used to pass the token dynamically, e.g. `$session.params.parameter-id`.
+        },
+        "oauthConfig": { # Config for authentication with OAuth. # Config for OAuth.
+          "clientId": "A String", # Required. The client ID from the OAuth provider.
+          "clientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The client secret from the OAuth provider. If the `secret_version_for_client_secret` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "oauthGrantType": "A String", # Required. OAuth grant types.
+          "scopes": [ # Optional. The OAuth scopes to grant.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "secretVersionForClientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the client secret. If this field is set, the `client_secret` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "tokenEndpoint": "A String", # Required. The token endpoint in the OAuth provider to exchange for an access token.
+        },
+        "serviceAgentAuthConfig": { # Config for auth using [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). # Config for [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent) auth.
+          "serviceAgentAuth": "A String", # Optional. Indicate the auth token type generated from the [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). The generated token is sent in the Authorization header.
+        },
+      },
+      "serviceDirectoryConfig": { # Configuration for tools using Service Directory. # Optional. Service Directory configuration.
+        "service": "A String", # Required. The name of [Service Directory](https://cloud.google.com/service-directory) service. Format: `projects//locations//namespaces//services/`. `LocationID` of the service directory must be the same as the location of the agent.
+      },
+      "textSchema": "A String", # Required. The OpenAPI schema specified as a text.
+      "tlsConfig": { # The TLS configuration. # Optional. TLS configuration for the HTTPS verification.
+        "caCerts": [ # Required. Specifies a list of allowed custom CA certificates for HTTPS verification.
+          { # The CA certificate.
+            "cert": "A String", # Required. The allowed custom CA certificates (in DER format) for HTTPS verification. This overrides the default SSL trust store. If this is empty or unspecified, Dialogflow will use Google's default trust store to verify certificates. N.B. Make sure the HTTPS server certificates are signed with "subject alt name". For instance a certificate can be self-signed using the following command: ``` openssl x509 -req -days 200 -in example.com.csr \ -signkey example.com.key \ -out example.com.crt \ -extfile <(printf "\nsubjectAltName='DNS:www.example.com'") ```
+            "displayName": "A String", # Required. The name of the allowed custom CA certificates. This can be used to disambiguate the custom CA certificates.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+    "toolType": "A String", # Output only. The tool type.
+  },
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+}
+
+ +
+ delete(name, force=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Deletes the specified version of the Tool.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tool version to delete. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`. (required)
+  force: boolean, Optional. This field has no effect for Tools not being used. For Tools that are used: * If `force` is set to false, an error will be returned with message indicating the referenced resources. * If `force` is set to true, Dialogflow will remove the tool, as well as any references to the tool.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}
+
+ +
+ get(name, x__xgafv=None) + 
Retrieves the specified version of the Tool.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Tool version is a snapshot of the tool at certain timestamp.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+  "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the tool version.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique identifier of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.
+  "tool": { # A tool provides a list of actions which are available to the Playbook to attain its goal. A Tool consists of a description of the tool's usage and a specification of the tool which contains the schema and authentication information. # Required. Snapshot of the tool to be associated with this version.
+    "dataStoreSpec": { # A DataStoreTool is a way to provide specifications needed to search a list of data stores. # Data store search tool specification.
+      "dataStoreConnections": [ # Required. List of data stores to search.
+        { # A data store connection. It represents a data store in Discovery Engine and the type of the contents it contains.
+          "dataStore": "A String", # The full name of the referenced data store. Formats: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/dataStores/{data_store}` `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data_store}`
+          "dataStoreType": "A String", # The type of the connected data store.
+          "documentProcessingMode": "A String", # The document processing mode for the data store connection. Should only be set for PUBLIC_WEB and UNSTRUCTURED data stores. If not set it is considered as DOCUMENTS, as this is the legacy mode.
+        },
+      ],
+      "fallbackPrompt": { # A FallbackPrompt is a way to provide specifications for the Data Store fallback prompt when generating responses. # Required. Fallback prompt configurations to use.
+      },
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # Required. High level description of the Tool and its usage.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the Tool, unique within an agent.
+    "functionSpec": { # A Function tool describes the functions to be invoked on the client side. # Client side executed function specification.
+      "inputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the input of the function. This input is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "outputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the output of the function. This output is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+    },
+    "name": "A String", # The unique identifier of the Tool. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.
+    "openApiSpec": { # An OpenAPI tool is a way to provide the Tool specifications in the Open API schema format. # OpenAPI specification of the Tool.
+      "authentication": { # Authentication information required for API calls # Optional. Authentication information required by the API.
+        "apiKeyConfig": { # Config for authentication with API key. # Config for API key auth.
+          "apiKey": "A String", # Optional. The API key. If the `secret_version_for_api_key` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "keyName": "A String", # Required. The parameter name or the header name of the API key. E.g., If the API request is "https://example.com/act?X-Api-Key=", "X-Api-Key" would be the parameter name.
+          "requestLocation": "A String", # Required. Key location in the request.
+          "secretVersionForApiKey": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the API key. If this field is set, the `api_key` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+        },
+        "bearerTokenConfig": { # Config for authentication using bearer token. # Config for bearer token auth.
+          "secretVersionForToken": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the Bearer token. If this field is set, the `token` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "token": "A String", # Optional. The text token appended to the text `Bearer` to the request Authorization header. [Session parameters reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/parameter#session-ref) can be used to pass the token dynamically, e.g. `$session.params.parameter-id`.
+        },
+        "oauthConfig": { # Config for authentication with OAuth. # Config for OAuth.
+          "clientId": "A String", # Required. The client ID from the OAuth provider.
+          "clientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The client secret from the OAuth provider. If the `secret_version_for_client_secret` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "oauthGrantType": "A String", # Required. OAuth grant types.
+          "scopes": [ # Optional. The OAuth scopes to grant.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "secretVersionForClientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the client secret. If this field is set, the `client_secret` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "tokenEndpoint": "A String", # Required. The token endpoint in the OAuth provider to exchange for an access token.
+        },
+        "serviceAgentAuthConfig": { # Config for auth using [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). # Config for [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent) auth.
+          "serviceAgentAuth": "A String", # Optional. Indicate the auth token type generated from the [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). The generated token is sent in the Authorization header.
+        },
+      },
+      "serviceDirectoryConfig": { # Configuration for tools using Service Directory. # Optional. Service Directory configuration.
+        "service": "A String", # Required. The name of [Service Directory](https://cloud.google.com/service-directory) service. Format: `projects//locations//namespaces//services/`. `LocationID` of the service directory must be the same as the location of the agent.
+      },
+      "textSchema": "A String", # Required. The OpenAPI schema specified as a text.
+      "tlsConfig": { # The TLS configuration. # Optional. TLS configuration for the HTTPS verification.
+        "caCerts": [ # Required. Specifies a list of allowed custom CA certificates for HTTPS verification.
+          { # The CA certificate.
+            "cert": "A String", # Required. The allowed custom CA certificates (in DER format) for HTTPS verification. This overrides the default SSL trust store. If this is empty or unspecified, Dialogflow will use Google's default trust store to verify certificates. N.B. Make sure the HTTPS server certificates are signed with "subject alt name". For instance a certificate can be self-signed using the following command: ``` openssl x509 -req -days 200 -in example.com.csr \ -signkey example.com.key \ -out example.com.crt \ -extfile <(printf "\nsubjectAltName='DNS:www.example.com'") ```
+            "displayName": "A String", # Required. The name of the allowed custom CA certificates. This can be used to disambiguate the custom CA certificates.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+    "toolType": "A String", # Output only. The tool type.
+  },
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+}
+
+ +
+ list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
List versions of the specified Tool.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the tool versions. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return in a single page. By default 100 and at most 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous list request.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Tools.ListToolVersions.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
+  "toolVersions": [ # The list of tool versions. There will be a maximum number of items returned based on the page_size field in the request.
+    { # Tool version is a snapshot of the tool at certain timestamp.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+      "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display name of the tool version.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The unique identifier of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.
+      "tool": { # A tool provides a list of actions which are available to the Playbook to attain its goal. A Tool consists of a description of the tool's usage and a specification of the tool which contains the schema and authentication information. # Required. Snapshot of the tool to be associated with this version.
+        "dataStoreSpec": { # A DataStoreTool is a way to provide specifications needed to search a list of data stores. # Data store search tool specification.
+          "dataStoreConnections": [ # Required. List of data stores to search.
+            { # A data store connection. It represents a data store in Discovery Engine and the type of the contents it contains.
+              "dataStore": "A String", # The full name of the referenced data store. Formats: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/dataStores/{data_store}` `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data_store}`
+              "dataStoreType": "A String", # The type of the connected data store.
+              "documentProcessingMode": "A String", # The document processing mode for the data store connection. Should only be set for PUBLIC_WEB and UNSTRUCTURED data stores. If not set it is considered as DOCUMENTS, as this is the legacy mode.
+            },
+          ],
+          "fallbackPrompt": { # A FallbackPrompt is a way to provide specifications for the Data Store fallback prompt when generating responses. # Required. Fallback prompt configurations to use.
+          },
+        },
+        "description": "A String", # Required. High level description of the Tool and its usage.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the Tool, unique within an agent.
+        "functionSpec": { # A Function tool describes the functions to be invoked on the client side. # Client side executed function specification.
+          "inputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the input of the function. This input is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+          "outputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the output of the function. This output is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+            "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+          },
+        },
+        "name": "A String", # The unique identifier of the Tool. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.
+        "openApiSpec": { # An OpenAPI tool is a way to provide the Tool specifications in the Open API schema format. # OpenAPI specification of the Tool.
+          "authentication": { # Authentication information required for API calls # Optional. Authentication information required by the API.
+            "apiKeyConfig": { # Config for authentication with API key. # Config for API key auth.
+              "apiKey": "A String", # Optional. The API key. If the `secret_version_for_api_key` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+              "keyName": "A String", # Required. The parameter name or the header name of the API key. E.g., If the API request is "https://example.com/act?X-Api-Key=", "X-Api-Key" would be the parameter name.
+              "requestLocation": "A String", # Required. Key location in the request.
+              "secretVersionForApiKey": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the API key. If this field is set, the `api_key` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+            },
+            "bearerTokenConfig": { # Config for authentication using bearer token. # Config for bearer token auth.
+              "secretVersionForToken": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the Bearer token. If this field is set, the `token` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+              "token": "A String", # Optional. The text token appended to the text `Bearer` to the request Authorization header. [Session parameters reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/parameter#session-ref) can be used to pass the token dynamically, e.g. `$session.params.parameter-id`.
+            },
+            "oauthConfig": { # Config for authentication with OAuth. # Config for OAuth.
+              "clientId": "A String", # Required. The client ID from the OAuth provider.
+              "clientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The client secret from the OAuth provider. If the `secret_version_for_client_secret` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+              "oauthGrantType": "A String", # Required. OAuth grant types.
+              "scopes": [ # Optional. The OAuth scopes to grant.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "secretVersionForClientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the client secret. If this field is set, the `client_secret` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+              "tokenEndpoint": "A String", # Required. The token endpoint in the OAuth provider to exchange for an access token.
+            },
+            "serviceAgentAuthConfig": { # Config for auth using [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). # Config for [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent) auth.
+              "serviceAgentAuth": "A String", # Optional. Indicate the auth token type generated from the [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). The generated token is sent in the Authorization header.
+            },
+          },
+          "serviceDirectoryConfig": { # Configuration for tools using Service Directory. # Optional. Service Directory configuration.
+            "service": "A String", # Required. The name of [Service Directory](https://cloud.google.com/service-directory) service. Format: `projects//locations//namespaces//services/`. `LocationID` of the service directory must be the same as the location of the agent.
+          },
+          "textSchema": "A String", # Required. The OpenAPI schema specified as a text.
+          "tlsConfig": { # The TLS configuration. # Optional. TLS configuration for the HTTPS verification.
+            "caCerts": [ # Required. Specifies a list of allowed custom CA certificates for HTTPS verification.
+              { # The CA certificate.
+                "cert": "A String", # Required. The allowed custom CA certificates (in DER format) for HTTPS verification. This overrides the default SSL trust store. If this is empty or unspecified, Dialogflow will use Google's default trust store to verify certificates. N.B. Make sure the HTTPS server certificates are signed with "subject alt name". For instance a certificate can be self-signed using the following command: ``` openssl x509 -req -days 200 -in example.com.csr \ -signkey example.com.key \ -out example.com.crt \ -extfile <(printf "\nsubjectAltName='DNS:www.example.com'") ```
+                "displayName": "A String", # Required. The name of the allowed custom CA certificates. This can be used to disambiguate the custom CA certificates.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        },
+        "toolType": "A String", # Output only. The tool type.
+      },
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+ +
+ list_next() + 
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+
+
+ +
+ restore(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None) + 
Retrieves the specified version of the Tool and stores it as the current tool draft, returning the tool with resources updated.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The request message for Tools.RestoreToolVersion.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Tools.RestoreToolVersion.
+  "tool": { # A tool provides a list of actions which are available to the Playbook to attain its goal. A Tool consists of a description of the tool's usage and a specification of the tool which contains the schema and authentication information. # The updated tool.
+    "dataStoreSpec": { # A DataStoreTool is a way to provide specifications needed to search a list of data stores. # Data store search tool specification.
+      "dataStoreConnections": [ # Required. List of data stores to search.
+        { # A data store connection. It represents a data store in Discovery Engine and the type of the contents it contains.
+          "dataStore": "A String", # The full name of the referenced data store. Formats: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/collections/{collection}/dataStores/{data_store}` `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/dataStores/{data_store}`
+          "dataStoreType": "A String", # The type of the connected data store.
+          "documentProcessingMode": "A String", # The document processing mode for the data store connection. Should only be set for PUBLIC_WEB and UNSTRUCTURED data stores. If not set it is considered as DOCUMENTS, as this is the legacy mode.
+        },
+      ],
+      "fallbackPrompt": { # A FallbackPrompt is a way to provide specifications for the Data Store fallback prompt when generating responses. # Required. Fallback prompt configurations to use.
+      },
+    },
+    "description": "A String", # Required. High level description of the Tool and its usage.
+    "displayName": "A String", # Required. The human-readable name of the Tool, unique within an agent.
+    "functionSpec": { # A Function tool describes the functions to be invoked on the client side. # Client side executed function specification.
+      "inputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the input of the function. This input is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+      "outputSchema": { # Optional. The JSON schema is encapsulated in a google.protobuf.Struct to describe the output of the function. This output is a JSON object that contains the function's parameters as properties of the object.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+      },
+    },
+    "name": "A String", # The unique identifier of the Tool. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.
+    "openApiSpec": { # An OpenAPI tool is a way to provide the Tool specifications in the Open API schema format. # OpenAPI specification of the Tool.
+      "authentication": { # Authentication information required for API calls # Optional. Authentication information required by the API.
+        "apiKeyConfig": { # Config for authentication with API key. # Config for API key auth.
+          "apiKey": "A String", # Optional. The API key. If the `secret_version_for_api_key` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "keyName": "A String", # Required. The parameter name or the header name of the API key. E.g., If the API request is "https://example.com/act?X-Api-Key=", "X-Api-Key" would be the parameter name.
+          "requestLocation": "A String", # Required. Key location in the request.
+          "secretVersionForApiKey": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the API key. If this field is set, the `api_key` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+        },
+        "bearerTokenConfig": { # Config for authentication using bearer token. # Config for bearer token auth.
+          "secretVersionForToken": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the Bearer token. If this field is set, the `token` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "token": "A String", # Optional. The text token appended to the text `Bearer` to the request Authorization header. [Session parameters reference](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/parameter#session-ref) can be used to pass the token dynamically, e.g. `$session.params.parameter-id`.
+        },
+        "oauthConfig": { # Config for authentication with OAuth. # Config for OAuth.
+          "clientId": "A String", # Required. The client ID from the OAuth provider.
+          "clientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The client secret from the OAuth provider. If the `secret_version_for_client_secret` field is set, this field will be ignored.
+          "oauthGrantType": "A String", # Required. OAuth grant types.
+          "scopes": [ # Optional. The OAuth scopes to grant.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "secretVersionForClientSecret": "A String", # Optional. The name of the SecretManager secret version resource storing the client secret. If this field is set, the `client_secret` field will be ignored. Format: `projects/{project}/secrets/{secret}/versions/{version}`
+          "tokenEndpoint": "A String", # Required. The token endpoint in the OAuth provider to exchange for an access token.
+        },
+        "serviceAgentAuthConfig": { # Config for auth using [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). # Config for [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent) auth.
+          "serviceAgentAuth": "A String", # Optional. Indicate the auth token type generated from the [Diglogflow service agent](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/service-agents#dialogflow-service-agent). The generated token is sent in the Authorization header.
+        },
+      },
+      "serviceDirectoryConfig": { # Configuration for tools using Service Directory. # Optional. Service Directory configuration.
+        "service": "A String", # Required. The name of [Service Directory](https://cloud.google.com/service-directory) service. Format: `projects//locations//namespaces//services/`. `LocationID` of the service directory must be the same as the location of the agent.
+      },
+      "textSchema": "A String", # Required. The OpenAPI schema specified as a text.
+      "tlsConfig": { # The TLS configuration. # Optional. TLS configuration for the HTTPS verification.
+        "caCerts": [ # Required. Specifies a list of allowed custom CA certificates for HTTPS verification.
+          { # The CA certificate.
+            "cert": "A String", # Required. The allowed custom CA certificates (in DER format) for HTTPS verification. This overrides the default SSL trust store. If this is empty or unspecified, Dialogflow will use Google's default trust store to verify certificates. N.B. Make sure the HTTPS server certificates are signed with "subject alt name". For instance a certificate can be self-signed using the following command: ``` openssl x509 -req -days 200 -in example.com.csr \ -signkey example.com.key \ -out example.com.crt \ -extfile <(printf "\nsubjectAltName='DNS:www.example.com'") ```
+            "displayName": "A String", # Required. The name of the allowed custom CA certificates. This can be used to disambiguate the custom CA certificates.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+    "toolType": "A String", # Output only. The tool type.
+  },
+}
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.conversations.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.conversations.html index c603871b72..b0e7fdd07c 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.conversations.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.conversations.html @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -6421,7 +6421,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html index 972d3e44a9..6f9099cd27 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html +++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@

Method Details

"updateTime": "A String", # Output only. Update time of this environment. "versionConfigs": [ # A list of configurations for flow versions. You should include version configs for all flows that are reachable from `Start Flow` in the agent. Otherwise, an error will be returned. { # Configuration for the version. - "version": "A String", # Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. + "version": "A String", # Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/. }, ], "webhookConfig": { # Configuration for webhooks. # The webhook configuration for this environment. diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json index eb4bff4163..7c8244ff3e 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2.json @@ -8805,7 +8805,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250508", +"revision": "20250602", "rootUrl": "https://dialogflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3AdvancedSettings": { @@ -9272,7 +9272,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -11689,7 +11689,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3beta1EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2beta1.json index 3bd5292b52..e2eeb8abd9 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v2beta1.json @@ -8602,7 +8602,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250508", +"revision": "20250602", "rootUrl": "https://dialogflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3AdvancedSettings": { @@ -9069,7 +9069,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -11486,7 +11486,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3beta1EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json index f2eea074ce..dbff43daee 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3.json @@ -4445,6 +4445,164 @@ "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dialogflow" ] } +}, +"resources": { +"versions": { +"methods": { +"create": { +"description": "Creates a version for the specified Tool.", +"flatPath": "v3/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/agents/{agentsId}/tools/{toolsId}/versions", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "dialogflow.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.create", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The tool to create a version for. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/agents/[^/]+/tools/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v3/{+parent}/versions", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dialogflow" +] +}, +"delete": { +"description": "Deletes the specified version of the Tool.", +"flatPath": "v3/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/agents/{agentsId}/tools/{toolsId}/versions/{versionsId}", +"httpMethod": "DELETE", +"id": "dialogflow.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.delete", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"force": { +"description": "Optional. This field has no effect for Tools not being used. For Tools that are used: * If `force` is set to false, an error will be returned with message indicating the referenced resources. * If `force` is set to true, Dialogflow will remove the tool, as well as any references to the tool.", +"location": "query", +"type": "boolean" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the tool version to delete. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/agents/[^/]+/tools/[^/]+/versions/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v3/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleProtobufEmpty" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dialogflow" +] +}, +"get": { +"description": "Retrieves the specified version of the Tool.", +"flatPath": "v3/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/agents/{agentsId}/tools/{toolsId}/versions/{versionsId}", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "dialogflow.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.get", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/agents/[^/]+/tools/[^/]+/versions/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v3/{+name}", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dialogflow" +] +}, +"list": { +"description": "List versions of the specified Tool.", +"flatPath": "v3/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/agents/{agentsId}/tools/{toolsId}/versions", +"httpMethod": "GET", +"id": "dialogflow.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.list", +"parameterOrder": [ +"parent" +], +"parameters": { +"pageSize": { +"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return in a single page. By default 100 and at most 1000.", +"format": "int32", +"location": "query", +"type": "integer" +}, +"pageToken": { +"description": "Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous list request.", +"location": "query", +"type": "string" +}, +"parent": { +"description": "Required. The parent of the tool versions. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools/`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/agents/[^/]+/tools/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v3/{+parent}/versions", +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ListToolVersionsResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dialogflow" +] +}, +"restore": { +"description": "Retrieves the specified version of the Tool and stores it as the current tool draft, returning the tool with resources updated.", +"flatPath": "v3/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/agents/{agentsId}/tools/{toolsId}/versions/{versionsId}:restore", +"httpMethod": "POST", +"id": "dialogflow.projects.locations.agents.tools.versions.restore", +"parameterOrder": [ +"name" +], +"parameters": { +"name": { +"description": "Required. The name of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.", +"location": "path", +"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/agents/[^/]+/tools/[^/]+/versions/[^/]+$", +"required": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"path": "v3/{+name}:restore", +"request": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionRequest" +}, +"response": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionResponse" +}, +"scopes": [ +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform", +"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/dialogflow" +] +} +} +} } }, "transitionRouteGroups": { @@ -5151,7 +5309,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250422", +"revision": "20250602", "rootUrl": "https://dialogflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Action": { @@ -6627,7 +6785,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -7887,6 +8045,59 @@ }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Handler": { +"description": "Handler can be used to define custom logic to be executed based on the user-specified triggers.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Handler", +"properties": { +"eventHandler": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3HandlerEventHandler", +"description": "A handler triggered by event." +}, +"lifecycleHandler": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3HandlerLifecycleHandler", +"description": "A handler triggered during specific lifecycle of the playbook execution." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3HandlerEventHandler": { +"description": "A handler that is triggered by the specified event.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3HandlerEventHandler", +"properties": { +"condition": { +"description": "Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler.", +"type": "string" +}, +"event": { +"description": "Required. The name of the event that triggers this handler.", +"type": "string" +}, +"fulfillment": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Fulfillment", +"description": "Required. The fulfillment to call when the event occurs." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3HandlerLifecycleHandler": { +"description": "A handler that is triggered on the specific lifecycle_stage of the playbook execution.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3HandlerLifecycleHandler", +"properties": { +"condition": { +"description": "Optional. The condition that must be satisfied to trigger this handler.", +"type": "string" +}, +"fulfillment": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Fulfillment", +"description": "Required. The fulfillment to call when this handler is triggered." +}, +"lifecycleStage": { +"description": "Required. The name of the lifecycle stage that triggers this handler. Supported values: * `playbook-start` * `pre-action-selection` * `pre-action-execution`", +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ImportEntityTypesMetadata": { "description": "Metadata returned for the EntityTypes.ImportEntityTypes long running operation.", "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ImportEntityTypesMetadata", @@ -8807,6 +9018,24 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ListToolVersionsResponse": { +"description": "The response message for Tools.ListToolVersions.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ListToolVersionsResponse", +"properties": { +"nextPageToken": { +"description": "Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.", +"type": "string" +}, +"toolVersions": { +"description": "The list of tool versions. There will be a maximum number of items returned based on the page_size field in the request.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion" +}, +"type": "array" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ListToolsResponse": { "description": "The response message for Tools.ListTools.", "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ListToolsResponse", @@ -9269,6 +9498,13 @@ false "description": "Required. High level description of the goal the playbook intend to accomplish. A goal should be concise since it's visible to other playbooks that may reference this playbook.", "type": "string" }, +"handlers": { +"description": "Optional. A list of registered handlers to execuate based on the specified triggers.", +"items": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Handler" +}, +"type": "array" +}, "instruction": { "$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3PlaybookInstruction", "description": "Instruction to accomplish target goal." @@ -10059,6 +10295,23 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionRequest": { +"description": "The request message for Tools.RestoreToolVersion.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionRequest", +"properties": {}, +"type": "object" +}, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionResponse": { +"description": "The response message for Tools.RestoreToolVersion.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RestoreToolVersionResponse", +"properties": { +"tool": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Tool", +"description": "The updated tool." +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RolloutConfig": { "description": "The configuration for auto rollout.", "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3RolloutConfig", @@ -11115,6 +11368,37 @@ false }, "type": "object" }, +"GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion": { +"description": "Tool version is a snapshot of the tool at certain timestamp.", +"id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3ToolVersion", +"properties": { +"createTime": { +"description": "Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +}, +"displayName": { +"description": "Required. The display name of the tool version.", +"type": "string" +}, +"name": { +"description": "Identifier. The unique identifier of the tool version. Format: `projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/`.", +"type": "string" +}, +"tool": { +"$ref": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3Tool", +"description": "Required. Snapshot of the tool to be associated with this version." +}, +"updateTime": { +"description": "Output only. Last time the tool version was created or modified.", +"format": "google-datetime", +"readOnly": true, +"type": "string" +} +}, +"type": "object" +}, "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3TrainFlowRequest": { "description": "The request message for Flows.TrainFlow.", "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3TrainFlowRequest", @@ -12479,7 +12763,7 @@ false "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3beta1EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3beta1.json index de231da8e3..0088e38eda 100644 --- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3beta1.json +++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dialogflow.v3beta1.json @@ -5436,7 +5436,7 @@ } } }, -"revision": "20250422", +"revision": "20250602", "rootUrl": "https://dialogflow.googleapis.com/", "schemas": { "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3AdvancedSettings": { @@ -5903,7 +5903,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, @@ -9858,7 +9858,7 @@ "id": "GoogleCloudDialogflowCxV3beta1EnvironmentVersionConfig", "properties": { "version": { -"description": "Required. Both flow and playbook versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/.", +"description": "Required. Flow, playbook and tool versions are supported. Format for flow version: projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/. Format for playbook version: projects//locations//agents//playbooks//versions/. Format for tool version: projects//locations//agents//tools//versions/.", "type": "string" } }, From 45a8e0205093ab0b81f4786f5e39a52aebc78bdf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yoshi Automation Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 13/32] feat(discoveryengine): update the api #### discoveryengine:v1 The following keys were deleted: - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest.properties.gcsSource.$ref (Total Keys: 1) The following keys were added: - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1SessionTurn.properties.queryConfigs (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaSessionTurn.properties.queryConfigs (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense (Total Keys: 16) #### discoveryengine:v1alpha The following keys were deleted: - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaBatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest.properties.gcsSource.$ref (Total Keys: 1) The following keys were added: - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense (Total Keys: 16) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaSessionTurn.properties.queryConfigs (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense (Total Keys: 16) #### discoveryengine:v1beta The following keys were deleted: - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest.properties.gcsSource.$ref (Total Keys: 1) The following keys were added: - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense (Total Keys: 16) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaSessionTurn.properties.queryConfigs (Total Keys: 2) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata (Total Keys: 10) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse (Total Keys: 6) - schemas.GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaSessionTurn.properties.queryConfigs (Total Keys: 2) --- ...ine_v1.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html | 8 +- ...ects.locations.collections.dataStores.html | 10 +- ...collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...tions.collections.dataStores.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...ns.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...ocations.collections.engines.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...gine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.html | 10 +- ...s.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...rojects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.html | 6 +- ...jects.locations.identityMappingStores.html | 8 +- ...gine_v1.projects.locations.userStores.html | 6 - ...1alpha.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html | 8 +- ...ects.locations.collections.dataStores.html | 10 +- ...collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...tions.collections.dataStores.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...ns.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...ocations.collections.engines.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html | 24 +- ...v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.html | 10 +- ...s.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...rojects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...1alpha.projects.locations.evaluations.html | 12 +- ...veryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html | 10 +- ...jects.locations.identityMappingStores.html | 8 +- ...v1alpha.projects.locations.userStores.html | 6 - ...v1beta.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html | 8 +- ...ects.locations.collections.dataStores.html | 10 +- ...collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...tions.collections.dataStores.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...ns.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...ocations.collections.engines.sessions.html | 18 ++ ..._v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.html | 10 +- ...s.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html | 6 + ...rojects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html | 18 ++ ...v1beta.projects.locations.evaluations.html | 12 +- ...overyengine_v1beta.projects.locations.html | 6 +- ...jects.locations.identityMappingStores.html | 8 +- ..._v1beta.projects.locations.userStores.html | 6 - .../documents/discoveryengine.v1.json | 214 ++++++++++++-- .../documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json | 263 ++++++++++++++++-- .../documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json | 214 ++++++++++++-- 42 files changed, 927 insertions(+), 176 deletions(-) diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html index 0ed7a040d5..cf8596b981 100644 --- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html +++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@

Method Details

"kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`. "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`. "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. + "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used. "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features. { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@

Method Details

"kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`. "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`. "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation. - "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. + "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used. "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features. { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@

Method Details

Provisions a CMEK key for use in a location of a customer's project. This method will also conduct location validation on the provided cmekConfig to make sure the key is valid and can be used in the selected location.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
index 41e5e3f6ea..3eaf5786bb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index a04a8d5cbc..7992506951 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -567,6 +567,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -2223,6 +2226,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
index a5896a7d77..0c1261a123 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
@@ -265,6 +265,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -428,6 +431,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -617,6 +623,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -794,6 +803,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -975,6 +987,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1139,6 +1154,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
index 3b32a66f08..d0b32f6c95 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
@@ -567,6 +567,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -2223,6 +2226,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
index faa8958036..9dcc277f19 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
@@ -265,6 +265,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -428,6 +431,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -617,6 +623,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -794,6 +803,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -975,6 +987,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1139,6 +1154,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.html
index 0cde06ab93..afdafa8881 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.html
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index a41651e0b2..2493ba5164 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -567,6 +567,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -2223,6 +2226,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
index 4c3b8d7b68..218f015544 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
@@ -265,6 +265,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -428,6 +431,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -617,6 +623,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -794,6 +803,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -975,6 +987,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1139,6 +1154,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.html
index 4eb7e36fc0..230ccfc40c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.html
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Provisions a CMEK key for use in a location of a customer's project. This method will also conduct location validation on the provided cmekConfig to make sure the key is valid and can be used in the selected location.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
index 158d290f5b..3dc8e6f088 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.userStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.userStores.html
index c865ddcf57..05a18e6cc2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.userStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1.projects.locations.userStores.html
@@ -97,12 +97,6 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.
   "deleteUnassignedUserLicenses": True or False, # Optional. If true, if user licenses removed associated license config, the user license will be deleted. By default which is false, the user license will be updated to unassigned state.
-  "gcsSource": { # Cloud Storage location for input content. # Cloud Storage location for the input content.
-    "dataSchema": "A String", # The schema to use when parsing the data from the source. Supported values for document imports: * `document` (default): One JSON Document per line. Each document must have a valid Document.id. * `content`: Unstructured data (e.g. PDF, HTML). Each file matched by `input_uris` becomes a document, with the ID set to the first 128 bits of SHA256(URI) encoded as a hex string. * `custom`: One custom data JSON per row in arbitrary format that conforms to the defined Schema of the data store. This can only be used by the GENERIC Data Store vertical. * `csv`: A CSV file with header conforming to the defined Schema of the data store. Each entry after the header is imported as a Document. This can only be used by the GENERIC Data Store vertical. Supported values for user event imports: * `user_event` (default): One JSON UserEvent per line.
-    "inputUris": [ # Required. Cloud Storage URIs to input files. Each URI can be up to 2000 characters long. URIs can match the full object path (for example, `gs://bucket/directory/object.json`) or a pattern matching one or more files, such as `gs://bucket/directory/*.json`. A request can contain at most 100 files (or 100,000 files if `data_schema` is `content`). Each file can be up to 2 GB (or 100 MB if `data_schema` is `content`).
-      "A String",
-    ],
-  },
   "inlineSource": { # The inline source for the input config for BatchUpdateUserLicenses method. # The inline source for the input content for document embeddings.
     "updateMask": "A String", # Optional. The list of fields to update.
     "userLicenses": [ # Required. A list of user licenses to update. Each user license must have a valid UserLicense.user_principal.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html
index 2ef67b5624..bcf10913aa 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
       "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
       "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-      "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+      "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
       "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
       "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
         { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Provisions a CMEK key for use in a location of a customer's project. This method will also conduct location validation on the provided cmekConfig to make sure the key is valid and can be used in the selected location.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
index e77aa73025..90415ac452 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index 4a1f3bc7fc..716a02bba1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -618,6 +618,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -3043,6 +3046,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
index b34581f400..08bf8f7521 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
@@ -280,6 +280,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -458,6 +461,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -662,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -854,6 +863,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1050,6 +1062,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1229,6 +1244,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
index 16de7988f7..ea2ff6bdb4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
@@ -618,6 +618,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -3043,6 +3046,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
index 6e5835fd2e..8dbe7cdd4c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
@@ -280,6 +280,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -458,6 +461,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -662,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -854,6 +863,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1050,6 +1062,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1229,6 +1244,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html
index d90b9f02b7..bb5dd9dae9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.collections.html
@@ -305,8 +305,8 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
     },
-    "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-    "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+    "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+    "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
     "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
     "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
@@ -492,8 +492,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
   },
-  "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-  "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+  "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+  "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
   "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
   "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
   "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
@@ -683,8 +683,8 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
         },
-        "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-        "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+        "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+        "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
         "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
         "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
         "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
@@ -884,8 +884,8 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
     },
-    "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-    "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+    "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+    "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
     "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
     "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
@@ -1095,8 +1095,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
   },
-  "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-  "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+  "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+  "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
   "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
   "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
   "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
@@ -1273,8 +1273,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
   },
-  "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-  "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+  "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+  "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
   "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
   "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
   "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.html
index 74be0d29b9..16f29622d9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.html
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -1119,7 +1119,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index acb9263833..f430f512f9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -618,6 +618,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -3043,6 +3046,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
index cc395f8b17..925f38f258 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
@@ -280,6 +280,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -458,6 +461,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -662,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -854,6 +863,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1050,6 +1062,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1229,6 +1244,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.evaluations.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.evaluations.html
index 60a6a22ec6..b9d1b35535 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.evaluations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.evaluations.html
@@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "evaluationSpec": { # Describes the specification of the evaluation. # Required. The specification of the evaluation.
-    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Required. The specification of the query set.
-      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
+    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Optional. The specification of the query set.
+      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
     },
     "searchRequest": { # Request message for SearchService.Search method. # Required. The search request that is used to perform the evaluation. Only the following fields within SearchRequest are supported; if any other fields are provided, an UNSUPPORTED error will be returned: * SearchRequest.serving_config * SearchRequest.branch * SearchRequest.canonical_filter * SearchRequest.query_expansion_spec * SearchRequest.spell_correction_spec * SearchRequest.content_search_spec * SearchRequest.user_pseudo_id
       "boostSpec": { # Boost specification to boost certain documents. # Boost specification to boost certain documents. For more information on boosting, see [Boosting](https://cloud.google.com/generative-ai-app-builder/docs/boost-search-results)
@@ -436,8 +436,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "evaluationSpec": { # Describes the specification of the evaluation. # Required. The specification of the evaluation.
-    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Required. The specification of the query set.
-      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
+    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Optional. The specification of the query set.
+      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
     },
     "searchRequest": { # Request message for SearchService.Search method. # Required. The search request that is used to perform the evaluation. Only the following fields within SearchRequest are supported; if any other fields are provided, an UNSUPPORTED error will be returned: * SearchRequest.serving_config * SearchRequest.branch * SearchRequest.canonical_filter * SearchRequest.query_expansion_spec * SearchRequest.spell_correction_spec * SearchRequest.content_search_spec * SearchRequest.user_pseudo_id
       "boostSpec": { # Boost specification to boost certain documents. # Boost specification to boost certain documents. For more information on boosting, see [Boosting](https://cloud.google.com/generative-ai-app-builder/docs/boost-search-results)
@@ -709,8 +709,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "evaluationSpec": { # Describes the specification of the evaluation. # Required. The specification of the evaluation.
-        "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Required. The specification of the query set.
-          "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
+        "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Optional. The specification of the query set.
+          "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
         },
         "searchRequest": { # Request message for SearchService.Search method. # Required. The search request that is used to perform the evaluation. Only the following fields within SearchRequest are supported; if any other fields are provided, an UNSUPPORTED error will be returned: * SearchRequest.serving_config * SearchRequest.branch * SearchRequest.canonical_filter * SearchRequest.query_expansion_spec * SearchRequest.spell_correction_spec * SearchRequest.content_search_spec * SearchRequest.user_pseudo_id
           "boostSpec": { # Boost specification to boost certain documents. # Boost specification to boost certain documents. For more information on boosting, see [Boosting](https://cloud.google.com/generative-ai-app-builder/docs/boost-search-results)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html
index 63c32753c1..99afb5ce13 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.html
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -1065,8 +1065,8 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "refreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector. If not set, the access control list will be refreshed at the default interval of 30 minutes. The identity refresh interval can be at least 30 minutes and at most 7 days.
     },
-    "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.
-    "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.
+    "incrementalRefreshInterval": "A String", # Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
+    "incrementalSyncDisabled": True or False, # Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.
     "kmsKeyName": "A String", # Input only. The KMS key to be used to protect the DataStores managed by this connector. Must be set for requests that need to comply with CMEK Org Policy protections. If this field is set and processed successfully, the DataStores created by this connector will be protected by the KMS key.
     "lastSyncTime": "A String", # Output only. For periodic connectors only, the last time a data sync was completed.
     "latestPauseTime": "A String", # Output only. The most recent timestamp when this DataConnector was paused, affecting all functionalities such as data synchronization. Pausing a connector has the following effects: - All functionalities, including data synchronization, are halted. - Any ongoing data synchronization job will be canceled. - No future data synchronization runs will be scheduled nor can be triggered.
@@ -1177,7 +1177,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Provisions a CMEK key for use in a location of a customer's project. This method will also conduct location validation on the provided cmekConfig to make sure the key is valid and can be used in the selected location.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -1186,7 +1186,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
index 86f2af17e7..54929e5b7f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.userStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.userStores.html
index fa56725d4f..40f6e7bad6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.userStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1alpha.projects.locations.userStores.html
@@ -102,12 +102,6 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.
   "deleteUnassignedUserLicenses": True or False, # Optional. If true, if user licenses removed associated license config, the user license will be deleted. By default which is false, the user license will be updated to unassigned state.
-  "gcsSource": { # Cloud Storage location for input content. # Cloud Storage location for the input content.
-    "dataSchema": "A String", # The schema to use when parsing the data from the source. Supported values for document imports: * `document` (default): One JSON Document per line. Each document must have a valid Document.id. * `content`: Unstructured data (e.g. PDF, HTML). Each file matched by `input_uris` becomes a document, with the ID set to the first 128 bits of SHA256(URI) encoded as a hex string. * `custom`: One custom data JSON per row in arbitrary format that conforms to the defined Schema of the data store. This can only be used by the GENERIC Data Store vertical. * `csv`: A CSV file with header conforming to the defined Schema of the data store. Each entry after the header is imported as a Document. This can only be used by the GENERIC Data Store vertical. Supported values for user event imports: * `user_event` (default): One JSON UserEvent per line.
-    "inputUris": [ # Required. Cloud Storage URIs to input files. Each URI can be up to 2000 characters long. URIs can match the full object path (for example, `gs://bucket/directory/object.json`) or a pattern matching one or more files, such as `gs://bucket/directory/*.json`. A request can contain at most 100 files (or 100,000 files if `data_schema` is `content`). Each file can be up to 2 GB (or 100 MB if `data_schema` is `content`).
-      "A String",
-    ],
-  },
   "inlineSource": { # The inline source for the input config for BatchUpdateUserLicenses method. # The inline source for the input content for document embeddings.
     "updateMask": "A String", # Optional. The list of fields to update.
     "userLicenses": [ # Required. A list of user licenses to update. Each user license must have a valid UserLicense.user_principal.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html
index e03e32ac0b..0d9015a79d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.cmekConfigs.html
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
       "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
       "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-      "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+      "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
       "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
       "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
         { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Provisions a CMEK key for use in a location of a customer's project. This method will also conduct location validation on the provided cmekConfig to make sure the key is valid and can be used in the selected location.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
index c7f01c496f..3f19889546 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.html
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -790,7 +790,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index 97a61122c1..59cbe43d57 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -615,6 +615,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -2999,6 +3002,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
index 8c3c45b9d8..a4d0df18b9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.dataStores.sessions.html
@@ -280,6 +280,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -458,6 +461,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -662,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -854,6 +863,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1050,6 +1062,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1229,6 +1244,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
index 924be7db4d..bcabd6a2fa 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.servingConfigs.html
@@ -615,6 +615,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -2999,6 +3002,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
index ab04f16ab6..1b2a8f5ad0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.collections.engines.sessions.html
@@ -280,6 +280,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -458,6 +461,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -662,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -854,6 +863,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1050,6 +1062,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1229,6 +1244,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.html
index e92524771d..3e061cf2d7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.html
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
index 61f0b58654..1ee15c7650 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.servingConfigs.html
@@ -615,6 +615,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -2999,6 +3002,9 @@ 
Method Details

           "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
           "text": "A String", # Plain text.
         },
+        "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+          "a_key": "A String",
+        },
       },
     ],
     "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
index 07840d56bf..a26c76bc67 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.dataStores.sessions.html
@@ -280,6 +280,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -458,6 +461,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -662,6 +668,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -854,6 +863,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
             "text": "A String", # Plain text.
           },
+          "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+            "a_key": "A String",
+          },
         },
       ],
       "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1050,6 +1062,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
@@ -1229,6 +1244,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "queryId": "A String", # Unique Id for the query.
         "text": "A String", # Plain text.
       },
+      "queryConfigs": { # Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix "google." will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with "google..". 3P services can use anything not starting with "google."
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
     },
   ],
   "userPseudoId": "A String", # A unique identifier for tracking users.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.evaluations.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.evaluations.html
index 864275a1ef..35fc6f6eec 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.evaluations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.evaluations.html
@@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "evaluationSpec": { # Describes the specification of the evaluation. # Required. The specification of the evaluation.
-    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Required. The specification of the query set.
-      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
+    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Optional. The specification of the query set.
+      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
     },
     "searchRequest": { # Request message for SearchService.Search method. # Required. The search request that is used to perform the evaluation. Only the following fields within SearchRequest are supported; if any other fields are provided, an UNSUPPORTED error will be returned: * SearchRequest.serving_config * SearchRequest.branch * SearchRequest.canonical_filter * SearchRequest.query_expansion_spec * SearchRequest.spell_correction_spec * SearchRequest.content_search_spec * SearchRequest.user_pseudo_id
       "boostSpec": { # Boost specification to boost certain documents. # Boost specification to boost certain documents. For more information on boosting, see [Boosting](https://cloud.google.com/generative-ai-app-builder/docs/boost-search-results)
@@ -433,8 +433,8 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "evaluationSpec": { # Describes the specification of the evaluation. # Required. The specification of the evaluation.
-    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Required. The specification of the query set.
-      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
+    "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Optional. The specification of the query set.
+      "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
     },
     "searchRequest": { # Request message for SearchService.Search method. # Required. The search request that is used to perform the evaluation. Only the following fields within SearchRequest are supported; if any other fields are provided, an UNSUPPORTED error will be returned: * SearchRequest.serving_config * SearchRequest.branch * SearchRequest.canonical_filter * SearchRequest.query_expansion_spec * SearchRequest.spell_correction_spec * SearchRequest.content_search_spec * SearchRequest.user_pseudo_id
       "boostSpec": { # Boost specification to boost certain documents. # Boost specification to boost certain documents. For more information on boosting, see [Boosting](https://cloud.google.com/generative-ai-app-builder/docs/boost-search-results)
@@ -703,8 +703,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "evaluationSpec": { # Describes the specification of the evaluation. # Required. The specification of the evaluation.
-        "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Required. The specification of the query set.
-          "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
+        "querySetSpec": { # Describes the specification of the query set. # Optional. The specification of the query set.
+          "sampleQuerySet": "A String", # Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.
         },
         "searchRequest": { # Request message for SearchService.Search method. # Required. The search request that is used to perform the evaluation. Only the following fields within SearchRequest are supported; if any other fields are provided, an UNSUPPORTED error will be returned: * SearchRequest.serving_config * SearchRequest.branch * SearchRequest.canonical_filter * SearchRequest.query_expansion_spec * SearchRequest.spell_correction_spec * SearchRequest.content_search_spec * SearchRequest.user_pseudo_id
           "boostSpec": { # Boost specification to boost certain documents. # Boost specification to boost certain documents. For more information on boosting, see [Boosting](https://cloud.google.com/generative-ai-app-builder/docs/boost-search-results)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.html
index ebbdc5fc02..e69ecd8bfb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.html
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Provisions a CMEK key for use in a location of a customer's project. This method will also conduct location validation on the provided cmekConfig to make sure the key is valid and can be used in the selected location.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
   "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
   "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
   "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
   "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
     { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
index 0e825a5758..1193dbbe6f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.identityMappingStores.html
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
     "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
     "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+    "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
     "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
     "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
       { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "kmsKey": "A String", # KMS key resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/keyRings/{keyRing}/cryptoKeys/{keyId}`.
         "kmsKeyVersion": "A String", # KMS key version resource name which will be used to encrypt resources `/cryptoKeyVersions/{keyVersion}`.
         "lastRotationTimestampMicros": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp of the last key rotation.
-        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.
+        "name": "A String", # Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.
         "notebooklmState": "A String", # Output only. Whether the NotebookLM Corpus is ready to be used.
         "singleRegionKeys": [ # Optional. Single-regional CMEKs that are required for some VAIS features.
           { # Metadata for single-regional CMEKs.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.userStores.html b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.userStores.html
index 189a45deaf..1bde993930 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.userStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/discoveryengine_v1beta.projects.locations.userStores.html
@@ -97,12 +97,6 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.
   "deleteUnassignedUserLicenses": True or False, # Optional. If true, if user licenses removed associated license config, the user license will be deleted. By default which is false, the user license will be updated to unassigned state.
-  "gcsSource": { # Cloud Storage location for input content. # Cloud Storage location for the input content.
-    "dataSchema": "A String", # The schema to use when parsing the data from the source. Supported values for document imports: * `document` (default): One JSON Document per line. Each document must have a valid Document.id. * `content`: Unstructured data (e.g. PDF, HTML). Each file matched by `input_uris` becomes a document, with the ID set to the first 128 bits of SHA256(URI) encoded as a hex string. * `custom`: One custom data JSON per row in arbitrary format that conforms to the defined Schema of the data store. This can only be used by the GENERIC Data Store vertical. * `csv`: A CSV file with header conforming to the defined Schema of the data store. Each entry after the header is imported as a Document. This can only be used by the GENERIC Data Store vertical. Supported values for user event imports: * `user_event` (default): One JSON UserEvent per line.
-    "inputUris": [ # Required. Cloud Storage URIs to input files. Each URI can be up to 2000 characters long. URIs can match the full object path (for example, `gs://bucket/directory/object.json`) or a pattern matching one or more files, such as `gs://bucket/directory/*.json`. A request can contain at most 100 files (or 100,000 files if `data_schema` is `content`). Each file can be up to 2 GB (or 100 MB if `data_schema` is `content`).
-      "A String",
-    ],
-  },
   "inlineSource": { # The inline source for the input config for BatchUpdateUserLicenses method. # The inline source for the input content for document embeddings.
     "updateMask": "A String", # Optional. The list of fields to update.
     "userLicenses": [ # Required. A list of user licenses to update. Each user license must have a valid UserLicense.user_principal.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json
index 97a024a6bd..a39cede70b 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1.json
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cmekConfig$",
 "required": true,
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cmekConfigs/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -7052,7 +7052,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250521",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleApiDistribution": {
@@ -8822,6 +8822,33 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to the progress of the UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses operation. This will be returned by the google.longrunning.Operation.metadata field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Operation create time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"failureCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses that failed to be updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"successCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses successfully updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Operation last update time. If the operation is done, this is also the finish time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest": {
 "description": "Request message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest",
@@ -8830,10 +8857,6 @@
 "description": "Optional. If true, if user licenses removed associated license config, the user license will be deleted. By default which is false, the user license will be updated to unassigned state.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
-"gcsSource": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1GcsSource",
-"description": "Cloud Storage location for the input content."
-},
 "inlineSource": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesRequestInlineSource",
 "description": "The inline source for the input content for document embeddings."
@@ -8860,6 +8883,27 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"errorSamples": {
+"description": "A sample of errors encountered while processing the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"userLicenses": {
+"description": "UserLicenses successfully updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchVerifyTargetSitesRequest": {
 "description": "Request message for SiteSearchEngineService.BatchVerifyTargetSites method.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchVerifyTargetSitesRequest",
@@ -9408,7 +9452,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -9445,7 +9489,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -9455,7 +9500,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -11598,7 +11644,7 @@
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Defaults to `INCREMENTAL`.",
 "Inserts new documents or updates existing documents.",
-"Calculates diff and replaces the entire document dataset. Existing documents may be deleted if they are not present in the source location."
+"Calculates diff and replaces the entire document dataset. Existing documents may be deleted if they are not present in the source location. When using this mode, there won't be any downtime on the dataset targeted. Any document that should remain unchanged or that should be updated will continue serving while the operation is running."
 ],
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -14133,6 +14179,13 @@
 "query": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1Query",
 "description": "The user query."
+},
+"queryConfigs": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix \"google.\" will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with \"google..\". 3P services can use anything not starting with \"google.\"",
+"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -15646,7 +15699,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -15683,7 +15736,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -15693,7 +15747,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -16499,12 +16554,12 @@
 "description": "The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector."
 },
 "incrementalRefreshInterval": {
-"description": "Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.",
+"description": "Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.",
 "format": "google-duration",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "incrementalSyncDisabled": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "kmsKeyName": {
@@ -17775,7 +17830,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "querySetSpec": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
-"description": "Required. The specification of the query set."
+"description": "Optional. The specification of the query set."
 },
 "searchRequest": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaSearchRequest",
@@ -17789,7 +17844,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
 "properties": {
 "sampleQuerySet": {
-"description": "Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -20008,6 +20063,13 @@
 "query": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaQuery",
 "description": "The user query."
+},
+"queryConfigs": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix \"google.\" will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with \"google..\". 3P services can use anything not starting with \"google.\"",
+"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -20569,6 +20631,54 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to the progress of the UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses operation. This will be returned by the google.longrunning.Operation.metadata field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Operation create time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"failureCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses that failed to be updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"successCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses successfully updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Operation last update time. If the operation is done, this is also the finish time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"errorSamples": {
+"description": "A sample of errors encountered while processing the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"userLicenses": {
+"description": "UserLicenses successfully updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaCmekConfig": {
 "description": "Configurations used to enable CMEK data encryption with Cloud KMS keys.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaCmekConfig",
@@ -20593,7 +20703,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -20630,7 +20740,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -20640,7 +20751,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -21906,7 +22018,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "querySetSpec": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
-"description": "Required. The specification of the query set."
+"description": "Optional. The specification of the query set."
 },
 "searchRequest": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaSearchRequest",
@@ -21920,7 +22032,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
 "properties": {
 "sampleQuerySet": {
-"description": "Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -23791,6 +23903,62 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense": {
+"description": "User License information assigned by the admin.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User created timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"lastLoginTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User last logged in time. If the user has not logged in yet, this field will be empty.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseAssignmentState": {
+"description": "Output only. License assignment state of the user. If the user is assigned with a license config, the user loggin will be assigned with the license; If the user's license assignment state is unassigned or unspecified, no license config will be associated to the user;",
+"enum": [
+"LICENSE_ASSIGNMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ASSIGNED",
+"UNASSIGNED",
+"NO_LICENSE",
+"NO_LICENSE_ATTEMPTED_LOGIN"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value.",
+"License assigned to the user.",
+"No license assigned to the user. Deprecated, translated to NO_LICENSE.",
+"No license assigned to the user.",
+"User attempted to login but no license assigned to the user. This state is only used for no user first time login attempt but cannot get license assigned. Users already logged in but cannot get license assigned will be assigned NO_LICENSE state(License could be unassigned by admin)."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseConfig": {
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the Subscription(LicenseConfig) assigned to the user.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User update timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userPrincipal": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The user principal of the User, could be email address or other prinical identifier. This field is immutable. Admin assign licenses based on the user principal.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userProfile": {
+"description": "Optional. The user profile. We user user full name(First name + Last name) as user profile.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaWorkspaceConfig": {
 "description": "Config to store data store type configuration for workspace data",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaWorkspaceConfig",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json
index bea26d0af5..711c5c4af1 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1alpha.json
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cmekConfig$",
 "required": true,
@@ -601,7 +601,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cmekConfigs/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -9173,7 +9173,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250521",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ApiservingMediaRequestInfo": {
@@ -10281,6 +10281,54 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to the progress of the UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses operation. This will be returned by the google.longrunning.Operation.metadata field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Operation create time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"failureCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses that failed to be updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"successCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses successfully updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Operation last update time. If the operation is done, this is also the finish time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"errorSamples": {
+"description": "A sample of errors encountered while processing the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"userLicenses": {
+"description": "UserLicenses successfully updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1CmekConfig": {
 "description": "Configurations used to enable CMEK data encryption with Cloud KMS keys.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1CmekConfig",
@@ -10305,7 +10353,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -10342,7 +10390,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -10352,7 +10401,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -12645,6 +12695,62 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense": {
+"description": "User License information assigned by the admin.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User created timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"lastLoginTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User last logged in time. If the user has not logged in yet, this field will be empty.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseAssignmentState": {
+"description": "Output only. License assignment state of the user. If the user is assigned with a license config, the user loggin will be assigned with the license; If the user's license assignment state is unassigned or unspecified, no license config will be associated to the user;",
+"enum": [
+"LICENSE_ASSIGNMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ASSIGNED",
+"UNASSIGNED",
+"NO_LICENSE",
+"NO_LICENSE_ATTEMPTED_LOGIN"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value.",
+"License assigned to the user.",
+"No license assigned to the user. Deprecated, translated to NO_LICENSE.",
+"No license assigned to the user.",
+"User attempted to login but no license assigned to the user. This state is only used for no user first time login attempt but cannot get license assigned. Users already logged in but cannot get license assigned will be assigned NO_LICENSE state(License could be unassigned by admin)."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseConfig": {
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the Subscription(LicenseConfig) assigned to the user.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User update timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userPrincipal": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The user principal of the User, could be email address or other prinical identifier. This field is immutable. Admin assign licenses based on the user principal.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userProfile": {
+"description": "Optional. The user profile. We user user full name(First name + Last name) as user profile.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1WorkspaceConfig": {
 "description": "Config to store data store type configuration for workspace data",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1WorkspaceConfig",
@@ -14604,10 +14710,6 @@
 "description": "Optional. If true, if user licenses removed associated license config, the user license will be deleted. By default which is false, the user license will be updated to unassigned state.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
-"gcsSource": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaGcsSource",
-"description": "Cloud Storage location for the input content."
-},
 "inlineSource": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaBatchUpdateUserLicensesRequestInlineSource",
 "description": "The inline source for the input content for document embeddings."
@@ -15280,7 +15382,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -15317,7 +15419,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -15327,7 +15430,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -16488,12 +16592,12 @@
 "description": "The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector."
 },
 "incrementalRefreshInterval": {
-"description": "Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.",
+"description": "Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.",
 "format": "google-duration",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "incrementalSyncDisabled": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "kmsKeyName": {
@@ -18044,7 +18148,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "querySetSpec": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
-"description": "Required. The specification of the query set."
+"description": "Optional. The specification of the query set."
 },
 "searchRequest": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaSearchRequest",
@@ -18058,7 +18162,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
 "properties": {
 "sampleQuerySet": {
-"description": "Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -18786,7 +18890,7 @@
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Defaults to `INCREMENTAL`.",
 "Inserts new documents or updates existing documents.",
-"Calculates diff and replaces the entire document dataset. Existing documents may be deleted if they are not present in the source location."
+"Calculates diff and replaces the entire document dataset. Existing documents may be deleted if they are not present in the source location. When using this mode, there won't be any downtime on the dataset targeted. Any document that should remain unchanged or that should be updated will continue serving while the operation is running."
 ],
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -22874,6 +22978,13 @@
 "query": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaQuery",
 "description": "The user query."
+},
+"queryConfigs": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix \"google.\" will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with \"google..\". 3P services can use anything not starting with \"google.\"",
+"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -24560,6 +24671,54 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to the progress of the UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses operation. This will be returned by the google.longrunning.Operation.metadata field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Operation create time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"failureCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses that failed to be updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"successCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses successfully updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Operation last update time. If the operation is done, this is also the finish time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"errorSamples": {
+"description": "A sample of errors encountered while processing the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"userLicenses": {
+"description": "UserLicenses successfully updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaCmekConfig": {
 "description": "Configurations used to enable CMEK data encryption with Cloud KMS keys.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaCmekConfig",
@@ -24584,7 +24743,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -24621,7 +24780,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -24631,7 +24791,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -25897,7 +26058,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "querySetSpec": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
-"description": "Required. The specification of the query set."
+"description": "Optional. The specification of the query set."
 },
 "searchRequest": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaSearchRequest",
@@ -25911,7 +26072,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
 "properties": {
 "sampleQuerySet": {
-"description": "Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -27782,6 +27943,62 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense": {
+"description": "User License information assigned by the admin.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User created timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"lastLoginTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User last logged in time. If the user has not logged in yet, this field will be empty.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseAssignmentState": {
+"description": "Output only. License assignment state of the user. If the user is assigned with a license config, the user loggin will be assigned with the license; If the user's license assignment state is unassigned or unspecified, no license config will be associated to the user;",
+"enum": [
+"LICENSE_ASSIGNMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ASSIGNED",
+"UNASSIGNED",
+"NO_LICENSE",
+"NO_LICENSE_ATTEMPTED_LOGIN"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value.",
+"License assigned to the user.",
+"No license assigned to the user. Deprecated, translated to NO_LICENSE.",
+"No license assigned to the user.",
+"User attempted to login but no license assigned to the user. This state is only used for no user first time login attempt but cannot get license assigned. Users already logged in but cannot get license assigned will be assigned NO_LICENSE state(License could be unassigned by admin)."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseConfig": {
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the Subscription(LicenseConfig) assigned to the user.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User update timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userPrincipal": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The user principal of the User, could be email address or other prinical identifier. This field is immutable. Admin assign licenses based on the user principal.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userProfile": {
+"description": "Optional. The user profile. We user user full name(First name + Last name) as user profile.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaWorkspaceConfig": {
 "description": "Config to store data store type configuration for workspace data",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaWorkspaceConfig",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json
index a0e26aaba6..21242a7532 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/discoveryengine.v1beta.json
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cmekConfig$",
 "required": true,
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/cmekConfigs/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -8004,7 +8004,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250521",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://discoveryengine.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleApiDistribution": {
@@ -8520,6 +8520,54 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to the progress of the UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses operation. This will be returned by the google.longrunning.Operation.metadata field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Operation create time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"failureCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses that failed to be updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"successCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses successfully updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Operation last update time. If the operation is done, this is also the finish time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1BatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"errorSamples": {
+"description": "A sample of errors encountered while processing the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"userLicenses": {
+"description": "UserLicenses successfully updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1CmekConfig": {
 "description": "Configurations used to enable CMEK data encryption with Cloud KMS keys.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1CmekConfig",
@@ -8544,7 +8592,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -8581,7 +8629,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -8591,7 +8640,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -10884,6 +10934,62 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense": {
+"description": "User License information assigned by the admin.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1UserLicense",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User created timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"lastLoginTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User last logged in time. If the user has not logged in yet, this field will be empty.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseAssignmentState": {
+"description": "Output only. License assignment state of the user. If the user is assigned with a license config, the user loggin will be assigned with the license; If the user's license assignment state is unassigned or unspecified, no license config will be associated to the user;",
+"enum": [
+"LICENSE_ASSIGNMENT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ASSIGNED",
+"UNASSIGNED",
+"NO_LICENSE",
+"NO_LICENSE_ATTEMPTED_LOGIN"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value.",
+"License assigned to the user.",
+"No license assigned to the user. Deprecated, translated to NO_LICENSE.",
+"No license assigned to the user.",
+"User attempted to login but no license assigned to the user. This state is only used for no user first time login attempt but cannot get license assigned. Users already logged in but cannot get license assigned will be assigned NO_LICENSE state(License could be unassigned by admin)."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"licenseConfig": {
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the Subscription(LicenseConfig) assigned to the user.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. User update timestamp.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userPrincipal": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The user principal of the User, could be email address or other prinical identifier. This field is immutable. Admin assign licenses based on the user principal.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"userProfile": {
+"description": "Optional. The user profile. We user user full name(First name + Last name) as user profile.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1WorkspaceConfig": {
 "description": "Config to store data store type configuration for workspace data",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1WorkspaceConfig",
@@ -11779,7 +11885,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -11816,7 +11922,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -11826,7 +11933,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -12632,12 +12740,12 @@
 "description": "The configuration for the identity data synchronization runs. This contains the refresh interval to sync the Access Control List information for the documents ingested by this connector."
 },
 "incrementalRefreshInterval": {
-"description": "Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days.",
+"description": "Optional. The refresh interval specifically for incremental data syncs. If unset, incremental syncs will use the default from env, set to 3hrs. The minimum is 30 minutes and maximum is 7 days. Applicable to only 3P connectors.",
 "format": "google-duration",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "incrementalSyncDisabled": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates whether incremental syncs are paused for this connector. This is independent of auto_run_disabled. Applicable to only 3P connectors.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "kmsKeyName": {
@@ -13908,7 +14016,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "querySetSpec": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
-"description": "Required. The specification of the query set."
+"description": "Optional. The specification of the query set."
 },
 "searchRequest": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaSearchRequest",
@@ -13922,7 +14030,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
 "properties": {
 "sampleQuerySet": {
-"description": "Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -16141,6 +16249,13 @@
 "query": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1alphaQuery",
 "description": "The user query."
+},
+"queryConfigs": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix \"google.\" will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with \"google..\". 3P services can use anything not starting with \"google.\"",
+"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -18423,6 +18538,33 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to the progress of the UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses operation. This will be returned by the google.longrunning.Operation.metadata field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Operation create time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"failureCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses that failed to be updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"successCount": {
+"description": "Count of user licenses successfully updated.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Operation last update time. If the operation is done, this is also the finish time.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest": {
 "description": "Request message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesRequest",
@@ -18431,10 +18573,6 @@
 "description": "Optional. If true, if user licenses removed associated license config, the user license will be deleted. By default which is false, the user license will be updated to unassigned state.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
-"gcsSource": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaGcsSource",
-"description": "Cloud Storage location for the input content."
-},
 "inlineSource": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesRequestInlineSource",
 "description": "The inline source for the input content for document embeddings."
@@ -18461,6 +18599,27 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for UserLicenseService.BatchUpdateUserLicenses method.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchUpdateUserLicensesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"errorSamples": {
+"description": "A sample of errors encountered while processing the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"userLicenses": {
+"description": "UserLicenses successfully updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaUserLicense"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchVerifyTargetSitesRequest": {
 "description": "Request message for SiteSearchEngineService.BatchVerifyTargetSites method.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaBatchVerifyTargetSitesRequest",
@@ -19009,7 +19168,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmekConfig}`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CmekConfig of the form `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfig` or `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/cmekConfigs/{cmek_config}`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "notebooklmState": {
@@ -19046,7 +19205,8 @@
 "DELETING",
 "DELETE_FAILED",
 "UNUSABLE",
-"ACTIVE_ROTATING"
+"ACTIVE_ROTATING",
+"DELETED"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "The CmekConfig state is unknown.",
@@ -19056,7 +19216,8 @@
 "The CmekConfig is deleting.",
 "The CmekConfig deletion process failed.",
 "The CmekConfig is not usable, most likely due to some internal issue.",
-"The KMS key version is being rotated."
+"The KMS key version is being rotated.",
+"The KMS key is soft deleted. Some cleanup policy will eventually be applied."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -20894,7 +21055,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "querySetSpec": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
-"description": "Required. The specification of the query set."
+"description": "Optional. The specification of the query set."
 },
 "searchRequest": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaSearchRequest",
@@ -20908,7 +21069,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaEvaluationEvaluationSpecQuerySetSpec",
 "properties": {
 "sampleQuerySet": {
-"description": "Required. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
+"description": "Optional. The full resource name of the SampleQuerySet used for the evaluation, in the format of `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/sampleQuerySets/{sampleQuerySet}`.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -21338,7 +21499,7 @@
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Defaults to `INCREMENTAL`.",
 "Inserts new documents or updates existing documents.",
-"Calculates diff and replaces the entire document dataset. Existing documents may be deleted if they are not present in the source location."
+"Calculates diff and replaces the entire document dataset. Existing documents may be deleted if they are not present in the source location. When using this mode, there won't be any downtime on the dataset targeted. Any document that should remain unchanged or that should be updated will continue serving while the operation is running."
 ],
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -24936,6 +25097,13 @@
 "query": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudDiscoveryengineV1betaQuery",
 "description": "The user query."
+},
+"queryConfigs": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Represents metadata related to the query config, for example LLM model and version used, model parameters (temperature, grounding parameters, etc.). We don't want to import directly the [AnswerGenerationSpec] structure as this will serve a more general purpose and a wider set of customers. This information is used in particular when rendering alternative answers to the same prompt, providing visual information about how each answer was generated. The prefix \"google.\" will be reserved for the key, and 1P services (Answer, Assistant, etc.) should always store their information with \"google..\". 3P services can use anything not starting with \"google.\"",
+"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"

From d51ac7b399edca0eb28b21616d5c02d0a16ff89f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 14/32] feat(drivelabels): update the api

#### drivelabels:v2

The following keys were added:
- resources.labels.methods.updateLabelEnabledAppSettings (Total Keys: 11)
- schemas.GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2Label.properties.enabledAppSettings.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettings (Total Keys: 7)
- schemas.GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2UpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest (Total Keys: 6)

#### drivelabels:v2beta

The following keys were added:
- resources.labels.methods.updateLabelEnabledAppSettings (Total Keys: 11)
- schemas.GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabel.properties.enabledAppSettings.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettings (Total Keys: 7)
- schemas.GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaUpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest (Total Keys: 6)
---
 docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2.labels.html           | 353 ++++++++++++++++++
 docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2beta.labels.html       | 353 ++++++++++++++++++
 .../documents/drivelabels.v2.json             |  97 ++++-
 .../documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json         |  97 ++++-
 4 files changed, 898 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2.labels.html b/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2.labels.html
index 7f1565c689..0e4f16b037 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2.labels.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2.labels.html
@@ -122,6 +122,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   updateLabelCopyMode(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Updates a Label's `CopyMode`. Changes to this policy are not revisioned, do not require publishing, and take effect immediately.

+

+  updateLabelEnabledAppSettings(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Updates a Label's EabledAppSettings. Enabling a Label in a Workspace Application allows it to be used in that application. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately.

 

   updatePermissions(parent, body=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Updates a Label's permissions. If a permission for the indicated principal doesn't exist, a new Label Permission is created, otherwise the existing permission is updated. Permissions affect the Label resource as a whole, are not revisioned, and do not require publishing.

@@ -163,6 +166,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -422,6 +432,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -1255,6 +1272,13 @@ 
Method Details

       "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
       "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
     },
+    "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+      "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+        { # An App where the Label can be used.
+          "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
     "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
       { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
         "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -1536,6 +1560,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -1811,6 +1842,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2081,6 +2119,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2363,6 +2408,13 @@ 
Method Details

         "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
         "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
       },
+      "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+        "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+          { # An App where the Label can be used.
+            "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
       "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
         { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
           "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2655,6 +2707,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2929,6 +2988,300 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
+    { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
+      "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
+        "canRead": True or False, # Whether the user can read related applied metadata on items.
+        "canSearch": True or False, # Whether the user can search for Drive items referencing this field.
+        "canWrite": True or False, # Whether the user can set this field on Drive items.
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this field was created.
+      "creator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this field.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "dateOptions": { # Options for the date field type. # Date field options.
+        "dateFormat": "A String", # Output only. ICU date format.
+        "dateFormatType": "A String", # Localized date formatting option. Field values are rendered in this format according to their locale.
+        "maxValue": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Output only. Maximum valid value (year, month, day).
+          "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+          "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+          "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+        },
+        "minValue": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Output only. Minimum valid value (year, month, day).
+          "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+          "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+          "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+        },
+      },
+      "disableTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this field was disabled. This value has no meaning when the field is not disabled.
+      "disabler": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who disabled this field. This value has no meaning when the field is not disabled.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "displayHints": { # UI display hints for rendering a field. # Output only. UI display hints for rendering a field.
+        "disabled": True or False, # Whether the field should be shown in the UI as disabled.
+        "hiddenInSearch": True or False, # This field should be hidden in the search menu when searching for Drive items.
+        "required": True or False, # Whether the field should be shown as required in the UI.
+        "shownInApply": True or False, # This field should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
+      },
+      "id": "A String", # Output only. The key of a field, unique within a label or library. This value is autogenerated. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9])+`
+      "integerOptions": { # Options for the Integer field type. # Integer field options.
+        "maxValue": "A String", # Output only. The maximum valid value for the integer field.
+        "minValue": "A String", # Output only. The minimum valid value for the integer field.
+      },
+      "lifecycle": { # The lifecycle state of an object, such as label, field, or choice. The lifecycle enforces the following transitions: * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` (starting state) * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> `PUBLISHED` * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> (Deleted) * `PUBLISHED` -> `DISABLED` * `DISABLED` -> `PUBLISHED` * `DISABLED` -> (Deleted) The published and disabled states have some distinct characteristics: * Published—Some kinds of changes might be made to an object in this state, in which case `has_unpublished_changes` will be true. Also, some kinds of changes are not permitted. Generally, any change that would invalidate or cause new restrictions on existing metadata related to the label are rejected. * Disabled—When disabled, the configured `DisabledPolicy` takes effect. # Output only. The lifecycle of this field.
+        "disabledPolicy": { # The policy that governs how to treat a disabled label, field, or selection choice in different contexts. # The policy that governs how to show a disabled label, field, or selection choice.
+          "hideInSearch": True or False, # Whether to hide this disabled object in the search menu for Drive items. * When `false`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled but it appears in the search results when searching for Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally hidden in the UI when searching for Drive items.
+          "showInApply": True or False, # Whether to show this disabled object in the apply menu on Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled and is unselectable. * When `false`, the object is generally hidden in the UI.
+        },
+        "hasUnpublishedChanges": True or False, # Output only. Whether the object associated with this lifecycle has unpublished changes.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the object associated with this lifecycle.
+      },
+      "lockStatus": { # Contains information about whether a label component should be considered locked. # Output only. The LockStatus of this field.
+        "locked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this label component is the (direct) target of a LabelLock. A label component can be implicitly locked even if it's not the direct target of a LabelLock, in which case this field is set to false.
+      },
+      "properties": { # The basic properties of the field. # The basic properties of the field.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display text to show in the UI identifying this field.
+        "insertBeforeField": "A String", # Input only. Insert or move this field before the indicated field. If empty, the field is placed at the end of the list.
+        "required": True or False, # Whether the field should be marked as required.
+      },
+      "publisher": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who published this field. This value has no meaning when the field is not published.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "queryKey": "A String", # Output only. The key to use when constructing Drive search queries to find files based on values defined for this field on files. For example, "`{query_key}` > 2001-01-01".
+      "schemaCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field when editing the field. # Output only. The capabilities this user has when editing this field.
+        "canDelete": True or False, # Whether the user can delete this field. The user must have permission and the field must be deprecated.
+        "canDisable": True or False, # Whether the user can disable this field. The user must have permission and this field must not already be disabled.
+        "canEnable": True or False, # Whether the user can enable this field. The user must have permission and this field must be disabled.
+        "canUpdate": True or False, # Whether the user can change this field.
+      },
+      "selectionOptions": { # Options for the selection field type. # Selection field options.
+        "choices": [ # The options available for this selection field. The list order is consistent, and modified with `insert_before_choice`.
+          { # Selection field choice.
+            "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this choice on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities related to this choice on applied metadata.
+              "canRead": True or False, # Whether the user can read related applied metadata on items.
+              "canSearch": True or False, # Whether the user can use this choice in search queries.
+              "canSelect": True or False, # Whether the user can select this choice on an item.
+            },
+            "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was created.
+            "creator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this choice.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+            "disableTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was disabled. This value has no meaning when the choice is not disabled.
+            "disabler": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who disabled this choice. This value has no meaning when the option is not disabled.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+            "displayHints": { # UI display hints for rendering an option. # Output only. UI display hints for rendering a choice.
+              "badgeColors": { # The color derived from BadgeConfig and changed to the closest recommended supported color. # The colors to use for the badge. Changed to Google Material colors based on the chosen `properties.badge_config.color`.
+                "backgroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge background that pairs with the foreground.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "foregroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge foreground that pairs with the background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "soloColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Color that can be used for text without a background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+              },
+              "badgePriority": "A String", # The priority of this badge. Used to compare and sort between multiple badges. A lower number means the badge should be shown first. When a badging configuration is not present, this will be 0. Otherwise, this will be set to `BadgeConfig.priority_override` or the default heuristic which prefers creation date of the label, and field and option priority.
+              "darkBadgeColors": { # The color derived from BadgeConfig and changed to the closest recommended supported color. # The dark-mode color to use for the badge. Changed to Google Material colors based on the chosen `properties.badge_config.color`.
+                "backgroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge background that pairs with the foreground.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "foregroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge foreground that pairs with the background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "soloColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Color that can be used for text without a background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+              },
+              "disabled": True or False, # Whether the option should be shown in the UI as disabled.
+              "hiddenInSearch": True or False, # This option should be hidden in the search menu when searching for Drive items.
+              "shownInApply": True or False, # This option should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
+            },
+            "id": "A String", # The unique value of the choice. This ID is autogenerated. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9_])+`.
+            "lifecycle": { # The lifecycle state of an object, such as label, field, or choice. The lifecycle enforces the following transitions: * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` (starting state) * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> `PUBLISHED` * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> (Deleted) * `PUBLISHED` -> `DISABLED` * `DISABLED` -> `PUBLISHED` * `DISABLED` -> (Deleted) The published and disabled states have some distinct characteristics: * Published—Some kinds of changes might be made to an object in this state, in which case `has_unpublished_changes` will be true. Also, some kinds of changes are not permitted. Generally, any change that would invalidate or cause new restrictions on existing metadata related to the label are rejected. * Disabled—When disabled, the configured `DisabledPolicy` takes effect. # Output only. Lifecycle of the choice.
+              "disabledPolicy": { # The policy that governs how to treat a disabled label, field, or selection choice in different contexts. # The policy that governs how to show a disabled label, field, or selection choice.
+                "hideInSearch": True or False, # Whether to hide this disabled object in the search menu for Drive items. * When `false`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled but it appears in the search results when searching for Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally hidden in the UI when searching for Drive items.
+                "showInApply": True or False, # Whether to show this disabled object in the apply menu on Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled and is unselectable. * When `false`, the object is generally hidden in the UI.
+              },
+              "hasUnpublishedChanges": True or False, # Output only. Whether the object associated with this lifecycle has unpublished changes.
+              "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the object associated with this lifecycle.
+            },
+            "lockStatus": { # Contains information about whether a label component should be considered locked. # Output only. The LockStatus of this choice.
+              "locked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this label component is the (direct) target of a LabelLock. A label component can be implicitly locked even if it's not the direct target of a LabelLock, in which case this field is set to false.
+            },
+            "properties": { # Basic properties of the choice. # Basic properties of the choice.
+              "badgeConfig": { # Badge status of the label. # The badge configuration for this choice. When set, the label that owns this choice is considered a "badged label".
+                "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The color of the badge. When not specified, no badge is rendered. The background, foreground, and solo (light and dark mode) colors set here are changed in the Drive UI into the closest recommended supported color.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "priorityOverride": "A String", # Override the default global priority of this badge. When set to 0, the default priority heuristic is used.
+              },
+              "description": "A String", # The description of this label.
+              "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display text to show in the UI identifying this field.
+              "insertBeforeChoice": "A String", # Input only. Insert or move this choice before the indicated choice. If empty, the choice is placed at the end of the list.
+            },
+            "publishTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was published. This value has no meaning when the choice is not published.
+            "publisher": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who published this choice. This value has no meaning when the choice is not published.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+            "schemaCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this choice when editing the choice. # Output only. The capabilities related to this option when editing the option.
+              "canDelete": True or False, # Whether the user can delete this choice.
+              "canDisable": True or False, # Whether the user can disable this choice.
+              "canEnable": True or False, # Whether the user can enable this choice.
+              "canUpdate": True or False, # Whether the user can update this choice.
+            },
+            "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was updated last.
+            "updater": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who updated this choice last.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "listOptions": { # Options for a multi-valued variant of an associated field type. # When specified, indicates this field supports a list of values. Once the field is published, this cannot be changed.
+          "maxEntries": 42, # Maximum number of entries permitted.
+        },
+      },
+      "textOptions": { # Options for the Text field type. # Text field options.
+        "maxLength": 42, # Output only. The maximum valid length of values for the text field.
+        "minLength": 42, # Output only. The minimum valid length of values for the text field.
+      },
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this field was updated.
+      "updater": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who modified this field.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "userOptions": { # Options for the user field type. # User field options.
+        "listOptions": { # Options for a multi-valued variant of an associated field type. # When specified, indicates that this field supports a list of values. Once the field is published, this cannot be changed.
+          "maxEntries": 42, # Maximum number of entries permitted.
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "id": "A String", # Output only. Globally unique identifier of this label. ID makes up part of the label `name`, but unlike `name`, ID is consistent between revisions. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9])+`
+  "labelType": "A String", # Required. The type of label.
+  "learnMoreUri": "A String", # Custom URL to present to users to allow them to learn more about this label and how it should be used.
+  "lifecycle": { # The lifecycle state of an object, such as label, field, or choice. The lifecycle enforces the following transitions: * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` (starting state) * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> `PUBLISHED` * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> (Deleted) * `PUBLISHED` -> `DISABLED` * `DISABLED` -> `PUBLISHED` * `DISABLED` -> (Deleted) The published and disabled states have some distinct characteristics: * Published—Some kinds of changes might be made to an object in this state, in which case `has_unpublished_changes` will be true. Also, some kinds of changes are not permitted. Generally, any change that would invalidate or cause new restrictions on existing metadata related to the label are rejected. * Disabled—When disabled, the configured `DisabledPolicy` takes effect. # Output only. The lifecycle state of the label including whether it's published, deprecated, and has draft changes.
+    "disabledPolicy": { # The policy that governs how to treat a disabled label, field, or selection choice in different contexts. # The policy that governs how to show a disabled label, field, or selection choice.
+      "hideInSearch": True or False, # Whether to hide this disabled object in the search menu for Drive items. * When `false`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled but it appears in the search results when searching for Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally hidden in the UI when searching for Drive items.
+      "showInApply": True or False, # Whether to show this disabled object in the apply menu on Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled and is unselectable. * When `false`, the object is generally hidden in the UI.
+    },
+    "hasUnpublishedChanges": True or False, # Output only. Whether the object associated with this lifecycle has unpublished changes.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the object associated with this lifecycle.
+  },
+  "lockStatus": { # Contains information about whether a label component should be considered locked. # Output only. The LockStatus of this label.
+    "locked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this label component is the (direct) target of a LabelLock. A label component can be implicitly locked even if it's not the direct target of a LabelLock, in which case this field is set to false.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Resource name of the label. Will be in the form of either: `labels/{id}` or `labels/{id}@{revision_id}` depending on the request. See `id` and `revision_id` below.
+  "properties": { # Basic properties of the label. # Required. The basic properties of the label.
+    "description": "A String", # The description of the label.
+    "title": "A String", # Required. Title of the label.
+  },
+  "publishTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label was published. This value has no meaning when the label is not published.
+  "publisher": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who published this label. This value has no meaning when the label is not published.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "revisionCreateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label revision was created.
+  "revisionCreator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this label revision.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision ID of the label. Revision ID might be part of the label `name` depending on the request issued. A new revision is created whenever revisioned properties of a label are changed. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9])+`
+  "schemaCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this label when editing the label. # Output only. The capabilities the user has on this label.
+    "canDelete": True or False, # Whether the user can delete this label. The user must have permission and the label must be disabled.
+    "canDisable": True or False, # Whether the user can disable this label. The user must have permission and this label must not already be disabled.
+    "canEnable": True or False, # Whether the user can enable this label. The user must have permission and this label must be disabled.
+    "canUpdate": True or False, # Whether the user can change this label.
+  },
+}

+
+
+

+    updateLabelEnabledAppSettings(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Updates a Label's EabledAppSettings. Enabling a Label in a Workspace Application allows it to be used in that application. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the Label to update. The resource name of the Label to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request to update the `EnabledAppSettings` of the given Label. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately. \
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Required. The new `EnabledAppSettings` value for the Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. The BCP-47 language code to use for evaluating localized field labels. When not specified, values in the default configured language will be used.
+  "useAdminAccess": True or False, # Optional. Set to `true` in order to use the user's admin credentials. The server will verify the user is an admin for the Label before allowing access.
+  "view": "A String", # Optional. When specified, only certain fields belonging to the indicated view will be returned.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A label defines a taxonomy that can be applied to Drive items in order to organize and search across items. Labels can be simple strings, or can contain fields that describe additional metadata that can be further used to organize and search Drive items.
+  "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities a user has on this label's applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities related to this label on applied metadata.
+    "canApply": True or False, # Whether the user can apply this label to items.
+    "canRead": True or False, # Whether the user can read applied metadata related to this label.
+    "canRemove": True or False, # Whether the user can remove this label from items.
+  },
+  "appliedLabelPolicy": { # Behavior of this label when it's applied to Drive items. # Output only. Behavior of this label when it's applied to Drive items.
+    "copyMode": "A String", # Indicates how the applied label and field values should be copied when a Drive item is copied.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label was created.
+  "creator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this label.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "customer": "A String", # Output only. The customer this label belongs to. For example: "customers/123abc789."
+  "disableTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label was disabled. This value has no meaning when the label is not disabled.
+  "disabler": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who disabled this label. This value has no meaning when the label is not disabled.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "displayHints": { # UI display hints for rendering the label. # Output only. UI display hints for rendering the label.
+    "disabled": True or False, # Whether the label should be shown in the UI as disabled.
+    "hiddenInSearch": True or False, # This label should be hidden in the search menu when searching for Drive items.
+    "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
+    "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
+  },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2beta.labels.html b/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2beta.labels.html
index f81566582c..f61a77945c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2beta.labels.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/drivelabels_v2beta.labels.html
@@ -122,6 +122,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   updateLabelCopyMode(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Updates a Label's `CopyMode`. Changes to this policy are not revisioned, do not require publishing, and take effect immediately.

+

+  updateLabelEnabledAppSettings(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Updates a Label's EabledAppSettings. Enabling a Label in a Workspace Application allows it to be used in that application. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately.

 

   updatePermissions(parent, body=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Updates a Label's permissions. If a permission for the indicated principal doesn't exist, a new Label Permission is created, otherwise the existing permission is updated. Permissions affect the Label resource as a whole, are not revisioned, and do not require publishing.

@@ -163,6 +166,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -422,6 +432,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -1255,6 +1272,13 @@ 
Method Details

       "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
       "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
     },
+    "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+      "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+        { # An App where the Label can be used.
+          "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
     "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
       { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
         "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -1536,6 +1560,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -1811,6 +1842,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2081,6 +2119,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2363,6 +2408,13 @@ 
Method Details

         "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
         "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
       },
+      "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+        "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+          { # An App where the Label can be used.
+            "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
       "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
         { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
           "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2655,6 +2707,13 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
@@ -2929,6 +2988,300 @@ 
Method Details

     "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
     "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
   },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
+    { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
+      "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
+        "canRead": True or False, # Whether the user can read related applied metadata on items.
+        "canSearch": True or False, # Whether the user can search for Drive items referencing this field.
+        "canWrite": True or False, # Whether the user can set this field on Drive items.
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this field was created.
+      "creator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this field.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "dateOptions": { # Options for the date field type. # Date field options.
+        "dateFormat": "A String", # Output only. ICU date format.
+        "dateFormatType": "A String", # Localized date formatting option. Field values are rendered in this format according to their locale.
+        "maxValue": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Output only. Maximum valid value (year, month, day).
+          "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+          "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+          "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+        },
+        "minValue": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Output only. Minimum valid value (year, month, day).
+          "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+          "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+          "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+        },
+      },
+      "disableTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this field was disabled. This value has no meaning when the field is not disabled.
+      "disabler": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who disabled this field. This value has no meaning when the field is not disabled.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "displayHints": { # UI display hints for rendering a field. # Output only. UI display hints for rendering a field.
+        "disabled": True or False, # Whether the field should be shown in the UI as disabled.
+        "hiddenInSearch": True or False, # This field should be hidden in the search menu when searching for Drive items.
+        "required": True or False, # Whether the field should be shown as required in the UI.
+        "shownInApply": True or False, # This field should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
+      },
+      "id": "A String", # Output only. The key of a field, unique within a label or library. This value is autogenerated. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9])+`
+      "integerOptions": { # Options for the Integer field type. # Integer field options.
+        "maxValue": "A String", # Output only. The maximum valid value for the integer field.
+        "minValue": "A String", # Output only. The minimum valid value for the integer field.
+      },
+      "lifecycle": { # The lifecycle state of an object, such as label, field, or choice. The lifecycle enforces the following transitions: * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` (starting state) * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> `PUBLISHED` * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> (Deleted) * `PUBLISHED` -> `DISABLED` * `DISABLED` -> `PUBLISHED` * `DISABLED` -> (Deleted) The published and disabled states have some distinct characteristics: * Published—Some kinds of changes might be made to an object in this state, in which case `has_unpublished_changes` will be true. Also, some kinds of changes are not permitted. Generally, any change that would invalidate or cause new restrictions on existing metadata related to the label are rejected. * Disabled—When disabled, the configured `DisabledPolicy` takes effect. # Output only. The lifecycle of this field.
+        "disabledPolicy": { # The policy that governs how to treat a disabled label, field, or selection choice in different contexts. # The policy that governs how to show a disabled label, field, or selection choice.
+          "hideInSearch": True or False, # Whether to hide this disabled object in the search menu for Drive items. * When `false`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled but it appears in the search results when searching for Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally hidden in the UI when searching for Drive items.
+          "showInApply": True or False, # Whether to show this disabled object in the apply menu on Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled and is unselectable. * When `false`, the object is generally hidden in the UI.
+        },
+        "hasUnpublishedChanges": True or False, # Output only. Whether the object associated with this lifecycle has unpublished changes.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the object associated with this lifecycle.
+      },
+      "lockStatus": { # Contains information about whether a label component should be considered locked. # Output only. The LockStatus of this field.
+        "locked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this label component is the (direct) target of a LabelLock. A label component can be implicitly locked even if it's not the direct target of a LabelLock, in which case this field is set to false.
+      },
+      "properties": { # The basic properties of the field. # The basic properties of the field.
+        "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display text to show in the UI identifying this field.
+        "insertBeforeField": "A String", # Input only. Insert or move this field before the indicated field. If empty, the field is placed at the end of the list.
+        "required": True or False, # Whether the field should be marked as required.
+      },
+      "publisher": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who published this field. This value has no meaning when the field is not published.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "queryKey": "A String", # Output only. The key to use when constructing Drive search queries to find files based on values defined for this field on files. For example, "`{query_key}` > 2001-01-01".
+      "schemaCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field when editing the field. # Output only. The capabilities this user has when editing this field.
+        "canDelete": True or False, # Whether the user can delete this field. The user must have permission and the field must be deprecated.
+        "canDisable": True or False, # Whether the user can disable this field. The user must have permission and this field must not already be disabled.
+        "canEnable": True or False, # Whether the user can enable this field. The user must have permission and this field must be disabled.
+        "canUpdate": True or False, # Whether the user can change this field.
+      },
+      "selectionOptions": { # Options for the selection field type. # Selection field options.
+        "choices": [ # The options available for this selection field. The list order is consistent, and modified with `insert_before_choice`.
+          { # Selection field choice.
+            "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this choice on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities related to this choice on applied metadata.
+              "canRead": True or False, # Whether the user can read related applied metadata on items.
+              "canSearch": True or False, # Whether the user can use this choice in search queries.
+              "canSelect": True or False, # Whether the user can select this choice on an item.
+            },
+            "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was created.
+            "creator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this choice.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+            "disableTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was disabled. This value has no meaning when the choice is not disabled.
+            "disabler": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who disabled this choice. This value has no meaning when the option is not disabled.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+            "displayHints": { # UI display hints for rendering an option. # Output only. UI display hints for rendering a choice.
+              "badgeColors": { # The color derived from BadgeConfig and changed to the closest recommended supported color. # The colors to use for the badge. Changed to Google Material colors based on the chosen `properties.badge_config.color`.
+                "backgroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge background that pairs with the foreground.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "foregroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge foreground that pairs with the background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "soloColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Color that can be used for text without a background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+              },
+              "badgePriority": "A String", # The priority of this badge. Used to compare and sort between multiple badges. A lower number means the badge should be shown first. When a badging configuration is not present, this will be 0. Otherwise, this will be set to `BadgeConfig.priority_override` or the default heuristic which prefers creation date of the label, and field and option priority.
+              "darkBadgeColors": { # The color derived from BadgeConfig and changed to the closest recommended supported color. # The dark-mode color to use for the badge. Changed to Google Material colors based on the chosen `properties.badge_config.color`.
+                "backgroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge background that pairs with the foreground.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "foregroundColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Badge foreground that pairs with the background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "soloColor": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # Output only. Color that can be used for text without a background.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+              },
+              "disabled": True or False, # Whether the option should be shown in the UI as disabled.
+              "hiddenInSearch": True or False, # This option should be hidden in the search menu when searching for Drive items.
+              "shownInApply": True or False, # This option should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
+            },
+            "id": "A String", # The unique value of the choice. This ID is autogenerated. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9_])+`.
+            "lifecycle": { # The lifecycle state of an object, such as label, field, or choice. The lifecycle enforces the following transitions: * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` (starting state) * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> `PUBLISHED` * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> (Deleted) * `PUBLISHED` -> `DISABLED` * `DISABLED` -> `PUBLISHED` * `DISABLED` -> (Deleted) The published and disabled states have some distinct characteristics: * Published—Some kinds of changes might be made to an object in this state, in which case `has_unpublished_changes` will be true. Also, some kinds of changes are not permitted. Generally, any change that would invalidate or cause new restrictions on existing metadata related to the label are rejected. * Disabled—When disabled, the configured `DisabledPolicy` takes effect. # Output only. Lifecycle of the choice.
+              "disabledPolicy": { # The policy that governs how to treat a disabled label, field, or selection choice in different contexts. # The policy that governs how to show a disabled label, field, or selection choice.
+                "hideInSearch": True or False, # Whether to hide this disabled object in the search menu for Drive items. * When `false`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled but it appears in the search results when searching for Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally hidden in the UI when searching for Drive items.
+                "showInApply": True or False, # Whether to show this disabled object in the apply menu on Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled and is unselectable. * When `false`, the object is generally hidden in the UI.
+              },
+              "hasUnpublishedChanges": True or False, # Output only. Whether the object associated with this lifecycle has unpublished changes.
+              "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the object associated with this lifecycle.
+            },
+            "lockStatus": { # Contains information about whether a label component should be considered locked. # Output only. The LockStatus of this choice.
+              "locked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this label component is the (direct) target of a LabelLock. A label component can be implicitly locked even if it's not the direct target of a LabelLock, in which case this field is set to false.
+            },
+            "properties": { # Basic properties of the choice. # Basic properties of the choice.
+              "badgeConfig": { # Badge status of the label. # The badge configuration for this choice. When set, the label that owns this choice is considered a "badged label".
+                "color": { # Represents a color in the RGBA color space. This representation is designed for simplicity of conversion to and from color representations in various languages over compactness. For example, the fields of this representation can be trivially provided to the constructor of `java.awt.Color` in Java; it can also be trivially provided to UIColor's `+colorWithRed:green:blue:alpha` method in iOS; and, with just a little work, it can be easily formatted into a CSS `rgba()` string in JavaScript. This reference page doesn't have information about the absolute color space that should be used to interpret the RGB value—for example, sRGB, Adobe RGB, DCI-P3, and BT.2020. By default, applications should assume the sRGB color space. When color equality needs to be decided, implementations, unless documented otherwise, treat two colors as equal if all their red, green, blue, and alpha values each differ by at most `1e-5`. Example (Java): import com.google.type.Color; // ... public static java.awt.Color fromProto(Color protocolor) { float alpha = protocolor.hasAlpha() ? protocolor.getAlpha().getValue() : 1.0; return new java.awt.Color( protocolor.getRed(), protocolor.getGreen(), protocolor.getBlue(), alpha); } public static Color toProto(java.awt.Color color) { float red = (float) color.getRed(); float green = (float) color.getGreen(); float blue = (float) color.getBlue(); float denominator = 255.0; Color.Builder resultBuilder = Color .newBuilder() .setRed(red / denominator) .setGreen(green / denominator) .setBlue(blue / denominator); int alpha = color.getAlpha(); if (alpha != 255) { result.setAlpha( FloatValue .newBuilder() .setValue(((float) alpha) / denominator) .build()); } return resultBuilder.build(); } // ... Example (iOS / Obj-C): // ... static UIColor* fromProto(Color* protocolor) { float red = [protocolor red]; float green = [protocolor green]; float blue = [protocolor blue]; FloatValue* alpha_wrapper = [protocolor alpha]; float alpha = 1.0; if (alpha_wrapper != nil) { alpha = [alpha_wrapper value]; } return [UIColor colorWithRed:red green:green blue:blue alpha:alpha]; } static Color* toProto(UIColor* color) { CGFloat red, green, blue, alpha; if (![color getRed:&red green:&green blue:&blue alpha:&alpha]) { return nil; } Color* result = [[Color alloc] init]; [result setRed:red]; [result setGreen:green]; [result setBlue:blue]; if (alpha <= 0.9999) { [result setAlpha:floatWrapperWithValue(alpha)]; } [result autorelease]; return result; } // ... Example (JavaScript): // ... var protoToCssColor = function(rgb_color) { var redFrac = rgb_color.red || 0.0; var greenFrac = rgb_color.green || 0.0; var blueFrac = rgb_color.blue || 0.0; var red = Math.floor(redFrac * 255); var green = Math.floor(greenFrac * 255); var blue = Math.floor(blueFrac * 255); if (!('alpha' in rgb_color)) { return rgbToCssColor(red, green, blue); } var alphaFrac = rgb_color.alpha.value || 0.0; var rgbParams = [red, green, blue].join(','); return ['rgba(', rgbParams, ',', alphaFrac, ')'].join(''); }; var rgbToCssColor = function(red, green, blue) { var rgbNumber = new Number((red << 16) | (green << 8) | blue); var hexString = rgbNumber.toString(16); var missingZeros = 6 - hexString.length; var resultBuilder = ['#']; for (var i = 0; i < missingZeros; i++) { resultBuilder.push('0'); } resultBuilder.push(hexString); return resultBuilder.join(''); }; // ... # The color of the badge. When not specified, no badge is rendered. The background, foreground, and solo (light and dark mode) colors set here are changed in the Drive UI into the closest recommended supported color.
+                  "alpha": 3.14, # The fraction of this color that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: `pixel color = alpha * (this color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color)` This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color. This uses a wrapper message rather than a simple float scalar so that it is possible to distinguish between a default value and the value being unset. If omitted, this color object is rendered as a solid color (as if the alpha value had been explicitly given a value of 1.0).
+                  "blue": 3.14, # The amount of blue in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "green": 3.14, # The amount of green in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                  "red": 3.14, # The amount of red in the color as a value in the interval [0, 1].
+                },
+                "priorityOverride": "A String", # Override the default global priority of this badge. When set to 0, the default priority heuristic is used.
+              },
+              "description": "A String", # The description of this label.
+              "displayName": "A String", # Required. The display text to show in the UI identifying this field.
+              "insertBeforeChoice": "A String", # Input only. Insert or move this choice before the indicated choice. If empty, the choice is placed at the end of the list.
+            },
+            "publishTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was published. This value has no meaning when the choice is not published.
+            "publisher": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who published this choice. This value has no meaning when the choice is not published.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+            "schemaCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this choice when editing the choice. # Output only. The capabilities related to this option when editing the option.
+              "canDelete": True or False, # Whether the user can delete this choice.
+              "canDisable": True or False, # Whether the user can disable this choice.
+              "canEnable": True or False, # Whether the user can enable this choice.
+              "canUpdate": True or False, # Whether the user can update this choice.
+            },
+            "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this choice was updated last.
+            "updater": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who updated this choice last.
+              "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        "listOptions": { # Options for a multi-valued variant of an associated field type. # When specified, indicates this field supports a list of values. Once the field is published, this cannot be changed.
+          "maxEntries": 42, # Maximum number of entries permitted.
+        },
+      },
+      "textOptions": { # Options for the Text field type. # Text field options.
+        "maxLength": 42, # Output only. The maximum valid length of values for the text field.
+        "minLength": 42, # Output only. The minimum valid length of values for the text field.
+      },
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this field was updated.
+      "updater": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who modified this field.
+        "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+      },
+      "userOptions": { # Options for the user field type. # User field options.
+        "listOptions": { # Options for a multi-valued variant of an associated field type. # When specified, indicates that this field supports a list of values. Once the field is published, this cannot be changed.
+          "maxEntries": 42, # Maximum number of entries permitted.
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "id": "A String", # Output only. Globally unique identifier of this label. ID makes up part of the label `name`, but unlike `name`, ID is consistent between revisions. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9])+`
+  "labelType": "A String", # Required. The type of label.
+  "learnMoreUri": "A String", # Custom URL to present to users to allow them to learn more about this label and how it should be used.
+  "lifecycle": { # The lifecycle state of an object, such as label, field, or choice. The lifecycle enforces the following transitions: * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` (starting state) * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> `PUBLISHED` * `UNPUBLISHED_DRAFT` -> (Deleted) * `PUBLISHED` -> `DISABLED` * `DISABLED` -> `PUBLISHED` * `DISABLED` -> (Deleted) The published and disabled states have some distinct characteristics: * Published—Some kinds of changes might be made to an object in this state, in which case `has_unpublished_changes` will be true. Also, some kinds of changes are not permitted. Generally, any change that would invalidate or cause new restrictions on existing metadata related to the label are rejected. * Disabled—When disabled, the configured `DisabledPolicy` takes effect. # Output only. The lifecycle state of the label including whether it's published, deprecated, and has draft changes.
+    "disabledPolicy": { # The policy that governs how to treat a disabled label, field, or selection choice in different contexts. # The policy that governs how to show a disabled label, field, or selection choice.
+      "hideInSearch": True or False, # Whether to hide this disabled object in the search menu for Drive items. * When `false`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled but it appears in the search results when searching for Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally hidden in the UI when searching for Drive items.
+      "showInApply": True or False, # Whether to show this disabled object in the apply menu on Drive items. * When `true`, the object is generally shown in the UI as disabled and is unselectable. * When `false`, the object is generally hidden in the UI.
+    },
+    "hasUnpublishedChanges": True or False, # Output only. Whether the object associated with this lifecycle has unpublished changes.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the object associated with this lifecycle.
+  },
+  "lockStatus": { # Contains information about whether a label component should be considered locked. # Output only. The LockStatus of this label.
+    "locked": True or False, # Output only. Indicates whether this label component is the (direct) target of a LabelLock. A label component can be implicitly locked even if it's not the direct target of a LabelLock, in which case this field is set to false.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. Resource name of the label. Will be in the form of either: `labels/{id}` or `labels/{id}@{revision_id}` depending on the request. See `id` and `revision_id` below.
+  "properties": { # Basic properties of the label. # Required. The basic properties of the label.
+    "description": "A String", # The description of the label.
+    "title": "A String", # Required. Title of the label.
+  },
+  "publishTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label was published. This value has no meaning when the label is not published.
+  "publisher": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who published this label. This value has no meaning when the label is not published.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "revisionCreateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label revision was created.
+  "revisionCreator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this label revision.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "revisionId": "A String", # Output only. Revision ID of the label. Revision ID might be part of the label `name` depending on the request issued. A new revision is created whenever revisioned properties of a label are changed. Matches the regex: `([a-zA-Z0-9])+`
+  "schemaCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this label when editing the label. # Output only. The capabilities the user has on this label.
+    "canDelete": True or False, # Whether the user can delete this label. The user must have permission and the label must be disabled.
+    "canDisable": True or False, # Whether the user can disable this label. The user must have permission and this label must not already be disabled.
+    "canEnable": True or False, # Whether the user can enable this label. The user must have permission and this label must be disabled.
+    "canUpdate": True or False, # Whether the user can change this label.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    updateLabelEnabledAppSettings(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Updates a Label's EabledAppSettings. Enabling a Label in a Workspace Application allows it to be used in that application. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the Label to update. The resource name of the Label to update. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request to update the `EnabledAppSettings` of the given Label. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately. \
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Required. The new `EnabledAppSettings` value for the Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "languageCode": "A String", # Optional. The BCP-47 language code to use for evaluating localized field labels. When not specified, values in the default configured language will be used.
+  "useAdminAccess": True or False, # Optional. Set to `true` in order to use the user's admin credentials. The server will verify the user is an admin for the Label before allowing access.
+  "view": "A String", # Optional. When specified, only certain fields belonging to the indicated view will be returned.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A label defines a taxonomy that can be applied to Drive items in order to organize and search across items. Labels can be simple strings, or can contain fields that describe additional metadata that can be further used to organize and search Drive items.
+  "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities a user has on this label's applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities related to this label on applied metadata.
+    "canApply": True or False, # Whether the user can apply this label to items.
+    "canRead": True or False, # Whether the user can read applied metadata related to this label.
+    "canRemove": True or False, # Whether the user can remove this label from items.
+  },
+  "appliedLabelPolicy": { # Behavior of this label when it's applied to Drive items. # Output only. Behavior of this label when it's applied to Drive items.
+    "copyMode": "A String", # Indicates how the applied label and field values should be copied when a Drive item is copied.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label was created.
+  "creator": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who created this label.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "customer": "A String", # Output only. The customer this label belongs to. For example: "customers/123abc789."
+  "disableTime": "A String", # Output only. The time this label was disabled. This value has no meaning when the label is not disabled.
+  "disabler": { # Information about a user. # Output only. The user who disabled this label. This value has no meaning when the label is not disabled.
+    "person": "A String", # The identifier for this user that can be used with the People API to get more information. For example, people/12345678.
+  },
+  "displayHints": { # UI display hints for rendering the label. # Output only. UI display hints for rendering the label.
+    "disabled": True or False, # Whether the label should be shown in the UI as disabled.
+    "hiddenInSearch": True or False, # This label should be hidden in the search menu when searching for Drive items.
+    "priority": "A String", # Order to display label in a list.
+    "shownInApply": True or False, # This label should be shown in the apply menu when applying values to a Drive item.
+  },
+  "enabledAppSettings": { # Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used. # Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label.
+    "enabledApps": [ # Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.
+      { # An App where the Label can be used.
+        "app": "A String", # Optional. The name of the App.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "fields": [ # List of fields in descending priority order.
     { # Defines a field that has a display name, data type, and other configuration options. This field defines the kind of metadata that may be set on a Drive item.
       "appliedCapabilities": { # The capabilities related to this field on applied metadata. # Output only. The capabilities this user has on this field and its value when the label is applied on Drive items.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json
index fb3faed48a..941195bd7c 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2.json
@@ -460,6 +460,31 @@
 "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/drive.labels"
 ]
 },
+"updateLabelEnabledAppSettings": {
+"description": "Updates a Label's EabledAppSettings. Enabling a Label in a Workspace Application allows it to be used in that application. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately.",
+"flatPath": "v2/labels/{labelsId}:updateLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "drivelabels.labels.updateLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the Label to update. The resource name of the Label to update.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^labels/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v2/{+name}:updateLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2UpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2Label"
+}
+},
 "updatePermissions": {
 "description": "Updates a Label's permissions. If a permission for the indicated principal doesn't exist, a new Label Permission is created, otherwise the existing permission is updated. Permissions affect the Label resource as a whole, are not revisioned, and do not require publishing.",
 "flatPath": "v2/labels/{labelsId}/permissions",
@@ -1032,7 +1057,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250331",
+"revision": "20250602",
 "rootUrl": "https://drivelabels.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2BadgeColors": {
@@ -2280,6 +2305,10 @@
 "description": "Output only. UI display hints for rendering the label.",
 "readOnly": true
 },
+"enabledAppSettings": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"description": "Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label."
+},
 "fields": {
 "description": "List of fields in descending priority order.",
 "items": {
@@ -2432,6 +2461,41 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettings": {
+"description": "Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used.",
+"id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"properties": {
+"enabledApps": {
+"description": "Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettingsEnabledApp"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettingsEnabledApp": {
+"description": "An App where the Label can be used.",
+"id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettingsEnabledApp",
+"properties": {
+"app": {
+"description": "Optional. The name of the App.",
+"enum": [
+"APP_UNSPECIFIED",
+"DRIVE",
+"GMAIL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Unspecified",
+"Drive.",
+"Gmail"
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelLimits": {
 "description": "Label constraints governing the structure of a Label; such as, the maximum number of Fields allowed and maximum length of the label title.",
 "id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelLimits",
@@ -2878,6 +2942,37 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2UpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest": {
+"description": "Request to update the `EnabledAppSettings` of the given Label. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately. \\",
+"id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2UpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest",
+"properties": {
+"enabledAppSettings": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2LabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"description": "Required. The new `EnabledAppSettings` value for the Label."
+},
+"languageCode": {
+"description": "Optional. The BCP-47 language code to use for evaluating localized field labels. When not specified, values in the default configured language will be used.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"useAdminAccess": {
+"description": "Optional. Set to `true` in order to use the user's admin credentials. The server will verify the user is an admin for the Label before allowing access.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"view": {
+"description": "Optional. When specified, only certain fields belonging to the indicated view will be returned.",
+"enum": [
+"LABEL_VIEW_BASIC",
+"LABEL_VIEW_FULL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Implies the field mask: `name,id,revision_id,label_type,properties.*`",
+"All possible fields."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2UpdateLabelPermissionRequest": {
 "description": "Updates a Label Permission. Permissions affect the Label resource as a whole, are not revisioned, and do not require publishing.",
 "id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2UpdateLabelPermissionRequest",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json
index e159e63dd3..6d9de09981 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/drivelabels.v2beta.json
@@ -460,6 +460,31 @@
 "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/drive.labels"
 ]
 },
+"updateLabelEnabledAppSettings": {
+"description": "Updates a Label's EabledAppSettings. Enabling a Label in a Workspace Application allows it to be used in that application. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately.",
+"flatPath": "v2beta/labels/{labelsId}:updateLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "drivelabels.labels.updateLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the Label to update. The resource name of the Label to update.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^labels/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v2beta/{+name}:updateLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaUpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabel"
+}
+},
 "updatePermissions": {
 "description": "Updates a Label's permissions. If a permission for the indicated principal doesn't exist, a new Label Permission is created, otherwise the existing permission is updated. Permissions affect the Label resource as a whole, are not revisioned, and do not require publishing.",
 "flatPath": "v2beta/labels/{labelsId}/permissions",
@@ -1032,7 +1057,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250331",
+"revision": "20250602",
 "rootUrl": "https://drivelabels.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaBadgeColors": {
@@ -2280,6 +2305,10 @@
 "description": "Output only. UI display hints for rendering the label.",
 "readOnly": true
 },
+"enabledAppSettings": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"description": "Optional. The EnabledAppSettings for this Label."
+},
 "fields": {
 "description": "List of fields in descending priority order.",
 "items": {
@@ -2432,6 +2461,41 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettings": {
+"description": "Describes the Workspace apps in which the Label can be used.",
+"id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"properties": {
+"enabledApps": {
+"description": "Optional. The list of Apps where the Label can be used.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettingsEnabledApp"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettingsEnabledApp": {
+"description": "An App where the Label can be used.",
+"id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettingsEnabledApp",
+"properties": {
+"app": {
+"description": "Optional. The name of the App.",
+"enum": [
+"APP_UNSPECIFIED",
+"DRIVE",
+"GMAIL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Unspecified",
+"Drive.",
+"Gmail"
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelLimits": {
 "description": "Label constraints governing the structure of a Label; such as, the maximum number of Fields allowed and maximum length of the label title.",
 "id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelLimits",
@@ -2878,6 +2942,37 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaUpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest": {
+"description": "Request to update the `EnabledAppSettings` of the given Label. This change is not revisioned, does not require publishing, and takes effect immediately. \\",
+"id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaUpdateLabelEnabledAppSettingsRequest",
+"properties": {
+"enabledAppSettings": {
+"$ref": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaLabelEnabledAppSettings",
+"description": "Required. The new `EnabledAppSettings` value for the Label."
+},
+"languageCode": {
+"description": "Optional. The BCP-47 language code to use for evaluating localized field labels. When not specified, values in the default configured language will be used.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"useAdminAccess": {
+"description": "Optional. Set to `true` in order to use the user's admin credentials. The server will verify the user is an admin for the Label before allowing access.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"view": {
+"description": "Optional. When specified, only certain fields belonging to the indicated view will be returned.",
+"enum": [
+"LABEL_VIEW_BASIC",
+"LABEL_VIEW_FULL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Implies the field mask: `name,id,revision_id,label_type,properties.*`",
+"All possible fields."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaUpdateLabelPermissionRequest": {
 "description": "Updates a Label Permission. Permissions affect the Label resource as a whole, are not revisioned, and do not require publishing.",
 "id": "GoogleAppsDriveLabelsV2betaUpdateLabelPermissionRequest",

From 270fcf6658f3315c04556127fef4fb2df1fdf0ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 15/32] feat(firebasedataconnect): update the api

#### firebasedataconnect:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.GraphqlErrorExtensions.properties.code.type (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.GraphqlErrorExtensions.properties.debugDetails.type (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.GraphqlErrorExtensions.properties.resource.type (Total Keys: 1)

#### firebasedataconnect:v1beta

The following keys were added:
- schemas.GraphqlErrorExtensions.properties.code.type (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.GraphqlErrorExtensions.properties.debugDetails.type (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.GraphqlErrorExtensions.properties.resource.type (Total Keys: 1)
---
 ...rojects.locations.services.connectors.html |  6 +++
 ...onnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html |  6 +++
 ...rojects.locations.services.connectors.html |  6 +++
 ...ct_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html |  6 +++
 .../documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json     | 52 ++++++++++++++++++-
 .../documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json | 52 ++++++++++++++++++-
 6 files changed, 126 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html
index 86ee8aed3d..8c6672ba3a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.connectors.html
@@ -243,7 +243,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
@@ -291,7 +294,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html
index 102146badf..55e4089fea 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1.projects.locations.services.html
@@ -254,7 +254,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
@@ -311,7 +314,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html
index 11945f374c..c164f92c6c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.connectors.html
@@ -243,7 +243,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
@@ -291,7 +294,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html
index c6981786b9..5d0e28c5bc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebasedataconnect_v1beta.projects.locations.services.html
@@ -254,7 +254,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
@@ -311,7 +314,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "errors": [ # Errors of this response. If the data entry in the response is not present, the errors entry must be present. It conforms to https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors.
     { # GraphqlError conforms to the GraphQL error spec. https://spec.graphql.org/draft/#sec-Errors Firebase Data Connect API surfaces `GraphqlError` in various APIs: - Upon compile error, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector` return Code.Invalid_Argument with a list of `GraphqlError` in error details. - Upon query compile error, `ExecuteGraphql` and `ExecuteGraphqlRead` return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body. - Upon query execution error, `ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` all return Code.OK with a list of `GraphqlError` in response body.
       "extensions": { # GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`. # Additional error information.
+        "code": "A String", # Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.
+        "debugDetails": "A String", # More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.
         "file": "A String", # The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.
+        "resource": "A String", # Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).
       },
       "locations": [ # The source locations where the error occurred. Locations should help developers and toolings identify the source of error quickly. Included in admin endpoints (`ExecuteGraphql`, `ExecuteGraphqlRead`, `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`) to reference the provided GraphQL GQL document. Omitted in `ExecuteMutation` and `ExecuteQuery` since the caller shouldn't have access access the underlying GQL source.
         { # SourceLocation references a location in a GraphQL source.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json
index af6b90512a..fe2f8cfcda 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1.json
@@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250323",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://firebasedataconnect.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "CancelOperationRequest": {
@@ -1303,9 +1303,59 @@
 "description": "GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`.",
 "id": "GraphqlErrorExtensions",
 "properties": {
+"code": {
+"description": "Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.",
+"enum": [
+"OK",
+"CANCELLED",
+"UNKNOWN",
+"INVALID_ARGUMENT",
+"DEADLINE_EXCEEDED",
+"NOT_FOUND",
+"ALREADY_EXISTS",
+"PERMISSION_DENIED",
+"UNAUTHENTICATED",
+"RESOURCE_EXHAUSTED",
+"FAILED_PRECONDITION",
+"ABORTED",
+"OUT_OF_RANGE",
+"UNIMPLEMENTED",
+"INTERNAL",
+"UNAVAILABLE",
+"DATA_LOSS"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Not an error; returned on success. HTTP Mapping: 200 OK",
+"The operation was cancelled, typically by the caller. HTTP Mapping: 499 Client Closed Request",
+"Unknown error. For example, this error may be returned when a `Status` value received from another address space belongs to an error space that is not known in this address space. Also errors raised by APIs that do not return enough error information may be converted to this error. HTTP Mapping: 500 Internal Server Error",
+"The client specified an invalid argument. Note that this differs from `FAILED_PRECONDITION`. `INVALID_ARGUMENT` indicates arguments that are problematic regardless of the state of the system (e.g., a malformed file name). HTTP Mapping: 400 Bad Request",
+"The deadline expired before the operation could complete. For operations that change the state of the system, this error may be returned even if the operation has completed successfully. For example, a successful response from a server could have been delayed long enough for the deadline to expire. HTTP Mapping: 504 Gateway Timeout",
+"Some requested entity (e.g., file or directory) was not found. Note to server developers: if a request is denied for an entire class of users, such as gradual feature rollout or undocumented allowlist, `NOT_FOUND` may be used. If a request is denied for some users within a class of users, such as user-based access control, `PERMISSION_DENIED` must be used. HTTP Mapping: 404 Not Found",
+"The entity that a client attempted to create (e.g., file or directory) already exists. HTTP Mapping: 409 Conflict",
+"The caller does not have permission to execute the specified operation. `PERMISSION_DENIED` must not be used for rejections caused by exhausting some resource (use `RESOURCE_EXHAUSTED` instead for those errors). `PERMISSION_DENIED` must not be used if the caller can not be identified (use `UNAUTHENTICATED` instead for those errors). This error code does not imply the request is valid or the requested entity exists or satisfies other pre-conditions. HTTP Mapping: 403 Forbidden",
+"The request does not have valid authentication credentials for the operation. HTTP Mapping: 401 Unauthorized",
+"Some resource has been exhausted, perhaps a per-user quota, or perhaps the entire file system is out of space. HTTP Mapping: 429 Too Many Requests",
+"The operation was rejected because the system is not in a state required for the operation's execution. For example, the directory to be deleted is non-empty, an rmdir operation is applied to a non-directory, etc. Service implementors can use the following guidelines to decide between `FAILED_PRECONDITION`, `ABORTED`, and `UNAVAILABLE`: (a) Use `UNAVAILABLE` if the client can retry just the failing call. (b) Use `ABORTED` if the client should retry at a higher level. For example, when a client-specified test-and-set fails, indicating the client should restart a read-modify-write sequence. (c) Use `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the client should not retry until the system state has been explicitly fixed. For example, if an \"rmdir\" fails because the directory is non-empty, `FAILED_PRECONDITION` should be returned since the client should not retry unless the files are deleted from the directory. HTTP Mapping: 400 Bad Request",
+"The operation was aborted, typically due to a concurrency issue such as a sequencer check failure or transaction abort. See the guidelines above for deciding between `FAILED_PRECONDITION`, `ABORTED`, and `UNAVAILABLE`. HTTP Mapping: 409 Conflict",
+"The operation was attempted past the valid range. E.g., seeking or reading past end-of-file. Unlike `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, this error indicates a problem that may be fixed if the system state changes. For example, a 32-bit file system will generate `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if asked to read at an offset that is not in the range [0,2^32-1], but it will generate `OUT_OF_RANGE` if asked to read from an offset past the current file size. There is a fair bit of overlap between `FAILED_PRECONDITION` and `OUT_OF_RANGE`. We recommend using `OUT_OF_RANGE` (the more specific error) when it applies so that callers who are iterating through a space can easily look for an `OUT_OF_RANGE` error to detect when they are done. HTTP Mapping: 400 Bad Request",
+"The operation is not implemented or is not supported/enabled in this service. HTTP Mapping: 501 Not Implemented",
+"Internal errors. This means that some invariants expected by the underlying system have been broken. This error code is reserved for serious errors. HTTP Mapping: 500 Internal Server Error",
+"The service is currently unavailable. This is most likely a transient condition, which can be corrected by retrying with a backoff. Note that it is not always safe to retry non-idempotent operations. See the guidelines above for deciding between `FAILED_PRECONDITION`, `ABORTED`, and `UNAVAILABLE`. HTTP Mapping: 503 Service Unavailable",
+"Unrecoverable data loss or corruption. HTTP Mapping: 500 Internal Server Error"
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"debugDetails": {
+"description": "More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.",
+"type": "string"
+},
 "file": {
 "description": "The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.",
 "type": "string"
+},
+"resource": {
+"description": "Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).",
+"type": "string"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json
index 4603c98a1d..29ba0fc3cd 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebasedataconnect.v1beta.json
@@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250323",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://firebasedataconnect.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "CancelOperationRequest": {
@@ -1303,9 +1303,59 @@
 "description": "GraphqlErrorExtensions contains additional information of `GraphqlError`.",
 "id": "GraphqlErrorExtensions",
 "properties": {
+"code": {
+"description": "Maps to canonical gRPC codes. If not specified, it represents `Code.INTERNAL`.",
+"enum": [
+"OK",
+"CANCELLED",
+"UNKNOWN",
+"INVALID_ARGUMENT",
+"DEADLINE_EXCEEDED",
+"NOT_FOUND",
+"ALREADY_EXISTS",
+"PERMISSION_DENIED",
+"UNAUTHENTICATED",
+"RESOURCE_EXHAUSTED",
+"FAILED_PRECONDITION",
+"ABORTED",
+"OUT_OF_RANGE",
+"UNIMPLEMENTED",
+"INTERNAL",
+"UNAVAILABLE",
+"DATA_LOSS"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Not an error; returned on success. HTTP Mapping: 200 OK",
+"The operation was cancelled, typically by the caller. HTTP Mapping: 499 Client Closed Request",
+"Unknown error. For example, this error may be returned when a `Status` value received from another address space belongs to an error space that is not known in this address space. Also errors raised by APIs that do not return enough error information may be converted to this error. HTTP Mapping: 500 Internal Server Error",
+"The client specified an invalid argument. Note that this differs from `FAILED_PRECONDITION`. `INVALID_ARGUMENT` indicates arguments that are problematic regardless of the state of the system (e.g., a malformed file name). HTTP Mapping: 400 Bad Request",
+"The deadline expired before the operation could complete. For operations that change the state of the system, this error may be returned even if the operation has completed successfully. For example, a successful response from a server could have been delayed long enough for the deadline to expire. HTTP Mapping: 504 Gateway Timeout",
+"Some requested entity (e.g., file or directory) was not found. Note to server developers: if a request is denied for an entire class of users, such as gradual feature rollout or undocumented allowlist, `NOT_FOUND` may be used. If a request is denied for some users within a class of users, such as user-based access control, `PERMISSION_DENIED` must be used. HTTP Mapping: 404 Not Found",
+"The entity that a client attempted to create (e.g., file or directory) already exists. HTTP Mapping: 409 Conflict",
+"The caller does not have permission to execute the specified operation. `PERMISSION_DENIED` must not be used for rejections caused by exhausting some resource (use `RESOURCE_EXHAUSTED` instead for those errors). `PERMISSION_DENIED` must not be used if the caller can not be identified (use `UNAUTHENTICATED` instead for those errors). This error code does not imply the request is valid or the requested entity exists or satisfies other pre-conditions. HTTP Mapping: 403 Forbidden",
+"The request does not have valid authentication credentials for the operation. HTTP Mapping: 401 Unauthorized",
+"Some resource has been exhausted, perhaps a per-user quota, or perhaps the entire file system is out of space. HTTP Mapping: 429 Too Many Requests",
+"The operation was rejected because the system is not in a state required for the operation's execution. For example, the directory to be deleted is non-empty, an rmdir operation is applied to a non-directory, etc. Service implementors can use the following guidelines to decide between `FAILED_PRECONDITION`, `ABORTED`, and `UNAVAILABLE`: (a) Use `UNAVAILABLE` if the client can retry just the failing call. (b) Use `ABORTED` if the client should retry at a higher level. For example, when a client-specified test-and-set fails, indicating the client should restart a read-modify-write sequence. (c) Use `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the client should not retry until the system state has been explicitly fixed. For example, if an \"rmdir\" fails because the directory is non-empty, `FAILED_PRECONDITION` should be returned since the client should not retry unless the files are deleted from the directory. HTTP Mapping: 400 Bad Request",
+"The operation was aborted, typically due to a concurrency issue such as a sequencer check failure or transaction abort. See the guidelines above for deciding between `FAILED_PRECONDITION`, `ABORTED`, and `UNAVAILABLE`. HTTP Mapping: 409 Conflict",
+"The operation was attempted past the valid range. E.g., seeking or reading past end-of-file. Unlike `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, this error indicates a problem that may be fixed if the system state changes. For example, a 32-bit file system will generate `INVALID_ARGUMENT` if asked to read at an offset that is not in the range [0,2^32-1], but it will generate `OUT_OF_RANGE` if asked to read from an offset past the current file size. There is a fair bit of overlap between `FAILED_PRECONDITION` and `OUT_OF_RANGE`. We recommend using `OUT_OF_RANGE` (the more specific error) when it applies so that callers who are iterating through a space can easily look for an `OUT_OF_RANGE` error to detect when they are done. HTTP Mapping: 400 Bad Request",
+"The operation is not implemented or is not supported/enabled in this service. HTTP Mapping: 501 Not Implemented",
+"Internal errors. This means that some invariants expected by the underlying system have been broken. This error code is reserved for serious errors. HTTP Mapping: 500 Internal Server Error",
+"The service is currently unavailable. This is most likely a transient condition, which can be corrected by retrying with a backoff. Note that it is not always safe to retry non-idempotent operations. See the guidelines above for deciding between `FAILED_PRECONDITION`, `ABORTED`, and `UNAVAILABLE`. HTTP Mapping: 503 Service Unavailable",
+"Unrecoverable data loss or corruption. HTTP Mapping: 500 Internal Server Error"
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"debugDetails": {
+"description": "More detailed error message to assist debugging. In the backend, only include it in admin authenticated API like ExecuteGraphql. In the emulator, always include it to assist debugging.",
+"type": "string"
+},
 "file": {
 "description": "The source file name where the error occurred. Included only for `UpdateSchema` and `UpdateConnector`, it corresponds to `File.path` of the provided `Source`.",
 "type": "string"
+},
+"resource": {
+"description": "Distinguish which schema or connector the error originates from. It should be set on errors from control plane APIs (e.g. `UpdateSchema`, `UpdateConnector`).",
+"type": "string"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"

From 1290767f8fc3e73a5cb32ba84c7c15a063883675 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 16/32] feat(firebaseml): update the api

#### firebaseml:v2beta

The following keys were deleted:
- schemas.GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1Part.properties.thought.readOnly (Total Keys: 1)
---
 ....projects.locations.publishers.models.html | 42 ++++++++++---
 .../documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json          | 62 +++++++++++++++++--
 2 files changed, 90 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html b/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html
index 7f8ded3790..ffeab5639a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firebaseml_v2beta.projects.locations.publishers.models.html
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
           },
           "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-          "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+          "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
           "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
           "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
             "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
         },
         "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-        "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+        "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
         "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
         "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
           "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -478,6 +478,8 @@ 
Method Details

           "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold.
         },
       },
+      "urlContext": { # Tool to support URL context. # Optional. Tool to support URL context retrieval.
+      },
     },
   ],
 }
@@ -550,7 +552,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
           },
           "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-          "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+          "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
           "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
           "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
             "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -692,7 +694,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
         },
         "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-        "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+        "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
         "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
         "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
           "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -910,6 +912,8 @@ 
Method Details

           "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold.
         },
       },
+      "urlContext": { # Tool to support URL context. # Optional. Tool to support URL context retrieval.
+      },
     },
   ],
 }
@@ -978,7 +982,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
             },
             "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-            "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+            "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
             "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
             "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
               "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -1014,7 +1018,7 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "groundingSupports": [ # Optional. List of grounding support.
           { # Grounding support.
-            "confidenceScores": [ # Confidence score of the support references. Ranges from 0 to 1. 1 is the most confident. This list must have the same size as the grounding_chunk_indices.
+            "confidenceScores": [ # Confidence score of the support references. Ranges from 0 to 1. 1 is the most confident. For Gemini 2.0 and before, this list must have the same size as the grounding_chunk_indices. For Gemini 2.5 and after, this list will be empty and should be ignored.
               3.14,
             ],
             "groundingChunkIndices": [ # A list of indices (into 'grounding_chunk') specifying the citations associated with the claim. For instance [1,3,4] means that grounding_chunk[1], grounding_chunk[3], grounding_chunk[4] are the retrieved content attributed to the claim.
@@ -1073,6 +1077,14 @@ 
Method Details

           "severityScore": 3.14, # Output only. Harm severity score.
         },
       ],
+      "urlContextMetadata": { # Metadata related to url context retrieval tool. # Output only. Metadata related to url context retrieval tool.
+        "urlMetadata": [ # Output only. List of url context.
+          { # Context of the a single url retrieval.
+            "retrievedUrl": "A String", # Retrieved url by the tool.
+            "urlRetrievalStatus": "A String", # Status of the url retrieval.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
     },
   ],
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the request is made to the server.
@@ -1176,7 +1188,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
           },
           "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-          "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+          "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
           "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
           "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
             "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -1318,7 +1330,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
         },
         "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-        "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+        "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
         "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
         "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
           "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -1536,6 +1548,8 @@ 
Method Details

           "vectorDistanceThreshold": 3.14, # Optional. Only return results with vector distance smaller than the threshold.
         },
       },
+      "urlContext": { # Tool to support URL context. # Optional. Tool to support URL context retrieval.
+      },
     },
   ],
 }
@@ -1604,7 +1618,7 @@ 
Method Details

               "mimeType": "A String", # Required. The IANA standard MIME type of the source data.
             },
             "text": "A String", # Optional. Text part (can be code).
-            "thought": True or False, # Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
+            "thought": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.
             "thoughtSignature": "A String", # Optional. An opaque signature for the thought so it can be reused in subsequent requests.
             "videoMetadata": { # Metadata describes the input video content. # Optional. Video metadata. The metadata should only be specified while the video data is presented in inline_data or file_data.
               "endOffset": "A String", # Optional. The end offset of the video.
@@ -1640,7 +1654,7 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "groundingSupports": [ # Optional. List of grounding support.
           { # Grounding support.
-            "confidenceScores": [ # Confidence score of the support references. Ranges from 0 to 1. 1 is the most confident. This list must have the same size as the grounding_chunk_indices.
+            "confidenceScores": [ # Confidence score of the support references. Ranges from 0 to 1. 1 is the most confident. For Gemini 2.0 and before, this list must have the same size as the grounding_chunk_indices. For Gemini 2.5 and after, this list will be empty and should be ignored.
               3.14,
             ],
             "groundingChunkIndices": [ # A list of indices (into 'grounding_chunk') specifying the citations associated with the claim. For instance [1,3,4] means that grounding_chunk[1], grounding_chunk[3], grounding_chunk[4] are the retrieved content attributed to the claim.
@@ -1699,6 +1713,14 @@ 
Method Details

           "severityScore": 3.14, # Output only. Harm severity score.
         },
       ],
+      "urlContextMetadata": { # Metadata related to url context retrieval tool. # Output only. Metadata related to url context retrieval tool.
+        "urlMetadata": [ # Output only. List of url context.
+          { # Context of the a single url retrieval.
+            "retrievedUrl": "A String", # Retrieved url by the tool.
+            "urlRetrievalStatus": "A String", # Status of the url retrieval.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
     },
   ],
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Timestamp when the request is made to the server.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json
index 78b9d084ea..2aea97f57b 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/firebaseml.v2beta.json
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250525",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://firebaseml.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Date": {
@@ -496,6 +496,11 @@
 },
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "array"
+},
+"urlContextMetadata": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlContextMetadata",
+"description": "Output only. Metadata related to url context retrieval tool.",
+"readOnly": true
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -1467,7 +1472,7 @@
 "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1GroundingSupport",
 "properties": {
 "confidenceScores": {
-"description": "Confidence score of the support references. Ranges from 0 to 1. 1 is the most confident. This list must have the same size as the grounding_chunk_indices.",
+"description": "Confidence score of the support references. Ranges from 0 to 1. 1 is the most confident. For Gemini 2.0 and before, this list must have the same size as the grounding_chunk_indices. For Gemini 2.5 and after, this list will be empty and should be ignored.",
 "items": {
 "format": "float",
 "type": "number"
@@ -1610,8 +1615,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "thought": {
-"description": "Output only. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.",
-"readOnly": true,
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the part is thought from the model.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "thoughtSignature": {
@@ -2222,6 +2226,10 @@ true
 "retrieval": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1Retrieval",
 "description": "Optional. Retrieval tool type. System will always execute the provided retrieval tool(s) to get external knowledge to answer the prompt. Retrieval results are presented to the model for generation."
+},
+"urlContext": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlContext",
+"description": "Optional. Tool to support URL context retrieval."
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -2272,6 +2280,52 @@ true
 "properties": {},
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlContext": {
+"description": "Tool to support URL context.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlContext",
+"properties": {},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlContextMetadata": {
+"description": "Metadata related to url context retrieval tool.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlContextMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"urlMetadata": {
+"description": "Output only. List of url context.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlMetadata"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlMetadata": {
+"description": "Context of the a single url retrieval.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1UrlMetadata",
+"properties": {
+"retrievedUrl": {
+"description": "Retrieved url by the tool.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"urlRetrievalStatus": {
+"description": "Status of the url retrieval.",
+"enum": [
+"URL_RETRIEVAL_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED",
+"URL_RETRIEVAL_STATUS_SUCCESS",
+"URL_RETRIEVAL_STATUS_ERROR"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"Url retrieval is successful.",
+"Url retrieval is failed due to error."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1VertexAISearch": {
 "description": "Retrieve from Vertex AI Search datastore or engine for grounding. datastore and engine are mutually exclusive. See https://cloud.google.com/products/agent-builder",
 "id": "GoogleCloudAiplatformV1beta1VertexAISearch",

From 1c0df7739f2a22361d46a48cbe67760f23777d0a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 17/32] feat(gkebackup): update the api

#### gkebackup:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.Backup.properties.selectedNamespaceLabels (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.BackupConfig.properties.selectedNamespaceLabels.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.Label (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.ResourceLabels (Total Keys: 4)
---
 ...rojects.locations.backupPlans.backups.html | 32 +++++++++++++++
 ...kup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html | 32 +++++++++++++++
 .../documents/gkebackup.v1.json               | 40 ++++++++++++++++++-
 3 files changed, 103 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.backups.html b/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.backups.html
index 3ab3e99708..0535caaa6b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.backups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.backups.html
@@ -170,6 +170,14 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
+  "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # Output only. If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+    "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+      { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+        "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # Output only. If set, the list of namespaces that were included in the Backup.
     "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
       "A String",
@@ -307,6 +315,14 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
+  "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # Output only. If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+    "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+      { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+        "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # Output only. If set, the list of namespaces that were included in the Backup.
     "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
       "A String",
@@ -452,6 +468,14 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
+      "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # Output only. If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+        "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+          { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+            "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+            "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
       "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # Output only. If set, the list of namespaces that were included in the Backup.
         "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
           "A String",
@@ -538,6 +562,14 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
+  "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # Output only. If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+    "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+      { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+        "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
   "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # Output only. If set, the list of namespaces that were included in the Backup.
     "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
       "A String",
diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html b/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html
index 7419e9c855..0a2d17b343 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/gkebackup_v1.projects.locations.backupPlans.html
@@ -142,6 +142,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
     },
+    "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+      "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+        { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+          "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
     "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # If set, include just the resources in the listed namespaces.
       "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
         "A String",
@@ -300,6 +308,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
     },
+    "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+      "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+        { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+          "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
     "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # If set, include just the resources in the listed namespaces.
       "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
         "A String",
@@ -447,6 +463,14 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           ],
         },
+        "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+          "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+            { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+              "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+              "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+            },
+          ],
+        },
         "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # If set, include just the resources in the listed namespaces.
           "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
             "A String",
@@ -555,6 +579,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
     },
+    "selectedNamespaceLabels": { # A list of Kubernetes labels. # If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.
+      "resourceLabels": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.
+        { # A single Kubernetes label-value pair.
+          "key": "A String", # Optional. The key/name of the label.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. The value of the label.
+        },
+      ],
+    },
     "selectedNamespaces": { # A list of Kubernetes Namespaces. # If set, include just the resources in the listed namespaces.
       "namespaces": [ # Optional. A list of Kubernetes Namespaces.
         "A String",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkebackup.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkebackup.v1.json
index 3655ff83ad..480bb1981a 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkebackup.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/gkebackup.v1.json
@@ -2227,7 +2227,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250514",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://gkebackup.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AuditConfig": {
@@ -2405,6 +2405,11 @@
 "description": "Output only. If set, the list of ProtectedApplications whose resources were included in the Backup.",
 "readOnly": true
 },
+"selectedNamespaceLabels": {
+"$ref": "ResourceLabels",
+"description": "Output only. If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup.",
+"readOnly": true
+},
 "selectedNamespaces": {
 "$ref": "Namespaces",
 "description": "Output only. If set, the list of namespaces that were included in the Backup.",
@@ -2543,6 +2548,10 @@
 "$ref": "NamespacedNames",
 "description": "If set, include just the resources referenced by the listed ProtectedApplications."
 },
+"selectedNamespaceLabels": {
+"$ref": "ResourceLabels",
+"description": "If set, the list of labels whose constituent namespaces were included in the Backup."
+},
 "selectedNamespaces": {
 "$ref": "Namespaces",
 "description": "If set, include just the resources in the listed namespaces."
@@ -3183,6 +3192,21 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"Label": {
+"description": "A single Kubernetes label-value pair.",
+"id": "Label",
+"properties": {
+"key": {
+"description": "Optional. The key/name of the label.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"value": {
+"description": "Optional. The value of the label.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ListBackupChannelsResponse": {
 "description": "Response message for ListBackupChannels.",
 "id": "ListBackupChannelsResponse",
@@ -3614,6 +3638,20 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"ResourceLabels": {
+"description": "A list of Kubernetes labels.",
+"id": "ResourceLabels",
+"properties": {
+"resourceLabels": {
+"description": "Optional. A list of Kubernetes label-value pairs.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Label"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ResourceSelector": {
 "description": "Defines a selector to identify a single or a group of resources. Conditions in the selector are optional, but at least one field should be set to a non-empty value. If a condition is not specified, no restrictions will be applied on that dimension. If more than one condition is specified, a resource will be selected if and only if all conditions are met.",
 "id": "ResourceSelector",

From 086d3f47f5413b2ed9b13b4d1c5e915281ea524a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 18/32] feat(healthcare): update the api

#### healthcare:v1beta1

The following keys were deleted:
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.create (Total Keys: 14)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.evaluate (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.export (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.get (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.import (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.list (Total Keys: 18)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.methods.patch (Total Keys: 15)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.resources.annotations.methods.create (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.resources.annotations.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.resources.annotations.methods.get (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.resources.annotations.methods.list (Total Keys: 20)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.datasets.resources.annotationStores.resources.annotations.methods.patch (Total Keys: 15)
- schemas.Annotation (Total Keys: 21)
- schemas.BoundingPoly (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.CloudHealthcareSource (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.DeidentifyConfig.properties.annotation.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.Detail (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.EvaluateAnnotationStoreRequest (Total Keys: 9)
- schemas.EvaluateAnnotationStoreResponse (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.ExportAnnotationsRequest (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.ExportAnnotationsResponse (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.FilterList (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.Finding (Total Keys: 8)
- schemas.GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationBigQueryDestination (Total Keys: 6)
- schemas.GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsDestination (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsSource (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.ImageAnnotation (Total Keys: 6)
- schemas.ImportAnnotationsRequest (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.ImportAnnotationsResponse (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.InfoTypeConfig (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.ListAnnotationStoresResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.ListAnnotationsResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.ResourceAnnotation (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.SensitiveTextAnnotation (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.Vertex (Total Keys: 6)
---
 ...ts.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html |  76 +-
 ...rojects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html |  62 +-
 ...thcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.html |   2 +-
 ...s.locations.datasets.annotationStores.html | 343 -------
 ...ojects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html |   4 -
 ...ts.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html | 104 +-
 ...rojects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html |  90 +-
 ...e_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html |   6 +-
 .../documents/healthcare.v1.json              |  70 +-
 .../documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json         | 935 +-----------------
 10 files changed, 236 insertions(+), 1456 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html
index 145df95038..a0dbd60b93 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html
@@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ 
Cloud Healthcare API . 
   Binary_create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

+
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   Binary_read(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the contents of a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to retrieve a Binary resource either by using the FHIR JSON mimetype as the value for the Accept header, or as a raw data stream. If the FHIR Accept type is used this method will return a Binary resource with the data base64-encoded, regardless of how the resource was created. The resource data can be retrieved in base64-decoded form if the Accept type of the request matches the value of the resource's `contentType` field. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   Binary_update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

+
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   Binary_vread(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR Binary resource by version ID. This method can be used to retrieve a Binary resource version either by using the FHIR JSON mimetype as the value for the Accept header, or as a raw data stream. If the FHIR Accept type is used this method will return a Binary resource with the data base64-encoded, regardless of how the resource version was created. The resource data can be retrieved in base64-decoded form if the Accept type of the request matches the value of the resource version's `contentType` field. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

@@ -94,19 +94,19 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Returns the consent enforcement status of all consent resources for a patient. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a bundle of `Parameters` (http://hl7.org/fhir/parameters.html) FHIR resources, containing the current enforcement status for each consent resource of the patient. Does not support DSTU2.

 

   Patient_everything(name, end=None, start=None, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

-
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).

+
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).

 

   Resource_purge(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Deletes all the historical versions of a resource (excluding the current version) from the FHIR store. To remove all versions of a resource, first delete the current version and then call this method. This is not a FHIR standard operation. For samples that show how to call `Resource-purge`, see [Deleting historical versions of a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_historical_versions_of_a_fhir_resource).

 

   Resource_validate(parent, type, body=None, profile=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

+
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html). or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

 

   bulk_export(name, outputFormat=None, x__xgafv=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

 
Bulk exports all resources from the FHIR store to the specified destination. Implements the FHIR implementation guide [system level $export](https://build.fhir.org/ig/HL7/bulk-data/export.html#endpoint---system-level-export. The following headers must be set in the request: * `Accept`: specifies the format of the `OperationOutcome` response. Only `application/fhir+json` is supported. * `Prefer`: specifies whether the response is immediate or asynchronous. Must be to `respond-async` because only asynchronous responses are supported. Specify the destination for the server to write result files by setting the Cloud Storage location bulk_export_gcs_destination on the FHIR store. URI of an existing Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced. Supports the following query parameters: * `_type`: string of comma-delimited FHIR resource types. If provided, only the resources of the specified type(s) are exported. * `_since`: if provided, only the resources that are updated after the specified time are exported. * `_outputFormat`: optional, specify ndjson to export data in NDJSON format. Exported file names use the format: {export_id}_{resource_type}.ndjson. On success, the `Content-Location` header of the response is set to a URL that the user can use to query the status of the export. The URL is in the format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}/operations/{export_id}`. See get-fhir-operation-status for more information. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error.

 

   capabilities(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.

+
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -121,38 +121,38 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
If a resource is found with the identifier specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction, limited to searching by resource identifier. Search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).

 

   create(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query, limited to searching by resource identifier. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. When using conditional create, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).

+
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query, limited to searching by resource identifier. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. When using conditional create, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).

 

   delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources will be moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).

+
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources will be moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).

 

   executeBundle(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch` and `transaction`, processing them according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a transaction bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).

+
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch` and `transaction`, processing them according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a transaction bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).

 

   history(name, x__xgafv=None, x_at=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None)

-
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).

+
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).

 

   patch(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).

+
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).

 

   read(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).

+
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).

 

   search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

 

   search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

 

   update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).

+
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. In R5, the conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).

 

   vread(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).

+
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).

 
Method Details

 

     Binary_create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
+  
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Binary_update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
+  
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to update. (required)
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Patient_everything(name, end=None, start=None, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)
-  
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).
+  
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Name of the `Patient` resource for which the information is required. (required)
@@ -379,11 +379,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Resource_validate(parent, type, body=None, profile=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
+  
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html). or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store that holds the profiles being used for validation. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     capabilities(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.
+  
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve the capabilities for. (required)
@@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -574,11 +574,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     create(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query, limited to searching by resource identifier. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. When using conditional create, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query, limited to searching by resource identifier. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. When using conditional create, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     delete(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources will be moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources will be moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to delete. (required)
@@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     executeBundle(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch` and `transaction`, processing them according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a transaction bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).
+  
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch` and `transaction`, processing them according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a transaction bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store in which this bundle will be executed. (required)
@@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     history(name, x__xgafv=None, x_at=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None)
-  
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).
+  
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to retrieve. (required)
@@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     patch(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to update. (required)
@@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     read(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to retrieve. (required)
@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
@@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request to search the resources in the specified FHIR store.
-  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).
+  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -800,16 +800,16 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
-  resourceType: string, Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). (required)
+  resourceType: string, Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request to search the resources in the specified FHIR store.
-  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).
+  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. In R5, the conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to update. (required)
@@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     vread(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).
+  
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource version to retrieve. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
index 046d7f5bb7..4e67ddd897 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
@@ -86,10 +86,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
 

   applyAdminConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.

+
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.

 

   applyConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.

+
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.

 

   bulk_export_group(name, organizeOutputBy=None, outputFormat=None, x__xgafv=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

 
Bulk exports a Group resource and resources in the member field, including related resources for each Patient member. The export for each Patient is identical to a GetPatientEverything request. Implements the FHIR implementation guide [$export group of patients](https://build.fhir.org/ig/HL7/bulk-data/export.html#endpoint---group-of-patients). The following headers must be set in the request: * `Accept`: specifies the format of the `OperationOutcome` response. Only `application/fhir+json` is supported. * `Prefer`: specifies whether the response is immediate or asynchronous. Must be to `respond-async` because only asynchronous responses are supported. Specify the destination for the server to write result files by setting the Cloud Storage location bulk_export_gcs_destination on the FHIR store. URI of an existing Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced. Supports the following query parameters: * `_type`: string of comma-delimited FHIR resource types. If provided, only resources of the specified type(s) are exported. * `_since`: if provided, only resources updated after the specified time are exported. * `_outputFormat`: optional, specify ndjson to export data in NDJSON format. Exported file names use the format: {export_id}_{resource_type}.ndjson. * `organizeOutputBy`: resource type to organize the output by. Required and must be set to `Patient`. When specified, output files are organized by instances of the specified resource type, including the resource, referenced resources, and resources that contain references to that resource. On success, the `Content-Location` header of response is set to a URL that you can use to query the status of the export. The URL is in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}/operations/{export_id}`. See get-fhir-operation-status for more information. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error.

@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Deletes the specified FHIR store and removes all resources within it.

 

   explainDataAccess(name, resourceId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource.

+
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.

 

   export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Export resources from the FHIR store to the specified destination. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the status of the export by calling GetOperation. Immediate fatal errors appear in the error field, errors are also logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Otherwise, when the operation finishes, a detailed response of type ExportResourcesResponse is returned in the response field. The metadata field type for this operation is OperationMetadata.

@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Method Details

 

     applyAdminConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.
+  
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store to enforce, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     applyConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.
+  
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store to enforce, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
@@ -287,8 +287,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Optional. Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Optional. The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Optional. Configures de-id of application/DICOM content.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
@@ -460,8 +460,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Optional. Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Optional. The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Optional. Configures de-id of application/DICOM content.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
De-identifies data from the source store and writes it to the destination store. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. If the request is successful, the response field type is DeidentifyFhirStoreSummary. If errors occur, error is set. Error details are also logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
 
 Args:
-  sourceStore: string, Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
+  sourceStore: string, Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. R5 stores are not supported. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     explainDataAccess(name, resourceId=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource.
+  
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store to enforce, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
@@ -913,8 +913,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Optional. Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Optional. The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Optional. Configures de-id of application/DICOM content.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
@@ -1216,8 +1216,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
         "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
       },
-      "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-      "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+      "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+      "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
         "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
           "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
         },
@@ -1238,7 +1238,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "a_key": "A String",
       },
       "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-      "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+      "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
         "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
         "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
       },
@@ -1264,7 +1264,7 @@ 
Method Details

             },
             "writeDisposition": "A String", # Optional. Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
           },
-          "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+          "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
             "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Optional. The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
               "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Optional. Configures de-id of application/DICOM content.
                 "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
@@ -1407,8 +1407,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -1455,7 +1455,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Optional. Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Optional. The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Optional. Configures de-id of application/DICOM content.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
@@ -1580,8 +1580,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -1602,7 +1602,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -1628,7 +1628,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Optional. Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Optional. The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Optional. Configures de-id of application/DICOM content.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.html
index f799865722..cd8f57e9e2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1.projects.locations.datasets.html
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Creates a new dataset containing de-identified data from the source dataset. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. If the request is successful, the response field type is DeidentifySummary. If errors occur, error is set. The LRO result may still be successful if de-identification fails for some DICOM instances. The new de-identified dataset will not contain these failed resources. Failed resource totals are tracked in Operation.metadata. Error details are also logged to Cloud Logging. For more information, see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging).
 
 Args:
-  sourceDataset: string, Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`. (required)
+  sourceDataset: string, Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`. R5 FHIR stores are not supported and will be skipped. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.html
index 426ea12e39..b16876e923 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.html
@@ -74,44 +74,12 @@
 
 
Cloud Healthcare API . projects . locations . datasets . annotationStores

 
Instance Methods

-

-  annotations()
-

-
Returns the annotations Resource.

-
 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

-

-  create(parent, annotationStoreId=None, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a new Annotation store within the parent dataset.

-

-  delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Deletes the specified Annotation store and removes all annotations that are contained within it.

-

-  evaluate(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Evaluate an Annotation store against a ground truth Annotation store. When the operation finishes successfully, a detailed response is returned of type EvaluateAnnotationStoreResponse, contained in the response. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).

-

-  export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Export Annotations from the Annotation store. If the request is successful, a detailed response is returned of type ExportAnnotationsResponse, contained in the response field when the operation finishes. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).

-

-  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the specified Annotation store or returns NOT_FOUND if it does not exist.

 

   getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.

-

-  import_(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Import Annotations to the Annotation store by loading data from the specified sources. If the request is successful, a detailed response is returned as of type ImportAnnotationsResponse, contained in the response field when the operation finishes. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).

-

-  list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Lists the Annotation stores in the given dataset for a source store.

-

-  list_next()

-
Retrieves the next page of results.

-

-  patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates the specified Annotation store.

 

   setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.

@@ -124,196 +92,6 @@ 
Method Details

   
Close httplib2 connections.

 

 
-

-    create(parent, annotationStoreId=None, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a new Annotation store within the parent dataset.
-
-Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the dataset this Annotation store belongs to. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.
-  "labels": { # Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-}
-
-  annotationStoreId: string, Required. The ID of the Annotation store that is being created. The string must match the following regex: `[\p{L}\p{N}_\-\.]{1,256}`.
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.
-  "labels": { # Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-}

-

-
-

-    delete(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Deletes the specified Annotation store and removes all annotations that are contained within it.
-
-Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the Annotation store to delete. (required)
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
-}

-

-
-

-    evaluate(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Evaluate an Annotation store against a ground truth Annotation store. When the operation finishes successfully, a detailed response is returned of type EvaluateAnnotationStoreResponse, contained in the response. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
-
-Args:
-  name: string, Required. The Annotation store to compare against `golden_store`, in the format of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # Request to evaluate an Annotation store against a ground truth [Annotation store].
-  "bigqueryDestination": { # The BigQuery table for export. # The BigQuery table where the server writes the output. BigQueryDestination requires the `roles/bigquery.dataEditor` and `roles/bigquery.jobUser` Cloud IAM roles.
-    "force": True or False, # Use `write_disposition` instead. If `write_disposition` is specified, this parameter is ignored. force=false is equivalent to write_disposition=WRITE_EMPTY and force=true is equivalent to write_disposition=WRITE_TRUNCATE.
-    "schemaType": "A String", # Specifies the schema format to export.
-    "tableUri": "A String", # BigQuery URI to a table, up to 2000 characters long, must be of the form bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.tableId.
-    "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
-  },
-  "evalInfoTypeMapping": { # Optional. InfoType mapping for `eval_store`. Different resources can map to the same infoType. For example, `PERSON_NAME`, `PERSON`, `NAME`, and `HUMAN` are different. To map all of these into a single infoType (such as `PERSON_NAME`), specify the following mapping: ``` info_type_mapping["PERSON"] = "PERSON_NAME" info_type_mapping["NAME"] = "PERSON_NAME" info_type_mapping["HUMAN"] = "PERSON_NAME" ``` Unmentioned infoTypes, such as `DATE`, are treated as identity mapping. For example: ``` info_type_mapping["DATE"] = "DATE" ``` InfoTypes are case-insensitive.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "goldenInfoTypeMapping": { # Optional. Similar to `eval_info_type_mapping`, infoType mapping for `golden_store`.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "goldenStore": "A String", # Required. The Annotation store to use as ground truth, in the format of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-  "infoTypeConfig": { # Specifies how to use infoTypes for evaluation. For example, a user might only want to evaluate `PERSON`, `LOCATION`, and `AGE`.
-    "evaluateList": { # List of infoTypes to be filtered.
-      "infoTypes": [ # These infoTypes are based on after the `eval_info_type_mapping` and `golden_info_type_mapping`.
-        "A String",
-      ],
-    },
-    "ignoreList": { # List of infoTypes to be filtered.
-      "infoTypes": [ # These infoTypes are based on after the `eval_info_type_mapping` and `golden_info_type_mapping`.
-        "A String",
-      ],
-    },
-    "strictMatching": True or False, # If `TRUE`, infoTypes described by `filter` are used for evaluation. Otherwise, infoTypes are not considered for evaluation. For example: * Annotated text: "Toronto is a location" * Finding 1: `{"infoType": "PERSON", "quote": "Toronto", "start": 0, "end": 7}` * Finding 2: `{"infoType": "CITY", "quote": "Toronto", "start": 0, "end": 7}` * Finding 3: `{}` * Ground truth: `{"infoType": "LOCATION", "quote": "Toronto", "start": 0, "end": 7}` When `strict_matching` is `TRUE`: * Finding 1: 1 false positive * Finding 2: 1 false positive * Finding 3: 1 false negative When `strict_matching` is `FALSE`: * Finding 1: 1 true positive * Finding 2: 1 true positive * Finding 3: 1 false negative
-  },
-}
-
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
-  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
-  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
-    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
-    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
-      {
-        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-      },
-    ],
-    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
-  },
-  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
-  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-}

-

-
-

-    export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Export Annotations from the Annotation store. If the request is successful, a detailed response is returned of type ExportAnnotationsResponse, contained in the response field when the operation finishes. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
-
-Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the Annotation store to export annotations to, in the format of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # Request to export Annotations. The export operation is not atomic. If a failure occurs, any annotations already exported are not removed.
-  "bigqueryDestination": { # The BigQuery table for export. # The BigQuery output destination, which requires two IAM roles: `roles/bigquery.dataEditor` and `roles/bigquery.jobUser`.
-    "force": True or False, # Use `write_disposition` instead. If `write_disposition` is specified, this parameter is ignored. force=false is equivalent to write_disposition=WRITE_EMPTY and force=true is equivalent to write_disposition=WRITE_TRUNCATE.
-    "schemaType": "A String", # Specifies the schema format to export.
-    "tableUri": "A String", # BigQuery URI to a table, up to 2000 characters long, must be of the form bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.tableId.
-    "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
-  },
-  "gcsDestination": { # The Cloud Storage location for export. # The Cloud Storage destination, which requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role.
-    "uriPrefix": "A String", # The Cloud Storage destination to export to. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
-  },
-}
-
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
-  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
-  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
-    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
-    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
-      {
-        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-      },
-    ],
-    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
-  },
-  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
-  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-}

-

-
-

-    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the specified Annotation store or returns NOT_FOUND if it does not exist.
-
-Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the Annotation store to get. (required)
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.
-  "labels": { # Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-}

-

-
 

     getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)
   
Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.
@@ -362,127 +140,6 @@ 
Method Details

 }

 

 
-

-    import_(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Import Annotations to the Annotation store by loading data from the specified sources. If the request is successful, a detailed response is returned as of type ImportAnnotationsResponse, contained in the response field when the operation finishes. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
-
-Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the Annotation store to which the server imports annotations, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # Request to import Annotations. The Annotations to be imported must have client-supplied resource names which indicate the annotation resource. The import operation is not atomic. If a failure occurs, any annotations already imported are not removed.
-  "gcsSource": { # Specifies the configuration for importing data from Cloud Storage.
-    "uri": "A String", # Points to a Cloud Storage URI containing file(s) with content only. The URI must be in the following format: `gs://{bucket_id}/{object_id}`. The URI can include wildcards in `object_id` and thus identify multiple files. Supported wildcards: '*' to match 0 or more non-separator characters '**' to match 0 or more characters (including separators). Must be used at the end of a path and with no other wildcards in the path. Can also be used with a file extension (such as .dcm), which imports all files with the extension in the specified directory and its sub-directories. For example, `gs://my-bucket/my-directory/**.json` imports all files with .json extensions in `my-directory/` and its sub-directories. '?' to match 1 character All other URI formats are invalid. Files matching the wildcard are expected to contain content only, no metadata.
-  },
-}
-
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
-  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
-  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
-    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
-    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
-      {
-        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-      },
-    ],
-    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
-  },
-  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
-  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
-    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
-  },
-}

-

-
-

-    list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Lists the Annotation stores in the given dataset for a source store.
-
-Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Name of the dataset. (required)
-  filter: string, Restricts stores returned to those matching a filter. The following syntax is available: * A string field value can be written as text inside quotation marks, for example `"query text"`. The only valid relational operation for text fields is equality (`=`), where text is searched within the field, rather than having the field be equal to the text. For example, `"Comment = great"` returns messages with `great` in the comment field. * A number field value can be written as an integer, a decimal, or an exponential. The valid relational operators for number fields are the equality operator (`=`), along with the less than/greater than operators (`<`, `<=`, `>`, `>=`). Note that there is no inequality (`!=`) operator. You can prepend the `NOT` operator to an expression to negate it. * A date field value must be written in `yyyy-mm-dd` form. Fields with date and time use the RFC3339 time format. Leading zeros are required for one-digit months and days. The valid relational operators for date fields are the equality operator (`=`) , along with the less than/greater than operators (`<`, `<=`, `>`, `>=`). Note that there is no inequality (`!=`) operator. You can prepend the `NOT` operator to an expression to negate it. * Multiple field query expressions can be combined in one query by adding `AND` or `OR` operators between the expressions. If a boolean operator appears within a quoted string, it is not treated as special, it's just another part of the character string to be matched. You can prepend the `NOT` operator to an expression to negate it. Only filtering on labels is supported, for example `labels.key=value`.
-  pageSize: integer, Limit on the number of Annotation stores to return in a single response. If not specified, 100 is used. May not be larger than 1000.
-  pageToken: string, The next_page_token value returned from the previous List request, if any.
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # Lists the Annotation stores in the given dataset.
-  "annotationStores": [ # The returned Annotation stores. Won't be more Annotation stores than the value of page_size in the request.
-    { # An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.
-      "labels": { # Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.
-        "a_key": "A String",
-      },
-      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-    },
-  ],
-  "nextPageToken": "A String", # Token to retrieve the next page of results or empty if there are no more results in the list.
-}

-

-
-

-    list_next()
-  
Retrieves the next page of results.
-
-        Args:
-          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
-          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
-
-        Returns:
-          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
-          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
-        

-

-
-

-    patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates the specified Annotation store.
-
-Args:
-  name: string, Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.
-  "labels": { # Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-}
-
-  updateMask: string, Required. The update mask applies to the resource. For the `FieldMask` definition, see https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#fieldmask
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.
-  "labels": { # Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \p{Ll}\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\p{Ll}\p{Lo}\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.
-    "a_key": "A String",
-  },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.
-}

-

-
 

     setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
   
Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html
index 53c288ee5f..f36cd78352 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.dicomStores.html
@@ -221,10 +221,6 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Creates a new DICOM store with sensitive information de-identified.
   "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Deidentify configuration. Only one of `config` and `gcs_config_uri` can be specified.
-    "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-      "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-      "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-    },
     "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
       "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
       "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html
index 616869537f..310040f8f5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.html
@@ -76,37 +76,37 @@ 
Cloud Healthcare API . 
   Binary_create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

+
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   Binary_read(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the contents of a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to retrieve a Binary resource either by using the FHIR JSON mimetype as the value for the Accept header, or as a raw data stream. If the FHIR Accept type is used this method will return a Binary resource with the data base64-encoded, regardless of how the resource was created. The resource data can be retrieved in base64-decoded form if the Accept type of the request matches the value of the resource's `contentType` field. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   Binary_update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

+
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   Binary_vread(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR Binary resource by version ID. This method can be used to retrieve a Binary resource version either by using the FHIR JSON mimetype as the value for the Accept header, or as a raw data stream. If the FHIR Accept type is used this method will return a Binary resource with the data base64-encoded, regardless of how the resource version was created. The resource data can be retrieved in base64-decoded form if the Accept type of the request matches the value of the resource version's `contentType` field. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.

 

   ConceptMap_search_translate(parent, code=None, conceptMapVersion=None, source=None, system=None, target=None, url=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Translates a code from one value set to another by searching for appropriate concept maps. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

+
Translates a code from one value set to another by searching for appropriate concept maps. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

 

   ConceptMap_translate(name, code=None, conceptMapVersion=None, system=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Translates a code from one value set to another using a concept map. You can provide your own concept maps to translate any code system to another code system. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

+
Translates a code from one value set to another using a concept map. You can provide your own concept maps to translate any code system to another code system. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)), [R5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

 

   Consent_enforcement_status(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Returns the consent enforcement status of a single consent resource. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Parameters` (http://hl7.org/fhir/parameters.html) FHIR resource, containing the current enforcement status. Does not support DSTU2.

 

   Encounter_everything(name, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

-
Retrieves an Encounter resource and resources related to that Encounter. Implements the FHIR extended operation Encounter-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/encounter-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/encounter-operations.html#everything), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/encounter-operation-everything.html). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The Encounter resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the Encounter resource, including attachments and binaries. * Resources directly referencing the Encounter resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the Encounter Compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-encounter.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. * Resources referencing to the Encounter resource through the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/encounter-associatedEncounter" extension.

+
Retrieves an Encounter resource and resources related to that Encounter. Implements the FHIR extended operation Encounter-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/encounter-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/encounter-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/encounter-operation-everything.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/encounter-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The Encounter resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the Encounter resource, including attachments and binaries. * Resources directly referencing the Encounter resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the Encounter Compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-encounter.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. * Resources referencing to the Encounter resource through the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/encounter-associatedEncounter" extension.

 

   Observation_lastn(parent, x__xgafv=None)

-
Retrieves the N most recent `Observation` resources for a subject matching search criteria specified as query parameters, grouped by `Observation.code`, sorted from most recent to oldest. Implements the FHIR extended operation Observation-lastn ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/observation-operations.html#lastn), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/observation-operation-lastn.html)). DSTU2 doesn't define the Observation-lastn method, but the server supports it the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. The following search parameters must be provided: - `subject` or `patient` to specify a subject for the Observation. - `code`, `category` or any of the composite parameters that include `code`. Any other valid Observation search parameters can also be provided. This operation accepts an additional query parameter `max`, which specifies N, the maximum number of Observations to return from each group, with a default of 1. Searches with over 1000 results are rejected. Results are counted before grouping and limiting the results with `max`. To stay within the limit, constrain these searches using Observation search parameters such as `_lastUpdated` or `date`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

+
Retrieves the N most recent `Observation` resources for a subject matching search criteria specified as query parameters, grouped by `Observation.code`, sorted from most recent to oldest. Implements the FHIR extended operation Observation-lastn ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/observation-operations.html#lastn), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/observation-operation-lastn.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/observation-operation-lastn.html)). DSTU2 doesn't define the Observation-lastn method, but the server supports it the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. The following search parameters must be provided: - `subject` or `patient` to specify a subject for the Observation. - `code`, `category` or any of the composite parameters that include `code`. Any other valid Observation search parameters can also be provided. This operation accepts an additional query parameter `max`, which specifies N, the maximum number of Observations to return from each group, with a default of 1. Searches with over 1000 results are rejected. Results are counted before grouping and limiting the results with `max`. To stay within the limit, constrain these searches using Observation search parameters such as `_lastUpdated` or `date`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

 

   Patient_consent_enforcement_status(name, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None)

 
Returns the consent enforcement status of all consent resources for a patient. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a bundle of `Parameters` (http://hl7.org/fhir/parameters.html) FHIR resources, containing the current enforcement status for each consent resource of the patient. Does not support DSTU2.

 

   Patient_everything(name, end=None, start=None, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

-
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).

+
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).

 

   Resource_incoming_references(parent, target=None, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_summary=None, x_type=None)

 
Lists all the resources that directly refer to the given target FHIR resource. Can also support the case when the target resource doesn't exist, for example, if the target has been deleted. On success, the response body contains a Bundle with type `searchset`, where each entry in the Bundle contains the full content of the resource. If the operation fails, an `OperationOutcome` is returned describing the failure. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic Google Cloud error might be returned instead.

@@ -115,59 +115,59 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Deletes all the historical versions of a resource (excluding the current version) from the FHIR store. To remove all versions of a resource, first delete the current version and then call this method. This is not a FHIR standard operation. For samples that show how to call `Resource-purge`, see [Deleting historical versions of a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_historical_versions_of_a_fhir_resource).

 

   Resource_validate(parent, type, body=None, profile=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

+
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.

 

   bulk_export(name, outputFormat=None, x__xgafv=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

 
Bulk exports all resources from the FHIR store to the specified destination. Implements the FHIR implementation guide [system level $export](https://build.fhir.org/ig/HL7/bulk-data/export.html#endpoint---system-level-export. The following headers must be set in the request: * `Accept`: specifies the format of the `OperationOutcome` response. Only `application/fhir+json` is supported. * `Prefer`: specifies whether the response is immediate or asynchronous. Must be to `respond-async` because only asynchronous responses are supported. Specify the destination for the server to write result files by setting the Cloud Storage location bulk_export_gcs_destination on the FHIR store. URI of an existing Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced. Supports the following query parameters: * `_type`: string of comma-delimited FHIR resource types. If provided, only the resources of the specified type(s) are exported. * `_since`: if provided, only the resources that are updated after the specified time are exported. * `_outputFormat`: optional, specify ndjson to export data in NDJSON format. Exported file names use the format: {export_id}_{resource_type}.ndjson. On success, the `Content-Location` header of the response is set to a URL that the user can use to query the status of the export. The URL is in the format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}/operations/{export_id}`. See get-fhir-operation-status for more information. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error.

 

   capabilities(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.

+
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

 

   conditionalDelete(parent, type, x__xgafv=None)

-
Deletes FHIR resources that match a search query. Implements the FHIR standard conditional delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.12.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.13.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#3.1.0.7.1)). If multiple resources match, all matching resources are deleted. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. Not all FHIR resources that match the search query might be deleted because, by default, a maximum of 100 FHIR resources can be deleted. The number of FHIR resources that can be deleted depends on the page size of the returned resources, which you can control using the `_count` query parameter. Even when using `_count`, you can delete a maximum 1,000 FHIR resources per each call of `conditionalDelete`. Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.delete` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalDelete`, see [Conditionally deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_deleting_a_fhir_resource).

+
Deletes FHIR resources that match a search query. Implements the FHIR standard conditional delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.12.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.13.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#3.1.0.7.1), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#3.1.0.7.1)). If multiple resources match, all matching resources are deleted. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. Not all FHIR resources that match the search query might be deleted because, by default, a maximum of 100 FHIR resources can be deleted. The number of FHIR resources that can be deleted depends on the page size of the returned resources, which you can control using the `_count` query parameter. Even when using `_count`, you can delete a maximum 1,000 FHIR resources per each call of `conditionalDelete`. Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.delete` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalDelete`, see [Conditionally deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_deleting_a_fhir_resource).

 

   conditionalPatch(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates part of that resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard conditional patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a conditional patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` permission on the parent FHIR store and the `healthcare.fhirResources.patch` permission on the requested FHIR store resource. For samples that show how to call `conditionalPatch`, see [Conditionally patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_patching_a_fhir_resource).

+
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates part of that resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard conditional patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a conditional patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` permission on the parent FHIR store and the `healthcare.fhirResources.patch` permission on the requested FHIR store resource. For samples that show how to call `conditionalPatch`, see [Conditionally patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_patching_a_fhir_resource).

 

   conditionalUpdate(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.10.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cond-update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cond-update)). Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.update` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).

+
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.10.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cond-update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cond-update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cond-update)). Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.update` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).

 

   create(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).

+
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).

 

   delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).

+
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).

 

   executeBundle(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction and history operations. ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch`, `transaction` and `history`, processing `batch` and `transaction` bundles according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a `transaction` or `history` bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. `history` bundles also check the `import` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).

+
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction and history operations. ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch`, `transaction` and `history`, processing `batch` and `transaction` bundles according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a `transaction` or `history` bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. `history` bundles also check the `import` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).

 

   history(name, x__xgafv=None, x_at=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None)

-
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).

+
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).

 

   patch(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).

+
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).

 

   read(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).

+
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).

 

   search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

 

   search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

+
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).

 

   update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).

+
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. In R5, the conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).

 

   vread(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).

+
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).

 
Method Details

 

     Binary_create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
+  
Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Binary_update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
+  
Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to update. (required)
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     ConceptMap_search_translate(parent, code=None, conceptMapVersion=None, source=None, system=None, target=None, url=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Translates a code from one value set to another by searching for appropriate concept maps. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
+  
Translates a code from one value set to another by searching for appropriate concept maps. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name for the FHIR store containing the concept map(s) to use for the translation. (required)
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     ConceptMap_translate(name, code=None, conceptMapVersion=None, system=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Translates a code from one value set to another using a concept map. You can provide your own concept maps to translate any code system to another code system. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
+  
Translates a code from one value set to another using a concept map. You can provide your own concept maps to translate any code system to another code system. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)), [R5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The URL for the concept map to use for the translation. (required)
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Encounter_everything(name, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)
-  
Retrieves an Encounter resource and resources related to that Encounter. Implements the FHIR extended operation Encounter-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/encounter-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/encounter-operations.html#everything), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/encounter-operation-everything.html). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The Encounter resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the Encounter resource, including attachments and binaries. * Resources directly referencing the Encounter resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the Encounter Compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-encounter.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. * Resources referencing to the Encounter resource through the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/encounter-associatedEncounter" extension.
+  
Retrieves an Encounter resource and resources related to that Encounter. Implements the FHIR extended operation Encounter-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/encounter-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/encounter-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/encounter-operation-everything.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/encounter-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The Encounter resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the Encounter resource, including attachments and binaries. * Resources directly referencing the Encounter resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the Encounter Compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-encounter.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. * Resources referencing to the Encounter resource through the "http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/encounter-associatedEncounter" extension.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Name of the Encounter resource for which the information is required. (required)
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Observation_lastn(parent, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Retrieves the N most recent `Observation` resources for a subject matching search criteria specified as query parameters, grouped by `Observation.code`, sorted from most recent to oldest. Implements the FHIR extended operation Observation-lastn ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/observation-operations.html#lastn), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/observation-operation-lastn.html)). DSTU2 doesn't define the Observation-lastn method, but the server supports it the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. The following search parameters must be provided: - `subject` or `patient` to specify a subject for the Observation. - `code`, `category` or any of the composite parameters that include `code`. Any other valid Observation search parameters can also be provided. This operation accepts an additional query parameter `max`, which specifies N, the maximum number of Observations to return from each group, with a default of 1. Searches with over 1000 results are rejected. Results are counted before grouping and limiting the results with `max`. To stay within the limit, constrain these searches using Observation search parameters such as `_lastUpdated` or `date`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
+  
Retrieves the N most recent `Observation` resources for a subject matching search criteria specified as query parameters, grouped by `Observation.code`, sorted from most recent to oldest. Implements the FHIR extended operation Observation-lastn ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/observation-operations.html#lastn), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/observation-operation-lastn.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/observation-operation-lastn.html)). DSTU2 doesn't define the Observation-lastn method, but the server supports it the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. The following search parameters must be provided: - `subject` or `patient` to specify a subject for the Observation. - `code`, `category` or any of the composite parameters that include `code`. Any other valid Observation search parameters can also be provided. This operation accepts an additional query parameter `max`, which specifies N, the maximum number of Observations to return from each group, with a default of 1. Searches with over 1000 results are rejected. Results are counted before grouping and limiting the results with `max`. To stay within the limit, constrain these searches using Observation search parameters such as `_lastUpdated` or `date`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
@@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Patient_everything(name, end=None, start=None, x__xgafv=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)
-  
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).
+  
Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Name of the `Patient` resource for which the information is required. (required)
@@ -537,11 +537,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     Resource_validate(parent, type, body=None, profile=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
+  
Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store that holds the profiles being used for validation. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     capabilities(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.
+  
Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve the capabilities for. (required)
@@ -635,11 +635,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     conditionalDelete(parent, type, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Deletes FHIR resources that match a search query. Implements the FHIR standard conditional delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.12.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.13.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#3.1.0.7.1)). If multiple resources match, all matching resources are deleted. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. Not all FHIR resources that match the search query might be deleted because, by default, a maximum of 100 FHIR resources can be deleted. The number of FHIR resources that can be deleted depends on the page size of the returned resources, which you can control using the `_count` query parameter. Even when using `_count`, you can delete a maximum 1,000 FHIR resources per each call of `conditionalDelete`. Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.delete` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalDelete`, see [Conditionally deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_deleting_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Deletes FHIR resources that match a search query. Implements the FHIR standard conditional delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.12.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.13.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#3.1.0.7.1), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#3.1.0.7.1)). If multiple resources match, all matching resources are deleted. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. Not all FHIR resources that match the search query might be deleted because, by default, a maximum of 100 FHIR resources can be deleted. The number of FHIR resources that can be deleted depends on the page size of the returned resources, which you can control using the `_count` query parameter. Even when using `_count`, you can delete a maximum 1,000 FHIR resources per each call of `conditionalDelete`. Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.delete` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalDelete`, see [Conditionally deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_deleting_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -654,11 +654,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     conditionalPatch(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates part of that resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard conditional patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a conditional patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` permission on the parent FHIR store and the `healthcare.fhirResources.patch` permission on the requested FHIR store resource. For samples that show how to call `conditionalPatch`, see [Conditionally patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_patching_a_fhir_resource).
+  
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates part of that resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard conditional patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a conditional patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` permission on the parent FHIR store and the `healthcare.fhirResources.patch` permission on the requested FHIR store resource. For samples that show how to call `conditionalPatch`, see [Conditionally patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_patching_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -693,11 +693,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     conditionalUpdate(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.10.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cond-update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cond-update)). Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.update` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).
+  
If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.10.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cond-update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cond-update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cond-update)). Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.update` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -732,11 +732,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     create(parent, type, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store this resource belongs to. (required)
-  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
+  type: string, Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     delete(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to delete. (required)
@@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     executeBundle(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction and history operations. ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch`, `transaction` and `history`, processing `batch` and `transaction` bundles according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a `transaction` or `history` bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. `history` bundles also check the `import` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).
+  
Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction and history operations. ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch`, `transaction` and `history`, processing `batch` and `transaction` bundles according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a `transaction` or `history` bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. `history` bundles also check the `import` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store in which this bundle will be executed. (required)
@@ -834,7 +834,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     history(name, x__xgafv=None, x_at=None, x_count=None, x_page_token=None, x_since=None)
-  
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).
+  
Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to retrieve. (required)
@@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     patch(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to update. (required)
@@ -901,7 +901,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     read(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to retrieve. (required)
@@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     search(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
@@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request to search the resources in the specified FHIR store.
-  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).
+  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -958,16 +958,16 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     search_type(parent, resourceType, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
+  
Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` "next", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Name of the FHIR store to retrieve resources from. (required)
-  resourceType: string, Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). (required)
+  resourceType: string, Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request to search the resources in the specified FHIR store.
-  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).
+  "resourceType": "A String", # Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     update(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).
+  
Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. In R5, the conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource to update. (required)
@@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     vread(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).
+  
Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the resource version to retrieve. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
index f754ea9032..4c95e43d4d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.html
@@ -86,10 +86,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
 

   applyAdminConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.

+
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.

 

   applyConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.

+
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.

 

   bulk_export_group(name, organizeOutputBy=None, outputFormat=None, x__xgafv=None, x_since=None, x_type=None)

 
Bulk exports a Group resource and resources in the member field, including related resources for each Patient member. The export for each Patient is identical to a GetPatientEverything request. Implements the FHIR implementation guide [$export group of patients](https://build.fhir.org/ig/HL7/bulk-data/export.html#endpoint---group-of-patients). The following headers must be set in the request: * `Accept`: specifies the format of the `OperationOutcome` response. Only `application/fhir+json` is supported. * `Prefer`: specifies whether the response is immediate or asynchronous. Must be to `respond-async` because only asynchronous responses are supported. Specify the destination for the server to write result files by setting the Cloud Storage location bulk_export_gcs_destination on the FHIR store. URI of an existing Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced. Supports the following query parameters: * `_type`: string of comma-delimited FHIR resource types. If provided, only resources of the specified type(s) are exported. * `_since`: if provided, only resources updated after the specified time are exported. * `_outputFormat`: optional, specify ndjson to export data in NDJSON format. Exported file names use the format: {export_id}_{resource_type}.ndjson. * `organizeOutputBy`: resource type to organize the output by. Required and must be set to `Patient`. When specified, output files are organized by instances of the specified resource type, including the resource, referenced resources, and resources that contain references to that resource. On success, the `Content-Location` header of response is set to a URL that you can use to query the status of the export. The URL is in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}/operations/{export_id}`. See get-fhir-operation-status for more information. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error.

@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Deletes the specified FHIR store and removes all resources within it.

 

   explainDataAccess(name, resourceId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource.

+
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.

 

   export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Export resources from the FHIR store to the specified destination. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the status of the export by calling GetOperation. Immediate fatal errors appear in the error field, errors are also logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Otherwise, when the operation finishes, a detailed response of type ExportResourcesResponse is returned in the response field. The metadata field type for this operation is OperationMetadata.

@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Method Details

 

     applyAdminConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.
+  
Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store to enforce, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     applyConsents(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.
+  
Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store to enforce, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
@@ -341,8 +341,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -401,12 +401,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
-          "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-            "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-            "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-          },
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
             "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
@@ -634,8 +630,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -657,7 +653,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -694,12 +690,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
-          "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-            "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-            "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-          },
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
             "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
@@ -920,16 +912,12 @@ 
Method Details

   
De-identifies data from the source store and writes it to the destination store. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. If the request is successful, the response field type is DeidentifyFhirStoreSummary. The number of resources processed are tracked in Operation.metadata. Error details are logged to Cloud Logging. For more information, see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging).
 
 Args:
-  sourceStore: string, Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
+  sourceStore: string, Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. R5 stores are not supported. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Creates a new FHIR store with sensitive information de-identified.
   "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Deidentify configuration. Only one of `config` and `gcs_config_uri` can be specified.
-    "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-      "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-      "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-    },
     "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
       "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
       "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
@@ -1186,7 +1174,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     explainDataAccess(name, resourceId=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource.
+  
Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the FHIR store to enforce, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. (required)
@@ -1365,8 +1353,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -1388,7 +1376,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -1425,12 +1413,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
-          "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-            "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-            "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-          },
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
             "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
@@ -1834,8 +1818,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
         "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
       },
-      "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-      "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+      "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+      "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
         "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
           "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
         },
@@ -1857,7 +1841,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "a_key": "A String",
       },
       "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-      "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+      "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
         "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
         "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
       },
@@ -1894,12 +1878,8 @@ 
Method Details

             },
             "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
           },
-          "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+          "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
             "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
-              "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-                "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-                "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-              },
               "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
                 "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
                 "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
@@ -2145,8 +2125,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -2168,7 +2148,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -2205,12 +2185,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
-          "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-            "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-            "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-          },
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
             "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
@@ -2438,8 +2414,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "bulkExportGcsDestination": { # The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API. # Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination.
     "uriPrefix": "A String", # Optional. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.
   },
-  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.
-  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources.
+  "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": "A String", # Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.
+  "consentConfig": { # Configures whether to enforce consent for the FHIR store and which consent enforcement version is being used. # Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version.
     "accessDeterminationLogConfig": { # Configures consent audit log config for FHIR create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations. Cloud audit log for healthcare API must be [enabled](https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/audit/configure-data-access#config-console-enable). The consent-related logs are included as part of `protoPayload.metadata`. # Optional. Specifies how the server logs the consent-aware requests. If not specified, the `AccessDeterminationLogConfig.LogLevel.MINIMUM` option is used.
       "logLevel": "A String", # Optional. Controls the amount of detail to include as part of the audit logs.
     },
@@ -2461,7 +2437,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "name": "A String", # Output only. Identifier. Resource name of the FHIR store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.
-  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource".
+  "notificationConfig": { # Specifies where to send notifications upon changes to a data store. # Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, "action":"CreateResource". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead.
     "pubsubTopic": "A String", # The [Pub/Sub](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/) topic that notifications of changes are published on. Supplied by the client. PubsubMessage.Data contains the resource name. PubsubMessage.MessageId is the ID of this message. It is guaranteed to be unique within the topic. PubsubMessage.PublishTime is the time at which the message was published. Notifications are only sent if the topic is non-empty. [Topic names](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/overview#names) must be scoped to a project. Cloud Healthcare API service account must have publisher permissions on the given Pub/Sub topic. Not having adequate permissions causes the calls that send notifications to fail. If a notification can't be published to Pub/Sub, errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). If the number of errors exceeds a certain rate, some aren't submitted. Note that not all operations trigger notifications, see [Configuring Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/pubsub) for specific details.
     "sendForBulkImport": True or False, # Indicates whether or not to send Pub/Sub notifications on bulk import. Only supported for DICOM imports.
   },
@@ -2498,12 +2474,8 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "writeDisposition": "A String", # Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.
       },
-      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).
+      "deidentifiedStoreDestination": { # Contains configuration for streaming de-identified FHIR export. # The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores.
         "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # The configuration to use when de-identifying resources that are added to this store.
-          "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-            "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-            "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-          },
           "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
             "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
             "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html
index 870dbd0d88..37c99f2d71 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/healthcare_v1beta1.projects.locations.datasets.html
@@ -202,16 +202,12 @@ 
Method Details

   
Creates a new dataset containing de-identified data from the source dataset. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. If the request is successful, the response field type is DeidentifySummary. The LRO result may still be successful if de-identification fails for some resources. The new de-identified dataset will not contain these failed resources. The number of resources processed are tracked in Operation.metadata. Error details are logged to Cloud Logging. For more information, see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging).
 
 Args:
-  sourceDataset: string, Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`. (required)
+  sourceDataset: string, Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`. R5 FHIR stores are not supported and will be skipped. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Redacts identifying information from the specified dataset.
   "config": { # Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime. # Deidentify configuration. Only one of `config` and `gcs_config_uri` can be specified.
-    "annotation": { # Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation. # Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created.
-      "annotationStoreName": "A String", # The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.
-      "storeQuote": True or False, # If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.
-    },
     "dicom": { # Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores. # Configures de-id of application/DICOM content. Deprecated. Use `dicom_tag_config` instead.
       "filterProfile": "A String", # Tag filtering profile that determines which tags to keep/remove.
       "keepList": { # List of tags to be filtered. # List of tags to keep. Remove all other tags.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json
index 4b4f5a907a..284b292921 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1.json
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "sourceDataset": {
-"description": "Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`.",
+"description": "Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`. R5 FHIR stores are not supported and will be skipped.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -2959,7 +2959,7 @@
 "fhirStores": {
 "methods": {
 "applyAdminConsents": {
-"description": "Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.",
+"description": "Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:applyAdminConsents",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.applyAdminConsents",
@@ -2988,7 +2988,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "applyConsents": {
-"description": "Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.",
+"description": "Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:applyConsents",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.applyConsents",
@@ -3106,7 +3106,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "sourceStore": {
-"description": "Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.",
+"description": "Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. R5 stores are not supported.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/fhirStores/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -3152,7 +3152,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "explainDataAccess": {
-"description": "Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource.",
+"description": "Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:explainDataAccess",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.explainDataAccess",
@@ -3493,7 +3493,7 @@
 "fhir": {
 "methods": {
 "Binary-create": {
-"description": "Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
+"description": "Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Binary",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Binary-create",
@@ -3548,7 +3548,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Binary-update": {
-"description": "Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
+"description": "Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Binary/{BinaryId}",
 "httpMethod": "PUT",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Binary-update",
@@ -3666,7 +3666,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Patient-everything": {
-"description": "Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).",
+"description": "Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Patient/{PatientId}/$everything",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Patient-everything",
@@ -3749,7 +3749,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Resource-validate": {
-"description": "Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
+"description": "Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html). or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/$validate",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Resource-validate",
@@ -3771,7 +3771,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -3832,7 +3832,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "capabilities": {
-"description": "Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.",
+"description": "Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/metadata",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.capabilities",
@@ -3875,7 +3875,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -3909,7 +3909,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -3946,7 +3946,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -3966,7 +3966,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "create": {
-"description": "Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query, limited to searching by resource identifier. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. When using conditional create, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query, limited to searching by resource identifier. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. When using conditional create, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=system|value` or `identifier=value` - similar to the `search` method on resources with a specific identifier. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.create",
@@ -3983,7 +3983,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -4003,7 +4003,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "delete": {
-"description": "Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources will be moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources will be moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "DELETE",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.delete",
@@ -4029,7 +4029,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "executeBundle": {
-"description": "Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch` and `transaction`, processing them according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a transaction bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).",
+"description": "Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch` and `transaction`, processing them according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a transaction bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.executeBundle",
@@ -4058,7 +4058,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "history": {
-"description": "Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).",
+"description": "Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}/_history",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.history",
@@ -4105,7 +4105,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "patch": {
-"description": "Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "PATCH",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.patch",
@@ -4134,7 +4134,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "read": {
-"description": "Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.read",
@@ -4160,7 +4160,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "search": {
-"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
+"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/_search",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search",
@@ -4189,7 +4189,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "search-type": {
-"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
+"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{resourceType}/_search",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search-type",
@@ -4206,7 +4206,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "resourceType": {
-"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "location": "path",
 "required": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -4225,7 +4225,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "update": {
-"description": "Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. In R5, the conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "PUT",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.update",
@@ -4254,7 +4254,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "vread": {
-"description": "Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).",
+"description": "Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}/_history/{_historyId}",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.vread",
@@ -5094,7 +5094,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250430",
+"revision": "20250526",
 "rootUrl": "https://healthcare.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AccessDeterminationLogConfig": {
@@ -6673,7 +6673,7 @@
 "description": "Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination."
 },
 "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": {
-"description": "Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.",
+"description": "Optional. Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.",
 "enum": [
 "COMPLEX_DATA_TYPE_REFERENCE_PARSING_UNSPECIFIED",
 "DISABLED",
@@ -6688,7 +6688,7 @@
 },
 "consentConfig": {
 "$ref": "ConsentConfig",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version."
 },
 "defaultSearchHandlingStrict": {
 "description": "Optional. If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false.",
@@ -6720,7 +6720,7 @@
 "notificationConfig": {
 "$ref": "NotificationConfig",
 "deprecated": true,
-"description": "Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, \"action\":\"CreateResource\"."
+"description": "Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, \"action\":\"CreateResource\". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead."
 },
 "notificationConfigs": {
 "description": "Optional. Specifies where and whether to send notifications upon changes to a FHIR store.",
@@ -6746,13 +6746,15 @@
 "VERSION_UNSPECIFIED",
 "DSTU2",
 "STU3",
-"R4"
+"R4",
+"R5"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Users must specify a version on store creation or an error is returned.",
 "Draft Standard for Trial Use, [Release 2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2)",
 "Standard for Trial Use, [Release 3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3)",
-"[Release 4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4)"
+"[Release 4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4)",
+"[Release 5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5)"
 ],
 "type": "string"
 }
@@ -8424,7 +8426,7 @@
 "id": "SearchResourcesRequest",
 "properties": {
 "resourceType": {
-"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -8598,7 +8600,7 @@
 },
 "deidentifiedStoreDestination": {
 "$ref": "DeidentifiedStoreDestination",
-"description": "The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging))."
+"description": "The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores."
 },
 "resourceTypes": {
 "description": "Optional. Supply a FHIR resource type (such as \"Patient\" or \"Observation\"). See https://www.hl7.org/fhir/valueset-resource-types.html for a list of all FHIR resource types. The server treats an empty list as an intent to stream all the supported resource types in this FHIR store.",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json
index c14d1230cc..47101f21bc 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/healthcare.v1beta1.json
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "sourceDataset": {
-"description": "Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`.",
+"description": "Required. Source dataset resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}`. R5 FHIR stores are not supported and will be skipped.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -471,150 +471,6 @@
 "resources": {
 "annotationStores": {
 "methods": {
-"create": {
-"description": "Creates a new Annotation store within the parent dataset.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores",
-"httpMethod": "POST",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.create",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"parent"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"annotationStoreId": {
-"description": "Required. The ID of the Annotation store that is being created. The string must match the following regex: `[\\p{L}\\p{N}_\\-\\.]{1,256}`.",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"parent": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the dataset this Annotation store belongs to.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/annotationStores",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationStore"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationStore"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"delete": {
-"description": "Deletes the specified Annotation store and removes all annotations that are contained within it.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}",
-"httpMethod": "DELETE",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.delete",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the Annotation store to delete.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Empty"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"evaluate": {
-"description": "Evaluate an Annotation store against a ground truth Annotation store. When the operation finishes successfully, a detailed response is returned of type EvaluateAnnotationStoreResponse, contained in the response. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}:evaluate",
-"httpMethod": "POST",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.evaluate",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The Annotation store to compare against `golden_store`, in the format of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:evaluate",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "EvaluateAnnotationStoreRequest"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Operation"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"export": {
-"description": "Export Annotations from the Annotation store. If the request is successful, a detailed response is returned of type ExportAnnotationsResponse, contained in the response field when the operation finishes. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}:export",
-"httpMethod": "POST",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.export",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the Annotation store to export annotations to, in the format of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:export",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "ExportAnnotationsRequest"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Operation"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"get": {
-"description": "Gets the specified Annotation store or returns NOT_FOUND if it does not exist.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}",
-"httpMethod": "GET",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.get",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the Annotation store to get.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
-"response": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationStore"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
 "getIamPolicy": {
 "description": "Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}:getIamPolicy",
@@ -647,112 +503,6 @@
 "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
 ]
 },
-"import": {
-"description": "Import Annotations to the Annotation store by loading data from the specified sources. If the request is successful, a detailed response is returned as of type ImportAnnotationsResponse, contained in the response field when the operation finishes. The metadata field type is OperationMetadata. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)).",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}:import",
-"httpMethod": "POST",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.import",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the Annotation store to which the server imports annotations, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}:import",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "ImportAnnotationsRequest"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Operation"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"list": {
-"description": "Lists the Annotation stores in the given dataset for a source store.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores",
-"httpMethod": "GET",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.list",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"parent"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"filter": {
-"description": "Restricts stores returned to those matching a filter. The following syntax is available: * A string field value can be written as text inside quotation marks, for example `\"query text\"`. The only valid relational operation for text fields is equality (`=`), where text is searched within the field, rather than having the field be equal to the text. For example, `\"Comment = great\"` returns messages with `great` in the comment field. * A number field value can be written as an integer, a decimal, or an exponential. The valid relational operators for number fields are the equality operator (`=`), along with the less than/greater than operators (`<`, `<=`, `>`, `>=`). Note that there is no inequality (`!=`) operator. You can prepend the `NOT` operator to an expression to negate it. * A date field value must be written in `yyyy-mm-dd` form. Fields with date and time use the RFC3339 time format. Leading zeros are required for one-digit months and days. The valid relational operators for date fields are the equality operator (`=`) , along with the less than/greater than operators (`<`, `<=`, `>`, `>=`). Note that there is no inequality (`!=`) operator. You can prepend the `NOT` operator to an expression to negate it. * Multiple field query expressions can be combined in one query by adding `AND` or `OR` operators between the expressions. If a boolean operator appears within a quoted string, it is not treated as special, it's just another part of the character string to be matched. You can prepend the `NOT` operator to an expression to negate it. Only filtering on labels is supported, for example `labels.key=value`.",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"pageSize": {
-"description": "Limit on the number of Annotation stores to return in a single response. If not specified, 100 is used. May not be larger than 1000.",
-"format": "int32",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "integer"
-},
-"pageToken": {
-"description": "The next_page_token value returned from the previous List request, if any.",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"parent": {
-"description": "Required. Name of the dataset.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/annotationStores",
-"response": {
-"$ref": "ListAnnotationStoresResponse"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"patch": {
-"description": "Updates the specified Annotation store.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}",
-"httpMethod": "PATCH",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.patch",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-},
-"updateMask": {
-"description": "Required. The update mask applies to the resource. For the `FieldMask` definition, see https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#fieldmask",
-"format": "google-fieldmask",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationStore"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationStore"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
 "setIamPolicy": {
 "description": "Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}:setIamPolicy",
@@ -801,187 +551,10 @@
 },
 "path": "v1beta1/{+resource}:testIamPermissions",
 "request": {
-"$ref": "TestIamPermissionsRequest"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "TestIamPermissionsResponse"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-}
-},
-"resources": {
-"annotations": {
-"methods": {
-"create": {
-"description": "Creates a new Annotation record. It is valid to create Annotation objects for the same source more than once since a unique ID is assigned to each record by this service.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}/annotations",
-"httpMethod": "POST",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.annotations.create",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"parent"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"parent": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the Annotation store this annotation belongs to. For example, `projects/my-project/locations/us-central1/datasets/mydataset/annotationStores/myannotationstore`.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/annotations",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "Annotation"
-},
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Annotation"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"delete": {
-"description": "Deletes an Annotation or returns NOT_FOUND if it does not exist.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}/annotations/{annotationsId}",
-"httpMethod": "DELETE",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.annotations.delete",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the Annotation to delete.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+/annotations/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Empty"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"get": {
-"description": "Gets an Annotation.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}/annotations/{annotationsId}",
-"httpMethod": "GET",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.annotations.get",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the Annotation to retrieve.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+/annotations/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
-"response": {
-"$ref": "Annotation"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"list": {
-"description": "Lists the Annotations in the given Annotation store for a source resource.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}/annotations",
-"httpMethod": "GET",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.annotations.list",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"parent"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"filter": {
-"description": "Restricts Annotations returned to those matching a filter. Functions available for filtering are: - `matches(\"annotation_source.cloud_healthcare_source.name\", substring)`. Filter on `cloud_healthcare_source.name`. For example: `matches(\"annotation_source.cloud_healthcare_source.name\", \"some source\")`. - `matches(\"annotation\", substring)`. Filter on all fields of annotation. For example: `matches(\"annotation\", \"some-content\")`. - `type(\"text\")`, `type(\"image\")`, `type(\"resource\")`. Filter on the type of annotation `data`.",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"pageSize": {
-"description": "Limit on the number of Annotations to return in a single response. If not specified, 100 is used. May not be larger than 1000.",
-"format": "int32",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "integer"
-},
-"pageToken": {
-"description": "The next_page_token value returned from the previous List request, if any.",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"parent": {
-"description": "Required. Name of the Annotation store to retrieve Annotations from.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-},
-"view": {
-"description": "Controls which fields are populated in the response.",
-"enum": [
-"ANNOTATION_VIEW_UNSPECIFIED",
-"ANNOTATION_VIEW_BASIC",
-"ANNOTATION_VIEW_FULL"
-],
-"enumDescriptions": [
-"Same as BASIC.",
-"Only `name`, `annotation_source` and `custom_data` fields are populated.",
-"All fields are populated."
-],
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/annotations",
-"response": {
-"$ref": "ListAnnotationsResponse"
-},
-"scopes": [
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
-"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
-]
-},
-"patch": {
-"description": "Updates the Annotation.",
-"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/annotationStores/{annotationStoresId}/annotations/{annotationsId}",
-"httpMethod": "PATCH",
-"id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.annotationStores.annotations.patch",
-"parameterOrder": [
-"name"
-],
-"parameters": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}/annotations/{annotation_id}`.",
-"location": "path",
-"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/annotationStores/[^/]+/annotations/[^/]+$",
-"required": true,
-"type": "string"
-},
-"updateMask": {
-"description": "Required. The update mask applies to the resource. For the `FieldMask` definition, see https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#fieldmask",
-"format": "google-fieldmask",
-"location": "query",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
-"request": {
-"$ref": "Annotation"
+"$ref": "TestIamPermissionsRequest"
 },
 "response": {
-"$ref": "Annotation"
+"$ref": "TestIamPermissionsResponse"
 },
 "scopes": [
 "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-healthcare",
@@ -989,8 +562,6 @@
 ]
 }
 }
-}
-}
 },
 "consentStores": {
 "methods": {
@@ -3520,7 +3091,7 @@
 "fhirStores": {
 "methods": {
 "applyAdminConsents": {
-"description": "Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.",
+"description": "Applies the admin Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindexes the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consents. This method also updates the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field of the FhirStore unless `validate_only=true` in ApplyAdminConsentsRequest. Any admin Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyAdminConsents again for the change to take effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the resources that were reindexed, by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyAdminConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that were reindexed. If at least one Consent resource contains an error or fails be be enforced for any reason, the method returns an error instead of an Operation. No resources will be reindexed and the `consent_config.enforced_admin_consents` field will be unchanged. To enforce a consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:applyAdminConsents",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.applyAdminConsents",
@@ -3549,7 +3120,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "applyConsents": {
-"description": "Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore.",
+"description": "Apply the Consent resources for the FHIR store and reindex the underlying resources in the FHIR store according to the aggregate consent. The aggregate consent of the patient in scope in this request replaces any previous call of this method. Any Consent resource change after this operation execution (including deletion) requires you to call ApplyConsents again to have effect. This method returns an Operation that can be used to track the progress of the consent resources that were processed by calling GetOperation. Upon completion, the ApplyConsentsResponse additionally contains the number of resources that was reindexed. Errors are logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). To enforce consent check for data access, `consent_config.access_enforced` must be set to true for the FhirStore. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:applyConsents",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.applyConsents",
@@ -3696,7 +3267,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "sourceStore": {
-"description": "Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`.",
+"description": "Required. Source FHIR store resource name. For example, `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/fhirStores/{fhir_store_id}`. R5 stores are not supported.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/datasets/[^/]+/fhirStores/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -3742,7 +3313,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "explainDataAccess": {
-"description": "Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource.",
+"description": "Explains all the permitted/denied actor, purpose and environment for a given resource. FHIR Consent is not supported in DSTU2 or R5.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}:explainDataAccess",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.explainDataAccess",
@@ -4141,7 +3712,7 @@
 "fhir": {
 "methods": {
 "Binary-create": {
-"description": "Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
+"description": "Creates a FHIR Binary resource. This method can be used to create a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is created with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as [`fhir.create`](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir/create). If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it's treated in the same way as non-FHIR data (e.g., images, zip archives, pdf files, documents). When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 1 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty `201 Created` response is returned. The newly created resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Binary",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Binary-create",
@@ -4196,7 +3767,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Binary-update": {
-"description": "Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
+"description": "Updates the entire contents of a Binary resource. If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. This method can be used to update a Binary resource either by using one of the accepted FHIR JSON content types, or as a raw data stream. If a resource is updated with this method using the FHIR content type this method's behavior is the same as `update`. If a resource type other than Binary is used in the request it will be treated in the same way as non-FHIR data. When a non-FHIR content type is used in the request, a Binary resource will be generated using the ID from the resource path, and the uploaded data will be stored in the `content` field (`DSTU2` and `STU3`), or the `data` field (`R4` and `R5`). The Binary resource's `contentType` will be filled in using the value of the `Content-Type` header, and the `securityContext` field (not present in `DSTU2`) will be populated from the `X-Security-Context` header if it exists. At this time `securityContext` has no special behavior in the Cloud Healthcare API. Note: the limit on data ingested through this method is 2 GB. For best performance, use a non-FHIR data type instead of wrapping the data in a Binary resource. Some of the Healthcare API features, such as [exporting to BigQuery](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/fhir-export-bigquery) or [Pub/Sub notifications](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/fhir-pubsub#behavior_when_a_fhir_resource_is_too_large_or_traffic_is_high) with full resource content, do not support Binary resources that are larger than 10 MB. In these cases the resource's `data` field will be omitted. Instead, the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/data-absent-reason\" extension will be present to indicate that including the data is `unsupported`. On success, an empty 200 OK response will be returned, or a 201 Created if the resource did not exit. The resource's ID and version are returned in the Location header. Using `Prefer: representation=resource` is not allowed for this method. The definition of the Binary REST API can be found at https://hl7.org/fhir/binary.html#rest.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Binary/{BinaryId}",
 "httpMethod": "PUT",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Binary-update",
@@ -4251,7 +3822,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "ConceptMap-search-translate": {
-"description": "Translates a code from one value set to another by searching for appropriate concept maps. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
+"description": "Translates a code from one value set to another by searching for appropriate concept maps. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/ConceptMap/$translate",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.ConceptMap-search-translate",
@@ -4307,7 +3878,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "ConceptMap-translate": {
-"description": "Translates a code from one value set to another using a concept map. You can provide your own concept maps to translate any code system to another code system. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
+"description": "Translates a code from one value set to another using a concept map. You can provide your own concept maps to translate any code system to another code system. Implements the FHIR standard $translate operation ([DSTU2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [STU3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3/operation-conceptmap-translate.html), [R4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)), [R5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5/operation-conceptmap-translate.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a FHIR Parameters resource, which includes the translation result. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/ConceptMap/{ConceptMapId}/$translate",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.ConceptMap-translate",
@@ -4374,7 +3945,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Encounter-everything": {
-"description": "Retrieves an Encounter resource and resources related to that Encounter. Implements the FHIR extended operation Encounter-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/encounter-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/encounter-operations.html#everything), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/encounter-operation-everything.html). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The Encounter resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the Encounter resource, including attachments and binaries. * Resources directly referencing the Encounter resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the Encounter Compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-encounter.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. * Resources referencing to the Encounter resource through the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/encounter-associatedEncounter\" extension.",
+"description": "Retrieves an Encounter resource and resources related to that Encounter. Implements the FHIR extended operation Encounter-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/encounter-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/encounter-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/encounter-operation-everything.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/encounter-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The Encounter resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the Encounter resource, including attachments and binaries. * Resources directly referencing the Encounter resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the Encounter Compartment definition ([DSTU2](http://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-encounter.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R4](http://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-encounter.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. * Resources referencing to the Encounter resource through the \"http://hl7.org/fhir/StructureDefinition/encounter-associatedEncounter\" extension.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Encounter/{EncounterId}/$everything",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Encounter-everything",
@@ -4421,7 +3992,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Observation-lastn": {
-"description": "Retrieves the N most recent `Observation` resources for a subject matching search criteria specified as query parameters, grouped by `Observation.code`, sorted from most recent to oldest. Implements the FHIR extended operation Observation-lastn ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/observation-operations.html#lastn), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/observation-operation-lastn.html)). DSTU2 doesn't define the Observation-lastn method, but the server supports it the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. The following search parameters must be provided: - `subject` or `patient` to specify a subject for the Observation. - `code`, `category` or any of the composite parameters that include `code`. Any other valid Observation search parameters can also be provided. This operation accepts an additional query parameter `max`, which specifies N, the maximum number of Observations to return from each group, with a default of 1. Searches with over 1000 results are rejected. Results are counted before grouping and limiting the results with `max`. To stay within the limit, constrain these searches using Observation search parameters such as `_lastUpdated` or `date`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
+"description": "Retrieves the N most recent `Observation` resources for a subject matching search criteria specified as query parameters, grouped by `Observation.code`, sorted from most recent to oldest. Implements the FHIR extended operation Observation-lastn ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/observation-operations.html#lastn), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/observation-operation-lastn.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/observation-operation-lastn.html)). DSTU2 doesn't define the Observation-lastn method, but the server supports it the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. The following search parameters must be provided: - `subject` or `patient` to specify a subject for the Observation. - `code`, `category` or any of the composite parameters that include `code`. Any other valid Observation search parameters can also be provided. This operation accepts an additional query parameter `max`, which specifies N, the maximum number of Observations to return from each group, with a default of 1. Searches with over 1000 results are rejected. Results are counted before grouping and limiting the results with `max`. To stay within the limit, constrain these searches using Observation search parameters such as `_lastUpdated` or `date`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Observation/$lastn",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Observation-lastn",
@@ -4484,7 +4055,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Patient-everything": {
-"description": "Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).",
+"description": "Retrieves a Patient resource and resources related to that patient. Implements the FHIR extended operation Patient-everything ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/patient-operations.html#everything), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/patient-operations.html#everything), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/patient-operation-everything.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/patient-operation-everything.html)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the operation. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The resources in scope for the response are: * The patient resource itself. * All the resources directly referenced by the patient resource. * Resources directly referencing the patient resource that meet the inclusion criteria. The inclusion criteria are based on the membership rules in the patient compartment definition ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/compartment-patient.html), [STU3](http://www.hl7.org/fhir/stu3/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/compartmentdefinition-patient.html), [R5](http://hl7.org/fhir/R5/compartmentdefinition-patient.html)), which details the eligible resource types and referencing search parameters. For samples that show how to call `Patient-everything`, see [Getting all patient compartment resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_all_patient_compartment_resources).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/Patient/{PatientId}/$everything",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Patient-everything",
@@ -4619,7 +4190,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "Resource-validate": {
-"description": "Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
+"description": "Validates an input FHIR resource's conformance to its profiles and the profiles configured on the FHIR store. Implements the FHIR extended operation $validate ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resource-operations.html#validate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resource-operations.html#validate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resource-operation-validate.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resource-operation-validate.html)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The `Parameters` input syntax is not supported. The `profile` query parameter can be used to request that the resource only be validated against a specific profile. If a profile with the given URL cannot be found in the FHIR store then an error is returned. Errors generated by validation contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/$validate",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.Resource-validate",
@@ -4641,7 +4212,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), or [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type of the resource being validated. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), or [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -4702,7 +4273,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "capabilities": {
-"description": "Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.",
+"description": "Gets the FHIR capability statement ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/capabilitystatement.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/capabilitystatement.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/capabilitystatement.html)), or the [conformance statement](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/conformance.html) in the DSTU2 case for the store, which contains a description of functionality supported by the server. Implements the FHIR standard capabilities interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#capabilities), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#capabilities), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#capabilities)), or the [conformance interaction](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#conformance) in the DSTU2 case. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `CapabilityStatement` resource.",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/metadata",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.capabilities",
@@ -4728,7 +4299,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "conditionalDelete": {
-"description": "Deletes FHIR resources that match a search query. Implements the FHIR standard conditional delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.12.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.13.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#3.1.0.7.1)). If multiple resources match, all matching resources are deleted. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. Not all FHIR resources that match the search query might be deleted because, by default, a maximum of 100 FHIR resources can be deleted. The number of FHIR resources that can be deleted depends on the page size of the returned resources, which you can control using the `_count` query parameter. Even when using `_count`, you can delete a maximum 1,000 FHIR resources per each call of `conditionalDelete`. Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.delete` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalDelete`, see [Conditionally deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_deleting_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Deletes FHIR resources that match a search query. Implements the FHIR standard conditional delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.12.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.13.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#3.1.0.7.1), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#3.1.0.7.1)). If multiple resources match, all matching resources are deleted. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. Not all FHIR resources that match the search query might be deleted because, by default, a maximum of 100 FHIR resources can be deleted. The number of FHIR resources that can be deleted depends on the page size of the returned resources, which you can control using the `_count` query parameter. Even when using `_count`, you can delete a maximum 1,000 FHIR resources per each call of `conditionalDelete`. Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.delete` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalDelete`, see [Conditionally deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_deleting_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}",
 "httpMethod": "DELETE",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.conditionalDelete",
@@ -4745,7 +4316,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to delete, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -4762,7 +4333,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "conditionalPatch": {
-"description": "If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates part of that resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard conditional patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a conditional patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` permission on the parent FHIR store and the `healthcare.fhirResources.patch` permission on the requested FHIR store resource. For samples that show how to call `conditionalPatch`, see [Conditionally patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_patching_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates part of that resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard conditional patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a conditional patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` permission on the parent FHIR store and the `healthcare.fhirResources.patch` permission on the requested FHIR store resource. For samples that show how to call `conditionalPatch`, see [Conditionally patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_patching_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}",
 "httpMethod": "PATCH",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.conditionalPatch",
@@ -4779,7 +4350,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -4799,7 +4370,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "conditionalUpdate": {
-"description": "If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.10.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cond-update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cond-update)). Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.update` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "If a resource is found based on the search criteria specified in the query parameters, updates the entire contents of that resource. Implements the FHIR standard conditional update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.10.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cond-update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cond-update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cond-update)). Search terms are provided as query parameters following the same pattern as the search method. If the search criteria identify more than one match, the request returns a `412 Precondition Failed` error. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body contains an `id`, and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. If the search criteria identify zero matches, and the supplied resource body does not contain an `id`, the resource is created with a server-assigned ID as per the create method. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method requires the`healthcare.fhirStores.searchResources` and `healthcare.fhirResources.update` permissions on the parent FHIR store. For samples that show how to call `conditionalUpdate`, see [Conditionally updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#conditionally_updating_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}",
 "httpMethod": "PUT",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.conditionalUpdate",
@@ -4816,7 +4387,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to update, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -4836,7 +4407,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "create": {
-"description": "Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Creates a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#create), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#create), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#create)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#create)), which creates a new resource with a server-assigned resource ID. Also supports the FHIR standard conditional create interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#ccreate), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#ccreate), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#ccreate)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#ccreate)), specified by supplying an `If-None-Exist` header containing a FHIR search query. If no resources match this search query, the server processes the create operation as normal. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource as it was created on the server, including the server-assigned resource ID and version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `create`, see [Creating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#creating_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.create",
@@ -4853,7 +4424,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
+"description": "Required. The FHIR resource type to create, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)). Must match the resource type in the provided content.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -4873,7 +4444,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "delete": {
-"description": "Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Deletes a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard delete interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#delete), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#delete), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#delete), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#delete)). Note: Unless resource versioning is disabled by setting the disable_resource_versioning flag on the FHIR store, the deleted resources are moved to a history repository that can still be retrieved through vread and related methods, unless they are removed by the purge method. For samples that show how to call `delete`, see [Deleting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#deleting_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "DELETE",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.delete",
@@ -4899,7 +4470,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "executeBundle": {
-"description": "Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction and history operations. ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch`, `transaction` and `history`, processing `batch` and `transaction` bundles according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a `transaction` or `history` bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. `history` bundles also check the `import` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).",
+"description": "Executes all the requests in the given Bundle. Implements the FHIR standard batch/transaction interaction and history operations. ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#transaction), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#transaction), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#transaction), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#transaction)). Supports all interactions within a bundle, except search. This method accepts Bundles of type `batch`, `transaction` and `history`, processing `batch` and `transaction` bundles according to the batch processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.1), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.1), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#brules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#brules)) and transaction processing rules ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#2.1.0.16.2), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#2.21.0.17.2), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#trules), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#trules)). The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR `Bundle` resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. For a batch bundle or a successful transaction, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `batch-response` or `transaction-response` containing one entry for each entry in the request, with the outcome of processing the entry. In the case of an error for a `transaction` or `history` bundle, the response body contains a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. This method checks permissions for each request in the bundle. The `executeBundle` permission is required to call this method, but you must also grant sufficient permissions to execute the individual requests in the bundle. For example, if the bundle contains a request to create a FHIR resource, the caller must also have been granted the `healthcare.fhirResources.create` permission. `history` bundles also check the `import` permission. You can use audit logs to view the permissions for `executeBundle` and each request in the bundle. For more information, see [Viewing Cloud Audit logs](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare-api/docs/how-tos/audit-logging). For samples that show how to call `executeBundle`, see [Managing FHIR resources using FHIR bundles](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-bundles).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.executeBundle",
@@ -4928,7 +4499,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "history": {
-"description": "Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).",
+"description": "Lists all the versions of a resource (including the current version and deleted versions) from the FHIR store. Implements the per-resource form of the FHIR standard history interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#history), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#history), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#history), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#history)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `history`, containing the version history sorted from most recent to oldest versions. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `history`, see [Listing FHIR resource versions](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#listing_fhir_resource_versions).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}/_history",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.history",
@@ -4975,7 +4546,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "patch": {
-"description": "Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Updates part of an existing resource by applying the operations specified in a [JSON Patch](http://jsonpatch.com/) document. Implements the FHIR standard patch interaction ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#patch), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#patch), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#patch)). DSTU2 doesn't define a patch method, but the server supports it in the same way it supports STU3. The request body must contain a JSON Patch document, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/json-patch+json`. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `patch`, see [Patching a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#patching_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "PATCH",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.patch",
@@ -5004,7 +4575,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "read": {
-"description": "Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Gets the contents of a FHIR resource. Implements the FHIR standard read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#read), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#read), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#read)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#read)). Also supports the FHIR standard conditional read interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#cread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#cread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#cread)), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#cread)) specified by supplying an `If-Modified-Since` header with a date/time value or an `If-None-Match` header with an ETag value. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `read`, see [Getting a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#getting_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.read",
@@ -5030,7 +4601,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "search": {
-"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
+"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/_search",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search",
@@ -5059,7 +4630,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "search-type": {
-"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
+"description": "Searches for resources in the given FHIR store according to criteria specified as query parameters. Implements the FHIR standard search interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#search), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#search), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#search), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#search)) using the search semantics described in the FHIR Search specification ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/search.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/search.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/search.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/search.html)). Supports four methods of search defined by the specification: * `GET [base]?[parameters]` to search across all resources. * `GET [base]/[type]?[parameters]` to search resources of a specified type. * `POST [base]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method across all resources. * `POST [base]/[type]/_search?[parameters]` as an alternate form having the same semantics as the `GET` method for the specified type. The `GET` and `POST` methods do not support compartment searches. The `POST` method does not support `application/x-www-form-urlencoded` search parameters. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of a `Bundle` resource of type `searchset`, containing the results of the search. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. The server's capability statement, retrieved through capabilities, indicates what search parameters are supported on each FHIR resource. A list of all search parameters defined by the specification can be found in the FHIR Search Parameter Registry ([STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/searchparameter-registry.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/searchparameter-registry.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/searchparameter-registry.html)). FHIR search parameters for DSTU2 can be found on each resource's definition page. Supported search modifiers: `:missing`, `:exact`, `:contains`, `:text`, `:in`, `:not-in`, `:above`, `:below`, `:[type]`, `:not`, and `recurse` (DSTU2 and STU3) or `:iterate` (R4 and R5). Supported search result parameters: `_sort`, `_count`, `_include`, `_revinclude`, `_summary=text`, `_summary=data`, and `_elements`. The maximum number of search results returned defaults to 100, which can be overridden by the `_count` parameter up to a maximum limit of 1000. The server might return fewer resources than requested to prevent excessively large responses. If there are additional results, the returned `Bundle` contains a link of `relation` \"next\", which has a `_page_token` parameter for an opaque pagination token that can be used to retrieve the next page. Resources with a total size larger than 5MB or a field count larger than 50,000 might not be fully searchable as the server might trim its generated search index in those cases. Note: FHIR resources are indexed asynchronously, so there might be a slight delay between the time a resource is created or changed, and the time when the change reflects in search results. The only exception is resource identifier data, which is indexed synchronously as a special index. As a result, searching using resource identifier is not subject to indexing delay. To use the special synchronous index, the search term for identifier should be in the pattern `identifier=[system]|[value]` or `identifier=[value]`, and any of the following search result parameters can be used: * `_count` * `_include` * `_revinclude` * `_summary` * `_elements` If your query contains any other search parameters, the standard asynchronous index will be used instead. Note that searching against the special index is optimized for resolving a small number of matches. The search isn't optimized if your identifier search criteria matches a large number (i.e. more than 2,000) of resources. For a search query that will match a large number of resources, you can avoiding using the special synchronous index by including an additional `_sort` parameter in your query. Use `_sort=-_lastUpdated` if you want to keep the default sorting order. Note: The special synchronous identifier index are currently disabled for DocumentReference and DocumentManifest searches. For samples and detailed information, see [Searching for FHIR resources](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-search) and [Advanced FHIR search features](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-advanced-search).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{resourceType}/_search",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.search-type",
@@ -5076,7 +4647,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "resourceType": {
-"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "location": "path",
 "required": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -5095,7 +4666,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "update": {
-"description": "Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).",
+"description": "Updates the entire contents of a resource. Implements the FHIR standard update interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#update), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#update), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#update), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#update)). If the specified resource does not exist and the FHIR store has enable_update_create set, creates the resource with the client-specified ID. It is strongly advised not to include or encode any sensitive data such as patient identifiers in client-specified resource IDs. Those IDs are part of the FHIR resource path recorded in Cloud Audit Logs and Pub/Sub notifications. Those IDs can also be contained in reference fields within other resources. The request body must contain a JSON-encoded FHIR resource, and the request headers must contain `Content-Type: application/fhir+json`. The resource must contain an `id` element having an identical value to the ID in the REST path of the request. On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the updated resource, including the server-assigned version ID. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. In R5, the conditional update interaction If-None-Match is supported, including the wildcard behaviour. For samples that show how to call `update`, see [Updating a FHIR resource](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#updating_a_fhir_resource).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}",
 "httpMethod": "PUT",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.update",
@@ -5124,7 +4695,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "vread": {
-"description": "Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).",
+"description": "Gets the contents of a version (current or historical) of a FHIR resource by version ID. Implements the FHIR standard vread interaction ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/http.html#vread), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/http.html#vread), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/http.html#vread), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/http.html#vread)). On success, the response body contains a JSON-encoded representation of the resource. Errors generated by the FHIR store contain a JSON-encoded `OperationOutcome` resource describing the reason for the error. If the request cannot be mapped to a valid API method on a FHIR store, a generic GCP error might be returned instead. For samples that show how to call `vread`, see [Retrieving a FHIR resource version](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/fhir-resources#retrieving_a_fhir_resource_version).",
 "flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/datasets/{datasetsId}/fhirStores/{fhirStoresId}/fhir/{fhirId}/{fhirId1}/_history/{_historyId}",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "healthcare.projects.locations.datasets.fhirStores.fhir.vread",
@@ -6017,7 +5588,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250430",
+"revision": "20250526",
 "rootUrl": "https://healthcare.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AccessDeterminationLogConfig": {
@@ -6196,84 +5767,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"Annotation": {
-"description": "An annotation record.",
-"id": "Annotation",
-"properties": {
-"annotationSource": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationSource",
-"description": "Required. Details of the source."
-},
-"customData": {
-"additionalProperties": {
-"type": "string"
-},
-"description": "Additional information for this annotation record, such as annotator and verifier information or study campaign.",
-"type": "object"
-},
-"imageAnnotation": {
-"$ref": "ImageAnnotation",
-"description": "Annotations for images. For example, bounding polygons."
-},
-"name": {
-"description": "Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}/annotations/{annotation_id}`.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"resourceAnnotation": {
-"$ref": "ResourceAnnotation",
-"description": "Annotations for resource. For example, classification tags."
-},
-"textAnnotation": {
-"$ref": "SensitiveTextAnnotation",
-"description": "Annotations for sensitive texts. For example, a range that describes the location of sensitive text."
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"AnnotationConfig": {
-"description": "Specifies how to store annotations during de-identification operation.",
-"id": "AnnotationConfig",
-"properties": {
-"annotationStoreName": {
-"description": "The name of the annotation store, in the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`). * The destination annotation store must be in the same project as the source data. De-identifying data across multiple projects is not supported. * The destination annotation store must exist when using DeidentifyDicomStore or DeidentifyFhirStore. DeidentifyDataset automatically creates the destination annotation store.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"storeQuote": {
-"description": "If set to true, the sensitive texts are included in SensitiveTextAnnotation of Annotation.",
-"type": "boolean"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"AnnotationSource": {
-"description": "AnnotationSource holds the source information of the annotation.",
-"id": "AnnotationSource",
-"properties": {
-"cloudHealthcareSource": {
-"$ref": "CloudHealthcareSource",
-"description": "Cloud Healthcare API resource."
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"AnnotationStore": {
-"description": "An Annotation store that can store annotation resources such as labels and tags for text, image and audio.",
-"id": "AnnotationStore",
-"properties": {
-"labels": {
-"additionalProperties": {
-"type": "string"
-},
-"description": "Optional. User-supplied key-value pairs used to organize Annotation stores. Label keys must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: \\p{Ll}\\p{Lo}{0,62} Label values must be between 1 and 63 characters long, have a UTF-8 encoding of maximum 128 bytes, and must conform to the following PCRE regular expression: [\\p{Ll}\\p{Lo}\\p{N}_-]{0,63} No more than 64 labels can be associated with a given store.",
-"type": "object"
-},
-"name": {
-"description": "Identifier. Resource name of the Annotation store, of the form `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ApplyAdminConsentsErrorDetail": {
 "description": "Contains the error details of the unsupported admin Consent resources for when the ApplyAdminConsents method fails to apply one or more Consent resources.",
 "id": "ApplyAdminConsentsErrorDetail",
@@ -6597,24 +6090,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"BoundingPoly": {
-"description": "A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation.",
-"id": "BoundingPoly",
-"properties": {
-"label": {
-"description": "A description of this polygon.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"vertices": {
-"description": "List of the vertices of this polygon.",
-"items": {
-"$ref": "Vertex"
-},
-"type": "array"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "BulkExportGcsDestination": {
 "description": "The configuration for exporting to Cloud Storage using the bulk export API.",
 "id": "BulkExportGcsDestination",
@@ -6721,17 +6196,6 @@
 "properties": {},
 "type": "object"
 },
-"CloudHealthcareSource": {
-"description": "Cloud Healthcare API resource.",
-"id": "CloudHealthcareSource",
-"properties": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Full path of a Cloud Healthcare API resource.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ConfigureSearchRequest": {
 "description": "Request to configure the search parameters for the specified FHIR store.",
 "id": "ConfigureSearchRequest",
@@ -7138,10 +6602,6 @@
 "description": "Configures de-id options specific to different types of content. Each submessage customizes the handling of an https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6838 media type or subtype. Configs are applied in a nested manner at runtime.",
 "id": "DeidentifyConfig",
 "properties": {
-"annotation": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationConfig",
-"description": "Configures how annotations, meaning that the location and infoType of sensitive information findings, are created during de-identification. If unspecified, no annotations are created."
-},
 "dicom": {
 "$ref": "DicomConfig",
 "deprecated": true,
@@ -7272,19 +6732,6 @@
 "properties": {},
 "type": "object"
 },
-"Detail": {
-"description": "Contains multiple sensitive information findings for each resource slice.",
-"id": "Detail",
-"properties": {
-"findings": {
-"items": {
-"$ref": "Finding"
-},
-"type": "array"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "DicomConfig": {
 "description": "Specifies the parameters needed for de-identification of DICOM stores.",
 "id": "DicomConfig",
@@ -7543,44 +6990,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"EvaluateAnnotationStoreRequest": {
-"description": "Request to evaluate an Annotation store against a ground truth [Annotation store].",
-"id": "EvaluateAnnotationStoreRequest",
-"properties": {
-"bigqueryDestination": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationBigQueryDestination",
-"description": "The BigQuery table where the server writes the output. BigQueryDestination requires the `roles/bigquery.dataEditor` and `roles/bigquery.jobUser` Cloud IAM roles."
-},
-"evalInfoTypeMapping": {
-"additionalProperties": {
-"type": "string"
-},
-"description": "Optional. InfoType mapping for `eval_store`. Different resources can map to the same infoType. For example, `PERSON_NAME`, `PERSON`, `NAME`, and `HUMAN` are different. To map all of these into a single infoType (such as `PERSON_NAME`), specify the following mapping: ``` info_type_mapping[\"PERSON\"] = \"PERSON_NAME\" info_type_mapping[\"NAME\"] = \"PERSON_NAME\" info_type_mapping[\"HUMAN\"] = \"PERSON_NAME\" ``` Unmentioned infoTypes, such as `DATE`, are treated as identity mapping. For example: ``` info_type_mapping[\"DATE\"] = \"DATE\" ``` InfoTypes are case-insensitive.",
-"type": "object"
-},
-"goldenInfoTypeMapping": {
-"additionalProperties": {
-"type": "string"
-},
-"description": "Optional. Similar to `eval_info_type_mapping`, infoType mapping for `golden_store`.",
-"type": "object"
-},
-"goldenStore": {
-"description": "Required. The Annotation store to use as ground truth, in the format of `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location_id}/datasets/{dataset_id}/annotationStores/{annotation_store_id}`.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"infoTypeConfig": {
-"$ref": "InfoTypeConfig"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"EvaluateAnnotationStoreResponse": {
-"description": "Response for successful Annotation store evaluation operations. This structure is included in the response upon operation completion.",
-"id": "EvaluateAnnotationStoreResponse",
-"properties": {},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "EvaluateUserConsentsRequest": {
 "description": "Evaluate a user's Consents for all matching User data mappings. Note: User data mappings are indexed asynchronously, causing slight delays between the time mappings are created or updated and when they are included in EvaluateUserConsents results.",
 "id": "EvaluateUserConsentsRequest",
@@ -7772,27 +7181,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"ExportAnnotationsRequest": {
-"description": "Request to export Annotations. The export operation is not atomic. If a failure occurs, any annotations already exported are not removed.",
-"id": "ExportAnnotationsRequest",
-"properties": {
-"bigqueryDestination": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationBigQueryDestination",
-"description": "The BigQuery output destination, which requires two IAM roles: `roles/bigquery.dataEditor` and `roles/bigquery.jobUser`."
-},
-"gcsDestination": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsDestination",
-"description": "The Cloud Storage destination, which requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role."
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"ExportAnnotationsResponse": {
-"description": "Response for successful annotation export operations. This structure is included in response upon operation completion.",
-"id": "ExportAnnotationsResponse",
-"properties": {},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ExportDicomDataRequest": {
 "description": "Exports data from the specified DICOM store. If a given resource, such as a DICOM object with the same SOPInstance UID, already exists in the output, it is overwritten with the version in the source dataset. Exported DICOM data persists when the DICOM store from which it was exported is deleted.",
 "id": "ExportDicomDataRequest",
@@ -8041,7 +7429,7 @@
 "description": "Optional. FHIR bulk export exports resources to the specified Cloud Storage destination. A Cloud Storage destination is a URI for a Cloud Storage directory where result files will be written. Only used in the spec-defined bulk $export methods. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM role on the destination."
 },
 "complexDataTypeReferenceParsing": {
-"description": "Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources.",
+"description": "Enable parsing of references within complex FHIR data types such as Extensions. If this value is set to ENABLED, then features like referential integrity and Bundle reference rewriting apply to all references. If this flag has not been specified the behavior of the FHIR store will not change, references in complex data types will not be parsed. New stores will have this value set to ENABLED after a notification period. Warning: turning on this flag causes processing existing resources to fail if they contain references to non-existent resources. Cannot be disabled in R5.",
 "enum": [
 "COMPLEX_DATA_TYPE_REFERENCE_PARSING_UNSPECIFIED",
 "DISABLED",
@@ -8056,7 +7444,7 @@
 },
 "consentConfig": {
 "$ref": "ConsentConfig",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether this store has consent enforcement. Not available for DSTU2 FHIR version due to absence of Consent resources. Not supported for R5 FHIR version."
 },
 "defaultSearchHandlingStrict": {
 "description": "If true, overrides the default search behavior for this FHIR store to `handling=strict` which returns an error for unrecognized search parameters. If false, uses the FHIR specification default `handling=lenient` which ignores unrecognized search parameters. The handling can always be changed from the default on an individual API call by setting the HTTP header `Prefer: handling=strict` or `Prefer: handling=lenient`. Defaults to false.",
@@ -8092,7 +7480,7 @@
 "notificationConfig": {
 "$ref": "NotificationConfig",
 "deprecated": true,
-"description": "Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, \"action\":\"CreateResource\"."
+"description": "Deprecated. Use `notification_configs` instead. If non-empty, publish all resource modifications of this FHIR store to this destination. The Pub/Sub message attributes contain a map with a string describing the action that has triggered the notification. For example, \"action\":\"CreateResource\". Not supported in R5. Use `notification_configs` instead."
 },
 "notificationConfigs": {
 "description": "Specifies where and whether to send notifications upon changes to a Fhir store.",
@@ -8122,13 +7510,15 @@
 "VERSION_UNSPECIFIED",
 "DSTU2",
 "STU3",
-"R4"
+"R4",
+"R5"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "VERSION_UNSPECIFIED is treated as STU3 to accommodate the existing FHIR stores.",
 "Draft Standard for Trial Use, [Release 2](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2)",
 "Standard for Trial Use, [Release 3](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/STU3)",
-"[Release 4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4)"
+"[Release 4](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R4)",
+"[Release 5](https://www.hl7.org/fhir/R5)"
 ],
 "type": "string"
 }
@@ -8218,7 +7608,7 @@
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "No action specified.",
 "Transform the entire field based on transformations specified in TextConfig. When the specified transformation cannot be applied to a field, RedactConfig is used. For example, a Crypto Hash transformation can't be applied to a FHIR Date field.",
-"Inspect and transform any found PHI. When `AnnotationConfig` is provided, annotations of PHI will be generated, except for Date and Datetime.",
+"Inspect and transform any found PHI.",
 "Do not transform."
 ],
 "type": "string"
@@ -8233,44 +7623,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"FilterList": {
-"description": "List of infoTypes to be filtered.",
-"id": "FilterList",
-"properties": {
-"infoTypes": {
-"description": "These infoTypes are based on after the `eval_info_type_mapping` and `golden_info_type_mapping`.",
-"items": {
-"type": "string"
-},
-"type": "array"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"Finding": {
-"id": "Finding",
-"properties": {
-"end": {
-"description": "Zero-based ending index of the found text, exclusively.",
-"format": "int64",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"infoType": {
-"description": "The type of information stored in this text range. For example, HumanName, BirthDate, or Address.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"quote": {
-"description": "The snippet of the sensitive text. This field is only populated during deidentification if `store_quote` is set to true in DeidentifyConfig.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"start": {
-"description": "Zero-based starting index of the found text, inclusively.",
-"format": "int64",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "GcsDestination": {
 "description": "The Cloud Storage output destination. The Cloud Healthcare Service Agent requires the `roles/storage.objectAdmin` Cloud IAM roles on the Cloud Storage location.",
 "id": "GcsDestination",
@@ -8325,71 +7677,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationBigQueryDestination": {
-"description": "The BigQuery table for export.",
-"id": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationBigQueryDestination",
-"properties": {
-"force": {
-"description": "Use `write_disposition` instead. If `write_disposition` is specified, this parameter is ignored. force=false is equivalent to write_disposition=WRITE_EMPTY and force=true is equivalent to write_disposition=WRITE_TRUNCATE.",
-"type": "boolean"
-},
-"schemaType": {
-"description": "Specifies the schema format to export.",
-"enum": [
-"SCHEMA_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
-"SIMPLE"
-],
-"enumDescriptions": [
-"Same as SIMPLE.",
-"A flatterned version of Annotation."
-],
-"type": "string"
-},
-"tableUri": {
-"description": "BigQuery URI to a table, up to 2000 characters long, must be of the form bq://projectId.bqDatasetId.tableId.",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"writeDisposition": {
-"description": "Determines if existing data in the destination dataset is overwritten, appended to, or not written if the tables contain data. If a write_disposition is specified, the `force` parameter is ignored.",
-"enum": [
-"WRITE_DISPOSITION_UNSPECIFIED",
-"WRITE_EMPTY",
-"WRITE_TRUNCATE",
-"WRITE_APPEND"
-],
-"enumDescriptions": [
-"Default behavior is the same as WRITE_EMPTY.",
-"Only export data if the destination table is empty.",
-"Erase all existing data in a table before writing the instances.",
-"Append data to the existing table."
-],
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsDestination": {
-"description": "The Cloud Storage location for export.",
-"id": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsDestination",
-"properties": {
-"uriPrefix": {
-"description": "The Cloud Storage destination to export to. URI for a Cloud Storage directory where the server writes result files, in the format `gs://{bucket-id}/{path/to/destination/dir}`. If there is no trailing slash, the service appends one when composing the object path. The user is responsible for creating the Cloud Storage bucket referenced in `uri_prefix`.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsSource": {
-"description": "Specifies the configuration for importing data from Cloud Storage.",
-"id": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsSource",
-"properties": {
-"uri": {
-"description": "Points to a Cloud Storage URI containing file(s) with content only. The URI must be in the following format: `gs://{bucket_id}/{object_id}`. The URI can include wildcards in `object_id` and thus identify multiple files. Supported wildcards: '*' to match 0 or more non-separator characters '**' to match 0 or more characters (including separators). Must be used at the end of a path and with no other wildcards in the path. Can also be used with a file extension (such as .dcm), which imports all files with the extension in the specified directory and its sub-directories. For example, `gs://my-bucket/my-directory/**.json` imports all files with .json extensions in `my-directory/` and its sub-directories. '?' to match 1 character All other URI formats are invalid. Files matching the wildcard are expected to contain content only, no metadata.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1ConsentGcsDestination": {
 "description": "The Cloud Storage location for export.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1ConsentGcsDestination",
@@ -8858,25 +8145,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"ImageAnnotation": {
-"description": "Image annotation.",
-"id": "ImageAnnotation",
-"properties": {
-"boundingPolys": {
-"description": "The list of polygons outlining the sensitive regions in the image.",
-"items": {
-"$ref": "BoundingPoly"
-},
-"type": "array"
-},
-"frameIndex": {
-"description": "0-based index of the image frame. For example, an image frame in a DICOM instance.",
-"format": "int32",
-"type": "integer"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ImageConfig": {
 "description": "Specifies how to handle de-identification of image pixels.",
 "id": "ImageConfig",
@@ -8916,22 +8184,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"ImportAnnotationsRequest": {
-"description": "Request to import Annotations. The Annotations to be imported must have client-supplied resource names which indicate the annotation resource. The import operation is not atomic. If a failure occurs, any annotations already imported are not removed.",
-"id": "ImportAnnotationsRequest",
-"properties": {
-"gcsSource": {
-"$ref": "GoogleCloudHealthcareV1beta1AnnotationGcsSource"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"ImportAnnotationsResponse": {
-"description": "Final response of importing Annotations in successful case. This structure is included in the response. It is only included when the operation finishes.",
-"id": "ImportAnnotationsResponse",
-"properties": {},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ImportDicomDataRequest": {
 "description": "Imports data into the specified DICOM store. Returns an error if any of the files to import are not DICOM files. This API accepts duplicate DICOM instances by ignoring the newly-pushed instance. It does not overwrite.",
 "id": "ImportDicomDataRequest",
@@ -9033,23 +8285,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"InfoTypeConfig": {
-"description": "Specifies how to use infoTypes for evaluation. For example, a user might only want to evaluate `PERSON`, `LOCATION`, and `AGE`.",
-"id": "InfoTypeConfig",
-"properties": {
-"evaluateList": {
-"$ref": "FilterList"
-},
-"ignoreList": {
-"$ref": "FilterList"
-},
-"strictMatching": {
-"description": "If `TRUE`, infoTypes described by `filter` are used for evaluation. Otherwise, infoTypes are not considered for evaluation. For example: * Annotated text: \"Toronto is a location\" * Finding 1: `{\"infoType\": \"PERSON\", \"quote\": \"Toronto\", \"start\": 0, \"end\": 7}` * Finding 2: `{\"infoType\": \"CITY\", \"quote\": \"Toronto\", \"start\": 0, \"end\": 7}` * Finding 3: `{}` * Ground truth: `{\"infoType\": \"LOCATION\", \"quote\": \"Toronto\", \"start\": 0, \"end\": 7}` When `strict_matching` is `TRUE`: * Finding 1: 1 false positive * Finding 2: 1 false positive * Finding 3: 1 false negative When `strict_matching` is `FALSE`: * Finding 1: 1 true positive * Finding 2: 1 true positive * Finding 3: 1 false negative",
-"type": "boolean"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "InfoTypeTransformation": {
 "description": "A transformation to apply to text that is identified as a specific info_type.",
 "id": "InfoTypeTransformation",
@@ -9156,42 +8391,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"ListAnnotationStoresResponse": {
-"description": "Lists the Annotation stores in the given dataset.",
-"id": "ListAnnotationStoresResponse",
-"properties": {
-"annotationStores": {
-"description": "The returned Annotation stores. Won't be more Annotation stores than the value of page_size in the request.",
-"items": {
-"$ref": "AnnotationStore"
-},
-"type": "array"
-},
-"nextPageToken": {
-"description": "Token to retrieve the next page of results or empty if there are no more results in the list.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
-"ListAnnotationsResponse": {
-"description": "Lists the Annotations in the specified Annotation store.",
-"id": "ListAnnotationsResponse",
-"properties": {
-"annotations": {
-"description": "The returned Annotations. Won't be more values than the value of page_size in the request. See `AnnotationView` in the request for populated fields.",
-"items": {
-"$ref": "Annotation"
-},
-"type": "array"
-},
-"nextPageToken": {
-"description": "Token to retrieve the next page of results or empty if there are no more results in the list.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ListAttributeDefinitionsResponse": {
 "id": "ListAttributeDefinitionsResponse",
 "properties": {
@@ -9868,17 +9067,6 @@
 "properties": {},
 "type": "object"
 },
-"ResourceAnnotation": {
-"description": "Resource level annotation.",
-"id": "ResourceAnnotation",
-"properties": {
-"label": {
-"description": "A description of the annotation record.",
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "Resources": {
 "description": "A list of FHIR resources.",
 "id": "Resources",
@@ -10278,7 +9466,7 @@
 "id": "SearchResourcesRequest",
 "properties": {
 "resourceType": {
-"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html)).",
+"description": "Optional. The FHIR resource type to search, such as Patient or Observation. For a complete list, see the FHIR Resource Index ([DSTU2](https://hl7.org/fhir/DSTU2/resourcelist.html), [STU3](https://hl7.org/fhir/STU3/resourcelist.html), [R4](https://hl7.org/fhir/R4/resourcelist.html), [R5](https://hl7.org/fhir/R5/resourcelist.html)).",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -10306,20 +9494,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"SensitiveTextAnnotation": {
-"description": "A TextAnnotation specifies a text range that includes sensitive information.",
-"id": "SensitiveTextAnnotation",
-"properties": {
-"details": {
-"additionalProperties": {
-"$ref": "Detail"
-},
-"description": "Maps from a resource slice. For example, FHIR resource field path to a set of sensitive text findings. For example, Appointment.Narrative text1 --> {findings_1, findings_2, findings_3}",
-"type": "object"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "SeriesMetrics": {
 "description": "SeriesMetrics contains metrics describing a DICOM series.",
 "id": "SeriesMetrics",
@@ -10466,7 +9640,7 @@
 },
 "deidentifiedStoreDestination": {
 "$ref": "DeidentifiedStoreDestination",
-"description": "The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging))."
+"description": "The destination FHIR store for de-identified resources. After this field is added, all subsequent creates/updates/patches to the source store will be de-identified using the provided configuration and applied to the destination store. Resources deleted from the source store will be deleted from the destination store. Importing resources to the source store will not trigger the streaming. If the source store already contains resources when this option is enabled, those resources will not be copied to the destination store unless they are subsequently updated. This may result in invalid references in the destination store. Before adding this config, you must grant the healthcare.fhirResources.update permission on the destination store to your project's **Cloud Healthcare Service Agent** [service account](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/permissions-healthcare-api-gcp-products#the_cloud_healthcare_service_agent). The destination store must set enable_update_create to true. The destination store must have disable_referential_integrity set to true. If a resource cannot be de-identified, errors will be logged to Cloud Logging (see [Viewing error logs in Cloud Logging](https://cloud.google.com/healthcare/docs/how-tos/logging)). Not supported for R5 stores."
 },
 "resourceTypes": {
 "description": "Supply a FHIR resource type (such as \"Patient\" or \"Observation\"). See https://www.hl7.org/fhir/valueset-resource-types.html for a list of all FHIR resource types. The server treats an empty list as an intent to stream all the supported resource types in this FHIR store.",
@@ -10782,23 +9956,6 @@
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
-},
-"Vertex": {
-"description": "A 2D coordinate in an image. The origin is the top-left.",
-"id": "Vertex",
-"properties": {
-"x": {
-"description": "X coordinate.",
-"format": "float",
-"type": "number"
-},
-"y": {
-"description": "Y coordinate.",
-"format": "float",
-"type": "number"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "servicePath": "",

From 92db90284623309963d8761fa9e03ffd3196babd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:16 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 19/32] feat(logging): update the api

#### logging:v2

The following keys were deleted:
- schemas.LogExclusion.properties.name.readOnly (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.LogSink.properties.name.readOnly (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.RecentQuery.properties.name.readOnly (Total Keys: 1)

The following keys were added:
- schemas.LogEntry.properties.apphubDestination (Total Keys: 2)
---
 ...logging_v2.billingAccounts.exclusions.html | 12 ++---
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.html      |  2 +-
 ...llingAccounts.locations.recentQueries.html |  2 +-
 .../dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html | 48 ++++++++---------
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html              | 51 +++++++++++++++++++
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.exclusions.html           | 12 ++---
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.exclusions.html   | 12 ++---
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.html              |  6 +--
 ...ng_v2.folders.locations.recentQueries.html |  2 +-
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html        | 48 ++++++++---------
 .../logging_v2.organizations.exclusions.html  | 12 ++---
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.html        |  6 +--
 ...organizations.locations.recentQueries.html |  2 +-
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html  | 48 ++++++++---------
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.exclusions.html  | 12 ++---
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.html             |  2 +-
 ...g_v2.projects.locations.recentQueries.html |  2 +-
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html       | 48 ++++++++---------
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html                | 36 ++++++-------
 docs/dyn/logging_v2.v2.html                   |  6 +--
 .../discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json | 18 ++++---
 21 files changed, 220 insertions(+), 167 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.exclusions.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.exclusions.html
index afab7d14c9..885c6bb0b0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.exclusions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.exclusions.html
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.html
index 87017f8e76..74586b8679 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.html
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.recentQueries.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.recentQueries.html
index dd4984b2f5..641050249e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.recentQueries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.locations.recentQueries.html
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
       "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Describes an analytics query that can be run in the Log Analytics page of Google Cloud console.Preview: This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Analytics query that can be executed in Log Analytics.
         "sqlQueryText": "A String", # Required. A logs analytics SQL query, which generally follows BigQuery format.This is the SQL query that appears in the Log Analytics UI's query editor.
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html
index 45b1aa0db4..53ef891d7b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.billingAccounts.sinks.html
@@ -122,20 +122,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -161,20 +161,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -223,20 +223,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -273,20 +273,20 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
       "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
         { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
           "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
           "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
           "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
           "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-          "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
           "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
         },
       ],
       "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
       "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
       "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
       "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -328,20 +328,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -368,20 +368,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -407,20 +407,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -447,20 +447,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html
index b8d3f06202..8f716b5691 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.entries.html
@@ -190,6 +190,23 @@ 
Method Details

           "id": "A String", # Workload Id. Example: "my-workload"
         },
       },
+      "apphubDestination": { # Metadata associated with App Hub. # Output only. AppHub application metadata associated with the destination application. This is only populated if the log represented "edge"-like data (such as for VPC flow logs) with a source and destination.
+        "application": { # Resource identifiers associated with an AppHub application AppHub resources are of the form projects//locations//applications/ projects//locations//applications//services/ projects//locations//applications//workloads/ These resources can be reconstructed from the components below. # Metadata associated with the application.
+          "container": "A String", # Resource container that owns the application. Example: "projects/management_project"
+          "id": "A String", # Application Id. Example: "my-app"
+          "location": "A String", # Location associated with the Application. Example: "us-east1"
+        },
+        "service": { # Metadata associated with an App Hub service. # Metadata associated with the service.
+          "criticalityType": "A String", # Service criticality type Example: "CRITICAL"
+          "environmentType": "A String", # Service environment type Example: "DEV"
+          "id": "A String", # Service Id. Example: "my-service"
+        },
+        "workload": { # Metadata associated with an App Hub workload. # Metadata associated with the workload.
+          "criticalityType": "A String", # Workload criticality type Example: "CRITICAL"
+          "environmentType": "A String", # Workload environment type Example: "DEV"
+          "id": "A String", # Workload Id. Example: "my-workload"
+        },
+      },
       "errorGroups": [ # Output only. The Error Reporting (https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting) error groups associated with this LogEntry. Error Reporting sets the values for this field during error group creation.For more information, see View error details( https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting/docs/viewing-errors#view_error_details)This field isn't available during log routing (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/overview)
         { # Contains metadata that associates the LogEntry to Error Reporting error groups.
           "id": "A String", # The id is a unique identifier for a particular error group; it is the last part of the error group resource name: /project/[PROJECT_ID]/errors/[ERROR_GROUP_ID]. Example: COShysOX0r_51QE. The id is derived from key parts of the error-log content and is treated as Service Data. For information about how Service Data is handled, see Google Cloud Privacy Notice (https://cloud.google.com/terms/cloud-privacy-notice).
@@ -324,6 +341,23 @@ 
Method Details

           "id": "A String", # Workload Id. Example: "my-workload"
         },
       },
+      "apphubDestination": { # Metadata associated with App Hub. # Output only. AppHub application metadata associated with the destination application. This is only populated if the log represented "edge"-like data (such as for VPC flow logs) with a source and destination.
+        "application": { # Resource identifiers associated with an AppHub application AppHub resources are of the form projects//locations//applications/ projects//locations//applications//services/ projects//locations//applications//workloads/ These resources can be reconstructed from the components below. # Metadata associated with the application.
+          "container": "A String", # Resource container that owns the application. Example: "projects/management_project"
+          "id": "A String", # Application Id. Example: "my-app"
+          "location": "A String", # Location associated with the Application. Example: "us-east1"
+        },
+        "service": { # Metadata associated with an App Hub service. # Metadata associated with the service.
+          "criticalityType": "A String", # Service criticality type Example: "CRITICAL"
+          "environmentType": "A String", # Service environment type Example: "DEV"
+          "id": "A String", # Service Id. Example: "my-service"
+        },
+        "workload": { # Metadata associated with an App Hub workload. # Metadata associated with the workload.
+          "criticalityType": "A String", # Workload criticality type Example: "CRITICAL"
+          "environmentType": "A String", # Workload environment type Example: "DEV"
+          "id": "A String", # Workload Id. Example: "my-workload"
+        },
+      },
       "errorGroups": [ # Output only. The Error Reporting (https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting) error groups associated with this LogEntry. Error Reporting sets the values for this field during error group creation.For more information, see View error details( https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting/docs/viewing-errors#view_error_details)This field isn't available during log routing (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/overview)
         { # Contains metadata that associates the LogEntry to Error Reporting error groups.
           "id": "A String", # The id is a unique identifier for a particular error group; it is the last part of the error group resource name: /project/[PROJECT_ID]/errors/[ERROR_GROUP_ID]. Example: COShysOX0r_51QE. The id is derived from key parts of the error-log content and is treated as Service Data. For information about how Service Data is handled, see Google Cloud Privacy Notice (https://cloud.google.com/terms/cloud-privacy-notice).
@@ -434,6 +468,23 @@ 
Method Details

           "id": "A String", # Workload Id. Example: "my-workload"
         },
       },
+      "apphubDestination": { # Metadata associated with App Hub. # Output only. AppHub application metadata associated with the destination application. This is only populated if the log represented "edge"-like data (such as for VPC flow logs) with a source and destination.
+        "application": { # Resource identifiers associated with an AppHub application AppHub resources are of the form projects//locations//applications/ projects//locations//applications//services/ projects//locations//applications//workloads/ These resources can be reconstructed from the components below. # Metadata associated with the application.
+          "container": "A String", # Resource container that owns the application. Example: "projects/management_project"
+          "id": "A String", # Application Id. Example: "my-app"
+          "location": "A String", # Location associated with the Application. Example: "us-east1"
+        },
+        "service": { # Metadata associated with an App Hub service. # Metadata associated with the service.
+          "criticalityType": "A String", # Service criticality type Example: "CRITICAL"
+          "environmentType": "A String", # Service environment type Example: "DEV"
+          "id": "A String", # Service Id. Example: "my-service"
+        },
+        "workload": { # Metadata associated with an App Hub workload. # Metadata associated with the workload.
+          "criticalityType": "A String", # Workload criticality type Example: "CRITICAL"
+          "environmentType": "A String", # Workload environment type Example: "DEV"
+          "id": "A String", # Workload Id. Example: "my-workload"
+        },
+      },
       "errorGroups": [ # Output only. The Error Reporting (https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting) error groups associated with this LogEntry. Error Reporting sets the values for this field during error group creation.For more information, see View error details( https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting/docs/viewing-errors#view_error_details)This field isn't available during log routing (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/overview)
         { # Contains metadata that associates the LogEntry to Error Reporting error groups.
           "id": "A String", # The id is a unique identifier for a particular error group; it is the last part of the error group resource name: /project/[PROJECT_ID]/errors/[ERROR_GROUP_ID]. Example: COShysOX0r_51QE. The id is derived from key parts of the error-log content and is treated as Service Data. For information about how Service Data is handled, see Google Cloud Privacy Notice (https://cloud.google.com/terms/cloud-privacy-notice).
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.exclusions.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.exclusions.html
index 66b1968914..51dd0388c4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.exclusions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.exclusions.html
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.exclusions.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.exclusions.html
index f15c425003..75d387bf8b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.exclusions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.exclusions.html
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.html
index a691dc9e06..c0d3560b18 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.html
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.recentQueries.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.recentQueries.html
index 99c72761d6..2434f7f284 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.recentQueries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.locations.recentQueries.html
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
       "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Describes an analytics query that can be run in the Log Analytics page of Google Cloud console.Preview: This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Analytics query that can be executed in Log Analytics.
         "sqlQueryText": "A String", # Required. A logs analytics SQL query, which generally follows BigQuery format.This is the SQL query that appears in the Log Analytics UI's query editor.
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html
index 120ec94bf4..b55b75fee0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.folders.sinks.html
@@ -122,20 +122,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -161,20 +161,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -223,20 +223,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -273,20 +273,20 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
       "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
         { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
           "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
           "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
           "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
           "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-          "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
           "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
         },
       ],
       "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
       "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
       "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
       "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -328,20 +328,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -368,20 +368,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -407,20 +407,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -447,20 +447,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.exclusions.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.exclusions.html
index 79ecaedfd4..df09ecd633 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.exclusions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.exclusions.html
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.html
index eb8ceba9a8..df8d18ab76 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.html
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.recentQueries.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.recentQueries.html
index e4cbcd8f95..85d9deb0e3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.recentQueries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.locations.recentQueries.html
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
       "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Describes an analytics query that can be run in the Log Analytics page of Google Cloud console.Preview: This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Analytics query that can be executed in Log Analytics.
         "sqlQueryText": "A String", # Required. A logs analytics SQL query, which generally follows BigQuery format.This is the SQL query that appears in the Log Analytics UI's query editor.
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html
index 7f53d75a69..a5d56b5ddb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.organizations.sinks.html
@@ -122,20 +122,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -161,20 +161,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -223,20 +223,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -273,20 +273,20 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
       "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
         { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
           "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
           "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
           "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
           "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-          "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
           "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
         },
       ],
       "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
       "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
       "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
       "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -328,20 +328,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -368,20 +368,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -407,20 +407,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -447,20 +447,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.exclusions.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.exclusions.html
index 4fa3c88c53..5559680c6c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.exclusions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.exclusions.html
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }
 
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
   "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
 }

 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.html
index 72deac33aa..3a57891fcd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.html
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.recentQueries.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.recentQueries.html
index 1f4dbaf137..8ea2f0ddc7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.recentQueries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.locations.recentQueries.html
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.
       "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Describes an analytics query that can be run in the Log Analytics page of Google Cloud console.Preview: This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Analytics query that can be executed in Log Analytics.
         "sqlQueryText": "A String", # Required. A logs analytics SQL query, which generally follows BigQuery format.This is the SQL query that appears in the Log Analytics UI's query editor.
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html
index 879848d574..861187150c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.projects.sinks.html
@@ -122,20 +122,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -161,20 +161,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -223,20 +223,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -273,20 +273,20 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
       "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
         { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
           "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
           "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
           "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
           "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-          "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
           "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
         },
       ],
       "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
       "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
       "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
       "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -328,20 +328,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -368,20 +368,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -407,20 +407,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -447,20 +447,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html
index d03c7ff0f9..dab3bdab6a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.sinks.html
@@ -119,20 +119,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -158,20 +158,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -220,20 +220,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -270,20 +270,20 @@ 
Method Details

       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
       "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+      "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
         { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
           "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
           "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
           "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
           "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-          "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
           "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
         },
       ],
       "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
       "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
       "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
       "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -325,20 +325,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
@@ -365,20 +365,20 @@ 
Method Details

   "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this sink.The maximum length of the description is 8000 characters.
   "destination": "A String", # Required. The export destination: "storage.googleapis.com/[GCS_BUCKET]" "bigquery.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/datasets/[DATASET]" "pubsub.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/topics/[TOPIC_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]" "logging.googleapis.com/projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/buckets/[BUCKET_ID]" The sink's writer_identity, set when the sink is created, must have permission to write to the destination or else the log entries are not exported. For more information, see Exporting Logs with Sinks (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/api/tasks/exporting-logs).
   "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to true, then this sink is disabled and it does not export any log entries.
-  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.
+  "exclusions": [ # Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.
     { # Specifies a set of log entries that are filtered out by a sink. If your Google Cloud resource receives a large volume of log entries, you can use exclusions to reduce your chargeable logs. Note that exclusions on organization-level and folder-level sinks don't apply to child resources. Note also that you cannot modify the _Required sink or exclude logs from it.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The creation timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
       "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
       "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-      "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
     },
   ],
   "filter": "A String", # Optional. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries). The only exported log entries are those that are in the resource owning the sink and that match the filter.For example:logName="projects/[PROJECT_ID]/logs/[LOG_ID]" AND severity>=ERROR
   "includeChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders. If the field is false, the default, only the logs owned by the sink's parent resource are available for export. If the field is true, then log entries from all the projects, folders, and billing accounts contained in the sink's parent resource are also available for export. Whether a particular log entry from the children is exported depends on the sink's filter expression.For example, if this field is true, then the filter resource.type=gce_instance would export all Compute Engine VM instance log entries from all projects in the sink's parent.To only export entries from certain child projects, filter on the project part of the log name:logName:("projects/test-project1/" OR "projects/test-project2/") AND resource.type=gce_instance
   "interceptChildren": True or False, # Optional. This field applies only to sinks owned by organizations and folders.When the value of 'intercept_children' is true, the following restrictions apply: The sink must have the include_children flag set to true. The sink destination must be a Cloud project.Also, the following behaviors apply: Any logs matched by the sink won't be included by non-_Required sinks owned by child resources. The sink appears in the results of a ListSinks call from a child resource if the value of the filter field in its request is either 'in_scope("ALL")' or 'in_scope("ANCESTOR")'.
-  "name": "A String", # Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
+  "name": "A String", # Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: "my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.
   "outputVersionFormat": "A String", # Deprecated. This field is unused.
   "resourceName": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the sink. "projects/[PROJECT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "organizations/[ORGANIZATION_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "billingAccounts/[BILLING_ACCOUNT_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] "folders/[FOLDER_ID]/sinks/[SINK_NAME] For example: projects/my_project/sinks/SINK_NAME
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the sink.This field may not be present for older sinks.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.v2.html b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.v2.html
index dd8429b5ae..b631bb83f7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/logging_v2.v2.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/logging_v2.v2.html
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "description": "A String", # Optional. A description of this exclusion.
         "disabled": True or False, # Optional. If set to True, then this exclusion is disabled and it does not exclude any log entries. You can update an exclusion to change the value of this field.
         "filter": "A String", # Required. An advanced logs filter (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) that matches the log entries to be excluded. By using the sample function (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries#sample), you can exclude less than 100% of the matching log entries.For example, the following query matches 99% of low-severity log entries from Google Cloud Storage buckets:resource.type=gcs_bucket severity<ERROR sample(insertId, 0.99)
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
+        "name": "A String", # Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as "load-balancer-exclusion". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.
         "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last update timestamp of the exclusion.This field may not be present for older exclusions.
       },
     ],
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json
index 4081162053..c3d90613ca 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/logging.v2.json
@@ -8952,7 +8952,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250516",
+"revision": "20250530",
 "rootUrl": "https://logging.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AppHub": {
@@ -10145,6 +10145,11 @@
 "description": "Output only. AppHub application metadata associated with this LogEntry. May be empty if there is no associated AppHub application or multiple associated applications (such as for VPC flow logs)",
 "readOnly": true
 },
+"apphubDestination": {
+"$ref": "AppHub",
+"description": "Output only. AppHub application metadata associated with the destination application. This is only populated if the log represented \"edge\"-like data (such as for VPC flow logs) with a source and destination.",
+"readOnly": true
+},
 "errorGroups": {
 "description": "Output only. The Error Reporting (https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting) error groups associated with this LogEntry. Error Reporting sets the values for this field during error group creation.For more information, see View error details( https://cloud.google.com/error-reporting/docs/viewing-errors#view_error_details)This field isn't available during log routing (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/routing/overview)",
 "items": {
@@ -10343,8 +10348,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Output only. A client-assigned identifier, such as \"load-balancer-exclusion\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.",
-"readOnly": true,
+"description": "Optional. A client-assigned identifier, such as \"load-balancer-exclusion\". Identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only letters, digits, underscores, hyphens, and periods. First character has to be alphanumeric.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "updateTime": {
@@ -10540,7 +10544,7 @@
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "exclusions": {
-"description": "Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusion_filters it will not be exported.",
+"description": "Optional. Log entries that match any of these exclusion filters will not be exported.If a log entry is matched by both filter and one of exclusions it will not be exported.",
 "items": {
 "$ref": "LogExclusion"
 },
@@ -10559,8 +10563,7 @@
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Output only. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: \"my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub\".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.",
-"readOnly": true,
+"description": "Optional. The client-assigned sink identifier, unique within the project.For example: \"my-syslog-errors-to-pubsub\".Sink identifiers are limited to 100 characters and can include only the following characters: upper and lower-case alphanumeric characters, underscores, hyphens, periods.First character has to be alphanumeric.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "outputVersionFormat": {
@@ -11025,8 +11028,7 @@
 "description": "Logging query that can be executed in Logs Explorer or via Logging API."
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Output only. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]\" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.",
-"readOnly": true,
+"description": "Optional. Resource name of the recent query.In the format: \"projects/[PROJECT_ID]/locations/[LOCATION_ID]/recentQueries/[QUERY_ID]\" For a list of supported locations, see Supported Regions (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/region-support)The QUERY_ID is a system generated alphanumeric ID.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "opsAnalyticsQuery": {

From 8b1b10b5b5d99426a98f62c6b05a8a76d202dede Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 20/32] feat(managedkafka): update the api

#### managedkafka:v1

The following keys were added:
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.schemaRegistries.resources.contexts.resources.mode.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.projects.resources.locations.resources.schemaRegistries.resources.mode.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11)
---
 ...ations.schemaRegistries.contexts.mode.html | 22 ++++++++
 ...jects.locations.schemaRegistries.mode.html | 22 ++++++++
 .../documents/managedkafka.v1.json            | 52 ++++++++++++++++++-
 3 files changed, 95 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.contexts.mode.html b/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.contexts.mode.html
index b38f20879c..7fdcb67dd8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.contexts.mode.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.contexts.mode.html
@@ -77,6 +77,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete schema mode for a subject.

 

   get(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Get mode at global level or for a subject.

@@ -89,6 +92,25 @@ 
Method Details

   
Close httplib2 connections.

 

 
+

+    delete(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete schema mode for a subject.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of subject to delete the mode for. The format is * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/mode/{subject} * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/contexts/{context}/mode/{subject} (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # SchemaMode represents the mode of a schema registry or a specific subject. Four modes are supported: * NONE: This is the default mode for a subject and essentially means that the subject does not have any mode set. This means the subject will follow the schema registry's mode. * READONLY: The schema registry is in read-only mode. * READWRITE: The schema registry is in read-write mode, which allows limited write operations on the schema. * IMPORT: The schema registry is in import mode, which allows more editing operations on the schema for data importing purposes.
+  "mode": "A String", # Required. The mode type of a schema registry (READWRITE by default) or of a subject (NONE by default, which means use the global schema registry setting).
+}

+

+
 

     get(name, x__xgafv=None)
   
Get mode at global level or for a subject.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.mode.html b/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.mode.html
index d112de3dfc..82f475e9a0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.mode.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/managedkafka_v1.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.mode.html
@@ -77,6 +77,9 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete schema mode for a subject.

 

   get(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Get mode at global level or for a subject.

@@ -89,6 +92,25 @@ 
Method Details

   
Close httplib2 connections.

 

 
+

+    delete(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete schema mode for a subject.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of subject to delete the mode for. The format is * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/mode/{subject} * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/contexts/{context}/mode/{subject} (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # SchemaMode represents the mode of a schema registry or a specific subject. Four modes are supported: * NONE: This is the default mode for a subject and essentially means that the subject does not have any mode set. This means the subject will follow the schema registry's mode. * READONLY: The schema registry is in read-only mode. * READWRITE: The schema registry is in read-write mode, which allows limited write operations on the schema. * IMPORT: The schema registry is in import mode, which allows more editing operations on the schema for data importing purposes.
+  "mode": "A String", # Required. The mode type of a schema registry (READWRITE by default) or of a subject (NONE by default, which means use the global schema registry setting).
+}

+

+
 

     get(name, x__xgafv=None)
   
Get mode at global level or for a subject.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json
index cd7fec8352..6ffa50163d 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/managedkafka.v1.json
@@ -1838,6 +1838,31 @@
 },
 "mode": {
 "methods": {
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete schema mode for a subject.",
+"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/schemaRegistries/{schemaRegistriesId}/contexts/{contextsId}/mode/{modeId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "managedkafka.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.contexts.mode.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of subject to delete the mode for. The format is * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/mode/{subject} * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/contexts/{context}/mode/{subject}",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/schemaRegistries/[^/]+/contexts/[^/]+/mode/.*$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "SchemaMode"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
 "get": {
 "description": "Get mode at global level or for a subject.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/schemaRegistries/{schemaRegistriesId}/contexts/{contextsId}/mode/{modeId}",
@@ -2352,6 +2377,31 @@
 },
 "mode": {
 "methods": {
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete schema mode for a subject.",
+"flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/schemaRegistries/{schemaRegistriesId}/mode/{modeId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "managedkafka.projects.locations.schemaRegistries.mode.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of subject to delete the mode for. The format is * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/mode/{subject} * projects/{project}/locations/{location}/schemaRegistries/{schema_registry}/contexts/{context}/mode/{subject}",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/schemaRegistries/[^/]+/mode/.*$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "SchemaMode"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
 "get": {
 "description": "Get mode at global level or for a subject.",
 "flatPath": "v1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/schemaRegistries/{schemaRegistriesId}/mode/{modeId}",
@@ -2869,7 +2919,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250508",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://managedkafka.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AccessConfig": {

From 641eccea5987145da45f873bf88316e70b133510 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 21/32] feat(merchantapi): update the api

#### merchantapi:accounts_v1beta

The following keys were added:
- resources.accounts.resources.gbpAccounts.methods.linkGbpAccount (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.accounts.resources.gbpAccounts.methods.list (Total Keys: 16)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.methods.create (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.methods.get (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.methods.list (Total Keys: 16)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.methods.patch (Total Keys: 15)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.methods.requestInventoryVerification (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.resources.lfpProviders.methods.find (Total Keys: 16)
- resources.accounts.resources.omnichannelSettings.resources.lfpProviders.methods.linkLfpProvider (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.accounts.resources.onlineReturnPolicies.methods.create (Total Keys: 12)
- resources.accounts.resources.onlineReturnPolicies.methods.delete (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.accounts.resources.onlineReturnPolicies.methods.patch (Total Keys: 15)
- schemas.About (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.AccountService.properties.localListingManagement.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.FindLfpProvidersResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.GbpAccount (Total Keys: 8)
- schemas.InStock (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.InventoryVerification (Total Keys: 8)
- schemas.LfpLink (Total Keys: 6)
- schemas.LfpProvider (Total Keys: 6)
- schemas.LinkGbpAccountRequest (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.LinkGbpAccountResponse (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.LinkLfpProviderRequest (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.LinkLfpProviderResponse (Total Keys: 3)
- schemas.ListGbpAccountsResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.ListOmnichannelSettingsResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.LocalListingManagement (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.OmnichannelSetting (Total Keys: 12)
- schemas.OnDisplayToOrder (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.Pickup (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.RequestInventoryVerificationRequest (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.RequestInventoryVerificationResponse (Total Keys: 3)

#### merchantapi:issueresolution_v1beta

The following keys were added:
- resources.accounts.resources.aggregateProductStatuses.methods.list (Total Keys: 18)
- schemas.AggregateProductStatus (Total Keys: 8)
- schemas.ItemLevelIssue (Total Keys: 9)
- schemas.ListAggregateProductStatusesResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.Stats (Total Keys: 10)
---
 ...unts_v1beta.accounts.autofeedSettings.html |   6 +-
 ...v1beta.accounts.automaticImprovements.html |   6 +-
 ...unts_v1beta.accounts.businessIdentity.html |  32 +-
 ...accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessInfo.html |   8 +-
 ...unts_v1beta.accounts.emailPreferences.html |   4 +-
 ..._accounts_v1beta.accounts.gbpAccounts.html | 166 +++
 ...api_accounts_v1beta.accounts.homepage.html |  14 +-
 .../merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html |  38 +-
 ...ntapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.issues.html |   4 +-
 ...s_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.html | 451 +++++++++
 ...unts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.html | 164 +++
 ..._v1beta.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.html | 324 +++++-
 ...api_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html |  22 +-
 ...tapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.regions.html |   2 +-
 ...ccounts_v1beta.accounts.relationships.html |  20 +-
 ...api_accounts_v1beta.accounts.services.html |  60 +-
 ...unts_v1beta.accounts.shippingSettings.html |  58 +-
 ...ccounts.termsOfServiceAgreementStates.html |  16 +-
 ...antapi_accounts_v1beta.termsOfService.html |   8 +-
 ...tasources_v1beta.accounts.dataSources.html |   2 +-
 ...eta.accounts.aggregateProductStatuses.html | 153 +++
 ...ntapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.html |  91 ++
 .../merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.html   |   5 +
 ...lfp_v1beta.accounts.lfpMerchantStates.html |   4 +-
 ...roducts_v1beta.accounts.productInputs.html | 294 +++---
 ...api_products_v1beta.accounts.products.html | 142 +--
 .../merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json          | 956 ++++++++++++++++--
 .../merchantapi.datasources_v1beta.json       |   6 +-
 .../merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json   | 251 ++++-
 .../documents/merchantapi.lfp_v1beta.json     |   6 +-
 .../merchantapi.products_v1beta.json          |  84 +-
 31 files changed, 2913 insertions(+), 484 deletions(-)
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.gbpAccounts.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.aggregateProductStatuses.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.html

diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.autofeedSettings.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.autofeedSettings.html
index 37b8884acc..c0e4ee4657 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.autofeedSettings.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.autofeedSettings.html
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Collection of information related to the [autofeed](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7538732) settings.
-  "eligible": True or False, # Output only. Determines whether merchant is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.
+  "eligible": True or False, # Output only. Determines whether the business is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.
   "enableProducts": True or False, # Required. Enables or disables product crawling through the autofeed for the given account. Autofeed accounts must meet [certain conditions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7538732#Configure_automated_feeds_Standard_Experience), which can be checked through the `eligible` field. The account must **not** be a marketplace. When the autofeed is enabled for the first time, the products usually appear instantly. When re-enabling, it might take up to 24 hours for products to appear.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the autofeed settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/autofeedSettings`.
 }

@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Collection of information related to the [autofeed](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7538732) settings.
-  "eligible": True or False, # Output only. Determines whether merchant is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.
+  "eligible": True or False, # Output only. Determines whether the business is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.
   "enableProducts": True or False, # Required. Enables or disables product crawling through the autofeed for the given account. Autofeed accounts must meet [certain conditions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7538732#Configure_automated_feeds_Standard_Experience), which can be checked through the `eligible` field. The account must **not** be a marketplace. When the autofeed is enabled for the first time, the products usually appear instantly. When re-enabling, it might take up to 24 hours for products to appear.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the autofeed settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/autofeedSettings`.
 }
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Collection of information related to the [autofeed](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7538732) settings.
-  "eligible": True or False, # Output only. Determines whether merchant is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.
+  "eligible": True or False, # Output only. Determines whether the business is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.
   "enableProducts": True or False, # Required. Enables or disables product crawling through the autofeed for the given account. Autofeed accounts must meet [certain conditions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7538732#Configure_automated_feeds_Standard_Experience), which can be checked through the `eligible` field. The account must **not** be a marketplace. When the autofeed is enabled for the first time, the products usually appear instantly. When re-enabling, it might take up to 24 hours for products to appear.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the autofeed settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/autofeedSettings`.
 }

diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.automaticImprovements.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.automaticImprovements.html
index 6ba2a8eff6..1eb9b57c56 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.automaticImprovements.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.automaticImprovements.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "effectiveAllowStrictAvailabilityUpdates": True or False, # Output only. The effective value of allow_strict_availability_updates. If account_item_updates_settings is present, then this value is the same. Otherwise, it represents the inherited value of the parent account. The default value is true if no settings are present. Read-only.
   },
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the automatic improvements. Format: `accounts/{account}/automaticImprovements`.
-  "shippingImprovements": { # Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data # Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask.
+  "shippingImprovements": { # Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data # Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask.
     "allowShippingImprovements": True or False, # Enables automatic shipping improvements.
   },
 }

@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "effectiveAllowStrictAvailabilityUpdates": True or False, # Output only. The effective value of allow_strict_availability_updates. If account_item_updates_settings is present, then this value is the same. Otherwise, it represents the inherited value of the parent account. The default value is true if no settings are present. Read-only.
   },
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the automatic improvements. Format: `accounts/{account}/automaticImprovements`.
-  "shippingImprovements": { # Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data # Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask.
+  "shippingImprovements": { # Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data # Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask.
     "allowShippingImprovements": True or False, # Enables automatic shipping improvements.
   },
 }
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "effectiveAllowStrictAvailabilityUpdates": True or False, # Output only. The effective value of allow_strict_availability_updates. If account_item_updates_settings is present, then this value is the same. Otherwise, it represents the inherited value of the parent account. The default value is true if no settings are present. Read-only.
   },
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the automatic improvements. Format: `accounts/{account}/automaticImprovements`.
-  "shippingImprovements": { # Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data # Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask.
+  "shippingImprovements": { # Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data # Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask.
     "allowShippingImprovements": True or False, # Enables automatic shipping improvements.
   },
 }

diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessIdentity.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessIdentity.html
index 8e2996df8d..01eb57e2e1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessIdentity.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessIdentity.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Retrieves the business identity of an account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`. For example, `accounts/123456/businessIdentity`. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -104,21 +104,21 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Collection of information related to the [identity of a business](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12564247).
-  "blackOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "blackOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "latinoOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "latinoOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`
   "promotionsConsent": "A String", # Required. Whether the identity attributes may be used for promotions.
-  "smallBusiness": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces.
+  "smallBusiness": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "veteranOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "veteranOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "womenOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "womenOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
 }

@@ -134,21 +134,21 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Collection of information related to the [identity of a business](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12564247).
-  "blackOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "blackOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "latinoOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "latinoOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`
   "promotionsConsent": "A String", # Required. Whether the identity attributes may be used for promotions.
-  "smallBusiness": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces.
+  "smallBusiness": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "veteranOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "veteranOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "womenOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "womenOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
 }
@@ -163,21 +163,21 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Collection of information related to the [identity of a business](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12564247).
-  "blackOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "blackOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "latinoOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "latinoOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`
   "promotionsConsent": "A String", # Required. Whether the identity attributes may be used for promotions.
-  "smallBusiness": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces.
+  "smallBusiness": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "veteranOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "veteranOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
-  "womenOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
+  "womenOwned": { # All information related to an identity attribute. # Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers.
     "identityDeclaration": "A String", # Required. The declaration of identity for this attribute.
   },
 }

diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessInfo.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessInfo.html
index ecb21492d8..63f2084d42 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessInfo.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.businessInfo.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Retrieves the business info of an account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the business info. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessInfo` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the business info. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessInfo`. For example, `accounts/123456/businessInfo`. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a merchant's business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.
+    { # The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.
   "address": { # Represents a postal address (for example, for postal delivery or payments addresses). Given a postal address, a postal service can deliver items to a premise, P.O. box or similar. It is not intended to model geographical locations (roads, towns, mountains). In typical usage, an address would be created by user input or from importing existing data, depending on the type of process. Advice on address input or editing: - Use an internationalization-ready address widget such as https://github.com/google/libaddressinput. - Users should not be presented with UI elements for input or editing of fields outside countries where that field is used. For more guidance on how to use this schema, see: https://support.google.com/business/answer/6397478. # Optional. The address of the business. Only `region_code`, `address_lines`, `postal_code`, `administrative_area` and `locality` fields are supported. All other fields are ignored.
     "addressLines": [ # Unstructured address lines describing the lower levels of an address. Because values in `address_lines` do not have type information and may sometimes contain multiple values in a single field (for example, "Austin, TX"), it is important that the line order is clear. The order of address lines should be "envelope order" for the country or region of the address. In places where this can vary (for example, Japan), `address_language` is used to make it explicit (for example, "ja" for large-to-small ordering and "ja-Latn" or "en" for small-to-large). In this way, the most specific line of an address can be selected based on the language. The minimum permitted structural representation of an address consists of a `region_code` with all remaining information placed in the `address_lines`. It would be possible to format such an address very approximately without geocoding, but no semantic reasoning could be made about any of the address components until it was at least partially resolved. Creating an address only containing a `region_code` and `address_lines` and then geocoding is the recommended way to handle completely unstructured addresses (as opposed to guessing which parts of the address should be localities or administrative areas).
       "A String",
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ 
Method Details

   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a merchant's business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.
+{ # The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.
   "address": { # Represents a postal address (for example, for postal delivery or payments addresses). Given a postal address, a postal service can deliver items to a premise, P.O. box or similar. It is not intended to model geographical locations (roads, towns, mountains). In typical usage, an address would be created by user input or from importing existing data, depending on the type of process. Advice on address input or editing: - Use an internationalization-ready address widget such as https://github.com/google/libaddressinput. - Users should not be presented with UI elements for input or editing of fields outside countries where that field is used. For more guidance on how to use this schema, see: https://support.google.com/business/answer/6397478. # Optional. The address of the business. Only `region_code`, `address_lines`, `postal_code`, `administrative_area` and `locality` fields are supported. All other fields are ignored.
     "addressLines": [ # Unstructured address lines describing the lower levels of an address. Because values in `address_lines` do not have type information and may sometimes contain multiple values in a single field (for example, "Austin, TX"), it is important that the line order is clear. The order of address lines should be "envelope order" for the country or region of the address. In places where this can vary (for example, Japan), `address_language` is used to make it explicit (for example, "ja" for large-to-small ordering and "ja-Latn" or "en" for small-to-large). In this way, the most specific line of an address can be selected based on the language. The minimum permitted structural representation of an address consists of a `region_code` with all remaining information placed in the `address_lines`. It would be possible to format such an address very approximately without geocoding, but no semantic reasoning could be made about any of the address components until it was at least partially resolved. Creating an address only containing a `region_code` and `address_lines` and then geocoding is the recommended way to handle completely unstructured addresses (as opposed to guessing which parts of the address should be localities or administrative areas).
       "A String",
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a merchant's business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.
+    { # The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.
   "address": { # Represents a postal address (for example, for postal delivery or payments addresses). Given a postal address, a postal service can deliver items to a premise, P.O. box or similar. It is not intended to model geographical locations (roads, towns, mountains). In typical usage, an address would be created by user input or from importing existing data, depending on the type of process. Advice on address input or editing: - Use an internationalization-ready address widget such as https://github.com/google/libaddressinput. - Users should not be presented with UI elements for input or editing of fields outside countries where that field is used. For more guidance on how to use this schema, see: https://support.google.com/business/answer/6397478. # Optional. The address of the business. Only `region_code`, `address_lines`, `postal_code`, `administrative_area` and `locality` fields are supported. All other fields are ignored.
     "addressLines": [ # Unstructured address lines describing the lower levels of an address. Because values in `address_lines` do not have type information and may sometimes contain multiple values in a single field (for example, "Austin, TX"), it is important that the line order is clear. The order of address lines should be "envelope order" for the country or region of the address. In places where this can vary (for example, Japan), `address_language` is used to make it explicit (for example, "ja" for large-to-small ordering and "ja-Latn" or "en" for small-to-large). In this way, the most specific line of an address can be selected based on the language. The minimum permitted structural representation of an address consists of a `region_code` with all remaining information placed in the `address_lines`. It would be possible to format such an address very approximately without geocoding, but no semantic reasoning could be made about any of the address components until it was at least partially resolved. Creating an address only containing a `region_code` and `address_lines` and then geocoding is the recommended way to handle completely unstructured addresses (as opposed to guessing which parts of the address should be localities or administrative areas).
       "A String",
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.emailPreferences.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.emailPreferences.html
index 36e1018824..9099a5e40c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.emailPreferences.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.emailPreferences.html
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Returns the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. This service only permits retrieving and updating email preferences for the authenticated user. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to get preferences for the authenticated user.

 

   updateEmailPreferences(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. MCA users should specify the MCA account rather than a sub-account of the MCA. Preferences which are not explicitly selected in the update mask will not be updated. It is invalid for updates to specify an UNCONFIRMED opt-in status value. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to update preferences for the authenticated user.

+
Updates the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. Advanced account users should specify the advanced account rather than a sub-account of the advanced account. Preferences which are not explicitly selected in the update mask will not be updated. It is invalid for updates to specify an UNCONFIRMED opt-in status value. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to update preferences for the authenticated user.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     updateEmailPreferences(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. MCA users should specify the MCA account rather than a sub-account of the MCA. Preferences which are not explicitly selected in the update mask will not be updated. It is invalid for updates to specify an UNCONFIRMED opt-in status value. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to update preferences for the authenticated user.
+  
Updates the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. Advanced account users should specify the advanced account rather than a sub-account of the advanced account. Preferences which are not explicitly selected in the update mask will not be updated. It is invalid for updates to specify an UNCONFIRMED opt-in status value. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to update preferences for the authenticated user.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Identifier. The name of the EmailPreferences. The endpoint is only supported for the authenticated user. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.gbpAccounts.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.gbpAccounts.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..03d3a91a5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.gbpAccounts.html
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+
+
+
+
Merchant API . accounts . gbpAccounts

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  linkGbpAccount(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Link the specified merchant to a GBP account for all countries.

+

+  list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
List the GBP accounts for a given merchant.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    linkGbpAccount(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Link the specified merchant to a GBP account for all countries.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the parent resource to which the GBP account is linked. Format: `accounts/{account}`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for the LinkGbpAccount method.
+  "gbpEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the Business Profile account.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the LinkGbpAccount method.
+  "response": { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } # Empty response.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
List the GBP accounts for a given merchant.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the parent resource under which the GBP accounts are listed. Format: `accounts/{account}`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of `GbpAccount` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of gbp accounts is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 1000; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListGbpAccounts` call. Provide the page token to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListGbpAccounts` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the ListGbpAccounts method.
+  "gbpAccounts": [ # The GBP accounts from the specified merchant in the specified country.
+    { # Collection of information related to a Google Business Profile (GBP) account.
+      "gbpAccountId": "A String", # The id of the GBP account.
+      "gbpAccountName": "A String", # The name of the Business Profile. For personal accounts: Email id of the owner. For Business accounts: Name of the Business Account.
+      "listingCount": "A String", # Number of listings under this account.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the GBP account. Format: `accounts/{account}/gbpAccount/{gbp_account}`
+      "type": "A String", # The type of the Business Profile.
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.homepage.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.homepage.html
index 5784719b28..a572a7ede7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.homepage.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.homepage.html
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ 
Merchant API . 
   claim(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Claims a store's homepage. Executing this method requires admin access. If the homepage is already claimed, this will recheck the verification (unless the merchant is exempted from claiming, which also exempts from verification) and return a successful response. If ownership can no longer be verified, it will return an error, but it won't clear the claim. In case of failure, a canonical error message is returned: * PERMISSION_DENIED: User doesn't have the necessary permissions on this Merchant Center account. * FAILED_PRECONDITION: - The account is not a Merchant Center account. - Merchant Center account doesn't have a homepage. - Claiming failed (in this case the error message contains more details).

+
Claims a store's homepage. Executing this method requires admin access. If the homepage is already claimed, this will recheck the verification (unless the business is exempted from claiming, which also exempts from verification) and return a successful response. If ownership can no longer be verified, it will return an error, but it won't clear the claim. In case of failure, a canonical error message is returned: * PERMISSION_DENIED: User doesn't have the necessary permissions on this Merchant Center account. * FAILED_PRECONDITION: - The account is not a Merchant Center account. - Merchant Center account doesn't have a homepage. - Claiming failed (in this case the error message contains more details).

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Method Details

 

     claim(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Claims a store's homepage. Executing this method requires admin access. If the homepage is already claimed, this will recheck the verification (unless the merchant is exempted from claiming, which also exempts from verification) and return a successful response. If ownership can no longer be verified, it will return an error, but it won't clear the claim. In case of failure, a canonical error message is returned: * PERMISSION_DENIED: User doesn't have the necessary permissions on this Merchant Center account. * FAILED_PRECONDITION: - The account is not a Merchant Center account. - Merchant Center account doesn't have a homepage. - Claiming failed (in this case the error message contains more details).
+  
Claims a store's homepage. Executing this method requires admin access. If the homepage is already claimed, this will recheck the verification (unless the business is exempted from claiming, which also exempts from verification) and return a successful response. If ownership can no longer be verified, it will return an error, but it won't clear the claim. In case of failure, a canonical error message is returned: * PERMISSION_DENIED: User doesn't have the necessary permissions on this Merchant Center account. * FAILED_PRECONDITION: - The account is not a Merchant Center account. - Merchant Center account doesn't have a homepage. - Claiming failed (in this case the error message contains more details).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the homepage to claim. Format: `accounts/{account}/homepage` (required)
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Homepage` message represents a merchant's store homepage within the system. A merchant's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the merchant to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
+    { # The `Homepage` message represents a business's store homepage within the system. A business's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the business to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
   "claimed": True or False, # Output only. Whether the homepage is claimed. See https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the store's homepage. Format: `accounts/{account}/homepage`
   "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI (typically a URL) of the store's homepage.
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Homepage` message represents a merchant's store homepage within the system. A merchant's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the merchant to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
+    { # The `Homepage` message represents a business's store homepage within the system. A business's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the business to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
   "claimed": True or False, # Output only. Whether the homepage is claimed. See https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the store's homepage. Format: `accounts/{account}/homepage`
   "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI (typically a URL) of the store's homepage.
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Homepage` message represents a merchant's store homepage within the system. A merchant's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the merchant to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
+    { # The `Homepage` message represents a business's store homepage within the system. A business's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the business to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
   "claimed": True or False, # Output only. Whether the homepage is claimed. See https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the store's homepage. Format: `accounts/{account}/homepage`
   "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI (typically a URL) of the store's homepage.
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ 
Method Details

   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The `Homepage` message represents a merchant's store homepage within the system. A merchant's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the merchant to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
+{ # The `Homepage` message represents a business's store homepage within the system. A business's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the business to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
   "claimed": True or False, # Output only. Whether the homepage is claimed. See https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the store's homepage. Format: `accounts/{account}/homepage`
   "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI (typically a URL) of the store's homepage.
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Homepage` message represents a merchant's store homepage within the system. A merchant's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the merchant to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
+    { # The `Homepage` message represents a business's store homepage within the system. A business's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the business to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).
   "claimed": True or False, # Output only. Whether the homepage is claimed. See https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the store's homepage. Format: `accounts/{account}/homepage`
   "uri": "A String", # Required. The URI (typically a URL) of the store's homepage.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html
index e7d517919a..080abcc9b4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.html
@@ -99,6 +99,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the emailPreferences Resource.

 
+

+  gbpAccounts()
+

+
Returns the gbpAccounts Resource.

+
 

   homepage()
 

@@ -109,6 +114,11 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the issues Resource.

 
+

+  omnichannelSettings()
+

+
Returns the omnichannelSettings Resource.

+
 

   onlineReturnPolicies()
 

@@ -157,13 +167,13 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Creates a Merchant Center account with additional configuration. Adds the user that makes the request as an admin for the new account.

 

   delete(name, force=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Deletes the specified account regardless of its type: standalone, MCA or sub-account. Deleting an MCA leads to the deletion of all of its sub-accounts. Executing this method requires admin access. The deletion succeeds only if the account does not provide services to any other account and has no processed offers. You can use the `force` parameter to override this.

+
Deletes the specified account regardless of its type: standalone, advanced account or sub-account. Deleting an advanced account leads to the deletion of all of its sub-accounts. Executing this method requires admin access. The deletion succeeds only if the account does not provide services to any other account and has no processed offers. You can use the `force` parameter to override this.

 

   get(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Retrieves an account from your Merchant Center account. After inserting, updating, or deleting an account, it may take several minutes before changes take effect.

 

   list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Lists accounts accessible to the calling user and matching the constraints of the request such as page size or filters. This is not just listing the sub-accounts of an MCA, but all accounts the calling user has access to including other MCAs, linked accounts, standalone accounts and so on. If no filter is provided, then it returns all the accounts the user has access to. This method is eventually consistent, meaning changes such as creating, updating an account or a change of relationships between accounts may not show up in the results immediately. Instead, these changes propagate over a short period, after which the updated information can match the associated predicates. That means, that searching by account name might not return a recently changed account even though it satisfies the predicate.

+
Lists accounts accessible to the calling user and matching the constraints of the request such as page size or filters. This is not just listing the sub-accounts of an advanced account, but all accounts the calling user has access to including other advanced accounts, linked accounts, standalone accounts and so on. If no filter is provided, then it returns all the accounts the user has access to. This method is eventually consistent, meaning changes such as creating, updating an account or a change of relationships between accounts may not show up in the results immediately. Instead, these changes propagate over a short period, after which the updated information can match the associated predicates. That means, that searching by account name might not return a recently changed account even though it satisfies the predicate.

 

   listSubaccounts(provider, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
List all sub-accounts for a given multi client account. This is a convenience wrapper for the more powerful `ListAccounts` method. This method will produce the same results as calling `ListsAccounts` with the following filter: `relationship(providerId={parent} AND service(type="ACCOUNT_AGGREGATION"))`

@@ -175,7 +185,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Retrieves the next page of results.

 

   patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates an account regardless of its type: standalone, MCA or sub-account. Executing this method requires admin access.

+
Updates an account regardless of its type: standalone, advanced account or sub-account. Executing this method requires admin access.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
@@ -191,7 +201,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request message for the `CreateAndConfigureAccount` method.
-  "account": { # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on. # Required. The account to be created.
+  "account": { # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on. # Required. The account to be created.
     "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
     "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
     "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
@@ -203,7 +213,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "version": "A String", # Optional. IANA Time Zone Database version number. For example "2019a".
     },
   },
-  "service": [ # Required. An account service between the account to be created and the provider account is initialized as part of the creation. At least one such service needs to be provided. Currently exactly one of these needs to be `account_aggregation`, which means you can only create sub accounts, not standalone account through this method. Additional `account_management` or `product_management` services may be provided.
+  "service": [ # Required. An account service between the account to be created and the provider account is initialized as part of the creation. At least one such service needs to be provided. Currently exactly one of these needs to be `account_aggregation` and `accounts.createAndConfigure` method can be used to create a sub-account under an existing advanced account through this method. Additional `account_management` or `product_management` services may be provided.
     { # Additional instructions to add account services during creation of the account.
       "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # The provider is an [aggregator](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487) for the account. Payload for service type Account Aggregation.
       },
@@ -245,7 +255,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
+    { # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
   "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
   "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
   "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
@@ -261,7 +271,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     delete(name, force=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Deletes the specified account regardless of its type: standalone, MCA or sub-account. Deleting an MCA leads to the deletion of all of its sub-accounts. Executing this method requires admin access. The deletion succeeds only if the account does not provide services to any other account and has no processed offers. You can use the `force` parameter to override this.
+  
Deletes the specified account regardless of its type: standalone, advanced account or sub-account. Deleting an advanced account leads to the deletion of all of its sub-accounts. Executing this method requires admin access. The deletion succeeds only if the account does not provide services to any other account and has no processed offers. You can use the `force` parameter to override this.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the account to delete. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
@@ -292,7 +302,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
+    { # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
   "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
   "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
   "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
@@ -308,7 +318,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Lists accounts accessible to the calling user and matching the constraints of the request such as page size or filters. This is not just listing the sub-accounts of an MCA, but all accounts the calling user has access to including other MCAs, linked accounts, standalone accounts and so on. If no filter is provided, then it returns all the accounts the user has access to. This method is eventually consistent, meaning changes such as creating, updating an account or a change of relationships between accounts may not show up in the results immediately. Instead, these changes propagate over a short period, after which the updated information can match the associated predicates. That means, that searching by account name might not return a recently changed account even though it satisfies the predicate.
+  
Lists accounts accessible to the calling user and matching the constraints of the request such as page size or filters. This is not just listing the sub-accounts of an advanced account, but all accounts the calling user has access to including other advanced accounts, linked accounts, standalone accounts and so on. If no filter is provided, then it returns all the accounts the user has access to. This method is eventually consistent, meaning changes such as creating, updating an account or a change of relationships between accounts may not show up in the results immediately. Instead, these changes propagate over a short period, after which the updated information can match the associated predicates. That means, that searching by account name might not return a recently changed account even though it satisfies the predicate.
 
 Args:
   filter: string, Optional. Returns only accounts that match the [filter](https://developers.google.com/merchant/api/guides/accounts/filter). For more details, see the [filter syntax reference](https://developers.google.com/merchant/api/guides/accounts/filter-syntax).
@@ -324,7 +334,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Response message for the `ListAccounts` method.
   "accounts": [ # The accounts matching the `ListAccountsRequest`.
-    { # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
+    { # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
       "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
       "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
       "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
@@ -359,7 +369,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Response message for the `ListSubAccounts` method.
   "accounts": [ # The accounts for which the given parent account is an aggregator.
-    { # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
+    { # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
       "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
       "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
       "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
@@ -406,14 +416,14 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates an account regardless of its type: standalone, MCA or sub-account. Executing this method requires admin access.
+  
Updates an account regardless of its type: standalone, advanced account or sub-account. Executing this method requires admin access.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Identifier. The resource name of the account. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
+{ # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
   "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
   "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
   "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
@@ -435,7 +445,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
+    { # The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.
   "accountId": "A String", # Output only. The ID of the account.
   "accountName": "A String", # Required. A human-readable name of the account. See [store name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/160556) and [business name](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12159159) for more information.
   "adultContent": True or False, # Optional. Whether this account contains adult content.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.issues.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.issues.html
index 0a41dbfdec..c027234a7c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.issues.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.issues.html
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Response message for the `ListAccountIssues` method.
   "accountIssues": [ # The issues from the specified account.
-    { # An [`AccountIssue`](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12153802?sjid=17798438912526418908-EU#account).
+    { # Issues with your Merchant Center account that can impact all your products. For more information, see [Account-level issues in Merchant Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12153802?sjid=17798438912526418908-EU#account).
       "detail": "A String", # Further localized details about the issue.
       "documentationUri": "A String", # Link to Merchant Center Help Center providing further information about the issue and how to fix it.
       "impactedDestinations": [ # The impact this issue has on various destinations.
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "reportingContext": "A String", # The impacted reporting context.
         },
       ],
-      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account issue. Format: `accounts/{account}/issues/{id}`
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account issue. Format: `accounts/{account}/issues/{id}`. For example, `accounts/123456/issues/misrepresentation-of-self-or-products-unacceptable-business-practice-policy`.
       "severity": "A String", # The overall severity of the issue.
       "title": "A String", # The localized title of the issue.
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9b0c17f3b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.html
@@ -0,0 +1,451 @@
+
+
+
+
Merchant API . accounts . omnichannelSettings

+
Instance Methods

+

+  lfpProviders()
+

+
Returns the lfpProviders Resource.

+
+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Get the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.

+

+  list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
List all the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update the omnichannel setting for a given merchant in a given country.

+

+  requestInventoryVerification(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Requests inventory verification for a given merchant in a given country.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent resource where this omnichannel setting will be created. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.
+  "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+  },
+  "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+  },
+  "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+    "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+  },
+  "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+    "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+    "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+  },
+  "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+  "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+  },
+  "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+  },
+  "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.
+  "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+  },
+  "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+  },
+  "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+    "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+  },
+  "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+    "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+    "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+  },
+  "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+  "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+  },
+  "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+  },
+  "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Get the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the omnichannel setting to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.
+  "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+  },
+  "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+  },
+  "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+    "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+  },
+  "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+    "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+    "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+  },
+  "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+  "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+  },
+  "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+  },
+  "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
List all the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent, which owns this collection of omnichannel settings. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of omnichannel settings to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 50 omnichannel settings will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListOmnichannelSettings` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListOmnichannelSettings` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the ListOmnichannelSettings method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+  "omnichannelSettings": [ # The omnichannel settings from the specified merchant.
+    { # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.
+      "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+        "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+      },
+      "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+        "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+      },
+      "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+        "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+        "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+        "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+      },
+      "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+        "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+        "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+      },
+      "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+      "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+        "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+      },
+      "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+        "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+        "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+      },
+      "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+    },
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update the omnichannel setting for a given merchant in a given country.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.
+  "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+  },
+  "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+  },
+  "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+    "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+  },
+  "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+    "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+    "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+  },
+  "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+  "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+  },
+  "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+  },
+  "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. The list of fields to be updated. The following fields are supported in snake_case only: - `lsf_type` - `in_stock` - `pickup` - `odo` - `about` - `inventory_verification` Full replacement with wildcard `*`is supported, while empty/implied update mask is not.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.
+  "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+  },
+  "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+  },
+  "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+    "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+    "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+  },
+  "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+    "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+    "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+  },
+  "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+  "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+  },
+  "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+    "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+    "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+  },
+  "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+}

+

+
+

+    requestInventoryVerification(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Requests inventory verification for a given merchant in a given country.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the omnichannel setting to request inventory verification. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for the RequestInventoryVerification method.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the RequestInventoryVerification method.
+  "omnichannelSetting": { # Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant. # The omnichannel setting that was updated.
+    "about": { # Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The about page URI and state for this country.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. The about page URI.
+    },
+    "inStock": { # Collection of information related to InStock. # Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.
+      "uri": "A String", # Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.
+    },
+    "inventoryVerification": { # Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC). # Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country.
+      "contact": "A String", # Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+      "contactEmail": "A String", # Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.
+      "contactState": "A String", # Output only. The state of the contact verification.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.
+    },
+    "lfpLink": { # Collection of information related to the LFP link. # Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.
+      "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+      "lfpProvider": "A String", # Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the LFP link.
+    },
+    "lsfType": "A String", # Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.
+    "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`
+    "odo": { # Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)). # Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the URI.
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.
+    },
+    "pickup": { # Collection of information related to Pickup. # Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the pickup serving.
+      "uri": "A String", # Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.
+    },
+    "regionCode": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.
+  },
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c6fb13a228
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.html
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+
+
+
+
Merchant API . accounts . omnichannelSettings . lfpProviders

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  find(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Find the LFP provider candidates in a given country.

+

+  find_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  linkLfpProvider(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Link the specified merchant to a LFP provider for the specified country.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    find(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Find the LFP provider candidates in a given country.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the parent resource under which the LFP providers are found. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`. (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of `LfpProvider` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of lfp providers is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 1000; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `FindLfpProviders` call. Provide the page token to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `FindLfpProviders` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the FindLfpProviders method.
+  "lfpProviders": [ # The LFP providers from the specified merchant in the specified country.
+    { # Collection of information related to a Local Feed Partnership (LFP) provider.
+      "displayName": "A String", # The display name of the LFP provider.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}/lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`
+      "regionCode": "A String", # Output only. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/).
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+}

+

+
+

+    find_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    linkLfpProvider(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Link the specified merchant to a LFP provider for the specified country.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the LFP provider resource to link. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}/lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`. The `lfp_provider` is the LFP provider ID. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Request message for the LinkLfpProvider method.
+  "externalAccountId": "A String", # Required. The external account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the LinkLfpProvider method.
+  "response": { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } # Empty response.
+  },
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.html
index db9c1db2ee..e0e0bb8bdd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.html
@@ -77,24 +77,187 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Creates a new return policy for a given business.

+

+  delete(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Deletes an existing return policy.

 

   get(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Gets an existing return policy for a given merchant.

+
Gets an existing return policy for a given business.

 

   list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Lists all existing return policies for a given merchant.

+
Lists all existing return policies for a given business.

 

   list_next()

 
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Updates an existing return policy for a given business.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
   
Close httplib2 connections.

 

 
+

+    create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Creates a new return policy for a given business.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The Merchant Center account for which the return policy will be created. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # [Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.
+  "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.
+  "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.
+  "countries": [ # Required. Immutable. The countries of sale where the return policy applies. The values must be a valid 2 letter ISO 3166 code.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "itemConditions": [ # Optional. The item conditions accepted for returns must not be empty unless the type of return policy is 'noReturns'.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "label": "A String", # Required. Immutable. This field represents the unique user-defined label of the return policy. It is important to note that the same label cannot be used in different return policies for the same country. Unless a product specifies a specific label attribute, policies will be automatically labeled as 'default'. To assign a custom return policy to certain product groups, follow the instructions provided in the [Return policy label] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9445425). The label can contain up to 50 characters.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `OnlineReturnPolicy` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}`
+  "policy": { # The available policies. # Optional. The return policy.
+    "days": "A String", # The number of days items can be returned after delivery, where one day is defined as 24 hours after the delivery timestamp. Required for `NUMBER_OF_DAYS_AFTER_DELIVERY` returns.
+    "type": "A String", # Policy type.
+  },
+  "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.
+  "restockingFee": { # The restocking fee. This can be a flat fee or a micro percent. # Optional. The restocking fee that applies to all return reason categories. This would be treated as a free restocking fee if the value is not set.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed restocking fee.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "microPercent": 42, # Percent of total price in micros. 15,000,000 means 15% of the total price would be charged.
+  },
+  "returnLabelSource": "A String", # Optional. The field specifies the return label source.
+  "returnMethods": [ # Optional. The return methods of how customers can return an item. This value is required to not be empty unless the type of return policy is noReturns.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "returnPolicyId": "A String", # Output only. Return policy ID generated by Google.
+  "returnPolicyUri": "A String", # Required. The return policy uri. This can used by Google to do a sanity check for the policy. It must be a valid URL.
+  "returnShippingFee": { # The return shipping fee. This can either be a fixed fee or a boolean to indicate that the customer pays the actual shipping cost. # Optional. The return shipping fee. Should be set only when customer need to download and print the return label.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed return shipping fee amount. This value is only applicable when type is `FIXED`. We will treat the return shipping fee as free if type is `FIXED` and this value is not set.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "type": "A String", # Required. Type of return shipping fee.
+  },
+  "seasonalOverrides": [ # Optional. Overrides to the general policy for orders placed during a specific set of time intervals.
+    {
+      "endDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. seasonal override end date (inclusive).
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "label": "A String", # Required. Display name of this seasonal override in Merchant Center.
+      "returnDays": 42, # Number of days (from the delivery date) that the product can be returned.
+      "returnUntilDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Fixed end date until which the product can be returned.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "startDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. Defines the date range when this seasonal override applies. Both start_date and end_date are inclusive. The dates of the seasonal overrides should not overlap.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # [Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.
+  "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.
+  "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.
+  "countries": [ # Required. Immutable. The countries of sale where the return policy applies. The values must be a valid 2 letter ISO 3166 code.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "itemConditions": [ # Optional. The item conditions accepted for returns must not be empty unless the type of return policy is 'noReturns'.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "label": "A String", # Required. Immutable. This field represents the unique user-defined label of the return policy. It is important to note that the same label cannot be used in different return policies for the same country. Unless a product specifies a specific label attribute, policies will be automatically labeled as 'default'. To assign a custom return policy to certain product groups, follow the instructions provided in the [Return policy label] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9445425). The label can contain up to 50 characters.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `OnlineReturnPolicy` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}`
+  "policy": { # The available policies. # Optional. The return policy.
+    "days": "A String", # The number of days items can be returned after delivery, where one day is defined as 24 hours after the delivery timestamp. Required for `NUMBER_OF_DAYS_AFTER_DELIVERY` returns.
+    "type": "A String", # Policy type.
+  },
+  "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.
+  "restockingFee": { # The restocking fee. This can be a flat fee or a micro percent. # Optional. The restocking fee that applies to all return reason categories. This would be treated as a free restocking fee if the value is not set.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed restocking fee.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "microPercent": 42, # Percent of total price in micros. 15,000,000 means 15% of the total price would be charged.
+  },
+  "returnLabelSource": "A String", # Optional. The field specifies the return label source.
+  "returnMethods": [ # Optional. The return methods of how customers can return an item. This value is required to not be empty unless the type of return policy is noReturns.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "returnPolicyId": "A String", # Output only. Return policy ID generated by Google.
+  "returnPolicyUri": "A String", # Required. The return policy uri. This can used by Google to do a sanity check for the policy. It must be a valid URL.
+  "returnShippingFee": { # The return shipping fee. This can either be a fixed fee or a boolean to indicate that the customer pays the actual shipping cost. # Optional. The return shipping fee. Should be set only when customer need to download and print the return label.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed return shipping fee amount. This value is only applicable when type is `FIXED`. We will treat the return shipping fee as free if type is `FIXED` and this value is not set.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "type": "A String", # Required. Type of return shipping fee.
+  },
+  "seasonalOverrides": [ # Optional. Overrides to the general policy for orders placed during a specific set of time intervals.
+    {
+      "endDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. seasonal override end date (inclusive).
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "label": "A String", # Required. Display name of this seasonal override in Merchant Center.
+      "returnDays": 42, # Number of days (from the delivery date) that the product can be returned.
+      "returnUntilDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Fixed end date until which the product can be returned.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "startDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. Defines the date range when this seasonal override applies. Both start_date and end_date are inclusive. The dates of the seasonal overrides should not overlap.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Deletes an existing return policy.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the return policy to delete. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
 

     get(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Gets an existing return policy for a given merchant.
+  
Gets an existing return policy for a given business.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the return policy to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}` (required)
@@ -107,8 +270,8 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # [Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.
-  "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if merchant only accepts defective products for returns.
-  "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if merchant allows customers to exchange products.
+  "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.
+  "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.
   "countries": [ # Required. Immutable. The countries of sale where the return policy applies. The values must be a valid 2 letter ISO 3166 code.
     "A String",
   ],
@@ -121,7 +284,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "days": "A String", # The number of days items can be returned after delivery, where one day is defined as 24 hours after the delivery timestamp. Required for `NUMBER_OF_DAYS_AFTER_DELIVERY` returns.
     "type": "A String", # Policy type.
   },
-  "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for merchants to process refunds.
+  "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.
   "restockingFee": { # The restocking fee. This can be a flat fee or a micro percent. # Optional. The restocking fee that applies to all return reason categories. This would be treated as a free restocking fee if the value is not set.
     "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed restocking fee.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
@@ -168,11 +331,11 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Lists all existing return policies for a given merchant.
+  
Lists all existing return policies for a given business.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The merchant account for which to list return policies. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
-  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of `OnlineReturnPolicy` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of return policies for the given merchant is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 100; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum
+  parent: string, Required. The Merchant Center account for which to list return policies. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of `OnlineReturnPolicy` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of return policies for the given business is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 100; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum
   pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListOnlineReturnPolicies` call. Provide the page token to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListOnlineReturnPolicies` must match the call that provided the page token. The token returned as nextPageToken in the response to the previous request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -186,8 +349,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `pageToken` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
   "onlineReturnPolicies": [ # The retrieved return policies.
     { # [Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.
-      "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if merchant only accepts defective products for returns.
-      "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if merchant allows customers to exchange products.
+      "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.
+      "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.
       "countries": [ # Required. Immutable. The countries of sale where the return policy applies. The values must be a valid 2 letter ISO 3166 code.
         "A String",
       ],
@@ -200,7 +363,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "days": "A String", # The number of days items can be returned after delivery, where one day is defined as 24 hours after the delivery timestamp. Required for `NUMBER_OF_DAYS_AFTER_DELIVERY` returns.
         "type": "A String", # Policy type.
       },
-      "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for merchants to process refunds.
+      "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.
       "restockingFee": { # The restocking fee. This can be a flat fee or a micro percent. # Optional. The restocking fee that applies to all return reason categories. This would be treated as a free restocking fee if the value is not set.
         "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed restocking fee.
           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
@@ -261,4 +424,141 @@ 
Method Details

         

 

 
+

+    patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Updates an existing return policy for a given business.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The name of the `OnlineReturnPolicy` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # [Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.
+  "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.
+  "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.
+  "countries": [ # Required. Immutable. The countries of sale where the return policy applies. The values must be a valid 2 letter ISO 3166 code.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "itemConditions": [ # Optional. The item conditions accepted for returns must not be empty unless the type of return policy is 'noReturns'.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "label": "A String", # Required. Immutable. This field represents the unique user-defined label of the return policy. It is important to note that the same label cannot be used in different return policies for the same country. Unless a product specifies a specific label attribute, policies will be automatically labeled as 'default'. To assign a custom return policy to certain product groups, follow the instructions provided in the [Return policy label] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9445425). The label can contain up to 50 characters.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `OnlineReturnPolicy` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}`
+  "policy": { # The available policies. # Optional. The return policy.
+    "days": "A String", # The number of days items can be returned after delivery, where one day is defined as 24 hours after the delivery timestamp. Required for `NUMBER_OF_DAYS_AFTER_DELIVERY` returns.
+    "type": "A String", # Policy type.
+  },
+  "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.
+  "restockingFee": { # The restocking fee. This can be a flat fee or a micro percent. # Optional. The restocking fee that applies to all return reason categories. This would be treated as a free restocking fee if the value is not set.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed restocking fee.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "microPercent": 42, # Percent of total price in micros. 15,000,000 means 15% of the total price would be charged.
+  },
+  "returnLabelSource": "A String", # Optional. The field specifies the return label source.
+  "returnMethods": [ # Optional. The return methods of how customers can return an item. This value is required to not be empty unless the type of return policy is noReturns.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "returnPolicyId": "A String", # Output only. Return policy ID generated by Google.
+  "returnPolicyUri": "A String", # Required. The return policy uri. This can used by Google to do a sanity check for the policy. It must be a valid URL.
+  "returnShippingFee": { # The return shipping fee. This can either be a fixed fee or a boolean to indicate that the customer pays the actual shipping cost. # Optional. The return shipping fee. Should be set only when customer need to download and print the return label.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed return shipping fee amount. This value is only applicable when type is `FIXED`. We will treat the return shipping fee as free if type is `FIXED` and this value is not set.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "type": "A String", # Required. Type of return shipping fee.
+  },
+  "seasonalOverrides": [ # Optional. Overrides to the general policy for orders placed during a specific set of time intervals.
+    {
+      "endDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. seasonal override end date (inclusive).
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "label": "A String", # Required. Display name of this seasonal override in Merchant Center.
+      "returnDays": 42, # Number of days (from the delivery date) that the product can be returned.
+      "returnUntilDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Fixed end date until which the product can be returned.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "startDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. Defines the date range when this seasonal override applies. Both start_date and end_date are inclusive. The dates of the seasonal overrides should not overlap.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Optional. List of fields being updated. The following fields are supported (in both `snake_case` and `lowerCamelCase`): - `accept_defective_only` - `accept_exchange` - `item_conditions` - `policy` - `process_refund_days` - `restocking_fee` - `return_methods` - `return_policy_uri` - `return_shipping_fee`
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # [Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.
+  "acceptDefectiveOnly": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.
+  "acceptExchange": True or False, # Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.
+  "countries": [ # Required. Immutable. The countries of sale where the return policy applies. The values must be a valid 2 letter ISO 3166 code.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "itemConditions": [ # Optional. The item conditions accepted for returns must not be empty unless the type of return policy is 'noReturns'.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "label": "A String", # Required. Immutable. This field represents the unique user-defined label of the return policy. It is important to note that the same label cannot be used in different return policies for the same country. Unless a product specifies a specific label attribute, policies will be automatically labeled as 'default'. To assign a custom return policy to certain product groups, follow the instructions provided in the [Return policy label] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9445425). The label can contain up to 50 characters.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `OnlineReturnPolicy` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}`
+  "policy": { # The available policies. # Optional. The return policy.
+    "days": "A String", # The number of days items can be returned after delivery, where one day is defined as 24 hours after the delivery timestamp. Required for `NUMBER_OF_DAYS_AFTER_DELIVERY` returns.
+    "type": "A String", # Policy type.
+  },
+  "processRefundDays": 42, # Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.
+  "restockingFee": { # The restocking fee. This can be a flat fee or a micro percent. # Optional. The restocking fee that applies to all return reason categories. This would be treated as a free restocking fee if the value is not set.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed restocking fee.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "microPercent": 42, # Percent of total price in micros. 15,000,000 means 15% of the total price would be charged.
+  },
+  "returnLabelSource": "A String", # Optional. The field specifies the return label source.
+  "returnMethods": [ # Optional. The return methods of how customers can return an item. This value is required to not be empty unless the type of return policy is noReturns.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "returnPolicyId": "A String", # Output only. Return policy ID generated by Google.
+  "returnPolicyUri": "A String", # Required. The return policy uri. This can used by Google to do a sanity check for the policy. It must be a valid URL.
+  "returnShippingFee": { # The return shipping fee. This can either be a fixed fee or a boolean to indicate that the customer pays the actual shipping cost. # Optional. The return shipping fee. Should be set only when customer need to download and print the return label.
+    "fixedFee": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Fixed return shipping fee amount. This value is only applicable when type is `FIXED`. We will treat the return shipping fee as free if type is `FIXED` and this value is not set.
+      "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
+      "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
+    },
+    "type": "A String", # Required. Type of return shipping fee.
+  },
+  "seasonalOverrides": [ # Optional. Overrides to the general policy for orders placed during a specific set of time intervals.
+    {
+      "endDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. seasonal override end date (inclusive).
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "label": "A String", # Required. Display name of this seasonal override in Merchant Center.
+      "returnDays": 42, # Number of days (from the delivery date) that the product can be returned.
+      "returnUntilDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Fixed end date until which the product can be returned.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+      "startDate": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # Required. Defines the date range when this seasonal override applies. Both start_date and end_date are inclusive. The dates of the seasonal overrides should not overlap.
+        "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
+        "month": 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+        "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}

+

+
 
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html
index 48dfc47548..909daf71ab 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.programs.html
@@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Close httplib2 connections.

 

   disable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Disable participation in the specified program for the account. Executing this method requires admin access.

+
Disable participation in the specified program for the account.

 

   enable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Enable participation in the specified program for the account. Executing this method requires admin access.

+
Enable participation in the specified program for the account.

 

   get(name, x__xgafv=None)

 
Retrieves the specified program for the account.

@@ -100,10 +100,10 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     disable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Disable participation in the specified program for the account. Executing this method requires admin access.
+  
Disable participation in the specified program for the account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the program for which to disable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the program for which to disable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`. For example, `accounts/123456/programs/free-listings`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to merchant accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a merchant's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
+    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
   "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally.
     "A String",
   ],
@@ -139,10 +139,10 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     enable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Enable participation in the specified program for the account. Executing this method requires admin access.
+  
Enable participation in the specified program for the account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the program for which to enable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the program for which to enable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`. For example, `accounts/123456/programs/free-listings`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to merchant accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a merchant's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
+    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
   "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally.
     "A String",
   ],
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Retrieves the specified program for the account.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the program to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the program to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`. For example, `accounts/123456/programs/free-listings`. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to merchant accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a merchant's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
+    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
   "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally.
     "A String",
   ],
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ 
Method Details

     { # Response message for the ListPrograms method.
   "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token that can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
   "programs": [ # The programs for the given account.
-    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to merchant accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a merchant's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
+    { # Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`
       "activeRegionCodes": [ # Output only. The regions in which the account is actively participating in the program. Active regions are defined as those where all program requirements affecting the regions have been met. Region codes are defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). This is either a country where the program applies specifically to that country or `001` when the program applies globally.
         "A String",
       ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.regions.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.regions.html
index 03689d363e..6fd1836852 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.regions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.regions.html
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Response message for the `ListRegions` method.
   "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
-  "regions": [ # The regions from the specified merchant.
+  "regions": [ # The regions from the specified business.
     { # Represents a geographic region that you can use as a target with both the `RegionalInventory` and `ShippingSettings` services. You can define regions as collections of either postal codes or, in some countries, using predefined geotargets. For more information, see [Set up regions ](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7410946#zippy=%2Ccreate-a-new-region) for more information.
       "displayName": "A String", # Optional. The display name of the region.
       "geotargetArea": { # A list of geotargets that defines the region area. # Optional. A list of geotargets that defines the region area.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.relationships.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.relationships.html
index 4d751235b0..b2ff2a36af 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.relationships.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.relationships.html
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Retrieve an account relationship.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The resource name of the account relationship to get. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the account relationship to get. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -109,9 +109,9 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the merchant, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the merchant's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
+    { # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the business, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the business's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
   "accountIdAlias": "A String", # Optional. An optional alias you can assign to this account relationship. This alias acts as a convenient identifier for your own reference and management. It must be unique among all your account relationships with the same provider. For example, you might use `account_id_alias` to assign a friendly name to this relationship for easier identification in your systems.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.
   "provider": "A String", # Immutable. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
   "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
 }

@@ -135,9 +135,9 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Response after trying to list account relationships.
   "accountRelationships": [ # The account relationships that match your filter.
-    { # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the merchant, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the merchant's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
+    { # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the business, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the business's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
       "accountIdAlias": "A String", # Optional. An optional alias you can assign to this account relationship. This alias acts as a convenient identifier for your own reference and management. It must be unique among all your account relationships with the same provider. For example, you might use `account_id_alias` to assign a friendly name to this relationship for easier identification in your systems.
-      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.
       "provider": "A String", # Immutable. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
       "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
     },
@@ -165,13 +165,13 @@ 
Method Details

   
Updates the account relationship. Executing this method requires admin access.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}` (required)
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the merchant, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the merchant's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
+{ # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the business, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the business's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
   "accountIdAlias": "A String", # Optional. An optional alias you can assign to this account relationship. This alias acts as a convenient identifier for your own reference and management. It must be unique among all your account relationships with the same provider. For example, you might use `account_id_alias` to assign a friendly name to this relationship for easier identification in your systems.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.
   "provider": "A String", # Immutable. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
   "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
 }
@@ -185,9 +185,9 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the merchant, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the merchant's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
+    { # The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the business, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the business's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).
   "accountIdAlias": "A String", # Optional. An optional alias you can assign to this account relationship. This alias acts as a convenient identifier for your own reference and management. It must be unique among all your account relationships with the same provider. For example, you might use `account_id_alias` to assign a friendly name to this relationship for easier identification in your systems.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.
   "provider": "A String", # Immutable. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
   "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
 }

diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.services.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.services.html
index 54dc8d2631..792729ad48 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.services.html
@@ -116,21 +116,23 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a merchant account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the merchant and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
-  "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is a Multi-Client Account (MCA), to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the MCA provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many merchant accounts.
+    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a Merchant Center account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the business and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
+  "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is an advanced account, to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the advanced account provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many Merchant Center accounts.
   },
-  "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the merchant's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
+  "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the business's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
   },
-  "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the merchant's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
+  "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the business's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
   },
   "externalAccountId": "A String", # Immutable. An optional, immutable identifier that Google uses to refer to this account when communicating with the provider. This should be the unique account ID within the provider's system (for example, your shop ID in Shopify). If you have multiple accounts with the same provider - for instance, different accounts for various regions — the `external_account_id` differentiates between them, ensuring accurate linking and integration between Google and the provider.
   "handshake": { # The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved). # Output only. Information about the state of the service in terms of establishing it (e.g. is it pending approval or approved).
     "actor": "A String", # Output only. The most recent account to modify the account service's `approval_status`.
     "approvalState": "A String", # Output only. The approval state of this handshake.
   },
+  "localListingManagement": { # `LocalListingManagement` payload. # Service type for local listings management. The business group associated with the external account id will be used to provide local inventory to this Merchant Center account.
+  },
   "mutability": "A String", # Output only. Whether the service is mutable (e.g. through Approve / Reject RPCs). A service that was created through another system or API might be immutable.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account service. Format: `accounts/{account}/services/{service}`
-  "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the merchant, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the merchant's product information up-to-date across platforms.
+  "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the business, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the business's product information up-to-date across platforms.
   },
   "provider": "A String", # Output only. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
   "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
@@ -156,21 +158,23 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a merchant account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the merchant and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
-  "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is a Multi-Client Account (MCA), to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the MCA provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many merchant accounts.
+    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a Merchant Center account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the business and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
+  "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is an advanced account, to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the advanced account provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many Merchant Center accounts.
   },
-  "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the merchant's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
+  "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the business's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
   },
-  "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the merchant's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
+  "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the business's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
   },
   "externalAccountId": "A String", # Immutable. An optional, immutable identifier that Google uses to refer to this account when communicating with the provider. This should be the unique account ID within the provider's system (for example, your shop ID in Shopify). If you have multiple accounts with the same provider - for instance, different accounts for various regions — the `external_account_id` differentiates between them, ensuring accurate linking and integration between Google and the provider.
   "handshake": { # The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved). # Output only. Information about the state of the service in terms of establishing it (e.g. is it pending approval or approved).
     "actor": "A String", # Output only. The most recent account to modify the account service's `approval_status`.
     "approvalState": "A String", # Output only. The approval state of this handshake.
   },
+  "localListingManagement": { # `LocalListingManagement` payload. # Service type for local listings management. The business group associated with the external account id will be used to provide local inventory to this Merchant Center account.
+  },
   "mutability": "A String", # Output only. Whether the service is mutable (e.g. through Approve / Reject RPCs). A service that was created through another system or API might be immutable.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account service. Format: `accounts/{account}/services/{service}`
-  "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the merchant, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the merchant's product information up-to-date across platforms.
+  "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the business, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the business's product information up-to-date across platforms.
   },
   "provider": "A String", # Output only. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
   "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
@@ -195,21 +199,23 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # Response after trying to list account services.
   "accountServices": [ # The account services that match your filter.
-    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a merchant account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the merchant and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
-      "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is a Multi-Client Account (MCA), to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the MCA provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many merchant accounts.
+    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a Merchant Center account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the business and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
+      "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is an advanced account, to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the advanced account provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many Merchant Center accounts.
       },
-      "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the merchant's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
+      "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the business's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
       },
-      "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the merchant's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
+      "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the business's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
       },
       "externalAccountId": "A String", # Immutable. An optional, immutable identifier that Google uses to refer to this account when communicating with the provider. This should be the unique account ID within the provider's system (for example, your shop ID in Shopify). If you have multiple accounts with the same provider - for instance, different accounts for various regions — the `external_account_id` differentiates between them, ensuring accurate linking and integration between Google and the provider.
       "handshake": { # The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved). # Output only. Information about the state of the service in terms of establishing it (e.g. is it pending approval or approved).
         "actor": "A String", # Output only. The most recent account to modify the account service's `approval_status`.
         "approvalState": "A String", # Output only. The approval state of this handshake.
       },
+      "localListingManagement": { # `LocalListingManagement` payload. # Service type for local listings management. The business group associated with the external account id will be used to provide local inventory to this Merchant Center account.
+      },
       "mutability": "A String", # Output only. Whether the service is mutable (e.g. through Approve / Reject RPCs). A service that was created through another system or API might be immutable.
       "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account service. Format: `accounts/{account}/services/{service}`
-      "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the merchant, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the merchant's product information up-to-date across platforms.
+      "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the business, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the business's product information up-to-date across platforms.
       },
       "provider": "A String", # Output only. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
       "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
@@ -243,21 +249,23 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Request to propose an account service.
-  "accountService": { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a merchant account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the merchant and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API. # Required. The account service to propose.
-    "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is a Multi-Client Account (MCA), to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the MCA provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many merchant accounts.
+  "accountService": { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a Merchant Center account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the business and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API. # Required. The account service to propose.
+    "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is an advanced account, to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the advanced account provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many Merchant Center accounts.
     },
-    "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the merchant's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
+    "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the business's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
     },
-    "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the merchant's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
+    "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the business's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
     },
     "externalAccountId": "A String", # Immutable. An optional, immutable identifier that Google uses to refer to this account when communicating with the provider. This should be the unique account ID within the provider's system (for example, your shop ID in Shopify). If you have multiple accounts with the same provider - for instance, different accounts for various regions — the `external_account_id` differentiates between them, ensuring accurate linking and integration between Google and the provider.
     "handshake": { # The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved). # Output only. Information about the state of the service in terms of establishing it (e.g. is it pending approval or approved).
       "actor": "A String", # Output only. The most recent account to modify the account service's `approval_status`.
       "approvalState": "A String", # Output only. The approval state of this handshake.
     },
+    "localListingManagement": { # `LocalListingManagement` payload. # Service type for local listings management. The business group associated with the external account id will be used to provide local inventory to this Merchant Center account.
+    },
     "mutability": "A String", # Output only. Whether the service is mutable (e.g. through Approve / Reject RPCs). A service that was created through another system or API might be immutable.
     "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account service. Format: `accounts/{account}/services/{service}`
-    "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the merchant, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the merchant's product information up-to-date across platforms.
+    "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the business, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the business's product information up-to-date across platforms.
     },
     "provider": "A String", # Output only. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
     "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
@@ -273,21 +281,23 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a merchant account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the merchant and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
-  "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is a Multi-Client Account (MCA), to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the MCA provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many merchant accounts.
+    { # The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a Merchant Center account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the business and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.
+  "accountAggregation": { # `AccountAggregation` payload. # Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is an advanced account, to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the advanced account provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many Merchant Center accounts.
   },
-  "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the merchant's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
+  "accountManagement": { # `AccountManagement` payload. # Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the business's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information.
   },
-  "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the merchant's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
+  "campaignsManagement": { # `CampaignManagement` payload. # Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the business's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance.
   },
   "externalAccountId": "A String", # Immutable. An optional, immutable identifier that Google uses to refer to this account when communicating with the provider. This should be the unique account ID within the provider's system (for example, your shop ID in Shopify). If you have multiple accounts with the same provider - for instance, different accounts for various regions — the `external_account_id` differentiates between them, ensuring accurate linking and integration between Google and the provider.
   "handshake": { # The current status of establishing of the service. (for example, pending approval or approved). # Output only. Information about the state of the service in terms of establishing it (e.g. is it pending approval or approved).
     "actor": "A String", # Output only. The most recent account to modify the account service's `approval_status`.
     "approvalState": "A String", # Output only. The approval state of this handshake.
   },
+  "localListingManagement": { # `LocalListingManagement` payload. # Service type for local listings management. The business group associated with the external account id will be used to provide local inventory to this Merchant Center account.
+  },
   "mutability": "A String", # Output only. Whether the service is mutable (e.g. through Approve / Reject RPCs). A service that was created through another system or API might be immutable.
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the account service. Format: `accounts/{account}/services/{service}`
-  "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the merchant, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the merchant's product information up-to-date across platforms.
+  "productsManagement": { # `ProductsManagement` payload. # Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the business, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the business's product information up-to-date across platforms.
   },
   "provider": "A String", # Output only. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).
   "providerDisplayName": "A String", # Output only. The human-readable display name of the provider account.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.shippingSettings.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.shippingSettings.html
index 4446f036b0..0948239160 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.shippingSettings.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.shippingSettings.html
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Retrieve shipping setting information.

 

   insert(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Replace the shipping setting of a merchant with the request shipping setting. Executing this method requires admin access.

+
Replace the shipping setting of a business with the request shipping setting. Executing this method requires admin access.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
@@ -103,9 +103,9 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The merchant account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284).
+    { # The Merchant Center account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284). The `ShippingSettings` resource lets you retrieve and update the shipping settings of your advanced account and all its associated sub-accounts.
   "etag": "A String", # Required. This field is used for avoid async issue. Make sure shipping setting data didn't change between get call and insert call. The user should do following steps： 1. Set etag field as empty string for initial shipping setting creation. 2. After initial creation, call get method to obtain an etag and current shipping setting data before call insert. 3. Modify to wanted shipping setting information. 4. Call insert method with the wanted shipping setting information with the etag obtained from step 2. 5. If shipping setting data changed between step 2 and step 4. Insert request will fail because the etag changes every time the shipping setting data changes. User should repeate step 2-4 with the new etag.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`. For example, `accounts/123456/shippingSettings`.
   "services": [ # Optional. The target account's list of services.
     { # Shipping service.
       "active": True or False, # Required. A boolean exposing the active status of the shipping service.
@@ -160,20 +160,20 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
       },
       "loyaltyPrograms": [ # Optional. Loyalty programs that this shipping service is limited to.
-        { # [Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a merchant.
+        { # [Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a business.
           "loyaltyProgramTiers": [ # Optional. Loyalty program tier of this shipping service.
-            { # Subset of a merchants loyalty program.
+            { # Subset of a business's loyalty program.
               "tierLabel": "A String", # The tier label [tier_label] sub-attribute differentiates offer level benefits between each tier. This value is also set in your program settings in Merchant Center, and is required for data source changes even if your loyalty program only has 1 tier.
             },
           ],
           "programLabel": "A String", # This is the loyalty program label set in your loyalty program settings in Merchant Center. This sub-attribute allows Google to map your loyalty program to eligible offers.
         },
       ],
-      "minimumOrderValue": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value_table.
+      "minimumOrderValue": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Optional. Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value_table`.
         "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
         "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
       },
-      "minimumOrderValueTable": { # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value.
+      "minimumOrderValueTable": { # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. # Optional. Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value`.
         "storeCodeSetWithMovs": [ # Required. A list of store code sets sharing the same minimum order value (MOV). At least two sets are required and the last one must be empty, which signifies 'MOV for all other stores'. Each store code can only appear once across all the sets. All prices within a service must have the same currency.
           { # A list of store code sets sharing the same minimum order value. At least two sets are required and the last one must be empty, which signifies 'MOV for all other stores'. Each store code can only appear once across all the sets. All prices within a service must have the same currency.
             "storeCodes": [ # Optional. A list of unique store codes or empty for the catch all.
@@ -366,14 +366,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "serviceName": "A String", # Required. Free-form name of the service. Must be unique within target account.
-      "shipmentType": "A String", # Type of locations this service ships orders to.
+      "shipmentType": "A String", # Optional. Type of locations this service ships orders to.
       "storeConfig": { # A list of stores your products are delivered from. This is only valid for the local delivery shipment type. # A list of stores your products are delivered from. This is only valid for the local delivery shipment type.
         "cutoffConfig": { # Configs related to local delivery ends for the day. # Configs related to local delivery ends for the day.
           "localCutoffTime": { # Time that local delivery ends for the day. # Time that local delivery ends for the day.
             "hour": "A String", # Hour local delivery orders must be placed by to process the same day.
             "minute": "A String", # Minute local delivery orders must be placed by to process the same day.
           },
-          "noDeliveryPostCutoff": True or False, # Merchants can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.
+          "noDeliveryPostCutoff": True or False, # Businesses can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.
           "storeCloseOffsetHours": "A String", # Only valid with local delivery fulfillment. Represents cutoff time as the number of hours before store closing. Mutually exclusive with `local_cutoff_time`.
         },
         "serviceRadius": { # Maximum delivery radius. This is only required for the local delivery shipment type. # Maximum delivery radius. This is only required for the local delivery shipment type.
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "storeCodes": [ # Optional. A list of store codes that provide local delivery. If empty, then `all_stores` must be true.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "storeServiceType": "A String", # Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this merchant provide local delivery.
+        "storeServiceType": "A String", # Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this business provide local delivery.
       },
     },
   ],
@@ -414,16 +414,16 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     insert(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Replace the shipping setting of a merchant with the request shipping setting. Executing this method requires admin access.
+  
Replace the shipping setting of a business with the request shipping setting. Executing this method requires admin access.
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The account for which this shipping setting will be inserted. If you are using an advanced account, you must specify the unique identifier of the sub-account for which you want to insert the shipping setting. Format: `accounts/{ACCOUNT_ID}` (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # The merchant account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284).
+{ # The Merchant Center account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284). The `ShippingSettings` resource lets you retrieve and update the shipping settings of your advanced account and all its associated sub-accounts.
   "etag": "A String", # Required. This field is used for avoid async issue. Make sure shipping setting data didn't change between get call and insert call. The user should do following steps： 1. Set etag field as empty string for initial shipping setting creation. 2. After initial creation, call get method to obtain an etag and current shipping setting data before call insert. 3. Modify to wanted shipping setting information. 4. Call insert method with the wanted shipping setting information with the etag obtained from step 2. 5. If shipping setting data changed between step 2 and step 4. Insert request will fail because the etag changes every time the shipping setting data changes. User should repeate step 2-4 with the new etag.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`. For example, `accounts/123456/shippingSettings`.
   "services": [ # Optional. The target account's list of services.
     { # Shipping service.
       "active": True or False, # Required. A boolean exposing the active status of the shipping service.
@@ -478,20 +478,20 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
       },
       "loyaltyPrograms": [ # Optional. Loyalty programs that this shipping service is limited to.
-        { # [Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a merchant.
+        { # [Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a business.
           "loyaltyProgramTiers": [ # Optional. Loyalty program tier of this shipping service.
-            { # Subset of a merchants loyalty program.
+            { # Subset of a business's loyalty program.
               "tierLabel": "A String", # The tier label [tier_label] sub-attribute differentiates offer level benefits between each tier. This value is also set in your program settings in Merchant Center, and is required for data source changes even if your loyalty program only has 1 tier.
             },
           ],
           "programLabel": "A String", # This is the loyalty program label set in your loyalty program settings in Merchant Center. This sub-attribute allows Google to map your loyalty program to eligible offers.
         },
       ],
-      "minimumOrderValue": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value_table.
+      "minimumOrderValue": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Optional. Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value_table`.
         "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
         "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
       },
-      "minimumOrderValueTable": { # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value.
+      "minimumOrderValueTable": { # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. # Optional. Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value`.
         "storeCodeSetWithMovs": [ # Required. A list of store code sets sharing the same minimum order value (MOV). At least two sets are required and the last one must be empty, which signifies 'MOV for all other stores'. Each store code can only appear once across all the sets. All prices within a service must have the same currency.
           { # A list of store code sets sharing the same minimum order value. At least two sets are required and the last one must be empty, which signifies 'MOV for all other stores'. Each store code can only appear once across all the sets. All prices within a service must have the same currency.
             "storeCodes": [ # Optional. A list of unique store codes or empty for the catch all.
@@ -684,14 +684,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "serviceName": "A String", # Required. Free-form name of the service. Must be unique within target account.
-      "shipmentType": "A String", # Type of locations this service ships orders to.
+      "shipmentType": "A String", # Optional. Type of locations this service ships orders to.
       "storeConfig": { # A list of stores your products are delivered from. This is only valid for the local delivery shipment type. # A list of stores your products are delivered from. This is only valid for the local delivery shipment type.
         "cutoffConfig": { # Configs related to local delivery ends for the day. # Configs related to local delivery ends for the day.
           "localCutoffTime": { # Time that local delivery ends for the day. # Time that local delivery ends for the day.
             "hour": "A String", # Hour local delivery orders must be placed by to process the same day.
             "minute": "A String", # Minute local delivery orders must be placed by to process the same day.
           },
-          "noDeliveryPostCutoff": True or False, # Merchants can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.
+          "noDeliveryPostCutoff": True or False, # Businesses can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.
           "storeCloseOffsetHours": "A String", # Only valid with local delivery fulfillment. Represents cutoff time as the number of hours before store closing. Mutually exclusive with `local_cutoff_time`.
         },
         "serviceRadius": { # Maximum delivery radius. This is only required for the local delivery shipment type. # Maximum delivery radius. This is only required for the local delivery shipment type.
@@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "storeCodes": [ # Optional. A list of store codes that provide local delivery. If empty, then `all_stores` must be true.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "storeServiceType": "A String", # Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this merchant provide local delivery.
+        "storeServiceType": "A String", # Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this business provide local delivery.
       },
     },
   ],
@@ -737,9 +737,9 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # The merchant account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284).
+    { # The Merchant Center account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284). The `ShippingSettings` resource lets you retrieve and update the shipping settings of your advanced account and all its associated sub-accounts.
   "etag": "A String", # Required. This field is used for avoid async issue. Make sure shipping setting data didn't change between get call and insert call. The user should do following steps： 1. Set etag field as empty string for initial shipping setting creation. 2. After initial creation, call get method to obtain an etag and current shipping setting data before call insert. 3. Modify to wanted shipping setting information. 4. Call insert method with the wanted shipping setting information with the etag obtained from step 2. 5. If shipping setting data changed between step 2 and step 4. Insert request will fail because the etag changes every time the shipping setting data changes. User should repeate step 2-4 with the new etag.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`. For example, `accounts/123456/shippingSettings`.
   "services": [ # Optional. The target account's list of services.
     { # Shipping service.
       "active": True or False, # Required. A boolean exposing the active status of the shipping service.
@@ -794,20 +794,20 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
       },
       "loyaltyPrograms": [ # Optional. Loyalty programs that this shipping service is limited to.
-        { # [Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a merchant.
+        { # [Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a business.
           "loyaltyProgramTiers": [ # Optional. Loyalty program tier of this shipping service.
-            { # Subset of a merchants loyalty program.
+            { # Subset of a business's loyalty program.
               "tierLabel": "A String", # The tier label [tier_label] sub-attribute differentiates offer level benefits between each tier. This value is also set in your program settings in Merchant Center, and is required for data source changes even if your loyalty program only has 1 tier.
             },
           ],
           "programLabel": "A String", # This is the loyalty program label set in your loyalty program settings in Merchant Center. This sub-attribute allows Google to map your loyalty program to eligible offers.
         },
       ],
-      "minimumOrderValue": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value_table.
+      "minimumOrderValue": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Optional. Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value_table`.
         "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
         "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
       },
-      "minimumOrderValueTable": { # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value.
+      "minimumOrderValueTable": { # Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. # Optional. Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value`.
         "storeCodeSetWithMovs": [ # Required. A list of store code sets sharing the same minimum order value (MOV). At least two sets are required and the last one must be empty, which signifies 'MOV for all other stores'. Each store code can only appear once across all the sets. All prices within a service must have the same currency.
           { # A list of store code sets sharing the same minimum order value. At least two sets are required and the last one must be empty, which signifies 'MOV for all other stores'. Each store code can only appear once across all the sets. All prices within a service must have the same currency.
             "storeCodes": [ # Optional. A list of unique store codes or empty for the catch all.
@@ -1000,14 +1000,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       ],
       "serviceName": "A String", # Required. Free-form name of the service. Must be unique within target account.
-      "shipmentType": "A String", # Type of locations this service ships orders to.
+      "shipmentType": "A String", # Optional. Type of locations this service ships orders to.
       "storeConfig": { # A list of stores your products are delivered from. This is only valid for the local delivery shipment type. # A list of stores your products are delivered from. This is only valid for the local delivery shipment type.
         "cutoffConfig": { # Configs related to local delivery ends for the day. # Configs related to local delivery ends for the day.
           "localCutoffTime": { # Time that local delivery ends for the day. # Time that local delivery ends for the day.
             "hour": "A String", # Hour local delivery orders must be placed by to process the same day.
             "minute": "A String", # Minute local delivery orders must be placed by to process the same day.
           },
-          "noDeliveryPostCutoff": True or False, # Merchants can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.
+          "noDeliveryPostCutoff": True or False, # Businesses can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.
           "storeCloseOffsetHours": "A String", # Only valid with local delivery fulfillment. Represents cutoff time as the number of hours before store closing. Mutually exclusive with `local_cutoff_time`.
         },
         "serviceRadius": { # Maximum delivery radius. This is only required for the local delivery shipment type. # Maximum delivery radius. This is only required for the local delivery shipment type.
@@ -1017,7 +1017,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "storeCodes": [ # Optional. A list of store codes that provide local delivery. If empty, then `all_stores` must be true.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "storeServiceType": "A String", # Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this merchant provide local delivery.
+        "storeServiceType": "A String", # Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this business provide local delivery.
       },
     },
   ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.termsOfServiceAgreementStates.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.termsOfServiceAgreementStates.html
index 5bed33b70b..5ceb485a74 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.termsOfServiceAgreementStates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.accounts.termsOfServiceAgreementStates.html
@@ -103,9 +103,9 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the merchant has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the merchant must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect 3Ps to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource.
-  "accepted": { # Describes the accepted terms of service. # The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code
-    "acceptedBy": "A String", # The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the MCA account.
+    { # This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the business has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the business must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource. `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services, we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`. The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource.
+  "accepted": { # Describes the [accepted terms of service](/merchant/api/guides/accounts/create-and-configure#accept_the_merchant_center_terms_of_service). # The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code
+    "acceptedBy": "A String", # The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the advanced account.
     "termsOfService": "A String", # The accepted termsOfService.
     "validUntil": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # When set, it states that the accepted `TermsOfService` is only valid until the end of this date (in UTC). A new one must be accepted before then. The information of the required `TermsOfService` is found in the `Required` message.
       "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
     },
   },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-EU` or `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`.
   "regionCode": "A String", # Region code as defined by https://cldr.unicode.org/. This is the country the current state applies to.
   "required": { # Describes the terms of service which are required to be accepted. # The required terms of service
     "termsOfService": "A String", # The `TermsOfService` that need to be accepted.
@@ -137,9 +137,9 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the merchant has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the merchant must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect 3Ps to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource.
-  "accepted": { # Describes the accepted terms of service. # The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code
-    "acceptedBy": "A String", # The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the MCA account.
+    { # This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the business has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the business must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource. `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services, we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`. The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource.
+  "accepted": { # Describes the [accepted terms of service](/merchant/api/guides/accounts/create-and-configure#accept_the_merchant_center_terms_of_service). # The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code
+    "acceptedBy": "A String", # The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the advanced account.
     "termsOfService": "A String", # The accepted termsOfService.
     "validUntil": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # When set, it states that the accepted `TermsOfService` is only valid until the end of this date (in UTC). A new one must be accepted before then. The information of the required `TermsOfService` is found in the `Required` message.
       "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
     },
   },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-EU` or `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`.
   "regionCode": "A String", # Region code as defined by https://cldr.unicode.org/. This is the country the current state applies to.
   "required": { # Describes the terms of service which are required to be accepted. # The required terms of service
     "termsOfService": "A String", # The `TermsOfService` that need to be accepted.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.termsOfService.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.termsOfService.html
index f62a65ec99..ca63b63e07 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.termsOfService.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_accounts_v1beta.termsOfService.html
@@ -104,9 +104,9 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # Response message for the `AcceptTermsOfService` method.
-  "termsOfServiceAgreementState": { # This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the merchant has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the merchant must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect 3Ps to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource. # The agreement state after accepting the ToS.
-    "accepted": { # Describes the accepted terms of service. # The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code
-      "acceptedBy": "A String", # The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the MCA account.
+  "termsOfServiceAgreementState": { # This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the business has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the business must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource. `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services, we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`. The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource. # The agreement state after accepting the ToS.
+    "accepted": { # Describes the [accepted terms of service](/merchant/api/guides/accounts/create-and-configure#accept_the_merchant_center_terms_of_service). # The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code
+      "acceptedBy": "A String", # The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the advanced account.
       "termsOfService": "A String", # The accepted termsOfService.
       "validUntil": { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp # When set, it states that the accepted `TermsOfService` is only valid until the end of this date (in UTC). A new one must be accepted before then. The information of the required `TermsOfService` is found in the `Required` message.
         "day": 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn't significant.
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "year": 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
       },
     },
-    "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`
+    "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-EU` or `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`.
     "regionCode": "A String", # Region code as defined by https://cldr.unicode.org/. This is the country the current state applies to.
     "required": { # Describes the terms of service which are required to be accepted. # The required terms of service
       "termsOfService": "A String", # The `TermsOfService` that need to be accepted.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_datasources_v1beta.accounts.dataSources.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_datasources_v1beta.accounts.dataSources.html
index 2dcba42a89..50a0b4d80c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_datasources_v1beta.accounts.dataSources.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_datasources_v1beta.accounts.dataSources.html
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
 }
 
-  updateMask: string, Required. The list of data source fields to be updated. Fields specified in the update mask without a value specified in the body will be deleted from the data source. Providing special "*" value for full data source replacement is not supported.
+  updateMask: string, Required. The list of data source fields to be updated. Fields specified in the update mask without a value specified in the body will be deleted from the data source. Providing special "*" value for full data source replacement is not supported. For example, If you insert `updateMask=displayName` in the request, it will only update the `displayName` leaving all other fields untouched.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.aggregateProductStatuses.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.aggregateProductStatuses.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ad5e143414
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.aggregateProductStatuses.html
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+
+
+
+
Merchant API . accounts . aggregateProductStatuses

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Lists the `AggregateProductStatuses` resources for your merchant account. The response might contain fewer items than specified by `pageSize`. If `pageToken` was returned in previous request, it can be used to obtain additional results.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Lists the `AggregateProductStatuses` resources for your merchant account. The response might contain fewer items than specified by `pageSize`. If `pageToken` was returned in previous request, it can be used to obtain additional results.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The account to list aggregate product statuses for. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. A filter expression that filters the aggregate product statuses. Filtering is only supported by the `reporting_context` and `country` field. For example: `reporting_context = "SHOPPING_ADS" AND country = "US"`.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of aggregate product statuses to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 25 aggregate product statuses are returned. The maximum value is 250; values above 250 are coerced to 250.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListAggregateProductStatuses` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListAggregateProductStatuses` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response message for the `ListAggregateProductStatuses` method.
+  "aggregateProductStatuses": [ # The `AggregateProductStatuses` resources for the given account.
+    { # Aggregate product statuses for a given reporting context and country.
+      "country": "A String", # The country of the aggregate product statuses. Represented as a [CLDR territory code](https://github.com/unicode-org/cldr/blob/latest/common/main/en.xml).
+      "itemLevelIssues": [ # The product issues that affect the given reporting context and country.
+        { # The ItemLevelIssue of the product status.
+          "attribute": "A String", # The attribute's name, if the issue is caused by a single attribute.
+          "code": "A String", # The error code of the issue.
+          "description": "A String", # A short issue description in English.
+          "detail": "A String", # A detailed issue description in English.
+          "documentationUri": "A String", # The URL of a web page to help with resolving this issue.
+          "productCount": "A String", # The number of products affected by this issue.
+          "resolution": "A String", # Whether the issue can be resolved by the merchant.
+          "severity": "A String", # How this issue affects serving of the offer.
+        },
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `AggregateProductStatuses` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/aggregateProductStatuses/{aggregateProductStatuses}`
+      "reportingContext": "A String", # The reporting context of the aggregate product statuses.
+      "stats": { # Products statistics. # Products statistics for the given reporting context and country.
+        "activeCount": "A String", # The number of products that are active.
+        "disapprovedCount": "A String", # The number of products that are disapproved.
+        "expiringCount": "A String", # The number of products that are expiring.
+        "pendingCount": "A String", # The number of products that are pending.
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token, which can be sent as `pageToken` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..52aa5111da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.accounts.html
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+
+
+
+
Merchant API . accounts

+
Instance Methods

+

+  aggregateProductStatuses()
+

+
Returns the aggregateProductStatuses Resource.

+
+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.html
index 1599d5fbde..47b19e54a8 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_issueresolution_v1beta.html
@@ -74,6 +74,11 @@
 
 
Merchant API

 
Instance Methods

+

+  accounts()
+

+
Returns the accounts Resource.

+
 

   issueresolution()
 

diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_lfp_v1beta.accounts.lfpMerchantStates.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_lfp_v1beta.accounts.lfpMerchantStates.html
index 5ca5cb8f26..5bcb97402e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_lfp_v1beta.accounts.lfpMerchantStates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_lfp_v1beta.accounts.lfpMerchantStates.html
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Gets the LFP state of a merchant
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the state to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}` (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the state to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`. For example, `accounts/123456/lfpMerchantStates/567890`. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "unsubmittedEntries": "A String", # Number of entries that were built based on provided inventories/sales and couldn't be submitted to Google due to errors like missing product.
   },
   "linkedGbps": "A String", # Number of [GBPs](https://www.google.com/business/) this merchant has access to.
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `LfpMerchantState` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the `LfpMerchantState` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`. For example, `accounts/123456/lfpMerchantStates/567890`.
   "storeStates": [ # Output only. The state per store from the specified merchant. The field will be absent if the merchant has no stores submitted through LFP.
     { # The state of a specific merchant's store.
       "matchingState": "A String", # Output only. The store matching state.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.productInputs.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.productInputs.html
index 9cfa858016..4aa67c7161 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.productInputs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.productInputs.html
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the product input resource to delete. Format: `accounts/{account}/productInputs/{product}` where the last section `product` consists of 4 parts: `channel~content_language~feed_label~offer_id` example for product name is `accounts/123/productInputs/online~en~US~sku123`. (required)
-  dataSource: string, Required. The primary or supplemental data source from which the product input should be deleted. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`.
+  dataSource: string, Required. The primary or supplemental data source from which the product input should be deleted. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`. For example, `accounts/123456/dataSources/104628`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -120,25 +120,25 @@ 
Method Details

   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
+{ # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. For more information, see [Manage products](/merchant/api/guides/products/overview). Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
   "attributes": { # Attributes. # Optional. A list of product attributes.
     "additionalImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of images of the item.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.
+    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "adsLabels": [ # Similar to ads_grouping, but only works on CPC.
       "A String",
     ],
     "adsRedirect": "A String", # Allows advertisers to override the item URL when the product is shown within the context of Product ads.
     "adult": True or False, # Set to true if the item is targeted towards adults.
     "ageGroup": "A String", # Target [age group](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324463) of the item.
-    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the "Automated Discounts" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
+    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "availability": "A String", # Availability status of the item.
+    "availability": "A String", # [Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, "in_stock" or "out_of_stock".
     "availabilityDate": "A String", # The day a pre-ordered product becomes available for delivery, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format.
-    "brand": "A String", # Brand of the item.
+    "brand": "A String", # [Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, "Google".
     "canonicalLink": "A String", # URL for the canonical version of your item's landing page.
     "certifications": [ # Product Certifications, for example for energy efficiency labeling of products recorded in the [EU EPREL](https://eprel.ec.europa.eu/screen/home) database. See the [Help Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839) article for more information.
       { # Product [certification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839), initially introduced for EU energy efficiency labeling compliance using the EU EPREL database.
@@ -166,28 +166,28 @@ 
Method Details

         "unitCode": "A String", # Unit of the given property. For example, "Pixels" for a TV product. Maximum string size is 256B.
       },
     ],
-    "color": "A String", # Color of the item.
-    "condition": "A String", # Condition or state of the item.
+    "color": "A String", # [Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, "red".
+    "condition": "A String", # [Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, "new" or "used".
     "costOfGoodsSold": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "customLabel0": "A String", # Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel1": "A String", # Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel2": "A String", # Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel3": "A String", # Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel4": "A String", # Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel0": "A String", # [Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel1": "A String", # [Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel2": "A String", # [Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel3": "A String", # [Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel4": "A String", # [Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
     "description": "A String", # Description of the item.
-    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
+    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
     "displayAdsId": "A String", # An identifier for an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
     "displayAdsLink": "A String", # URL directly to your item's landing page for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations.
+    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
       "A String",
     ],
     "displayAdsTitle": "A String", # Title of an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
+    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "energyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
-    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).
+    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "expirationDate": "A String", # Date on which the item should expire, as specified upon insertion, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. The actual expiration date is exposed in `productstatuses` as [googleExpirationDate](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324499) and might be earlier if `expirationDate` is too far in the future.
@@ -201,14 +201,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       },
     ],
-    "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
+    "gender": "A String", # Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, "male" or "female".
     "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
     "gtin": [ # Global Trade Item Numbers ([GTIN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#gtin)) of the item. You can provide up to 10 GTINs.
       "A String",
     ],
     "identifierExists": True or False, # Set this value to false when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Defaults to true, if not provided.
     "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
-    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
+    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "installment": { # A message that represents installment. # Number and amount of installments to pay for an item.
@@ -223,13 +223,13 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "months": "A String", # The number of installments the buyer has to pay.
     },
-    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.
+    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.
     "itemGroupId": "A String", # Shared identifier for all variants of the same product.
     "lifestyleImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of lifestyle images of the item, used to explicitly identify images that showcase your item in a real-world context. See the [Help Center article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9103186) for more information.
       "A String",
     ],
     "link": "A String", # URL directly linking to your item's page on your online store.
-    "linkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.
+    "linkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.
     "loyaltyPoints": { # A message that represents loyalty points. # Loyalty points that users receive after purchasing the item. Japan only.
       "name": "A String", # Name of loyalty points program. It is recommended to limit the name to 12 full-width characters or 24 Roman characters.
       "pointsValue": "A String", # The retailer's loyalty points in absolute value.
@@ -250,24 +250,24 @@ 
Method Details

           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.
+        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.
         "shippingLabel": "A String", # The label of the shipping benefit. If the field has value, this offer has loyalty shipping benefit. If the field value isn't provided, the item is not eligible for loyalty shipping for the given loyalty tier.
         "tierLabel": "A String", # The label of the tier within the loyalty program. Must match one of the labels within the program.
       },
     ],
-    "material": "A String", # The material of which the item is made.
+    "material": "A String", # The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, "Leather" or "Cotton".
     "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "maxHandlingTime": "A String", # Maximal product handling time (in business days).
     "minEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "minHandlingTime": "A String", # Minimal product handling time (in business days).
     "mobileLink": "A String", # URL for the mobile-optimized version of your item's landing page.
-    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
+    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
     "mpn": "A String", # Manufacturer Part Number ([MPN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#mpn)) of the item.
-    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.
-    "pattern": "A String", # The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).
+    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.
+    "pattern": "A String", # The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.
     "pause": "A String", # Publication of this item will be temporarily [paused](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11909930).
-    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The pick up option for the item.
-    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline.
+    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.
+    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).
     "price": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Price of the item.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
@@ -283,14 +283,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.
+    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productLength": { # The dimension of the product. # The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive).
       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).
+    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productWeight": { # The weight of the product. # The weight of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 2000 (inclusive).
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date)).
+    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability).
       "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
       "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
     },
@@ -348,12 +348,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # The unit of value.
       "value": 3.14, # The dimension of the product used to calculate the shipping cost of the item.
     },
-    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
+    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).
-    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.
-    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).
+    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).
+    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, "US", "UK", "DE". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).
+    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, "petite", "plus size".
       "A String",
     ],
     "structuredDescription": { # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions. # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions.
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "type": "A String", # Sustainability incentive program.
       },
     ],
-    "taxCategory": "A String", # The tax category of the product.
+    "taxCategory": "A String", # The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.
     "taxes": [ # Tax information.
       { # The Tax of the product.
         "country": "A String", # The country within which the item is taxed, specified as a [CLDR territory code](http://www.unicode.org/repos/cldr/tags/latest/common/main/en.xml).
@@ -416,14 +416,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "value": "A String", # The value of the attribute. If `value` is not empty, `group_values` must be empty.
     },
   ],
-  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The [feed label](https://developers.google.com/shopping-content/guides/products/feed-labels) for the product.
+  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The label that lets you categorize and identify your products. The maximum allowed characters are 20, and the supported characters are `A-Z`, `0-9`, hyphen, and underscore. The feed label must not include any spaces. For more information, see [Using feed labels](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/14994087).
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the product input. Format: `accounts/{account}/productInputs/{productinput}` where the last section `productinput` consists of 4 parts: `channel~content_language~feed_label~offer_id` example for product input name is `accounts/123/productInputs/online~en~US~sku123`
   "offerId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Your unique identifier for the product. This is the same for the product input and processed product. Leading and trailing whitespaces are stripped and multiple whitespaces are replaced by a single whitespace upon submission. See the [products data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#id) for details.
   "product": "A String", # Output only. The name of the processed product. Format: `accounts/{account}/products/{product}`
   "versionNumber": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Represents the existing version (freshness) of the product, which can be used to preserve the right order when multiple updates are done at the same time. If set, the insertion is prevented when version number is lower than the current version number of the existing product. Re-insertion (for example, product refresh after 30 days) can be performed with the current `version_number`. Only supported for insertions into primary data sources. Do not set this field for updates. Do not set this field for insertions into supplemental data sources. If the operation is prevented, the aborted exception will be thrown.
 }
 
-  dataSource: string, Required. The primary or supplemental product data source name. If the product already exists and data source provided is different, then the product will be moved to a new data source. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`.
+  dataSource: string, Required. The primary or supplemental product data source name. If the product already exists and data source provided is different, then the product will be moved to a new data source. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`. For example, `accounts/123456/dataSources/104628`.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -432,25 +432,25 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
+    { # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. For more information, see [Manage products](/merchant/api/guides/products/overview). Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
   "attributes": { # Attributes. # Optional. A list of product attributes.
     "additionalImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of images of the item.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.
+    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "adsLabels": [ # Similar to ads_grouping, but only works on CPC.
       "A String",
     ],
     "adsRedirect": "A String", # Allows advertisers to override the item URL when the product is shown within the context of Product ads.
     "adult": True or False, # Set to true if the item is targeted towards adults.
     "ageGroup": "A String", # Target [age group](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324463) of the item.
-    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the "Automated Discounts" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
+    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "availability": "A String", # Availability status of the item.
+    "availability": "A String", # [Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, "in_stock" or "out_of_stock".
     "availabilityDate": "A String", # The day a pre-ordered product becomes available for delivery, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format.
-    "brand": "A String", # Brand of the item.
+    "brand": "A String", # [Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, "Google".
     "canonicalLink": "A String", # URL for the canonical version of your item's landing page.
     "certifications": [ # Product Certifications, for example for energy efficiency labeling of products recorded in the [EU EPREL](https://eprel.ec.europa.eu/screen/home) database. See the [Help Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839) article for more information.
       { # Product [certification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839), initially introduced for EU energy efficiency labeling compliance using the EU EPREL database.
@@ -478,28 +478,28 @@ 
Method Details

         "unitCode": "A String", # Unit of the given property. For example, "Pixels" for a TV product. Maximum string size is 256B.
       },
     ],
-    "color": "A String", # Color of the item.
-    "condition": "A String", # Condition or state of the item.
+    "color": "A String", # [Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, "red".
+    "condition": "A String", # [Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, "new" or "used".
     "costOfGoodsSold": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "customLabel0": "A String", # Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel1": "A String", # Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel2": "A String", # Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel3": "A String", # Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel4": "A String", # Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel0": "A String", # [Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel1": "A String", # [Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel2": "A String", # [Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel3": "A String", # [Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel4": "A String", # [Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
     "description": "A String", # Description of the item.
-    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
+    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
     "displayAdsId": "A String", # An identifier for an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
     "displayAdsLink": "A String", # URL directly to your item's landing page for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations.
+    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
       "A String",
     ],
     "displayAdsTitle": "A String", # Title of an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
+    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "energyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
-    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).
+    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "expirationDate": "A String", # Date on which the item should expire, as specified upon insertion, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. The actual expiration date is exposed in `productstatuses` as [googleExpirationDate](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324499) and might be earlier if `expirationDate` is too far in the future.
@@ -513,14 +513,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       },
     ],
-    "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
+    "gender": "A String", # Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, "male" or "female".
     "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
     "gtin": [ # Global Trade Item Numbers ([GTIN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#gtin)) of the item. You can provide up to 10 GTINs.
       "A String",
     ],
     "identifierExists": True or False, # Set this value to false when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Defaults to true, if not provided.
     "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
-    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
+    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "installment": { # A message that represents installment. # Number and amount of installments to pay for an item.
@@ -535,13 +535,13 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "months": "A String", # The number of installments the buyer has to pay.
     },
-    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.
+    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.
     "itemGroupId": "A String", # Shared identifier for all variants of the same product.
     "lifestyleImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of lifestyle images of the item, used to explicitly identify images that showcase your item in a real-world context. See the [Help Center article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9103186) for more information.
       "A String",
     ],
     "link": "A String", # URL directly linking to your item's page on your online store.
-    "linkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.
+    "linkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.
     "loyaltyPoints": { # A message that represents loyalty points. # Loyalty points that users receive after purchasing the item. Japan only.
       "name": "A String", # Name of loyalty points program. It is recommended to limit the name to 12 full-width characters or 24 Roman characters.
       "pointsValue": "A String", # The retailer's loyalty points in absolute value.
@@ -562,24 +562,24 @@ 
Method Details

           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.
+        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.
         "shippingLabel": "A String", # The label of the shipping benefit. If the field has value, this offer has loyalty shipping benefit. If the field value isn't provided, the item is not eligible for loyalty shipping for the given loyalty tier.
         "tierLabel": "A String", # The label of the tier within the loyalty program. Must match one of the labels within the program.
       },
     ],
-    "material": "A String", # The material of which the item is made.
+    "material": "A String", # The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, "Leather" or "Cotton".
     "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "maxHandlingTime": "A String", # Maximal product handling time (in business days).
     "minEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "minHandlingTime": "A String", # Minimal product handling time (in business days).
     "mobileLink": "A String", # URL for the mobile-optimized version of your item's landing page.
-    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
+    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
     "mpn": "A String", # Manufacturer Part Number ([MPN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#mpn)) of the item.
-    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.
-    "pattern": "A String", # The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).
+    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.
+    "pattern": "A String", # The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.
     "pause": "A String", # Publication of this item will be temporarily [paused](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11909930).
-    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The pick up option for the item.
-    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline.
+    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.
+    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).
     "price": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Price of the item.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
@@ -595,14 +595,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.
+    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productLength": { # The dimension of the product. # The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive).
       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).
+    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productWeight": { # The weight of the product. # The weight of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 2000 (inclusive).
@@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date)).
+    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability).
       "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
       "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
     },
@@ -660,12 +660,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # The unit of value.
       "value": 3.14, # The dimension of the product used to calculate the shipping cost of the item.
     },
-    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
+    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).
-    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.
-    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).
+    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).
+    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, "US", "UK", "DE". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).
+    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, "petite", "plus size".
       "A String",
     ],
     "structuredDescription": { # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions. # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions.
@@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "type": "A String", # Sustainability incentive program.
       },
     ],
-    "taxCategory": "A String", # The tax category of the product.
+    "taxCategory": "A String", # The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.
     "taxes": [ # Tax information.
       { # The Tax of the product.
         "country": "A String", # The country within which the item is taxed, specified as a [CLDR territory code](http://www.unicode.org/repos/cldr/tags/latest/common/main/en.xml).
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "value": "A String", # The value of the attribute. If `value` is not empty, `group_values` must be empty.
     },
   ],
-  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The [feed label](https://developers.google.com/shopping-content/guides/products/feed-labels) for the product.
+  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The label that lets you categorize and identify your products. The maximum allowed characters are 20, and the supported characters are `A-Z`, `0-9`, hyphen, and underscore. The feed label must not include any spaces. For more information, see [Using feed labels](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/14994087).
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the product input. Format: `accounts/{account}/productInputs/{productinput}` where the last section `productinput` consists of 4 parts: `channel~content_language~feed_label~offer_id` example for product input name is `accounts/123/productInputs/online~en~US~sku123`
   "offerId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Your unique identifier for the product. This is the same for the product input and processed product. Leading and trailing whitespaces are stripped and multiple whitespaces are replaced by a single whitespace upon submission. See the [products data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#id) for details.
   "product": "A String", # Output only. The name of the processed product. Format: `accounts/{account}/products/{product}`
@@ -745,25 +745,25 @@ 
Method Details

   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
-{ # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
+{ # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. For more information, see [Manage products](/merchant/api/guides/products/overview). Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
   "attributes": { # Attributes. # Optional. A list of product attributes.
     "additionalImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of images of the item.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.
+    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "adsLabels": [ # Similar to ads_grouping, but only works on CPC.
       "A String",
     ],
     "adsRedirect": "A String", # Allows advertisers to override the item URL when the product is shown within the context of Product ads.
     "adult": True or False, # Set to true if the item is targeted towards adults.
     "ageGroup": "A String", # Target [age group](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324463) of the item.
-    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the "Automated Discounts" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
+    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "availability": "A String", # Availability status of the item.
+    "availability": "A String", # [Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, "in_stock" or "out_of_stock".
     "availabilityDate": "A String", # The day a pre-ordered product becomes available for delivery, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format.
-    "brand": "A String", # Brand of the item.
+    "brand": "A String", # [Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, "Google".
     "canonicalLink": "A String", # URL for the canonical version of your item's landing page.
     "certifications": [ # Product Certifications, for example for energy efficiency labeling of products recorded in the [EU EPREL](https://eprel.ec.europa.eu/screen/home) database. See the [Help Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839) article for more information.
       { # Product [certification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839), initially introduced for EU energy efficiency labeling compliance using the EU EPREL database.
@@ -791,28 +791,28 @@ 
Method Details

         "unitCode": "A String", # Unit of the given property. For example, "Pixels" for a TV product. Maximum string size is 256B.
       },
     ],
-    "color": "A String", # Color of the item.
-    "condition": "A String", # Condition or state of the item.
+    "color": "A String", # [Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, "red".
+    "condition": "A String", # [Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, "new" or "used".
     "costOfGoodsSold": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "customLabel0": "A String", # Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel1": "A String", # Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel2": "A String", # Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel3": "A String", # Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel4": "A String", # Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel0": "A String", # [Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel1": "A String", # [Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel2": "A String", # [Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel3": "A String", # [Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel4": "A String", # [Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
     "description": "A String", # Description of the item.
-    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
+    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
     "displayAdsId": "A String", # An identifier for an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
     "displayAdsLink": "A String", # URL directly to your item's landing page for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations.
+    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
       "A String",
     ],
     "displayAdsTitle": "A String", # Title of an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
+    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "energyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
-    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).
+    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "expirationDate": "A String", # Date on which the item should expire, as specified upon insertion, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. The actual expiration date is exposed in `productstatuses` as [googleExpirationDate](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324499) and might be earlier if `expirationDate` is too far in the future.
@@ -826,14 +826,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       },
     ],
-    "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
+    "gender": "A String", # Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, "male" or "female".
     "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
     "gtin": [ # Global Trade Item Numbers ([GTIN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#gtin)) of the item. You can provide up to 10 GTINs.
       "A String",
     ],
     "identifierExists": True or False, # Set this value to false when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Defaults to true, if not provided.
     "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
-    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
+    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "installment": { # A message that represents installment. # Number and amount of installments to pay for an item.
@@ -848,13 +848,13 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "months": "A String", # The number of installments the buyer has to pay.
     },
-    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.
+    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.
     "itemGroupId": "A String", # Shared identifier for all variants of the same product.
     "lifestyleImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of lifestyle images of the item, used to explicitly identify images that showcase your item in a real-world context. See the [Help Center article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9103186) for more information.
       "A String",
     ],
     "link": "A String", # URL directly linking to your item's page on your online store.
-    "linkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.
+    "linkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.
     "loyaltyPoints": { # A message that represents loyalty points. # Loyalty points that users receive after purchasing the item. Japan only.
       "name": "A String", # Name of loyalty points program. It is recommended to limit the name to 12 full-width characters or 24 Roman characters.
       "pointsValue": "A String", # The retailer's loyalty points in absolute value.
@@ -875,24 +875,24 @@ 
Method Details

           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.
+        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.
         "shippingLabel": "A String", # The label of the shipping benefit. If the field has value, this offer has loyalty shipping benefit. If the field value isn't provided, the item is not eligible for loyalty shipping for the given loyalty tier.
         "tierLabel": "A String", # The label of the tier within the loyalty program. Must match one of the labels within the program.
       },
     ],
-    "material": "A String", # The material of which the item is made.
+    "material": "A String", # The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, "Leather" or "Cotton".
     "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "maxHandlingTime": "A String", # Maximal product handling time (in business days).
     "minEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "minHandlingTime": "A String", # Minimal product handling time (in business days).
     "mobileLink": "A String", # URL for the mobile-optimized version of your item's landing page.
-    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
+    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
     "mpn": "A String", # Manufacturer Part Number ([MPN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#mpn)) of the item.
-    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.
-    "pattern": "A String", # The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).
+    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.
+    "pattern": "A String", # The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.
     "pause": "A String", # Publication of this item will be temporarily [paused](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11909930).
-    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The pick up option for the item.
-    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline.
+    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.
+    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).
     "price": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Price of the item.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
@@ -908,14 +908,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.
+    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productLength": { # The dimension of the product. # The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive).
       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).
+    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productWeight": { # The weight of the product. # The weight of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 2000 (inclusive).
@@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date)).
+    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability).
       "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
       "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
     },
@@ -973,12 +973,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # The unit of value.
       "value": 3.14, # The dimension of the product used to calculate the shipping cost of the item.
     },
-    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
+    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).
-    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.
-    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).
+    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).
+    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, "US", "UK", "DE". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).
+    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, "petite", "plus size".
       "A String",
     ],
     "structuredDescription": { # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions. # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions.
@@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "type": "A String", # Sustainability incentive program.
       },
     ],
-    "taxCategory": "A String", # The tax category of the product.
+    "taxCategory": "A String", # The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.
     "taxes": [ # Tax information.
       { # The Tax of the product.
         "country": "A String", # The country within which the item is taxed, specified as a [CLDR territory code](http://www.unicode.org/repos/cldr/tags/latest/common/main/en.xml).
@@ -1041,14 +1041,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "value": "A String", # The value of the attribute. If `value` is not empty, `group_values` must be empty.
     },
   ],
-  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The [feed label](https://developers.google.com/shopping-content/guides/products/feed-labels) for the product.
+  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The label that lets you categorize and identify your products. The maximum allowed characters are 20, and the supported characters are `A-Z`, `0-9`, hyphen, and underscore. The feed label must not include any spaces. For more information, see [Using feed labels](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/14994087).
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the product input. Format: `accounts/{account}/productInputs/{productinput}` where the last section `productinput` consists of 4 parts: `channel~content_language~feed_label~offer_id` example for product input name is `accounts/123/productInputs/online~en~US~sku123`
   "offerId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Your unique identifier for the product. This is the same for the product input and processed product. Leading and trailing whitespaces are stripped and multiple whitespaces are replaced by a single whitespace upon submission. See the [products data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#id) for details.
   "product": "A String", # Output only. The name of the processed product. Format: `accounts/{account}/products/{product}`
   "versionNumber": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Represents the existing version (freshness) of the product, which can be used to preserve the right order when multiple updates are done at the same time. If set, the insertion is prevented when version number is lower than the current version number of the existing product. Re-insertion (for example, product refresh after 30 days) can be performed with the current `version_number`. Only supported for insertions into primary data sources. Do not set this field for updates. Do not set this field for insertions into supplemental data sources. If the operation is prevented, the aborted exception will be thrown.
 }
 
-  dataSource: string, Required. The primary or supplemental product data source where `data_source` name identifies the product input to be updated. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`.
+  dataSource: string, Required. The primary or supplemental product data source where `data_source` name identifies the product input to be updated. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`. For example, `accounts/123456/dataSources/104628`.
   updateMask: string, Optional. The list of product attributes to be updated. If the update mask is omitted, then it is treated as implied field mask equivalent to all fields that are populated (have a non-empty value). Attributes specified in the update mask without a value specified in the body will be deleted from the product. Update mask can only be specified for top level fields in attributes and custom attributes. To specify the update mask for custom attributes you need to add the `custom_attribute.` prefix. Providing special "*" value for full product replacement is not supported.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -1058,25 +1058,25 @@ 
Method Details

 Returns:
   An object of the form:
 
-    { # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
+    { # This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. For more information, see [Manage products](/merchant/api/guides/products/overview). Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.
   "attributes": { # Attributes. # Optional. A list of product attributes.
     "additionalImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of images of the item.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.
+    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "adsLabels": [ # Similar to ads_grouping, but only works on CPC.
       "A String",
     ],
     "adsRedirect": "A String", # Allows advertisers to override the item URL when the product is shown within the context of Product ads.
     "adult": True or False, # Set to true if the item is targeted towards adults.
     "ageGroup": "A String", # Target [age group](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324463) of the item.
-    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the "Automated Discounts" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
+    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "availability": "A String", # Availability status of the item.
+    "availability": "A String", # [Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, "in_stock" or "out_of_stock".
     "availabilityDate": "A String", # The day a pre-ordered product becomes available for delivery, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format.
-    "brand": "A String", # Brand of the item.
+    "brand": "A String", # [Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, "Google".
     "canonicalLink": "A String", # URL for the canonical version of your item's landing page.
     "certifications": [ # Product Certifications, for example for energy efficiency labeling of products recorded in the [EU EPREL](https://eprel.ec.europa.eu/screen/home) database. See the [Help Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839) article for more information.
       { # Product [certification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839), initially introduced for EU energy efficiency labeling compliance using the EU EPREL database.
@@ -1104,28 +1104,28 @@ 
Method Details

         "unitCode": "A String", # Unit of the given property. For example, "Pixels" for a TV product. Maximum string size is 256B.
       },
     ],
-    "color": "A String", # Color of the item.
-    "condition": "A String", # Condition or state of the item.
+    "color": "A String", # [Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, "red".
+    "condition": "A String", # [Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, "new" or "used".
     "costOfGoodsSold": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "customLabel0": "A String", # Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel1": "A String", # Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel2": "A String", # Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel3": "A String", # Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel4": "A String", # Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel0": "A String", # [Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel1": "A String", # [Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel2": "A String", # [Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel3": "A String", # [Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel4": "A String", # [Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
     "description": "A String", # Description of the item.
-    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
+    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
     "displayAdsId": "A String", # An identifier for an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
     "displayAdsLink": "A String", # URL directly to your item's landing page for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations.
+    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
       "A String",
     ],
     "displayAdsTitle": "A String", # Title of an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
+    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "energyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
-    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).
+    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "expirationDate": "A String", # Date on which the item should expire, as specified upon insertion, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. The actual expiration date is exposed in `productstatuses` as [googleExpirationDate](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324499) and might be earlier if `expirationDate` is too far in the future.
@@ -1139,14 +1139,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       },
     ],
-    "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
+    "gender": "A String", # Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, "male" or "female".
     "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
     "gtin": [ # Global Trade Item Numbers ([GTIN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#gtin)) of the item. You can provide up to 10 GTINs.
       "A String",
     ],
     "identifierExists": True or False, # Set this value to false when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Defaults to true, if not provided.
     "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
-    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
+    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "installment": { # A message that represents installment. # Number and amount of installments to pay for an item.
@@ -1161,13 +1161,13 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "months": "A String", # The number of installments the buyer has to pay.
     },
-    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.
+    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.
     "itemGroupId": "A String", # Shared identifier for all variants of the same product.
     "lifestyleImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of lifestyle images of the item, used to explicitly identify images that showcase your item in a real-world context. See the [Help Center article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9103186) for more information.
       "A String",
     ],
     "link": "A String", # URL directly linking to your item's page on your online store.
-    "linkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.
+    "linkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.
     "loyaltyPoints": { # A message that represents loyalty points. # Loyalty points that users receive after purchasing the item. Japan only.
       "name": "A String", # Name of loyalty points program. It is recommended to limit the name to 12 full-width characters or 24 Roman characters.
       "pointsValue": "A String", # The retailer's loyalty points in absolute value.
@@ -1188,24 +1188,24 @@ 
Method Details

           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.
+        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.
         "shippingLabel": "A String", # The label of the shipping benefit. If the field has value, this offer has loyalty shipping benefit. If the field value isn't provided, the item is not eligible for loyalty shipping for the given loyalty tier.
         "tierLabel": "A String", # The label of the tier within the loyalty program. Must match one of the labels within the program.
       },
     ],
-    "material": "A String", # The material of which the item is made.
+    "material": "A String", # The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, "Leather" or "Cotton".
     "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "maxHandlingTime": "A String", # Maximal product handling time (in business days).
     "minEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "minHandlingTime": "A String", # Minimal product handling time (in business days).
     "mobileLink": "A String", # URL for the mobile-optimized version of your item's landing page.
-    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
+    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
     "mpn": "A String", # Manufacturer Part Number ([MPN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#mpn)) of the item.
-    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.
-    "pattern": "A String", # The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).
+    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.
+    "pattern": "A String", # The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.
     "pause": "A String", # Publication of this item will be temporarily [paused](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11909930).
-    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The pick up option for the item.
-    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline.
+    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.
+    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).
     "price": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Price of the item.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
@@ -1221,14 +1221,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.
+    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productLength": { # The dimension of the product. # The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive).
       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).
+    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productWeight": { # The weight of the product. # The weight of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 2000 (inclusive).
@@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date)).
+    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability).
       "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
       "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
     },
@@ -1286,12 +1286,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # The unit of value.
       "value": 3.14, # The dimension of the product used to calculate the shipping cost of the item.
     },
-    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
+    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).
-    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.
-    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).
+    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).
+    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, "US", "UK", "DE". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).
+    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, "petite", "plus size".
       "A String",
     ],
     "structuredDescription": { # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions. # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions.
@@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "type": "A String", # Sustainability incentive program.
       },
     ],
-    "taxCategory": "A String", # The tax category of the product.
+    "taxCategory": "A String", # The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.
     "taxes": [ # Tax information.
       { # The Tax of the product.
         "country": "A String", # The country within which the item is taxed, specified as a [CLDR territory code](http://www.unicode.org/repos/cldr/tags/latest/common/main/en.xml).
@@ -1354,7 +1354,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "value": "A String", # The value of the attribute. If `value` is not empty, `group_values` must be empty.
     },
   ],
-  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The [feed label](https://developers.google.com/shopping-content/guides/products/feed-labels) for the product.
+  "feedLabel": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The label that lets you categorize and identify your products. The maximum allowed characters are 20, and the supported characters are `A-Z`, `0-9`, hyphen, and underscore. The feed label must not include any spaces. For more information, see [Using feed labels](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/14994087).
   "name": "A String", # Identifier. The name of the product input. Format: `accounts/{account}/productInputs/{productinput}` where the last section `productinput` consists of 4 parts: `channel~content_language~feed_label~offer_id` example for product input name is `accounts/123/productInputs/online~en~US~sku123`
   "offerId": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Your unique identifier for the product. This is the same for the product input and processed product. Leading and trailing whitespaces are stripped and multiple whitespaces are replaced by a single whitespace upon submission. See the [products data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#id) for details.
   "product": "A String", # Output only. The name of the processed product. Format: `accounts/{account}/products/{product}`
diff --git a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.products.html b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.products.html
index c47105dd37..9dd470e25c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.products.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/merchantapi_products_v1beta.accounts.products.html
@@ -111,20 +111,20 @@ 
Method Details

     "additionalImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of images of the item.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.
+    "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "adsLabels": [ # Similar to ads_grouping, but only works on CPC.
       "A String",
     ],
     "adsRedirect": "A String", # Allows advertisers to override the item URL when the product is shown within the context of Product ads.
     "adult": True or False, # Set to true if the item is targeted towards adults.
     "ageGroup": "A String", # Target [age group](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324463) of the item.
-    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the "Automated Discounts" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
+    "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "availability": "A String", # Availability status of the item.
+    "availability": "A String", # [Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, "in_stock" or "out_of_stock".
     "availabilityDate": "A String", # The day a pre-ordered product becomes available for delivery, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format.
-    "brand": "A String", # Brand of the item.
+    "brand": "A String", # [Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, "Google".
     "canonicalLink": "A String", # URL for the canonical version of your item's landing page.
     "certifications": [ # Product Certifications, for example for energy efficiency labeling of products recorded in the [EU EPREL](https://eprel.ec.europa.eu/screen/home) database. See the [Help Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839) article for more information.
       { # Product [certification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839), initially introduced for EU energy efficiency labeling compliance using the EU EPREL database.
@@ -152,28 +152,28 @@ 
Method Details

         "unitCode": "A String", # Unit of the given property. For example, "Pixels" for a TV product. Maximum string size is 256B.
       },
     ],
-    "color": "A String", # Color of the item.
-    "condition": "A String", # Condition or state of the item.
+    "color": "A String", # [Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, "red".
+    "condition": "A String", # [Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, "new" or "used".
     "costOfGoodsSold": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "customLabel0": "A String", # Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel1": "A String", # Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel2": "A String", # Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel3": "A String", # Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-    "customLabel4": "A String", # Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel0": "A String", # [Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel1": "A String", # [Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel2": "A String", # [Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel3": "A String", # [Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+    "customLabel4": "A String", # [Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
     "description": "A String", # Description of the item.
-    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
+    "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
     "displayAdsId": "A String", # An identifier for an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
     "displayAdsLink": "A String", # URL directly to your item's landing page for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations.
+    "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
       "A String",
     ],
     "displayAdsTitle": "A String", # Title of an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
+    "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
     "energyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
-    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).
+    "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "expirationDate": "A String", # Date on which the item should expire, as specified upon insertion, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. The actual expiration date is exposed in `productstatuses` as [googleExpirationDate](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324499) and might be earlier if `expirationDate` is too far in the future.
@@ -187,14 +187,14 @@ 
Method Details

         },
       },
     ],
-    "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
+    "gender": "A String", # Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, "male" or "female".
     "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
     "gtin": [ # Global Trade Item Numbers ([GTIN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#gtin)) of the item. You can provide up to 10 GTINs.
       "A String",
     ],
     "identifierExists": True or False, # Set this value to false when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Defaults to true, if not provided.
     "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
-    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
+    "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
       "A String",
     ],
     "installment": { # A message that represents installment. # Number and amount of installments to pay for an item.
@@ -209,13 +209,13 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "months": "A String", # The number of installments the buyer has to pay.
     },
-    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.
+    "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.
     "itemGroupId": "A String", # Shared identifier for all variants of the same product.
     "lifestyleImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of lifestyle images of the item, used to explicitly identify images that showcase your item in a real-world context. See the [Help Center article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9103186) for more information.
       "A String",
     ],
     "link": "A String", # URL directly linking to your item's page on your online store.
-    "linkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.
+    "linkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.
     "loyaltyPoints": { # A message that represents loyalty points. # Loyalty points that users receive after purchasing the item. Japan only.
       "name": "A String", # Name of loyalty points program. It is recommended to limit the name to 12 full-width characters or 24 Roman characters.
       "pointsValue": "A String", # The retailer's loyalty points in absolute value.
@@ -236,24 +236,24 @@ 
Method Details

           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.
+        "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.
         "shippingLabel": "A String", # The label of the shipping benefit. If the field has value, this offer has loyalty shipping benefit. If the field value isn't provided, the item is not eligible for loyalty shipping for the given loyalty tier.
         "tierLabel": "A String", # The label of the tier within the loyalty program. Must match one of the labels within the program.
       },
     ],
-    "material": "A String", # The material of which the item is made.
+    "material": "A String", # The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, "Leather" or "Cotton".
     "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "maxHandlingTime": "A String", # Maximal product handling time (in business days).
     "minEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
     "minHandlingTime": "A String", # Minimal product handling time (in business days).
     "mobileLink": "A String", # URL for the mobile-optimized version of your item's landing page.
-    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
+    "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
     "mpn": "A String", # Manufacturer Part Number ([MPN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#mpn)) of the item.
-    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.
-    "pattern": "A String", # The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).
+    "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.
+    "pattern": "A String", # The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.
     "pause": "A String", # Publication of this item will be temporarily [paused](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11909930).
-    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The pick up option for the item.
-    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline.
+    "pickupMethod": "A String", # The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.
+    "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).
     "price": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Price of the item.
       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
@@ -269,14 +269,14 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.
+    "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productLength": { # The dimension of the product. # The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive).
       "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
       "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
     },
-    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).
+    "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).
       "A String",
     ],
     "productWeight": { # The weight of the product. # The weight of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 2000 (inclusive).
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
       "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
     },
-    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date)).
+    "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability).
       "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
       "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
     },
@@ -334,12 +334,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "unit": "A String", # The unit of value.
       "value": 3.14, # The dimension of the product used to calculate the shipping cost of the item.
     },
-    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
+    "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).
-    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.
-    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).
+    "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).
+    "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, "US", "UK", "DE". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).
+    "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, "petite", "plus size".
       "A String",
     ],
     "structuredDescription": { # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions. # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions.
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "type": "A String", # Sustainability incentive program.
       },
     ],
-    "taxCategory": "A String", # The tax category of the product.
+    "taxCategory": "A String", # The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.
     "taxes": [ # Tax information.
       { # The Tax of the product.
         "country": "A String", # The country within which the item is taxed, specified as a [CLDR territory code](http://www.unicode.org/repos/cldr/tags/latest/common/main/en.xml).
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "detail": "A String", # A detailed issue description in English.
         "documentation": "A String", # The URL of a web page to help with resolving this issue.
         "reportingContext": "A String", # The reporting context the issue applies to.
-        "resolution": "A String", # Whether the issue can be resolved by the merchant.
+        "resolution": "A String", # Whether the issue can be resolved by the business.
         "severity": "A String", # How this issue affects serving of the offer.
       },
     ],
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The account to list processed products for. Format: `accounts/{account}` (required)
-  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of products to return. The service may return fewer than this value. The maximum value is 250; values above 250 will be coerced to 250. If unspecified, the maximum number of products will be returned.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of products to return. The service may return fewer than this value. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000. If unspecified, the maximum number of products will be returned.
   pageToken: string, A page token, received from a previous `ListProducts` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListProducts` must match the call that provided the page token.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -482,20 +482,20 @@ 
Method Details

         "additionalImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of images of the item.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.
+        "adsGrouping": "A String", # Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
         "adsLabels": [ # Similar to ads_grouping, but only works on CPC.
           "A String",
         ],
         "adsRedirect": "A String", # Allows advertisers to override the item URL when the product is shown within the context of Product ads.
         "adult": True or False, # Set to true if the item is targeted towards adults.
         "ageGroup": "A String", # Target [age group](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324463) of the item.
-        "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the "Automated Discounts" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
+        "autoPricingMinPrice": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and "Dynamic Promotions" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability.
           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "availability": "A String", # Availability status of the item.
+        "availability": "A String", # [Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, "in_stock" or "out_of_stock".
         "availabilityDate": "A String", # The day a pre-ordered product becomes available for delivery, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format.
-        "brand": "A String", # Brand of the item.
+        "brand": "A String", # [Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, "Google".
         "canonicalLink": "A String", # URL for the canonical version of your item's landing page.
         "certifications": [ # Product Certifications, for example for energy efficiency labeling of products recorded in the [EU EPREL](https://eprel.ec.europa.eu/screen/home) database. See the [Help Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839) article for more information.
           { # Product [certification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13528839), initially introduced for EU energy efficiency labeling compliance using the EU EPREL database.
@@ -523,28 +523,28 @@ 
Method Details

             "unitCode": "A String", # Unit of the given property. For example, "Pixels" for a TV product. Maximum string size is 256B.
           },
         ],
-        "color": "A String", # Color of the item.
-        "condition": "A String", # Condition or state of the item.
+        "color": "A String", # [Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, "red".
+        "condition": "A String", # [Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, "new" or "used".
         "costOfGoodsSold": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting.
           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "customLabel0": "A String", # Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-        "customLabel1": "A String", # Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-        "customLabel2": "A String", # Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-        "customLabel3": "A String", # Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
-        "customLabel4": "A String", # Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+        "customLabel0": "A String", # [Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+        "customLabel1": "A String", # [Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+        "customLabel2": "A String", # [Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+        "customLabel3": "A String", # [Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
+        "customLabel4": "A String", # [Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.
         "description": "A String", # Description of the item.
-        "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
+        "disclosureDate": "A String", # The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google’s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.
         "displayAdsId": "A String", # An identifier for an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
         "displayAdsLink": "A String", # URL directly to your item's landing page for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-        "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations.
+        "displayAdsSimilarIds": [ # Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
           "A String",
         ],
         "displayAdsTitle": "A String", # Title of an item for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
-        "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.
+        "displayAdsValue": 3.14, # Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).
         "energyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
-        "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).
+        "excludedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
           "A String",
         ],
         "expirationDate": "A String", # Date on which the item should expire, as specified upon insertion, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. The actual expiration date is exposed in `productstatuses` as [googleExpirationDate](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324499) and might be earlier if `expirationDate` is too far in the future.
@@ -558,14 +558,14 @@ 
Method Details

             },
           },
         ],
-        "gender": "A String", # Target gender of the item.
+        "gender": "A String", # Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, "male" or "female".
         "googleProductCategory": "A String", # Google's category of the item (see [Google product taxonomy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/1705911)). When querying products, this field will contain the user provided value. There is currently no way to get back the auto assigned google product categories through the API.
         "gtin": [ # Global Trade Item Numbers ([GTIN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#gtin)) of the item. You can provide up to 10 GTINs.
           "A String",
         ],
         "identifierExists": True or False, # Set this value to false when the item does not have unique product identifiers appropriate to its category, such as GTIN, MPN, and brand. Defaults to true, if not provided.
         "imageLink": "A String", # URL of an image of the item.
-        "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.
+        "includedDestinations": [ # The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.
           "A String",
         ],
         "installment": { # A message that represents installment. # Number and amount of installments to pay for an item.
@@ -580,13 +580,13 @@ 
Method Details

           },
           "months": "A String", # The number of installments the buyer has to pay.
         },
-        "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.
+        "isBundle": True or False, # Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.
         "itemGroupId": "A String", # Shared identifier for all variants of the same product.
         "lifestyleImageLinks": [ # Additional URLs of lifestyle images of the item, used to explicitly identify images that showcase your item in a real-world context. See the [Help Center article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9103186) for more information.
           "A String",
         ],
         "link": "A String", # URL directly linking to your item's page on your online store.
-        "linkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.
+        "linkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.
         "loyaltyPoints": { # A message that represents loyalty points. # Loyalty points that users receive after purchasing the item. Japan only.
           "name": "A String", # Name of loyalty points program. It is recommended to limit the name to 12 full-width characters or 24 Roman characters.
           "pointsValue": "A String", # The retailer's loyalty points in absolute value.
@@ -607,24 +607,24 @@ 
Method Details

               "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
               "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
             },
-            "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.
+            "programLabel": "A String", # The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.
             "shippingLabel": "A String", # The label of the shipping benefit. If the field has value, this offer has loyalty shipping benefit. If the field value isn't provided, the item is not eligible for loyalty shipping for the given loyalty tier.
             "tierLabel": "A String", # The label of the tier within the loyalty program. Must match one of the labels within the program.
           },
         ],
-        "material": "A String", # The material of which the item is made.
+        "material": "A String", # The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, "Leather" or "Cotton".
         "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
         "maxHandlingTime": "A String", # Maximal product handling time (in business days).
         "minEnergyEfficiencyClass": "A String", # The energy efficiency class as defined in EU directive 2010/30/EU.
         "minHandlingTime": "A String", # Minimal product handling time (in business days).
         "mobileLink": "A String", # URL for the mobile-optimized version of your item's landing page.
-        "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
+        "mobileLinkTemplate": "A String", # [Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.
         "mpn": "A String", # Manufacturer Part Number ([MPN](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#mpn)) of the item.
-        "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.
-        "pattern": "A String", # The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).
+        "multipack": "A String", # The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.
+        "pattern": "A String", # The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.
         "pause": "A String", # Publication of this item will be temporarily [paused](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11909930).
-        "pickupMethod": "A String", # The pick up option for the item.
-        "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline.
+        "pickupMethod": "A String", # The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.
+        "pickupSla": "A String", # Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).
         "price": { # The price represented as a number and currency. # Price of the item.
           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
@@ -640,14 +640,14 @@ 
Method Details

           "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
           "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
         },
-        "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.
+        "productHighlights": [ # Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).
           "A String",
         ],
         "productLength": { # The dimension of the product. # The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive).
           "unit": "A String", # Required. The dimension units. Acceptable values are: * "`in`" * "`cm`"
           "value": 3.14, # Required. The dimension value represented as a number. The value can have a maximum precision of four decimal places.
         },
-        "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).
+        "productTypes": [ # Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).
           "A String",
         ],
         "productWeight": { # The weight of the product. # The weight of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 2000 (inclusive).
@@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "amountMicros": "A String", # The price represented as a number in micros (1 million micros is an equivalent to one's currency standard unit, for example, 1 USD = 1000000 micros).
           "currencyCode": "A String", # The currency of the price using three-letter acronyms according to [ISO 4217](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217).
         },
-        "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date)).
+        "salePriceEffectiveDate": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive). The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability).
           "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
           "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval. If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
         },
@@ -705,12 +705,12 @@ 
Method Details

           "unit": "A String", # The unit of value.
           "value": 3.14, # The dimension of the product used to calculate the shipping cost of the item.
         },
-        "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
+        "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": [ # List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).
-        "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.
-        "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).
+        "size": "A String", # Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).
+        "sizeSystem": "A String", # System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, "US", "UK", "DE". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).
+        "sizeTypes": [ # The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, "petite", "plus size".
           "A String",
         ],
         "structuredDescription": { # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions. # Structured description, for algorithmically (AI)-generated descriptions.
@@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "type": "A String", # Sustainability incentive program.
           },
         ],
-        "taxCategory": "A String", # The tax category of the product.
+        "taxCategory": "A String", # The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.
         "taxes": [ # Tax information.
           { # The Tax of the product.
             "country": "A String", # The country within which the item is taxed, specified as a [CLDR territory code](http://www.unicode.org/repos/cldr/tags/latest/common/main/en.xml).
@@ -819,7 +819,7 @@ 
Method Details

             "detail": "A String", # A detailed issue description in English.
             "documentation": "A String", # The URL of a web page to help with resolving this issue.
             "reportingContext": "A String", # The reporting context the issue applies to.
-            "resolution": "A String", # Whether the issue can be resolved by the merchant.
+            "resolution": "A String", # Whether the issue can be resolved by the business.
             "severity": "A String", # How this issue affects serving of the offer.
           },
         ],
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json
index 63ff64bc8c..47675be17b 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.accounts_v1beta.json
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "delete": {
-"description": "Deletes the specified account regardless of its type: standalone, MCA or sub-account. Deleting an MCA leads to the deletion of all of its sub-accounts. Executing this method requires admin access. The deletion succeeds only if the account does not provide services to any other account and has no processed offers. You can use the `force` parameter to override this.",
+"description": "Deletes the specified account regardless of its type: standalone, advanced account or sub-account. Deleting an advanced account leads to the deletion of all of its sub-accounts. Executing this method requires admin access. The deletion succeeds only if the account does not provide services to any other account and has no processed offers. You can use the `force` parameter to override this.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}",
 "httpMethod": "DELETE",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.delete",
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "list": {
-"description": "Lists accounts accessible to the calling user and matching the constraints of the request such as page size or filters. This is not just listing the sub-accounts of an MCA, but all accounts the calling user has access to including other MCAs, linked accounts, standalone accounts and so on. If no filter is provided, then it returns all the accounts the user has access to. This method is eventually consistent, meaning changes such as creating, updating an account or a change of relationships between accounts may not show up in the results immediately. Instead, these changes propagate over a short period, after which the updated information can match the associated predicates. That means, that searching by account name might not return a recently changed account even though it satisfies the predicate.",
+"description": "Lists accounts accessible to the calling user and matching the constraints of the request such as page size or filters. This is not just listing the sub-accounts of an advanced account, but all accounts the calling user has access to including other advanced accounts, linked accounts, standalone accounts and so on. If no filter is provided, then it returns all the accounts the user has access to. This method is eventually consistent, meaning changes such as creating, updating an account or a change of relationships between accounts may not show up in the results immediately. Instead, these changes propagate over a short period, after which the updated information can match the associated predicates. That means, that searching by account name might not return a recently changed account even though it satisfies the predicate.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.list",
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "patch": {
-"description": "Updates an account regardless of its type: standalone, MCA or sub-account. Executing this method requires admin access.",
+"description": "Updates an account regardless of its type: standalone, advanced account or sub-account. Executing this method requires admin access.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}",
 "httpMethod": "PATCH",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.patch",
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`",
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`. For example, `accounts/123456/businessIdentity`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/businessIdentity$",
 "required": true,
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the business info. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessInfo`",
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the business info. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessInfo`. For example, `accounts/123456/businessInfo`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/businessInfo$",
 "required": true,
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "updateEmailPreferences": {
-"description": "Updates the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. MCA users should specify the MCA account rather than a sub-account of the MCA. Preferences which are not explicitly selected in the update mask will not be updated. It is invalid for updates to specify an UNCONFIRMED opt-in status value. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to update preferences for the authenticated user.",
+"description": "Updates the email preferences for a Merchant Center account user. Advanced account users should specify the advanced account rather than a sub-account of the advanced account. Preferences which are not explicitly selected in the update mask will not be updated. It is invalid for updates to specify an UNCONFIRMED opt-in status value. Use the name=accounts/*/users/me/emailPreferences alias to update preferences for the authenticated user.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/users/{usersId}/emailPreferences",
 "httpMethod": "PATCH",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.emailPreferences.updateEmailPreferences",
@@ -599,10 +599,78 @@
 }
 }
 },
+"gbpAccounts": {
+"methods": {
+"linkGbpAccount": {
+"description": "Link the specified merchant to a GBP account for all countries.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/gbpAccounts:linkGbpAccount",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.gbpAccounts.linkGbpAccount",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the parent resource to which the GBP account is linked. Format: `accounts/{account}`.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/gbpAccounts:linkGbpAccount",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "LinkGbpAccountRequest"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "LinkGbpAccountResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "List the GBP accounts for a given merchant.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/gbpAccounts",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.gbpAccounts.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of `GbpAccount` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of gbp accounts is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 1000; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListGbpAccounts` call. Provide the page token to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListGbpAccounts` must match the call that provided the page token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the parent resource under which the GBP accounts are listed. Format: `accounts/{account}`.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/gbpAccounts",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListGbpAccountsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+}
+}
+},
 "homepage": {
 "methods": {
 "claim": {
-"description": "Claims a store's homepage. Executing this method requires admin access. If the homepage is already claimed, this will recheck the verification (unless the merchant is exempted from claiming, which also exempts from verification) and return a successful response. If ownership can no longer be verified, it will return an error, but it won't clear the claim. In case of failure, a canonical error message is returned: * PERMISSION_DENIED: User doesn't have the necessary permissions on this Merchant Center account. * FAILED_PRECONDITION: - The account is not a Merchant Center account. - Merchant Center account doesn't have a homepage. - Claiming failed (in this case the error message contains more details).",
+"description": "Claims a store's homepage. Executing this method requires admin access. If the homepage is already claimed, this will recheck the verification (unless the business is exempted from claiming, which also exempts from verification) and return a successful response. If ownership can no longer be verified, it will return an error, but it won't clear the claim. In case of failure, a canonical error message is returned: * PERMISSION_DENIED: User doesn't have the necessary permissions on this Merchant Center account. * FAILED_PRECONDITION: - The account is not a Merchant Center account. - Merchant Center account doesn't have a homepage. - Claiming failed (in this case the error message contains more details).",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/homepage:claim",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.homepage.claim",
@@ -768,10 +836,288 @@
 }
 }
 },
+"omnichannelSettings": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent resource where this omnichannel setting will be created. Format: `accounts/{account}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/omnichannelSettings",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Get the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannelSettingsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the omnichannel setting to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/omnichannelSettings/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "List all the omnichannel settings for a given merchant.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of omnichannel settings to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 50 omnichannel settings will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListOmnichannelSettings` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListOmnichannelSettings` must match the call that provided the page token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent, which owns this collection of omnichannel settings. Format: `accounts/{account}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/omnichannelSettings",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListOmnichannelSettingsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update the omnichannel setting for a given merchant in a given country.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannelSettingsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/omnichannelSettings/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Required. The list of fields to be updated. The following fields are supported in snake_case only: - `lsf_type` - `in_stock` - `pickup` - `odo` - `about` - `inventory_verification` Full replacement with wildcard `*`is supported, while empty/implied update mask is not.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"requestInventoryVerification": {
+"description": "Requests inventory verification for a given merchant in a given country.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannelSettingsId}:requestInventoryVerification",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.requestInventoryVerification",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the omnichannel setting to request inventory verification. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/omnichannelSettings/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+name}:requestInventoryVerification",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "RequestInventoryVerificationRequest"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "RequestInventoryVerificationResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+}
+},
+"resources": {
+"lfpProviders": {
+"methods": {
+"find": {
+"description": "Find the LFP provider candidates in a given country.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannelSettingsId}/lfpProviders:find",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.find",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of `LfpProvider` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of lfp providers is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 50. The maximum value is 1000; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `FindLfpProviders` call. Provide the page token to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `FindLfpProviders` must match the call that provided the page token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the parent resource under which the LFP providers are found. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/omnichannelSettings/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/lfpProviders:find",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "FindLfpProvidersResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"linkLfpProvider": {
+"description": "Link the specified merchant to a LFP provider for the specified country.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannelSettingsId}/lfpProviders/{lfpProvidersId}:linkLfpProvider",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.omnichannelSettings.lfpProviders.linkLfpProvider",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the LFP provider resource to link. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}/lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`. The `lfp_provider` is the LFP provider ID.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/omnichannelSettings/[^/]+/lfpProviders/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+name}:linkLfpProvider",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "LinkLfpProviderRequest"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "LinkLfpProviderResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+}
+}
+}
+}
+},
 "onlineReturnPolicies": {
 "methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Creates a new return policy for a given business.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/onlineReturnPolicies",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The Merchant Center account for which the return policy will be created. Format: `accounts/{account}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/onlineReturnPolicies",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "OnlineReturnPolicy"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "OnlineReturnPolicy"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Deletes an existing return policy.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/onlineReturnPolicies/{onlineReturnPoliciesId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the return policy to delete. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/onlineReturnPolicies/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
 "get": {
-"description": "Gets an existing return policy for a given merchant.",
+"description": "Gets an existing return policy for a given business.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/onlineReturnPolicies/{onlineReturnPoliciesId}",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.get",
@@ -796,7 +1142,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "list": {
-"description": "Lists all existing return policies for a given merchant.",
+"description": "Lists all existing return policies for a given business.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/onlineReturnPolicies",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.list",
@@ -805,7 +1151,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "pageSize": {
-"description": "Optional. The maximum number of `OnlineReturnPolicy` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of return policies for the given merchant is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 100; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum",
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of `OnlineReturnPolicy` resources to return. The service returns fewer than this value if the number of return policies for the given business is less that than the `pageSize`. The default value is 10. The maximum value is 100; If a value higher than the maximum is specified, then the `pageSize` will default to the maximum",
 "format": "int32",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "integer"
@@ -816,16 +1162,50 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "parent": {
-"description": "Required. The merchant account for which to list return policies. Format: `accounts/{account}`",
+"description": "Required. The Merchant Center account for which to list return policies. Format: `accounts/{account}`",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
-"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/onlineReturnPolicies",
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+parent}/onlineReturnPolicies",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListOnlineReturnPoliciesResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Updates an existing return policy for a given business.",
+"flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/onlineReturnPolicies/{onlineReturnPoliciesId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.onlineReturnPolicies.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The name of the `OnlineReturnPolicy` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/onlineReturnPolicies/{return_policy}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/onlineReturnPolicies/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Optional. List of fields being updated. The following fields are supported (in both `snake_case` and `lowerCamelCase`): - `accept_defective_only` - `accept_exchange` - `item_conditions` - `policy` - `process_refund_days` - `restocking_fee` - `return_methods` - `return_policy_uri` - `return_shipping_fee`",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "accounts/v1beta/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "OnlineReturnPolicy"
+},
 "response": {
-"$ref": "ListOnlineReturnPoliciesResponse"
+"$ref": "OnlineReturnPolicy"
 },
 "scopes": [
 "https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
@@ -836,7 +1216,7 @@
 "programs": {
 "methods": {
 "disable": {
-"description": "Disable participation in the specified program for the account. Executing this method requires admin access.",
+"description": "Disable participation in the specified program for the account.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/programs/{programsId}:disable",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.programs.disable",
@@ -845,7 +1225,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the program for which to disable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`",
+"description": "Required. The name of the program for which to disable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`. For example, `accounts/123456/programs/free-listings`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/programs/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -864,7 +1244,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "enable": {
-"description": "Enable participation in the specified program for the account. Executing this method requires admin access.",
+"description": "Enable participation in the specified program for the account.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/programs/{programsId}:enable",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.programs.enable",
@@ -873,7 +1253,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the program for which to enable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`",
+"description": "Required. The name of the program for which to enable participation for the given account. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`. For example, `accounts/123456/programs/free-listings`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/programs/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -901,7 +1281,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the program to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`",
+"description": "Required. The name of the program to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/programs/{program}`. For example, `accounts/123456/programs/free-listings`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/programs/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -1123,7 +1503,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The resource name of the account relationship to get. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`",
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the account relationship to get. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/relationships/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -1184,7 +1564,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`",
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/relationships/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -1387,7 +1767,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "insert": {
-"description": "Replace the shipping setting of a merchant with the request shipping setting. Executing this method requires admin access.",
+"description": "Replace the shipping setting of a business with the request shipping setting. Executing this method requires admin access.",
 "flatPath": "accounts/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/shippingSettings:insert",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "merchantapi.accounts.shippingSettings.insert",
@@ -1728,9 +2108,39 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250507",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
+"About": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to the about page ([impressum](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14675634?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)).",
+"id": "About",
+"properties": {
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the URI.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTIVE",
+"FAILED",
+"RUNNING",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The review process has concluded successfully. The reviewed item is active.",
+"The review process failed.",
+"The review process is running.",
+"The review process is waiting for the merchant to take action."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uri": {
+"description": "Required. The about page URI.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "AcceptTermsOfServiceResponse": {
 "description": "Response message for the `AcceptTermsOfService` method.",
 "id": "AcceptTermsOfServiceResponse",
@@ -1743,11 +2153,11 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "Accepted": {
-"description": "Describes the accepted terms of service.",
+"description": "Describes the [accepted terms of service](/merchant/api/guides/accounts/create-and-configure#accept_the_merchant_center_terms_of_service).",
 "id": "Accepted",
 "properties": {
 "acceptedBy": {
-"description": "The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the MCA account.",
+"description": "The account where the acceptance was recorded. This can be the account itself or, in the case of subaccounts, the advanced account.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "termsOfService": {
@@ -1762,7 +2172,7 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "Account": {
-"description": "The `Account` message represents a merchant's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a multi-client account (MCA) structure. In an MCA setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.",
+"description": "The `Account` message represents a business's account within Shopping Ads. It's the primary entity for managing product data, settings, and interactions with Google's services and external providers. Accounts can operate as standalone entities or be part of a advanced account structure. In an advanced account setup the parent account manages multiple sub-accounts. Establishing an account involves configuring attributes like the account name, time zone, and language preferences. The `Account` message is the parent entity for many other resources, for example, `AccountRelationship`, `Homepage`, `BusinessInfo` and so on.",
 "id": "Account",
 "properties": {
 "accountId": {
@@ -1806,7 +2216,7 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "AccountIssue": {
-"description": "An [`AccountIssue`](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12153802?sjid=17798438912526418908-EU#account).",
+"description": "Issues with your Merchant Center account that can impact all your products. For more information, see [Account-level issues in Merchant Center](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12153802?sjid=17798438912526418908-EU#account).",
 "id": "AccountIssue",
 "properties": {
 "detail": {
@@ -1825,7 +2235,7 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the account issue. Format: `accounts/{account}/issues/{id}`",
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the account issue. Format: `accounts/{account}/issues/{id}`. For example, `accounts/123456/issues/misrepresentation-of-self-or-products-unacceptable-business-practice-policy`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "severity": {
@@ -1858,7 +2268,7 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "AccountRelationship": {
-"description": "The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the merchant, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the merchant's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).",
+"description": "The `AccountRelationship` message defines a formal connection between a merchant's account and a service provider's account. This relationship enables the provider to offer specific services to the business, such as product management or campaign management. It specifies the access rights and permissions to the business's data relevant to those services. Establishing an account relationship involves linking the merchant's account with a provider's account. The provider could be another Google account (like Google Ads or Google My Business) or a third-party platform (such as Shopify or WooCommerce).",
 "id": "AccountRelationship",
 "properties": {
 "accountIdAlias": {
@@ -1866,7 +2276,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`",
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the account relationship. Format: `accounts/{account}/relationships/{relationship}`. For example, `accounts/123456/relationships/567890`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "provider": {
@@ -1882,20 +2292,20 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "AccountService": {
-"description": "The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a merchant account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the merchant and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.",
+"description": "The `AccountService` message represents a specific service that a provider account offers to a Merchant Center account. `AccountService` defines the permissions and capabilities granted to the provider, allowing for operations such as product management or campaign management. The lifecycle of an `AccountService` involves a proposal phase, where one party suggests the service, and an approval phase, where the other party accepts or rejects it. This handshake mechanism ensures mutual consent before any access is granted. This mechanism safeguards both parties by ensuring that access rights are granted appropriately and that both the business and provider are aware of the services enabled. In scenarios where a user is an admin of both accounts, the approval can happen automatically. The mutability of a service is also managed through `AccountService`. Some services might be immutable, for example, if they were established through other systems or APIs, and you cannot alter them through this API.",
 "id": "AccountService",
 "properties": {
 "accountAggregation": {
 "$ref": "AccountAggregation",
-"description": "Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is a Multi-Client Account (MCA), to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the MCA provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many merchant accounts."
+"description": "Service type for account aggregation. This enables the provider, which is an advanced account, to manage multiple sub-accounts (client accounts). Through this service, the advanced account provider can perform administrative and operational tasks across all linked sub-accounts. This is useful for agencies, aggregators, or large retailers that need centralized control over many Merchant Center accounts."
 },
 "accountManagement": {
 "$ref": "AccountManagement",
-"description": "Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the merchant's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information."
+"description": "Service type for account management. Enables the provider to perform administrative actions on the business's account, such as configuring account settings, managing users, or updating business information."
 },
 "campaignsManagement": {
 "$ref": "CampaignsManagement",
-"description": "Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the merchant's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance."
+"description": "Service type for managing advertising campaigns. Grants the provider access to create and manage the business's ad campaigns, including setting up campaigns, adjusting bids, and optimizing performance."
 },
 "externalAccountId": {
 "description": "Immutable. An optional, immutable identifier that Google uses to refer to this account when communicating with the provider. This should be the unique account ID within the provider's system (for example, your shop ID in Shopify). If you have multiple accounts with the same provider - for instance, different accounts for various regions \u2014 the `external_account_id` differentiates between them, ensuring accurate linking and integration between Google and the provider.",
@@ -1906,6 +2316,10 @@
 "description": "Output only. Information about the state of the service in terms of establishing it (e.g. is it pending approval or approved).",
 "readOnly": true
 },
+"localListingManagement": {
+"$ref": "LocalListingManagement",
+"description": "Service type for local listings management. The business group associated with the external account id will be used to provide local inventory to this Merchant Center account."
+},
 "mutability": {
 "description": "Output only. Whether the service is mutable (e.g. through Approve / Reject RPCs). A service that was created through another system or API might be immutable.",
 "enum": [
@@ -1927,7 +2341,7 @@
 },
 "productsManagement": {
 "$ref": "ProductsManagement",
-"description": "Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the merchant, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the merchant's product information up-to-date across platforms."
+"description": "Service type for managing products. This allows the provider to handle product data on behalf of the business, including reading and writing product listings. It's commonly used when the provider offers inventory management or catalog synchronization services to keep the business's product information up-to-date across platforms."
 },
 "provider": {
 "description": "Output only. The provider of the service. Either the reference to an account such as `providers/123` or a well-known service provider (one of `providers/GOOGLE_ADS` or `providers/GOOGLE_BUSINESS_PROFILE`).",
@@ -2010,7 +2424,7 @@
 "id": "AutofeedSettings",
 "properties": {
 "eligible": {
-"description": "Output only. Determines whether merchant is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.",
+"description": "Output only. Determines whether the business is eligible for being enrolled into an autofeed.",
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "boolean"
 },
@@ -2059,7 +2473,7 @@
 },
 "shippingImprovements": {
 "$ref": "AutomaticShippingImprovements",
-"description": "Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask."
+"description": "Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data This field is only updated (cleared) if provided in the update mask."
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
@@ -2096,7 +2510,7 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "AutomaticShippingImprovements": {
-"description": "Not available for MCAs [accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data",
+"description": "Not available for [advanced accounts](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188487). By turning on [automatic shipping improvements](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10027038), you are allowing Google to improve the accuracy of your delivery times shown to shoppers using Google. More accurate delivery times, especially when faster, typically lead to better conversion rates. Google will improve your estimated delivery times based on various factors: * Delivery address of an order * Current handling time and shipping time settings * Estimated weekdays or business days * Parcel tracking data",
 "id": "AutomaticShippingImprovements",
 "properties": {
 "allowShippingImprovements": {
@@ -2146,11 +2560,11 @@
 "properties": {
 "blackOwned": {
 "$ref": "IdentityAttribute",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being black-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
 },
 "latinoOwned": {
 "$ref": "IdentityAttribute",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being latino-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with the business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
 },
 "name": {
 "description": "Identifier. The resource name of the business identity. Format: `accounts/{account}/businessIdentity`",
@@ -2172,21 +2586,21 @@
 },
 "smallBusiness": {
 "$ref": "IdentityAttribute",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as a small business. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces."
 },
 "veteranOwned": {
 "$ref": "IdentityAttribute",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being veteran-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
 },
 "womenOwned": {
 "$ref": "IdentityAttribute",
-"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for merchants with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
+"description": "Optional. Specifies whether the business identifies itself as being women-owned. This optional field will only be available for businesses with a business country set to `US`. It is also not applicable for marketplaces or marketplace sellers."
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
 "BusinessInfo": {
-"description": "The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a merchant's business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.",
+"description": "The `BusinessInfo` message contains essential information about a business. This message captures key business details such as physical address, customer service contacts, and region-specific identifiers.",
 "id": "BusinessInfo",
 "properties": {
 "address": {
@@ -2220,7 +2634,7 @@
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Default value. This value is unused.",
 "The phone is verified.",
-"The phone is unverified"
+"The phone is unverified."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -2285,7 +2699,7 @@
 "description": "Required. The account to be created."
 },
 "service": {
-"description": "Required. An account service between the account to be created and the provider account is initialized as part of the creation. At least one such service needs to be provided. Currently exactly one of these needs to be `account_aggregation`, which means you can only create sub accounts, not standalone account through this method. Additional `account_management` or `product_management` services may be provided.",
+"description": "Required. An account service between the account to be created and the provider account is initialized as part of the creation. At least one such service needs to be provided. Currently exactly one of these needs to be `account_aggregation` and `accounts.createAndConfigure` method can be used to create a sub-account under an existing advanced account through this method. Additional `account_management` or `product_management` services may be provided.",
 "items": {
 "$ref": "AddAccountService"
 },
@@ -2356,7 +2770,7 @@
 "description": "Time that local delivery ends for the day."
 },
 "noDeliveryPostCutoff": {
-"description": "Merchants can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.",
+"description": "Businesses can opt-out of showing n+1 day local delivery when they have a shipping service configured to n day local delivery. For example, if the shipping service defines same-day delivery, and it's past the cut-off, setting this field to `true` results in the calculated shipping service rate returning `NO_DELIVERY_POST_CUTOFF`. In the same example, setting this field to `false` results in the calculated shipping time being one day. This is only for local delivery.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "storeCloseOffsetHours": {
@@ -2531,6 +2945,62 @@
 "properties": {},
 "type": "object"
 },
+"FindLfpProvidersResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the FindLfpProviders method.",
+"id": "FindLfpProvidersResponse",
+"properties": {
+"lfpProviders": {
+"description": "The LFP providers from the specified merchant in the specified country.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "LfpProvider"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GbpAccount": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to a Google Business Profile (GBP) account.",
+"id": "GbpAccount",
+"properties": {
+"gbpAccountId": {
+"description": "The id of the GBP account.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"gbpAccountName": {
+"description": "The name of the Business Profile. For personal accounts: Email id of the owner. For Business accounts: Name of the Business Account.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"listingCount": {
+"description": "Number of listings under this account.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the GBP account. Format: `accounts/{account}/gbpAccount/{gbp_account}`",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": {
+"description": "The type of the Business Profile.",
+"enum": [
+"TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"USER",
+"BUSINESS_ACCOUNT"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The GBP account is a user account.",
+"The GBP account is a business account."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GeoTargetArea": {
 "description": "A list of geotargets that defines the region area.",
 "id": "GeoTargetArea",
@@ -2628,7 +3098,7 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "Homepage": {
-"description": "The `Homepage` message represents a merchant's store homepage within the system. A merchant's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the merchant to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).",
+"description": "The `Homepage` message represents a business's store homepage within the system. A business's homepage is the primary domain where customers interact with their store. The homepage can be claimed and verified as a proof of ownership and allows the business to unlock features that require a verified website. For more information, see [Understanding online store URL verification](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/176793).",
 "id": "Homepage",
 "properties": {
 "claimed": {
@@ -2787,6 +3257,91 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"InStock": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to InStock.",
+"id": "InStock",
+"properties": {
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the in-stock serving.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTIVE",
+"FAILED",
+"RUNNING",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The review process has concluded successfully. The reviewed item is active.",
+"The review process failed.",
+"The review process is running.",
+"The review process is waiting for the merchant to take action."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uri": {
+"description": "Optional. Product landing page URI. It is only used for the review of MHLSF in-stock serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage. Required to be empty if the lsf_type is GHLSF, and required when the lsf_type is MHLSF_FULL or MHLSF_BASIC.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"InventoryVerification": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to [inventory verification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14684499?hl=en&ref_topic=15145634&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC).",
+"id": "InventoryVerification",
+"properties": {
+"contact": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the contact for the inventory verification process.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"contactEmail": {
+"description": "Required. The email address of the contact for the inventory verification process.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"contactState": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the contact verification.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTIVE",
+"FAILED",
+"RUNNING",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The review process has concluded successfully. The reviewed item is active.",
+"The review process failed.",
+"The review process is running.",
+"The review process is waiting for the merchant to take action."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the inventory verification process.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED",
+"INACTIVE",
+"RUNNING",
+"SUCCEEDED",
+"SUSPENDED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"When the merchant needs to initiate the inventory verification process. The next state is INACTIVE.",
+"When the merchant is ready to request inventory verification.",
+"The inventory verification process is running. If the merchant is rejected, the next state is INACTIVE.",
+"The inventory verification process succeeded.",
+"When merchant fails the inventory verification process and all attempts are exhausted."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ItemUpdatesAccountLevelSettings": {
 "description": "Settings for the Automatic Item Updates.",
 "id": "ItemUpdatesAccountLevelSettings",
@@ -2810,6 +3365,104 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"LfpLink": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to the LFP link.",
+"id": "LfpLink",
+"properties": {
+"externalAccountId": {
+"description": "Required. The account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"lfpProvider": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the LFP link.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTIVE",
+"FAILED",
+"RUNNING",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The review process has concluded successfully. The reviewed item is active.",
+"The review process failed.",
+"The review process is running.",
+"The review process is waiting for the merchant to take action."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"LfpProvider": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to a Local Feed Partnership (LFP) provider.",
+"id": "LfpProvider",
+"properties": {
+"displayName": {
+"description": "The display name of the LFP provider.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the LFP provider. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}/lfpProviders/{lfp_provider}`",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"regionCode": {
+"description": "Output only. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/).",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"LinkGbpAccountRequest": {
+"description": "Request message for the LinkGbpAccount method.",
+"id": "LinkGbpAccountRequest",
+"properties": {
+"gbpEmail": {
+"description": "Required. The email address of the Business Profile account.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"LinkGbpAccountResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the LinkGbpAccount method.",
+"id": "LinkGbpAccountResponse",
+"properties": {
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty",
+"description": "Empty response."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"LinkLfpProviderRequest": {
+"description": "Request message for the LinkLfpProvider method.",
+"id": "LinkLfpProviderRequest",
+"properties": {
+"externalAccountId": {
+"description": "Required. The external account ID by which this merchant is known to the LFP provider.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"LinkLfpProviderResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the LinkLfpProvider method.",
+"id": "LinkLfpProviderResponse",
+"properties": {
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty",
+"description": "Empty response."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ListAccountIssuesResponse": {
 "description": "Response message for the `ListAccountIssues` method.",
 "id": "ListAccountIssuesResponse",
@@ -2882,6 +3535,42 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"ListGbpAccountsResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the ListGbpAccounts method.",
+"id": "ListGbpAccountsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"gbpAccounts": {
+"description": "The GBP accounts from the specified merchant in the specified country.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GbpAccount"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListOmnichannelSettingsResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the ListOmnichannelSettings method.",
+"id": "ListOmnichannelSettingsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"omnichannelSettings": {
+"description": "The omnichannel settings from the specified merchant.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ListOnlineReturnPoliciesResponse": {
 "description": "Response message for the `ListOnlineReturnPolicies` method.",
 "id": "ListOnlineReturnPoliciesResponse",
@@ -2927,7 +3616,7 @@ false
 "type": "string"
 },
 "regions": {
-"description": "The regions from the specified merchant.",
+"description": "The regions from the specified business.",
 "items": {
 "$ref": "Region"
 },
@@ -2989,6 +3678,12 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"LocalListingManagement": {
+"description": "`LocalListingManagement` payload.",
+"id": "LocalListingManagement",
+"properties": {},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "LocationIdSet": {
 "description": "A list of location ID sets. Must be non-empty. Can only be set if all other fields are not set.",
 "id": "LocationIdSet",
@@ -3004,7 +3699,7 @@ false
 "type": "object"
 },
 "LoyaltyProgram": {
-"description": "[Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a merchant.",
+"description": "[Loyalty program](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12922446) provided by a business.",
 "id": "LoyaltyProgram",
 "properties": {
 "loyaltyProgramTiers": {
@@ -3022,7 +3717,7 @@ false
 "type": "object"
 },
 "LoyaltyProgramTiers": {
-"description": "Subset of a merchants loyalty program.",
+"description": "Subset of a business's loyalty program.",
 "id": "LoyaltyProgramTiers",
 "properties": {
 "tierLabel": {
@@ -3046,16 +3741,102 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"OmnichannelSetting": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to the omnichannel settings of a merchant.",
+"id": "OmnichannelSetting",
+"properties": {
+"about": {
+"$ref": "About",
+"description": "Optional. The about page URI and state for this country."
+},
+"inStock": {
+"$ref": "InStock",
+"description": "Optional. The InStock URI and state for this country."
+},
+"inventoryVerification": {
+"$ref": "InventoryVerification",
+"description": "Optional. The inventory verification contact and state for this country."
+},
+"lfpLink": {
+"$ref": "LfpLink",
+"description": "Output only. The established link to a LFP provider.",
+"readOnly": true
+},
+"lsfType": {
+"description": "Required. The Local Store Front type for this country.",
+"enum": [
+"LSF_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"GHLSF",
+"MHLSF_BASIC",
+"MHLSF_FULL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"Google-Hosted Local Store Front. Check the [HC article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14869424) for more details.",
+"Merchant-Hosted Local Store Front Basic. Check the [HC article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615867) for more details.",
+"Merchant-Hosted Local Store Front Full. Check the [HC article](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14617076) for more details."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the omnichannel setting. Format: `accounts/{account}/omnichannelSettings/{omnichannel_setting}`",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"odo": {
+"$ref": "OnDisplayToOrder",
+"description": "Optional. The On Display to Order (ODO) policy URI and state for this country."
+},
+"pickup": {
+"$ref": "Pickup",
+"description": "Optional. The Pickup URI and state for this country."
+},
+"regionCode": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. Region code defined by [CLDR](https://cldr.unicode.org/). Must be provided in the Create method, and is immutable.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"OnDisplayToOrder": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to the on display to order ([ODO](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14615056?hl=en&ref_topic=15145747&sjid=6892280366904591178-NC)).",
+"id": "OnDisplayToOrder",
+"properties": {
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the URI.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTIVE",
+"FAILED",
+"RUNNING",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The review process has concluded successfully. The reviewed item is active.",
+"The review process failed.",
+"The review process is running.",
+"The review process is waiting for the merchant to take action."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uri": {
+"description": "Required. The on display to order (ODO) policy URI.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "OnlineReturnPolicy": {
 "description": "[Online return policy](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10220642) object. This is currently used to represent return policies for ads and free listings programs.",
 "id": "OnlineReturnPolicy",
 "properties": {
 "acceptDefectiveOnly": {
-"description": "Optional. This field specifies if merchant only accepts defective products for returns.",
+"description": "Optional. This field specifies if business only accepts defective products for returns.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "acceptExchange": {
-"description": "Optional. This field specifies if merchant allows customers to exchange products.",
+"description": "Optional. This field specifies if business allows customers to exchange products.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "countries": {
@@ -3095,7 +3876,7 @@ false
 "description": "Optional. The return policy."
 },
 "processRefundDays": {
-"description": "Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for merchants to process refunds.",
+"description": "Optional. The field specifies the number of days it takes for business to process refunds.",
 "format": "int32",
 "type": "integer"
 },
@@ -3180,6 +3961,36 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"Pickup": {
+"description": "Collection of information related to Pickup.",
+"id": "Pickup",
+"properties": {
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the pickup serving.",
+"enum": [
+"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ACTIVE",
+"FAILED",
+"RUNNING",
+"ACTION_REQUIRED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Default value. This value is unused.",
+"The review process has concluded successfully. The reviewed item is active.",
+"The review process failed.",
+"The review process is running.",
+"The review process is waiting for the merchant to take action."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uri": {
+"description": "Required. Pickup product page URI. It is only used for the review of pickup serving. This URI domain should match with the business's homepage.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "Policy": {
 "description": "The available policies.",
 "id": "Policy",
@@ -3472,7 +4283,7 @@ false
 "type": "object"
 },
 "Program": {
-"description": "Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to merchant accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a merchant's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`",
+"description": "Defines participation in a given program for the specified account. Programs provide a mechanism for adding functionality to a Merchant Center accounts. A typical example of this is the [Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13889434) program, which enables products from a business's store to be shown across Google for free. The following list is the available set of program resource IDs accessible through the API: * `free-listings` * `shopping-ads` * `youtube-shopping-checkout`",
 "id": "Program",
 "properties": {
 "activeRegionCodes": {
@@ -3614,6 +4425,23 @@ false
 "properties": {},
 "type": "object"
 },
+"RequestInventoryVerificationRequest": {
+"description": "Request message for the RequestInventoryVerification method.",
+"id": "RequestInventoryVerificationRequest",
+"properties": {},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"RequestInventoryVerificationResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the RequestInventoryVerification method.",
+"id": "RequestInventoryVerificationResponse",
+"properties": {
+"omnichannelSetting": {
+"$ref": "OmnichannelSetting",
+"description": "The omnichannel setting that was updated."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "Required": {
 "description": "Describes the terms of service which are required to be accepted.",
 "id": "Required",
@@ -3768,11 +4596,11 @@ false
 },
 "minimumOrderValue": {
 "$ref": "Price",
-"description": "Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value_table."
+"description": "Optional. Minimum order value for this service. If set, indicates that customers will have to spend at least this amount. All prices within a service must have the same currency. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value_table`."
 },
 "minimumOrderValueTable": {
 "$ref": "MinimumOrderValueTable",
-"description": "Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with minimum_order_value."
+"description": "Optional. Table of per store minimum order values for the pickup fulfillment type. Cannot be set together with `minimum_order_value`."
 },
 "rateGroups": {
 "description": "Optional. Shipping rate group definitions. Only the last one is allowed to have an empty `applicable_shipping_labels`, which means \"everything else\". The other `applicable_shipping_labels` must not overlap.",
@@ -3786,7 +4614,7 @@ false
 "type": "string"
 },
 "shipmentType": {
-"description": "Type of locations this service ships orders to.",
+"description": "Optional. Type of locations this service ships orders to.",
 "enum": [
 "SHIPMENT_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
 "DELIVERY",
@@ -3809,7 +4637,7 @@ false
 "type": "object"
 },
 "ShippingSettings": {
-"description": "The merchant account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284).",
+"description": "The Merchant Center account's [shipping settings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069284). The `ShippingSettings` resource lets you retrieve and update the shipping settings of your advanced account and all its associated sub-accounts.",
 "id": "ShippingSettings",
 "properties": {
 "etag": {
@@ -3817,7 +4645,7 @@ false
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`",
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the shipping settings. Format: `accounts/{account}/shippingSettings`. For example, `accounts/123456/shippingSettings`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "services": {
@@ -3890,7 +4718,7 @@ false
 "type": "array"
 },
 "storeServiceType": {
-"description": "Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this merchant provide local delivery.",
+"description": "Indicates whether all stores, or selected stores, listed by this business provide local delivery.",
 "enum": [
 "STORE_SERVICE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
 "ALL_STORES",
@@ -3898,7 +4726,7 @@ false
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Did not specify store service type.",
-"Indicates whether all stores, current and future, listed by this merchant provide local delivery.",
+"Indicates whether all stores, current and future, listed by this business provide local delivery.",
 "Indicates that only the stores listed in `store_codes` are eligible for local delivery."
 ],
 "type": "string"
@@ -3968,7 +4796,7 @@ false
 "type": "object"
 },
 "TermsOfServiceAgreementState": {
-"description": "This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the merchant has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the merchant must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect 3Ps to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource.",
+"description": "This resource represents the agreement state for a given account and terms of service kind. The state is as follows: * If the business has accepted a terms of service, `accepted` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty * If the business must sign a terms of service, `required` will be populated, otherwise it will be empty. Note that both `required` and `accepted` can be present. In this case the `accepted` terms of services will have an expiration date set in the `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`). The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource. `valid_until` field. The `required` terms of services need to be accepted before `valid_until` in order for the account to continue having a valid agreement. When accepting new terms of services, we expect third-party providers to display the text associated with the given terms of service agreement (the url to the file containing the text is added in the Required message below as `tos_file_uri`. The actual acceptance of the terms of service is done by calling accept on the `TermsOfService` resource.",
 "id": "TermsOfServiceAgreementState",
 "properties": {
 "accepted": {
@@ -3976,7 +4804,7 @@ false
 "description": "The accepted terms of service of this kind and for the associated region_code"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`",
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name of the terms of service version. Format: `accounts/{account}/termsOfServiceAgreementState/{identifier}` The identifier format is: `{TermsOfServiceKind}-{country}` For example, an identifier could be: `MERCHANT_CENTER-EU` or `MERCHANT_CENTER-US`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "regionCode": {
@@ -4092,12 +4920,14 @@ false
 "enum": [
 "ACCESS_RIGHT_UNSPECIFIED",
 "STANDARD",
+"READ_ONLY",
 "ADMIN",
 "PERFORMANCE_REPORTING"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Default value. This value is unused.",
 "Standard access rights.",
+"Has access to the same read-only methods as STANDARD, but no access to any mutating methods.",
 "Admin access rights.",
 "Users with this right have access to performance and insights."
 ],
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.datasources_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.datasources_v1beta.json
index f0e203e35c..d5619e8358 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.datasources_v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.datasources_v1beta.json
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "updateMask": {
-"description": "Required. The list of data source fields to be updated. Fields specified in the update mask without a value specified in the body will be deleted from the data source. Providing special \"*\" value for full data source replacement is not supported.",
+"description": "Required. The list of data source fields to be updated. Fields specified in the update mask without a value specified in the body will be deleted from the data source. Providing special \"*\" value for full data source replacement is not supported. For example, If you insert `updateMask=displayName` in the request, it will only update the `displayName` leaving all other fields untouched.",
 "format": "google-fieldmask",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "string"
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250507",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "DataSource": {
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@
 "Represents data sources for which the data is primarily provided through the API.",
 "Represents data sources for which the data is primarily provided through file input. Data can still be provided through the API.",
 "The data source for products added directly in Merchant Center. This type of data source can not be created or updated through this API, only by Merchant Center UI. This type of data source is read only.",
-"This is also known as [Automated feeds](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12158480) used to automatically build your product data. This type of data source can be enabled or disabled through the Accounts bundle."
+"This is also known as [Automated feeds](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/12158480) used to automatically build your product data. This type of data source can be enabled or disabled through the Accounts sub-API."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json
index 94aeb38171..685429e40d 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.issueresolution_v1beta.json
@@ -105,6 +105,55 @@
 },
 "protocol": "rest",
 "resources": {
+"accounts": {
+"resources": {
+"aggregateProductStatuses": {
+"methods": {
+"list": {
+"description": "Lists the `AggregateProductStatuses` resources for your merchant account. The response might contain fewer items than specified by `pageSize`. If `pageToken` was returned in previous request, it can be used to obtain additional results.",
+"flatPath": "issueresolution/v1beta/accounts/{accountsId}/aggregateProductStatuses",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "merchantapi.accounts.aggregateProductStatuses.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Optional. A filter expression that filters the aggregate product statuses. Filtering is only supported by the `reporting_context` and `country` field. For example: `reporting_context = \"SHOPPING_ADS\" AND country = \"US\"`.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of aggregate product statuses to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 25 aggregate product statuses are returned. The maximum value is 250; values above 250 are coerced to 250.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous `ListAggregateProductStatuses` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListAggregateProductStatuses` must match the call that provided the page token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The account to list aggregate product statuses for. Format: `accounts/{account}`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "issueresolution/v1beta/{+parent}/aggregateProductStatuses",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListAggregateProductStatusesResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/content"
+]
+}
+}
+}
+}
+},
 "issueresolution": {
 "methods": {
 "renderaccountissues": {
@@ -219,7 +268,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250505",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Action": {
@@ -330,6 +379,99 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"AggregateProductStatus": {
+"description": "Aggregate product statuses for a given reporting context and country.",
+"id": "AggregateProductStatus",
+"properties": {
+"country": {
+"description": "The country of the aggregate product statuses. Represented as a [CLDR territory code](https://github.com/unicode-org/cldr/blob/latest/common/main/en.xml).",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"itemLevelIssues": {
+"description": "The product issues that affect the given reporting context and country.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "ItemLevelIssue"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The name of the `AggregateProductStatuses` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/aggregateProductStatuses/{aggregateProductStatuses}`",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"reportingContext": {
+"description": "The reporting context of the aggregate product statuses.",
+"enum": [
+"REPORTING_CONTEXT_ENUM_UNSPECIFIED",
+"SHOPPING_ADS",
+"DISCOVERY_ADS",
+"DEMAND_GEN_ADS",
+"DEMAND_GEN_ADS_DISCOVER_SURFACE",
+"VIDEO_ADS",
+"DISPLAY_ADS",
+"LOCAL_INVENTORY_ADS",
+"VEHICLE_INVENTORY_ADS",
+"FREE_LISTINGS",
+"FREE_LOCAL_LISTINGS",
+"FREE_LOCAL_VEHICLE_LISTINGS",
+"YOUTUBE_AFFILIATE",
+"YOUTUBE_SHOPPING",
+"CLOUD_RETAIL",
+"LOCAL_CLOUD_RETAIL",
+"PRODUCT_REVIEWS",
+"MERCHANT_REVIEWS",
+"YOUTUBE_CHECKOUT"
+],
+"enumDeprecated": [
+false,
+false,
+true,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false,
+false
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Not specified.",
+"[Shopping ads](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6149970).",
+"Deprecated: Use `DEMAND_GEN_ADS` instead. [Discovery and Demand Gen ads](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13389785).",
+"[Demand Gen ads](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13389785).",
+"[Demand Gen ads on Discover surface](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13389785).",
+"[Video ads](https://support.google.com/google-ads/answer/6340491).",
+"[Display ads](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).",
+"[Local inventory ads](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/3271956).",
+"[Vehicle inventory ads](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11544533).",
+"[Free product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9199328).",
+"[Free local product listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9825611).",
+"[Free local vehicle listings](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/11544533).",
+"[Youtube Affiliate](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/13376398).",
+"[YouTube Shopping](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13478370).",
+"[Cloud retail](https://cloud.google.com/solutions/retail).",
+"[Local cloud retail](https://cloud.google.com/solutions/retail).",
+"[Product Reviews](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14620732).",
+"[Merchant Reviews](https://developers.google.com/merchant-review-feeds).",
+"YouTube Checkout ."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"stats": {
+"$ref": "Stats",
+"description": "Products statistics for the given reporting context and country."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "Breakdown": {
 "description": "A detailed impact breakdown for a group of regions where the impact of the issue on different shopping destinations is the same.",
 "id": "Breakdown",
@@ -617,6 +759,86 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"ItemLevelIssue": {
+"description": "The ItemLevelIssue of the product status.",
+"id": "ItemLevelIssue",
+"properties": {
+"attribute": {
+"description": "The attribute's name, if the issue is caused by a single attribute.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"code": {
+"description": "The error code of the issue.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": {
+"description": "A short issue description in English.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"detail": {
+"description": "A detailed issue description in English.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"documentationUri": {
+"description": "The URL of a web page to help with resolving this issue.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"productCount": {
+"description": "The number of products affected by this issue.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"resolution": {
+"description": "Whether the issue can be resolved by the merchant.",
+"enum": [
+"RESOLUTION_UNSPECIFIED",
+"MERCHANT_ACTION",
+"PENDING_PROCESSING"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Not specified.",
+"The issue can be resolved by the merchant.",
+"The issue will be resolved auomatically."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"severity": {
+"description": "How this issue affects serving of the offer.",
+"enum": [
+"SEVERITY_UNSPECIFIED",
+"NOT_IMPACTED",
+"DEMOTED",
+"DISAPPROVED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Not specified.",
+"This issue represents a warning and does not have a direct affect on the product.",
+"The product is demoted and most likely have limited performance in search results",
+"Issue disapproves the product."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListAggregateProductStatusesResponse": {
+"description": "Response message for the `ListAggregateProductStatuses` method.",
+"id": "ListAggregateProductStatusesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"aggregateProductStatuses": {
+"description": "The `AggregateProductStatuses` resources for the given account.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AggregateProductStatus"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "A token, which can be sent as `pageToken` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ProductChange": {
 "description": "The change that happened to the product including old value, new value, country code as the region code and reporting context.",
 "id": "ProductChange",
@@ -892,6 +1114,33 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"Stats": {
+"description": "Products statistics.",
+"id": "Stats",
+"properties": {
+"activeCount": {
+"description": "The number of products that are active.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"disapprovedCount": {
+"description": "The number of products that are disapproved.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"expiringCount": {
+"description": "The number of products that are expiring.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pendingCount": {
+"description": "The number of products that are pending.",
+"format": "int64",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "TextInput": {
 "description": "Text input allows the business to provide a text value.",
 "id": "TextInput",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.lfp_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.lfp_v1beta.json
index 3b708523fa..653b3271ba 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.lfp_v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.lfp_v1beta.json
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the state to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`",
+"description": "Required. The name of the state to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`. For example, `accounts/123456/lfpMerchantStates/567890`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/lfpMerchantStates/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250430",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "CountrySettings": {
@@ -538,7 +538,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. The name of the `LfpMerchantState` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`",
+"description": "Identifier. The name of the `LfpMerchantState` resource. Format: `accounts/{account}/lfpMerchantStates/{target_merchant}`. For example, `accounts/123456/lfpMerchantStates/567890`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "storeStates": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.products_v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.products_v1beta.json
index 9b1feb7893..ed934b7f7e 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.products_v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/merchantapi.products_v1beta.json
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "dataSource": {
-"description": "Required. The primary or supplemental data source from which the product input should be deleted. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`.",
+"description": "Required. The primary or supplemental data source from which the product input should be deleted. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`. For example, `accounts/123456/dataSources/104628`.",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "dataSource": {
-"description": "Required. The primary or supplemental product data source name. If the product already exists and data source provided is different, then the product will be moved to a new data source. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`.",
+"description": "Required. The primary or supplemental product data source name. If the product already exists and data source provided is different, then the product will be moved to a new data source. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`. For example, `accounts/123456/dataSources/104628`.",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "dataSource": {
-"description": "Required. The primary or supplemental product data source where `data_source` name identifies the product input to be updated. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`.",
+"description": "Required. The primary or supplemental product data source where `data_source` name identifies the product input to be updated. Only API data sources are supported. Format: `accounts/{account}/dataSources/{datasource}`. For example, `accounts/123456/dataSources/104628`.",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "pageSize": {
-"description": "The maximum number of products to return. The service may return fewer than this value. The maximum value is 250; values above 250 will be coerced to 250. If unspecified, the maximum number of products will be returned.",
+"description": "The maximum number of products to return. The service may return fewer than this value. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000. If unspecified, the maximum number of products will be returned.",
 "format": "int32",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "integer"
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250427",
+"revision": "20250605",
 "rootUrl": "https://merchantapi.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Attributes": {
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "adsGrouping": {
-"description": "Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise.",
+"description": "Used to group items in an arbitrary way. Only for CPA%, discouraged otherwise. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "adsLabels": {
@@ -320,10 +320,10 @@
 },
 "autoPricingMinPrice": {
 "$ref": "Price",
-"description": "A safeguard in the \"Automated Discounts\" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and \"Dynamic Promotions\" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on merchants' offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability."
+"description": "A safeguard in the [automated discounts] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/10295759) and \"Dynamic Promotions\" (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13949249) projects, ensuring that discounts on business offers do not fall below this value, thereby preserving the offer's value and profitability."
 },
 "availability": {
-"description": "Availability status of the item.",
+"description": "[Availability](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324448) status of the item. For example, \"in_stock\" or \"out_of_stock\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "availabilityDate": {
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "brand": {
-"description": "Brand of the item.",
+"description": "[Brand](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324351) of the item. For example, \"Google\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "canonicalLink": {
@@ -354,11 +354,11 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "color": {
-"description": "Color of the item.",
+"description": "[Color](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324487) of the item. For example, \"red\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "condition": {
-"description": "Condition or state of the item.",
+"description": "[Condition](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324469) or state of the item. For example, \"new\" or \"used\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "costOfGoodsSold": {
@@ -366,23 +366,23 @@
 "description": "Cost of goods sold. Used for gross profit reporting."
 },
 "customLabel0": {
-"description": "Custom label 0 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
+"description": "[Custom label 0](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "customLabel1": {
-"description": "Custom label 1 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
+"description": "[Custom label 1](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "customLabel2": {
-"description": "Custom label 2 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
+"description": "[Custom label 2](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "customLabel3": {
-"description": "Custom label 3 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
+"description": "[Custom label 3](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "customLabel4": {
-"description": "Custom label 4 for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
+"description": "[Custom label 4](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324473) for custom grouping of items in a Shopping campaign.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "description": {
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "disclosureDate": {
-"description": "The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google\u2019s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date]( https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.",
+"description": "The date time when an offer becomes visible in search results across Google\u2019s YouTube surfaces, in [ISO 8601](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format. See [Disclosure date](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13034208) for more information.",
 "format": "google-datetime",
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "displayAdsSimilarIds": {
-"description": "Advertiser-specified recommendations.",
+"description": "Advertiser-specified recommendations. For more information, see [Display ads attribute specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "displayAdsValue": {
-"description": "Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns.",
+"description": "Offer margin for dynamic remarketing campaigns. For more information, see [Display ads attribute](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6069387).",
 "format": "double",
 "type": "number"
 },
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "excludedDestinations": {
-"description": "The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center).",
+"description": "The list of destinations to exclude for this target (corresponds to unchecked check boxes in Merchant Center). For more information, see [Excluded destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324486). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "gender": {
-"description": "Target gender of the item.",
+"description": "Target [gender](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324479) of the item. For example, \"male\" or \"female\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "googleProductCategory": {
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "includedDestinations": {
-"description": "The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`.",
+"description": "The list of destinations to include for this target (corresponds to checked check boxes in Merchant Center). Default destinations are always included unless provided in `excludedDestinations`. For more information, see [Included destination](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7501026). Note: We recommend setting destinations on datasources level for most use cases. Use this field within products to only setup exceptions.",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@
 "description": "Number and amount of installments to pay for an item."
 },
 "isBundle": {
-"description": "Whether the item is a merchant-defined bundle. A bundle is a custom grouping of different products sold by a merchant for a single price.",
+"description": "Whether the item is a business-defined sub-API. A [sub-API] (https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324449) is a custom grouping of different products sold by a business for a single price.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "itemGroupId": {
@@ -499,7 +499,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "linkTemplate": {
-"description": "Link template for merchant hosted local storefront.",
+"description": "[Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13871172) for business hosted local storefront.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "loyaltyPoints": {
@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "material": {
-"description": "The material of which the item is made.",
+"description": "The [material](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324410) of which the item is made. For example, \"Leather\" or \"Cotton\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "maxEnergyEfficiencyClass": {
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "mobileLinkTemplate": {
-"description": "Link template for merchant hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.",
+"description": "[Link template](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/13870216) for business hosted local storefront optimized for mobile devices.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "mpn": {
@@ -548,12 +548,12 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "multipack": {
-"description": "The number of identical products in a merchant-defined multipack.",
+"description": "The number of identical products in a business-defined multipack.",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "pattern": {
-"description": "The item's pattern (for example, polka dots).",
+"description": "The item's [pattern](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324483). For example, polka dots.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "pause": {
@@ -561,11 +561,11 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "pickupMethod": {
-"description": "The pick up option for the item.",
+"description": "The [pickup](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14634021) option for the item.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "pickupSla": {
-"description": "Item store pickup timeline.",
+"description": "Item store pickup timeline. For more information, see [Pickup SLA](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/14635400).",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "price": {
@@ -584,7 +584,7 @@
 "description": "The height of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive)."
 },
 "productHighlights": {
-"description": "Bullet points describing the most relevant highlights of a product.",
+"description": "Bullet points describing the most relevant [product highlights](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/9216100).",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -595,7 +595,7 @@
 "description": "The length of the product in the units provided. The value must be between 0 (exclusive) and 3000 (inclusive)."
 },
 "productTypes": {
-"description": "Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#product_type)).",
+"description": "Categories of the item (formatted as in [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#product_category)).",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -622,7 +622,7 @@
 },
 "salePriceEffectiveDate": {
 "$ref": "Interval",
-"description": "Date range during which the item is on sale (see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494#sale_price_effective_date))."
+"description": "Date range during which the item is on sale, see [product data specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112#price_and_availability)."
 },
 "sellOnGoogleQuantity": {
 "description": "The quantity of the product that is available for selling on Google. Supported only for online products.",
@@ -657,22 +657,22 @@
 "description": "Width of the item for shipping."
 },
 "shoppingAdsExcludedCountries": {
-"description": "List of country codes (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.",
+"description": "List of country codes [(ISO 3166-1 alpha-2)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_3166-1_alpha-2) to exclude the offer from Shopping Ads destination. Countries from this list are removed from countries configured in data source settings.",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
 "type": "array"
 },
 "size": {
-"description": "Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492](size definition)).",
+"description": "Size of the item. Only one value is allowed. For variants with different sizes, insert a separate product for each size with the same `itemGroupId` value, see [Size](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324492).",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "sizeSystem": {
-"description": "System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items.",
+"description": "System in which the size is specified. Recommended for apparel items. For example, \"US\", \"UK\", \"DE\". For more information, see [Size system](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324502).",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "sizeTypes": {
-"description": "The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided (see [https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497](size type)).",
+"description": "The cut of the item. It can be used to represent combined size types for apparel items. Maximum two of size types can be provided, see [Size type](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/6324497). For example, \"petite\", \"plus size\".",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -699,7 +699,7 @@
 },
 "taxCategory": {
 "deprecated": true,
-"description": "The tax category of the product.",
+"description": "The [tax category](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7569847) of the product.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "taxes": {
@@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ false
 "type": "string"
 },
 "resolution": {
-"description": "Whether the issue can be resolved by the merchant.",
+"description": "Whether the issue can be resolved by the business.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "severity": {
@@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ false
 "description": "The price for members of the given tier, that is, the instant discount price. Must be smaller or equal to the regular price."
 },
 "programLabel": {
-"description": "The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a merchant entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a merchant. The corresponding program must be linked to the merchant account.",
+"description": "The label of the loyalty program. This is an internal label that uniquely identifies the relationship between a business entity and a loyalty program entity. The label must be provided so that the system can associate the assets below (for example, price and points) with a business. The corresponding program must be linked to the Merchant Center account.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "shippingLabel": {
@@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@ false
 "type": "object"
 },
 "ProductInput": {
-"description": "This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.",
+"description": "This resource represents input data you submit for a product, not the processed product that you see in Merchant Center, in Shopping ads, or across Google surfaces. Product inputs, rules and supplemental data source data are combined to create the processed Product. For more information, see [Manage products](/merchant/api/guides/products/overview). Required product input attributes to pass data validation checks are primarily defined in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494). The following attributes are required: feedLabel, contentLanguage and offerId. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the processed product can be retrieved. All fields in the product input and its sub-messages match the English name of their corresponding attribute in the [Products Data Specification](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/188494) with [some exceptions](https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/7052112). The following reference documentation lists the field names in the **camelCase** casing style while the Products Data Specification lists the names in the **snake_case** casing style.",
 "id": "ProductInput",
 "properties": {
 "attributes": {
@@ -1448,7 +1448,7 @@ false
 "type": "array"
 },
 "feedLabel": {
-"description": "Required. Immutable. The [feed label](https://developers.google.com/shopping-content/guides/products/feed-labels) for the product.",
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The label that lets you categorize and identify your products. The maximum allowed characters are 20, and the supported characters are `A-Z`, `0-9`, hyphen, and underscore. The feed label must not include any spaces. For more information, see [Using feed labels](//support.google.com/merchants/answer/14994087).",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {

From 308f982a79ce4b29db5d5b554a94bff84b767fd2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 22/32] feat(monitoring): update the api

#### monitoring:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.Treemap (Total Keys: 13)
- schemas.Widget.properties.treemap.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
---
 .../monitoring_v1.projects.dashboards.html    | 3200 ++++++++++++++++-
 .../documents/monitoring.v1.json              |   52 +-
 2 files changed, 3151 insertions(+), 101 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v1.projects.dashboards.html b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v1.projects.dashboards.html
index ff95a0bb65..5be59205e1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v1.projects.dashboards.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v1.projects.dashboards.html
@@ -581,6 +581,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -1322,6 +1447,131 @@ 
Method Details

           "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
         },
         "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+        "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+            { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+              "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                  "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                  "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                },
+              ],
+              "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                },
+              ],
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                },
+                "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                  "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                  "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+              },
+            },
+          ],
+          "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+        },
         "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
           "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
             "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -1959,21 +2209,10 @@ 
Method Details

             "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
           },
           "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
-          "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
-            "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
-              "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
-              "templateVariable": "A String", # The template variable whose value is evaluated.
-              "templateVariableValue": "A String", # The value to compare the template variable to. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, this field should contain a regex.
-            },
-          },
-          "xyChart": { # A chart that displays data on a 2D (X and Y axes) plane. # A chart of time series data.
-            "chartOptions": { # Options to control visual rendering of a chart. # Display options for the chart.
-              "displayHorizontal": True or False, # Preview: Configures whether the charted values are shown on the horizontal or vertical axis. By default, values are represented the vertical axis. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
-              "mode": "A String", # The chart mode.
-            },
-            "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this chart.
-              { # Groups a time series query definition with charting options.
-                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset.
+          "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+            "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+              { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
                   { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
                     "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
                       "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
@@ -1989,8 +2228,144 @@ 
Method Details

                     "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
                   },
                 ],
-                "dimensions": [ # Optional. A collection of dimension columns.
-                  { # A chart dimension. Dimensions are a structured label, class, or category for a set of measurements in your data.
+                "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                  "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                  },
+                  "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                  "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                  "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                    "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                  "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
+          "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
+            "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
+              "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
+              "templateVariable": "A String", # The template variable whose value is evaluated.
+              "templateVariableValue": "A String", # The value to compare the template variable to. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, this field should contain a regex.
+            },
+          },
+          "xyChart": { # A chart that displays data on a 2D (X and Y axes) plane. # A chart of time series data.
+            "chartOptions": { # Options to control visual rendering of a chart. # Display options for the chart.
+              "displayHorizontal": True or False, # Preview: Configures whether the charted values are shown on the horizontal or vertical axis. By default, values are represented the vertical axis. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+              "mode": "A String", # The chart mode.
+            },
+            "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this chart.
+              { # Groups a time series query definition with charting options.
+                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset.
+                  { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                    "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                    "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "dimensions": [ # Optional. A collection of dimension columns.
+                  { # A chart dimension. Dimensions are a structured label, class, or category for a set of measurements in your data.
                     "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the source SQL query that is used to chart the dimension.
                     "columnType": "A String", # Optional. The type of the dimension column. This is relevant only if one of the bin_size fields is set. If it is empty, the type TIMESTAMP or INT64 will be assumed based on which bin_size field is set. If populated, this should be set to one of the following types: DATE, TIME, DATETIME, TIMESTAMP, BIGNUMERIC, INT64, NUMERIC, FLOAT64.
                     "floatBinSize": 3.14, # Optional. float_bin_size is used when the column type used for a dimension is a floating point numeric column.
@@ -2598,6 +2973,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -3262,6 +3762,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -3900,19 +4525,143 @@ 
Method Details

                   "value": 3.14, # The value of the threshold. The value should be defined in the native scale of the metric.
                 },
               ],
-              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
-            },
-          ],
-          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
-            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
-              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
-              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
-                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
-                  "A String",
-                ],
-              },
-              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
-              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
+            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
+              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
+              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
+                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+                "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                },
+                "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                  "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                  "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+              },
+            },
+          ],
+          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+        },
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+        "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+            { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+              "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                  "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                  "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                },
+              ],
+              "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                },
+              ],
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
                 "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
                   "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
                 },
@@ -4000,9 +4749,10 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             },
           ],
-          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+          "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+            "A String",
+          ],
         },
-        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
         "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
           "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
             "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -4640,6 +5390,131 @@ 
Method Details

             "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
           },
           "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+          "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+            "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+              { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                  { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                    "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                    "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                  "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                  },
+                  "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                  "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                  "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                    "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                  "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
             "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
               "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -5276,9 +6151,134 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 },
               ],
-              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+            },
+            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
             },
-            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -5967,6 +6967,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -6605,19 +7730,143 @@ 
Method Details

                   "value": 3.14, # The value of the threshold. The value should be defined in the native scale of the metric.
                 },
               ],
-              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
-            },
-          ],
-          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
-            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
-              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
-              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
-                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
-                  "A String",
-                ],
-              },
-              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
-              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
+            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
+              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
+              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
+                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+                "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                },
+                "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                  "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                  "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+              },
+            },
+          ],
+          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+        },
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+        "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+            { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+              "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                  "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                  "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                },
+              ],
+              "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                },
+              ],
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
                 "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
                   "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
                 },
@@ -6705,9 +7954,10 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             },
           ],
-          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+          "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+            "A String",
+          ],
         },
-        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
         "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
           "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
             "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -7345,6 +8595,131 @@ 
Method Details

             "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
           },
           "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+          "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+            "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+              { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                  { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                    "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                    "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                  "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                  },
+                  "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                  "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                  "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                    "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                  "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
             "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
               "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -7981,9 +9356,134 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 },
               ],
-              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+            },
+            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
             },
-            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -8658,6 +10158,131 @@ 
Method Details

                   "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
                 },
                 "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+                "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+                  "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                    { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                      "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                        { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                            "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                              { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                                "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                                "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                              },
+                            ],
+                            "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                          },
+                          "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                          "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                          "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                        { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                          "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                            "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                              { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                                "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                                "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                              },
+                            ],
+                            "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                          },
+                          "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                        "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                        },
+                        "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                        "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                        "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                          "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                          "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                            "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                            "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                              "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                              "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                            },
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                          },
+                          "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                          },
+                        },
+                        "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                          "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                            "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                              "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                              "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                              "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                                "A String",
+                              ],
+                              "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            },
+                            "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                          },
+                          "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                            "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                              "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                              "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                              "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                                "A String",
+                              ],
+                              "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            },
+                            "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                          },
+                          "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                            "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                            "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                              "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                              "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                            },
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                          },
+                          "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                          },
+                        },
+                        "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                        "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
                 "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
                   "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                     "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -9296,19 +10921,143 @@ 
Method Details

                       "value": 3.14, # The value of the threshold. The value should be defined in the native scale of the metric.
                     },
                   ],
-                  "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
-                },
-              ],
-              "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
-                { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
-                  "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
-                  "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
-                    "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
-                      "A String",
-                    ],
-                  },
-                  "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
-                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+                  "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
+                },
+              ],
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
+                { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
+                  "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
+                  "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
+                    "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                  },
+                  "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+            },
+            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
                     "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
                       "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
                     },
@@ -9396,9 +11145,10 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 },
               ],
-              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
             },
-            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -10036,6 +11786,131 @@ 
Method Details

                 "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
               },
               "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+              "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+                "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                  { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                    "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                      { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                          "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                            { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                              "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                              "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                            },
+                          ],
+                          "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                        },
+                        "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                        "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                        "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                        "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                          "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                            { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                              "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                              "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                            },
+                          ],
+                          "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                        },
+                        "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                      "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                      },
+                      "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                      "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                      "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                        "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                          "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                          "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                            "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                            "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                          },
+                          "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                          "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                        },
+                        "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                          "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                          "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                        "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                          "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                        },
+                        "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                          "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                        },
+                        "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                          "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                          "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                            "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                            "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                          },
+                          "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                          "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                        },
+                        "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                          "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                          "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                        },
+                      },
+                      "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                      "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                    },
+                  },
+                ],
+                "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
               "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
                 "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                   "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -10672,9 +12547,134 @@ 
Method Details

                       },
                     },
                   ],
-                  "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+                  "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+                },
+                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+                "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+                  "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                    { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                      "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                        { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                            "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                              { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                                "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                                "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                              },
+                            ],
+                            "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                          },
+                          "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                          "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                          "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                        { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                          "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                            "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                              { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                                "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                                "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                              },
+                            ],
+                            "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                          },
+                          "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                        "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                        },
+                        "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                        "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                        "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                          "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                          "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                            "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                            "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                              "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                              "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                            },
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                          },
+                          "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                          },
+                        },
+                        "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                          "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                            "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                              "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                              "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                              "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                                "A String",
+                              ],
+                              "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            },
+                            "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                          },
+                          "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                            "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                              "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                              "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                              "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                                "A String",
+                              ],
+                              "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            },
+                            "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                          },
+                          "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                            "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                            "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                              "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                              "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                            },
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                          },
+                          "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                            "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                            "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                            "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                              "A String",
+                            ],
+                            "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          },
+                          "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                            "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                            "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                          },
+                        },
+                        "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                        "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
                 },
-                "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
                 "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
                   "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                     "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -11357,6 +13357,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -11995,19 +14120,143 @@ 
Method Details

                   "value": 3.14, # The value of the threshold. The value should be defined in the native scale of the metric.
                 },
               ],
-              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
-            },
-          ],
-          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
-            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
-              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
-              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
-                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
-                  "A String",
-                ],
-              },
-              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
-              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
+            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
+              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
+              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
+                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+                "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                },
+                "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                  "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                  "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+              },
+            },
+          ],
+          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+        },
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+        "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+            { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+              "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                  "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                  "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                },
+              ],
+              "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                },
+              ],
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
                 "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
                   "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
                 },
@@ -12095,9 +14344,10 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             },
           ],
-          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+          "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+            "A String",
+          ],
         },
-        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
         "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
           "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
             "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -12735,6 +14985,131 @@ 
Method Details

             "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
           },
           "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+          "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+            "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+              { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                  { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                    "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                    "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                  "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                  },
+                  "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                  "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                  "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                    "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                  "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
             "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
               "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -13371,9 +15746,134 @@ 
Method Details

                   },
                 },
               ],
-              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+              "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+            },
+            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
             },
-            "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -14038,6 +16538,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -14676,19 +17301,143 @@ 
Method Details

                   "value": 3.14, # The value of the threshold. The value should be defined in the native scale of the metric.
                 },
               ],
-              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
-            },
-          ],
-          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
-            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
-              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
-              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
-                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
-                  "A String",
-                ],
-              },
-              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
-              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+              "visible": True or False, # Required. Whether the column should be visible on page load.
+            },
+          ],
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The data displayed in this table.
+            { # Groups a time series query definition with table options.
+              "minAlignmentPeriod": "A String", # Optional. The lower bound on data point frequency for this data set, implemented by specifying the minimum alignment period to use in a time series query For example, if the data is published once every 10 minutes, the min_alignment_period should be at least 10 minutes. It would not make sense to fetch and align data at one minute intervals.
+              "tableDisplayOptions": { # Table display options that can be reused. # Optional. Table display options for configuring how the table is rendered.
+                "shownColumns": [ # Optional. This field is unused and has been replaced by TimeSeriesTable.column_settings
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "tableTemplate": "A String", # Optional. A template string for naming TimeSeries in the resulting data set. This should be a string with interpolations of the form ${label_name}, which will resolve to the label's value i.e. "${resource.labels.project_id}."
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. Fields for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API.
+                "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                },
+                "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                  "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                  "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                  },
+                  "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                    "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                    "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                    },
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                  },
+                  "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                    "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                    "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                  },
+                  "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                    "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                    "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                  },
+                },
+                "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+              },
+            },
+          ],
+          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+        },
+        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+        "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+          "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+            { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+              "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                  "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                  "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                },
+              ],
+              "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                    "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                      { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                        "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                        "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                      },
+                    ],
+                    "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                  },
+                  "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                },
+              ],
+              "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
                 "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
                   "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
                 },
@@ -14776,9 +17525,10 @@ 
Method Details

               },
             },
           ],
-          "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
+          "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+            "A String",
+          ],
         },
-        "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
         "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
           "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
             "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -15416,6 +18166,131 @@ 
Method Details

             "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
           },
           "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+          "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+            "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+              { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                  { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                    "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                    "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                  { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                      "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                        { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                          "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                          "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                    },
+                    "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                  },
+                ],
+                "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                  "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                    "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                  },
+                  "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                  "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                  "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                    "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                    "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                    },
+                    "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                      "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                      "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                        "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                      },
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                    },
+                    "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                      "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                      "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                    },
+                    "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                      "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                      "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                  "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+              "A String",
+            ],
+          },
           "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
             "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
               "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
@@ -16055,6 +18930,131 @@ 
Method Details

               "metricVisualization": "A String", # Optional. Store rendering strategy
             },
             "title": "A String", # Optional. The title of the widget.
+            "treemap": { # A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap. # A widget that displays data as a treemap.
+              "dataSets": [ # Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.
+                { # The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.
+                  "breakdowns": [ # Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.
+                    { # Preview: A breakdown is an aggregation applied to the measures over a specified column. A breakdown can result in multiple series across a category for the provided measure. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The Aggregation function is applied across all data in each breakdown created.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The name of the column in the dataset containing the breakdown values.
+                      "limit": 42, # Required. A limit to the number of breakdowns. If set to zero then all possible breakdowns are applied. The list of breakdowns is dependent on the value of the sort_order field.
+                      "sortOrder": "A String", # Required. The sort order is applied to the values of the breakdown column.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "measures": [ # Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                    { # A chart measure. Measures represent a measured property in your chart data such as rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.
+                      "aggregationFunction": { # Preview: An identifier for an aggregation function. Aggregation functions are SQL functions that group or transform data from multiple points to a single point. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Required. The aggregation function applied to the input column. This must not be set to "none" unless binning is disabled on the dimension. The aggregation function is used to group points on the dimension bins.
+                        "parameters": [ # Optional. Parameters applied to the aggregation function. Only used for functions that require them.
+                          { # Preview: Parameter value applied to the aggregation function. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                            "doubleValue": 3.14, # A floating-point parameter value.
+                            "intValue": "A String", # An integer parameter value.
+                          },
+                        ],
+                        "type": "A String", # Required. The type of aggregation function, must be one of the following: "none" - no function. "percentile" - APPROX_QUANTILES() - 1 parameter numeric value "average" - AVG() "count" - COUNT() "count-distinct" - COUNT(DISTINCT) "count-distinct-approx" - APPROX_COUNT_DISTINCT() "max" - MAX() "min" - MIN() "sum" - SUM()
+                      },
+                      "column": "A String", # Required. The column name within in the dataset used for the measure.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "timeSeriesQuery": { # TimeSeriesQuery collects the set of supported methods for querying time series data from the Stackdriver metrics API. # Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery
+                    "opsAnalyticsQuery": { # Preview: A query that produces an aggregated response and supporting data. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release. # Preview: A query used to fetch a time series, category series, or numeric series with SQL. This is a preview feature and may be subject to change before final release.
+                      "sql": "A String", # A SQL query to fetch time series, category series, or numeric series data.
+                    },
+                    "outputFullDuration": True or False, # Optional. If set, Cloud Monitoring will treat the full query duration as the alignment period so that there will be only 1 output value.*Note: This could override the configured alignment period except for the cases where a series of data points are expected, like - XyChart - Scorecard's spark chart
+                    "prometheusQuery": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with PromQL.
+                    "timeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that defines a subset of time series data that is displayed in a widget. Time series data is fetched using the ListTimeSeries (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.timeSeries/list) method. # Filter parameters to fetch time series.
+                      "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after aggregation is applied.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesFilterRatio": { # A pair of time series filters that define a ratio computation. The output time series is the pair-wise division of each aligned element from the numerator and denominator time series. # Parameters to fetch a ratio between two time series filters.
+                      "denominator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The denominator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "numerator": { # Describes a query to build the numerator or denominator of a TimeSeriesFilterRatio. # The numerator of the ratio.
+                        "aggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # By default, the raw time series data is returned. Use this field to combine multiple time series for different views of the data.
+                          "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                          "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                          "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                            "A String",
+                          ],
+                          "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        },
+                        "filter": "A String", # Required. The monitoring filter (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/filters) that identifies the metric types, resources, and projects to query.
+                      },
+                      "pickTimeSeriesFilter": { # Describes a ranking-based time series filter. Each input time series is ranked with an aligner. The filter will allow up to num_time_series time series to pass through it, selecting them based on the relative ranking.For example, if ranking_method is METHOD_MEAN,direction is BOTTOM, and num_time_series is 3, then the 3 times series with the lowest mean values will pass through the filter. # Ranking based time series filter.
+                        "direction": "A String", # How to use the ranking to select time series that pass through the filter.
+                        "interval": { # Represents a time interval, encoded as a Timestamp start (inclusive) and a Timestamp end (exclusive).The start must be less than or equal to the end. When the start equals the end, the interval is empty (matches no time). When both start and end are unspecified, the interval matches any time. # Select the top N streams/time series within this time interval
+                          "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Exclusive end of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be before the end.
+                          "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Inclusive start of the interval.If specified, a Timestamp matching this interval will have to be the same or after the start.
+                        },
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to allow to pass through the filter.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # ranking_method is applied to each time series independently to produce the value which will be used to compare the time series to other time series.
+                      },
+                      "secondaryAggregation": { # Describes how to combine multiple time series to provide a different view of the data. Aggregation of time series is done in two steps. First, each time series in the set is aligned to the same time interval boundaries, then the set of time series is optionally reduced in number.Alignment consists of applying the per_series_aligner operation to each time series after its data has been divided into regular alignment_period time intervals. This process takes all of the data points in an alignment period, applies a mathematical transformation such as averaging, minimum, maximum, delta, etc., and converts them into a single data point per period.Reduction is when the aligned and transformed time series can optionally be combined, reducing the number of time series through similar mathematical transformations. Reduction involves applying a cross_series_reducer to all the time series, optionally sorting the time series into subsets with group_by_fields, and applying the reducer to each subset.The raw time series data can contain a huge amount of information from multiple sources. Alignment and reduction transforms this mass of data into a more manageable and representative collection of data, for example "the 95% latency across the average of all tasks in a cluster". This representative data can be more easily graphed and comprehended, and the individual time series data is still available for later drilldown. For more details, see Filtering and aggregation (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3/aggregation). # Apply a second aggregation after the ratio is computed.
+                        "alignmentPeriod": "A String", # The alignment_period specifies a time interval, in seconds, that is used to divide the data in all the time series into consistent blocks of time. This will be done before the per-series aligner can be applied to the data.The value must be at least 60 seconds. If a per-series aligner other than ALIGN_NONE is specified, this field is required or an error is returned. If no per-series aligner is specified, or the aligner ALIGN_NONE is specified, then this field is ignored.The maximum value of the alignment_period is 2 years, or 104 weeks.
+                        "crossSeriesReducer": "A String", # The reduction operation to be used to combine time series into a single time series, where the value of each data point in the resulting series is a function of all the already aligned values in the input time series.Not all reducer operations can be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and the value_type of the original time series. Reduction can yield a time series with a different metric_kind or value_type than the input time series.Time series data must first be aligned (see per_series_aligner) in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified, and must not be ALIGN_NONE. An alignment_period must also be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                        "groupByFields": [ # The set of fields to preserve when cross_series_reducer is specified. The group_by_fields determine how the time series are partitioned into subsets prior to applying the aggregation operation. Each subset contains time series that have the same value for each of the grouping fields. Each individual time series is a member of exactly one subset. The cross_series_reducer is applied to each subset of time series. It is not possible to reduce across different resource types, so this field implicitly contains resource.type. Fields not specified in group_by_fields are aggregated away. If group_by_fields is not specified and all the time series have the same resource type, then the time series are aggregated into a single output time series. If cross_series_reducer is not defined, this field is ignored.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "perSeriesAligner": "A String", # An Aligner describes how to bring the data points in a single time series into temporal alignment. Except for ALIGN_NONE, all alignments cause all the data points in an alignment_period to be mathematically grouped together, resulting in a single data point for each alignment_period with end timestamp at the end of the period.Not all alignment operations may be applied to all time series. The valid choices depend on the metric_kind and value_type of the original time series. Alignment can change the metric_kind or the value_type of the time series.Time series data must be aligned in order to perform cross-time series reduction. If cross_series_reducer is specified, then per_series_aligner must be specified and not equal to ALIGN_NONE and alignment_period must be specified; otherwise, an error is returned.
+                      },
+                      "statisticalTimeSeriesFilter": { # A filter that ranks streams based on their statistical relation to other streams in a request. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API. # Statistics based time series filter. Note: This field is deprecated and completely ignored by the API.
+                        "numTimeSeries": 42, # How many time series to output.
+                        "rankingMethod": "A String", # rankingMethod is applied to a set of time series, and then the produced value for each individual time series is used to compare a given time series to others. These are methods that cannot be applied stream-by-stream, but rather require the full context of a request to evaluate time series.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    "timeSeriesQueryLanguage": "A String", # A query used to fetch time series with MQL.
+                    "unitOverride": "A String", # The unit of data contained in fetched time series. If non-empty, this unit will override any unit that accompanies fetched data. The format is the same as the unit (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/ref_v3/rest/v3/projects.metricDescriptors) field in MetricDescriptor.
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "treemapHierarchy": [ # Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+            },
             "visibilityCondition": { # Condition that determines whether the widget should be displayed. # Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true.
               "templateVariableCondition": { # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable. # A condition whose evaluation is based on the value of a template variable.
                 "comparator": "A String", # Comparator to use to evaluate whether the value of the template variable matches the template_variable_value. For example, if the comparator is REGEX_FULL_MATCH, template_variable_value would contain a regex that is matched against the value of the template variable.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json
index 384bfc1f44..443eb6c276 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/monitoring.v1.json
@@ -753,7 +753,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250501",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://monitoring.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Aggregation": {
@@ -2868,6 +2868,52 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"Treemap": {
+"description": "A widget that displays hierarchical data as a treemap.",
+"id": "Treemap",
+"properties": {
+"dataSets": {
+"description": "Required. The collection of datasets used to construct and populate the treemap. For the rendered treemap rectangles: Color is determined by the aggregated value for each grouping. Size is proportional to the count of time series aggregated within that rectangle's segment.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "TreemapDataSet"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"treemapHierarchy": {
+"description": "Required. Ordered labels representing the hierarchical treemap structure.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"TreemapDataSet": {
+"description": "The data represented by the treemap. Needs to include the data itself, plus rules on how to organize it hierarchically.",
+"id": "TreemapDataSet",
+"properties": {
+"breakdowns": {
+"description": "Optional. The collection of breakdowns to be applied to the dataset. A breakdown is a way to slice the data. For example, you can break down the data by region.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Breakdown"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"measures": {
+"description": "Optional. A collection of measures. A measure is a measured value of a property in your data. For example, rainfall in inches, number of units sold, revenue gained, etc.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Measure"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"timeSeriesQuery": {
+"$ref": "TimeSeriesQuery",
+"description": "Required. The query that fetches the relevant data. See google.monitoring.dashboard.v1.TimeSeriesQuery"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "Type": {
 "description": "A protocol buffer message type.",
 "id": "Type",
@@ -2993,6 +3039,10 @@
 "description": "Optional. The title of the widget.",
 "type": "string"
 },
+"treemap": {
+"$ref": "Treemap",
+"description": "A widget that displays data as a treemap."
+},
 "visibilityCondition": {
 "$ref": "VisibilityCondition",
 "description": "Optional. If set, this widget is rendered only when the condition is evaluated to true."

From ec4b1a0f5d44a16ca9797c0ce23d50d6a159a71d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 23/32] feat(netapp): update the api

#### netapp:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.LocationMetadata.properties.hasVcp (Total Keys: 2)

#### netapp:v1beta1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.LocationMetadata.properties.hasVcp (Total Keys: 2)
---
 ...pp_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html | 32 +++++++++----------
 ...pp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html | 16 +++++-----
 ...beta1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html | 32 +++++++++----------
 ...beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html | 16 +++++-----
 .../discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json  | 19 +++++++----
 .../documents/netapp.v1beta1.json             | 19 +++++++----
 6 files changed, 72 insertions(+), 62 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html
index 95b989b517..b681d203d5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html
@@ -119,10 +119,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
   "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
     "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
   },
   "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
@@ -220,10 +220,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
   "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
     "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
   },
   "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
@@ -263,10 +263,10 @@ 
Method Details

       "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
       "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
         "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-        "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-        "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-        "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-        "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
       },
       "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
@@ -315,10 +315,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
   "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
     "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
   },
   "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html
index 553c56423f..1901089f7a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1.projects.locations.storagePools.html
@@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
   "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
   "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
   "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
   "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
   "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
@@ -248,8 +248,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
   "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
   "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
   "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
   "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
   "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
@@ -300,8 +300,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
       "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
       "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-      "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-      "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+      "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+      "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
       "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
       "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
       "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
@@ -359,8 +359,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
   "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
   "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
   "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
   "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
   "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html
index f00b57bdf5..5f4ad9fa43 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.backupVaults.html
@@ -119,10 +119,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
   "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
     "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
   },
   "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
@@ -220,10 +220,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
   "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
     "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
   },
   "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
@@ -263,10 +263,10 @@ 
Method Details

       "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
       "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
         "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-        "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-        "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-        "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-        "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+        "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
       },
       "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
       "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
@@ -315,10 +315,10 @@ 
Method Details

   "backupRegion": "A String", # Optional. Region where the backups are stored. Format: `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}`
   "backupRetentionPolicy": { # Retention policy for backups in the backup vault # Optional. Backup retention policy defining the retenton of backups.
     "backupMinimumEnforcedRetentionDays": 42, # Required. Minimum retention duration in days for backups in the backup vault.
-    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
-    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "dailyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "manualBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "monthlyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
+    "weeklyBackupImmutable": True or False, # Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.
   },
   "backupVaultType": "A String", # Optional. Type of backup vault to be created. Default is IN_REGION.
   "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Create time of the backup vault.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html
index 4708ac25bf..276d398c01 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/netapp_v1beta1.projects.locations.storagePools.html
@@ -141,8 +141,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
   "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
   "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
   "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
   "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
   "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
@@ -252,8 +252,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
   "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
   "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
   "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
   "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
   "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
@@ -306,8 +306,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
       "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
       "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-      "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-      "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+      "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+      "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
       "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
       "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
       "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
@@ -367,8 +367,8 @@ 
Method Details

   "serviceLevel": "A String", # Required. Service level of the storage pool
   "state": "A String", # Output only. State of the storage pool
   "stateDetails": "A String", # Output only. State details of the storage pool
-  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
-  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)
+  "totalIops": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps
+  "totalThroughputMibps": "A String", # Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)
   "volumeCapacityGib": "A String", # Output only. Allocated size of all volumes in GIB in the storage pool
   "volumeCount": 42, # Output only. Volume count of the storage pool
   "zone": "A String", # Optional. Specifies the active zone for regional storagePool.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json
index a97f6cbe6b..d2b9c98ee3 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1.json
@@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250519",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://netapp.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ActiveDirectory": {
@@ -2628,19 +2628,19 @@
 "type": "integer"
 },
 "dailyBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "manualBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "monthlyBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "weeklyBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 }
 },
@@ -3348,6 +3348,11 @@
 "description": "Metadata for a given google.cloud.location.Location.",
 "id": "LocationMetadata",
 "properties": {
+"hasVcp": {
+"description": "Output only. Indicates if the location has VCP support.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "boolean"
+},
 "supportedFlexPerformance": {
 "description": "Output only. Supported flex performance in a location.",
 "items": {
@@ -4146,12 +4151,12 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "totalIops": {
-"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps",
+"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "totalThroughputMibps": {
-"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)",
+"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 },
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json
index 1cb641b882..b9a793d88f 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/netapp.v1beta1.json
@@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250519",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://netapp.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ActiveDirectory": {
@@ -2628,19 +2628,19 @@
 "type": "integer"
 },
 "dailyBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the daily backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "manualBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the manual backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "monthlyBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the monthly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "weeklyBackupImmutable": {
-"description": "Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. Atleast one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
+"description": "Optional. Indicates if the weekly backups are immutable. At least one of daily_backup_immutable, weekly_backup_immutable, monthly_backup_immutable and manual_backup_immutable must be true.",
 "type": "boolean"
 }
 },
@@ -3387,6 +3387,11 @@
 "description": "Metadata for a given google.cloud.location.Location.",
 "id": "LocationMetadata",
 "properties": {
+"hasVcp": {
+"description": "Output only. Indicates if the location has VCP support.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "boolean"
+},
 "supportedFlexPerformance": {
 "description": "Output only. Supported flex performance in a location.",
 "items": {
@@ -4209,12 +4214,12 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "totalIops": {
-"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool If not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps",
+"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total IOPS of the pool if not provided, it will be calculated based on the total_throughput_mibps",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "totalThroughputMibps": {
-"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiB/s)",
+"description": "Optional. Custom Performance Total Throughput of the pool (in MiBps)",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 },

From 21c1ec6d441f31f5d8b1b7bc59321855c69ed6ed Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 24/32] feat(networksecurity): update the api

#### networksecurity:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleFromRequestSource.properties.ipBlocks (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock (Total Keys: 5)

#### networksecurity:v1beta1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleFromRequestSource.properties.ipBlocks (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock (Total Keys: 5)
---
 ...y_v1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html | 48 +++++++++++++++++++
 ...eta1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html | 48 +++++++++++++++++++
 ..._v1beta1.projects.locations.sacRealms.html |  6 +--
 .../documents/networksecurity.v1.json         | 25 +++++++++-
 .../documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json    | 27 ++++++++++-
 5 files changed, 148 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html
index 2872acdeda..697291cf34 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html
@@ -137,6 +137,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
         "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -157,6 +163,12 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -371,6 +383,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
         "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -391,6 +409,12 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -593,6 +617,12 @@ 
Method Details

           "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
             "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
               { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+                "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+                  { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                    "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                    "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+                  },
+                ],
                 "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
                   { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                     "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -613,6 +643,12 @@ 
Method Details

             ],
             "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
               { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+                "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+                  { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                    "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                    "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+                  },
+                ],
                 "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
                   { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                     "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -776,6 +812,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
         "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -796,6 +838,12 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html
index ae36276a93..8e91556789 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.authzPolicies.html
@@ -137,6 +137,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
         "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -157,6 +163,12 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -371,6 +383,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
         "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -391,6 +409,12 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -593,6 +617,12 @@ 
Method Details

           "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
             "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
               { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+                "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+                  { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                    "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                    "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+                  },
+                ],
                 "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
                   { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                     "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -613,6 +643,12 @@ 
Method Details

             ],
             "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
               { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+                "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+                  { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                    "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                    "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+                  },
+                ],
                 "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
                   { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                     "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -776,6 +812,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "from": { # Describes properties of one or more sources of a request. # Optional. Describes properties of a source of a request.
         "notSources": [ # Optional. Describes the negated properties of request sources. Matches requests from sources that do not match the criteria specified in this field. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
@@ -796,6 +838,12 @@ 
Method Details

         ],
         "sources": [ # Optional. Describes the properties of a request's sources. At least one of sources or notSources must be specified. Limited to 1 source. A match occurs when ANY source (in sources or notSources) matches the request. Within a single source, the match follows AND semantics across fields and OR semantics within a single field, i.e. a match occurs when ANY principal matches AND ANY ipBlocks match.
           { # Describes the properties of a single source.
+            "ipBlocks": [ # Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.
+              { # Represents a range of IP Addresses.
+                "length": 42, # Required. The length of the address range.
+                "prefix": "A String", # Required. The address prefix.
+              },
+            ],
             "resources": [ # Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.
               { # Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.
                 "iamServiceAccount": { # Determines how a string value should be matched. # Optional. An IAM service account to match against the source service account of the VM sending the request.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.sacRealms.html b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.sacRealms.html
index 6f0f33f7e6..06b318bd22 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.sacRealms.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/networksecurity_v1beta1.projects.locations.sacRealms.html
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "availableSymantecSites": [ # Output only. Symantec site IDs that the user can choose to connect to.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "secretPath": "A String", # Optional. A secret ID or secret name can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of "projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret".
+    "secretPath": "A String", # Optional. API Key used to call Symantec APIs on the user's behalf. Required if using SYMANTEC_CLOUD_SWG. P4SA account needs permissions granted to read this secret. A secret ID, secret name, or secret URI can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of "projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret".
     "symantecConnectionState": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Connection status to Symantec API.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update time stamp
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "availableSymantecSites": [ # Output only. Symantec site IDs that the user can choose to connect to.
       "A String",
     ],
-    "secretPath": "A String", # Optional. A secret ID or secret name can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of "projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret".
+    "secretPath": "A String", # Optional. API Key used to call Symantec APIs on the user's behalf. Required if using SYMANTEC_CLOUD_SWG. P4SA account needs permissions granted to read this secret. A secret ID, secret name, or secret URI can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of "projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret".
     "symantecConnectionState": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Connection status to Symantec API.
   },
   "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update time stamp
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "availableSymantecSites": [ # Output only. Symantec site IDs that the user can choose to connect to.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "secretPath": "A String", # Optional. A secret ID or secret name can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of "projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret".
+        "secretPath": "A String", # Optional. API Key used to call Symantec APIs on the user's behalf. Required if using SYMANTEC_CLOUD_SWG. P4SA account needs permissions granted to read this secret. A secret ID, secret name, or secret URI can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of "projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret".
         "symantecConnectionState": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Connection status to Symantec API.
       },
       "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. [Output only] Update time stamp
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json
index 8c4b4fd940..5ca28d2f39 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1.json
@@ -4908,7 +4908,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250514",
+"revision": "20250527",
 "rootUrl": "https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest": {
@@ -5224,6 +5224,13 @@
 "description": "Describes the properties of a single source.",
 "id": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleFromRequestSource",
 "properties": {
+"ipBlocks": {
+"description": "Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
 "resources": {
 "description": "Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.",
 "items": {
@@ -5249,6 +5256,22 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock": {
+"description": "Represents a range of IP Addresses.",
+"id": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock",
+"properties": {
+"length": {
+"description": "Required. The length of the address range.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"prefix": {
+"description": "Required. The address prefix.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleRequestResource": {
 "description": "Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.",
 "id": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleRequestResource",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json
index 4dd810feee..e7a57f7942 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/networksecurity.v1beta1.json
@@ -5356,7 +5356,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250514",
+"revision": "20250527",
 "rootUrl": "https://networksecurity.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AddAddressGroupItemsRequest": {
@@ -5672,6 +5672,13 @@
 "description": "Describes the properties of a single source.",
 "id": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleFromRequestSource",
 "properties": {
+"ipBlocks": {
+"description": "Optional. A list of IPs or CIDRs to match against the source IP of a request. Limited to 5 ip_blocks.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
 "resources": {
 "description": "Optional. A list of resources to match against the resource of the source VM of a request. Limited to 5 resources.",
 "items": {
@@ -5697,6 +5704,22 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock": {
+"description": "Represents a range of IP Addresses.",
+"id": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleIpBlock",
+"properties": {
+"length": {
+"description": "Required. The length of the address range.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"prefix": {
+"description": "Required. The address prefix.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleRequestResource": {
 "description": "Describes the properties of a client VM resource accessing the internal application load balancers.",
 "id": "AuthzPolicyAuthzRuleRequestResource",
@@ -8493,7 +8516,7 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "secretPath": {
-"description": "Optional. A secret ID or secret name can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of \"projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret\".",
+"description": "Optional. API Key used to call Symantec APIs on the user's behalf. Required if using SYMANTEC_CLOUD_SWG. P4SA account needs permissions granted to read this secret. A secret ID, secret name, or secret URI can be specified, but it will be parsed and stored as secret URI in the format of \"projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}/secrets/my-secret\".",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "symantecConnectionState": {

From cf940890feeb088d11c31574171d07505308a7f8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 25/32] feat(playintegrity): update the api

#### playintegrity:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.AccountActivity.deprecated (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.AccountDetails.properties.accountActivity.deprecated (Total Keys: 1)
---
 .../discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json           | 4 +++-
 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json
index 9ee45d1d1b..4b817a6c08 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/playintegrity.v1.json
@@ -198,10 +198,11 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250514",
+"revision": "20250602",
 "rootUrl": "https://playintegrity.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AccountActivity": {
+"deprecated": true,
 "description": "(Restricted Access) Contains a signal helping apps differentiating between likely genuine and likely non-genuine user traffic.",
 "id": "AccountActivity",
 "properties": {
@@ -234,6 +235,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "accountActivity": {
 "$ref": "AccountActivity",
+"deprecated": true,
 "description": "(Restricted Access) Details about the account activity for the user in the scope."
 },
 "appLicensingVerdict": {

From f2563e3a1e086f895537e06081edca78b3076993 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 26/32] feat(policysimulator): update the api

#### policysimulator:v1

The following keys were added:
- resources.organizations.resources.locations.resources.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.methods.create (Total Keys: 14)
- resources.organizations.resources.locations.resources.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.methods.get (Total Keys: 11)
- resources.organizations.resources.locations.resources.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.methods.list (Total Keys: 16)
- resources.organizations.resources.locations.resources.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.resources.orgPolicyViolations.methods.list (Total Keys: 16)
- schemas.GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2AlternatePolicySpec (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2CustomConstraint (Total Keys: 13)
- schemas.GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2Policy (Total Keys: 31)
- schemas.GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviewsResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlay (Total Keys: 14)
- schemas.GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolation (Total Keys: 41)
- schemas.GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ResourceContext (Total Keys: 6)
---
 ...locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.html | 527 ++++++++++++++++
 ...iolationsPreviews.orgPolicyViolations.html |   6 +-
 .../documents/policysimulator.v1.json         | 571 +++++++++++++++++-
 3 files changed, 1100 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.html b/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.html
index 18aa529af0..bd72bf5c2b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.html
@@ -79,13 +79,540 @@ 
Instance Methods

 

 
Returns the operations Resource.

 
+

+  orgPolicyViolations()
+

+
Returns the orgPolicyViolations Resource.

+
 

   close()

 
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, orgPolicyViolationsPreviewId=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
CreateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview creates an OrgPolicyViolationsPreview for the proposed changes in the provided OrgPolicyViolationsPreview.OrgPolicyOverlay. The changes to OrgPolicy are specified by this `OrgPolicyOverlay`. The resources to scan are inferred from these specified changes.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
GetOrgPolicyViolationsPreview gets the specified OrgPolicyViolationsPreview. Each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is available for at least 7 days.

+

+  list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviews lists each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview in an organization. Each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is available for at least 7 days.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
   
Close httplib2 connections.

 

 
+

+    create(parent, body=None, orgPolicyViolationsPreviewId=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
CreateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview creates an OrgPolicyViolationsPreview for the proposed changes in the provided OrgPolicyViolationsPreview.OrgPolicyOverlay. The changes to OrgPolicy are specified by this `OrgPolicyOverlay`. The resources to scan are inferred from these specified changes.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The organization under which this OrgPolicyViolationsPreview will be created. Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is a resource providing a preview of the violations that will exist if an OrgPolicy change is made. The list of violations are modeled as child resources and retrieved via a ListOrgPolicyViolations API call. There are potentially more OrgPolicyViolations than could fit in an embedded field. Thus, the use of a child resource instead of a field.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview` was created.
+  "customConstraints": [ # Output only. The names of the constraints against which all `OrgPolicyViolations` were evaluated. If `OrgPolicyOverlay` only contains `PolicyOverlay` then it contains the name of the configured custom constraint, applicable to the specified policies. Otherwise it contains the name of the constraint specified in `CustomConstraintOverlay`. Format: `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms`
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. It has the following format: `organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreview}` Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/506a5f7f`
+  "overlay": { # The proposed changes to OrgPolicy. # Required. The proposed changes we are previewing violations for.
+    "customConstraints": [ # Optional. The OrgPolicy CustomConstraint changes to preview violations for. Any existing CustomConstraints with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all custom constraints in the overlay were instantiated. Only a single custom_constraint is supported in the overlay at a time. For evaluating multiple constraints, multiple `GenerateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview` requests are made, where each request evaluates a single constraint.
+      { # A change to an OrgPolicy custom constraint.
+        "customConstraint": { # A custom constraint defined by customers which can *only* be applied to the given resource types and organization. By creating a custom constraint, customers can apply policies of this custom constraint. *Creating a custom constraint itself does NOT apply any policy enforcement*. # Optional. The new or updated custom constraint.
+          "actionType": "A String", # Allow or deny type.
+          "condition": "A String", # A Common Expression Language (CEL) condition which is used in the evaluation of the constraint. For example: `resource.instanceName.matches("[production|test]_.*_(\d)+")` or, `resource.management.auto_upgrade == true` The max length of the condition is 1000 characters.
+          "description": "A String", # Detailed information about this custom policy constraint. The max length of the description is 2000 characters.
+          "displayName": "A String", # One line display name for the UI. The max length of the display_name is 200 characters.
+          "methodTypes": [ # All the operations being applied for this constraint.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "name": "A String", # Immutable. Name of the constraint. This is unique within the organization. Format of the name should be * `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms` The max length is 70 characters and the minimum length is 1. Note that the prefix `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/` is not counted.
+          "resourceTypes": [ # Immutable. The resource instance type on which this policy applies. Format will be of the form : `/` Example: * `compute.googleapis.com/Instance`.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time this custom constraint was updated. This represents the last time that the `CreateCustomConstraint` or `UpdateCustomConstraint` methods were called.
+        },
+        "customConstraintParent": "A String", # Optional. Resource the constraint is attached to. Example: "organization/987654"
+      },
+    ],
+    "policies": [ # Optional. The OrgPolicy changes to preview violations for. Any existing OrgPolicies with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all policies in the overlay were created or updated.
+      { # A change to an OrgPolicy.
+        "policy": { # Defines an organization policy which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Optional. The new or updated OrgPolicy.
+          "alternate": { # Similar to PolicySpec but with an extra 'launch' field for launch reference. The PolicySpec here is specific for dry-run. # Deprecated.
+            "launch": "A String", # Reference to the launch that will be used while audit logging and to control the launch. Should be set only in the alternate policy.
+            "spec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Specify constraint for configurations of Google Cloud resources.
+              "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+              "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+              "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+              "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+                { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                  "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                    "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                    "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                    "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                    "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                  },
+                  "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                  "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                    "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+            },
+          },
+          "dryRunSpec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Dry-run policy. Audit-only policy, can be used to monitor how the policy would have impacted the existing and future resources if it's enforced.
+            "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+            "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+            "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+            "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+              { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                  "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                  "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                },
+                "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                  "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                },
+                "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+          },
+          "etag": "A String", # Optional. An opaque tag indicating the current state of the policy, used for concurrency control. This 'etag' is computed by the server based on the value of other fields, and may be sent on update and delete requests to ensure the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.
+          "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the policy. Must be one of the following forms, where `constraint_name` is the name of the constraint which this policy configures: * `projects/{project_number}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `folders/{folder_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `organizations/{organization_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` For example, `projects/123/policies/compute.disableSerialPortAccess`. Note: `projects/{project_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` is also an acceptable name for API requests, but responses will return the name using the equivalent project number.
+          "spec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Basic information about the organization policy.
+            "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+            "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+            "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+            "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+              { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                  "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                  "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                },
+                "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                  "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                },
+                "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+          },
+        },
+        "policyParent": "A String", # Optional. The parent of the policy we are attaching to. Example: "projects/123456"
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "resourceCounts": { # A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy. # Output only. A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy.
+    "compliant": 42, # Output only. Number of scanned resources with zero violations.
+    "errors": 42, # Output only. Number of resources that returned an error when scanned.
+    "noncompliant": 42, # Output only. Number of scanned resources with at least one violation.
+    "scanned": 42, # Output only. Number of resources checked for compliance. Must equal: unenforced + noncompliant + compliant + error
+    "unenforced": 42, # Output only. Number of resources where the constraint was not enforced, i.e. the Policy set `enforced: false` for that resource.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`.
+  "violationsCount": 42, # Output only. The number of OrgPolicyViolations in this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. This count may differ from `resource_summary.noncompliant_count` because each OrgPolicyViolation is specific to a resource **and** constraint. If there are multiple constraints being evaluated (i.e. multiple policies in the overlay), a single resource may violate multiple constraints.
+}
+
+  orgPolicyViolationsPreviewId: string, Optional. An optional user-specified ID for the OrgPolicyViolationsPreview. If not provided, a random ID will be generated.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  "done": True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    "details": [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    "message": "A String", # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  "response": { # The normal, successful response of the operation. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
GetOrgPolicyViolationsPreview gets the specified OrgPolicyViolationsPreview. Each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is available for at least 7 days.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The name of the OrgPolicyViolationsPreview to get. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is a resource providing a preview of the violations that will exist if an OrgPolicy change is made. The list of violations are modeled as child resources and retrieved via a ListOrgPolicyViolations API call. There are potentially more OrgPolicyViolations than could fit in an embedded field. Thus, the use of a child resource instead of a field.
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview` was created.
+  "customConstraints": [ # Output only. The names of the constraints against which all `OrgPolicyViolations` were evaluated. If `OrgPolicyOverlay` only contains `PolicyOverlay` then it contains the name of the configured custom constraint, applicable to the specified policies. Otherwise it contains the name of the constraint specified in `CustomConstraintOverlay`. Format: `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms`
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. It has the following format: `organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreview}` Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/506a5f7f`
+  "overlay": { # The proposed changes to OrgPolicy. # Required. The proposed changes we are previewing violations for.
+    "customConstraints": [ # Optional. The OrgPolicy CustomConstraint changes to preview violations for. Any existing CustomConstraints with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all custom constraints in the overlay were instantiated. Only a single custom_constraint is supported in the overlay at a time. For evaluating multiple constraints, multiple `GenerateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview` requests are made, where each request evaluates a single constraint.
+      { # A change to an OrgPolicy custom constraint.
+        "customConstraint": { # A custom constraint defined by customers which can *only* be applied to the given resource types and organization. By creating a custom constraint, customers can apply policies of this custom constraint. *Creating a custom constraint itself does NOT apply any policy enforcement*. # Optional. The new or updated custom constraint.
+          "actionType": "A String", # Allow or deny type.
+          "condition": "A String", # A Common Expression Language (CEL) condition which is used in the evaluation of the constraint. For example: `resource.instanceName.matches("[production|test]_.*_(\d)+")` or, `resource.management.auto_upgrade == true` The max length of the condition is 1000 characters.
+          "description": "A String", # Detailed information about this custom policy constraint. The max length of the description is 2000 characters.
+          "displayName": "A String", # One line display name for the UI. The max length of the display_name is 200 characters.
+          "methodTypes": [ # All the operations being applied for this constraint.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "name": "A String", # Immutable. Name of the constraint. This is unique within the organization. Format of the name should be * `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms` The max length is 70 characters and the minimum length is 1. Note that the prefix `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/` is not counted.
+          "resourceTypes": [ # Immutable. The resource instance type on which this policy applies. Format will be of the form : `/` Example: * `compute.googleapis.com/Instance`.
+            "A String",
+          ],
+          "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time this custom constraint was updated. This represents the last time that the `CreateCustomConstraint` or `UpdateCustomConstraint` methods were called.
+        },
+        "customConstraintParent": "A String", # Optional. Resource the constraint is attached to. Example: "organization/987654"
+      },
+    ],
+    "policies": [ # Optional. The OrgPolicy changes to preview violations for. Any existing OrgPolicies with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all policies in the overlay were created or updated.
+      { # A change to an OrgPolicy.
+        "policy": { # Defines an organization policy which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Optional. The new or updated OrgPolicy.
+          "alternate": { # Similar to PolicySpec but with an extra 'launch' field for launch reference. The PolicySpec here is specific for dry-run. # Deprecated.
+            "launch": "A String", # Reference to the launch that will be used while audit logging and to control the launch. Should be set only in the alternate policy.
+            "spec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Specify constraint for configurations of Google Cloud resources.
+              "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+              "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+              "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+              "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+                { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                  "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                    "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                    "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                    "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                    "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                  },
+                  "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                  "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                  },
+                  "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                    "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                    "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                      "A String",
+                    ],
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+              "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+            },
+          },
+          "dryRunSpec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Dry-run policy. Audit-only policy, can be used to monitor how the policy would have impacted the existing and future resources if it's enforced.
+            "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+            "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+            "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+            "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+              { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                  "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                  "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                },
+                "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                  "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                },
+                "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+          },
+          "etag": "A String", # Optional. An opaque tag indicating the current state of the policy, used for concurrency control. This 'etag' is computed by the server based on the value of other fields, and may be sent on update and delete requests to ensure the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.
+          "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the policy. Must be one of the following forms, where `constraint_name` is the name of the constraint which this policy configures: * `projects/{project_number}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `folders/{folder_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `organizations/{organization_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` For example, `projects/123/policies/compute.disableSerialPortAccess`. Note: `projects/{project_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` is also an acceptable name for API requests, but responses will return the name using the equivalent project number.
+          "spec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Basic information about the organization policy.
+            "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+            "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+            "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+            "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+              { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                  "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                  "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                  "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                  "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                },
+                "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                  "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                },
+                "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                  "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                  "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                    "A String",
+                  ],
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+          },
+        },
+        "policyParent": "A String", # Optional. The parent of the policy we are attaching to. Example: "projects/123456"
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "resourceCounts": { # A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy. # Output only. A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy.
+    "compliant": 42, # Output only. Number of scanned resources with zero violations.
+    "errors": 42, # Output only. Number of resources that returned an error when scanned.
+    "noncompliant": 42, # Output only. Number of scanned resources with at least one violation.
+    "scanned": 42, # Output only. Number of resources checked for compliance. Must equal: unenforced + noncompliant + compliant + error
+    "unenforced": 42, # Output only. Number of resources where the constraint was not enforced, i.e. the Policy set `enforced: false` for that resource.
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`.
+  "violationsCount": 42, # Output only. The number of OrgPolicyViolations in this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. This count may differ from `resource_summary.noncompliant_count` because each OrgPolicyViolation is specific to a resource **and** constraint. If there are multiple constraints being evaluated (i.e. multiple policies in the overlay), a single resource may violate multiple constraints.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviews lists each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview in an organization. Each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is available for at least 7 days.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent the violations are scoped to. Format: `organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}` Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global` (required)
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 5 items will be returned. The maximum value is 10; values above 10 will be coerced to 10.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviewsResponse is the response message for OrgPolicyViolationsPreviewService.ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviews.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # A token that you can use to retrieve the next page of results. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+  "orgPolicyViolationsPreviews": [ # The list of OrgPolicyViolationsPreview
+    { # OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is a resource providing a preview of the violations that will exist if an OrgPolicy change is made. The list of violations are modeled as child resources and retrieved via a ListOrgPolicyViolations API call. There are potentially more OrgPolicyViolations than could fit in an embedded field. Thus, the use of a child resource instead of a field.
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. Time when this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview` was created.
+      "customConstraints": [ # Output only. The names of the constraints against which all `OrgPolicyViolations` were evaluated. If `OrgPolicyOverlay` only contains `PolicyOverlay` then it contains the name of the configured custom constraint, applicable to the specified policies. Otherwise it contains the name of the constraint specified in `CustomConstraintOverlay`. Format: `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms`
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Output only. The resource name of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. It has the following format: `organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreview}` Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/506a5f7f`
+      "overlay": { # The proposed changes to OrgPolicy. # Required. The proposed changes we are previewing violations for.
+        "customConstraints": [ # Optional. The OrgPolicy CustomConstraint changes to preview violations for. Any existing CustomConstraints with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all custom constraints in the overlay were instantiated. Only a single custom_constraint is supported in the overlay at a time. For evaluating multiple constraints, multiple `GenerateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview` requests are made, where each request evaluates a single constraint.
+          { # A change to an OrgPolicy custom constraint.
+            "customConstraint": { # A custom constraint defined by customers which can *only* be applied to the given resource types and organization. By creating a custom constraint, customers can apply policies of this custom constraint. *Creating a custom constraint itself does NOT apply any policy enforcement*. # Optional. The new or updated custom constraint.
+              "actionType": "A String", # Allow or deny type.
+              "condition": "A String", # A Common Expression Language (CEL) condition which is used in the evaluation of the constraint. For example: `resource.instanceName.matches("[production|test]_.*_(\d)+")` or, `resource.management.auto_upgrade == true` The max length of the condition is 1000 characters.
+              "description": "A String", # Detailed information about this custom policy constraint. The max length of the description is 2000 characters.
+              "displayName": "A String", # One line display name for the UI. The max length of the display_name is 200 characters.
+              "methodTypes": [ # All the operations being applied for this constraint.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "name": "A String", # Immutable. Name of the constraint. This is unique within the organization. Format of the name should be * `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms` The max length is 70 characters and the minimum length is 1. Note that the prefix `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/` is not counted.
+              "resourceTypes": [ # Immutable. The resource instance type on which this policy applies. Format will be of the form : `/` Example: * `compute.googleapis.com/Instance`.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time this custom constraint was updated. This represents the last time that the `CreateCustomConstraint` or `UpdateCustomConstraint` methods were called.
+            },
+            "customConstraintParent": "A String", # Optional. Resource the constraint is attached to. Example: "organization/987654"
+          },
+        ],
+        "policies": [ # Optional. The OrgPolicy changes to preview violations for. Any existing OrgPolicies with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all policies in the overlay were created or updated.
+          { # A change to an OrgPolicy.
+            "policy": { # Defines an organization policy which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Optional. The new or updated OrgPolicy.
+              "alternate": { # Similar to PolicySpec but with an extra 'launch' field for launch reference. The PolicySpec here is specific for dry-run. # Deprecated.
+                "launch": "A String", # Reference to the launch that will be used while audit logging and to control the launch. Should be set only in the alternate policy.
+                "spec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Specify constraint for configurations of Google Cloud resources.
+                  "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+                  "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+                  "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+                  "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+                    { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                      "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                      "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                        "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                        "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                        "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                        "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                      },
+                      "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                      "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                      "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                      },
+                      "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                        "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                        "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                          "A String",
+                        ],
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+                },
+              },
+              "dryRunSpec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Dry-run policy. Audit-only policy, can be used to monitor how the policy would have impacted the existing and future resources if it's enforced.
+                "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+                "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+                "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+                "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+                  { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                    "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                    "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                      "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                      "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                      "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                      "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                    },
+                    "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                    "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                    "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                    "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                      "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  },
+                ],
+                "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+              },
+              "etag": "A String", # Optional. An opaque tag indicating the current state of the policy, used for concurrency control. This 'etag' is computed by the server based on the value of other fields, and may be sent on update and delete requests to ensure the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.
+              "name": "A String", # Immutable. The resource name of the policy. Must be one of the following forms, where `constraint_name` is the name of the constraint which this policy configures: * `projects/{project_number}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `folders/{folder_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `organizations/{organization_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` For example, `projects/123/policies/compute.disableSerialPortAccess`. Note: `projects/{project_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` is also an acceptable name for API requests, but responses will return the name using the equivalent project number.
+              "spec": { # Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources. # Basic information about the organization policy.
+                "etag": "A String", # An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.
+                "inheritFromParent": True or False, # Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.
+                "reset": True or False, # Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.
+                "rules": [ # In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.
+                  { # A rule used to express this policy.
+                    "allowAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                    "condition": { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: "Summary size limit" description: "Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars" expression: "document.summary.size() < 100" Example (Equality): title: "Requestor is owner" description: "Determines if requestor is the document owner" expression: "document.owner == request.auth.claims.email" Example (Logic): title: "Public documents" description: "Determine whether the document should be publicly visible" expression: "document.type != 'private' && document.type != 'internal'" Example (Data Manipulation): title: "Notification string" description: "Create a notification string with a timestamp." expression: "'New message received at ' + string(document.create_time)" The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the "||" or "&&" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form "resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: "resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')". or "resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')".
+                      "description": "A String", # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+                      "expression": "A String", # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+                      "location": "A String", # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+                      "title": "A String", # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+                    },
+                    "denyAll": True or False, # Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                    "enforce": True or False, # If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.
+                    "parameters": { # Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { "allowedLocations" : ["us-east1", "us-west1"], "allowAll" : true }
+                      "a_key": "", # Properties of the object.
+                    },
+                    "values": { # A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a ":". Values prefixed with "is:" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used. # List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.
+                      "allowedValues": [ # List of values allowed at this resource.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                      "deniedValues": [ # List of values denied at this resource.
+                        "A String",
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  },
+                ],
+                "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.
+              },
+            },
+            "policyParent": "A String", # Optional. The parent of the policy we are attaching to. Example: "projects/123456"
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+      "resourceCounts": { # A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy. # Output only. A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy.
+        "compliant": 42, # Output only. Number of scanned resources with zero violations.
+        "errors": 42, # Output only. Number of resources that returned an error when scanned.
+        "noncompliant": 42, # Output only. Number of scanned resources with at least one violation.
+        "scanned": 42, # Output only. Number of resources checked for compliance. Must equal: unenforced + noncompliant + compliant + error
+        "unenforced": 42, # Output only. Number of resources where the constraint was not enforced, i.e. the Policy set `enforced: false` for that resource.
+      },
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`.
+      "violationsCount": 42, # Output only. The number of OrgPolicyViolations in this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. This count may differ from `resource_summary.noncompliant_count` because each OrgPolicyViolation is specific to a resource **and** constraint. If there are multiple constraints being evaluated (i.e. multiple policies in the overlay), a single resource may violate multiple constraints.
+    },
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
 
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.orgPolicyViolations.html b/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.orgPolicyViolations.html
index cec9025457..51d1b459c0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.orgPolicyViolations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/policysimulator_v1.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.orgPolicyViolations.html
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The OrgPolicyViolationsPreview to get OrgPolicyViolations from. Format: organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreview} (required)
-  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 50 items will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 1000 items will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.
   pageToken: string, Optional. A page token, received from a previous call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters must match the call that provided the page token.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ 
Method Details

     { # OrgPolicyViolation is a resource representing a single resource violating a single OrgPolicy constraint.
       "customConstraint": { # A custom constraint defined by customers which can *only* be applied to the given resource types and organization. By creating a custom constraint, customers can apply policies of this custom constraint. *Creating a custom constraint itself does NOT apply any policy enforcement*. # The custom constraint being violated.
         "actionType": "A String", # Allow or deny type.
-        "condition": "A String", # Org policy condition/expression. For example: `resource.instanceName.matches("[production|test]_.*_(\d)+")` or, `resource.management.auto_upgrade == true` The max length of the condition is 1000 characters.
+        "condition": "A String", # A Common Expression Language (CEL) condition which is used in the evaluation of the constraint. For example: `resource.instanceName.matches("[production|test]_.*_(\d)+")` or, `resource.management.auto_upgrade == true` The max length of the condition is 1000 characters.
         "description": "A String", # Detailed information about this custom policy constraint. The max length of the description is 2000 characters.
         "displayName": "A String", # One line display name for the UI. The max length of the display_name is 200 characters.
         "methodTypes": [ # All the operations being applied for this constraint.
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "resourceTypes": [ # Immutable. The resource instance type on which this policy applies. Format will be of the form : `/` Example: * `compute.googleapis.com/Instance`.
           "A String",
         ],
-        "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time this custom constraint was updated. This represents the last time that the `CreateCustomConstraint` or `UpdateCustomConstraint` RPC was called
+        "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The last time this custom constraint was updated. This represents the last time that the `CreateCustomConstraint` or `UpdateCustomConstraint` methods were called.
       },
       "error": { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # Any error encountered during the evaluation.
         "code": 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json
index 4323c29883..3b351e2301 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/policysimulator.v1.json
@@ -390,6 +390,102 @@
 "locations": {
 "resources": {
 "orgPolicyViolationsPreviews": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "CreateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview creates an OrgPolicyViolationsPreview for the proposed changes in the provided OrgPolicyViolationsPreview.OrgPolicyOverlay. The changes to OrgPolicy are specified by this `OrgPolicyOverlay`. The resources to scan are inferred from these specified changes.",
+"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "policysimulator.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"orgPolicyViolationsPreviewId": {
+"description": "Optional. An optional user-specified ID for the OrgPolicyViolationsPreview. If not provided, a random ID will be generated.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The organization under which this OrgPolicyViolationsPreview will be created. Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1/{+parent}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreview"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleLongrunningOperation"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "GetOrgPolicyViolationsPreview gets the specified OrgPolicyViolationsPreview. Each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is available for at least 7 days.",
+"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreviewsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "policysimulator.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The name of the OrgPolicyViolationsPreview to get.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreview"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviews lists each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview in an organization. Each OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is available for at least 7 days.",
+"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "policysimulator.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 5 items will be returned. The maximum value is 10; values above 10 will be coerced to 10.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters must match the call that provided the page token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent the violations are scoped to. Format: `organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}` Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global`",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1/{+parent}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviewsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+},
 "resources": {
 "operations": {
 "methods": {
@@ -419,6 +515,46 @@
 ]
 }
 }
+},
+"orgPolicyViolations": {
+"methods": {
+"list": {
+"description": "ListOrgPolicyViolations lists the OrgPolicyViolations that are present in an OrgPolicyViolationsPreview.",
+"flatPath": "v1/organizations/{organizationsId}/locations/{locationsId}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreviewsId}/orgPolicyViolations",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "policysimulator.organizations.locations.orgPolicyViolationsPreviews.orgPolicyViolations.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of items to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 1000 items will be returned. The maximum value is 1000; values above 1000 will be coerced to 1000.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "Optional. A page token, received from a previous call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters must match the call that provided the page token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The OrgPolicyViolationsPreview to get OrgPolicyViolations from. Format: organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreview}",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^organizations/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1/{+parent}/orgPolicyViolations",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
 }
 }
 },
@@ -806,9 +942,213 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250323",
+"revision": "20250601",
 "rootUrl": "https://policysimulator.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
+"GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2AlternatePolicySpec": {
+"description": "Similar to PolicySpec but with an extra 'launch' field for launch reference. The PolicySpec here is specific for dry-run.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2AlternatePolicySpec",
+"properties": {
+"launch": {
+"description": "Reference to the launch that will be used while audit logging and to control the launch. Should be set only in the alternate policy.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"spec": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpec",
+"description": "Specify constraint for configurations of Google Cloud resources."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2CustomConstraint": {
+"description": "A custom constraint defined by customers which can *only* be applied to the given resource types and organization. By creating a custom constraint, customers can apply policies of this custom constraint. *Creating a custom constraint itself does NOT apply any policy enforcement*.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2CustomConstraint",
+"properties": {
+"actionType": {
+"description": "Allow or deny type.",
+"enum": [
+"ACTION_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ALLOW",
+"DENY"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"This is only used for distinguishing unset values and should never be used. Results in an error.",
+"Allowed action type.",
+"Deny action type."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"condition": {
+"description": "A Common Expression Language (CEL) condition which is used in the evaluation of the constraint. For example: `resource.instanceName.matches(\"[production|test]_.*_(\\d)+\")` or, `resource.management.auto_upgrade == true` The max length of the condition is 1000 characters.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": {
+"description": "Detailed information about this custom policy constraint. The max length of the description is 2000 characters.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"displayName": {
+"description": "One line display name for the UI. The max length of the display_name is 200 characters.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"methodTypes": {
+"description": "All the operations being applied for this constraint.",
+"items": {
+"enum": [
+"METHOD_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"CREATE",
+"UPDATE",
+"DELETE",
+"REMOVE_GRANT",
+"GOVERN_TAGS"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"This is only used for distinguishing unset values and should never be used. Results in an error.",
+"Constraint applied when creating the resource.",
+"Constraint applied when updating the resource.",
+"Constraint applied when deleting the resource. Not currently supported.",
+"Constraint applied when removing an IAM grant.",
+"Constraint applied when enforcing forced tagging."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Immutable. Name of the constraint. This is unique within the organization. Format of the name should be * `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms` The max length is 70 characters and the minimum length is 1. Note that the prefix `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/` is not counted.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"resourceTypes": {
+"description": "Immutable. The resource instance type on which this policy applies. Format will be of the form : `/` Example: * `compute.googleapis.com/Instance`.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The last time this custom constraint was updated. This represents the last time that the `CreateCustomConstraint` or `UpdateCustomConstraint` methods were called.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2Policy": {
+"description": "Defines an organization policy which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2Policy",
+"properties": {
+"alternate": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2AlternatePolicySpec",
+"deprecated": true,
+"description": "Deprecated."
+},
+"dryRunSpec": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpec",
+"description": "Dry-run policy. Audit-only policy, can be used to monitor how the policy would have impacted the existing and future resources if it's enforced."
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Optional. An opaque tag indicating the current state of the policy, used for concurrency control. This 'etag' is computed by the server based on the value of other fields, and may be sent on update and delete requests to ensure the client has an up-to-date value before proceeding.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Immutable. The resource name of the policy. Must be one of the following forms, where `constraint_name` is the name of the constraint which this policy configures: * `projects/{project_number}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `folders/{folder_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` * `organizations/{organization_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` For example, `projects/123/policies/compute.disableSerialPortAccess`. Note: `projects/{project_id}/policies/{constraint_name}` is also an acceptable name for API requests, but responses will return the name using the equivalent project number.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"spec": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpec",
+"description": "Basic information about the organization policy."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpec": {
+"description": "Defines a Google Cloud policy specification which is used to specify constraints for configurations of Google Cloud resources.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpec",
+"properties": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "An opaque tag indicating the current version of the policySpec, used for concurrency control. This field is ignored if used in a `CreatePolicy` request. When the policy is returned from either a `GetPolicy` or a `ListPolicies` request, this `etag` indicates the version of the current policySpec to use when executing a read-modify-write loop. When the policy is returned from a `GetEffectivePolicy` request, the `etag` will be unset.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"inheritFromParent": {
+"description": "Determines the inheritance behavior for this policy. If `inherit_from_parent` is true, policy rules set higher up in the hierarchy (up to the closest root) are inherited and present in the effective policy. If it is false, then no rules are inherited, and this policy becomes the new root for evaluation. This field can be set only for policies which configure list constraints.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"reset": {
+"description": "Ignores policies set above this resource and restores the `constraint_default` enforcement behavior of the specific constraint at this resource. This field can be set in policies for either list or boolean constraints. If set, `rules` must be empty and `inherit_from_parent` must be set to false.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"rules": {
+"description": "In policies for boolean constraints, the following requirements apply: - There must be one and only one policy rule where condition is unset. - Boolean policy rules with conditions must set `enforced` to the opposite of the policy rule without a condition. - During policy evaluation, policy rules with conditions that are true for a target resource take precedence.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpecPolicyRule"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The time stamp this was previously updated. This represents the last time a call to `CreatePolicy` or `UpdatePolicy` was made for that policy.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpecPolicyRule": {
+"description": "A rule used to express this policy.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpecPolicyRule",
+"properties": {
+"allowAll": {
+"description": "Setting this to true means that all values are allowed. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"condition": {
+"$ref": "GoogleTypeExpr",
+"description": "A condition which determines whether this rule is used in the evaluation of the policy. When set, the `expression` field in the `Expr' must include from 1 to 10 subexpressions, joined by the \"||\" or \"&&\" operators. Each subexpression must be of the form \"resource.matchTag('/tag_key_short_name, 'tag_value_short_name')\". or \"resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/key_id', 'tagValues/value_id')\". where key_name and value_name are the resource names for Label Keys and Values. These names are available from the Tag Manager Service. An example expression is: \"resource.matchTag('123456789/environment, 'prod')\". or \"resource.matchTagId('tagKeys/123', 'tagValues/456')\"."
+},
+"denyAll": {
+"description": "Setting this to true means that all values are denied. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"enforce": {
+"description": "If `true`, then the policy is enforced. If `false`, then any configuration is acceptable. This field can be set only in policies for boolean constraints.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"parameters": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"description": "Properties of the object.",
+"type": "any"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Required for managed constraints if parameters are defined. Passes parameter values when policy enforcement is enabled. Ensure that parameter value types match those defined in the constraint definition. For example: { \"allowedLocations\" : [\"us-east1\", \"us-west1\"], \"allowAll\" : true }",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"values": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpecPolicyRuleStringValues",
+"description": "List of values to be used for this policy rule. This field can be set only in policies for list constraints."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpecPolicyRuleStringValues": {
+"description": "A message that holds specific allowed and denied values. This message can define specific values and subtrees of the Resource Manager resource hierarchy (`Organizations`, `Folders`, `Projects`) that are allowed or denied. This is achieved by using the `under:` and optional `is:` prefixes. The `under:` prefix is used to denote resource subtree values. The `is:` prefix is used to denote specific values, and is required only if the value contains a \":\". Values prefixed with \"is:\" are treated the same as values with no prefix. Ancestry subtrees must be in one of the following formats: - `projects/` (for example, `projects/tokyo-rain-123`) - `folders/` (for example, `folders/1234`) - `organizations/` (for example, `organizations/1234`) The `supports_under` field of the associated `Constraint` defines whether ancestry prefixes can be used.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2PolicySpecPolicyRuleStringValues",
+"properties": {
+"allowedValues": {
+"description": "List of values allowed at this resource.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"deniedValues": {
+"description": "List of values denied at this resource.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1AccessStateDiff": {
 "description": "A summary and comparison of the principal's access under the current (baseline) policies and the proposed (simulated) policies for a single access tuple.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1AccessStateDiff",
@@ -1081,6 +1421,42 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviewsResponse": {
+"description": "ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviewsResponse is the response message for OrgPolicyViolationsPreviewService.ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviews.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsPreviewsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "A token that you can use to retrieve the next page of results. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orgPolicyViolationsPreviews": {
+"description": "The list of OrgPolicyViolationsPreview",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreview"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsResponse": {
+"description": "ListOrgPolicyViolationsResponse is the response message for OrgPolicyViolationsPreviewService.ListOrgPolicyViolations",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListOrgPolicyViolationsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "A token that you can use to retrieve the next page of results. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orgPolicyViolations": {
+"description": "The list of OrgPolicyViolations",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolation"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListReplayResultsResponse": {
 "description": "Response message for Simulator.ListReplayResults.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ListReplayResultsResponse",
@@ -1099,6 +1475,177 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlay": {
+"description": "The proposed changes to OrgPolicy.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlay",
+"properties": {
+"customConstraints": {
+"description": "Optional. The OrgPolicy CustomConstraint changes to preview violations for. Any existing CustomConstraints with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all custom constraints in the overlay were instantiated. Only a single custom_constraint is supported in the overlay at a time. For evaluating multiple constraints, multiple `GenerateOrgPolicyViolationsPreview` requests are made, where each request evaluates a single constraint.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlayCustomConstraintOverlay"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"policies": {
+"description": "Optional. The OrgPolicy changes to preview violations for. Any existing OrgPolicies with the same name will be overridden in the simulation. That is, violations will be determined as if all policies in the overlay were created or updated.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlayPolicyOverlay"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlayCustomConstraintOverlay": {
+"description": "A change to an OrgPolicy custom constraint.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlayCustomConstraintOverlay",
+"properties": {
+"customConstraint": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2CustomConstraint",
+"description": "Optional. The new or updated custom constraint."
+},
+"customConstraintParent": {
+"description": "Optional. Resource the constraint is attached to. Example: \"organization/987654\"",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlayPolicyOverlay": {
+"description": "A change to an OrgPolicy.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlayPolicyOverlay",
+"properties": {
+"policy": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2Policy",
+"description": "Optional. The new or updated OrgPolicy."
+},
+"policyParent": {
+"description": "Optional. The parent of the policy we are attaching to. Example: \"projects/123456\"",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolation": {
+"description": "OrgPolicyViolation is a resource representing a single resource violating a single OrgPolicy constraint.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolation",
+"properties": {
+"customConstraint": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudOrgpolicyV2CustomConstraint",
+"description": "The custom constraint being violated."
+},
+"error": {
+"$ref": "GoogleRpcStatus",
+"description": "Any error encountered during the evaluation."
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "The name of the `OrgPolicyViolation`. Example: organizations/my-example-org/locations/global/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/506a5f7f/orgPolicyViolations/38ce`",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"resource": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ResourceContext",
+"description": "The resource violating the constraint."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreview": {
+"description": "OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is a resource providing a preview of the violations that will exist if an OrgPolicy change is made. The list of violations are modeled as child resources and retrieved via a ListOrgPolicyViolations API call. There are potentially more OrgPolicyViolations than could fit in an embedded field. Thus, the use of a child resource instead of a field.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreview",
+"properties": {
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. Time when this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview` was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"customConstraints": {
+"description": "Output only. The names of the constraints against which all `OrgPolicyViolations` were evaluated. If `OrgPolicyOverlay` only contains `PolicyOverlay` then it contains the name of the configured custom constraint, applicable to the specified policies. Otherwise it contains the name of the constraint specified in `CustomConstraintOverlay`. Format: `organizations/{organization_id}/customConstraints/{custom_constraint_id}` Example: `organizations/123/customConstraints/custom.createOnlyE2TypeVms`",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Output only. The resource name of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. It has the following format: `organizations/{organization}/locations/{location}/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/{orgPolicyViolationsPreview}` Example: `organizations/my-example-org/locations/global/orgPolicyViolationsPreviews/506a5f7f`",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"overlay": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyOverlay",
+"description": "Required. The proposed changes we are previewing violations for."
+},
+"resourceCounts": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreviewResourceCounts",
+"description": "Output only. A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy.",
+"readOnly": true
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`.",
+"enum": [
+"PREVIEW_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"PREVIEW_PENDING",
+"PREVIEW_RUNNING",
+"PREVIEW_SUCCEEDED",
+"PREVIEW_FAILED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified.",
+"The OrgPolicyViolationsPreview has not been created yet.",
+"The OrgPolicyViolationsPreview is currently being created.",
+"The OrgPolicyViolationsPreview creation finished successfully.",
+"The OrgPolicyViolationsPreview creation failed with an error."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"violationsCount": {
+"description": "Output only. The number of OrgPolicyViolations in this `OrgPolicyViolationsPreview`. This count may differ from `resource_summary.noncompliant_count` because each OrgPolicyViolation is specific to a resource **and** constraint. If there are multiple constraints being evaluated (i.e. multiple policies in the overlay), a single resource may violate multiple constraints.",
+"format": "int32",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "integer"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreviewResourceCounts": {
+"description": "A summary of the state of all resources scanned for compliance with the changed OrgPolicy.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1OrgPolicyViolationsPreviewResourceCounts",
+"properties": {
+"compliant": {
+"description": "Output only. Number of scanned resources with zero violations.",
+"format": "int32",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"errors": {
+"description": "Output only. Number of resources that returned an error when scanned.",
+"format": "int32",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"noncompliant": {
+"description": "Output only. Number of scanned resources with at least one violation.",
+"format": "int32",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"scanned": {
+"description": "Output only. Number of resources checked for compliance. Must equal: unenforced + noncompliant + compliant + error",
+"format": "int32",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"unenforced": {
+"description": "Output only. Number of resources where the constraint was not enforced, i.e. the Policy set `enforced: false` for that resource.",
+"format": "int32",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "integer"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1Replay": {
 "description": "A resource describing a `Replay`, or simulation.",
 "id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1Replay",
@@ -1254,6 +1801,28 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ResourceContext": {
+"description": "ResourceContext provides the context we know about a resource. It is similar in concept to google.cloud.asset.v1.Resource, but focuses on the information specifically used by Simulator.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudPolicysimulatorV1ResourceContext",
+"properties": {
+"ancestors": {
+"description": "The ancestry path of the resource in Google Cloud [resource hierarchy](https://cloud.google.com/resource-manager/docs/cloud-platform-resource-hierarchy), represented as a list of relative resource names. An ancestry path starts with the closest ancestor in the hierarchy and ends at root. If the resource is a project, folder, or organization, the ancestry path starts from the resource itself. Example: `[\"projects/123456789\", \"folders/5432\", \"organizations/1234\"]`",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"assetType": {
+"description": "The asset type of the resource as defined by CAIS. Example: `compute.googleapis.com/Firewall` See [Supported asset types](https://cloud.google.com/asset-inventory/docs/supported-asset-types) for more information.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"resource": {
+"description": "The full name of the resource. Example: `//compute.googleapis.com/projects/my_project_123/zones/zone1/instances/instance1` See [Resource names](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/resource_names#full_resource_name) for more information.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "GoogleIamV1AuditConfig": {
 "description": "Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { \"audit_configs\": [ { \"service\": \"allServices\", \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:jose@example.com\" ] }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\" }, { \"log_type\": \"ADMIN_READ\" } ] }, { \"service\": \"sampleservice.googleapis.com\", \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\" }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:aliya@example.com\" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.",
 "id": "GoogleIamV1AuditConfig",

From ed040b8a9fbaef25de40a0ef0ccf9e2a26ecf5f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 27/32] feat(privateca): update the api

#### privateca:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.AttributeTypeAndValue (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.RelativeDistinguishedName (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.Subject.properties.rdnSequence (Total Keys: 2)
---
 ...ations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html | 120 ++++++++++
 ...ojects.locations.caPools.certificates.html | 210 ++++++++++++++++++
 .../documents/privateca.v1.json               |  66 +++++-
 3 files changed, 395 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html
index a9a09fce2c..bcdec95bc6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificateAuthorities.html
@@ -219,6 +219,21 @@ 
Method Details

           "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
           "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
           "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+          "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+            { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+              "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                  "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                    "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                      42,
+                    ],
+                  },
+                  "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                  "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
           "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
         },
         "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -349,6 +364,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -729,6 +759,21 @@ 
Method Details

           "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
           "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
           "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+          "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+            { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+              "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                  "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                    "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                      42,
+                    ],
+                  },
+                  "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                  "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
           "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
         },
         "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -859,6 +904,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1072,6 +1132,21 @@ 
Method Details

               "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
               "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
               "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+              "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+                { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+                  "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                    { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                      "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                        "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                          42,
+                        ],
+                      },
+                      "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                      "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                    },
+                  ],
+                },
+              ],
               "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
             },
             "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1202,6 +1277,21 @@ 
Method Details

             "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
             "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
             "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+            "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+              { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+                "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                  { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                    "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                      "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                        42,
+                      ],
+                    },
+                    "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                    "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
             "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
           },
           "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1424,6 +1514,21 @@ 
Method Details

           "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
           "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
           "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+          "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+            { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+              "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                  "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                    "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                      42,
+                    ],
+                  },
+                  "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                  "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+          ],
           "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
         },
         "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1554,6 +1659,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html
index b9f183d815..c57ff75d2d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/privateca_v1.projects.locations.caPools.certificates.html
@@ -141,6 +141,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -271,6 +286,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -448,6 +478,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -578,6 +623,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -758,6 +818,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -888,6 +963,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1074,6 +1164,21 @@ 
Method Details

             "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
             "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
             "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+            "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+              { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+                "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                  { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                    "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                      "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                        42,
+                      ],
+                    },
+                    "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                    "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
             "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
           },
           "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1204,6 +1309,21 @@ 
Method Details

             "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
             "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
             "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+            "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+              { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+                "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+                  { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                    "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                      "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                        42,
+                      ],
+                    },
+                    "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                    "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+            ],
             "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
           },
           "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1399,6 +1519,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1529,6 +1664,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1704,6 +1854,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -1834,6 +1999,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -2022,6 +2202,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # The subject alternative name fields.
@@ -2152,6 +2347,21 @@ 
Method Details

         "organizationalUnit": "A String", # The organizational_unit of the subject.
         "postalCode": "A String", # The postal code of the subject.
         "province": "A String", # The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.
+        "rdnSequence": [ # This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.
+          { # RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.
+            "attributes": [ # Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.
+              { # AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.
+                "objectId": { # An ObjectId specifies an object identifier (OID). These provide context and describe types in ASN.1 messages. # Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair.
+                  "objectIdPath": [ # Required. The parts of an OID path. The most significant parts of the path come first.
+                    42,
+                  ],
+                },
+                "type": "A String", # The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.
+                "value": "A String", # The value for the attribute type.
+              },
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
         "streetAddress": "A String", # The street address of the subject.
       },
       "subjectAltName": { # SubjectAltNames corresponds to a more modern way of listing what the asserted identity is in a certificate (i.e., compared to the "common name" in the distinguished name). # Optional. The subject alternative name fields.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json
index fe006f605a..ea465080d6 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/privateca.v1.json
@@ -1611,7 +1611,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250326",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://privateca.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AccessUrls": {
@@ -1666,6 +1666,47 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"AttributeTypeAndValue": {
+"description": "AttributeTypeAndValue specifies an attribute type and value. It can use either a OID or enum value to specify the attribute type.",
+"id": "AttributeTypeAndValue",
+"properties": {
+"objectId": {
+"$ref": "ObjectId",
+"description": "Object ID for an attribute type of an attribute and value pair."
+},
+"type": {
+"description": "The attribute type of the attribute and value pair.",
+"enum": [
+"ATTRIBUTE_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"COMMON_NAME",
+"COUNTRY_CODE",
+"ORGANIZATION",
+"ORGANIZATIONAL_UNIT",
+"LOCALITY",
+"PROVINCE",
+"STREET_ADDRESS",
+"POSTAL_CODE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Attribute type is unspecified.",
+"The \"common name\" of the subject.",
+"The country code of the subject.",
+"The organization of the subject.",
+"The organizational unit of the subject.",
+"The locality or city of the subject.",
+"The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.",
+"The street address of the subject.",
+"The postal code of the subject."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"value": {
+"description": "The value for the attribute type.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "AuditConfig": {
 "description": "Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { \"audit_configs\": [ { \"service\": \"allServices\", \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:jose@example.com\" ] }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\" }, { \"log_type\": \"ADMIN_READ\" } ] }, { \"service\": \"sampleservice.googleapis.com\", \"audit_log_configs\": [ { \"log_type\": \"DATA_READ\" }, { \"log_type\": \"DATA_WRITE\", \"exempted_members\": [ \"user:aliya@example.com\" ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts `jose@example.com` from DATA_READ logging, and `aliya@example.com` from DATA_WRITE logging.",
 "id": "AuditConfig",
@@ -1882,11 +1923,13 @@
 "enum": [
 "SUBJECT_REQUEST_MODE_UNSPECIFIED",
 "DEFAULT",
+"RDN_SEQUENCE",
 "REFLECTED_SPIFFE"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Not specified.",
 "The default mode used in most cases. Indicates that the certificate's Subject and/or SubjectAltNames are specified in the certificate request. This mode requires the caller to have the `privateca.certificates.create` permission.",
+"A mode used to get an accurate representation of the Subject field's distinguished name. Indicates that the certificate's Subject and/or SubjectAltNames are specified in the certificate request. When parsing a PEM CSR this mode will maintain the sequence of RDNs found in the CSR's subject field in the issued Certificate. This mode requires the caller to have the `privateca.certificates.create` permission.",
 "A mode reserved for special cases. Indicates that the certificate should have one SPIFFE SubjectAltNames set by the service based on the caller's identity. This mode will ignore any explicitly specified Subject and/or SubjectAltNames in the certificate request. This mode requires the caller to have the `privateca.certificates.createForSelf` permission."
 ],
 "type": "string"
@@ -3110,6 +3153,20 @@ false
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"RelativeDistinguishedName": {
+"description": "RelativeDistinguishedName specifies a relative distinguished name which will be used to build a distinguished name.",
+"id": "RelativeDistinguishedName",
+"properties": {
+"attributes": {
+"description": "Attributes describes the attribute value assertions in the RDN.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AttributeTypeAndValue"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "RevocationDetails": {
 "description": "Describes fields that are relavent to the revocation of a Certificate.",
 "id": "RevocationDetails",
@@ -3318,6 +3375,13 @@ false
 "description": "The province, territory, or regional state of the subject.",
 "type": "string"
 },
+"rdnSequence": {
+"description": "This field can be used in place of the named subject fields.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "RelativeDistinguishedName"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
 "streetAddress": {
 "description": "The street address of the subject.",
 "type": "string"

From 1dd9180d854b661ed7d6662e265754e01a8fe740 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 28/32] feat(servicemanagement): update the api

#### servicemanagement:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.Rollout.properties.universe.type (Total Keys: 1)
---
 docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.rollouts.html        | 3 +++
 .../discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json     | 6 +++++-
 2 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.rollouts.html b/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.rollouts.html
index 1f0a78bfa1..6842e64386 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.rollouts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicemanagement_v1.services.rollouts.html
@@ -117,6 +117,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "a_key": 3.14,
     },
   },
+  "universe": "A String", # The TPC universe which the rollout will be rolled out to.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -176,6 +177,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "a_key": 3.14,
     },
   },
+  "universe": "A String", # The TPC universe which the rollout will be rolled out to.
 }

 

 
@@ -212,6 +214,7 @@ 
Method Details

           "a_key": 3.14,
         },
       },
+      "universe": "A String", # The TPC universe which the rollout will be rolled out to.
     },
   ],
 }

diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json
index e20a749270..80ff3407a9 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicemanagement.v1.json
@@ -830,7 +830,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250519",
+"revision": "20250601",
 "rootUrl": "https://servicemanagement.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Advice": {
@@ -3305,6 +3305,10 @@
 "trafficPercentStrategy": {
 "$ref": "TrafficPercentStrategy",
 "description": "Google Service Control selects service configurations based on traffic percentage."
+},
+"universe": {
+"description": "The TPC universe which the rollout will be rolled out to.",
+"type": "string"
 }
 },
 "type": "object"

From d7934431def0b46e5b2af9b229a0d277184fe96d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 29/32] feat(storage): update the api

#### storage:v1

The following keys were added:
- schemas.Bucket.properties.ipFilter.properties.allowAllServiceAgentAccess.type (Total Keys: 1)
---
 docs/dyn/storage_v1.buckets.html                       | 10 ++++++++++
 .../discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json          |  8 ++++++--
 2 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/storage_v1.buckets.html b/docs/dyn/storage_v1.buckets.html
index b66e61397f..e62181c148 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/storage_v1.buckets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/storage_v1.buckets.html
@@ -268,6 +268,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -562,6 +563,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -791,6 +793,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -1017,6 +1020,7 @@ 
Method Details

       },
       "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
       "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+        "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
         "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
         "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
         "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -1252,6 +1256,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -1466,6 +1471,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -1696,6 +1702,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -1963,6 +1970,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -2312,6 +2320,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
@@ -2542,6 +2551,7 @@ 
Method Details

   },
   "id": "A String", # The ID of the bucket. For buckets, the id and name properties are the same.
   "ipFilter": { # The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.
+    "allowAllServiceAgentAccess": True or False, # Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.
     "allowCrossOrgVpcs": True or False, # Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.
     "mode": "A String", # The mode of the IP filter. Valid values are 'Enabled' and 'Disabled'.
     "publicNetworkSource": { # The public network source of the bucket's IP filter.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json
index 27136186ba..4ec902ba20 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/storage.v1.json
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
 "location": "northamerica-south1"
 }
 ],
-"etag": "\"35393233393936313736383532303734323135\"",
+"etag": "\"36383730363437323837383838393538333732\"",
 "icons": {
 "x16": "https://www.google.com/images/icons/product/cloud_storage-16.png",
 "x32": "https://www.google.com/images/icons/product/cloud_storage-32.png"
@@ -4539,7 +4539,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250524",
+"revision": "20250605",
 "rootUrl": "https://storage.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AdvanceRelocateBucketOperationRequest": {
@@ -4831,6 +4831,10 @@
 "ipFilter": {
 "description": "The bucket's IP filter configuration. Specifies the network sources that are allowed to access the operations on the bucket, as well as its underlying objects. Only enforced when the mode is set to 'Enabled'.",
 "properties": {
+"allowAllServiceAgentAccess": {
+"description": "Whether to allow all service agents to access the bucket regardless of the IP filter configuration.",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
 "allowCrossOrgVpcs": {
 "description": "Whether to allow cross-org VPCs in the bucket's IP filter configuration.",
 "type": "boolean"

From 74b544699939edb14afc61b46aaa8f7b369f0953 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 30/32] feat(travelimpactmodel): update the api

#### travelimpactmodel:v1

The following keys were added:
- resources.flights.methods.computeTypicalFlightEmissions (Total Keys: 7)
- schemas.ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsRequest (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsResponse (Total Keys: 5)
- schemas.Market (Total Keys: 4)
- schemas.TypicalFlightEmissions (Total Keys: 4)
---
 docs/dyn/travelimpactmodel_v1.flights.html    | 62 +++++++++++--
 .../documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json       | 87 +++++++++++++++++--
 2 files changed, 139 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/travelimpactmodel_v1.flights.html b/docs/dyn/travelimpactmodel_v1.flights.html
index 00380e3807..eb8cfb5d09 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/travelimpactmodel_v1.flights.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/travelimpactmodel_v1.flights.html
@@ -79,7 +79,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Close httplib2 connections.

 

   computeFlightEmissions(body=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Stateless method to retrieve emission estimates. Details on how emission estimates are computed: https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model The response will contain all entries that match the input flight legs, in the same order. If there are no estimates available for a certain flight leg, the response will return the flight leg object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Reasons for missing emission estimates include: * The flight is unknown to the server. * The input flight leg is missing one or more identifiers. * The flight date is in the past. * The aircraft type is not supported by the model. * Missing seat configuration. The request can contain up to 1000 flight legs. If the request has more than 1000 direct flights, if will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.

+
Stateless method to retrieve emission estimates. Details on how emission estimates are computed are in [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model) The response will contain all entries that match the input flight legs, in the same order. If there are no estimates available for a certain flight leg, the response will return the flight leg object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Reasons for missing emission estimates include: * The flight is unknown to the server. * The input flight leg is missing one or more identifiers. * The flight date is in the past. * The aircraft type is not supported by the model. * Missing seat configuration. The request can contain up to 1000 flight legs. If the request has more than 1000 direct flights, if will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.

+

+  computeTypicalFlightEmissions(body=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieves typical flight emissions estimates between two airports, also known as a market. If there are no estimates available for a certain market, the response will return the market object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Details on how the typical emissions estimates are computed are on [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/blob/main/projects/typical_flight_emissions.md). The request can contain up to 1000 markets. If the request has more than 1000 markets, it will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.

 
Method Details

 

     close()
@@ -88,7 +91,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     computeFlightEmissions(body=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Stateless method to retrieve emission estimates. Details on how emission estimates are computed: https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model The response will contain all entries that match the input flight legs, in the same order. If there are no estimates available for a certain flight leg, the response will return the flight leg object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Reasons for missing emission estimates include: * The flight is unknown to the server. * The input flight leg is missing one or more identifiers. * The flight date is in the past. * The aircraft type is not supported by the model. * Missing seat configuration. The request can contain up to 1000 flight legs. If the request has more than 1000 direct flights, if will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.
+  
Stateless method to retrieve emission estimates. Details on how emission estimates are computed are in [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model) The response will contain all entries that match the input flight legs, in the same order. If there are no estimates available for a certain flight leg, the response will return the flight leg object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Reasons for missing emission estimates include: * The flight is unknown to the server. * The input flight leg is missing one or more identifiers. * The flight date is in the past. * The aircraft type is not supported by the model. * Missing seat configuration. The request can contain up to 1000 flight legs. If the request has more than 1000 direct flights, if will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.
 
 Args:
   body: object, The request body.
@@ -121,7 +124,7 @@ 
Method Details

     { # Output definition for the ComputeFlightEmissions response.
   "flightEmissions": [ # List of flight legs with emission estimates.
     { # Direct flight with emission estimates.
-      "emissionsGramsPerPax": { # Grouped emissions per seating class results. # Optional. Per-passenger emission estimate numbers. Will not be present if emissions could not be computed. For the list of reasons why emissions could not be computed, see ComputeFlightEmissions. This field uses wtw emissions aka ttw_emissions_grams_per_pax + wtt_emissions_grams_per_pax.
+      "emissionsGramsPerPax": { # Grouped emissions per seating class results. # Optional. Per-passenger emission estimate numbers. Will not be present if emissions could not be computed. For the list of reasons why emissions could not be computed, see ComputeFlightEmissions.
         "business": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in business class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has business class seats or not.
         "economy": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in economy class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has economy class seats or not.
         "first": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in first class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has first class seats or not.
@@ -140,12 +143,61 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     },
   ],
-  "modelVersion": { # Travel Impact Model version. For more information about the model versioning see https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/#versioning. # The model version under which emission estimates for all flights in this response were computed.
+  "modelVersion": { # Travel Impact Model version. For more information about the model versioning see [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/#versioning). # The model version under which emission estimates for all flights in this response were computed.
+    "dated": "A String", # Dated versions: Model datasets are recreated with refreshed input data but no change to the algorithms regularly.
+    "major": 42, # Major versions: Major changes to methodology (e.g. adding new data sources to the model that lead to major output changes). Such changes will be infrequent and announced well in advance. Might involve API version changes, which will respect [Google Cloud API guidelines](https://cloud.google.com/endpoints/docs/openapi/versioning-an-api#backwards-incompatible)
+    "minor": 42, # Minor versions: Changes to the model that, while being consistent across schema versions, change the model parameters or implementation.
+    "patch": 42, # Patch versions: Implementation changes meant to address bugs or inaccuracies in the model implementation.
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    computeTypicalFlightEmissions(body=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieves typical flight emissions estimates between two airports, also known as a market. If there are no estimates available for a certain market, the response will return the market object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Details on how the typical emissions estimates are computed are on [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/blob/main/projects/typical_flight_emissions.md). The request can contain up to 1000 markets. If the request has more than 1000 markets, it will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.
+
+Args:
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A list of pair of airports (markets) to request the typical emissions for.
+  "markets": [ # Required. Request the typical flight emissions estimates for this market pair. A maximum of 1000 markets can be requested.
+    { # A pair of airports.
+      "destination": "A String", # Required. IATA airport code for flight destination, e.g. "JFK".
+      "origin": "A String", # Required. IATA airport code for flight origin, e.g. "LHR".
+    },
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response includes the emissions but also the model version.
+  "modelVersion": { # Travel Impact Model version. For more information about the model versioning see [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/#versioning). # The model version under which typical flight emission estimates for all flights in this response were computed.
     "dated": "A String", # Dated versions: Model datasets are recreated with refreshed input data but no change to the algorithms regularly.
-    "major": 42, # Major versions: Major changes to methodology (e.g. adding new data sources to the model that lead to major output changes). Such changes will be infrequent and announced well in advance. Might involve API version changes, which will respect guidelines in https://cloud.google.com/endpoints/docs/openapi/versioning-an-api#backwards-incompatible
+    "major": 42, # Major versions: Major changes to methodology (e.g. adding new data sources to the model that lead to major output changes). Such changes will be infrequent and announced well in advance. Might involve API version changes, which will respect [Google Cloud API guidelines](https://cloud.google.com/endpoints/docs/openapi/versioning-an-api#backwards-incompatible)
     "minor": 42, # Minor versions: Changes to the model that, while being consistent across schema versions, change the model parameters or implementation.
     "patch": 42, # Patch versions: Implementation changes meant to address bugs or inaccuracies in the model implementation.
   },
+  "typicalFlightEmissions": [ # Market's Typical Flight Emissions requested.
+    { # Typical flight emission estimates for a certain market
+      "emissionsGramsPerPax": { # Grouped emissions per seating class results. # Optional. Typical flight emissions per passenger for requested market. Will not be present if a typical emissions could not be computed. For the list of reasons why typical flight emissions could not be computed, see [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/blob/main/projects/typical_flight_emissions.md#step-7-validate-dataset).
+        "business": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in business class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has business class seats or not.
+        "economy": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in economy class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has economy class seats or not.
+        "first": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in first class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has first class seats or not.
+        "premiumEconomy": 42, # Emissions for one passenger in premium economy class in grams. This field is always computed and populated, regardless of whether the aircraft has premium economy class seats or not.
+      },
+      "market": { # A pair of airports. # Required. Matches the flight identifiers in the request. Note: all IATA codes are capitalized.
+        "destination": "A String", # Required. IATA airport code for flight destination, e.g. "JFK".
+        "origin": "A String", # Required. IATA airport code for flight origin, e.g. "LHR".
+      },
+    },
+  ],
 }

 

 
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json
index d86e330304..0368c43281 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/travelimpactmodel.v1.json
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
 "flights": {
 "methods": {
 "computeFlightEmissions": {
-"description": "Stateless method to retrieve emission estimates. Details on how emission estimates are computed: https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model The response will contain all entries that match the input flight legs, in the same order. If there are no estimates available for a certain flight leg, the response will return the flight leg object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Reasons for missing emission estimates include: * The flight is unknown to the server. * The input flight leg is missing one or more identifiers. * The flight date is in the past. * The aircraft type is not supported by the model. * Missing seat configuration. The request can contain up to 1000 flight legs. If the request has more than 1000 direct flights, if will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.",
+"description": "Stateless method to retrieve emission estimates. Details on how emission estimates are computed are in [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model) The response will contain all entries that match the input flight legs, in the same order. If there are no estimates available for a certain flight leg, the response will return the flight leg object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Reasons for missing emission estimates include: * The flight is unknown to the server. * The input flight leg is missing one or more identifiers. * The flight date is in the past. * The aircraft type is not supported by the model. * Missing seat configuration. The request can contain up to 1000 flight legs. If the request has more than 1000 direct flights, if will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.",
 "flatPath": "v1/flights:computeFlightEmissions",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "travelimpactmodel.flights.computeFlightEmissions",
@@ -112,11 +112,26 @@
 "response": {
 "$ref": "ComputeFlightEmissionsResponse"
 }
+},
+"computeTypicalFlightEmissions": {
+"description": "Retrieves typical flight emissions estimates between two airports, also known as a market. If there are no estimates available for a certain market, the response will return the market object with empty emission fields. The request will still be considered successful. Details on how the typical emissions estimates are computed are on [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/blob/main/projects/typical_flight_emissions.md). The request can contain up to 1000 markets. If the request has more than 1000 markets, it will fail with an INVALID_ARGUMENT error.",
+"flatPath": "v1/flights:computeTypicalFlightEmissions",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "travelimpactmodel.flights.computeTypicalFlightEmissions",
+"parameterOrder": [],
+"parameters": {},
+"path": "v1/flights:computeTypicalFlightEmissions",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsRequest"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsResponse"
+}
 }
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250224",
+"revision": "20250605",
 "rootUrl": "https://travelimpactmodel.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ComputeFlightEmissionsRequest": {
@@ -151,6 +166,38 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsRequest": {
+"description": "A list of pair of airports (markets) to request the typical emissions for.",
+"id": "ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsRequest",
+"properties": {
+"markets": {
+"description": "Required. Request the typical flight emissions estimates for this market pair. A maximum of 1000 markets can be requested.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Market"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsResponse": {
+"description": "The response includes the emissions but also the model version.",
+"id": "ComputeTypicalFlightEmissionsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"modelVersion": {
+"$ref": "ModelVersion",
+"description": "The model version under which typical flight emission estimates for all flights in this response were computed."
+},
+"typicalFlightEmissions": {
+"description": "Market's Typical Flight Emissions requested.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "TypicalFlightEmissions"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "Date": {
 "description": "Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values. * A month and day, with a zero year (for example, an anniversary). * A year on its own, with a zero month and a zero day. * A year and month, with a zero day (for example, a credit card expiration date). Related types: * google.type.TimeOfDay * google.type.DateTime * google.protobuf.Timestamp",
 "id": "Date",
@@ -234,7 +281,7 @@
 "properties": {
 "emissionsGramsPerPax": {
 "$ref": "EmissionsGramsPerPax",
-"description": "Optional. Per-passenger emission estimate numbers. Will not be present if emissions could not be computed. For the list of reasons why emissions could not be computed, see ComputeFlightEmissions. This field uses wtw emissions aka ttw_emissions_grams_per_pax + wtt_emissions_grams_per_pax."
+"description": "Optional. Per-passenger emission estimate numbers. Will not be present if emissions could not be computed. For the list of reasons why emissions could not be computed, see ComputeFlightEmissions."
 },
 "flight": {
 "$ref": "Flight",
@@ -243,8 +290,23 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"Market": {
+"description": "A pair of airports.",
+"id": "Market",
+"properties": {
+"destination": {
+"description": "Required. IATA airport code for flight destination, e.g. \"JFK\".",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"origin": {
+"description": "Required. IATA airport code for flight origin, e.g. \"LHR\".",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "ModelVersion": {
-"description": "Travel Impact Model version. For more information about the model versioning see https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/#versioning.",
+"description": "Travel Impact Model version. For more information about the model versioning see [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/#versioning).",
 "id": "ModelVersion",
 "properties": {
 "dated": {
@@ -252,7 +314,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "major": {
-"description": "Major versions: Major changes to methodology (e.g. adding new data sources to the model that lead to major output changes). Such changes will be infrequent and announced well in advance. Might involve API version changes, which will respect guidelines in https://cloud.google.com/endpoints/docs/openapi/versioning-an-api#backwards-incompatible",
+"description": "Major versions: Major changes to methodology (e.g. adding new data sources to the model that lead to major output changes). Such changes will be infrequent and announced well in advance. Might involve API version changes, which will respect [Google Cloud API guidelines](https://cloud.google.com/endpoints/docs/openapi/versioning-an-api#backwards-incompatible)",
 "format": "int32",
 "type": "integer"
 },
@@ -268,6 +330,21 @@
 }
 },
 "type": "object"
+},
+"TypicalFlightEmissions": {
+"description": "Typical flight emission estimates for a certain market",
+"id": "TypicalFlightEmissions",
+"properties": {
+"emissionsGramsPerPax": {
+"$ref": "EmissionsGramsPerPax",
+"description": "Optional. Typical flight emissions per passenger for requested market. Will not be present if a typical emissions could not be computed. For the list of reasons why typical flight emissions could not be computed, see [GitHub](https://github.com/google/travel-impact-model/blob/main/projects/typical_flight_emissions.md#step-7-validate-dataset)."
+},
+"market": {
+"$ref": "Market",
+"description": "Required. Matches the flight identifiers in the request. Note: all IATA codes are capitalized."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
 }
 },
 "servicePath": "",

From be75c11aa9ff26e282474f089ef732f986f319f1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:17 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 31/32] feat(workloadmanager): update the api

#### workloadmanager:v1

The following keys were deleted:
- schemas.Instance (Total Keys: 10)
- schemas.Layer (Total Keys: 8)
- schemas.WorkloadProfile.properties.application (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.WorkloadProfile.properties.ascs (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.WorkloadProfile.properties.database (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.WorkloadProfile.properties.state (Total Keys: 3)

The following keys were added:
- schemas.AgentStatus (Total Keys: 64)
- schemas.ComponentHealth.properties.subComponentsHealth (Total Keys: 2)
- schemas.Insight.properties.agentStatus.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.SapDiscoveryResourceInstanceProperties.properties.osKernelVersion.$ref (Total Keys: 1)
- schemas.SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersion (Total Keys: 16)
- schemas.WorkloadProfileHealth.properties.componentsHealth (Total Keys: 2)
---
 ...locations.discoveredprofiles.healthes.html |  54 +-
 ...projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.html |  82 +--
 ...anager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html |  90 ++++
 .../documents/workloadmanager.v1.json         | 474 +++++++++++++-----
 4 files changed, 478 insertions(+), 222 deletions(-)

diff --git a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.healthes.html b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.healthes.html
index d651b69056..27d15ad577 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.healthes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.healthes.html
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
     { # WorkloadProfileHealth contains the detailed health check of workload.
   "checkTime": "A String", # The time when the health check was performed.
-  "componentHealthes": [ # The detailed condition reports of each component.
+  "componentHealthes": [
     { # HealthCondition contains the detailed health check of each component.
       "component": "A String", # The component of a workload.
       "componentHealthChecks": [ # The detailed health checks of the component.
@@ -113,7 +113,6 @@ 
Method Details

             "instanceProperties": { # Instance Properties. # Output only. All instance properties.
               "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. Instance number.
               "machineType": "A String", # Optional. Instance machine type.
-              "role": "A String", # Optional. Instance role.
               "roles": [ # Optional. Instance roles.
                 "A String",
               ],
@@ -141,7 +140,56 @@ 
Method Details

       "componentHealthType": "A String", # Output only. The type of the component health.
       "isRequired": True or False, # Output only. The requirement of the component.
       "state": "A String", # Output only. The health state of the component.
-      "subComponentHealthes": [ # Sub component health.
+      "subComponentHealthes": [
+        # Object with schema name: ComponentHealth
+      ],
+      "subComponentsHealth": [ # Sub component health.
+        # Object with schema name: ComponentHealth
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  "componentsHealth": [ # The detailed condition reports of each component.
+    { # HealthCondition contains the detailed health check of each component.
+      "component": "A String", # The component of a workload.
+      "componentHealthChecks": [ # The detailed health checks of the component.
+        { # HealthCheck contains the detailed health check of a component based on asource.
+          "message": "A String", # Output only. The message of the health check.
+          "metric": "A String", # Output only. The health check source metric name.
+          "resource": { # The resource on GCP # Output only. The resource the check performs on.
+            "instanceProperties": { # Instance Properties. # Output only. All instance properties.
+              "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. Instance number.
+              "machineType": "A String", # Optional. Instance machine type.
+              "roles": [ # Optional. Instance roles.
+                "A String",
+              ],
+              "sapInstanceProperties": { # SAP instance properties. # Optional. SAP Instance properties.
+                "numbers": [ # Optional. SAP Instance numbers. They are from '00' to '99'.
+                  "A String",
+                ],
+              },
+              "status": "A String", # Optional. Instance status.
+              "upcomingMaintenanceEvent": { # Maintenance Event # Optional. the next maintenance event on VM
+                "endTime": "A String", # Optional. End time
+                "maintenanceStatus": "A String", # Optional. Maintenance status
+                "onHostMaintenance": "A String", # Optional. Instance maintenance behavior. Could be "MIGRATE" or "TERMINATE".
+                "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start time
+                "type": "A String", # Optional. Type
+              },
+            },
+            "kind": "A String", # Output only. ComputeInstance, ComputeDisk, VPC, Bare Metal server, etc.
+            "name": "A String", # Output only. resource name
+          },
+          "source": "A String", # Output only. The source of the health check.
+          "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the health check.
+        },
+      ],
+      "componentHealthType": "A String", # Output only. The type of the component health.
+      "isRequired": True or False, # Output only. The requirement of the component.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. The health state of the component.
+      "subComponentHealthes": [
+        # Object with schema name: ComponentHealth
+      ],
+      "subComponentsHealth": [ # Sub component health.
         # Object with schema name: ComponentHealth
       ],
     },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.html b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.html
index 5df7cc5521..a3bf42ca26 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.discoveredprofiles.html
@@ -112,46 +112,10 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # workload resource
-  "application": { # The database layer # Optional. The application layer
-    "applicationType": "A String", # the application layer
-    "databaseType": "A String", # Optional. the database layer
-    "instances": [ # Optional. instances in a layer
-      { # a vm instance
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. name of the VM
-        "region": "A String", # Output only. The location of the VM
-        "status": "A String", # Output only. The state of the VM
-      },
-    ],
-    "sid": "A String", # Output only. system identification of a layer
-  },
-  "ascs": { # The database layer # Optional. The ascs layer
-    "applicationType": "A String", # the application layer
-    "databaseType": "A String", # Optional. the database layer
-    "instances": [ # Optional. instances in a layer
-      { # a vm instance
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. name of the VM
-        "region": "A String", # Output only. The location of the VM
-        "status": "A String", # Output only. The state of the VM
-      },
-    ],
-    "sid": "A String", # Output only. system identification of a layer
-  },
-  "database": { # The database layer # Optional. The database layer
-    "applicationType": "A String", # the application layer
-    "databaseType": "A String", # Optional. the database layer
-    "instances": [ # Optional. instances in a layer
-      { # a vm instance
-        "name": "A String", # Output only. name of the VM
-        "region": "A String", # Output only. The location of the VM
-        "status": "A String", # Output only. The state of the VM
-      },
-    ],
-    "sid": "A String", # Output only. system identification of a layer
-  },
   "labels": { # Optional. such as name, description, version. More example can be found in deployment
     "a_key": "A String",
   },
-  "name": "A String", # Identifier. name of resource names have the form 'projects/{project_id}/workloads/{workload_id}'
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. name of resource names have the form 'projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/workloadProfiles/{workload_id}'
   "refreshedTime": "A String", # Required. time when the workload data was refreshed
   "sapWorkload": { # The body of sap workload # The sap workload content
     "application": { # The component of sap workload # Output only. the acsc componment
@@ -170,7 +134,6 @@ 
Method Details

           "instanceProperties": { # Instance Properties. # Output only. All instance properties.
             "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. Instance number.
             "machineType": "A String", # Optional. Instance machine type.
-            "role": "A String", # Optional. Instance role.
             "roles": [ # Optional. Instance roles.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -212,7 +175,6 @@ 
Method Details

           "instanceProperties": { # Instance Properties. # Output only. All instance properties.
             "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. Instance number.
             "machineType": "A String", # Optional. Instance machine type.
-            "role": "A String", # Optional. Instance role.
             "roles": [ # Optional. Instance roles.
               "A String",
             ],
@@ -247,7 +209,6 @@ 
Method Details

       },
     ],
   },
-  "state": "A String", # Output only. [output only] the current state if a a workload
   "workloadType": "A String", # Required. The type of the workload
 }

 

@@ -276,46 +237,10 @@ 
Method Details

   ],
   "workloadProfiles": [ # Output only. The list of workload profiles
     { # workload resource
-      "application": { # The database layer # Optional. The application layer
-        "applicationType": "A String", # the application layer
-        "databaseType": "A String", # Optional. the database layer
-        "instances": [ # Optional. instances in a layer
-          { # a vm instance
-            "name": "A String", # Output only. name of the VM
-            "region": "A String", # Output only. The location of the VM
-            "status": "A String", # Output only. The state of the VM
-          },
-        ],
-        "sid": "A String", # Output only. system identification of a layer
-      },
-      "ascs": { # The database layer # Optional. The ascs layer
-        "applicationType": "A String", # the application layer
-        "databaseType": "A String", # Optional. the database layer
-        "instances": [ # Optional. instances in a layer
-          { # a vm instance
-            "name": "A String", # Output only. name of the VM
-            "region": "A String", # Output only. The location of the VM
-            "status": "A String", # Output only. The state of the VM
-          },
-        ],
-        "sid": "A String", # Output only. system identification of a layer
-      },
-      "database": { # The database layer # Optional. The database layer
-        "applicationType": "A String", # the application layer
-        "databaseType": "A String", # Optional. the database layer
-        "instances": [ # Optional. instances in a layer
-          { # a vm instance
-            "name": "A String", # Output only. name of the VM
-            "region": "A String", # Output only. The location of the VM
-            "status": "A String", # Output only. The state of the VM
-          },
-        ],
-        "sid": "A String", # Output only. system identification of a layer
-      },
       "labels": { # Optional. such as name, description, version. More example can be found in deployment
         "a_key": "A String",
       },
-      "name": "A String", # Identifier. name of resource names have the form 'projects/{project_id}/workloads/{workload_id}'
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. name of resource names have the form 'projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/workloadProfiles/{workload_id}'
       "refreshedTime": "A String", # Required. time when the workload data was refreshed
       "sapWorkload": { # The body of sap workload # The sap workload content
         "application": { # The component of sap workload # Output only. the acsc componment
@@ -334,7 +259,6 @@ 
Method Details

               "instanceProperties": { # Instance Properties. # Output only. All instance properties.
                 "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. Instance number.
                 "machineType": "A String", # Optional. Instance machine type.
-                "role": "A String", # Optional. Instance role.
                 "roles": [ # Optional. Instance roles.
                   "A String",
                 ],
@@ -376,7 +300,6 @@ 
Method Details

               "instanceProperties": { # Instance Properties. # Output only. All instance properties.
                 "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. Instance number.
                 "machineType": "A String", # Optional. Instance machine type.
-                "role": "A String", # Optional. Instance role.
                 "roles": [ # Optional. Instance roles.
                   "A String",
                 ],
@@ -411,7 +334,6 @@ 
Method Details

           },
         ],
       },
-      "state": "A String", # Output only. [output only] the current state if a a workload
       "workloadType": "A String", # Required. The type of the workload
     },
   ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html
index 7db56dcc91..4a3bab5cf1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/workloadmanager_v1.projects.locations.insights.html
@@ -120,6 +120,62 @@ 
Method Details

 { # Request for sending the data insights.
   "agentVersion": "A String", # Optional. The agent version collected this data point.
   "insight": { # A presentation of host resource usage where the workload runs. # Required. The metrics data details.
+    "agentStatus": { # The schema of agent status data. # The insights data for the agent status.
+      "agentName": "A String", # Output only. The name of the agent.
+      "availableVersion": "A String", # Output only. The available version of the agent in artifact registry.
+      "cloudApiAccessFullScopesGranted": "A String", # Output only. Whether the agent has full access to Cloud APIs.
+      "configurationErrorMessage": "A String", # Output only. The error message for the agent configuration if invalid.
+      "configurationFilePath": "A String", # Output only. The path to the agent configuration file.
+      "configurationValid": "A String", # Output only. Whether the agent configuration is valid.
+      "installedVersion": "A String", # Output only. The installed version of the agent on the host.
+      "kernelVersion": { # KernelVersion encapsulates the kernel version data for the system. # Output only. The kernel version of the system.
+        "distroKernel": { # Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch. # Optional. Captures the distro-specific kernel version, the portion of the string following the first dash.
+          "build": 42, # Optional. The build version number.
+          "major": 42, # Optional. The major version number.
+          "minor": 42, # Optional. The minor version number.
+          "patch": 42, # Optional. The patch version number.
+          "remainder": "A String", # Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.
+        },
+        "osKernel": { # Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch. # Optional. Captures the OS-specific kernel version, the portion of the string up to the first dash.
+          "build": 42, # Optional. The build version number.
+          "major": 42, # Optional. The major version number.
+          "minor": 42, # Optional. The minor version number.
+          "patch": 42, # Optional. The patch version number.
+          "remainder": "A String", # Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.
+        },
+        "rawString": "A String", # Optional. Raw string of the kernel version.
+      },
+      "references": [ # Output only. Optional references to public documentation.
+        { # The reference to public documentation.
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the reference.
+          "url": "A String", # Output only. The URL of the reference.
+        },
+      ],
+      "services": [ # Output only. The services (process metrics, host metrics, etc.).
+        { # The status of a service (process metrics, host metrics, etc.).
+          "configValues": [ # Output only. The configuration values for the service.
+            { # The configuration value.
+              "isDefault": True or False, # Output only. Whether the configuration value is the default value or overridden.
+              "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the configuration value.
+              "value": "A String", # Output only. The value of the configuration value.
+            },
+          ],
+          "errorMessage": "A String", # Output only. The error message for the service if it is not fully functional.
+          "fullyFunctional": "A String", # Output only. Whether the service is fully functional (all checks passed).
+          "iamPermissions": [ # Output only. The permissions required for the service.
+            { # The IAM permission status.
+              "granted": "A String", # Output only. Whether the permission is granted.
+              "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the permission.
+            },
+          ],
+          "name": "A String", # Output only. The name of the service.
+          "state": "A String", # Output only. The state of the service (enabled or disabled in the configuration).
+          "unspecifiedStateMessage": "A String", # Output only. The message to display when the service state is unspecified.
+        },
+      ],
+      "systemdServiceEnabled": "A String", # Output only. Whether the agent service is enabled in systemd.
+      "systemdServiceRunning": "A String", # Output only. Whether the agent service is running in systemd.
+    },
     "instanceId": "A String", # Required. The instance id where the insight is generated from
     "sapDiscovery": { # The schema of SAP system discovery data. # The insights data for SAP system discovery. This is a copy of SAP System proto and should get updated whenever that one changes.
       "applicationLayer": { # Message describing the system component. # Optional. An SAP system may run without an application layer.
@@ -177,6 +233,23 @@ 
Method Details

               "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. The VM's instance number.
               "instanceRole": "A String", # Optional. Bitmask of instance role, a resource may have multiple roles at once.
               "isDrSite": True or False, # Optional. Instance is part of a DR site.
+              "osKernelVersion": { # KernelVersion encapsulates the kernel version data for the system. # Optional. The kernel version of the instance.
+                "distroKernel": { # Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch. # Optional. Captures the distro-specific kernel version, the portion of the string following the first dash.
+                  "build": 42, # Optional. The build version number.
+                  "major": 42, # Optional. The major version number.
+                  "minor": 42, # Optional. The minor version number.
+                  "patch": 42, # Optional. The patch version number.
+                  "remainder": "A String", # Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.
+                },
+                "osKernel": { # Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch. # Optional. Captures the OS-specific kernel version, the portion of the string up to the first dash.
+                  "build": 42, # Optional. The build version number.
+                  "major": 42, # Optional. The major version number.
+                  "minor": 42, # Optional. The minor version number.
+                  "patch": 42, # Optional. The patch version number.
+                  "remainder": "A String", # Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.
+                },
+                "rawString": "A String", # Optional. Raw string of the kernel version.
+              },
               "virtualHostname": "A String", # Optional. A virtual hostname of the instance if it has one.
             },
             "relatedResources": [ # Optional. A list of resource URIs related to this resource.
@@ -246,6 +319,23 @@ 
Method Details

               "instanceNumber": "A String", # Optional. The VM's instance number.
               "instanceRole": "A String", # Optional. Bitmask of instance role, a resource may have multiple roles at once.
               "isDrSite": True or False, # Optional. Instance is part of a DR site.
+              "osKernelVersion": { # KernelVersion encapsulates the kernel version data for the system. # Optional. The kernel version of the instance.
+                "distroKernel": { # Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch. # Optional. Captures the distro-specific kernel version, the portion of the string following the first dash.
+                  "build": 42, # Optional. The build version number.
+                  "major": 42, # Optional. The major version number.
+                  "minor": 42, # Optional. The minor version number.
+                  "patch": 42, # Optional. The patch version number.
+                  "remainder": "A String", # Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.
+                },
+                "osKernel": { # Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch. # Optional. Captures the OS-specific kernel version, the portion of the string up to the first dash.
+                  "build": 42, # Optional. The build version number.
+                  "major": 42, # Optional. The major version number.
+                  "minor": 42, # Optional. The minor version number.
+                  "patch": 42, # Optional. The patch version number.
+                  "remainder": "A String", # Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.
+                },
+                "rawString": "A String", # Optional. Raw string of the kernel version.
+              },
               "virtualHostname": "A String", # Optional. A virtual hostname of the instance if it has one.
             },
             "relatedResources": [ # Optional. A list of resource URIs related to this resource.
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json
index 72b4917686..90241043aa 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/workloadmanager.v1.json
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250416",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://workloadmanager.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AgentCommand": {
@@ -949,6 +949,267 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"AgentStatus": {
+"description": "The schema of agent status data.",
+"id": "AgentStatus",
+"properties": {
+"agentName": {
+"description": "Output only. The name of the agent.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"availableVersion": {
+"description": "Output only. The available version of the agent in artifact registry.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"cloudApiAccessFullScopesGranted": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the agent has full access to Cloud APIs.",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"configurationErrorMessage": {
+"description": "Output only. The error message for the agent configuration if invalid.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"configurationFilePath": {
+"description": "Output only. The path to the agent configuration file.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"configurationValid": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the agent configuration is valid.",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"installedVersion": {
+"description": "Output only. The installed version of the agent on the host.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"kernelVersion": {
+"$ref": "SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersion",
+"description": "Output only. The kernel version of the system.",
+"readOnly": true
+},
+"references": {
+"description": "Output only. Optional references to public documentation.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AgentStatusReference"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"services": {
+"description": "Output only. The services (process metrics, host metrics, etc.).",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AgentStatusServiceStatus"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"systemdServiceEnabled": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the agent service is enabled in systemd.",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"systemdServiceRunning": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the agent service is running in systemd.",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"AgentStatusConfigValue": {
+"description": "The configuration value.",
+"id": "AgentStatusConfigValue",
+"properties": {
+"isDefault": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the configuration value is the default value or overridden.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Output only. The name of the configuration value.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"value": {
+"description": "Output only. The value of the configuration value.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"AgentStatusIAMPermission": {
+"description": "The IAM permission status.",
+"id": "AgentStatusIAMPermission",
+"properties": {
+"granted": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the permission is granted.",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Output only. The name of the permission.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"AgentStatusReference": {
+"description": "The reference to public documentation.",
+"id": "AgentStatusReference",
+"properties": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Output only. The name of the reference.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"url": {
+"description": "Output only. The URL of the reference.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"AgentStatusServiceStatus": {
+"description": "The status of a service (process metrics, host metrics, etc.).",
+"id": "AgentStatusServiceStatus",
+"properties": {
+"configValues": {
+"description": "Output only. The configuration values for the service.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AgentStatusConfigValue"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"errorMessage": {
+"description": "Output only. The error message for the service if it is not fully functional.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"fullyFunctional": {
+"description": "Output only. Whether the service is fully functional (all checks passed).",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"iamPermissions": {
+"description": "Output only. The permissions required for the service.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "AgentStatusIAMPermission"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Output only. The name of the service.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. The state of the service (enabled or disabled in the configuration).",
+"enum": [
+"UNSPECIFIED_STATE",
+"SUCCESS_STATE",
+"FAILURE_STATE",
+"ERROR_STATE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"The state is unspecified and has not been checked yet.",
+"The state is successful (enabled, granted, fully functional).",
+"The state is failed (disabled, denied, not fully functional).",
+"There was an internal error while checking the state, state is unknown."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unspecifiedStateMessage": {
+"description": "Output only. The message to display when the service state is unspecified.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "BackupProperties": {
 "description": "Backup properties.",
 "id": "BackupProperties",
@@ -1119,6 +1380,12 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "subComponentHealthes": {
+"items": {
+"$ref": "ComponentHealth"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"subComponentsHealth": {
 "description": "Sub component health.",
 "items": {
 "$ref": "ComponentHealth"
@@ -1506,6 +1773,10 @@
 "description": "A presentation of host resource usage where the workload runs.",
 "id": "Insight",
 "properties": {
+"agentStatus": {
+"$ref": "AgentStatus",
+"description": "The insights data for the agent status."
+},
 "instanceId": {
 "description": "Required. The instance id where the insight is generated from",
 "type": "string"
@@ -1535,54 +1806,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"Instance": {
-"description": "a vm instance",
-"id": "Instance",
-"properties": {
-"name": {
-"description": "Output only. name of the VM",
-"readOnly": true,
-"type": "string"
-},
-"region": {
-"description": "Output only. The location of the VM",
-"readOnly": true,
-"type": "string"
-},
-"status": {
-"description": "Output only. The state of the VM",
-"enum": [
-"INSTANCESTATE_UNSPECIFIED",
-"PROVISIONING",
-"STAGING",
-"RUNNING",
-"STOPPING",
-"STOPPED",
-"TERMINATED",
-"SUSPENDING",
-"SUSPENDED",
-"REPAIRING",
-"DEPROVISIONING"
-],
-"enumDescriptions": [
-"The Status of the VM is unspecified",
-"Resources are being allocated for the instance.",
-"All required resources have been allocated and the instance is being started.",
-"The instance is running.",
-"The instance is currently stopping (either being deleted or killed).",
-"The instance has stopped due to various reasons (user request, VM preemption, project freezing, etc.).",
-"The instance has failed in some way.",
-"The instance is suspending.",
-"The instance is suspended.",
-"The instance is in repair.",
-"The instance is in de-provisioning state."
-],
-"readOnly": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "InstanceProperties": {
 "description": "Instance Properties.",
 "id": "InstanceProperties",
@@ -1595,27 +1818,6 @@
 "description": "Optional. Instance machine type.",
 "type": "string"
 },
-"role": {
-"deprecated": true,
-"description": "Optional. Instance role.",
-"enum": [
-"INSTANCE_ROLE_UNSPECIFIED",
-"INSTANCE_ROLE_ASCS",
-"INSTANCE_ROLE_ERS",
-"INSTANCE_ROLE_APP_SERVER",
-"INSTANCE_ROLE_HANA_PRIMARY",
-"INSTANCE_ROLE_HANA_SECONDARY"
-],
-"enumDescriptions": [
-"Unspecified role.",
-"ASCS role.",
-"ERS role.",
-"APP server.",
-"HANA primary role.",
-"HANA secondary role."
-],
-"type": "string"
-},
 "roles": {
 "description": "Optional. Instance roles.",
 "items": {
@@ -1654,33 +1856,6 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
-"Layer": {
-"description": "The database layer",
-"id": "Layer",
-"properties": {
-"applicationType": {
-"description": "the application layer",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"databaseType": {
-"description": "Optional. the database layer",
-"type": "string"
-},
-"instances": {
-"description": "Optional. instances in a layer",
-"items": {
-"$ref": "Instance"
-},
-"type": "array"
-},
-"sid": {
-"description": "Output only. system identification of a layer",
-"readOnly": true,
-"type": "string"
-}
-},
-"type": "object"
-},
 "ListDiscoveredProfilesResponse": {
 "description": "List discovered profile Response returns discovered profiles from agents",
 "id": "ListDiscoveredProfilesResponse",
@@ -2628,6 +2803,10 @@
 "description": "Optional. Instance is part of a DR site.",
 "type": "boolean"
 },
+"osKernelVersion": {
+"$ref": "SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersion",
+"description": "Optional. The kernel version of the instance."
+},
 "virtualHostname": {
 "description": "Optional. A virtual hostname of the instance if it has one.",
 "type": "string"
@@ -2672,6 +2851,56 @@
 },
 "type": "object"
 },
+"SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersion": {
+"description": "KernelVersion encapsulates the kernel version data for the system.",
+"id": "SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersion",
+"properties": {
+"distroKernel": {
+"$ref": "SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersionVersion",
+"description": "Optional. Captures the distro-specific kernel version, the portion of the string following the first dash."
+},
+"osKernel": {
+"$ref": "SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersionVersion",
+"description": "Optional. Captures the OS-specific kernel version, the portion of the string up to the first dash."
+},
+"rawString": {
+"description": "Optional. Raw string of the kernel version.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersionVersion": {
+"description": "Version is reported as Major.Minor.Build.Patch.",
+"id": "SapDiscoveryResourceInstancePropertiesKernelVersionVersion",
+"properties": {
+"build": {
+"description": "Optional. The build version number.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"major": {
+"description": "Optional. The major version number.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"minor": {
+"description": "Optional. The minor version number.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Optional. The patch version number.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"remainder": {
+"description": "Optional. A catch-all for any unparsed version components. This is in case the number of points in the version string exceeds the expected count of 4.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
 "SapDiscoveryWorkloadProperties": {
 "description": "A set of properties describing an SAP workload.",
 "id": "SapDiscoveryWorkloadProperties",
@@ -3137,21 +3366,6 @@
 "description": "workload resource",
 "id": "WorkloadProfile",
 "properties": {
-"application": {
-"$ref": "Layer",
-"deprecated": true,
-"description": "Optional. The application layer"
-},
-"ascs": {
-"$ref": "Layer",
-"deprecated": true,
-"description": "Optional. The ascs layer"
-},
-"database": {
-"$ref": "Layer",
-"deprecated": true,
-"description": "Optional. The database layer"
-},
 "labels": {
 "additionalProperties": {
 "type": "string"
@@ -3160,7 +3374,7 @@
 "type": "object"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Identifier. name of resource names have the form 'projects/{project_id}/workloads/{workload_id}'",
+"description": "Identifier. name of resource names have the form 'projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/workloadProfiles/{workload_id}'",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "refreshedTime": {
@@ -3172,39 +3386,15 @@
 "$ref": "SapWorkload",
 "description": "The sap workload content"
 },
-"state": {
-"deprecated": true,
-"description": "Output only. [output only] the current state if a a workload",
-"enum": [
-"STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
-"ACTIVE",
-"DEPLOYING",
-"DESTROYING",
-"MAINTENANCE"
-],
-"enumDescriptions": [
-"unspecified",
-"ACTIVE state",
-"workload is in Deploying state",
-"The workload is in Destroying state",
-"The Workload is undermaintance"
-],
-"readOnly": true,
-"type": "string"
-},
 "workloadType": {
 "description": "Required. The type of the workload",
 "enum": [
 "WORKLOAD_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
-"S4_HANA",
-"SQL_SERVER",
-"THREE_TIER_WEB_APP"
+"S4_HANA"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "unspecified workload type",
-"running sap workload s4/hana",
-"running sqlserver workload",
-"running 3 tier web app workload"
+"running sap workload s4/hana"
 ],
 "type": "string"
 }
@@ -3221,6 +3411,12 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "componentHealthes": {
+"items": {
+"$ref": "ComponentHealth"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"componentsHealth": {
 "description": "The detailed condition reports of each component.",
 "items": {
 "$ref": "ComponentHealth"

From f46664f47255a61a508621c9a56012115e0c3cdc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yoshi Automation 
Date: Tue, 10 Jun 2025 07:09:18 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 32/32] chore(docs): Add new discovery artifacts and artifacts
 with minor updates

---
 ...oidmanagement_v1.enterprises.policies.html |   24 +-
 ...ublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html |    2 +-
 .../apihub_v1.projects.locations.apis.html    |   36 +-
 docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html    |   12 +-
 docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html                  |   12 +-
 docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.members.html          |    8 +-
 docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2.media.html           |    8 +-
 docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2beta.media.html       |    8 +-
 docs/dyn/cloudtrace_v1.projects.traces.html   |    2 +-
 ...fig_v1.projects.locations.deployments.html |   18 +-
 docs/dyn/css_v1.accounts.cssProducts.html     |    2 +-
 ...lex_v1.projects.locations.aspectTypes.html |    8 +-
 ...displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html |   32 +-
 ...displayvideo_v4.advertisers.lineItems.html |   32 +-
 ...books_v2.projects.locations.instances.html |    2 +-
 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.html         |  111 +
 .../dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.html |   91 +
 ...ervicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.html |  212 ++
 ...t_v1beta1.projects.locations.releases.html |  499 +++
 ...beta1.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.html |  355 ++
 ...t_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html |  457 +++
 ...emgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.saas.html |  337 ++
 ...mt_v1beta1.projects.locations.tenants.html |  319 ++
 ..._v1beta1.projects.locations.unitKinds.html |  523 +++
 ...ta1.projects.locations.unitOperations.html |  553 +++
 ...mgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.units.html |  631 ++++
 ...icenetworking_v1.services.connections.html |   10 +-
 docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.html   |   10 +-
 ...v1.services.projects.global_.networks.html |   12 +-
 ...cts.global_.networks.peeredDnsDomains.html |    4 +-
 .../documents/androidmanagement.v1.json       |   10 +-
 .../documents/androidpublisher.v3.json        |    4 +-
 .../discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json  |    8 +-
 .../documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json        |   78 +-
 .../documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json   |   78 +-
 .../discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json    |   12 +-
 .../documents/chromemanagement.v1.json        |    8 +-
 .../documents/cloudkms.v1.json                |   26 +-
 .../documents/cloudsupport.v2.json            |    4 +-
 .../documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json        |    4 +-
 .../documents/cloudtrace.v1.json              |    4 +-
 .../discovery_cache/documents/config.v1.json  |    8 +-
 .../discovery_cache/documents/css.v1.json     |    4 +-
 .../documents/dataplex.v1.json                |    4 +-
 .../documents/displayvideo.v2.json            |    6 +-
 .../documents/displayvideo.v4.json            |    6 +-
 .../documents/notebooks.v2.json               |    4 +-
 .../documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json    | 3294 +++++++++++++++++
 .../documents/servicenetworking.v1.json       |   26 +-
 .../documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json   |   12 +-
 .../documents/versionhistory.v1.json          |    4 +-
 51 files changed, 7661 insertions(+), 273 deletions(-)
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.releases.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.saas.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.tenants.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitKinds.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitOperations.html
 create mode 100644 docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.units.html
 create mode 100644 googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json

diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.policies.html b/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.policies.html
index 4635d3db89..d75a3828fb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.policies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.policies.html
@@ -169,9 +169,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "disabled": True or False, # Whether the app is disabled. When disabled, the app data is still preserved.
-      "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.
+      "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the app on the device must match one of the entries in signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 or the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy. If the app is not on Play Store and signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 is not set, a nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported.
         "notificationReceiver": "A String", # Fully qualified class name of the receiver service class for Android Device Policy to notify the extension app of any local command status updates.
-        "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hash of the signing certificate of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.If not specified, the signature for the corresponding package name is obtained from the Play Store instead.If this list is empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match the signature obtained from the Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.If this list is not empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match one of the entries in this list for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
+        "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hashes of the signing key certificates of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.The signing key certificate fingerprints are always obtained from the Play Store and this field is used to provide additional signing key certificate fingerprints. However, if the application is not available on the Play Store, this field needs to be set. A nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported if this field is not set when the application is not available on the Play Store.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the extension app on the device must match one of the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from the Play Store or the ones provided in this field for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
           "A String",
         ],
       },
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "bluetoothSharing": "A String", # Optional. Controls whether Bluetooth sharing is allowed.
     "configureWifi": "A String", # Controls Wi-Fi configuring privileges. Based on the option set, user will have either full or limited or no control in configuring Wi-Fi networks.
-    "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above.
+    "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above. See 5G network slicing (https://developers.google.com/android/management/5g-network-slicing) guide for more details.
       "defaultPreferentialNetworkId": "A String", # Required. Default preferential network ID for the applications that are not in applications or if ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId is set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED. There must be a configuration for the specified network ID in preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs, unless this is set to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. If set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED or unset, this defaults to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. Note: If the default preferential network is misconfigured, applications with no ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId set are not able to access the internet. This setting does not apply to the following critical apps: com.google.android.apps.work.clouddpc com.google.android.gmsApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId can still be used to configure the preferential network for them.
       "preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs": [ # Required. Preferential network service configurations which enables having multiple enterprise slices. There must not be multiple configurations with the same preferentialNetworkId. If a configuration is not referenced by any application by setting ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId or by setting defaultPreferentialNetworkId, it will be ignored. For devices on 4G networks, enterprise APN needs to be configured additionally to set up data call for preferential network service. These APNs can be added using apnPolicy.
         { # Individual preferential network service configuration.
@@ -662,9 +662,9 @@ 
Method Details

             "A String",
           ],
           "disabled": True or False, # Whether the app is disabled. When disabled, the app data is still preserved.
-          "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.
+          "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the app on the device must match one of the entries in signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 or the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy. If the app is not on Play Store and signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 is not set, a nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported.
             "notificationReceiver": "A String", # Fully qualified class name of the receiver service class for Android Device Policy to notify the extension app of any local command status updates.
-            "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hash of the signing certificate of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.If not specified, the signature for the corresponding package name is obtained from the Play Store instead.If this list is empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match the signature obtained from the Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.If this list is not empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match one of the entries in this list for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
+            "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hashes of the signing key certificates of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.The signing key certificate fingerprints are always obtained from the Play Store and this field is used to provide additional signing key certificate fingerprints. However, if the application is not available on the Play Store, this field needs to be set. A nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported if this field is not set when the application is not available on the Play Store.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the extension app on the device must match one of the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from the Play Store or the ones provided in this field for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
               "A String",
             ],
           },
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ 
Method Details

         },
         "bluetoothSharing": "A String", # Optional. Controls whether Bluetooth sharing is allowed.
         "configureWifi": "A String", # Controls Wi-Fi configuring privileges. Based on the option set, user will have either full or limited or no control in configuring Wi-Fi networks.
-        "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above.
+        "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above. See 5G network slicing (https://developers.google.com/android/management/5g-network-slicing) guide for more details.
           "defaultPreferentialNetworkId": "A String", # Required. Default preferential network ID for the applications that are not in applications or if ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId is set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED. There must be a configuration for the specified network ID in preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs, unless this is set to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. If set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED or unset, this defaults to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. Note: If the default preferential network is misconfigured, applications with no ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId set are not able to access the internet. This setting does not apply to the following critical apps: com.google.android.apps.work.clouddpc com.google.android.gmsApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId can still be used to configure the preferential network for them.
           "preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs": [ # Required. Preferential network service configurations which enables having multiple enterprise slices. There must not be multiple configurations with the same preferentialNetworkId. If a configuration is not referenced by any application by setting ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId or by setting defaultPreferentialNetworkId, it will be ignored. For devices on 4G networks, enterprise APN needs to be configured additionally to set up data call for preferential network service. These APNs can be added using apnPolicy.
             { # Individual preferential network service configuration.
@@ -1161,9 +1161,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "disabled": True or False, # Whether the app is disabled. When disabled, the app data is still preserved.
-      "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.
+      "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the app on the device must match one of the entries in signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 or the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy. If the app is not on Play Store and signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 is not set, a nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported.
         "notificationReceiver": "A String", # Fully qualified class name of the receiver service class for Android Device Policy to notify the extension app of any local command status updates.
-        "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hash of the signing certificate of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.If not specified, the signature for the corresponding package name is obtained from the Play Store instead.If this list is empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match the signature obtained from the Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.If this list is not empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match one of the entries in this list for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
+        "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hashes of the signing key certificates of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.The signing key certificate fingerprints are always obtained from the Play Store and this field is used to provide additional signing key certificate fingerprints. However, if the application is not available on the Play Store, this field needs to be set. A nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported if this field is not set when the application is not available on the Play Store.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the extension app on the device must match one of the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from the Play Store or the ones provided in this field for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
           "A String",
         ],
       },
@@ -1285,7 +1285,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "bluetoothSharing": "A String", # Optional. Controls whether Bluetooth sharing is allowed.
     "configureWifi": "A String", # Controls Wi-Fi configuring privileges. Based on the option set, user will have either full or limited or no control in configuring Wi-Fi networks.
-    "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above.
+    "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above. See 5G network slicing (https://developers.google.com/android/management/5g-network-slicing) guide for more details.
       "defaultPreferentialNetworkId": "A String", # Required. Default preferential network ID for the applications that are not in applications or if ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId is set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED. There must be a configuration for the specified network ID in preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs, unless this is set to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. If set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED or unset, this defaults to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. Note: If the default preferential network is misconfigured, applications with no ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId set are not able to access the internet. This setting does not apply to the following critical apps: com.google.android.apps.work.clouddpc com.google.android.gmsApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId can still be used to configure the preferential network for them.
       "preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs": [ # Required. Preferential network service configurations which enables having multiple enterprise slices. There must not be multiple configurations with the same preferentialNetworkId. If a configuration is not referenced by any application by setting ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId or by setting defaultPreferentialNetworkId, it will be ignored. For devices on 4G networks, enterprise APN needs to be configured additionally to set up data call for preferential network service. These APNs can be added using apnPolicy.
         { # Individual preferential network service configuration.
@@ -1643,9 +1643,9 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "disabled": True or False, # Whether the app is disabled. When disabled, the app data is still preserved.
-      "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.
+      "extensionConfig": { # Configuration to enable an app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline. For Android versions 11 and above, extension apps are exempt from battery restrictions so will not be placed into the restricted App Standby Bucket (https://developer.android.com/topic/performance/appstandby#restricted-bucket). Extensions apps are also protected against users clearing their data or force-closing the application, although admins can continue to use the clear app data command on extension apps if needed for Android 11 and above. # Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the app on the device must match one of the entries in signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 or the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy. If the app is not on Play Store and signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 is not set, a nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported.
         "notificationReceiver": "A String", # Fully qualified class name of the receiver service class for Android Device Policy to notify the extension app of any local command status updates.
-        "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hash of the signing certificate of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.If not specified, the signature for the corresponding package name is obtained from the Play Store instead.If this list is empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match the signature obtained from the Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.If this list is not empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match one of the entries in this list for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
+        "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": [ # Hex-encoded SHA-256 hashes of the signing key certificates of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.The signing key certificate fingerprints are always obtained from the Play Store and this field is used to provide additional signing key certificate fingerprints. However, if the application is not available on the Play Store, this field needs to be set. A nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported if this field is not set when the application is not available on the Play Store.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the extension app on the device must match one of the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from the Play Store or the ones provided in this field for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.
           "A String",
         ],
       },
@@ -1767,7 +1767,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
     "bluetoothSharing": "A String", # Optional. Controls whether Bluetooth sharing is allowed.
     "configureWifi": "A String", # Controls Wi-Fi configuring privileges. Based on the option set, user will have either full or limited or no control in configuring Wi-Fi networks.
-    "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above.
+    "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": { # Preferential network service settings. # Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above. See 5G network slicing (https://developers.google.com/android/management/5g-network-slicing) guide for more details.
       "defaultPreferentialNetworkId": "A String", # Required. Default preferential network ID for the applications that are not in applications or if ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId is set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED. There must be a configuration for the specified network ID in preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs, unless this is set to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. If set to PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK_ID_UNSPECIFIED or unset, this defaults to NO_PREFERENTIAL_NETWORK. Note: If the default preferential network is misconfigured, applications with no ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId set are not able to access the internet. This setting does not apply to the following critical apps: com.google.android.apps.work.clouddpc com.google.android.gmsApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId can still be used to configure the preferential network for them.
       "preferentialNetworkServiceConfigs": [ # Required. Preferential network service configurations which enables having multiple enterprise slices. There must not be multiple configurations with the same preferentialNetworkId. If a configuration is not referenced by any application by setting ApplicationPolicy.preferentialNetworkId or by setting defaultPreferentialNetworkId, it will be ignored. For devices on 4G networks, enterprise APN needs to be configured additionally to set up data call for preferential network service. These APNs can be added using apnPolicy.
         { # Individual preferential network service configuration.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html b/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html
index fc26cdf518..90278060a1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/androidpublisher_v3.purchases.subscriptionsv2.html
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request for the purchases.subscriptionsv2.revoke API.
   "revocationContext": { # Revocation context of the purchases.subscriptionsv2.revoke API. # Required. Additional details around the subscription revocation.
-    "fullRefund": { # Used to determine if the refund type in the RevocationContext is a full refund. # Optional. Used when users should be refunded the full amount of the latest order of the subscription.
+    "fullRefund": { # Used to determine if the refund type in the RevocationContext is a full refund. # Optional. Used when users should be refunded the full amount of latest charge on each item in the subscription.
     },
     "itemBasedRefund": { # Used to determine what specific item to revoke in a subscription with multiple items. # Optional. Used when a specific item should be refunded in a subscription with add-on items.
       "productId": "A String", # Required. If the subscription is a subscription with add-ons, the product id of the subscription item to revoke.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apis.html b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apis.html
index 626ec23778..d22d5ba896 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apis.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.apis.html
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # An API resource in the API Hub.
-  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # An API resource in the API Hub.
-  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # An API resource in the API Hub.
-  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ 
Method Details

     { # The ListApis method's response.
   "apis": [ # The API resources present in the API hub.
     { # An API resource in the API Hub.
-      "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+      "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
         "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
         "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
           "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
       },
-      "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+      "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
         "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
         "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
           "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ 
Method Details

           ],
         },
       },
-      "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+      "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
         "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
         "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
           "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ 
Method Details

     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # An API resource in the API Hub.
-  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1434,7 +1434,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1645,7 +1645,7 @@ 
Method Details

   An object of the form:
 
     { # An API resource in the API Hub.
-  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1673,7 +1673,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1729,7 +1729,7 @@ 
Method Details

       ],
     },
   },
-  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+  "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
     "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
     "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
       "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html
index 05fc93978d..0ee2e39f21 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/apihub_v1.projects.locations.html
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ 
Method Details

       "apiMetadata": [ # Required. The list of API metadata.
         { # The API metadata.
           "api": { # An API resource in the API Hub. # Required. The API resource to be pushed to Hub's collect layer. The ID of the API resource will be generated by Hub to ensure uniqueness across all APIs across systems.
-            "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+            "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
               "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
               "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
                 "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 ],
               },
             },
-            "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+            "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
               "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
               "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
                 "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ 
Method Details

                 ],
               },
             },
-            "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+            "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
               "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
               "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
                 "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ 
Method Details

     { # Represents the search results.
       "resource": { # ApiHubResource is one of the resources such as Api, Operation, Deployment, Definition, Spec and Version resources stored in API-Hub. # This represents the ApiHubResource. Note: Only selected fields of the resources are populated in response.
         "api": { # An API resource in the API Hub. # This represents Api resource in search results. Only name, display_name, description and owner fields are populated in search results.
-          "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+          "apiFunctionalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
             "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
             "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
               "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ 
Method Details

               ],
             },
           },
-          "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+          "apiRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
             "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
             "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
               "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
@@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ 
Method Details

               ],
             },
           },
-          "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute.
+          "apiTechnicalRequirements": { # The attribute values associated with resource. # Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory.
             "attribute": "A String", # Output only. The name of the attribute. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/{attribute}
             "enumValues": { # The attribute values of data type enum. # The attribute values associated with a resource in case attribute data type is enum.
               "values": [ # Required. The attribute values in case attribute data type is enum.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html
index 4992c538a0..c9d0ce3341 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.html
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Completes the [import process](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/import-data) for the specified space and makes it visible to users. Requires [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) and domain-wide delegation with the [authorization scope](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize#chat-api-scopes): - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` For more information, see [Authorize Google Chat apps to import data](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authorize-import).

 

   create(body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a space. Can be used to create a named space, or a group chat in `Import mode`. For an example, see [Create a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) When authenticating as an app, the `space.customer` field must be set in the request. Space membership upon creation depends on whether the space is created in `Import mode`: * **Import mode:** No members are created. * **All other modes:** The calling user is added as a member. This is: * The app itself when using app authentication. * The human user when using user authentication. If you receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS` when creating a space, try a different `displayName`. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name.

+
Creates a space. Can be used to create a named space, or a group chat in `Import mode`. For an example, see [Create a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) When authenticating as an app, the `space.customer` field must be set in the request. When authenticating as an app, the Chat app is added as a member of the space. However, unlike human authentication, the Chat app is not added as a space manager. By default, the Chat app can be removed from the space by all space members. To allow only space managers to remove the app from a space, set `space.permission_settings.manage_apps` to `managers_allowed`. Space membership upon creation depends on whether the space is created in `Import mode`: * **Import mode:** No members are created. * **All other modes:** The calling user is added as a member. This is: * The app itself when using app authentication. * The human user when using user authentication. If you receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS` when creating a space, try a different `displayName`. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name.

 

   delete(name, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Deletes a named space. Always performs a cascading delete, which means that the space's child resources—like messages posted in the space and memberships in the space—are also deleted. For an example, see [Delete a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.delete` (only in spaces the app created) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.delete` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.delete`

@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Returns the existing direct message with the specified user. If no direct message space is found, returns a `404 NOT_FOUND` error. For an example, see [Find a direct message](/chat/api/guides/v1/spaces/find-direct-message). With [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app), returns the direct message space between the specified user and the calling Chat app. With [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user), returns the direct message space between the specified user and the authenticated user. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces`

 

   get(name, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Returns details about a space. For an example, see [Get details about a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces`

+
Returns details about a space. For an example, see [Get details about a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` App authentication has the following limitations: - `space.access_settings` is only populated when using the `chat.app.spaces` scope. - `space.predefind_permission_settings` and `space.permission_settings` are only populated when using the `chat.app.spaces` scope, and only for spaces the app created.

 

   list(filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Lists spaces the caller is a member of. Group chats and DMs aren't listed until the first message is sent. For an example, see [List spaces](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/list-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` To list all named spaces by Google Workspace organization, use the [`spaces.search()`](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/search) method using Workspace administrator privileges instead.

@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Retrieves the next page of results.

 

   patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Updates a space. For an example, see [Update a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/update-spaces). If you're updating the `displayName` field and receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS`, try a different display name.. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces`

+
Updates a space. For an example, see [Update a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/update-spaces). If you're updating the `displayName` field and receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS`, try a different display name.. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` App authentication has the following limitations: - To update either `space.predefined_permission_settings` or `space.permission_settings`, the app must be the space creator. - Updating the `space.access_settings.audience` is not supported for app authentication.

 

   search(orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, query=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Returns a list of spaces in a Google Workspace organization based on an administrator's search. Requires [user authentication with administrator privileges](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user#admin-privileges) and one of the following [authorization scopes](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize#chat-api-scopes): - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` In the request, set `use_admin_access` to `true`.

@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     create(body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a space. Can be used to create a named space, or a group chat in `Import mode`. For an example, see [Create a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) When authenticating as an app, the `space.customer` field must be set in the request. Space membership upon creation depends on whether the space is created in `Import mode`: * **Import mode:** No members are created. * **All other modes:** The calling user is added as a member. This is: * The app itself when using app authentication. * The human user when using user authentication. If you receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS` when creating a space, try a different `displayName`. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name.
+  
Creates a space. Can be used to create a named space, or a group chat in `Import mode`. For an example, see [Create a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) When authenticating as an app, the `space.customer` field must be set in the request. When authenticating as an app, the Chat app is added as a member of the space. However, unlike human authentication, the Chat app is not added as a space manager. By default, the Chat app can be removed from the space by all space members. To allow only space managers to remove the app from a space, set `space.permission_settings.manage_apps` to `managers_allowed`. Space membership upon creation depends on whether the space is created in `Import mode`: * **Import mode:** No members are created. * **All other modes:** The calling user is added as a member. This is: * The app itself when using app authentication. * The human user when using user authentication. If you receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS` when creating a space, try a different `displayName`. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name.
 
 Args:
   body: object, The request body.
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     get(name, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Returns details about a space. For an example, see [Get details about a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces`
+  
Returns details about a space. For an example, see [Get details about a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` App authentication has the following limitations: - `space.access_settings` is only populated when using the `chat.app.spaces` scope. - `space.predefind_permission_settings` and `space.permission_settings` are only populated when using the `chat.app.spaces` scope, and only for spaces the app created.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Resource name of the space, in the form `spaces/{space}`. Format: `spaces/{space}` (required)
@@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Updates a space. For an example, see [Update a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/update-spaces). If you're updating the `displayName` field and receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS`, try a different display name.. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces`
+  
Updates a space. For an example, see [Update a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/update-spaces). If you're updating the `displayName` field and receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS`, try a different display name.. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` App authentication has the following limitations: - To update either `space.predefined_permission_settings` or `space.permission_settings`, the app must be the space creator. - Updating the `space.access_settings.audience` is not supported for app authentication.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Identifier. Resource name of the space. Format: `spaces/{space}` Where `{space}` represents the system-assigned ID for the space. You can obtain the space ID by calling the [`spaces.list()`](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/api/reference/rest/v1/spaces/list) method or from the space URL. For example, if the space URL is `https://mail.google.com/mail/u/0/#chat/space/AAAAAAAAA`, the space ID is `AAAAAAAAA`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.members.html b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.members.html
index 3282b17f58..683b39283e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.members.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/chat_v1.spaces.members.html
@@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Close httplib2 connections.

 

   create(parent, body=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Creates a membership for the calling Chat app, a user, or a Google Group. Creating memberships for other Chat apps isn't supported. When creating a membership, if the specified member has their auto-accept policy turned off, then they're invited, and must accept the space invitation before joining. Otherwise, creating a membership adds the member directly to the specified space. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to add the calling app to the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` For example usage, see: - [Invite or add a user to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-user-membership). - [Invite or add a Google Group to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-group-membership). - [Add the Chat app to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-membership-calling-api).

+
Creates a membership for the calling Chat app, a user, or a Google Group. Creating memberships for other Chat apps isn't supported. When creating a membership, if the specified member has their auto-accept policy turned off, then they're invited, and must accept the space invitation before joining. Otherwise, creating a membership adds the member directly to the specified space. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to add the calling app to the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` App authentication is not supported for the following use cases: - Inviting users external to the Workspace organization that owns the space. - Adding a Google Group to a space. - Adding a Chat app to a space. For example usage, see: - [Invite or add a user to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-user-membership). - [Invite or add a Google Group to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-group-membership). - [Add the Chat app to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-membership-calling-api).

 

   delete(name, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

-
Deletes a membership. For an example, see [Remove a user or a Google Chat app from a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to remove the calling app from the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` To delete memberships for space managers, the requester must be a space manager. If you're using [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) the application must be the space creator.

+
Deletes a membership. For an example, see [Remove a user or a Google Chat app from a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to remove the calling app from the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` App authentication is not supported for the following use cases: - Removing a Google Group from a space. - Removing a Chat app from a space. To delete memberships for space managers, the requester must be a space manager. If you're using [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) the Chat app must be the space creator.

 

   get(name, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Returns details about a membership. For an example, see [Get details about a user's or Google Chat app's membership](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships`

@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     create(parent, body=None, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Creates a membership for the calling Chat app, a user, or a Google Group. Creating memberships for other Chat apps isn't supported. When creating a membership, if the specified member has their auto-accept policy turned off, then they're invited, and must accept the space invitation before joining. Otherwise, creating a membership adds the member directly to the specified space. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to add the calling app to the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` For example usage, see: - [Invite or add a user to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-user-membership). - [Invite or add a Google Group to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-group-membership). - [Add the Chat app to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-membership-calling-api).
+  
Creates a membership for the calling Chat app, a user, or a Google Group. Creating memberships for other Chat apps isn't supported. When creating a membership, if the specified member has their auto-accept policy turned off, then they're invited, and must accept the space invitation before joining. Otherwise, creating a membership adds the member directly to the specified space. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to add the calling app to the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` App authentication is not supported for the following use cases: - Inviting users external to the Workspace organization that owns the space. - Adding a Google Group to a space. - Adding a Chat app to a space. For example usage, see: - [Invite or add a user to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-user-membership). - [Invite or add a Google Group to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-group-membership). - [Add the Chat app to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-membership-calling-api).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The resource name of the space for which to create the membership. Format: spaces/{space} (required)
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     delete(name, useAdminAccess=None, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Deletes a membership. For an example, see [Remove a user or a Google Chat app from a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to remove the calling app from the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` To delete memberships for space managers, the requester must be a space manager. If you're using [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) the application must be the space creator.
+  
Deletes a membership. For an example, see [Remove a user or a Google Chat app from a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to remove the calling app from the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` App authentication is not supported for the following use cases: - Removing a Google Group from a space. - Removing a Chat app from a space. To delete memberships for space managers, the requester must be a space manager. If you're using [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) the Chat app must be the space creator.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Resource name of the membership to delete. Chat apps can delete human users' or their own memberships. Chat apps can't delete other apps' memberships. When deleting a human membership, requires the `chat.memberships` scope with [user authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) or the `chat.memberships.app` scope with [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) and the `spaces/{space}/members/{member}` format. You can use the email as an alias for `{member}`. For example, `spaces/{space}/members/example@gmail.com` where `example@gmail.com` is the email of the Google Chat user. When deleting an app membership, requires the `chat.memberships.app` scope and `spaces/{space}/members/app` format. Format: `spaces/{space}/members/{member}` or `spaces/{space}/members/app`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2.media.html b/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2.media.html
index 8f141a800d..7661592aa4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2.media.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2.media.html
@@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Close httplib2 connections.

 

   download(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

+
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

 

   download_media(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

+
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

 

   upload(parent, body=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Create a file attachment on a case or Cloud resource. The attachment must have the following fields set: `filename`. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell echo "This text is in a file I'm uploading using CSAPI." \ > "./example_file.txt" case="projects/some-project/cases/43594844" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ --data-binary @"./example_file.txt" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/upload/v2beta/$case/attachments?attachment.filename=uploaded_via_curl.txt" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) file_path = "./example_file.txt" with open(file_path, "w") as file: file.write( "This text is inside a file I'm going to upload using the Cloud Support API.", ) request = supportApiService.media().upload( parent="projects/some-project/cases/43595344", media_body=file_path ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?attachment.filename=uploaded_via_python.txt" print(request.execute()) ```

@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     download(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
+  
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the file attachment to download. (required)
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     download_media(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
+  
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the file attachment to download. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2beta.media.html b/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2beta.media.html
index a75fa1e26b..ac33506094 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2beta.media.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudsupport_v2beta.media.html
@@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ 
Instance Methods

 
Close httplib2 connections.

 

   download(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

+
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

 

   download_media(name, x__xgafv=None)

-
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

+
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```

 

   upload(parent, body=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, x__xgafv=None)

 
Create a file attachment on a case or Cloud resource. The attachment must have the following fields set: `filename`. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell echo "This text is in a file I'm uploading using CSAPI." \ > "./example_file.txt" case="projects/some-project/cases/43594844" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ --data-binary @"./example_file.txt" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/upload/v2beta/$case/attachments?attachment.filename=uploaded_via_curl.txt" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) file_path = "./example_file.txt" with open(file_path, "w") as file: file.write( "This text is inside a file I'm going to upload using the Cloud Support API.", ) request = supportApiService.media().upload( parent="projects/some-project/cases/43595344", media_body=file_path ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?attachment.filename=uploaded_via_python.txt" print(request.execute()) ```

@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     download(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
+  
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the file attachment to download. (required)
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 

     download_media(name, x__xgafv=None)
-  
Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
+  
Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no "response body" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append "?alt=media" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name="projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ" curl \ --header "Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)" \ "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = "v2" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName="cloudsupport", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name="projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR" ) request.uri = request.uri.split("?")[0] + "?alt=media" print(request.execute()) ```
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the file attachment to download. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudtrace_v1.projects.traces.html b/docs/dyn/cloudtrace_v1.projects.traces.html
index 456ddc3f95..0d33e182fc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudtrace_v1.projects.traces.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudtrace_v1.projects.traces.html
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ 
Method Details

 Args:
   projectId: string, Required. ID of the Cloud project where the trace data is stored. (required)
   endTime: string, End of the time interval (inclusive) during which the trace data was collected from the application.
-  filter: string, Optional. A filter against labels for the request. By default, searches use prefix matching. To specify exact match, prepend a plus symbol (`+`) to the search term. Multiple terms are ANDed. Syntax: * `root:NAME_PREFIX` or `NAME_PREFIX`: Return traces where any root span starts with `NAME_PREFIX`. * `+root:NAME` or `+NAME`: Return traces where any root span's name is exactly `NAME`. * `span:NAME_PREFIX`: Return traces where any span starts with `NAME_PREFIX`. * `+span:NAME`: Return traces where any span's name is exactly `NAME`. * `latency:DURATION`: Return traces whose overall latency is greater or equal to than `DURATION`. Accepted units are nanoseconds (`ns`), milliseconds (`ms`), and seconds (`s`). Default is `ms`. For example, `latency:24ms` returns traces whose overall latency is greater than or equal to 24 milliseconds. * `label:LABEL_KEY`: Return all traces containing the specified label key (exact match, case-sensitive) regardless of the key:value pair's value (including empty values). * `LABEL_KEY:VALUE_PREFIX`: Return all traces containing the specified label key (exact match, case-sensitive) whose value starts with `VALUE_PREFIX`. Both a key and a value must be specified. * `+LABEL_KEY:VALUE`: Return all traces containing a key:value pair exactly matching the specified text. Both a key and a value must be specified. * `method:VALUE`: Equivalent to `/http/method:VALUE`. * `url:VALUE`: Equivalent to `/http/url:VALUE`.
+  filter: string, Optional. A filter against properties of the trace. See [filter syntax documentation](https://cloud.google.com/trace/docs/trace-filters) for details.
   orderBy: string, Optional. Field used to sort the returned traces. Can be one of the following: * `trace_id` * `name` (`name` field of root span in the trace) * `duration` (difference between `end_time` and `start_time` fields of the root span) * `start` (`start_time` field of the root span) Descending order can be specified by appending `desc` to the sort field (for example, `name desc`). Only one sort field is permitted.
   pageSize: integer, Optional. Maximum number of traces to return. If not specified or <= 0, the implementation selects a reasonable value. The implementation may return fewer traces than the requested page size.
   pageToken: string, Token identifying the page of results to return. If provided, use the value of the `next_page_token` field from a previous request.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/config_v1.projects.locations.deployments.html b/docs/dyn/config_v1.projects.locations.deployments.html
index cc79b6b65f..5613e647f2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/config_v1.projects.locations.deployments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/config_v1.projects.locations.deployments.html
@@ -163,12 +163,12 @@ 
Method Details

   "errorCode": "A String", # Output only. Error code describing errors that may have occurred.
   "errorLogs": "A String", # Output only. Location of Terraform error logs in Google Cloud Storage. Format: `gs://{bucket}/{object}`.
   "importExistingResources": True or False, # By default, Infra Manager will return a failure when Terraform encounters a 409 code (resource conflict error) during actuation. If this flag is set to true, Infra Manager will instead attempt to automatically import the resource into the Terraform state (for supported resource types) and continue actuation. Not all resource types are supported, refer to documentation.
-  "labels": { # User-defined metadata for the deployment.
+  "labels": { # Optional. User-defined metadata for the deployment.
     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "latestRevision": "A String", # Output only. Revision name that was most recently applied. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}/ revisions/{revision}`
   "lockState": "A String", # Output only. Current lock state of the deployment.
-  "name": "A String", # Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
   "quotaValidation": "A String", # Optional. Input to control quota checks for resources in terraform configuration files. There are limited resources on which quota validation applies.
   "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. User-specified Service Account (SA) credentials to be used when actuating resources. Format: `projects/{projectID}/serviceAccounts/{serviceAccount}`
   "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the deployment.
@@ -391,12 +391,12 @@ 
Method Details

   "errorCode": "A String", # Output only. Error code describing errors that may have occurred.
   "errorLogs": "A String", # Output only. Location of Terraform error logs in Google Cloud Storage. Format: `gs://{bucket}/{object}`.
   "importExistingResources": True or False, # By default, Infra Manager will return a failure when Terraform encounters a 409 code (resource conflict error) during actuation. If this flag is set to true, Infra Manager will instead attempt to automatically import the resource into the Terraform state (for supported resource types) and continue actuation. Not all resource types are supported, refer to documentation.
-  "labels": { # User-defined metadata for the deployment.
+  "labels": { # Optional. User-defined metadata for the deployment.
     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "latestRevision": "A String", # Output only. Revision name that was most recently applied. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}/ revisions/{revision}`
   "lockState": "A String", # Output only. Current lock state of the deployment.
-  "name": "A String", # Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
   "quotaValidation": "A String", # Optional. Input to control quota checks for resources in terraform configuration files. There are limited resources on which quota validation applies.
   "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. User-specified Service Account (SA) credentials to be used when actuating resources. Format: `projects/{projectID}/serviceAccounts/{serviceAccount}`
   "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the deployment.
@@ -552,12 +552,12 @@ 
Method Details

       "errorCode": "A String", # Output only. Error code describing errors that may have occurred.
       "errorLogs": "A String", # Output only. Location of Terraform error logs in Google Cloud Storage. Format: `gs://{bucket}/{object}`.
       "importExistingResources": True or False, # By default, Infra Manager will return a failure when Terraform encounters a 409 code (resource conflict error) during actuation. If this flag is set to true, Infra Manager will instead attempt to automatically import the resource into the Terraform state (for supported resource types) and continue actuation. Not all resource types are supported, refer to documentation.
-      "labels": { # User-defined metadata for the deployment.
+      "labels": { # Optional. User-defined metadata for the deployment.
         "a_key": "A String",
       },
       "latestRevision": "A String", # Output only. Revision name that was most recently applied. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}/ revisions/{revision}`
       "lockState": "A String", # Output only. Current lock state of the deployment.
-      "name": "A String", # Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
       "quotaValidation": "A String", # Optional. Input to control quota checks for resources in terraform configuration files. There are limited resources on which quota validation applies.
       "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. User-specified Service Account (SA) credentials to be used when actuating resources. Format: `projects/{projectID}/serviceAccounts/{serviceAccount}`
       "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the deployment.
@@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Updates a Deployment.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}` (required)
+  name: string, Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}` (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -689,12 +689,12 @@ 
Method Details

   "errorCode": "A String", # Output only. Error code describing errors that may have occurred.
   "errorLogs": "A String", # Output only. Location of Terraform error logs in Google Cloud Storage. Format: `gs://{bucket}/{object}`.
   "importExistingResources": True or False, # By default, Infra Manager will return a failure when Terraform encounters a 409 code (resource conflict error) during actuation. If this flag is set to true, Infra Manager will instead attempt to automatically import the resource into the Terraform state (for supported resource types) and continue actuation. Not all resource types are supported, refer to documentation.
-  "labels": { # User-defined metadata for the deployment.
+  "labels": { # Optional. User-defined metadata for the deployment.
     "a_key": "A String",
   },
   "latestRevision": "A String", # Output only. Revision name that was most recently applied. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}/ revisions/{revision}`
   "lockState": "A String", # Output only. Current lock state of the deployment.
-  "name": "A String", # Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`
   "quotaValidation": "A String", # Optional. Input to control quota checks for resources in terraform configuration files. There are limited resources on which quota validation applies.
   "serviceAccount": "A String", # Required. User-specified Service Account (SA) credentials to be used when actuating resources. Format: `projects/{projectID}/serviceAccounts/{serviceAccount}`
   "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the deployment.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/css_v1.accounts.cssProducts.html b/docs/dyn/css_v1.accounts.cssProducts.html
index ad663be135..20993616f2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/css_v1.accounts.cssProducts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/css_v1.accounts.cssProducts.html
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Retrieves the processed CSS Product from your CSS Center account. After inserting, updating, or deleting a product input, it may take several minutes before the updated final product can be retrieved.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the CSS product to retrieve. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the CSS product to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/cssProducts/{css_product}` (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.aspectTypes.html b/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.aspectTypes.html
index 3c9adc9a13..d6cbb40580 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.aspectTypes.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dataplex_v1.projects.locations.aspectTypes.html
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "recordFields": [ # Optional. Field definition. You must specify it if the type is record. It defines the nested fields.
       # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDataplexV1AspectTypeMetadataTemplate
     ],
-    "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string integer boolean double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
+    "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string int bool double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
     "typeId": "A String", # Optional. You can use type id if this definition of the field needs to be reused later. The type id must be unique across the entire template. You can only specify it if the field type is record.
     "typeRef": "A String", # Optional. A reference to another field definition (not an inline definition). The value must be equal to the value of an id field defined elsewhere in the MetadataTemplate. Only fields with record type can refer to other fields.
   },
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "recordFields": [ # Optional. Field definition. You must specify it if the type is record. It defines the nested fields.
       # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDataplexV1AspectTypeMetadataTemplate
     ],
-    "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string integer boolean double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
+    "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string int bool double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
     "typeId": "A String", # Optional. You can use type id if this definition of the field needs to be reused later. The type id must be unique across the entire template. You can only specify it if the field type is record.
     "typeRef": "A String", # Optional. A reference to another field definition (not an inline definition). The value must be equal to the value of an id field defined elsewhere in the MetadataTemplate. Only fields with record type can refer to other fields.
   },
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ 
Method Details

         "recordFields": [ # Optional. Field definition. You must specify it if the type is record. It defines the nested fields.
           # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDataplexV1AspectTypeMetadataTemplate
         ],
-        "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string integer boolean double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
+        "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string int bool double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
         "typeId": "A String", # Optional. You can use type id if this definition of the field needs to be reused later. The type id must be unique across the entire template. You can only specify it if the field type is record.
         "typeRef": "A String", # Optional. A reference to another field definition (not an inline definition). The value must be equal to the value of an id field defined elsewhere in the MetadataTemplate. Only fields with record type can refer to other fields.
       },
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ 
Method Details

     "recordFields": [ # Optional. Field definition. You must specify it if the type is record. It defines the nested fields.
       # Object with schema name: GoogleCloudDataplexV1AspectTypeMetadataTemplate
     ],
-    "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string integer boolean double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
+    "type": "A String", # Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string int bool double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC "Zulu" (Examples: "2014-10-02T15:01:23Z" and "2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z").Complex types: enum array map record
     "typeId": "A String", # Optional. You can use type id if this definition of the field needs to be reused later. The type id must be unique across the entire template. You can only specify it if the field type is record.
     "typeRef": "A String", # Optional. A reference to another field definition (not an inline definition). The value must be equal to the value of an id field defined elsewhere in the MetadataTemplate. Only fields with record type can refer to other fields.
   },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html
index 065050a50e..669004c887 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v2.advertisers.lineItems.html
@@ -910,8 +910,8 @@ 
Method Details

         "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
         "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
       },
-      "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-      "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+      "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+      "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
       "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
         "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
         "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -1135,8 +1135,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
       "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
     },
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -1320,8 +1320,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
       "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
     },
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -1573,8 +1573,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
       "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
     },
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -1766,8 +1766,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
       "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
     },
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -1964,8 +1964,8 @@ 
Method Details

           "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
           "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
         },
-        "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-        "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+        "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+        "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
         "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
           "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
           "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -2169,8 +2169,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
       "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
     },
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
@@ -2355,8 +2355,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "type": "A String", # The type of the bidding strategy.
       "value": "A String", # The value used by the bidding strategy. When the bidding strategy is assigned at the line item level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` When the bidding strategy is assigned at the ad group level, this field is only applicable for the following strategy types: * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_MANUAL_CPV` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPA` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_RESERVE_CPM` * `YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_BIDDING_STRATEGY_TYPE_TARGET_ROAS` If not using an applicable strategy, the value of this field will be 0.
     },
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutubeSearch": True or False, # Whether to target inventory on the YouTube search results page.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v4.advertisers.lineItems.html b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v4.advertisers.lineItems.html
index 79ee84ec95..d9a3ee4016 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v4.advertisers.lineItems.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v4.advertisers.lineItems.html
@@ -997,8 +997,8 @@ 
Method Details

       "A String",
     ],
     "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-      "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-      "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+      "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+      "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
       "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
         "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
         "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -1222,8 +1222,8 @@ 
Method Details

     "A String",
   ],
   "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -1407,8 +1407,8 @@ 
Method Details

     "A String",
   ],
   "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -1660,8 +1660,8 @@ 
Method Details

     "A String",
   ],
   "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -1853,8 +1853,8 @@ 
Method Details

     "A String",
   ],
   "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -2051,8 +2051,8 @@ 
Method Details

         "A String",
       ],
       "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-        "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-        "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+        "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+        "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
         "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
           "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
           "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -2256,8 +2256,8 @@ 
Method Details

     "A String",
   ],
   "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
@@ -2442,8 +2442,8 @@ 
Method Details

     "A String",
   ],
   "youtubeAndPartnersSettings": { # Settings for YouTube and Partners line items. # Output only. Settings specific to YouTube and Partners line items.
-    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.
-    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.
+    "contentCategory": "A String", # The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
+    "effectiveContentCategory": "A String", # Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)
     "inventorySourceSettings": { # Settings that control what YouTube related inventories the YouTube and Partners line item will target. # Settings that control what YouTube and Partners inventories the line item will target.
       "includeGoogleTv": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory in video apps available with Google TV.
       "includeYoutube": True or False, # Optional. Whether to target inventory on YouTube. This includes both search, channels and videos.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/notebooks_v2.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/notebooks_v2.projects.locations.instances.html
index e7f92ea6d3..e9a80f5900 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/notebooks_v2.projects.locations.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/notebooks_v2.projects.locations.instances.html
@@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ 
Method Details

 }
 
   requestId: string, Optional. Idempotent request UUID.
-  updateMask: string, Required. Mask used to update an instance
+  updateMask: string, Required. Mask used to update an instance. Updatable fields: * `labels` * `gce_setup.min_cpu_platform` * `gce_setup.metadata` * `gce_setup.machine_type` * `gce_setup.accelerator_configs` * `gce_setup.accelerator_configs.type` * `gce_setup.accelerator_configs.core_count` * `gce_setup.gpu_driver_config` * `gce_setup.gpu_driver_config.enable_gpu_driver` * `gce_setup.gpu_driver_config.custom_gpu_driver_path` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config.enable_secure_boot` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config.enable_vtpm` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config.enable_integrity_monitoring` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity.consume_reservation_type` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity.key` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity.values` * `gce_setup.tags` * `gce_setup.container_image` * `gce_setup.container_image.repository` * `gce_setup.container_image.tag` * `gce_setup.disable_public_ip` * `disable_proxy_access`
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..757f2f860b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API

+
Instance Methods

+

+  projects()
+

+
Returns the projects Resource.

+
+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  new_batch_http_request()

+
Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    new_batch_http_request()
+  
Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+
+                Args:
+                  callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the
+                    form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the
+                    request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The
+                    third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP
+                    error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error
+                    occurred.
+
+                Returns:
+                  A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+                

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d286eba27d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.html
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects

+
Instance Methods

+

+  locations()
+

+
Returns the locations Resource.

+
+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d1225dcf3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.html
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations

+
Instance Methods

+

+  releases()
+

+
Returns the releases Resource.

+
+

+  rolloutKinds()
+

+
Returns the rolloutKinds Resource.

+
+

+  rollouts()
+

+
Returns the rollouts Resource.

+
+

+  saas()
+

+
Returns the saas Resource.

+
+

+  tenants()
+

+
Returns the tenants Resource.

+
+

+  unitKinds()
+

+
Returns the unitKinds Resource.

+
+

+  unitOperations()
+

+
Returns the unitOperations Resource.

+
+

+  units()
+

+
Returns the units Resource.

+
+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Gets information about a location.

+

+  list(name, extraLocationTypes=None, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Lists information about the supported locations for this service.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Gets information about a location.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Resource name for the location. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.
+  "displayName": "A String", # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, "Tokyo".
+  "labels": { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {"cloud.googleapis.com/region": "us-east1"}
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locationId": "A String", # The canonical id for this location. For example: `"us-east1"`.
+  "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+    "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `"projects/example-project/locations/us-east1"`
+}

+

+
+

+    list(name, extraLocationTypes=None, filter=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Lists information about the supported locations for this service.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable. (required)
+  extraLocationTypes: string, Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations. (repeated)
+  filter: string, A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `"displayName=tokyo"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default.
+  pageToken: string, A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response message for Locations.ListLocations.
+  "locations": [ # A list of locations that matches the specified filter in the request.
+    { # A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.
+      "displayName": "A String", # The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, "Tokyo".
+      "labels": { # Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {"cloud.googleapis.com/region": "us-east1"}
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "locationId": "A String", # The canonical id for this location. For example: `"us-east1"`.
+      "metadata": { # Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.
+        "a_key": "", # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `"projects/example-project/locations/us-east1"`
+    },
+  ],
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # The standard List next-page token.
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.releases.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.releases.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9bc0eba286
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.releases.html
@@ -0,0 +1,499 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . releases

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, releaseId=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new release.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single release.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single release.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of releases.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single release.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, releaseId=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new release.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the release. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "blueprint": { # Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev). # Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit.
+    "engine": "A String", # Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.
+    "package": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).
+    "version": "A String", # Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableDefaults": [ # Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}"
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "releaseRequirements": { # Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release. # Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.
+    "upgradeableFromReleases": [ # Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  releaseId: string, Required. The ID value for the new release.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "blueprint": { # Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev). # Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit.
+    "engine": "A String", # Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.
+    "package": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).
+    "version": "A String", # Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableDefaults": [ # Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}"
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "releaseRequirements": { # Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release. # Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.
+    "upgradeableFromReleases": [ # Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single release.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the release. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the release. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single release.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "blueprint": { # Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev). # Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit.
+    "engine": "A String", # Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.
+    "package": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).
+    "version": "A String", # Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableDefaults": [ # Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}"
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "releaseRequirements": { # Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release. # Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.
+    "upgradeableFromReleases": [ # Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of releases.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the release. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of releases to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListReleases method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListReleases call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "releases": [ # The resulting releases.
+    { # A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "blueprint": { # Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev). # Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit.
+        "engine": "A String", # Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.
+        "package": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).
+        "version": "A String", # Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "inputVariableDefaults": [ # Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100
+        { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+        },
+      ],
+      "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec
+        { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+        },
+      ],
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}"
+      "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status
+        { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+        },
+      ],
+      "releaseRequirements": { # Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release. # Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.
+        "upgradeableFromReleases": [ # Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.
+          "A String",
+        ],
+      },
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single release.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "blueprint": { # Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev). # Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit.
+    "engine": "A String", # Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.
+    "package": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).
+    "version": "A String", # Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableDefaults": [ # Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}"
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "releaseRequirements": { # Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release. # Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.
+    "upgradeableFromReleases": [ # Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Release resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Release will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "blueprint": { # Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev). # Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit.
+    "engine": "A String", # Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.
+    "package": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).
+    "version": "A String", # Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableDefaults": [ # Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}"
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "releaseRequirements": { # Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release. # Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.
+    "upgradeableFromReleases": [ # Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.
+      "A String",
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dc571f00fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.html
@@ -0,0 +1,355 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . rolloutKinds

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, rolloutKindId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new rollout kind.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single rollout kind.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single rollout kind.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of rollout kinds.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single rollout kind.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, rolloutKindId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new rollout kind.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the rollout kind. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "errorBudget": { # The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. # Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered.
+    "allowedCount": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.
+    "allowedPercentage": 42, # Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.
+  },
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}"
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "updateUnitKindStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  rolloutKindId: string, Required. The ID value for the new rollout kind.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "errorBudget": { # The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. # Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered.
+    "allowedCount": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.
+    "allowedPercentage": 42, # Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.
+  },
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}"
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "updateUnitKindStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single rollout kind.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the rollout kind. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the rollout kind. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single rollout kind.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "errorBudget": { # The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. # Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered.
+    "allowedCount": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.
+    "allowedPercentage": 42, # Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.
+  },
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}"
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "updateUnitKindStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of rollout kinds.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the rollout kind. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of rollout kinds to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListRolloutKinds method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListRolloutKinds call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "rolloutKinds": [ # The resulting rollout kinds.
+    { # An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "errorBudget": { # The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. # Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered.
+        "allowedCount": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.
+        "allowedPercentage": 42, # Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.
+      },
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}"
+      "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+      "updateUnitKindStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single rollout kind.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "errorBudget": { # The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. # Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered.
+    "allowedCount": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.
+    "allowedPercentage": 42, # Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.
+  },
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}"
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "updateUnitKindStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the RolloutKind resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the RolloutKind will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "errorBudget": { # The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. # Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered.
+    "allowedCount": 42, # Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.
+    "allowedPercentage": 42, # Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.
+  },
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}"
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "updateUnitKindStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..44fcb38a20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.rollouts.html
@@ -0,0 +1,457 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . rollouts

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, rolloutId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new rollout.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single rollout.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single rollout.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of rollouts.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single rollout.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, rolloutId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new rollout.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the rollout. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a single rollout execution and its results
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "control": { # RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it. # Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state.
+    "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.
+    "runParams": { # Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state. # Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed.
+      "retryFailedOperations": True or False, # Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.
+    },
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}"
+  "parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.
+  "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout.
+  "stateMessage": "A String", # Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.
+  "stateTransitionTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.
+  "stats": { # RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout. # Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.
+    "operationsByState": [ # Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - "SCHEDULED" - "PENDING" - "RUNNING" - "SUCCEEDED" - "FAILED" - "CANCELLED"
+      { # Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.
+        "count": 42, # Required. Number of records in the group.
+        "group": "A String", # Required. Group by which to aggregate.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  rolloutId: string, Required. The ID value for the new rollout.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a single rollout execution and its results
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "control": { # RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it. # Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state.
+    "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.
+    "runParams": { # Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state. # Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed.
+      "retryFailedOperations": True or False, # Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.
+    },
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}"
+  "parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.
+  "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout.
+  "stateMessage": "A String", # Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.
+  "stateTransitionTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.
+  "stats": { # RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout. # Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.
+    "operationsByState": [ # Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - "SCHEDULED" - "PENDING" - "RUNNING" - "SUCCEEDED" - "FAILED" - "CANCELLED"
+      { # Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.
+        "count": 42, # Required. Number of records in the group.
+        "group": "A String", # Required. Group by which to aggregate.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single rollout.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the rollout. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the rollout. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single rollout.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a single rollout execution and its results
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "control": { # RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it. # Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state.
+    "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.
+    "runParams": { # Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state. # Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed.
+      "retryFailedOperations": True or False, # Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.
+    },
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}"
+  "parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.
+  "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout.
+  "stateMessage": "A String", # Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.
+  "stateTransitionTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.
+  "stats": { # RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout. # Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.
+    "operationsByState": [ # Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - "SCHEDULED" - "PENDING" - "RUNNING" - "SUCCEEDED" - "FAILED" - "CANCELLED"
+      { # Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.
+        "count": 42, # Required. Number of records in the group.
+        "group": "A String", # Required. Group by which to aggregate.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of rollouts.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the rollout. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of rollouts to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListRollouts method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListRollouts call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "rollouts": [ # The resulting rollouts.
+    { # Represents a single rollout execution and its results
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "control": { # RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it. # Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state.
+        "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.
+        "runParams": { # Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state. # Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed.
+          "retryFailedOperations": True or False, # Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.
+        },
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}"
+      "parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+      "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.
+      "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.
+      "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+      "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+      "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.
+      "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout.
+      "stateMessage": "A String", # Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.
+      "stateTransitionTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.
+      "stats": { # RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout. # Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.
+        "operationsByState": [ # Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - "SCHEDULED" - "PENDING" - "RUNNING" - "SUCCEEDED" - "FAILED" - "CANCELLED"
+          { # Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.
+            "count": 42, # Required. Number of records in the group.
+            "group": "A String", # Required. Group by which to aggregate.
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single rollout.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a single rollout execution and its results
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "control": { # RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it. # Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state.
+    "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.
+    "runParams": { # Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state. # Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed.
+      "retryFailedOperations": True or False, # Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.
+    },
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}"
+  "parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.
+  "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout.
+  "stateMessage": "A String", # Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.
+  "stateTransitionTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.
+  "stats": { # RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout. # Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.
+    "operationsByState": [ # Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - "SCHEDULED" - "PENDING" - "RUNNING" - "SUCCEEDED" - "FAILED" - "CANCELLED"
+      { # Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.
+        "count": 42, # Required. Number of records in the group.
+        "group": "A String", # Required. Group by which to aggregate.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Rollout resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Rollout will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a single rollout execution and its results
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "control": { # RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it. # Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state.
+    "action": "A String", # Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.
+    "runParams": { # Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state. # Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed.
+      "retryFailedOperations": True or False, # Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.
+    },
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "endTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}"
+  "parentRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.
+  "rolloutKind": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.
+  "rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": "A String", # Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - "Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce" - "Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.
+  "rootRollout": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}"
+  "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.
+  "state": "A String", # Output only. Current state of the rollout.
+  "stateMessage": "A String", # Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.
+  "stateTransitionTime": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.
+  "stats": { # RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout. # Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.
+    "operationsByState": [ # Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - "SCHEDULED" - "PENDING" - "RUNNING" - "SUCCEEDED" - "FAILED" - "CANCELLED"
+      { # Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.
+        "count": 42, # Required. Number of records in the group.
+        "group": "A String", # Required. Group by which to aggregate.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitFilter": "A String", # Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.saas.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.saas.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c2c952128c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.saas.html
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . saas

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, saasId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new saas.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single saas.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single saas.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of saas.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single saas.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, saasId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new saas.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the saas. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locations": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.
+    { # Location information that the service is available in.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Name of location.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}"
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  saasId: string, Required. The ID value for the new saas.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locations": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.
+    { # Location information that the service is available in.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Name of location.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}"
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single saas.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the saas. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the saas. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single saas.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locations": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.
+    { # Location information that the service is available in.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Name of location.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}"
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of saas.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the saas. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of saas to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListSaas method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListSaas call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "saas": [ # The resulting saas.
+    { # Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "locations": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.
+        { # Location information that the service is available in.
+          "name": "A String", # Optional. Name of location.
+        },
+      ],
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}"
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single saas.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locations": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.
+    { # Location information that the service is available in.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Name of location.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}"
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Saas resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Saas will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "locations": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.
+    { # Location information that the service is available in.
+      "name": "A String", # Optional. Name of location.
+    },
+  ],
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}"
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.tenants.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.tenants.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d7045af08f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.tenants.html
@@ -0,0 +1,319 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . tenants

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, tenantId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new tenant.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single tenant.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single tenant.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of tenants.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single tenant.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, tenantId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new tenant.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the tenant. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: "projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8" consumer_resource: "projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe"
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "consumerResource": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}"
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  tenantId: string, Required. The ID value for the new tenant.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: "projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8" consumer_resource: "projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe"
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "consumerResource": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}"
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single tenant.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the tenant. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the tenant. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single tenant.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: "projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8" consumer_resource: "projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe"
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "consumerResource": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}"
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of tenants.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the tenant. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of tenants to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListTenants method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListTenants call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "tenants": [ # The resulting tenants.
+    { # Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: "projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8" consumer_resource: "projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe"
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "consumerResource": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}"
+      "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single tenant.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: "projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8" consumer_resource: "projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe"
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "consumerResource": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}"
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Tenant resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Tenant will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: "projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8" consumer_resource: "projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe"
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "consumerResource": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}"
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitKinds.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitKinds.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6e5a8acec2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitKinds.html
@@ -0,0 +1,523 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . unitKinds

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, unitKindId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new unit kind.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single unit kind.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single unit kind.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of unit kinds.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single unit kind.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, unitKindId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new unit kind.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the unit kind. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "defaultRelease": "A String", # Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.
+    { # Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.
+      "alias": "A String", # Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency’s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency’s inputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}"
+  "outputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  unitKindId: string, Required. The ID value for the new unit kind.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "defaultRelease": "A String", # Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.
+    { # Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.
+      "alias": "A String", # Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency’s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency’s inputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}"
+  "outputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single unit kind.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the unit kind. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the unit kind. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single unit kind.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "defaultRelease": "A String", # Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.
+    { # Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.
+      "alias": "A String", # Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency’s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency’s inputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}"
+  "outputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of unit kinds.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the unit kind. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of unit kinds to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListUnitKinds method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListUnitKinds call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "unitKinds": [ # The resulting unit kinds.
+    { # Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "defaultRelease": "A String", # Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.
+      "dependencies": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.
+        { # Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.
+          "alias": "A String", # Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.
+          "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.
+        },
+      ],
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "inputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency’s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency’s inputVariables. Maximum 100.
+        { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+          "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+            "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+            "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+          },
+          "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+            "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+            "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+            "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+          },
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+        },
+      ],
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}"
+      "outputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.
+        { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+          "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+            "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+            "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+          },
+          "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+            "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+            "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+            "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+          },
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+        },
+      ],
+      "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single unit kind.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "defaultRelease": "A String", # Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.
+    { # Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.
+      "alias": "A String", # Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency’s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency’s inputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}"
+  "outputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the UnitKind resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the UnitKind will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "defaultRelease": "A String", # Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.
+    { # Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.
+      "alias": "A String", # Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency’s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency’s inputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}"
+  "outputVariableMappings": [ # Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.
+    { # Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies
+      "from": { # Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to
+        "outputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "to": { # Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies # Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies.
+        "dependency": "A String", # Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to
+        "ignoreForLookup": True or False, # Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not
+        "inputVariable": "A String", # Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency
+      },
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. name of the variable
+    },
+  ],
+  "saas": "A String", # Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitOperations.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitOperations.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..512970dc71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.unitOperations.html
@@ -0,0 +1,553 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . unitOperations

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, unitOperationId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new unit operation.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single unit operation.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single unit operation.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of unit operations.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single unit operation.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, unitOperationId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new unit operation.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the unit operation. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "cancel": True or False, # Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "deprovision": { # Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+  },
+  "engineState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.
+  "errorCategory": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}"
+  "parentUnitOperation": "A String", # Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)
+  "provision": { # Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+  "rollout": "A String", # Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.
+  "schedule": { # A time specification to schedule the maintenance. # Optional. When to schedule this operation.
+    "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unit": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "upgrade": { # Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  unitOperationId: string, Required. The ID value for the new unit operation.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "cancel": True or False, # Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "deprovision": { # Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+  },
+  "engineState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.
+  "errorCategory": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}"
+  "parentUnitOperation": "A String", # Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)
+  "provision": { # Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+  "rollout": "A String", # Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.
+  "schedule": { # A time specification to schedule the maintenance. # Optional. When to schedule this operation.
+    "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unit": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "upgrade": { # Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single unit operation.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the unit operation. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the unit operation. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single unit operation.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "cancel": True or False, # Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "deprovision": { # Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+  },
+  "engineState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.
+  "errorCategory": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}"
+  "parentUnitOperation": "A String", # Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)
+  "provision": { # Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+  "rollout": "A String", # Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.
+  "schedule": { # A time specification to schedule the maintenance. # Optional. When to schedule this operation.
+    "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unit": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "upgrade": { # Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of unit operations.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the unit operation. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of unit operations to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListUnitOperations method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListUnitOperations call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "unitOperations": [ # The resulting unit operations.
+    { # UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "cancel": True or False, # Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)
+      "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+        { # UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+          "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+          "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+          "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+          "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+          "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+        },
+      ],
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "deprovision": { # Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+      },
+      "engineState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.
+      "errorCategory": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}"
+      "parentUnitOperation": "A String", # Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)
+      "provision": { # Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.
+        "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+          { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+            "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+            "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+            "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+          },
+        ],
+        "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+      },
+      "rollout": "A String", # Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.
+      "schedule": { # A time specification to schedule the maintenance. # Optional. When to schedule this operation.
+        "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)
+      },
+      "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "unit": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+      "upgrade": { # Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+        "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+          { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+            "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+            "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+            "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+          },
+        ],
+        "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single unit operation.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "cancel": True or False, # Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "deprovision": { # Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+  },
+  "engineState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.
+  "errorCategory": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}"
+  "parentUnitOperation": "A String", # Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)
+  "provision": { # Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+  "rollout": "A String", # Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.
+  "schedule": { # A time specification to schedule the maintenance. # Optional. When to schedule this operation.
+    "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unit": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "upgrade": { # Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the UnitOperation resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the UnitOperation will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "cancel": True or False, # Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "deprovision": { # Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+  },
+  "engineState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.
+  "errorCategory": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}"
+  "parentUnitOperation": "A String", # Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)
+  "provision": { # Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+  "rollout": "A String", # Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.
+  "schedule": { # A time specification to schedule the maintenance. # Optional. When to schedule this operation.
+    "startTime": "A String", # Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)
+  },
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unit": "A String", # Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+  "upgrade": { # Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.
+    "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)
+      { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+        "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+        "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+        "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+      },
+    ],
+    "release": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).
+  },
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.units.html b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.units.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f3d575744c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/saasservicemgmt_v1beta1.projects.locations.units.html
@@ -0,0 +1,631 @@
+
+
+
+
SaaS Runtime API . projects . locations . units

+
Instance Methods

+

+  close()

+
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+  create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, unitId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Create a new unit.

+

+  delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Delete a single unit.

+

+  get(name, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a single unit.

+

+  list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Retrieve a collection of units.

+

+  list_next()

+
Retrieves the next page of results.

+

+  patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)

+
Update a single unit.

+
Method Details

+

+    close()
+  
Close httplib2 connections.

+

+
+

+    create(parent, body=None, requestId=None, unitId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Create a new unit.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the unit. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "dependents": [ # Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "maintenance": { # Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future. # Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.
+    "pinnedUntilTime": "A String", # Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.
+  },
+  "managementMode": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}"
+  "ongoingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "pendingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.
+  "scheduledOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).
+  "systemCleanupAt": "A String", # Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.
+  "systemManagedState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.
+  "tenant": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  unitId: string, Required. The ID value for the new unit.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "dependents": [ # Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "maintenance": { # Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future. # Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.
+    "pinnedUntilTime": "A String", # Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.
+  },
+  "managementMode": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}"
+  "ongoingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "pendingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.
+  "scheduledOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).
+  "systemCleanupAt": "A String", # Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.
+  "systemManagedState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.
+  "tenant": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    delete(name, etag=None, requestId=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Delete a single unit.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  etag: string, The etag known to the client for the expected state of the unit. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the unit. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }
+}

+

+
+

+    get(name, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a single unit.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the resource within a service. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "dependents": [ # Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "maintenance": { # Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future. # Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.
+    "pinnedUntilTime": "A String", # Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.
+  },
+  "managementMode": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}"
+  "ongoingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "pendingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.
+  "scheduledOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).
+  "systemCleanupAt": "A String", # Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.
+  "systemManagedState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.
+  "tenant": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+

+    list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Retrieve a collection of units.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The parent of the unit. (required)
+  filter: string, Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.
+  orderBy: string, Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of units to send per page.
+  pageToken: string, The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # The response structure for the ListUnits method.
+  "nextPageToken": "A String", # If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListUnits call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.
+  "units": [ # The resulting units.
+    { # A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.
+      "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+        { # UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+          "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+          "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+          "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+          "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+          "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+        },
+      ],
+      "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+      "dependencies": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+        { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+          "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+          "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+        },
+      ],
+      "dependents": [ # Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.
+        { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+          "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+          "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+        },
+      ],
+      "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+      "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit
+        { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+        },
+      ],
+      "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+        "a_key": "A String",
+      },
+      "maintenance": { # Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future. # Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.
+        "pinnedUntilTime": "A String", # Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.
+      },
+      "managementMode": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.
+      "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}"
+      "ongoingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.
+        { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+          "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+          "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+          "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+        },
+      ],
+      "pendingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "release": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.
+      "scheduledOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.
+        "A String",
+      ],
+      "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).
+      "systemCleanupAt": "A String", # Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.
+      "systemManagedState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.
+      "tenant": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)
+      "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+      "unitKind": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.
+      "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+    },
+  ],
+  "unreachable": [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+}

+

+
+

+    list_next()
+  
Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+        Args:
+          previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+          previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+        Returns:
+          A request object that you can call 'execute()' on to request the next
+          page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+        

+

+
+

+    patch(name, body=None, requestId=None, updateMask=None, validateOnly=None, x__xgafv=None)
+  
Update a single unit.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}" (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "dependents": [ # Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "maintenance": { # Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future. # Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.
+    "pinnedUntilTime": "A String", # Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.
+  },
+  "managementMode": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}"
+  "ongoingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "pendingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.
+  "scheduledOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).
+  "systemCleanupAt": "A String", # Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.
+  "systemManagedState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.
+  "tenant": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  updateMask: string, Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Unit resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Unit will be overwritten.
+  validateOnly: boolean, If "validate_only" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.
+  "annotations": { # Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "conditions": [ # Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.
+    { # UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.
+      "lastTransitionTime": "A String", # Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.
+      "message": "A String", # Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.
+      "reason": "A String", # Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.
+      "status": "A String", # Required. Status of the condition.
+      "type": "A String", # Required. Type of the condition.
+    },
+  ],
+  "createTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.
+  "dependencies": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "dependents": [ # Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.
+    { # Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.
+      "alias": "A String", # Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.
+      "unit": "A String", # Output only. A reference to the Unit object.
+    },
+  ],
+  "etag": "A String", # Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.
+  "inputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "labels": { # Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.
+    "a_key": "A String",
+  },
+  "maintenance": { # Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future. # Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.
+    "pinnedUntilTime": "A String", # Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.
+  },
+  "managementMode": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.
+  "name": "A String", # Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: "projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}"
+  "ongoingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "outputVariables": [ # Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.
+    { # UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.
+      "type": "A String", # Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.
+      "value": "A String", # Optional. String encoded value for the variable.
+      "variable": "A String", # Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.
+    },
+  ],
+  "pendingOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "release": "A String", # Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.
+  "scheduledOperations": [ # Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.
+    "A String",
+  ],
+  "state": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).
+  "systemCleanupAt": "A String", # Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.
+  "systemManagedState": "A String", # Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.
+  "tenant": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)
+  "uid": "A String", # Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.
+  "unitKind": "A String", # Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.
+  "updateTime": "A String", # Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.
+}

+

+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.connections.html b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.connections.html
index bdcd88deb3..11e37f90cc 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.connections.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.connections.html
@@ -100,12 +100,12 @@ 
Method Details

   
Creates a private connection that establishes a VPC Network Peering connection to a VPC network in the service producer's organization. The administrator of the service consumer's VPC network invokes this method. The administrator must assign one or more allocated IP ranges for provisioning subnetworks in the service producer's VPC network. This connection is used for all supported services in the service producer's organization, so it only needs to be invoked once.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`. (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Represents a private connection resource. A private connection is implemented as a VPC Network Peering connection between a service producer's VPC network and a service consumer's VPC network.
-  "network": "A String", # The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.
+  "network": "A String", # Required. The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.
   "peering": "A String", # Output only. The name of the VPC Network Peering connection that was created by the service producer.
   "reservedPeeringRanges": [ # The name of one or more allocated IP address ranges for this service producer of type `PEERING`. Note that invoking CreateConnection method with a different range when connection is already established will not modify already provisioned service producer subnetworks. If CreateConnection method is invoked repeatedly to reconnect when peering connection had been disconnected on the consumer side, leaving this field empty will restore previously allocated IP ranges.
     "A String",
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ 
Method Details

     { # ListConnectionsResponse is the response to list peering states for the given service and consumer project.
   "connections": [ # The list of Connections.
     { # Represents a private connection resource. A private connection is implemented as a VPC Network Peering connection between a service producer's VPC network and a service consumer's VPC network.
-      "network": "A String", # The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.
+      "network": "A String", # Required. The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.
       "peering": "A String", # Output only. The name of the VPC Network Peering connection that was created by the service producer.
       "reservedPeeringRanges": [ # The name of one or more allocated IP address ranges for this service producer of type `PEERING`. Note that invoking CreateConnection method with a different range when connection is already established will not modify already provisioned service producer subnetworks. If CreateConnection method is invoked repeatedly to reconnect when peering connection had been disconnected on the consumer side, leaving this field empty will restore previously allocated IP ranges.
         "A String",
@@ -218,12 +218,12 @@ 
Method Details

   
Updates the allocated ranges that are assigned to a connection.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The private service connection that connects to a service producer organization. The name includes both the private service name and the VPC network peering name in the format of `services/{peering_service_name}/connections/{vpc_peering_name}`. For Google services that support this functionality, this is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com/connections/servicenetworking-googleapis-com`. (required)
+  name: string, Required. The private service connection that connects to a service producer organization. The name includes both the private service name and the VPC network peering name in the format of `services/{peering_service_name}/connections/{vpc_peering_name}`. For Google services that support this functionality, this is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com/connections/servicenetworking-googleapis-com`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
 { # Represents a private connection resource. A private connection is implemented as a VPC Network Peering connection between a service producer's VPC network and a service consumer's VPC network.
-  "network": "A String", # The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.
+  "network": "A String", # Required. The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.
   "peering": "A String", # Output only. The name of the VPC Network Peering connection that was created by the service producer.
   "reservedPeeringRanges": [ # The name of one or more allocated IP address ranges for this service producer of type `PEERING`. Note that invoking CreateConnection method with a different range when connection is already established will not modify already provisioned service producer subnetworks. If CreateConnection method is invoked repeatedly to reconnect when peering connection had been disconnected on the consumer side, leaving this field empty will restore previously allocated IP ranges.
     "A String",
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.html b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.html
index 000b1e6807..504e390d02 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.html
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "outsideAllocationPublicIpRange": "A String", # Optional. Enable outside allocation using public IP addresses. Any public IP range may be specified. If this field is provided, we will not use customer reserved ranges for this primary IP range.
   "privateIpv6GoogleAccess": "A String", # Optional. The private IPv6 google access type for the VMs in this subnet. For information about the access types that can be set using this field, see [subnetwork](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/subnetworks) in the Compute API documentation.
   "purpose": "A String", # Optional. Defines the purpose field of the subnet, e.g. 'PRIVATE_SERVICE_CONNECT'. For information about the purposes that can be set using this field, see [subnetwork](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/subnetworks) in the Compute API documentation.
-  "region": "A String", # Required. The name of a [region](/compute/docs/regions-zones) for the subnet, such `europe-west1`.
+  "region": "A String", # Required. The name of a [region](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/regions-zones) for the subnet, such `europe-west1`.
   "requestedAddress": "A String", # Optional. The starting address of a range. The address must be a valid IPv4 address in the x.x.x.x format. This value combined with the IP prefix range is the CIDR range for the subnet. The range must be within the allocated range that is assigned to the private connection. If the CIDR range isn't available, the call fails.
   "requestedRanges": [ # Optional. The name of one or more allocated IP address ranges associated with this private service access connection. If no range names are provided all ranges associated with this connection will be considered. If a CIDR range with the specified IP prefix length is not available within these ranges, the call fails.
     "A String",
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ 
Method Details

     },
   ],
   "skipRequestedAddressValidation": True or False, # Optional. Skips validating if the requested_address is in use by SN VPC’s peering group. Compute Engine will still perform this check and fail the request if the requested_address is in use. Note that Compute Engine does not check for the existence of dynamic routes when performing this check. Caller of this API should make sure that there are no dynamic routes overlapping with the requested_address/prefix_length IP address range otherwise the created subnet could cause misrouting.
-  "subnetwork": "A String", # Required. A name for the new subnet. For information about the naming requirements, see [subnetwork](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/subnetworks) in the Compute API documentation.
+  "subnetwork": "A String", # Required. A name for the new subnet. For information about the naming requirements, see [subnetwork](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/subnetworks) in the Compute API documentation.
   "subnetworkUsers": [ # A list of members that are granted the `roles/servicenetworking.subnetworkAdmin` role on the subnet.
     "A String",
   ],
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Disables VPC service controls for a connection.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`. (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ 
Method Details

   
Enables VPC service controls for a connection.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`. (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # Request to search for an unused range within allocated ranges.
   "ipPrefixLength": 42, # Required. The prefix length of the IP range. Use usual CIDR range notation. For example, '30' to find unused x.x.x.x/30 CIDR range. Actual range will be determined using allocated range for the consumer peered network and returned in the result.
-  "network": "A String", # Network name in the consumer project. This network must have been already peered with a shared VPC network using CreateConnection method. Must be in a form 'projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}'. {project} is a project number, as in '12345' {network} is network name.
+  "network": "A String", # Required. Network name in the consumer project. This network must have been already peered with a shared VPC network using CreateConnection method. Must be in a form 'projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}'. {project} is a project number, as in '12345' {network} is network name.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.html b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.html
index 8f2c976178..cf2164a52e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.html
@@ -120,9 +120,9 @@ 
Method Details

     { # Configuration information for a private service access connection.
   "cloudsqlConfigs": [ # Represents one or multiple Cloud SQL configurations.
     { # Cloud SQL configuration.
-      "service": "A String", # Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.
-      "umbrellaNetwork": "A String", # The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
-      "umbrellaProject": "A String", # The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
+      "service": "A String", # Required. Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.
+      "umbrellaNetwork": "A String", # Required. The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
+      "umbrellaProject": "A String", # Required. The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
     },
   ],
   "consumerExportCustomRoutes": True or False, # Export custom routes flag value for peering from consumer to producer.
@@ -180,9 +180,9 @@ 
Method Details

   "consumerConfig": { # Configuration information for a private service access connection. # Required. The updated peering config.
     "cloudsqlConfigs": [ # Represents one or multiple Cloud SQL configurations.
       { # Cloud SQL configuration.
-        "service": "A String", # Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.
-        "umbrellaNetwork": "A String", # The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
-        "umbrellaProject": "A String", # The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
+        "service": "A String", # Required. Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.
+        "umbrellaNetwork": "A String", # Required. The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
+        "umbrellaProject": "A String", # Required. The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.
       },
     ],
     "consumerExportCustomRoutes": True or False, # Export custom routes flag value for peering from consumer to producer.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.peeredDnsDomains.html b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.peeredDnsDomains.html
index c662ba3285..d565f10b49 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.peeredDnsDomains.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/servicenetworking_v1.services.projects.global_.networks.peeredDnsDomains.html
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ 
Method Details

 
 { # DNS domain suffix for which requests originating in the producer VPC network are resolved in the associated consumer VPC network.
   "dnsSuffix": "A String", # The DNS domain name suffix e.g. `example.com.`. Cloud DNS requires that a DNS suffix ends with a trailing dot.
-  "name": "A String", # User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.
+  "name": "A String", # Required. User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ 
Method Details

   "peeredDnsDomains": [ # The list of peered DNS domains.
     { # DNS domain suffix for which requests originating in the producer VPC network are resolved in the associated consumer VPC network.
       "dnsSuffix": "A String", # The DNS domain name suffix e.g. `example.com.`. Cloud DNS requires that a DNS suffix ends with a trailing dot.
-      "name": "A String", # User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.
+      "name": "A String", # Required. User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.
     },
   ],
 }

diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json
index 3e7c003191..d2b29fbed4 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidmanagement.v1.json
@@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250529",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://androidmanagement.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AdbShellCommandEvent": {
@@ -2087,7 +2087,7 @@
 },
 "extensionConfig": {
 "$ref": "ExtensionConfig",
-"description": "Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app."
+"description": "Configuration to enable this app as an extension app, with the capability of interacting with Android Device Policy offline.This field can be set for at most one app.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the app on the device must match one of the entries in signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 or the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy. If the app is not on Play Store and signingKeyFingerprintsSha256 is not set, a nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported."
 },
 "installConstraint": {
 "description": "Optional. The constraints for installing the app. You can specify a maximum of one InstallConstraint. Multiple constraints are rejected.",
@@ -2631,7 +2631,7 @@
 "Clears the application data of specified apps. This is supported on Android 9 and above. Note that an application can store data outside of its application data, for example in external storage or in a user dictionary. See also clear_apps_data_params.",
 "Puts the device into lost mode. Only supported on fully managed devices or organization-owned devices with a managed profile. See also start_lost_mode_params.",
 "Takes the device out of lost mode. Only supported on fully managed devices or organization-owned devices with a managed profile. See also stop_lost_mode_params.",
-"Adds an eSIM profile to the device. This is supported on Android 15 and above. See also addEsimParams.",
+"Adds an eSIM profile to the device. This is supported on Android 15 and above. See also addEsimParams. To remove an eSIM profile, use the REMOVE_ESIM command. To determine what happens to the eSIM profile when a device is wiped, set wipeDataFlags in the policy. Note: To provision multiple eSIMs on a single device, it is recommended to introduce a delay of a few minutes between successive executions of the command.",
 "Removes an eSIM profile from the device. This is supported on Android 15 and above. See also removeEsimParams.",
 "Request information related to the device."
 ],
@@ -3178,7 +3178,7 @@
 },
 "preferentialNetworkServiceSettings": {
 "$ref": "PreferentialNetworkServiceSettings",
-"description": "Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above."
+"description": "Optional. Preferential network service configuration. Setting this field will override preferentialNetworkService. This can be set on both work profiles and fully managed devices on Android 13 and above. See 5G network slicing (https://developers.google.com/android/management/5g-network-slicing) guide for more details."
 },
 "tetheringSettings": {
 "description": "Controls tethering settings. Based on the value set, the user is partially or fully disallowed from using different forms of tethering.",
@@ -3822,7 +3822,7 @@ false
 "type": "string"
 },
 "signingKeyFingerprintsSha256": {
-"description": "Hex-encoded SHA-256 hash of the signing certificate of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.If not specified, the signature for the corresponding package name is obtained from the Play Store instead.If this list is empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match the signature obtained from the Play Store for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.If this list is not empty, the signature of the extension app on the device must match one of the entries in this list for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.",
+"description": "Hex-encoded SHA-256 hashes of the signing key certificates of the extension app. Only hexadecimal string representations of 64 characters are valid.The signing key certificate fingerprints are always obtained from the Play Store and this field is used to provide additional signing key certificate fingerprints. However, if the application is not available on the Play Store, this field needs to be set. A nonComplianceDetail with INVALID_VALUE is reported if this field is not set when the application is not available on the Play Store.The signing key certificate fingerprint of the extension app on the device must match one of the signing key certificate fingerprints obtained from the Play Store or the ones provided in this field for the app to be able to communicate with Android Device Policy.In production use cases, it is recommended to leave this empty.",
 "items": {
 "type": "string"
 },
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json
index 82e4dca32a..17fe859713 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/androidpublisher.v3.json
@@ -4796,7 +4796,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250529",
+"revision": "20250602",
 "rootUrl": "https://androidpublisher.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Abi": {
@@ -8679,7 +8679,7 @@ false
 "properties": {
 "fullRefund": {
 "$ref": "RevocationContextFullRefund",
-"description": "Optional. Used when users should be refunded the full amount of the latest order of the subscription."
+"description": "Optional. Used when users should be refunded the full amount of latest charge on each item in the subscription."
 },
 "itemBasedRefund": {
 "$ref": "RevocationContextItemBasedRefund",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json
index 13023eee32..2dc85d6e61 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/apihub.v1.json
@@ -2780,7 +2780,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250526",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://apihub.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Empty": {
@@ -2861,11 +2861,11 @@
 "properties": {
 "apiFunctionalRequirements": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1AttributeValues",
-"description": "Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute."
+"description": "Optional. The api functional requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-functional-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory."
 },
 "apiRequirements": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1AttributeValues",
-"description": "Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute."
+"description": "Optional. The api requirement doc associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory."
 },
 "apiStyle": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1AttributeValues",
@@ -2873,7 +2873,7 @@
 },
 "apiTechnicalRequirements": {
 "$ref": "GoogleCloudApihubV1AttributeValues",
-"description": "Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute."
+"description": "Optional. The api technical requirements associated with the API resource. Carinality is 1 for this attribute. This maps to the following system defined attribute: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/attributes/system-api-technical-requirements` attribute. The value of the attribute should be a proper URI, and in case of Cloud Storage URI, it should point to a Cloud Storage object, not a directory."
 },
 "attributes": {
 "additionalProperties": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json
index 4f853a5ac4..1b0291aa5d 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1.json
@@ -684,7 +684,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250522",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://assuredworkloads.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleCloudAssuredworkloadsV1AcknowledgeViolationRequest": {
@@ -875,30 +875,30 @@
 ],
 "enumDeprecated": [
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 true,
 true,
 false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
+true,
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
 false,
 false,
@@ -1568,30 +1568,30 @@ false
 ],
 "enumDeprecated": [
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 true,
 true,
 false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
+true,
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
 false,
 false,
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json
index 791990315f..44073da575 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/assuredworkloads.v1beta1.json
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250522",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://assuredworkloads.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleCloudAssuredworkloadsV1beta1AcknowledgeViolationRequest": {
@@ -847,30 +847,30 @@
 ],
 "enumDeprecated": [
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 true,
 true,
 false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
+true,
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
 false,
 false,
@@ -1538,30 +1538,30 @@ false
 ],
 "enumDeprecated": [
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 true,
 true,
 false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
+true,
 false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
-false,
+true,
+true,
+true,
+true,
 false,
 false,
 false,
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json
index 375ad4e6bd..f1ee2afd93 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chat.v1.json
@@ -405,7 +405,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "create": {
-"description": "Creates a space. Can be used to create a named space, or a group chat in `Import mode`. For an example, see [Create a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) When authenticating as an app, the `space.customer` field must be set in the request. Space membership upon creation depends on whether the space is created in `Import mode`: * **Import mode:** No members are created. * **All other modes:** The calling user is added as a member. This is: * The app itself when using app authentication. * The human user when using user authentication. If you receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS` when creating a space, try a different `displayName`. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name.",
+"description": "Creates a space. Can be used to create a named space, or a group chat in `Import mode`. For an example, see [Create a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.create` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) When authenticating as an app, the `space.customer` field must be set in the request. When authenticating as an app, the Chat app is added as a member of the space. However, unlike human authentication, the Chat app is not added as a space manager. By default, the Chat app can be removed from the space by all space members. To allow only space managers to remove the app from a space, set `space.permission_settings.manage_apps` to `managers_allowed`. Space membership upon creation depends on whether the space is created in `Import mode`: * **Import mode:** No members are created. * **All other modes:** The calling user is added as a member. This is: * The app itself when using app authentication. * The human user when using user authentication. If you receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS` when creating a space, try a different `displayName`. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name.",
 "flatPath": "v1/spaces",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "chat.spaces.create",
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "get": {
-"description": "Returns details about a space. For an example, see [Get details about a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces`",
+"description": "Returns details about a space. For an example, see [Get details about a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/get-spaces). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.bot` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and one of the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces.readonly` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` App authentication has the following limitations: - `space.access_settings` is only populated when using the `chat.app.spaces` scope. - `space.predefind_permission_settings` and `space.permission_settings` are only populated when using the `chat.app.spaces` scope, and only for spaces the app created.",
 "flatPath": "v1/spaces/{spacesId}",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "chat.spaces.get",
@@ -558,7 +558,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "patch": {
-"description": "Updates a space. For an example, see [Update a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/update-spaces). If you're updating the `displayName` field and receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS`, try a different display name.. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces`",
+"description": "Updates a space. For an example, see [Update a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/update-spaces). If you're updating the `displayName` field and receive the error message `ALREADY_EXISTS`, try a different display name.. An existing space within the Google Workspace organization might already use this display name. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.spaces` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.spaces` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scopes is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.spaces` App authentication has the following limitations: - To update either `space.predefined_permission_settings` or `space.permission_settings`, the app must be the space creator. - Updating the `space.access_settings.audience` is not supported for app authentication.",
 "flatPath": "v1/spaces/{spacesId}",
 "httpMethod": "PATCH",
 "id": "chat.spaces.patch",
@@ -666,7 +666,7 @@
 "members": {
 "methods": {
 "create": {
-"description": "Creates a membership for the calling Chat app, a user, or a Google Group. Creating memberships for other Chat apps isn't supported. When creating a membership, if the specified member has their auto-accept policy turned off, then they're invited, and must accept the space invitation before joining. Otherwise, creating a membership adds the member directly to the specified space. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to add the calling app to the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` For example usage, see: - [Invite or add a user to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-user-membership). - [Invite or add a Google Group to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-group-membership). - [Add the Chat app to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-membership-calling-api).",
+"description": "Creates a membership for the calling Chat app, a user, or a Google Group. Creating memberships for other Chat apps isn't supported. When creating a membership, if the specified member has their auto-accept policy turned off, then they're invited, and must accept the space invitation before joining. Otherwise, creating a membership adds the member directly to the specified space. Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to add the calling app to the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` App authentication is not supported for the following use cases: - Inviting users external to the Workspace organization that owns the space. - Adding a Google Group to a space. - Adding a Chat app to a space. For example usage, see: - [Invite or add a user to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-user-membership). - [Invite or add a Google Group to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-group-membership). - [Add the Chat app to a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/create-members#create-membership-calling-api).",
 "flatPath": "v1/spaces/{spacesId}/members",
 "httpMethod": "POST",
 "id": "chat.spaces.members.create",
@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@
 ]
 },
 "delete": {
-"description": "Deletes a membership. For an example, see [Remove a user or a Google Chat app from a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to remove the calling app from the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` To delete memberships for space managers, the requester must be a space manager. If you're using [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) the application must be the space creator.",
+"description": "Deletes a membership. For an example, see [Remove a user or a Google Chat app from a space](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/delete-members). Supports the following types of [authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize): - [App authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) with [administrator approval](https://support.google.com/a?p=chat-app-auth) in [Developer Preview](https://developers.google.com/workspace/preview) and the authorization scope: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.app.memberships` - [User authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-user) with one of the following authorization scopes: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships` - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.memberships.app` (to remove the calling app from the space) - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.import` (import mode spaces only) - User authentication grants administrator privileges when an administrator account authenticates, `use_admin_access` is `true`, and the following authorization scope is used: - `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/chat.admin.memberships` App authentication is not supported for the following use cases: - Removing a Google Group from a space. - Removing a Chat app from a space. To delete memberships for space managers, the requester must be a space manager. If you're using [app authentication](https://developers.google.com/workspace/chat/authenticate-authorize-chat-app) the Chat app must be the space creator.",
 "flatPath": "v1/spaces/{spacesId}/members/{membersId}",
 "httpMethod": "DELETE",
 "id": "chat.spaces.members.delete",
@@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250516",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://chat.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AccessSettings": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json
index fcf036efa2..cef11d0085 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/chromemanagement.v1.json
@@ -1280,7 +1280,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250526",
+"revision": "20250605",
 "rootUrl": "https://chromemanagement.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "GoogleChromeManagementV1AndroidAppInfo": {
@@ -1779,16 +1779,14 @@ false
 "CANARY",
 "DEV",
 "BETA",
-"STABLE",
-"LTS"
+"STABLE"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "No release channel specified.",
 "Canary release channel.",
 "Dev release channel.",
 "Beta release channel.",
-"Stable release channel.",
-"Long-term support release channel."
+"Stable release channel."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudkms.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudkms.v1.json
index 97521f5a05..a643b96151 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudkms.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudkms.v1.json
@@ -2402,7 +2402,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250516",
+"revision": "20250523",
 "rootUrl": "https://cloudkms.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AsymmetricDecryptRequest": {
@@ -2867,7 +2867,8 @@
 "HMAC_SHA224",
 "EXTERNAL_SYMMETRIC_ENCRYPTION",
 "PQ_SIGN_ML_DSA_65",
-"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S"
+"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S",
+"PQ_SIGN_HASH_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S_SHA256"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Not specified.",
@@ -2907,7 +2908,8 @@
 "HMAC-SHA224 signing with a 224 bit key.",
 "Algorithm representing symmetric encryption by an external key manager.",
 "The post-quantum Module-Lattice-Based Digital Signature Algorithm, at security level 3. Randomized version.",
-"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version."
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version.",
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized pre-hash version supporting SHA256 digests."
 ],
 "readOnly": true,
 "type": "string"
@@ -3077,7 +3079,8 @@
 "HMAC_SHA224",
 "EXTERNAL_SYMMETRIC_ENCRYPTION",
 "PQ_SIGN_ML_DSA_65",
-"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S"
+"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S",
+"PQ_SIGN_HASH_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S_SHA256"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Not specified.",
@@ -3117,7 +3120,8 @@
 "HMAC-SHA224 signing with a 224 bit key.",
 "Algorithm representing symmetric encryption by an external key manager.",
 "The post-quantum Module-Lattice-Based Digital Signature Algorithm, at security level 3. Randomized version.",
-"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version."
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version.",
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized pre-hash version supporting SHA256 digests."
 ],
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -3502,7 +3506,8 @@
 "HMAC_SHA224",
 "EXTERNAL_SYMMETRIC_ENCRYPTION",
 "PQ_SIGN_ML_DSA_65",
-"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S"
+"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S",
+"PQ_SIGN_HASH_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S_SHA256"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Not specified.",
@@ -3542,7 +3547,8 @@
 "HMAC-SHA224 signing with a 224 bit key.",
 "Algorithm representing symmetric encryption by an external key manager.",
 "The post-quantum Module-Lattice-Based Digital Signature Algorithm, at security level 3. Randomized version.",
-"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version."
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version.",
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized pre-hash version supporting SHA256 digests."
 ],
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -4255,7 +4261,8 @@
 "HMAC_SHA224",
 "EXTERNAL_SYMMETRIC_ENCRYPTION",
 "PQ_SIGN_ML_DSA_65",
-"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S"
+"PQ_SIGN_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S",
+"PQ_SIGN_HASH_SLH_DSA_SHA2_128S_SHA256"
 ],
 "enumDescriptions": [
 "Not specified.",
@@ -4295,7 +4302,8 @@
 "HMAC-SHA224 signing with a 224 bit key.",
 "Algorithm representing symmetric encryption by an external key manager.",
 "The post-quantum Module-Lattice-Based Digital Signature Algorithm, at security level 3. Randomized version.",
-"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version."
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized version.",
+"The post-quantum stateless hash-based digital signature algorithm, at security level 1. Randomized pre-hash version supporting SHA256 digests."
 ],
 "type": "string"
 },
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2.json
index e266f1d880..10ba707eba 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2.json
@@ -483,7 +483,7 @@
 "media": {
 "methods": {
 "download": {
-"description": "Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append \"?alt=media\" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ\" curl \\ --header \"Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)\" \\ \"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media\" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = \"v2\" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName=\"cloudsupport\", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f\"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}\", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR\" ) request.uri = request.uri.split(\"?\")[0] + \"?alt=media\" print(request.execute()) ```",
+"description": "Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no \"response body\" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append \"?alt=media\" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ\" curl \\ --header \"Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)\" \\ \"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media\" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = \"v2\" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName=\"cloudsupport\", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f\"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}\", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR\" ) request.uri = request.uri.split(\"?\")[0] + \"?alt=media\" print(request.execute()) ```",
 "flatPath": "v2/{v2Id}/{v2Id1}/cases/{casesId}/attachments/{attachmentsId}:download",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "cloudsupport.media.download",
@@ -552,7 +552,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250521",
+"revision": "20250602",
 "rootUrl": "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Actor": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json
index 1642d4f484..b927cbaeff 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudsupport.v2beta.json
@@ -550,7 +550,7 @@
 "media": {
 "methods": {
 "download": {
-"description": "Download a file attached to a case. Note: HTTP requests must append \"?alt=media\" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ\" curl \\ --header \"Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)\" \\ \"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media\" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = \"v2\" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName=\"cloudsupport\", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f\"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}\", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR\" ) request.uri = request.uri.split(\"?\")[0] + \"?alt=media\" print(request.execute()) ```",
+"description": "Download a file attached to a case. When this endpoint is called, no \"response body\" will be returned. Instead, the attachment's blob will be returned. Note: HTTP requests must append \"?alt=media\" to the URL. EXAMPLES: cURL: ```shell name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43594844/attachments/0674M00000WijAnZAJ\" curl \\ --header \"Authorization: Bearer $(gcloud auth print-access-token)\" \\ \"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/v2/$name:download?alt=media\" ``` Python: ```python import googleapiclient.discovery api_version = \"v2\" supportApiService = googleapiclient.discovery.build( serviceName=\"cloudsupport\", version=api_version, discoveryServiceUrl=f\"https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/$discovery/rest?version={api_version}\", ) request = supportApiService.media().download( name=\"projects/some-project/cases/43595344/attachments/0684M00000Pw6pHQAR\" ) request.uri = request.uri.split(\"?\")[0] + \"?alt=media\" print(request.execute()) ```",
 "flatPath": "v2beta/{v2betaId}/{v2betaId1}/cases/{casesId}/attachments/{attachmentsId}:download",
 "httpMethod": "GET",
 "id": "cloudsupport.media.download",
@@ -619,7 +619,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250521",
+"revision": "20250602",
 "rootUrl": "https://cloudsupport.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Actor": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json
index 0e2824b95d..0703a94b47 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/cloudtrace.v1.json
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "filter": {
-"description": "Optional. A filter against labels for the request. By default, searches use prefix matching. To specify exact match, prepend a plus symbol (`+`) to the search term. Multiple terms are ANDed. Syntax: * `root:NAME_PREFIX` or `NAME_PREFIX`: Return traces where any root span starts with `NAME_PREFIX`. * `+root:NAME` or `+NAME`: Return traces where any root span's name is exactly `NAME`. * `span:NAME_PREFIX`: Return traces where any span starts with `NAME_PREFIX`. * `+span:NAME`: Return traces where any span's name is exactly `NAME`. * `latency:DURATION`: Return traces whose overall latency is greater or equal to than `DURATION`. Accepted units are nanoseconds (`ns`), milliseconds (`ms`), and seconds (`s`). Default is `ms`. For example, `latency:24ms` returns traces whose overall latency is greater than or equal to 24 milliseconds. * `label:LABEL_KEY`: Return all traces containing the specified label key (exact match, case-sensitive) regardless of the key:value pair's value (including empty values). * `LABEL_KEY:VALUE_PREFIX`: Return all traces containing the specified label key (exact match, case-sensitive) whose value starts with `VALUE_PREFIX`. Both a key and a value must be specified. * `+LABEL_KEY:VALUE`: Return all traces containing a key:value pair exactly matching the specified text. Both a key and a value must be specified. * `method:VALUE`: Equivalent to `/http/method:VALUE`. * `url:VALUE`: Equivalent to `/http/url:VALUE`.",
+"description": "Optional. A filter against properties of the trace. See [filter syntax documentation](https://cloud.google.com/trace/docs/trace-filters) for details.",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "string"
 },
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250411",
+"revision": "20250530",
 "rootUrl": "https://cloudtrace.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Empty": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/config.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/config.v1.json
index 0a5cebeb02..52dfd80ddb 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/config.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/config.v1.json
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`",
+"description": "Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/deployments/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250409",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://config.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ApplyResults": {
@@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@
 "additionalProperties": {
 "type": "string"
 },
-"description": "User-defined metadata for the deployment.",
+"description": "Optional. User-defined metadata for the deployment.",
 "type": "object"
 },
 "latestRevision": {
@@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`",
+"description": "Identifier. Resource name of the deployment. Format: `projects/{project}/locations/{location}/deployments/{deployment}`",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "quotaValidation": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/css.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/css.v1.json
index eb2f15cd7a..b34f54a90d 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/css.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/css.v1.json
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "name": {
-"description": "Required. The name of the CSS product to retrieve.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the CSS product to retrieve. Format: `accounts/{account}/cssProducts/{css_product}`",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^accounts/[^/]+/cssProducts/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250421",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://css.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Account": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json
index 7fa1b3a773..8b3e8bf369 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/dataplex.v1.json
@@ -7027,7 +7027,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250525",
+"revision": "20250603",
 "rootUrl": "https://dataplex.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Empty": {
@@ -7433,7 +7433,7 @@
 "type": "array"
 },
 "type": {
-"description": "Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string integer boolean double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC \"Zulu\" (Examples: \"2014-10-02T15:01:23Z\" and \"2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z\").Complex types: enum array map record",
+"description": "Required. The datatype of this field. The following values are supported:Primitive types: string int bool double datetime. Must be of the format RFC3339 UTC \"Zulu\" (Examples: \"2014-10-02T15:01:23Z\" and \"2014-10-02T15:01:23.045123456Z\").Complex types: enum array map record",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "typeId": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json
index 140b6c0241..1f61801e62 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v2.json
@@ -8010,7 +8010,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250501",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ActivateManualTriggerRequest": {
@@ -19885,7 +19885,7 @@ true
 "description": "Required. The bidding strategy of the YouTube and Partners line item."
 },
 "contentCategory": {
-"description": "The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.",
+"description": "The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)",
 "enum": [
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_UNSPECIFIED",
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_STANDARD",
@@ -19901,7 +19901,7 @@ true
 "type": "string"
 },
 "effectiveContentCategory": {
-"description": "Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.",
+"description": "Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)",
 "enum": [
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_UNSPECIFIED",
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_STANDARD",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json
index c8c3920e65..7551ec3dcc 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/displayvideo.v4.json
@@ -8219,7 +8219,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250501",
+"revision": "20250529",
 "rootUrl": "https://displayvideo.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "ActiveViewVideoViewabilityMetricConfig": {
@@ -21691,7 +21691,7 @@ false
 "id": "YoutubeAndPartnersSettings",
 "properties": {
 "contentCategory": {
-"description": "The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown.",
+"description": "The kind of content on which the YouTube and Partners ads will be shown. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this setting will no longer be editable. This field will eventually be removed. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)",
 "enum": [
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_UNSPECIFIED",
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_STANDARD",
@@ -21707,7 +21707,7 @@ false
 "type": "string"
 },
 "effectiveContentCategory": {
-"description": "Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item.",
+"description": "Output only. The content category which takes effect when serving the line item. When content category is set in both line item and advertiser, the stricter one will take effect when serving the line item. *Warning*: Starting **June 12, 2025**, this field will only reflect the advertiser level setting for new line items. [Read more about this announced change](/display-video/api/deprecations#features.li_yt_content_category)",
 "enum": [
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_UNSPECIFIED",
 "YOUTUBE_AND_PARTNERS_CONTENT_CATEGORY_STANDARD",
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/notebooks.v2.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/notebooks.v2.json
index 53556873f7..7a9a0803da 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/notebooks.v2.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/notebooks.v2.json
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "updateMask": {
-"description": "Required. Mask used to update an instance",
+"description": "Required. Mask used to update an instance. Updatable fields: * `labels` * `gce_setup.min_cpu_platform` * `gce_setup.metadata` * `gce_setup.machine_type` * `gce_setup.accelerator_configs` * `gce_setup.accelerator_configs.type` * `gce_setup.accelerator_configs.core_count` * `gce_setup.gpu_driver_config` * `gce_setup.gpu_driver_config.enable_gpu_driver` * `gce_setup.gpu_driver_config.custom_gpu_driver_path` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config.enable_secure_boot` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config.enable_vtpm` * `gce_setup.shielded_instance_config.enable_integrity_monitoring` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity.consume_reservation_type` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity.key` * `gce_setup.reservation_affinity.values` * `gce_setup.tags` * `gce_setup.container_image` * `gce_setup.container_image.repository` * `gce_setup.container_image.tag` * `gce_setup.disable_public_ip` * `disable_proxy_access`",
 "format": "google-fieldmask",
 "location": "query",
 "type": "string"
@@ -910,7 +910,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250507",
+"revision": "20250528",
 "rootUrl": "https://notebooks.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AcceleratorConfig": {
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71d966c552
--- /dev/null
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/saasservicemgmt.v1beta1.json
@@ -0,0 +1,3294 @@
+{
+"auth": {
+"oauth2": {
+"scopes": {
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform": {
+"description": "See, edit, configure, and delete your Google Cloud data and see the email address for your Google Account."
+}
+}
+}
+},
+"basePath": "",
+"baseUrl": "https://saasservicemgmt.googleapis.com/",
+"batchPath": "batch",
+"canonicalName": "SaaS Service Management",
+"description": "",
+"discoveryVersion": "v1",
+"documentationLink": "https://cloud.google.com/saas-runtime/docs",
+"fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true,
+"icons": {
+"x16": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-16.gif",
+"x32": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-32.gif"
+},
+"id": "saasservicemgmt:v1beta1",
+"kind": "discovery#restDescription",
+"mtlsRootUrl": "https://saasservicemgmt.mtls.googleapis.com/",
+"name": "saasservicemgmt",
+"ownerDomain": "google.com",
+"ownerName": "Google",
+"parameters": {
+"$.xgafv": {
+"description": "V1 error format.",
+"enum": [
+"1",
+"2"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"v1 error format",
+"v2 error format"
+],
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"access_token": {
+"description": "OAuth access token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"alt": {
+"default": "json",
+"description": "Data format for response.",
+"enum": [
+"json",
+"media",
+"proto"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Responses with Content-Type of application/json",
+"Media download with context-dependent Content-Type",
+"Responses with Content-Type of application/x-protobuf"
+],
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"callback": {
+"description": "JSONP",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"fields": {
+"description": "Selector specifying which fields to include in a partial response.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"key": {
+"description": "API key. Your API key identifies your project and provides you with API access, quota, and reports. Required unless you provide an OAuth 2.0 token.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"oauth_token": {
+"description": "OAuth 2.0 token for the current user.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"prettyPrint": {
+"default": "true",
+"description": "Returns response with indentations and line breaks.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"quotaUser": {
+"description": "Available to use for quota purposes for server-side applications. Can be any arbitrary string assigned to a user, but should not exceed 40 characters.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uploadType": {
+"description": "Legacy upload protocol for media (e.g. \"media\", \"multipart\").",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"upload_protocol": {
+"description": "Upload protocol for media (e.g. \"raw\", \"multipart\").",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"protocol": "rest",
+"resources": {
+"projects": {
+"resources": {
+"locations": {
+"methods": {
+"get": {
+"description": "Gets information about a location.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Resource name for the location.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudLocationLocation"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Lists information about the supported locations for this service.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"extraLocationTypes": {
+"description": "Optional. A list of extra location types that should be used as conditions for controlling the visibility of the locations.",
+"location": "query",
+"repeated": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"filter": {
+"description": "A filter to narrow down results to a preferred subset. The filtering language accepts strings like `\"displayName=tokyo\"`, and is documented in more detail in [AIP-160](https://google.aip.dev/160).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "The resource that owns the locations collection, if applicable.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of results to return. If not set, the service selects a default.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "A page token received from the `next_page_token` field in the response. Send that page token to receive the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}/locations",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListLocationsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+},
+"resources": {
+"releases": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new release.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/releases",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.releases.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the release.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"releaseId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new release.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/releases",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Release"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Release"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single release.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/releases/{releasesId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.releases.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the release. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the release. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/releases/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single release.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/releases/{releasesId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.releases.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/releases/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Release"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of releases.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/releases",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.releases.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of releases to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the release.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/releases",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListReleasesResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single release.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/releases/{releasesId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.releases.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/releases/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Release resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Release will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Release"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Release"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"rolloutKinds": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new rollout kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rolloutKinds",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the rollout kind.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rolloutKindId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new rollout kind.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/rolloutKinds",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "RolloutKind"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "RolloutKind"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single rollout kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rolloutKinds/{rolloutKindsId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the rollout kind. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the rollout kind. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/rolloutKinds/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single rollout kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rolloutKinds/{rolloutKindsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/rolloutKinds/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "RolloutKind"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of rollout kinds.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rolloutKinds",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of rollout kinds to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the rollout kind.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/rolloutKinds",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListRolloutKindsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single rollout kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rolloutKinds/{rolloutKindsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rolloutKinds.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/rolloutKinds/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the RolloutKind resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the RolloutKind will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "RolloutKind"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "RolloutKind"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"rollouts": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new rollout.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rollouts",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rollouts.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the rollout.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rolloutId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new rollout.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/rollouts",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Rollout"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Rollout"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single rollout.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rollouts/{rolloutsId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rollouts.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the rollout. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the rollout. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/rollouts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single rollout.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rollouts/{rolloutsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rollouts.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/rollouts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Rollout"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of rollouts.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rollouts",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rollouts.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of rollouts to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the rollout.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/rollouts",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListRolloutsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single rollout.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/rollouts/{rolloutsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.rollouts.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/rollouts/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Rollout resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Rollout will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Rollout"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Rollout"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"saas": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new saas.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/saas",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.saas.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the saas.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"saasId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new saas.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/saas",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Saas"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Saas"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single saas.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/saas/{saasId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.saas.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the saas. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the saas. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/saas/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single saas.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/saas/{saasId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.saas.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/saas/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Saas"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of saas.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/saas",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.saas.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of saas to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the saas.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/saas",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListSaasResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single saas.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/saas/{saasId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.saas.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/saas/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Saas resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Saas will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Saas"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Saas"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"tenants": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new tenant.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/tenants",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.tenants.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the tenant.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"tenantId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new tenant.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/tenants",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Tenant"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Tenant"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single tenant.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/tenants/{tenantsId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.tenants.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the tenant. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the tenant. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/tenants/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single tenant.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/tenants/{tenantsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.tenants.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/tenants/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Tenant"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of tenants.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/tenants",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.tenants.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of tenants to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the tenant.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/tenants",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListTenantsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single tenant.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/tenants/{tenantsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.tenants.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/tenants/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Tenant resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Tenant will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Tenant"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Tenant"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"unitKinds": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new unit kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitKinds",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitKinds.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the unit kind.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitKindId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new unit kind.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/unitKinds",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "UnitKind"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "UnitKind"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single unit kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitKinds/{unitKindsId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitKinds.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the unit kind. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the unit kind. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/unitKinds/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single unit kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitKinds/{unitKindsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitKinds.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/unitKinds/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "UnitKind"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of unit kinds.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitKinds",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitKinds.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of unit kinds to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the unit kind.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/unitKinds",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListUnitKindsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single unit kind.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitKinds/{unitKindsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitKinds.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/unitKinds/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the UnitKind resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the UnitKind will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "UnitKind"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "UnitKind"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"unitOperations": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new unit operation.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitOperations",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitOperations.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the unit operation.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitOperationId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new unit operation.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/unitOperations",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperation"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperation"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single unit operation.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitOperations/{unitOperationsId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitOperations.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the unit operation. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the unit operation. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/unitOperations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single unit operation.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitOperations/{unitOperationsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitOperations.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/unitOperations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperation"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of unit operations.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitOperations",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitOperations.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of unit operations to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the unit operation.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/unitOperations",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListUnitOperationsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single unit operation.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/unitOperations/{unitOperationsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.unitOperations.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/unitOperations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the UnitOperation resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the UnitOperation will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperation"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperation"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+},
+"units": {
+"methods": {
+"create": {
+"description": "Create a new unit.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/units",
+"httpMethod": "POST",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.units.create",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the unit.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitId": {
+"description": "Required. The ID value for the new unit.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/units",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Unit"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Unit"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"delete": {
+"description": "Delete a single unit.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/units/{unitsId}",
+"httpMethod": "DELETE",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.units.delete",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"etag": {
+"description": "The etag known to the client for the expected state of the unit. This is used with state-changing methods to prevent accidental overwrites when multiple user agents might be acting in parallel on the same resource. An etag wildcard provide optimistic concurrency based on the expected existence of the unit. The Any wildcard (`*`) requires that the resource must already exists, and the Not Any wildcard (`!*`) requires that it must not.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/units/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Empty"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"get": {
+"description": "Retrieve a single unit.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/units/{unitsId}",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.units.get",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Required. The resource name of the resource within a service.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/units/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Unit"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"list": {
+"description": "Retrieve a collection of units.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/units",
+"httpMethod": "GET",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.units.list",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"parent"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"filter": {
+"description": "Filter the list as specified in https://google.aip.dev/160.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"orderBy": {
+"description": "Order results as specified in https://google.aip.dev/132.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"pageSize": {
+"description": "The maximum number of units to send per page.",
+"format": "int32",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"pageToken": {
+"description": "The page token: If the next_page_token from a previous response is provided, this request will send the subsequent page.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parent": {
+"description": "Required. The parent of the unit.",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+parent}/units",
+"response": {
+"$ref": "ListUnitsResponse"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+},
+"patch": {
+"description": "Update a single unit.",
+"flatPath": "v1beta1/projects/{projectsId}/locations/{locationsId}/units/{unitsId}",
+"httpMethod": "PATCH",
+"id": "saasservicemgmt.projects.locations.units.patch",
+"parameterOrder": [
+"name"
+],
+"parameters": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}\"",
+"location": "path",
+"pattern": "^projects/[^/]+/locations/[^/]+/units/[^/]+$",
+"required": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"requestId": {
+"description": "An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. The server will guarantee that for at least 60 minutes since the first request. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported (00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateMask": {
+"description": "Field mask is used to specify the fields to be overwritten in the Unit resource by the update. The fields specified in the update_mask are relative to the resource, not the full request. A field will be overwritten if it is in the mask. If the user does not provide a mask then all fields in the Unit will be overwritten.",
+"format": "google-fieldmask",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"validateOnly": {
+"description": "If \"validate_only\" is set to true, the service will try to validate that this request would succeed, but will not actually make changes.",
+"location": "query",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"path": "v1beta1/{+name}",
+"request": {
+"$ref": "Unit"
+},
+"response": {
+"$ref": "Unit"
+},
+"scopes": [
+"https://www.googleapis.com/auth/cloud-platform"
+]
+}
+}
+}
+}
+}
+}
+}
+},
+"revision": "20250528",
+"rootUrl": "https://saasservicemgmt.googleapis.com/",
+"schemas": {
+"Aggregate": {
+"description": "Represents the aggregation of a set of population of like records by a certain group. For example, a collection of unit counts can be aggregated and grouped by their state.",
+"id": "Aggregate",
+"properties": {
+"count": {
+"description": "Required. Number of records in the group.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"group": {
+"description": "Required. Group by which to aggregate.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Blueprint": {
+"description": "Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit. Metadata such as, type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint (e.g. terraform, helm etc) and version will come from the image manifest. If the hostname is omitted, it will be assumed to be the regional path to Artifact Registry (eg. us-east1-docker.pkg.dev).",
+"id": "Blueprint",
+"properties": {
+"engine": {
+"description": "Output only. Type of the engine used to actuate the blueprint. e.g. terraform, helm etc.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"package": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. URI to a blueprint used by the Unit (required unless unitKind or release is set).",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"version": {
+"description": "Output only. Version metadata if present on the blueprint.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Dependency": {
+"description": "Dependency represent a single dependency with another unit kind by alias.",
+"id": "Dependency",
+"properties": {
+"alias": {
+"description": "Required. An alias for the dependency. Used for input variable mapping.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitKind": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The unit kind of the dependency.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Deprovision": {
+"description": "Deprovision is the unit operation that deprovision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.",
+"id": "Deprovision",
+"properties": {},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Empty": {
+"description": "A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); }",
+"id": "Empty",
+"properties": {},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ErrorBudget": {
+"description": "The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused.",
+"id": "ErrorBudget",
+"properties": {
+"allowedCount": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum number of failed units allowed in a location without pausing the rollout.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+},
+"allowedPercentage": {
+"description": "Optional. The maximum percentage of units allowed to fail (0, 100] within a location without pausing the rollout.",
+"format": "int32",
+"type": "integer"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"FromMapping": {
+"description": "Output variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies",
+"id": "FromMapping",
+"properties": {
+"dependency": {
+"description": "Required. Alias of the dependency that the outputVariable will pass its value to",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"outputVariable": {
+"description": "Required. Name of the outputVariable on the dependency",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"GoogleCloudLocationLocation": {
+"description": "A resource that represents a Google Cloud location.",
+"id": "GoogleCloudLocationLocation",
+"properties": {
+"displayName": {
+"description": "The friendly name for this location, typically a nearby city name. For example, \"Tokyo\".",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Cross-service attributes for the location. For example {\"cloud.googleapis.com/region\": \"us-east1\"}",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"locationId": {
+"description": "The canonical id for this location. For example: `\"us-east1\"`.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"metadata": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"description": "Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.",
+"type": "any"
+},
+"description": "Service-specific metadata. For example the available capacity at the given location.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Resource name for the location, which may vary between implementations. For example: `\"projects/example-project/locations/us-east1\"`",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListLocationsResponse": {
+"description": "The response message for Locations.ListLocations.",
+"id": "ListLocationsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"locations": {
+"description": "A list of locations that matches the specified filter in the request.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "GoogleCloudLocationLocation"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "The standard List next-page token.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListReleasesResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListReleases method.",
+"id": "ListReleasesResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListReleases call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"releases": {
+"description": "The resulting releases.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Release"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListRolloutKindsResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListRolloutKinds method.",
+"id": "ListRolloutKindsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListRolloutKinds call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rolloutKinds": {
+"description": "The resulting rollout kinds.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "RolloutKind"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListRolloutsResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListRollouts method.",
+"id": "ListRolloutsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListRollouts call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rollouts": {
+"description": "The resulting rollouts.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Rollout"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListSaasResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListSaas method.",
+"id": "ListSaasResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListSaas call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"saas": {
+"description": "The resulting saas.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Saas"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListTenantsResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListTenants method.",
+"id": "ListTenantsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListTenants call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"tenants": {
+"description": "The resulting tenants.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Tenant"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListUnitKindsResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListUnitKinds method.",
+"id": "ListUnitKindsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListUnitKinds call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitKinds": {
+"description": "The resulting unit kinds.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitKind"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListUnitOperationsResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListUnitOperations method.",
+"id": "ListUnitOperationsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListUnitOperations call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitOperations": {
+"description": "The resulting unit operations.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperation"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ListUnitsResponse": {
+"description": "The response structure for the ListUnits method.",
+"id": "ListUnitsResponse",
+"properties": {
+"nextPageToken": {
+"description": "If present, the next page token can be provided to a subsequent ListUnits call to list the next page. If empty, there are no more pages.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"units": {
+"description": "The resulting units.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Unit"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"unreachable": {
+"description": "Locations that could not be reached.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Location": {
+"description": "Location information that the service is available in.",
+"id": "Location",
+"properties": {
+"name": {
+"description": "Optional. Name of location.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"MaintenanceSettings": {
+"description": "Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future.",
+"id": "MaintenanceSettings",
+"properties": {
+"pinnedUntilTime": {
+"description": "Optional. If present, it fixes the release on the unit until the given time; i.e. changes to the release field will be rejected. Rollouts should and will also respect this by not requesting an upgrade in the first place.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Provision": {
+"description": "Provision is the unit operation that provision the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is not currently provisioned.",
+"id": "Provision",
+"properties": {
+"inputVariables": {
+"description": "Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"release": {
+"description": "Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Release": {
+"description": "A new version to be propagated and deployed to units. This includes pointers to packaged blueprints for actuation (e.g Helm or Terraform configuration packages) via artifact registry.",
+"id": "Release",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"blueprint": {
+"$ref": "Blueprint",
+"description": "Optional. Blueprints are OCI Images that contain all of the artifacts needed to provision a unit."
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"inputVariableDefaults": {
+"description": "Optional. Mapping of input variables to default values. Maximum 100",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"inputVariables": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. List of input variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit spec",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/releases/{release}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"outputVariables": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. List of output variables declared on the blueprint and can be present with their values on the unit status",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"releaseRequirements": {
+"$ref": "ReleaseRequirements",
+"description": "Optional. Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release."
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitKind": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. Reference to the UnitKind this Release corresponds to (required and immutable once created).",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ReleaseRequirements": {
+"description": "Set of requirements to be fulfilled on the Unit when using this Release.",
+"id": "ReleaseRequirements",
+"properties": {
+"upgradeableFromReleases": {
+"description": "Optional. A list of releases from which a unit can be upgraded to this one (optional). If left empty no constraints will be applied. When provided, unit upgrade requests to this release will check and enforce this constraint.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Rollout": {
+"description": "Represents a single rollout execution and its results",
+"id": "Rollout",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"control": {
+"$ref": "RolloutControl",
+"description": "Optional. Requested change to the execution of this rollout. Default RolloutControl.action is ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN meaning the rollout will be executed to completion while progressing through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). Requests can only be made when the Rollout is in a non-terminal state."
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"endTime": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout finished execution (regardless of success, failure, or cancellation). Will be empty if the rollout hasn't finished yet. Once set, the rollout is in terminal state and all the results are final.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollout/{rollout_id}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parentRollout": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The direct parent rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}\"",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"release": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. Name of the Release that gets rolled out to target Units. Required if no other type of release is specified.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rolloutKind": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. Name of the RolloutKind this rollout is stemming from and adhering to.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": {
+"description": "Optional. The strategy used for executing this Rollout. This strategy will override whatever strategy is specified in the RolloutType. If not specified on creation, the strategy from RolloutType will be used. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce\" - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime\" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the targeted UnitKind's Saas Locations.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rootRollout": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The root rollout that this rollout is stemming from. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rollouts/{rollout_id}\"",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"startTime": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout started executing. Will be empty if the rollout hasn't started yet.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Output only. Current state of the rollout.",
+"enum": [
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_RUNNING",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_PAUSED",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_SUCCEEDED",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_FAILED",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_CANCELLED",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_WAITING",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_CANCELLING",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_RESUMING",
+"ROLLOUT_STATE_PAUSING"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Unspecified state.",
+"Rollout is in progress.",
+"Rollout has been paused.",
+"Rollout completed successfully.",
+"Rollout has failed.",
+"Rollout has been canceled.",
+"Rollout is waiting for some condition to be met before starting.",
+"Rollout is being canceled.",
+"Rollout is being resumed.",
+"Rollout is being paused."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"stateMessage": {
+"description": "Output only. Human readable message indicating details about the last state transition.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"stateTransitionTime": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The time when the rollout transitioned into its current state.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"stats": {
+"$ref": "RolloutStats",
+"description": "Optional. Output only. Details about the progress of the rollout.",
+"readOnly": true
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitFilter": {
+"description": "Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout. If not provided, the unit_filter from the RolloutType will be used.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"RolloutControl": {
+"description": "RolloutControl provides a way to request a change to the execution of a Rollout by pausing or canceling it.",
+"id": "RolloutControl",
+"properties": {
+"action": {
+"description": "Required. Action to be performed on the Rollout. The default behavior is to run the rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state.",
+"enum": [
+"ROLLOUT_ACTION_UNSPECIFIED",
+"ROLLOUT_ACTION_RUN",
+"ROLLOUT_ACTION_PAUSE",
+"ROLLOUT_ACTION_CANCEL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Unspecified action, will be treated as RUN by default.",
+"Run the Rollout until it naturally reaches a terminal state. A rollout requested to run will progress through all natural Rollout States (such as RUNNING -> SUCCEEDED or RUNNING -> FAILED). If retriable errors are encountered during the rollout, the rollout will paused by default and can be resumed by re-requesting this RUN action.",
+"Pause the Rollout until it is resumed (i.e. RUN is requested).",
+"Cancel the Rollout permanently."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"runParams": {
+"$ref": "RunRolloutActionParams",
+"description": "Optional. Parameters for the RUN action. It is an error to specify this if the RolloutAction is not set to RUN. By default, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed."
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"RolloutKind": {
+"description": "An object that describes various settings of Rollout execution. Includes built-in policies across GCP and GDC, and customizable policies.",
+"id": "RolloutKind",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"errorBudget": {
+"$ref": "ErrorBudget",
+"description": "Optional. The configuration for error budget. If the number of failed units exceeds max(allowed_count, allowed_ratio * total_units), the rollout will be paused. If not set, all units will be attempted to be updated regardless of the number of failures encountered."
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/rolloutKinds/{rollout_kind_id}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"rolloutOrchestrationStrategy": {
+"description": "Optional. The strategy used for executing a Rollout. This is a required field. There are two supported values strategies which are used to control - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.AllAtOnce\" - \"Google.Cloud.Simple.OneLocationAtATime\" A rollout with one of these simple strategies will rollout across all locations defined in the associated UnitKind's Saas Locations.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitFilter": {
+"description": "Optional. CEL(https://github.com/google/cel-spec) formatted filter string against Unit. The filter will be applied to determine the eligible unit population. This filter can only reduce, but not expand the scope of the rollout.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitKind": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. UnitKind that this rollout kind corresponds to. Rollouts stemming from this rollout kind will target the units of this unit kind. In other words, this defines the population of target units to be upgraded by rollouts.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateUnitKindStrategy": {
+"description": "Optional. The config for updating the unit kind. By default, the unit kind will be updated on the rollout start.",
+"enum": [
+"UPDATE_UNIT_KIND_STRATEGY_UNSPECIFIED",
+"UPDATE_UNIT_KIND_STRATEGY_ON_START",
+"UPDATE_UNIT_KIND_STRATEGY_NEVER"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Strategy unspecified.",
+"Update the unit kind strategy on the rollout start.",
+"Never update the unit kind."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"RolloutStats": {
+"description": "RolloutStats contains information about the progress of a rollout.",
+"id": "RolloutStats",
+"properties": {
+"operationsByState": {
+"description": "Output only. A breakdown of the progress of operations triggered by the rollout. Provides a count of Operations by their state. This can be used to determine the number of units which have been updated, or are scheduled to be updated. There will be at most one entry per group. Possible values for operation groups are: - \"SCHEDULED\" - \"PENDING\" - \"RUNNING\" - \"SUCCEEDED\" - \"FAILED\" - \"CANCELLED\"",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Aggregate"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"RunRolloutActionParams": {
+"description": "Parameters for the RUN action controlling the behavior of the rollout when it is resumed from a PAUSED state.",
+"id": "RunRolloutActionParams",
+"properties": {
+"retryFailedOperations": {
+"description": "Required. If true, the rollout will retry failed operations when resumed. This is applicable only the current state of the Rollout is PAUSED and the requested action is RUN.",
+"type": "boolean"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Saas": {
+"description": "Saas is a representation of a SaaS service managed by the Producer.",
+"id": "Saas",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"locations": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. List of locations that the service is available in. Rollout refers to the list to generate a rollout plan.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Location"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/saas/{saas}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Schedule": {
+"description": "A time specification to schedule the maintenance.",
+"id": "Schedule",
+"properties": {
+"startTime": {
+"description": "Optional. Start of operation. If not set, will be set to the start of the next window. (optional)",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Tenant": {
+"description": "Tenant represents the service producer side of an instance of the service created based on a request from a consumer. In a typical scenario a Tenant has a one-to-one mapping with a resource given out to a service consumer. Example: tenant: name: \"projects/svc1/locations/loc/tenants/inst-068afff8\" consumer_resource: \"projects/gshoe/locations/loc/shoes/black-shoe\"",
+"id": "Tenant",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"consumerResource": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. A reference to the consumer resource this SaaS Tenant is representing. The relationship with a consumer resource can be used by EasySaaS for retrieving consumer-defined settings and policies such as maintenance policies (using Unified Maintenance Policy API).",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/tenants/{tenant}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"saas": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"ToMapping": {
+"description": "Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies",
+"id": "ToMapping",
+"properties": {
+"dependency": {
+"description": "Required. Alias of the dependency that the inputVariable will pass its value to",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"ignoreForLookup": {
+"description": "Optional. Tells EasySaaS if this mapping should be used during lookup or not",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"inputVariable": {
+"description": "Required. Name of the inputVariable on the dependency",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Unit": {
+"description": "A unit of deployment that has its lifecycle via a CRUD API using an actuation engine under the hood (e.g. based on Terraform, Helm or a custom implementation provided by a service producer). A building block of a SaaS Tenant.",
+"id": "Unit",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"conditions": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitCondition"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"dependencies": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitDependency"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"dependents": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. List of Units that depend on this unit. Unit can only be deprovisioned if this list is empty. Maximum 1000.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitDependency"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"inputVariables": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. Indicates the current input variables deployed by the unit",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"maintenance": {
+"$ref": "MaintenanceSettings",
+"description": "Optional. Captures requested directives for performing future maintenance on the unit. This includes a request for the unit to skip maintenance for a period of time and remain pinned to its current release as well as controls for postponing maintenance scheduled in future."
+},
+"managementMode": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. Indicates whether the Unit life cycle is controlled by the user or by the system. Immutable once created.",
+"enum": [
+"MANAGEMENT_MODE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"MANAGEMENT_MODE_USER",
+"MANAGEMENT_MODE_SYSTEM"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"",
+"Unit's lifecycle is managed by the user.",
+"The system will decide when to deprovision and delete the unit. User still can deprovision or delete the unit manually."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/units/{unit}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"ongoingOperations": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. List of concurrent UnitOperations that are operating on this Unit.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"outputVariables": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. Set of key/value pairs corresponding to output variables from execution of actuation templates. The variables are declared in actuation configs (e.g in helm chart or terraform) and the values are fetched and returned by the actuation engine upon completion of execution.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"pendingOperations": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. List of pending (wait to be executed) UnitOperations for this unit.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"release": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The current Release object for this Unit.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"scheduledOperations": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. List of scheduled UnitOperations for this unit.",
+"items": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. Current lifecycle state of the resource (e.g. if it's being created or ready to use).",
+"enum": [
+"UNIT_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"UNIT_STATE_NOT_PROVISIONED",
+"UNIT_STATE_PROVISIONING",
+"UNIT_STATE_UPDATING",
+"UNIT_STATE_DEPROVISIONING",
+"UNIT_STATE_READY",
+"UNIT_STATE_ERROR"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Unspecified state.",
+"Unit is not provisioned.",
+"Unit is being provisioned.",
+"Unit is being updated. This is typically when a unit is being upgraded to a new release or some of the input variables on the Unit is being changed. Certain kinds of updates may cause the Unit to become unusable while the update is in progress.",
+"Unit is being deleted.",
+"Unit has been provisioned and is ready for use",
+"Unit has error, when it is not ready and some error operation"
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"systemCleanupAt": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. If set, indicates the time when the system will start removing the unit.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"systemManagedState": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. Indicates the system managed state of the unit.",
+"enum": [
+"SYSTEM_MANAGED_STATE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"SYSTEM_MANAGED_STATE_ACTIVE",
+"SYSTEM_MANAGED_STATE_INACTIVE",
+"SYSTEM_MANAGED_STATE_DECOMMISSIONED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"",
+"Unit has dependents attached.",
+"Unit has no dependencies attached, but attachment is allowed.",
+"Unit has no dependencies attached, and attachment is not allowed."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"tenant": {
+"description": "Optional. Reference to the Saas Tenant resource this unit belongs to. This for example informs the maintenance policies to use for scheduling future updates on a unit. (optional and immutable once created)",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unitKind": {
+"description": "Optional. Reference to the UnitKind this Unit belongs to. Immutable once set.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"UnitCondition": {
+"description": "UnitCondition describes the status of an Unit. UnitCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.",
+"id": "UnitCondition",
+"properties": {
+"lastTransitionTime": {
+"description": "Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"message": {
+"description": "Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"reason": {
+"description": "Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"status": {
+"description": "Required. Status of the condition.",
+"enum": [
+"STATUS_UNSPECIFIED",
+"STATUS_UNKNOWN",
+"STATUS_TRUE",
+"STATUS_FALSE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Condition status is unspecified.",
+"Condition is unknown.",
+"Condition is true.",
+"Condition is false."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": {
+"description": "Required. Type of the condition.",
+"enum": [
+"TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"TYPE_READY",
+"TYPE_UPDATING",
+"TYPE_PROVISIONED",
+"TYPE_OPERATION_ERROR"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Condition type is unspecified.",
+"Condition type is ready.",
+"Condition type is updating.",
+"Condition type is provisioned.",
+"Condition type is operationError. True when the last unit operation fails with a non-ignorable error."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"UnitDependency": {
+"description": "Set of dependencies for this unit. Maximum 10.",
+"id": "UnitDependency",
+"properties": {
+"alias": {
+"description": "Output only. Alias for the name of the dependency.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unit": {
+"description": "Output only. A reference to the Unit object.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"UnitKind": {
+"description": "Definition of a Unit. Units belonging to the same UnitKind are managed together; for example they follow the same release model (blueprints, versions etc.) and are typically rolled out together.",
+"id": "UnitKind",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"defaultRelease": {
+"description": "Optional. A reference to the Release object to use as default for creating new units of this UnitKind (optional). If not specified, a new unit must explicitly reference which release to use for its creation.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"dependencies": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. List of other unit kinds that this release will depend on. Dependencies will be automatically provisioned if not found. Maximum 10.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "Dependency"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"inputVariableMappings": {
+"description": "Optional. List of inputVariables for this release that will either be retrieved from a dependency\u2019s outputVariables, or will be passed on to a dependency\u2019s inputVariables. Maximum 100.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "VariableMapping"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitKinds/{unitKind}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"outputVariableMappings": {
+"description": "Optional. List of outputVariables for this unit kind will be passed to this unit's outputVariables. Maximum 100.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "VariableMapping"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"saas": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. A reference to the Saas that defines the product (managed service) that the producer wants to manage with EasySaaS. Part of the EasySaaS common data model. Immutable once set.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"UnitOperation": {
+"description": "UnitOperation encapsulates the intent of changing/interacting with the service component represented by the specific Unit. Multiple UnitOperations can be created (requested) and scheduled in the future, however only one will be allowed to execute at a time (that can change in the future for non-mutating operations). UnitOperations allow different actors interacting with the same unit to focus only on the change they have requested. This is a base object that contains the common fields in all unit operations.",
+"id": "UnitOperation",
+"properties": {
+"annotations": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. Annotations is an unstructured key-value map stored with a resource that may be set by external tools to store and retrieve arbitrary metadata. They are not queryable and should be preserved when modifying objects. More info: https://kubernetes.io/docs/user-guide/annotations",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"cancel": {
+"description": "Optional. When true, attempt to cancel the operation. Cancellation may fail if the operation is already executing. (Optional)",
+"type": "boolean"
+},
+"conditions": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. A set of conditions which indicate the various conditions this resource can have.",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitOperationCondition"
+},
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "array"
+},
+"createTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was created.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"deprovision": {
+"$ref": "Deprovision"
+},
+"engineState": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. The engine state for on-going deployment engine operation(s). This field is opaque for external usage.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"errorCategory": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. UnitOperationErrorCategory describe the error category.",
+"enum": [
+"UNIT_OPERATION_ERROR_CATEGORY_UNSPECIFIED",
+"NOT_APPLICABLE",
+"FATAL",
+"RETRIABLE",
+"IGNORABLE",
+"STANDARD"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Unit operation error category is unspecified",
+"Unit operation error category is not applicable, or it is not an error",
+"Unit operation error category is fatal",
+"Unit operation error category is retriable",
+"Unit operation error category is ignorable",
+"Unit operation error category is standard, counts towards Rollout error budget"
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"etag": {
+"description": "Output only. An opaque value that uniquely identifies a version or generation of a resource. It can be used to confirm that the client and server agree on the ordering of a resource being written.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"labels": {
+"additionalProperties": {
+"type": "string"
+},
+"description": "Optional. The labels on the resource, which can be used for categorization. similar to Kubernetes resource labels.",
+"type": "object"
+},
+"name": {
+"description": "Identifier. The resource name (full URI of the resource) following the standard naming scheme: \"projects/{project}/locations/{location}/unitOperations/{unitOperation}\"",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"parentUnitOperation": {
+"description": "Optional. Reference to parent resource: UnitOperation. If an operation needs to create other operations as part of its workflow, each of the child operations should have this field set to the parent. This can be used for tracing. (Optional)",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"provision": {
+"$ref": "Provision"
+},
+"rollout": {
+"description": "Optional. Specifies which rollout created this Unit Operation. This cannot be modified and is used for filtering purposes only. If a dependent unit and unit operation are created as part of another unit operation, they will use the same rolloutId.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"schedule": {
+"$ref": "Schedule",
+"description": "Optional. When to schedule this operation."
+},
+"state": {
+"description": "Optional. Output only. UnitOperationState describes the current state of the unit operation.",
+"enum": [
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_UNKNOWN",
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_PENDING",
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_SCHEDULED",
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_RUNNING",
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_SUCCEEDED",
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_FAILED",
+"UNIT_OPERATION_STATE_CANCELLED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"",
+"Unit operation is accepted but not ready to run.",
+"Unit operation is accepted and scheduled.",
+"Unit operation is running.",
+"Unit operation has completed successfully.",
+"Unit operation has failed.",
+"Unit operation was cancelled."
+],
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"uid": {
+"description": "Output only. The unique identifier of the resource. UID is unique in the time and space for this resource within the scope of the service. It is typically generated by the server on successful creation of a resource and must not be changed. UID is used to uniquely identify resources with resource name reuses. This should be a UUID4.",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"unit": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. The Unit a given UnitOperation will act upon.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"updateTime": {
+"description": "Output only. The timestamp when the resource was last updated. Any change to the resource made by users must refresh this value. Changes to a resource made by the service should refresh this value.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"readOnly": true,
+"type": "string"
+},
+"upgrade": {
+"$ref": "Upgrade"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"UnitOperationCondition": {
+"description": "UnitOperationCondition describes the status of an Unit Operation. UnitOperationCondition is individual components that contribute to an overall state.",
+"id": "UnitOperationCondition",
+"properties": {
+"lastTransitionTime": {
+"description": "Required. Last time the condition transited from one status to another.",
+"format": "google-datetime",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"message": {
+"description": "Required. Human readable message indicating details about the last transition.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"reason": {
+"description": "Required. Brief reason for the condition's last transition.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"status": {
+"description": "Required. Status of the condition.",
+"enum": [
+"STATUS_UNSPECIFIED",
+"STATUS_UNKNOWN",
+"STATUS_TRUE",
+"STATUS_FALSE"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Condition status is unspecified.",
+"Condition is unknown.",
+"Condition is true.",
+"Condition is false."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"type": {
+"description": "Required. Type of the condition.",
+"enum": [
+"TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"TYPE_SCHEDULED",
+"TYPE_RUNNING",
+"TYPE_SUCCEEDED",
+"TYPE_CANCELLED"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Condition type is unspecified.",
+"Condition type is scheduled.",
+"Condition type is running.",
+"Condition type is succeeded.",
+"Condition type is cancelled."
+],
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"UnitVariable": {
+"description": "UnitVariable describes a parameter for a Unit.",
+"id": "UnitVariable",
+"properties": {
+"type": {
+"description": "Optional. Immutable. Name of a supported variable type. Supported types are string, int, bool.",
+"enum": [
+"TYPE_UNSPECIFIED",
+"STRING",
+"INT",
+"BOOL"
+],
+"enumDescriptions": [
+"Variable type is unspecified.",
+"Variable type is string.",
+"Variable type is int.",
+"Variable type is bool."
+],
+"type": "string"
+},
+"value": {
+"description": "Optional. String encoded value for the variable.",
+"type": "string"
+},
+"variable": {
+"description": "Required. Immutable. Name of the variable from actuation configs.",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"Upgrade": {
+"description": "Upgrade is the unit operation that upgrades a provisioned unit, which may also include the underlying resources represented by a Unit. Can only execute if the Unit is currently provisioned.",
+"id": "Upgrade",
+"properties": {
+"inputVariables": {
+"description": "Optional. Set of input variables. Maximum 100. (optional)",
+"items": {
+"$ref": "UnitVariable"
+},
+"type": "array"
+},
+"release": {
+"description": "Optional. Reference to the Release object to use for the Unit. (optional).",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+},
+"VariableMapping": {
+"description": "Mapping of input variables to their respective output variable for depedenencies",
+"id": "VariableMapping",
+"properties": {
+"from": {
+"$ref": "FromMapping",
+"description": "Optional. Output variables which will get their values from dependencies"
+},
+"to": {
+"$ref": "ToMapping",
+"description": "Optional. Input variables whose values will be passed on to dependencies."
+},
+"variable": {
+"description": "Required. name of the variable",
+"type": "string"
+}
+},
+"type": "object"
+}
+},
+"servicePath": "",
+"title": "SaaS Runtime API",
+"version": "v1beta1",
+"version_module": true
+}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json
index 765e280fec..1f5892192a 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1.json
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "parent": {
-"description": "The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`.",
+"description": "Required. The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^services/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "parent": {
-"description": "The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`.",
+"description": "Required. The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^services/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@
 ],
 "parameters": {
 "parent": {
-"description": "The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`.",
+"description": "Required. The service that is managing peering connectivity for a service producer's organization. For Google services that support this functionality, this value is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^services/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "The private service connection that connects to a service producer organization. The name includes both the private service name and the VPC network peering name in the format of `services/{peering_service_name}/connections/{vpc_peering_name}`. For Google services that support this functionality, this is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com/connections/servicenetworking-googleapis-com`.",
+"description": "Required. The private service connection that connects to a service producer organization. The name includes both the private service name and the VPC network peering name in the format of `services/{peering_service_name}/connections/{vpc_peering_name}`. For Google services that support this functionality, this is `services/servicenetworking.googleapis.com/connections/servicenetworking-googleapis-com`.",
 "location": "path",
 "pattern": "^services/[^/]+/connections/[^/]+$",
 "required": true,
@@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250521",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://servicenetworking.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AddDnsRecordSetMetadata": {
@@ -1186,7 +1186,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "region": {
-"description": "Required. The name of a [region](/compute/docs/regions-zones) for the subnet, such `europe-west1`.",
+"description": "Required. The name of a [region](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/regions-zones) for the subnet, such `europe-west1`.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "requestedAddress": {
@@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@
 "type": "boolean"
 },
 "subnetwork": {
-"description": "Required. A name for the new subnet. For information about the naming requirements, see [subnetwork](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/subnetworks) in the Compute API documentation.",
+"description": "Required. A name for the new subnet. For information about the naming requirements, see [subnetwork](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/subnetworks) in the Compute API documentation.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "subnetworkUsers": {
@@ -1692,15 +1692,15 @@
 "id": "CloudSQLConfig",
 "properties": {
 "service": {
-"description": "Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.",
+"description": "Required. Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "umbrellaNetwork": {
-"description": "The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "umbrellaProject": {
-"description": "The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
+"description": "Required. The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 }
@@ -1745,7 +1745,7 @@
 "id": "Connection",
 "properties": {
 "network": {
-"description": "The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.",
+"description": "Required. The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "peering": {
@@ -3366,7 +3366,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.",
+"description": "Required. User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
@@ -3725,7 +3725,7 @@
 "type": "integer"
 },
 "network": {
-"description": "Network name in the consumer project. This network must have been already peered with a shared VPC network using CreateConnection method. Must be in a form 'projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}'. {project} is a project number, as in '12345' {network} is network name.",
+"description": "Required. Network name in the consumer project. This network must have been already peered with a shared VPC network using CreateConnection method. Must be in a form 'projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}'. {project} is a project number, as in '12345' {network} is network name.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json
index 0804eca118..51f3a0d476 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/servicenetworking.v1beta.json
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20250518",
+"revision": "20250604",
 "rootUrl": "https://servicenetworking.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "AddDnsRecordSetMetadata": {
@@ -853,15 +853,15 @@
 "id": "CloudSQLConfig",
 "properties": {
 "service": {
-"description": "Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.",
+"description": "Required. Peering service used for peering with the Cloud SQL project.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "umbrellaNetwork": {
-"description": "The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
+"description": "Required. The name of the umbrella network in the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "umbrellaProject": {
-"description": "The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
+"description": "Required. The project number of the Cloud SQL umbrella project.",
 "format": "int64",
 "type": "string"
 }
@@ -906,7 +906,7 @@
 "id": "Connection",
 "properties": {
 "network": {
-"description": "The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.",
+"description": "Required. The name of service consumer's VPC network that's connected with service producer network, in the following format: `projects/{project}/global/networks/{network}`. `{project}` is a project number, such as in `12345` that includes the VPC service consumer's VPC network. `{network}` is the name of the service consumer's VPC network.",
 "type": "string"
 },
 "peering": {
@@ -2386,7 +2386,7 @@
 "type": "string"
 },
 "name": {
-"description": "User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.",
+"description": "Required. User assigned name for this resource. Must be unique within the consumer network. The name must be 1-63 characters long, must begin with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and only contain lowercase letters, digits or dashes.",
 "type": "string"
 }
 },
diff --git a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json
index 2ba8fbda1a..7d0b381754 100644
--- a/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json
+++ b/googleapiclient/discovery_cache/documents/versionhistory.v1.json
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 "canonicalName": "Version History",
 "description": "Version History API - Prod",
 "discoveryVersion": "v1",
-"documentationLink": "https://developers.chrome.com/versionhistory",
+"documentationLink": "https://developer.chrome.com/docs/web-platform/versionhistory/guide",
 "fullyEncodeReservedExpansion": true,
 "icons": {
 "x16": "http://www.google.com/images/icons/product/search-16.gif",
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@
 }
 }
 },
-"revision": "20240707",
+"revision": "20250601",
 "rootUrl": "https://versionhistory.googleapis.com/",
 "schemas": {
 "Channel": {